JEE MAIN QUESTION

PAPERS & ANSWER

KEYS (2014-2017)
Introduction
Careers360 brings you a compilation of JEE Main Online Question Papers and Answer Keys from
the year 2014 to 2017. This e-book helps you master questions which appeared in the national
level engi-neering entrance examination in the last 4 years.
 JEE Main 2017 Official Question Paper 1 Physics, April 9
(English+Hindi)

PHYSICS ÷ÊÒÁÃ∑§ ÁflôÊÊŸ

1. A physical quantity P is described by the

1. ∞∑§ ÷ÊÒÁÃ∑§ ⁄UÊÁ‡Ê P ÁŸêŸ ‚¥’¥œ mÊ⁄UÊ ¬Á⁄U÷ÊÁ·Ã ∑§Ë
relation
¡ÊÃË „Ò–
1
P = a 2 b2 c 3 d−4 1
P = a 2 b2 c 3 d−4
If the relative errors in the measurement
of a, b, c and d respectively, are 2%, 1%, ÿÁŒ a, b, c •ÊÒ⁄U d ∑§ ◊ʬŸ ◊¥ ‚ʬˇÊ òÊÈÁ≈U ∑˝§◊‡Ê—
3% and 5%, then the relative error in P 2%, 1%, 3% fl 5% „Ê ÃÊ P ◊¥ ‚ʬˇÊ òÊÈÁ≈U „ÊªË —
will be :
(1) 8%
(2) 12%
(1) 8%
(3) 32%
(2) 12%
(4) 25%
(3) 32%
(4) 25%
2. A car is standing 200 m behind a bus,
which is also at rest. The two start moving
at the same instant but with different 2. ∞∑§ ∑§Ê⁄U ∞∑§ ∆U„⁄UË „ÈÿË ’‚ ‚ 200 m ¬Ë¿U π«∏Ë „Ò–
forward accelerations. The bus has ŒÊŸÊ¥ ∞∑§ „Ë ˇÊáÊ •‹ª-•‹ª •ª˝ÁŒÁ‡Ê∑§ àfl⁄UáÊ ‚
acceleration 2 m/s 2 and the car has
acceleration 4 m/s2. The car will catch ø‹ŸÊ ‡ÊÈM§ ∑§⁄UÃ „Ò¥– ’‚ ∑§Ê àfl⁄UáÊ 2 m/s2 ÃÕÊ
up with the bus after a time of : ∑§Ê⁄U ∑§Ê àfl⁄UáÊ 4 m/s2 „Ò– Á∑§ÃŸ ‚◊ÿ ’ÊŒ ÿ„
∑§Ê⁄U ’‚ Ã∑§ ¬„È°ø ¡ÊÿªË?
(1) 110 s

(2) 120 s
(1) 110 s
(3) 10 2 s

(4) 15 s (2) 120 s

(3) 10 2 s

(4) 15 s

1 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

3. Two particles A and B of equal mass M
are moving with the same speed v as
shown in the figure. They collide
completely inelastically and move as a
single particle C. The angle θ that the path
of C makes with the X-axis is given by :
3. ‚◊ÊŸ Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ M ∑§ ŒÊ ∑§áÊ A ÃÕÊ B ‚◊ÊŸ
øÊ‹ v ‚ ÁøòÊÊŸÈ‚Ê⁄U ø‹ ⁄U„ „Ò¥– fl„ ¬ÍáʸÃÿÊ •¬˝àÿÊSÕ
‚¥ÉÊ^ ∑§⁄UÃ „Ò¥ ÃÕÊ ‚¥ÉÊ^ ∑§ ’ÊŒ ∞∑§ ∑§áÊ C ∑§Ë Ã⁄U„
ø‹Ã „Ò¥– ∑§ÊáÊ θ, ¡Ê ∑§áÊ C ∑§Ê ¬Õ X-•ˇÊ ‚
’ŸÊÃÊ „Ò, ∑§Ê ÁŸêŸ ‚ê’㜠‚ ÁŒÿÊ ¡ÊÿªÊ —

3+ 2 3+ 2
(1) tan θ= (1) tan θ=
1− 2 1− 2

3− 2 3− 2
(2) tan θ= (2) tan θ=
1− 2 1− 2

1− 2 1− 2
(3) tan θ= (3) tan θ=
2 (1+ 3 ) 2 (1+ 3 )

1− 3 1− 3
(4) tan θ= (4) tan θ=
1+ 2 1+ 2

2 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

4. The machine as shown has 2 rods of length
1 m connected by a pivot at the top. The
end of one rod is connected to the floor by
a stationary pivot and the end of the other
rod has a roller that rolls along the floor in
a slot. As the roller goes back and forth,
a 2 kg weight moves up and down. If the
roller is moving towards right at a constant
speed, the weight moves up with a :
4. ÁøòÊ ◊¥ ÁŒπÊÿË ªÿË ∞∑§ ◊‡ÊËŸ ∑§Ë ŒÊ ¿U«∏Ê¥, Á¡Ÿ∑§Ë
‹ê’Ê߸ 1 m „Ò, ∑§ ™§¬⁄UË Á‚⁄UÊ¥ ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ‚ÊÕ œÈ⁄Uʪ˝SÃ
Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò– ∞∑§ ¿U«∏ ∑§Ê •ÊÁπ⁄UË Á‚⁄UÊ ∞∑§ ÁSÕ⁄U
œÈ⁄UË mÊ⁄UÊ »§‡Ê¸ ‚ ¡Ê«∏Ê ªÿÊ „Ò ÃÕÊ ŒÍ‚⁄UË ¿U«∏ ∑§
•ÊÁπ⁄UË Á‚⁄U ¬⁄U ∞∑§ ⁄UÊ‹⁄U ‹ªÊ „Ò ¡Ê Á∑§ »§‡Ê¸ ¬⁄U
’Ÿ πÊ°ø ◊¥ ø‹ÃÊ „Ò– ¡’ fl„ ⁄UÊ‹⁄U •Êª ¬Ë¿U
ø‹ÃÊ „Ò ÃÊ ∞∑§ 2 kg ∑§Ê ÷Ê⁄U ™§¬⁄U ŸËø ø‹ÃÊ „Ò–
ÿÁŒ ⁄UÊ‹⁄U ŒÊÁ„ŸË ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ ∞∑§ ‚◊ÊŸ øÊ‹ ‚ ø‹ÃÊ
„Ò ÃÊ fl„ ÷Ê⁄U ø‹ªÊ, ∞∑§ —

(1) constant speed

(2) decreasing speed
(3) increasing speed (1) ‚◊ÊŸ øÊ‹ ‚
3 (2) ÉÊ≈UÃË „È߸ øÊ‹ ‚
(4) speed which is th of that of the
4 (3) ’…∏ÃË „È߸ øÊ‹ ‚
roller when the weight is 0.4 m
above the ground 3
(4) øÊ‹ ¡Ê Á∑§ ⁄UÊ‹⁄U ∑§Ë øÊ‹ ∑§Ê 4
„Ò ¡’ fl„
÷Ê⁄U »§‡Ê¸ ‚ 0.4 m ∑§Ë ™°§øÊ߸ ¬⁄U „Ò

3 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

5. A conical pendulum of length 1 m makes
an angle θ=458 w.r.t. Z-axis and moves
in a circle in the XY plane. The radius of
the circle is 0.4 m and its center is vertically
below O. The speed of the pendulum, in
its circular path, will be : (Take g=10 ms−2)
5. ∞∑§ ‡ÊÊ¥∑§fl (conical) ŒÊ‹∑§, Á¡‚∑§Ë ‹ê’Ê߸ 1 m
„Ò •ÊÒ⁄U ¡Ê Z-•ˇÊ ‚ θ=458 ∑§ ∑§ÊáÊ ¬⁄U „Ò¥, XY
‚◊Ë ◊¥ ∞∑§ ªÊ‹Ê∑§Ê⁄U ¬Õ ◊¥ ø‹ÃÊ „Ò– ªÊ‹Ê∑§Ê⁄U
¬Õ ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ 0.4 m „Ò •ÊÒ⁄U ©‚∑§Ê ∑§ãŒ˝ Á’ãŒÈ O
∑§ ∆UË∑§ ŸËø „Ò– ©‚ ŒÊ‹∑§ ∑§Ë ªÁà ªÊ‹Ê∑§Ê⁄U ¬Õ
◊¥ „ÊªË — (g=10 ms−2)

(1) 0.4 m/s

(2) 4 m/s (1) 0.4 m/s
(3) 0.2 m/s (2) 4 m/s
(4) 2 m/s (3) 0.2 m/s
(4) 2 m/s

4 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

R 6. Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ M ÃÕÊ ÁòÊíÿÊ R flÊ‹ ∞∑§‚◊ÊŸ Á«US∑§ ◊¥

6. A circular hole of radius is made in a
4 R
thin uniform disc having mass M and ∞∑§ ÁòÊíÿÊ ∑§Ê ªÊ‹Ê∑§Ê⁄U ¿UŒ, ÁøòÊÊŸÈ‚Ê⁄U, Á∑§ÿÊ
4
radius R, as shown in figure. The moment
ªÿÊ „Ò– Á’¥ŒÈ O ‚ ¡ÊŸ flÊ‹ ÃÕÊ Á«US∑§ ∑§ ‚◊Ë
of inertia of the remaining portion of the
disc about an axis passing through the ∑§ ‹ê’flØ •ˇÊ ∑§ ‚ʬˇÊ, Á«US∑§ ∑§ ’ø „È∞ ÷ʪ
point O and perpendicular to the plane of ∑§Ê, ¡«∏àfl •ÊÉÊÍáʸ „ÊªÊ —
the disc is :

219 MR 2
(1)
219 MR 2 256
(1)
256
237 MR 2
(2)
237 MR 2 512
(2)
512
19 MR 2
(3)
19 MR 2 512
(3)
512
197 MR 2
(4)
197 MR 2 256
(4)
256

5 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

7. The mass density of a spherical body is 7. ∞∑§ ªÊ‹Ê∑§Ê⁄U Á¬á«U ∑§Ê Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ÉÊŸàfl „Ò
k
given by ρ (r)= for r ≤ R and k
r ρ (r)= ¡’ r ≤ R ÃÕÊ
ρ (r)=0 for r > R, r
where r is the distance from the centre. ρ (r)=0 ¡’ r > R, ¡„Ê° r ∑§ãŒ˝ ‚ ŒÍ⁄UË „Ò–
The correct graph that describes
qualitatively the acceleration, a, of a test ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ª˝Ê$»§ ∞∑§ ¬⁄UˡÊáÊ ∑§áÊ ∑§ àfl⁄UáÊ
particle as a function of r is :
a ∑§Ê r ∑§ »§‹Ÿ ◊¥ ªÈáÊÊà◊∑§ M§¬ ‚ Œ‡ÊʸÃÊ „Ò?

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

6 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

8. A steel rail of length 5 m and area of cross 8. 5 m ‹ê’Ê߸ ÃÕÊ 40 cm2 •ŸÈ¬˝SÕ ∑§Ê≈U ∑§ ˇÊòÊ»§‹
section 40 cm2 is prevented from expanding
∑§Ë ∞∑§ S≈UË‹ ∑§Ë ¬≈U⁄UË ∑§Ê ‹ê’Ê߸ ∑§ •ŸÈÁŒ‡Ê
along its length while the temperature rises
by 108C. If coefficient of linear expansion ÁflSÃÊ⁄UáÊ ⁄UÊ∑§Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò ¡’Á∑§ ©‚∑§Ê Ãʬ◊ÊŸ 108C
and Young’s modulus of steel are ’…∏ÊÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ÿÁŒ S≈UË‹ ∑§Ê ⁄UπËÿ ¬˝‚Ê⁄U ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§
1.2×10 −5 K −1 and 2×10 11 Nm −2 ÃÕÊ ÿ¥ª ¬˝àÿÊSÕÃÊ ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— 1.2×10−5 K−1
respectively, the force developed in the rail
is approximately :
ÃÕÊ 2×1011 Nm−2 „Ò¥ ÃÊ ¬≈U⁄UË ◊¥ ©à¬ÛÊ ’‹ ∑§Ê
ÁŸ∑§≈UÃ◊ ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
(1) 2×107 N
(2) 1×105 N
(1) 2×107 N
(3) 2×109 N
(2) 1×105 N
(4) 3×10−5 N
(3) 2×109 N
(4) 3×10−5 N
9. Two tubes of radii r1 and r2, and lengths l1
and l2, respectively, are connected in series
and a liquid flows through each of them 9. ŒÊ ŸÁ‹ÿÊ° Á¡Ÿ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊÿ¥ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— r1 ∞fl¥ r2 ÃÕÊ
in stream line conditions. P1 and P2 are ‹ê’Ê߸ÿÊ°, l1 fl l2 „Ò¥, ∑§Ê üÊáÊË ∑˝§◊ ◊¥ ¡Ê«∏Ê ªÿÊ „Ò
pressure differences across the two tubes.
•ÊÒ⁄U ©Ÿ◊¥ ∞∑§ Œ˝fl œÊ⁄UÊ ⁄UπËÿ ¬˝flÊ„ ◊¥ ’„ÃÊ „Ò–
If P2 is 4P1 and l2 is l 1 , then the radius r2 ¬„‹Ë ÃÕÊ ŒÍ‚⁄UË Ÿ‹Ë ∑§ Á‚⁄UÊ¥ ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§ ŒÊ’ÊãÃ⁄U
4
will be equal to :
∑˝§◊‡Ê— P1 ÃÕÊ P2 „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ P2 ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ 4P1 ÃÕÊ l2
(1) r1 ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ l1 „Ê ÃÊ ÁòÊíÿÊ r2 ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
4
(2) 2r 1
(3) 4r 1
(1) r1
r1 (2) 2r 1
(4)
2 (3) 4r 1

r1
(4)
2

7 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

10. For the P-V diagram given for an ideal gas, 10. ∞∑§ •ÊŒ‡Ê¸ ªÒ‚ ∑§Ê P-V •Ê⁄Uπ ÁŒÿ ªÿ ÁøòÊ ◊¥
Œ‡ÊʸÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò–

out of the following which one correctly

represents the T-P diagram ? ÁŒÿ ªÿ •Ê⁄UπÊ¥ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê ‚„Ë T-P •Ê⁄Uπ
Œ‡ÊʸÿªÊ?

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

8 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

11. N moles of a diatomic gas in a cylinder are 11. ∞∑§ Ám¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ∑§ ªÒ‚ ∑§ N ◊Ê‹ T Ãʬ◊ÊŸ ¬⁄U ∞∑§
at a temperature T. Heat is supplied to
Á‚‹á«U⁄U ◊¥ ’¥Œ „Ò¥– Á‚‹á«U⁄U ◊¥ ™§c◊Ê ß‚ ¬˝∑§Ê⁄U
the cylinder such that the temperature
remains constant but n moles of the ¬˝flÊÁ„à ∑§Ë ¡ÊÃË „Ò Á¡‚‚ ©‚ Ám¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ∑§ ªÒ‚ ∑§
diatomic gas get converted into n ◊Ê‹ ∞∑§¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ∑§ ªÒ‚ ◊¥ Á’ŸÊ Ãʬ◊ÊŸ ’Œ‹
monoatomic gas. What is the change in ¬Á⁄UflÁøà „Ê ¡ÊÃ „Ò¥– ªÒ‚ ∑§Ë ∑ȧ‹ ªÁá ™§¡Ê¸ ◊¥
the total kinetic energy of the gas ?
Á∑§ÃŸÊ ¬Á⁄UfløŸ „ÊªÊ?
1
(1) nRT
2
1
(1) nRT
(2) 0 2
3 (2) 0
(3) nRT
2
3
(3) nRT
5 2
(4) nRT
2
5
(4) nRT
2
12. A block of mass 0.1 kg is connected to an
elastic spring of spring constant 640 Nm−1
and oscillates in a damping medium of 12. 0.1 kg Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ∑§ ∞∑§ ªÈ≈U∑§ ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ¬˝àÿÊSÕ ÁS¬˝¥ª,
damping constant 10 −2 kg s −1 . The Á¡‚∑§Ê ÁS¬˝¥ª ÁŸÿÃÊ¥∑§ 640 Nm−1 „Ò, ‚ ¡Ê«∏Ê ªÿÊ
system dissipates its energy gradually. The „Ò– ÿ„ ªÈ≈U∑§Ê ∞∑§ •fl◊㌟ ◊Êäÿ◊, Á¡‚∑§Ê
time taken for its mechanical energy of
vibration to drop to half of its initial value, •fl◊㌟ ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§ 10−2 kg s−1 „Ò, ◊¥ ŒÊ‹Ÿ ªÁÃ
is closest to : ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– ÿ„ ÁŸ∑§Êÿ œË⁄U-œË⁄U •¬ŸË ™§¡Ê¸ •¬√ÿÁÃÃ
(1) 2s ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– ÁŸ∑§Êÿ ∑§ ŒÊ‹Ÿ ∑§Ë ÿÊ¥ÁòÊ∑§ ™§¡Ê¸ ∑§Ê
(2) 3.5 s ©‚∑§ •Ê⁄UÁê÷∑§ ◊ÊŸ ‚ •ÊœÊ „ÊŸ ◊¥ ‹ªŸ flÊ‹
‚◊ÿ ∑§Ê ÁŸ∑§≈UÃ◊ ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
(3) 5s
(1) 2s
(4) 7s
(2) 3.5 s
(3) 5s
(4) 7s

9 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

13. A standing wave is formed by the
superposition of two waves travelling in
opposite directions. The transverse
displacement is given by
13. ŒÊ Ã⁄¥Uª¥, ¡Ê Áfl¬⁄UËà ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ ø‹ ⁄U„Ë „Ò¥, ∑§ •äÿÊ⁄UÊ¬áÊ
‚ ∞∑§ •¬˝ªÊ◊Ë Ã⁄¥Uª ’ŸÃË „Ò Á¡‚∑§Ê •ŸÈ¬˝SÕ
ÁflSÕʬŸ ÁŸêŸ ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ mÊ⁄UÊ Á‹πÊ ¡Ê ‚∑§ÃÊ „Ò

y(x , t) = 0.5 sin 

5π 
x  cos(200 πt).
y(x , t) = 0.5 sin 
 4  5π 
x  cos(200 πt).
What is the speed of the travelling wave  4 
moving in the positive x direction ? +x •ˇÊ ∑§Ë Ã⁄U»§ ø‹Ÿ flÊ‹Ë ¬˝ªÊ◊Ë Ã⁄¥Uª ∑§Ë ªÁÃ
(x and t are in meter and second, „ÊªË —
respectively.)
(ÿ„Ê° x fl t ∑˝§◊‡Ê— ◊Ë≈U⁄U fl ‚∑§á«U ◊¥ „Ò¥– )
(1) 160 m/s
(2) 90 m/s (1) 160 m/s
(3) 180 m/s (2) 90 m/s
(4) 120 m/s (3) 180 m/s
(4) 120 m/s

10 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

14. Four closed surfaces and corresponding 14. øÊ⁄U ’¥Œ ¬Îc∆U ÃÕÊ ©Ÿ∑§ •Êfl‡Ê ÁflãÿÊ‚ ∑§Ê ÁŸêŸ
charge distributions are shown below. ÁøòÊ ◊¥ Œ‡ÊʸÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò–

Let the respective electric fluxes through ÿÁŒ ©Ÿ∑ § ¬Î c ∆U ‚ ’h flÒ l È Ã ç‹Ä‚ ∑˝ § ◊‡Ê—
the surfaces be Φ1, Φ2, Φ3 and Φ4. Then :
Φ1, Φ2, Φ3 ÃÕÊ Φ4 „Ê¥ ÃÊ —
(1) Φ1 < Φ2=Φ3 > Φ4
(1) Φ1 < Φ2=Φ3 > Φ4
(2) Φ1 > Φ2 > Φ3 > Φ4
(2) Φ1 > Φ2 > Φ3 > Φ4
(3) Φ1=Φ2=Φ3=Φ4
(3) Φ1=Φ2=Φ3=Φ4
(4) Φ1 > Φ3 ; Φ2 < Φ4
(4) Φ1 > Φ3 ; Φ2 < Φ4

11 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

15. A combination of parallel plate capacitors 15. ‚◊ÊãÃ⁄U å‹≈U ‚¥œÊÁ⁄UòÊÊ¥ ∑§ ∞∑§ ‚¥ÿÊ¡Ÿ ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ÁŸÁ‡øÃ
is maintained at a certain potential
Áfl÷flÊãÃ⁄U ¬⁄U ⁄UπÊ ªÿÊ „Ò– (ÁøòÊ ŒÁπÿ)
difference.

When a 3 mm thick slab is introduced ¡’ 3 mm ◊Ê≈U ªÈ≈U∑§ ∑§Ê ‚÷Ë ‚¥œÊÁ⁄UòÊÊ¥ ∑§Ë å‹≈UÊ¥
between all the plates, in order to maintain ∑§ ’Ëø «UÊ‹Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò, ÃÊ fl„Ë Áfl÷flÊãÃ⁄U ’ŸÊÿ ⁄UπŸ
the same potential difference, the distance ∑§ Á‹∞ å‹≈UÊ¥ ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ∑§Ê 2.4 mm ‚ ’…∏ÊŸÊ
between the plates is increased by 2.4 mm.
Find the dielectric constant of the slab.
¬«∏ÃÊ „Ò– ªÈ≈U∑§ ∑§Ê ¬⁄UÊflÒlÈÃÊ¥∑§ „ÊªÊ —
(1) 3
(1) 3
(2) 4
(2) 4
(3) 5
(3) 5
(4) 6
(4) 6

16. A uniform wire of length l and radius r

has a resistance of 100 Ω. It is recast into a 16. ‹ê’Ê߸ l ÃÕÊ ÁòÊíÿÊ r ∑§ ∞∑§‚◊ÊŸ ÃÊ⁄U ∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ
r r
wire of radius . The resistance of new 100 Ω „Ò– ß‚∑§Ê ÁòÊíÿÊ ∑§ ÃÊ⁄U ◊¥ ¬ÈŸ— …UÊ‹Ê
2 2
wire will be : ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– Ÿÿ ÃÊ⁄U ∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ „ÊªÊ —
(1) 1600 Ω
(2) 400 Ω (1) 1600 Ω
(3) 200 Ω (2) 400 Ω
(4) 100 Ω (3) 200 Ω
(4) 100 Ω

12 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

17. The figure shows three circuits I, II and III 17. ÁŒÿ ªÿ ÁøòÊ ◊¥ ÃËŸ ¬Á⁄U¬Õ, I, II ∞fl¥ III ∑§Ê ∞∑§
which are connected to a 3V battery. If
3V ’Ò≈U⁄UË ‚ ¡Ê«∏Ê ªÿÊ „Ò– ÿÁŒ ÁflãÿÊ‚ I, II ÃÕÊ III
the powers dissipated by the configurations
I, II and III are P1, P2 and P3 respectively, ∑˝§◊‡Ê— P1, P2 ÃÕÊ P3 ‡ÊÁÄà •¬√ÿÿ ∑§⁄UÃ „Ò¥ ÃÊ —
then :

(1) P1 > P2 > P3

(1) P1 > P2 > P3 (2) P1 > P3 > P2
(2) P1 > P3 > P2 (3) P2 > P1 > P3
(3) P2 > P1 > P3 (4) P3 > P2 > P1
(4) P3 > P2 > P1

18. ∞∑§ ´§áÊÊà◊∑§ ¬⁄UˡÊáÊ •Êfl‡Ê, ∞∑§ ‚Ëœ ‹ê’ ÃÊ⁄U,

18. A negative test charge is moving near a Á¡‚◊¥ œÊ⁄UÊ ’„ ⁄U„Ë „Ò, ∑§ ÁŸ∑§≈U ø‹ ⁄U„Ê „Ò– ¬⁄UˡÊáÊ
long straight wire carrying a current. The
force acting on the test charge is parallel
•Êfl‡Ê ¬⁄U ‹ªŸ flÊ‹Ê ’‹ œÊ⁄UÊ ∑§Ë ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ∑§ ‚◊ÊãÃ⁄U
to the direction of the current. The motion „Ò– •Êfl‡Ê ∑§Ë ªÁà „ÊªË —
of the charge is :
(1) away from the wire (1) ÃÊ⁄U ‚ ŒÍ⁄U
(2) towards the wire (2) ÃÊ⁄U ∑§Ë •Ê⁄U
(3) parallel to the wire along the current
(3) ÃÊ⁄U ‚ ‚◊ÊãÃ⁄U ∞fl¥ œÊ⁄UÊ ∑§Ë ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥
(4) parallel to the wire opposite to the
current (4) ÃÊ⁄U ∑§ ‚◊ÊãÃ⁄U ∞fl¥ œÊ⁄UÊ ∑§Ë Áfl¬⁄UËà ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥

13 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

19. A uniform magnetic field B of 0.3 T is along
the positive Z-direction. A rectangular
loop (abcd) of sides 10 cm×5 cm carries a
current I of 12 A. Out of the following
different orientations which one
corresponds to stable equilibrium ?
19. 0.3 T ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ‚◊ÊŸ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ˇÊòÊ B œŸÊà◊∑§
Z-•ˇÊ ∑§Ë Ã⁄U»§ ÁŒÁ‡Êà „Ò– ∞∑§ 10 cm ÃÕÊ 5 cm
÷È¡Ê•Ê¥ flÊ‹ •ÊÿÃÊ∑§Ê⁄U ¬Ê‡Ê (abcd) ◊¥ 12 A œÊ⁄UÊ
I ’„ÃË „Ò– ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê ÁŒª˜ÁflãÿÊ‚ ÁSÕ⁄U
‚ÊêÿÊflSÕÊ ∑§Ê ¬˝ŒÁ‡Ê¸Ã ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò?

(1) (1)

(2) (2)

(3) (3)

(4) (4)

14 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

20. A sinusoidal voltage of peak value 283 V
and angular frequency 320/s is applied to
a series LCR circuit. Given that R=5 Ω,
L=25 mH and C=1000 µF. The total
impedance, and phase difference between
the voltage across the source and the
current will respectively be :
20. 283 V ◊„ûÊ◊ Áfl÷fl ÃÕÊ 320 s−1 ∑§ÊáÊËÿ •ÊflÎÁûÊ
flÊ‹ ∞∑§ íÿÊfl∑˝§Ëÿ Áfl÷fl ∑§Ê ∞∑§ üÊáÊË LCR ¬Á⁄U¬Õ
◊¥ ‹ªÊÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò– ÁŒÿÊ „Ò R=5 Ω, L=25 mH
•ÊÒ⁄U C=1000 µF– ¬Á⁄U¬Õ ∑§Ë ∑ȧ‹ ¬˝ÁÃ’ÊœÊ ÃÕÊ
dÊà Áfl÷fl ∞fl¥ œÊ⁄UÊ ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§‹Ê¥Ã⁄U ∑˝§◊‡Ê— „ÊªÊ —

−1  5 
(1) 10 Ω and tan  
 3
tan−1  
5
(2) 7 Ω and 458
(1) 10 Ω •ÊÒ⁄U
 3

(2) 7Ω •ÊÒ⁄U 458

10 Ω and tan−1  
8
(3)
 3
tan−1  
8
(3) 10 Ω •ÊÒ⁄U
 5  3
(4) 7 Ω and tan−1  
 3
 5
(4) 7 Ω •ÊÒ⁄U tan−1  
 3
21. The electric field component of a
monochromatic radiation is given by
→ ∧
21. Á∑§‚Ë ∞∑§fláÊ˸ÿ ÁflÁ∑§⁄UáÊ ∑§ flÒlÈà ˇÊòÊ ÉÊ≈U∑§ ∑§Ê
E = 2 E0 i cos kz cos ωt ÁŸêŸ ¬˝∑§Ê⁄U ‚ √ÿÄà Á∑§ÿÊ ¡Ê ‚∑§ÃÊ „Ò
→ → ∧
Its magnetic field B is then given by : E = 2 E0 i cos kz cos ωt

2 E0 ∧ →
(1) j sin kz cos ωt ©‚∑§ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ˇÊòÊ B ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
c
2 E0 ∧
2 E0 ∧ (1) j sin kz cos ωt
(2) − j sin kz sin ωt c
c
2 E0 ∧
2 E0 ∧ (2) − j sin kz sin ωt
(3) j sin kz sin ωt c
c
2 E0 ∧
2 E0 ∧ (3) j sin kz sin ωt
(4) j cos kz cos ωt c
c
2 E0 ∧
(4) j cos kz cos ωt
c

15 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

22. In an experiment a convex lens of focal 22. ∞∑§ ¬˝ÿÊª ∑§ ŒÊÒ⁄UÊŸ, 15 cm »§Ê∑§‚ ŒÍ⁄UË ∑§ ∞∑§
length 15 cm is placed coaxially on an
©ûÊ‹ ‹¥‚ ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ’¥ø ¬⁄U ∞∑§ ©ûÊ‹ Œ¬¸áÊ
optical bench in front of a convex mirror
at a distance of 5 cm from it. It is found ∑§ ‚Ê◊Ÿ 5 cm ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U ‚◊ÊˇÊËÿ ÁSÕÁà ◊¥ ⁄UπÊ ªÿÊ
that an object and its image coincide, if „Ò– ÿÁŒ flSÃÈ ∑§Ê ‹¥‚ ‚ 20 cm ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U ⁄UπÊ
the object is placed at a distance of 20 cm ¡Êÿ ÃÊ flSÃÈ ÃÕÊ ©‚∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃÁ’ê’ ‚¥¬ÊÃË „Ê ¡ÊÃ „Ò¥–
from the lens. The focal length of the
convex mirror is :
©ûÊ‹ Œ¬¸áÊ ∑§Ë »§Ê∑§‚ ŒÍ⁄UË „ÊªË —
(1) 27.5 cm
(2) 20.0 cm (1) 27.5 cm
(3) 25.0 cm (2) 20.0 cm
(4) 30.5 cm (3) 25.0 cm
(4) 30.5 cm
23. A single slit of width 0.1 mm is illuminated
by a parallel beam of light of wavelength
6000 Å and diffraction bands are observed 23. 0.1 mm øÊÒ«∏Ê߸ ∑§Ë ∞∑§ Á¤Ê⁄UË 6000 Å Ã⁄¥UªŒÒÉÿ¸ ∑§
on a screen 0.5 m from the slit. The ‚◊ÊãÃ⁄U Á∑§⁄UáÊ ¬È¥¡ ‚ ¬˝∑§ÊÁ‡Êà ∑§Ë ¡ÊÃË „Ò •ÊÒ⁄U
distance of the third dark band from the ÁflfløŸ ’Òá«U ∑§Ê Á¤Ê⁄UË ‚ 0.5 m ŒÍ⁄U ÁSÕà ¬Œ¸ ¬⁄U
central bright band is :
ŒπÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ÃÎÃËÿ •ŒËåà ’Òá«U ∑§Ë ∑§ãŒ˝Ëÿ ŒËåÃ
(1) 3 mm
’Òá«U ‚ ŒÍ⁄UË „ÊªË —
(2) 9 mm
(3) 4.5 mm (1) 3 mm
(4) 1.5 mm (2) 9 mm
(3) 4.5 mm
24. A Laser light of wavelength 660 nm is used (4) 1.5 mm
to weld Retina detachment. If a Laser
pulse of width 60 ms and power 0.5 kW is
used the approximate number of photons 24. 660 nm Ã⁄¥UªŒÒÉÿ¸ ∑§Ë ∞∑§ ‹$¡⁄U ‹Êß≈U ∑§Ê ⁄UÁ≈UŸÊ
in the pulse are :
ÁflÿÊ¡Ÿ ∑§Ê ¡Ê«∏Ÿ ∑§ Á‹∞ ¬˝ÿÊª Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò–
[Take Planck’s constant h=6.62×10−34 Js]
ÿÁŒ 60 ms øÊÒ«∏Ê߸ ∞fl¥ 0.5 kW ‡ÊÁÄà ∑§ ‹$¡⁄U
(1) 10 20
S¬ãŒ (pulse) ∑§Ê ¬˝ÿÊª Á∑§ÿÊ ¡Êÿ ÃÊ ©‚ S¬ãŒ ◊¥
(2) 10 18
»§Ê≈UÊÚŸÊ¥ ∑§Ë ‚¥ÅÿÊ ‹ª÷ª „ÊªË —
(3) 10 22 [å‹Ê¥∑§ ÁŸÿÃÊ¥∑§ h=6.62×10−34 Js]
(4) 10 19 (1) 10 20
(2) 10 18
(3) 10 22
(4) 10 19

16 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

25. The acceleration of an electron in the first 25. „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ ∑§Ë ¬˝Õ◊ ∑§ˇÊÊ (n=1) ∑§ ß‹Ä≈˛UÊÚŸ
orbit of the hydrogen atom (n=1) is :
∑§Ê àfl⁄UáÊ „ÊªÊ —
h2
(1) h2
2
π m r 2 3 (1)
π2 m 2 r 3

h2
(2) h2
8π m r2 2 3 (2)
8π 2 m 2 r 3

h2
(3) h2
4π m r2 2 3 (3)
4π 2 m 2 r 3

h2
(4) h2
4πm r 2 3 (4)
4πm 2 r 3

26. Imagine that a reactor converts all given

mass into energy and that it operates at a 26. ∑§À¬ŸÊ ∑§ËÁ¡∞, ∞∑§ ÷≈˜U∆UË, ¡ÊÁ∑§ ÁŒÿ ªÿ ‚¥¬Íáʸ
power level of 109 watt. The mass of the Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ∑§Ê ™§¡Ê¸ ◊¥ ’Œ‹ÃË „Ò ∞fl¥ 109 watt ∑§Ë
fuel consumed per hour in the reactor will ‡ÊÁÄà SÃ⁄U ¬⁄U ø‹ÃË „Ò– ÷≈˜∆UË ◊¥ ∞∑§ ÉÊá≈U ◊¥ π¬Ã
be : (velocity of light, c is 3×108 m/s)
„ÊŸ flÊ‹ ßZœŸ ∑§Ê Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
(1) 0.96 gm (¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ∑§Ê flª, c=3×108 m/s)
(2) 0.8 gm
(1) 0.96 gm
(3) 4×10−2 gm
(2) 0.8 gm
(4) 6.6×10−5 gm
(3) 4×10−2 gm
(4) 6.6×10−5 gm
27. The current gain of a common emitter
amplifier is 69. If the emitter current is
7.0 mA, collector current is : 27. ∞∑§ ©÷ÿÁŸc∆U ©à‚¡¸∑§ ¬˝flœ¸∑§ ∑§Ê œÊ⁄UÊ ‹Ê÷ 69
(1) 9.6 mA „Ò– ÿÁŒ ©à‚¡¸∑§ œÊ⁄UÊ ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ 7.0 mA „Ê ÃÊ
(2) 6.9 mA ‚¥ª˝Ê„∑§ œÊ⁄UÊ ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
(3) 0.69 mA (1) 9.6 mA
(4) 69 mA (2) 6.9 mA
(3) 0.69 mA
(4) 69 mA

17 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

28. A signal is to be transmitted through a 28. Ã⁄¥UªŒÒÉÿ¸ λ ∑§Ë Ã⁄¥Uª mÊ⁄UÊ ∞∑§ ‚¥Œ‡Ê ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ∞∑§⁄UπËÿ
wave of wavelength λ, using a linear
∞ã≈UŸÊ ‚ ¬˝‚ÊÁ⁄Uà ∑§⁄UŸÊ „Ò– ∞ã≈UŸÊ ∑§Ë ‹ê’Ê߸ l ÃÕÊ
antenna. The length l of the antenna and
effective power radiated Peff will be given ¬˝ ÷ ÊflË ©à‚Á¡¸ à ‡ÊÁÄà P eff ∑§Ê ∑˝ § ◊‡Ê— ◊ÊŸ
respectively as : „ÊªÊ —
(K is a constant of proportionality) ( K ‚◊ÊŸÈ ¬ ÊÁÃ∑§ ÁSÕ⁄U Ê ¥ ∑ § (constant of
2 proportionality) „Ò)
λ , Peff = K  
l
(1)
λ 2
λ , Peff = K  
l
(1)
λ
, Peff = K  
λ l
(2)
8 λ
, Peff = K  
λ l
(2)
3 8 λ
, Peff = K  
λ l
(3)
16 λ 3
, Peff = K  
λ l
(3)
1 16 λ
, Peff = K  
(4)
λ l 2
5 λ 1
, Peff = K  
(4)
λ l 2
5 λ

18 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

29. In a meter bridge experiment resistances
are connected as shown in the figure.
Initially resistance P=4 Ω and the neutral
point N is at 60 cm from A. Now an
unknown resistance R is connected in series
to P and the new position of the neutral
point is at 80 cm from A. The value of
unknown resistance R is :
29. Á∑§‚Ë ◊Ë≈U⁄U ‚ÃÈ ¬˝ÿÊª ∑§ ŒÊÒ⁄UÊŸ, ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœÊ¥ ∑§Ê ÁøòÊÊŸÈ‚Ê⁄U
¡Ê«∏Ê ªÿÊ „Ò– ‡ÊÈM§ ◊¥ ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ P=4 Ω ÃÕÊ Ÿ‹
Á’ãŒÈ N, Á’ãŒÈ A ‚, 60 cm ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U „Ò– ∞∑§
•ôÊÊà ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ R ∑§Ê P ∑§ ‚ÊÕ üÊáÊË ∑˝§◊ ◊¥ ¡Ê«∏Ê
¡ÊÃÊ „Ò Á¡‚‚ Ÿ‹ Á’ãŒÈ ∑§Ë Ÿß¸ ÁSÕÁà Á’¥ŒÈ A ‚
80 cm ŒÍ⁄U „Ê ¡ÊÃË „Ò– •ôÊÊà ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ R ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ
„ÊªÊ —

33
(1) Ω 33
5 (1) Ω
5
(2) 6Ω
(2) 6Ω
(3) 7Ω
(3) 7Ω
20
(4) Ω 20
3 (4) Ω
3

19 IX - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

30. In an experiment to determine the period 30. ∞∑§ ¬˝ÿÊª ◊¥, 1 m ‹ê’Ê߸ ∑§Ë ∞∑§ ‚⁄U‹ ŒÊ‹∑§ ∑§Ê
of a simple pendulum of length 1 m, it is
•Êflø ∑§Ê‹ ÁŸ∑§Ê‹Ÿ „ÃÈ ©‚∑§Ê r1 ÃÕÊ r2 ÁòÊíÿÊ•Ê¥
attached to different spherical bobs of radii
r1 and r2. The two spherical bobs have ∑§ •‹ª-•‹ª ªÊ‹Ê∑§Ê⁄U ‹Ê‹∑§ ‚ ¡Ê«∏Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò–
uniform mass distribution. If the relative ŒÊŸÊ¥ ªÊ‹Ê∑§Ê⁄U ‹Ê‹∑§Ê¥ ∑§ Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ÁflÃ⁄UáÊ ∞∑§ ‚◊ÊŸ
difference in the periods, is found to be „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ •Êflø∑§Ê‹Ê¥ ∑§Ê ‚ʬˇÊ •¥Ã⁄U 5×10−4 s
5×10−4 s, the difference in radii, ?r1−r2?
is best given by :
¬ÊÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ê ÃÊ ©Ÿ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ•Ê ¥ ◊ ¥ •ãÃ⁄U ,
?r1−r2? ∑§Ê ÁŸ∑§≈UÃ◊ ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
(1) 1 cm
(2) 0.1 cm
(3) 0.5 cm
(1) 1 cm
(4) 0.01 cm
(2) 0.1 cm
(3) 0.5 cm
-o0o-
(4) 0.01 cm

-o0o-

20 IX - PHYSICS
 JEE Main 2017 Official Question Paper 1 - Chemistry, April 9
(English+Hindi)

CHEMISTRY ⁄U‚ÊÿŸ ‡ÊÊSòÊ

1. An ideal gas undergoes isothermal

expansion at constant pressure. During 1. ∞∑§ •ÊŒ‡Ê¸ ªÒ‚ ÁSÕ⁄U ŒÊ’ ¬⁄U ‚◊ÃʬËÿ ¬˝‚Ê⁄UáÊ
the process : ∑§⁄UÃË „Ò– ß‚ ¬˝∑˝§◊ ◊¥ —
(1) enthalpy increases but entropy
decreases. (1) ∞ãÕÒÀ¬Ë ’…∏ÃË „Ò ¬⁄UãÃÈ ∞ã≈˛UÊÚ¬Ë ÉÊ≈UÃË „Ò–
(2) enthalpy remains constant but
entropy increases.
(2) ∞ãÕÒÀ¬Ë ÁSÕ⁄U ⁄U„ÃË „Ò ¬⁄UãÃÈ ∞ã≈˛UÊÚ¬Ë ’…∏ÃË „Ò–
(3) enthalpy decreases but entropy
increases.
(4) Both enthalpy and entropy remain (3) ∞ãÕÒÀ¬Ë ÉÊ≈UÃË „Ò ¬⁄UãÃÈ ∞ã≈˛UÊÚ¬Ë ’…∏ÃUË „Ò–
constant.
(4) ∞ãÕÒÀ¬Ë ÃÕÊ ∞ã≈˛UÊÚ¬Ë ŒÊŸÊ¥ „Ë ÁSÕ⁄U ⁄U„ÃË „Ò¥–
2. 50 mL of 0.2 M ammonia solution is
treated with 25 mL of 0.2 M HCl. If pKb
of ammonia solution is 4.75, the pH of the
mixture will be : 2. 0.2 M •◊ÊÁŸÿÊ Áfl‹ÿŸ ∑§ 50 mL ∑§Ê 0.2 M
(1) 3.75 HCl ∑§ 25 mL ∑§ ‚ÊÕ •Á÷∑Χà Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò–
(2) 4.75 ÿÁŒ •◊ÊÁŸÿÊ Áfl‹ÿŸ ∑§ pKb ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ 4.75 „Ê ÃÊ
(3) 8.25 Á◊üÊáÊ ∑§Ê pH „ÊªÊ —
(4) 9.25 (1) 3.75
(2) 4.75
3. The electron in the hydrogen atom (3) 8.25
undergoes transition from higher orbitals (4) 9.25
to orbital of radius 211.6 pm. This
transition is associated with :
(1) Lyman series 3. „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ ◊¥ ß‹Ä≈˛UÊÚŸ ©ìÊÃ⁄U •ÊÚÁ’¸≈U‹ ‚
(2) Balmer series 211.6 pm ÁòÊíÿÊ flÊ‹ •ÊÚÁ’¸≈U‹ Ã∑§ ‚¥∑˝§◊áÊ ∑§⁄UÃÊ

(3) Paschen series

„Ò– ß‚ ‚¥∑˝§◊áÊ ∑§Ê ‚ê’㜠Á¡‚‚ „Ò fl„ „Ò —
(4) Brackett series
(1) ‹Êß◊ÒŸ üÊáÊË
(2) ’Ê◊⁄U üÊáÊË
(3) ¬Ê‡ÊŸ üÊáÊË
(4) ’˝∑§≈U üÊáÊË

1 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

4. At 300 K, the density of a certain gaseous 4. 300 K ¬⁄U; 2 ’Ê⁄U ¬⁄U ⁄Uπ Á∑§‚Ë ªÒ‚Ëÿ •áÊÈ ∑§Ê
molecule at 2 bar is double to that of
ÉÊãÊàfl, 4 ’Ê⁄U ¬⁄U ⁄Uπ «UÊߟÊß≈˛UÊ¡Ÿ (N2) ∑§ ÉÊŸàfl
dinitrogen (N2) at 4 bar. The molar mass
of gaseous molecule is : ∑§Ê ŒÍŸÊ „Ò– ªÒ‚Ëÿ •áÊÈ ∑§Ê ◊Ê‹⁄U Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ „Ò —
(1) 28 g mol−1
(1) 28 g mol−1
(2) 56 g mol−1
(2) 56 g mol−1
(3) 112 g mol−1
(3) 112 g mol−1
(4) 224 g mol−1
(4) 224 g mol−1

5. What quantity (in mL) of a 45% acid

solution of a mono-protic strong acid must 5. ∞∑§ ◊ÊŸÊ¬˝ÊÁ≈U∑§ ¬˝’‹ •ê‹ ∑§ 45% ∞Á‚«U Áfl‹ÿŸ
be mixed with a 20% solution of the same ∑§Ë Á∑§ÃŸË ◊ÊòÊÊ (mL ◊¥) ©‚Ë •ê‹ ∑§ 20%
acid to produce 800 mL of a 29.875% acid
solution ?
Áfl‹ÿŸ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ Á◊‹ÊÿË ¡ÊŸË øÊÁ„∞ Á∑§ 29.875%
∞Á‚«U Áfl‹ÿŸ ∑§Ê 800 mL ’Ÿ ¡Êÿ ?
(1) 320
(2) 325
(1) 320
(3) 316
(2) 325
(4) 330
(3) 316
(4) 330
6. To find the standard potential of M3+/M
electrode, the following cell is constituted :
Pt/M/M 3+ (0.001 mol L −1 )/Ag + (0.01 6. M3+/M ß‹ÒÄ≈˛UÊ«U ∑§ ◊ÊŸ∑§ Áfl÷fl ∑§Ê ÁŸ∑§Ê‹Ÿ
mol L−1)/Ag
∑§ Á‹∞ ÁŸêŸ ‚‹ ’ŸÊÿÊ ªÿÊ —
The emf of the cell is found to be 0.421 Pt/M/M 3+ (0.001 mol L −1 )/Ag + (0.01
volt at 298 K. The standard potential of mol L−1)/Ag
half reaction M3++3e−→ M at 298 K will
be : ‚‹ ∑§Ê ߸.∞◊.∞»§. 298 K ¬⁄,U 0.421 V ¬ÊÿÊ ªÿÊ–
298 K ¬⁄U, M3++3e−→ M, •h¸ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ
∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ∑§ Áfl÷fl „ÊªÊ —
(1) 0.38 Volt
)
(2) 0.32 Volt
(3) 1.28 Volt (1) 0.38 V

(4) 0.66 Volt (2) 0.32 V

(3) 1.28 V
(4) 0.66 V

2 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

7. A gas undergoes change from state A to 7. ∞∑§ ªÒ‚ •flSÕÊ A ‚ •flSÕÊ B ∑§Ê ¡ÊÃË „Ò– ß‚
state B. In this process, the heat absorbed
¬˝∑˝§◊ ◊¥, ªÒ‚ mÊ⁄UÊ ‡ÊÊÁ·Ã ™§c◊Ê ÃÕÊ Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ ∑§Êÿ¸
and work done by the gas is 5 J and 8 J,
respectively. Now gas is brought back to ∑˝§◊‡Ê— 5 J ÃÕÊ 8 J „Ò¥– •’ ªÒ‚ ∑§Ê ŒÍ‚⁄U ¬˝∑˝§◊
A by another process during which 3 J of mÊ⁄UÊ ¬ÈŸ— A •flSÕÊ ◊¥ ‹ÊÃ „Ò¥ ß‚◊¥ 3 J ™§c◊Ê
heat is evolved. In this reverse process of ÁŸ∑§‹ÃË „Ò– B ‚ A ∑§ ß‚ ©À≈U ¬˝∑˝§◊ ◊¥ —
B to A :
(1) 10 J of the work will be done by the
gas.
(2) 6 J of the work will be done by the (1) ªÒ‚ mÊ⁄UÊ 10 J ∑§Êÿ¸ Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÿªÊ–
gas.
(3) 10 J of the work will be done by the (2) ªÒ‚ mÊ⁄UÊ 6 J ∑§Êÿ¸ Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÿªÊ–
surrounding on gas.
(4) 6 J of the work will be done by the (3) ªÒ‚ ¬⁄U ¬Á⁄Ufl‡Ê mÊ⁄UÊ Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ ∑§Êÿ¸ 10 J
surrounding on gas.
„ÊªÊ–
(4) ªÒ‚ ¬⁄U ¬Á⁄Ufl‡Ê mÊ⁄UÊ Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ ∑§Êÿ¸ 6 J „ÊªÊ–
8. Adsorption of a gas on a surface follows
Freundlich adsorption isotherm. Plot of
x
log versus log p gives a straight line
m 8. Á∑§‚Ë ¬Îc∆U ¬⁄U ∞∑§ ªÒ‚ ∑§Ê •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ, »˝§ÊÚÿã«UÁ‹∑§
with slope equal to 0.5, then : •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ ‚◊Ãʬ ∑§Ê •ŸÈ∑§⁄UáÊ ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– log p
x x
( is the mass of the gas adsorbed per ∑§ ÁflL§h log ∑§Ê å‹Ê≈U ∞∑§ ‚⁄U‹ ⁄UπÊ ŒÃÊ „Ò–
m m
gram of adsorbent)
Á¡‚∑§Ê S‹Ê¬ 0.5 ∑§ ’⁄UÊ’⁄U ¬ÊÿÊ ªÿÊ, Ã’ —
(1) Adsorption is independent of x
pressure.
( m , ¬˝Áà ª˝Ê◊ •Áœ‡ÊÊ·∑§ mÊ⁄UÊ •Áœ‡ÊÊÁ·Ã ªÒ‚ ∑§Ê
(2) Adsorption is proportional to the Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ „Ò)
pressure.
(1) •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ, ŒÊ’ ¬⁄U •ÊÁüÊà Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò–
(3) Adsorption is proportional to the
square root of pressure.
(2) •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ, ŒÊ’ ∑§ ‚◊ʟȬÊÃË „Ò–
(4) Adsorption is proportional to the
square of pressure.
(3) •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ, ŒÊ’ ∑§ flª¸◊Í‹ ∑§ ‚◊ʟȬÊÃË „Ò–

(4) •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ, ŒÊ’ ∑§ flª¸ ∑§ ‚◊ʟȬÊÃË „Ò–

3 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

9. The rate of a reaction quadruples when 9. Ãʬ 300 ‚ 310 K ¬Á⁄UflÁøà „ÊŸ ◊¥ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ë
the temperature changes from 300 to
Œ⁄U øÊ⁄U ªÈŸÊ „Ê ¡ÊÃË „Ò– ß‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ë ‚Á∑˝§ÿáÊ
310 K. The activation energy of this
reaction is : ™§¡Ê¸ „Ò :
(Assume activation energy and pre- (ÿ„ ◊ÊŸ ∑§⁄U øÁ‹ÿ Á∑§ ‚Á∑˝§ÿáÊ ™§¡Ê¸ ÃÕÊ
exponential factor are independent of ¬˝Ë∞Ä‚¬ÊŸÁã‡Êÿ‹ »Ò§Ä≈U⁄U Ãʬ ¬⁄U ÁŸ÷¸⁄U Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò;
temperature; ln 2=0.693; R=8.314 J
ln 2=0.693; R=8.314 J mol−1 K−1)
mol−1 K−1)
(1) 107.2 kJ mol−1
(2) 53.6 kJ mol−1
(1) 107.2 kJ mol−1
(3) 26.8 kJ mol−1
(2) 53.6 kJ mol−1
(4) 214.4 kJ mol−1
(3) 26.8 kJ mol−1
(4) 214.4 kJ mol−1
10. A solution is prepared by mixing 8.5 g of
CH2Cl2 and 11.95 g of CHCl3. If vapour
pressure of CH2Cl2 and CHCl3 at 298 K 10. 8.5 g CH2Cl2 ÃÕÊ 11.95 g CHCl3 ∑§Ê Á◊‹Ê∑§⁄U
are 415 and 200 mmHg respectively, the ∞∑§ Áfl‹ÿŸ ÃÒÿÊ⁄U Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ÿÁŒ 298 K ¬⁄U
mole fraction of CHCl3 in vapour form is :
(Molar mass of Cl=35.5 g mol−1) CH2Cl2 ÃÕÊ CHCl3 ∑§ flÊc¬ ŒÊ’ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— 415
ÃÕÊ 200 mmHg „Ê ÃÊ flÊc¬ M§¬ ◊¥ ©¬ÁSÕÃ
(1) 0.162 CHCl3 ∑§Ê ◊Ê‹ •¥‡Ê „Ò —

(2) 0.675 (Cl ∑§Ê ◊Ê‹⁄U Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ=35.5 g mol−1)

(3) 0.325
(1) 0.162
(4) 0.486
(2) 0.675
(3) 0.325
11. The electronic configuration with the
highest ionization enthalpy is : (4) 0.486
(1) [Ne] 3s2 3p1
(2) [Ne] 3s2 3p2 11. ©ëøÃ◊ •ÊÿŸŸ ∞ãÕÒÀ¬Ë flÊ‹Ê ß‹Ä≈˛UÊÁŸ∑§ ÁflãÿÊ‚
(3) [Ne] 3s2 3p3 „Ò —
(4) [Ar] 3d10 4s2 4p3 (1) [Ne] 3s2 3p1
(2) [Ne] 3s2 3p2
(3) [Ne] 3s2 3p3
(4) [Ar] 3d10 4s2 4p3

4 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

12. The following reaction occurs in the Blast 12. flÊàÿÊ÷^Ë (é‹ÊS≈U »§⁄UŸ‡Ê) ◊¥ ÁŸêŸ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ „ÊÃË
Furnace where iron ore is reduced to iron
„Ò Á¡‚◊¥ •Êÿ⁄UŸ •ÿS∑§ •¬øÁÿà „Ê∑§⁄U •Êÿ⁄UŸ
metal :
œÊÃÈ ’ŸÃÊ „Ò;
Fe2O3(s)+3 CO(g) ⇌ 2 Fe(l)+3 CO2(g)
Fe2O3(s)+3 CO(g) ⇌ 2 Fe(l)+3 CO2(g)
Using the Le Chatelier’s principle, predict
which one of the following will not disturb ‹-‡ÊÊÃÒÁ‹∞ Á‚hÊãà ∑§Ê ¬˝ÿÊª ∑§⁄U∑§ ¬˝ÊªÈÁÄà ∑§ËÁ¡∞
the equilibrium ? Á∑§ ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ∞∑§ ‚Êêÿ ∑§Ê ¬˝÷ÊÁflà Ÿ„Ë¥
(1) Removal of CO ∑§⁄UªÊ?
(2) Removal of CO2 (1) CO ∑§Ê ÁŸ∑§Ê‹ ∑§⁄U „≈UÊ ŒŸÊ
(3) Addition of CO2
(2) CO2 ∑§Ê ÁŸ∑§Ê‹ ∑§⁄U „≈UÊ ŒŸÊ
(4) Addition of Fe2O3
(3) CO2 ∑§Ê Á◊‹Ê ŒŸÊ
13. Which one of the following is an oxide ? (4) Fe2O3 ∑§Ê Á◊‹Ê ŒŸÊ
(1) KO2
(2) BaO 2 13. ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ∞∑§, •ÊÚÄ‚Êß«U „Ò?
(3) SiO2 (1) KO2
(4) CsO2 (2) BaO 2
(3) SiO2
14. Which of the following is a set of green (4) CsO2
house gases ?
(1) CH4, O3, N2, SO2
14. ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ‚Ê ª˝ËŸ „Ê©‚ ªÒ‚Ê¥ ∑§Ê ‚◊ÈìÊÿ „Ò?
(2) O3, N2, CO2, NO2
(3) O3, NO2, SO2, Cl2
(1) CH4, O3, N2, SO2
(4) CO2, CH4, N2O, O3
(2) O3, N2, CO2, NO2
(3) O3, NO2, SO2, Cl2
(4) CO2, CH4, N2O, O3

5 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

15. The group having triangular planar 15. fl„ ª˝È¬ Á¡‚◊¥ ÁòÊ∑§ÊáÊ ‚◊ËËÿ ‚¥⁄UøŸÊflÊ‹ „Ò¥, „Ò —
structures is :
2−
(1) BF3, NF3, CO 3 2−
(1) BF3, NF3, CO 3
(2) CO 23− , NO−
3 , SO3 (2) CO 23− , NO−
3 , SO3
(3) NH3, SO3, CO 23−
(3) NH3, SO3, CO 23−
(4) NCl3, BCl3, SO3
(4) NCl3, BCl3, SO3

16. XeF 6 on partial hydrolysis with water

produces a compound ‘X’. The same 16. XeF6, ¡‹ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ •Ê¥Á‡Ê∑§ ¡‹-•¬ÉÊ≈UŸ ∑§⁄UŸ
compound ‘X’ is formed when XeF6 reacts ¬⁄U, ∞∑§ ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ‘X’ ŒÃÊ „Ò– ÿ„Ë ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ‘X’ Ã’
with silica. The compound ‘X’ is : ’ŸÃÊ „Ò ¡’ XeF6 Á‚Á‹∑§Ê ∑§ ‚ÊÕ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§⁄UÃÊ
(1) XeF2 „Ò– ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ‘X’ „Ò —
(2) XeF4 (1) XeF2
(3) XeOF4 (2) XeF4
(4) XeO3 (3) XeOF4
(4) XeO3
17. The number of P−OH bonds and the
oxidation state of phosphorus atom in
pyrophosphoric acid (H 4 P 2 O 7 ) 17. ¬Êÿ⁄UÊ»§ÊS»§ÊÁ⁄U∑§ ∞Á‚«U (H4P2O7) ◊¥ P−OH
respectively are : •Ê’ãœÊ¥ ∑§Ë ‚¥ÅÿÊ ÃÕÊ »§ÊS»§Ê⁄U‚ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ ∑§Ë
(1) four and four •ÊÚÄ‚Ë∑§⁄UáÊ •flSÕÊ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— „Ò¥ —
(2) five and four
(3) five and five (1) øÊ⁄U ÃÕÊ øÊ⁄U
(4) four and five (2) ¬Ê°ø ÃÕÊ øÊ⁄U
(3) ¬Ê°ø ÃÕÊ ¬Ê°ø
(4) øÊ⁄U ÃÕÊ ¬Ê°ø

6 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

18. Which of the following ions does not 18. ÁŸêŸ •ÊÿŸÊ¥ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ÃŸÈ •ê‹Ê¥ ‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ
liberate hydrogen gas on reaction with ∑§⁄UŸ ¬⁄U „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ ªÒ‚ Ÿ„Ë¥ ÁŸ∑§Ê‹ÃÊ ?
dilute acids ?
(1) Ti2+
(1) Ti2+
(2) V2+
(2) V2+
(3) Cr2+
(3) Cr2+
(4) Mn2+
(4) Mn2+

19. The correct sequence of decreasing number

of π-bonds in the structures of H 2SO 3, 19. H2SO3, H2SO4 ÃÕÊ H2S2O7 ∑§Ë ‚¥⁄UøŸÊ ◊¥
H2SO4 and H2S2O7 is : π- •Ê’ãœÊ¥ ∑§Ë ÉÊ≈UÃË ‚¥ÅÿÊ ∑§Ê ‚„Ë ∑˝§◊ „Ò —
(1) H2SO3 > H2SO4 > H2S2O7
(2) H2SO4 > H2S2O7 > H2SO3 (1) H2SO3 > H2SO4 > H2S2O7
(3) H2S2O7 > H2SO4> H2SO3 (2) H2SO4 > H2S2O7 > H2SO3
(4) H2S2O7 > H2SO3 > H2SO4 (3) H2S2O7 > H2SO4> H2SO3
(4) H2S2O7 > H2SO3 > H2SO4
20. [Co2(CO)8] displays :
(1) one Co−Co bond, six terminal CO 20. [Co2(CO)8] •Á÷√ÿÄà ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò —
and two bridging CO
(2) one Co−Co bond, four terminal CO (1) ∞∑§ Co−Co •Ê’ãœ, ¿U— ≈U⁄UÁ◊Ÿ‹ CO
and four bridging CO ÃÕÊ ŒÊ ‚ÃÈ’¥œŸ CO
(3) no Co−Co bond, six terminal CO (2) ∞∑§ Co−Co •Ê’ãœ, øÊ⁄U ≈U⁄UÁ◊Ÿ‹ CO
and two bridging CO
ÃÕÊ øÊ⁄U ‚ÃÈ’¥œŸ CO
(4) no Co−Co bond, four terminal CO
and four bridging CO (3) Co−Co •Ê’㜠Ÿ„Ë¥, ¿U— ≈U⁄UÁ◊Ÿ‹ CO
ÃÕÊ ŒÊ ‚ÃÈ’¥œŸ CO
(4) Co−Co •Ê’㜠Ÿ„Ë¥, øÊ⁄U ≈U⁄UÁ◊Ÿ‹ CO
ÃÕÊ øÊ⁄U ‚ÃÈ’¥œŸ CO

7 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

21. A compound of molecular formula
C8H8O2 reacts with acetophenone to form
a single cross-aldol product in the presence
of base. The same compound on reaction
with conc. NaOH forms benzyl alcohol as
one of the products. The structure of the
compound is :
21. ∞∑§ ÿÊÒÁª∑§ Á¡‚∑§Ê •áÊÈ‚òÍ Ê C8H8O2 „Ò, ∞Á‚≈UÊ»§ŸÊŸ
‚ ∞∑§ ˇÊÊ⁄U∑§ ∑§Ë ©¬ÁSÕÁà ◊¥ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§⁄U∑§ ∞∑§
„Ë ∑˝§Ê‚-∞À«UÊ‹ ©à¬ÊŒ ’ŸÊÃÊ „Ò– fl„Ë ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ‚ÊãŒ˝
NaOH ∑§ ‚ÊÕ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§⁄U∑§ ’¥Á¡‹ ∞À∑§Ê„ÊÚ‹,
¡Ê ’ŸŸflÊ‹ ©à¬ÊŒÊ¥ ◊¥ ‚ ∞∑§ „Ò, ’ŸÊÃÊ „Ò– ÿÊÒÁª∑§
∑§Ë ‚¥⁄UøŸÊ „Ò —

(1)

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(4)

8 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

22. Which of the following compounds is most
reactive to an aqueous solution of sodium
carbonate ?
22. ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ÿÊÒÁª∑§, ‚ÊÁ«Uÿ◊ ∑§Ê’Ê¸Ÿ≈U ∑§
¡‹Ëÿ Áfl‹ÿŸ ∑§ ¬˝ÁÃ, ‚flʸÁœ∑§ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿʇÊË‹
„Ò?

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

23. In the following structure, the double

bonds are marked as I, II, III and IV 23. ÁŸêŸ ‚¥⁄UøŸÊ ◊¥, Ám •Ê’ãœÊ¥ ∑§Ê I, II, III ÃÕÊ IV ‚
ÁøÁqà Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò–

Geometrical isomerism is not possible at

site (s) :
íÿÊÁ◊ÃËÿ ‚◊ÊflÿflÃÊ ß‚ SÕÊŸ/ߟ SÕÊŸÊ¥ ◊¥ ‚¥÷fl
(1) III Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò —
(2) I
(1) III
(3) I and III
(2) I
(4) III and IV
(3) I ÃÕÊ III

(4) III ÃÕÊ IV

9 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

24. The major product of the following 24. ÁŸêŸ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ê ◊ÈÅÿ ©à¬ÊŒ „Ò —
reaction is :

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

10 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

25. The incorrect statement among the 25. ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ª‹Ã ∑§ÕŸ „Ò —
following is :
(1) α-D-glucose and β-D-glucose are
(1) α-D-Ç‹Í∑§Ê¡ ÃÕÊ β-D-Ç‹Í∑§Ê¡ ∞ŸÊ◊⁄U „Ò¥–
anomers.
(2) α-D-glucose and β-D-glucose are
enantiomers. (2) α-D-Ç‹Í∑§Ê¡ ÃÕÊ β-D-Ç‹Í∑§Ê¡ ¬˝ÁÃÁ’ê’M§¬
(3) Cellulose is a straight chain „Ò–¥
polysaccharide made up of only
β-D-glucose units.
(3) ‚‹Í‹Ê¡ ∞∑§ ´§¡È oÎ¥π‹Ê ¬Ê‹Ë‚Ò∑§⁄UÊß«U „Ò
¡Ê ∑§fl‹ β-D-Ç‹Í∑§Ê¡ ∞∑§∑§Ê¥ ‚ ’ŸÊ „Ò–
(4) The penta acetate of glucose does not
react with hydroxyl amine.
(4) Ç‹Í∑§Ê¡ ∑§Ê ¬ã≈UÊ ∞‚Ë≈U≈U, „Êß«˛UÊÁÄ‚‹ ∞◊ËŸ
26. Which of the following is a biodegradable ∑§ ‚ÊÕ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ Ÿ„Ë¥ ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò
polymer ?

26. ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ¡ÒflÁŸêŸŸËÿ ’„È‹∑§ „Ò?

(1)

(2) (1)

(2)
(3)

(4) (3)

(4)

11 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

27. The increasing order of the boiling points 27. ÁŸêŸ ÿÊÒÁª∑§Ê¥ ∑§ ÄflÕŸÊ¥∑§Ê¥ ∑§Ê ’…∏ÃÊ „È•Ê ∑˝§◊ „Ò —
for the following compounds is :
C 2 H5 OH C 2 H5Cl C 2 H5CH3
C 2 H5 OH C 2 H5Cl C 2 H5CH3 (I) (II) (III)
(I) (II) (III)
C 2 H5OCH3
C 2 H5OCH3 (IV)
(IV)
(1) (III) < (IV) < (II) < (I)
(1) (III) < (IV) < (II) < (I)
(2) (IV) < (III) < (I) < (II)
(2) (IV) < (III) < (I) < (II)
(3) (II) < (III) < (IV) < (I)
(3) (II) < (III) < (IV) < (I)
(4) (III) < (II) < (I) < (IV)
(4) (III) < (II) < (I) < (IV)

28. Which of the following compounds will

28. ÁŸêŸ ÿÊÒÁª∑§Ê¥ ◊¥ ‚ Á∑§‚∑§Ê Ámœ˝Èfl •ÊÉÊÍáʸ ‚flʸÁœ∑§
show highest dipole moment ? „ÊªÊ?

(I) (II) (I) (II)

(III) (IV) (III) (IV)

(1) (I) (1) (I)

(2) (II) (2) (II)
(3) (III) (3) (III)
(4) (IV) (4) (IV)

12 IX - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

29. In the following reaction sequence : 29. ÁŸêŸ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑˝§◊ ◊¥ —

The compound I is :
ÿÊÒÁª∑§ I „Ò —
(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

30. Among the following compounds, the

increasing order of their basic strength is : 30. ÁŸêŸ ÿÊÒÁª∑§Ê¥ ∑§ ˇÊÊ⁄UËÿ ‚Ê◊âÿ¸ ∑§Ê ’…∏ÃÊ „È•Ê ∑˝§◊
„Ò —
(I) (II)
(I) (II)

(III) (IV)
(III) (IV)
(1) (I) < (II) < (IV) < (III)
(2) (I) < (II) < (III) < (IV) (1) (I) < (II) < (IV) < (III)

(3) (II) < (I) < (IV) < (III) (2) (I) < (II) < (III) < (IV)

(4) (II) < (I) < (III) < (IV) (3) (II) < (I) < (IV) < (III)
(4) (II) < (I) < (III) < (IV)

13 IX - CHEMISTRY
 JEE Main 2017 Official Question Paper 1 Mathematics, April 9
(English+Hindi)

MATHEMATICS ªÁáÊÃ

1. The function f : N → N defined by

x
»§‹Ÿ f : N → N, f ( x ) = x − 5   mÊ⁄UÊ
f ( x ) = x − 5   , where N is the set of
x 1.
5
5
¬Á⁄U÷ÊÁ·Ã „Ò, ¡„Ê° N, ¬˝Ê∑Χà ‚¥ÅÿÊ•Ê¥ ∑§Ê ‚◊ÈìÊÿ „Ò
natural numbers and [x] denotes the
greatest integer less than or equal to x, is : ÃÕÊ [x], x ‚ ∑§◊ ÿÊ ©‚∑§ ‚◊ÊŸ ◊„ûÊ◊ ¬ÍáÊÊZ∑§ „Ò,
(1) one-one and onto.
¡Ê —
(2) one-one but not onto. (1) ∞∑Ò§∑§Ë ÃÕÊ •Êë¿UÊŒ∑§ „Ò–
(3) onto but not one-one. (2) ∞∑Ò§∑§Ë „Ò ¬⁄UãÃÈ •Êë¿UÊŒ∑§ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò–
(4) neither one-one nor onto. (3) •Êë¿UÊŒ∑§ „Ò ¬⁄UãÃÈ ∞∑Ò§∑§Ë Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò–
(4) Ÿ ÃÊ ∞∑Ò§∑§Ë „Ò •ÊÒ⁄U Ÿ „Ë •Êë¿UÊŒ∑§ „Ò–
2. The sum of all the real values of x satisfying
2
the equation 2(x−1)(x +5x−50)=1 is :
(1) 16 2. ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ 2(x−1)(x2+5x−50)=1 ∑§Ê ‚¥ÃÈc≈U ∑§⁄UŸ
(2) 14 flÊ‹ x ∑§ ‚÷Ë flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ◊ÊŸÊ¥ ∑§Ê ÿÊª „Ò —
(3) −4 (1) 16
(4) −5 (2) 14
(3) −4
3. The equation (4) −5

Im 
iz − 2 
 + 1 = 0, z  C , z ≠ i
 z −i  3. ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ
represents a part of a circle having radius
Im 
equal to : iz − 2 
 + 1 = 0, z  C , z ≠ i
 z −i 
(1) 2
©‚ flÎûÊ ∑§ ∞∑§ ÷ʪ ∑§Ê ÁŸM§Á¬Ã ∑§⁄UÃË „Ò, Á¡‚∑§Ë
(2) 1
ÁòÊíÿÊ „Ò —
3 (1) 2
(3)
4
(2) 1
1
(4) 3
2 (3)
4

1
(4)
2

1 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

4. For two 3×3 matrices A and B, let
A+B=2B9 and 3A+2B=I3, where B9 is
the transpose of B and I3 is 3×3 identity
matrix. Then :
4. ŒÊ 3×3 •Ê√ÿÍ „ Ê ¥ A ÃÕÊ B ∑ § Á‹∞ ◊ÊŸÊ
A+B=2B9 ÃÕÊ 3A+2B=I3 „Ò, ¡„Ê° B9 •Ê√ÿÍ„
B ∑§Ê ¬Á⁄Uflø „Ò ÃÕÊ I3 ∞∑§ 3×3 Ãà‚◊∑§ •Ê√ÿÍ„

(1) 5A+10B=2I3
„Ò, ÃÊ —
(2) 10A+5B=3I3 (1) 5A+10B=2I3

(3) B+2A=I3 (2) 10A+5B=3I3

(4) 3A+6B=2I3 (3) B+2A=I3

(4) 3A+6B=2I3

5. If x=a, y=b, z=c is a solution of the

system of linear equations 5. ÿÁŒ x=a, y=b, z=c ⁄ÒUÁπ∑§ ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ ÁŸ∑§Êÿ
x+8y+7z=0 x+8y+7z=0
9x+2y+3z=0 9x+2y+3z=0
x+y+z=0 x+y+z=0
such that the point (a, b, c) lies on the plane ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ∞‚Ê „‹ „Ò Á∑§ Á’¥ŒÈ ‚◊Ë
(a, b, c)
x+2y+z=6, then 2a+b+c equals : x+2y+z=6 ¬⁄U ÁSÕà „Ò, ÃÊ 2a+b+c ’⁄UÊ’⁄U
„Ò —
(1) −1
(1) −1
(2) 0
(2) 0
(3) 1
(3) 1
(4) 2
(4) 2

6. The number of ways in which 5 boys and

3 girls can be seated on a round table if a 6. 5 ‹«∏∑§Ê¥ ÃÕÊ 3 ‹«∏Á∑§ÿÊ¥ ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ªÊ‹ ◊$¡ ∑§ øÊ⁄UÊ¥
particular boy B1 and a particular girl G1 •Ê⁄U ß‚ ¬˝∑§Ê⁄U Á’∆UÊŸ, Á∑§ ∞∑§ ÁflÁ‡Êc≈U ‹«∏∑§Ê B1
never sit adjacent to each other, is :
ÃÕÊ ∞∑§ ÁflÁ‡Êc≈U ‹«∏∑§Ë G1 ∑§÷Ë ÷Ë ∞∑§ ‚ÊÕ Ÿ
(1) 5×6! ’Ò∆U ‚∑¥§, ∑§ Ã⁄UË∑§Ê¥ ∑§Ë ‚¥ÅÿÊ „Ò —
(2) 6×6!
(1) 5×6!
(3) 7!
(2) 6×6!
(4) 5×7!
(3) 7!
(4) 5×7!

2 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

7. The coefficient of x −5 in the binomial 10

 x +1 x −1 
 x +1 x −1  10 7.  2 1
− 1  , ¡„Ê° x ≠ 0, 1,
expansion of  2 1
− 1  ,  x3 −x3 +1 x −x2 
 x3 −x3 +1 x −x2  ∑§ Ám¬Œ ÁflSÃÊ⁄U ◊¥ x−5 ∑§Ê ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§ „Ò —
where x ≠ 0, 1, is :
(1) 1
(1) 1
(2) 4
(2) 4
(3) −4
(3) −4
(4) −1
(4) −1

8. If three positive numbers a, b and c are in

A.P. such that abc=8, then the minimum 8. ÿÁŒ ÃËŸ œŸÊà◊∑§ ‚¥ÅÿÊ∞° a, b ÃÕÊ c ‚◊Ê¥Ã⁄U üÊ…Ë
possible value of b is : ◊¥ „Ò¥ Á¡Ÿ∑§ Á‹∞ abc=8 „Ò, ÃÊ b ∑§Ê ãÿÍŸÃ◊ ‚¥÷fl
(1) 2 ◊ÊŸ „Ò —
1 (1) 2
(2) 43
1
(2) 43
2
(3) 43
2
(4) 4 (3) 43
(4) 4
9. Let
1 1+2
Sn = 3 + 3 +
1+2+3
+ 9. ◊ÊŸÊ
1 1 + 23 13 + 2 3 + 33 1 1+2 1+2+3
Sn = 3 + 3 3
+ 3 +
....... + 3
1 + 2 + ....... + n
. If 100 Sn=n, 1 1 +2 1 + 2 3 + 33
1 + 2 3 + ....... + n 3 1 + 2 + ....... + n
then n is equal to : ....... + 3 . ÿÁŒ
1 + 2 3 + ....... + n 3
(1) 199 100 Sn=n „Ò, ÃÊ n ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
(2) 99
(1) 199
(3) 200
(2) 99
(4) 19
(3) 200
(4) 19

3 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

10. The value of k for which the function 10. k ∑§Ê fl„ ◊ÊŸ Á¡‚∑§ Á‹∞ »§‹Ÿ
 4 tan 4x
 4 tan 4x

   tan 5x
, 0<x<
π   tan 5x π
 5    , 0<x<
2 
f (x) =  f ( x ) =  5  2
 2 π  2 π
 k+ , x= k+ , x=
 5 2 
 5 2
π
is continuous at x = , is : x=
π
¬⁄U ‚ÃØ „Ò, „Ò —
2 2
17 17
(1) (1)
20 20
2 2
(2) (2)
5 5
3 3
(3) (3)
5 5
2 2
(4) − (4) −
5 5

1 − 15 1 − 15
11. If 2 x = y 5 + y and 11. ÿÁŒ 2x = y 5 + y ÃÕÊ
d2 y dy d2 y dy
( x 2 − 1) 2
+ λx + ky = 0, then λ+k ( x 2 − 1) + λx + ky = 0 „Ò, ÃÊ λ+k
dx dx dx 2 dx
is equal to :
’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
(1) −23
(1) −23
(2) −24
(2) −24
(3) 26
(3) 26
(4) −26
(4) −26

4 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

12. The function f defined by 12. f (x)=x3−3x2+5x+7 mÊ⁄UÊ ¬Á⁄U÷ÊÁ·Ã »§‹Ÿ f —

f (x)=x3−3x2+5x+7, is :
(1) increasing in R. (1) R ◊¥ flœ¸◊ÊŸ „Ò–
(2) decreasing in R.
(2) R ◊¥ OÊ‚◊ÊŸ „Ò–
(3) decreasing in (0, ∞) and increasing
in (−∞, 0). (3) (0, ∞) ◊¥ OÊ‚◊ÊŸ ÃÕÊ (−∞, 0) ◊¥ flœ¸◊ÊŸ
(4) increasing in (0, ∞) and decreasing „Ò–
in (−∞, 0). (4) (0, ∞) ◊¥ flœ¸◊ÊŸ ÃÕÊ (−∞, 0) ◊¥ OÊ‚◊ÊŸ
„Ò–
13. Let f be a polynomial function such that
f (3x)=f 9(x) ⋅ f 99(x), for all x e R. Then :
(1) f (2)+f 9(2)=28
13. ◊ÊŸÊ ∞∑§ ’„ȬŒ »§‹Ÿ f ∞‚Ê „Ò Á∑§ ‚÷Ë xeR ∑§
Á‹∞ f (3x)=f 9(x) ⋅ f 99(x) „Ò, ÃÊ —
(2) f 99 (2)−f 9(2)=0
(1) f (2)+f 9(2)=28
(3) f 99(2)−f (2)=4
(2) f 99 (2)−f 9(2)=0
(4) f (2)−f 9(2)+f 99(2)=10
(3) f 99(2)−f (2)=4
(4) f (2)−f 9(2)+f 99(2)=10
f 
3x − 4  4
14. If  = x + 2, x ≠ − , and
 3x + 4 3
f 
3x − 4  4
∫ f (x) dx = A log 1 − x + Bx + C, then 14. ÿÁŒ  = x + 2, x ≠ −
 3x + 4  3
ÃÕÊ
the ordered pair (A, B) is equal to :
(where C is a constant of integration) ∫ f (x) dx = A log 1 − x + Bx + C „Ò , ÃÊ
∑˝§Á◊à ÿÈÇ◊ (A, B) ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
8 2
(1)  ,  (¡„Ê° C ∞∑§ ‚◊Ê∑§‹Ÿ •ø⁄U „Ò)
3 3

 8 2 8 2
(2) − , 
(1)  , 
 3 3 3 3

 8 2  8 2
(3) − , −  (2) − , 
 3 3  3 3

8 2 (3)  8 2
(4)  ,−  − , − 
3 3  3 3

8 2
(4)  ,− 
3 3

5 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

2 2

∫ (x ∫ (x
dx k dx k
15. If 3
= , then k is 15. ÿÁŒ 3
= „Ò, ÃÊ k ’⁄UÊ’⁄U
k+5 k+5
1
2
− 2x + 4 ) 2
1
2
− 2x + 4 ) 2

equal to : „Ò —
(1) 1 (1) 1
(2) 2 (2) 2
(3) 3 (3) 3
(4) 4 (4) 4

16. If
16. Á∑§‚Ë œŸÊà◊∑§ flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ‚¥ÅÿÊ a ∑§ Á‹∞ ÿÁŒ
a a a
lim 1 + 2 + ........ + n 1
n →∞ a−1
= lim 1a + 2 a + ........ + n a 1
(n+1) [(na+1)+(na+2)+..... + (na+n)] 60 n →∞ a−1
=
(n+1) [(na+1)+(na+2)+..... + (na+n)] 60
for some positive real number a, then a is
equal to : „Ò, ÃÊ a ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
(1) 7
(2) 8 (1) 7
(2) 8
15
(3)
2 15
(3)
2
17
(4)
2 17
(4)
2

6 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

17. A tangent to the curve, y=f (x) at P(x, y) 17. fl∑˝§ y=f (x) ∑§ Á’¥ŒÈ P(x, y) ¬⁄U S¬‡Ê¸⁄UπÊ x-•ˇÊ
meets x-axis at A and y-axis at B. If
∑§Ê A ¬⁄U ÃÕÊ y-•ˇÊ ∑§Ê B ¬⁄U ∑§Ê≈UÃË „Ò– ÿÁŒ
AP : BP=1 : 3 and f (1)=1, then the curve
also passes through the point : AP : BP=1 : 3 ÃÕÊ f (1)=1 „Ò, ÃÊ fl∑˝§ ÁŸêŸ Á’¥ŒÈ
‚ ÷Ë „Ê ∑§⁄U ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò —
1 
(1)  , 24 
3  1 
(1)  , 24 
3 
1 
(2)  , 4
2  1 
(2)  , 4
2 
(3)  1
 2, 
 8 (3)  1
 2, 
 8
(4)  1 
 3, 
 28  (4)  1 
 3, 
 28 

18. A square, of each side 2, lies above the

x-axis and has one vertex at the origin. If
one of the sides passing through the origin
makes an angle 308 with the positive
direction of the x-axis, then the sum of the
x-coordinates of the vertices of the square
is :
(1) 2 3 −1
18. ∞∑§ flª¸, Á¡‚∑§Ë ¬˝àÿ∑§ ÷È¡Ê 2 „Ò, x-•ˇÊ ‚ ™§¬⁄U
ÁSÕà „Ò ÃÕÊ Á¡‚∑§Ê ∞∑§ ‡ÊË·¸ ◊Í‹ Á’¥ŒÈ ¬⁄U „Ò– ÿÁŒ
ß‚∑§Ë ◊Í‹ Á’¥ŒÈ ‚ „Ê∑§⁄U ¡ÊÃË „È߸ ∞∑§ ÷È¡Ê, x-•ˇÊ
∑§Ë œŸÊà◊∑§ ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ‚ 308 ∑§Ê ∑§ÊáÊ ’ŸÊÃË „Ò, ÃÊ flª¸
∑§ ‡ÊË·¸ Á’¥ŒÈ•Ê¥ ∑§ x-ÁŸŒ¸‡ÊÊ¥∑§Ê¥ ∑§Ê ÿÊª „Ò —

(2) 2 3 −2
(1) 2 3 −1
(3) 3 −2
(2) 2 3 −2
(4) 3 −1
(3) 3 −2

(4) 3 −1

7 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

19. A line drawn through the point P(4, 7) cuts 19. ÿÁŒ Á’¥ŒÈ P(4, 7)‚ πË¥øË ªß¸ ∞∑§ ⁄UπÊ, flÎûÊ
the circle x2+y2=9 at the points A and B.
x2+y2=9 ∑§Ê Á’¥ŒÈ•Ê¥ A ÃÕÊ B ¬⁄U ∑§Ê≈UÃË „Ò, ÃÊ
Then PA⋅PB is equal to :
PA⋅PB ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
(1) 53
(1) 53
(2) 56
(2) 56
(3) 74
(3) 74
(4) 65
(4) 65

20. The eccentricity of an ellipse having centre

at the origin, axes along the co-ordinate 20. ∞∑§ ŒËÉʸflÎûÊ Á¡‚∑§Ê ∑§ãŒ˝ ◊Í‹ Á’¥ŒÈ „Ò, •ˇÊ ÁŸŒ¸‡ÊÊ¥∑§
axes and passing through the points •ˇÊ „Ò¥ ÃÕÊ ¡Ê Á’¥ŒÈ•Ê¥ (4, −1) ÃÕÊ (−2, 2) ‚
(4, −1) and (−2, 2) is :
„Ê∑§⁄U ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò, ∑§Ë ©à∑¥§Œ˝ÃÊ (eccentricity) „Ò —
1
(1)
2
1
(1)
2 2
(2)
5
2
(2)
3 5
(3)
2
3
(3)
3 2
(4)
4
3
(4)
21. If y=mx+c is the normal at a point on 4
the parabola y2=8x whose focal distance
is 8 units, then ?c? is equal to : 21. ÿÁŒ y=mx+c ¬⁄Ufl‹ÿ y2=8x ∑§ ©‚ Á’¥ŒÈ ¬⁄U
(1) 2 3
•Á÷‹¥’ „Ò Á¡‚∑§Ë ŸÊÁ÷ ‚ ŒÍ⁄UË 8 ß∑§Ê߸ „Ò, ÃÊ ?c?
’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
(2) 8 3
(1) 2 3
(3) 10 3
(2) 8 3
(4) 16 3
(3) 10 3

(4) 16 3

8 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

22. If a variable plane, at a distance of 3 units
from the origin, intersects the coordinate
axes at A, B and C, then the locus of the
centroid of ∆ABC is :
22. ∞∑§ ø⁄U ‚◊Ë, Á¡‚∑§Ë ◊Í‹ Á’¥ŒÈ ‚ ŒÍ⁄UË 3 ß∑§Ê߸ „Ò,
ÁŸŒ¸‡ÊÊ¥∑§ •ˇÊÊ¥ ∑§Ê A, B ÃÕÊ C ¬⁄U ∑§Ê≈UÃÊ „Ò, ÃÊ
∆ABC ∑§ ∑¥§Œ˝∑§ ∑§Ê Á’¥ŒÈ¬Õ „Ò —

1
1 1
(1) + 2 + 2 =1
2
x y z 11 1
(1) + 2 + 2 =1
2
x y z
1
1 1
(2) + 2 + 2 =3
2
x y z 11 1
(2) + 2 + 2 =3
2
x y z
1
1 1 1
(3) + 2 + 2 =
2
x y z 9 11 1 1
(3) + 2 + 2 =
2
x y z 9
1
1 1
(4) + 2 + 2 =9
2
x y z 11 1
(4) + 2 + 2 =9
2
x y z

x −3 y +2 z +λ
23. If the line, = = lies in
1 −1 −2 x −3 y +2 z +λ
23. ÿÁŒ ⁄ U π Ê,= = , ‚◊Ë
the plane, 2x−4y+3z=2, then the 1 −1 −2
shortest distance between this line and the 2x−4y+3z=2 ◊¥ ÁSÕà „Ò, ÃÊ ß‚ ⁄UπÊ ÃÕÊ ⁄UπÊ
x −1 y z x −1
line, = = is : y
= =
z
∑§ ’Ëø ∑§Ë ãÿÍŸÃ◊ ŒÍ⁄UË „Ò —
12 9 4 12 9 4
(1) 2
(2) 1 (1) 2
(3) 0 (2) 1
(4) 3 (3) 0
(4) 3

9 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

→ ∧ ∧ → ∧ ∧
24. If the vector b = 3 j + 4 k is written as the 24. ÿÁŒ ‚ÁŒ‡Ê b =3 j +4k ∑§Ê ‚ÁŒ‡Ê
→ → ∧ ∧ → ∧ ∧ → →
sum of a vector b1 , parallel to a = i + j a =i+ j ∑§ ‚◊Ê¥Ã⁄U ‚ÁŒ‡Ê b1 ÃÕÊ ‚ÁŒ‡Ê a
→ → →
and a vector b2 , perpendicular to a , then ∑§ ‹¥’flà ‚ÁŒ‡Ê b2 ∑§ ÿÊª ∑§ M§¬ ◊¥ Á‹πÊ ¡Ê∞,
→ → → →
b1 × b 2 is equal to : ÃÊ b1 × b 2 ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
(1) −3 i + 3 j − 9 k (1) −3 i + 3 j − 9 k

∧ ∧ 9∧ ∧ ∧ 9∧
(2) 6i − 6 j + k (2) 6i − 6 j + k
2 2

∧ ∧ 9∧ ∧ ∧ 9∧
(3) −6 i + 6 j − k (3) −6 i + 6 j − k
2 2
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
(4) 3 i − 3 j + 9k (4) 3 i − 3 j + 9k

25. From a group of 10 men and 5 women, 25. 10 ¬ÈL§· ÃÕÊ 5 ◊Á„‹Ê•Ê¥ ∑§ ∞∑§ ‚◊Í„ ◊¥ ‚ øÊ⁄U
four member committees are to be formed
each of which must contain at least one
‚ŒSÿÊ¥ ∑§Ë ∞‚Ë ∑§◊Á≈UÿÊ¥ ’ŸÊŸË „Ò¥ Á¡Ÿ◊¥ ¬˝àÿ∑§ ◊¥
woman. Then the probability for these ∑§◊ ‚ ∑§◊ ∞∑§ ◊Á„‹Ê •fl‡ÿ „Ê– ߟ ∑§◊Á≈UÿÊ¥ ◊¥
committees to have more women than ◊Á„‹Ê•Ê¥ ∑§Ë ‚¥ÅÿÊ ¬ÈL§·Ê¥ ∑§Ë ‚¥ÅÿÊ ‚ •Áœ∑§ „ÊŸ
men, is : ∑§Ë ¬˝ÊÁÿ∑§ÃÊ „Ò —
21
(1)
220
21
(1)
3 220
(2)
11
3
(2)
1 11
(3)
11
1
(3)
2 11
(4)
23
2
(4)
23

10 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

26. Let E and F be two independent events. 26. ◊ÊŸÊ E ÃÕÊ F ŒÊ SflÃ¥òÊ ÉÊ≈UŸÊ∞° „Ò¥– E ÃÕÊ F ŒÊŸÊ¥ ∑§
The probability that both E and F happen
1
1 ÉÊ≈UŸ ∑§Ë ¬˝ÊÁÿ∑§ÃÊ „Ò ÃÕÊ Ÿ E •ÊÒ⁄U Ÿ „Ë F ∑§
is and the probability that neither E 12
12
1 P(E)
1 P(E) ÉÊ≈UŸ ∑§Ë ¬˝ÊÁÿ∑§ÃÊ „Ò, ÃÊ ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ◊ÊŸ „Ò —
nor F happens is , then a value of 2 P(F)
2 P(F)
is :

4
(1) 4
3 (1)
3
3
(2) 3
2 (2)
2
1
(3) 1
3 (3)
3
5
(4) 5
12 (4)
12

27. The sum of 100 observations and the sum

of their squares are 400 and 2475, 27. 100 ¬˝ˇÊáÊÊ¥ ∑§Ê ÿÊª ÃÕÊ ©Ÿ∑§ flªÊZ ∑§Ê ÿÊª ∑˝§◊‡Ê—
respectively. Later on, three observations, 400 ÃÕÊ 2475 „Ò– ’ÊŒ ◊¥ ÃËŸ ¬˝ˇÊáÊ 3, 4 ÃÕÊ 5
3, 4 and 5, were found to be incorrect. If ª‹Ã ¬Ê∞ ª∞– ÿÁŒ ª‹Ã ¬˝ˇÊáÊÊ¥ ∑§Ê „≈UÊ ÁŒÿÊ ¡Ê∞
the incorrect observations are omitted, then
the variance of the remaining observations
ÃÊ ‡Ê· ¬˝ˇÊáÊÊ¥ ∑§Ê ¬˝‚⁄UáÊ „Ò —
is :
(1) 8.25
(2) 8.50
(3) 8.00 (1) 8.25

(4) 9.00 (2) 8.50

(3) 8.00
(4) 9.00

11 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

28. A value of x satisfying the equation 28. ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ sin[cot−1(1+x)]=cos[tan−1x] ∑§Ê

sin[cot−1(1+x)]=cos[tan−1x], is :
‚¥ÃÈc≈U ∑§⁄UŸ flÊ‹Ê x ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ◊ÊŸ „Ò —
1
(1) − 1
2 (1) −
2
(2) −1
(2) −1
(3) 0
(3) 0
1
(4) 1
2 (4)
2

29. The two adjacent sides of a cyclic

quadrilateral are 2 and 5 and the angle 29. ∞∑§ ø∑˝§Ëÿ-øÃÈ÷ȸ¡ ∑§Ë ŒÊ ‚¥‹ÇŸ ÷È¡Ê∞° 2 ÃÕÊ 5 „Ò¥
between them is 608. If the area of the ÃÕÊ ©Ÿ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§Ê ∑§ÊáÊ 608 „Ò– ÿÁŒ ß‚ øÃÈ÷ȸ¡
quadrilateral is 4 3 , then the perimeter ∑§Ê ˇÊòÊ»§‹ 4 3 „Ò, ÃÊ ß‚∑§Ê ¬Á⁄U◊ʬ „Ò —
of the quadrilateral is :
(1) 12.5
(2) 13.2 (1) 12.5
(3) 12 (2) 13.2
(4) 13 (3) 12
(4) 13

12 IX - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

30. Contrapositive of the statement 30. ∑§ÕŸ

‘If two numbers are not equal, then their
“ÿÁŒ ŒÊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ∞° ‚◊ÊŸ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò¥, ÃÊ ©Ÿ∑§ flª¸ ‚◊ÊŸ
squares are not equal’, is :
Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò¥”

(1) If the squares of two numbers are

∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃœŸÊà◊∑§ (Contrapositive) „Ò —
equal, then the numbers are equal. (1) ÿÁŒ ŒÊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ•Ê¥ ∑§ flª¸ ‚◊ÊŸ „Ò¥, ÃÊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ∞°
(2) If the squares of two numbers are ‚◊ÊŸ „Ò¥–
equal, then the numbers are not
equal. (2) ÿÁŒ ŒÊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ•Ê¥ ∑§ flª¸ ‚◊ÊŸ „Ò¥, ÃÊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ∞°
(3) If the squares of two numbers are not ‚◊ÊŸ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò¥–
equal, then the numbers are not
equal.
(3) ÿÁŒ ŒÊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ•Ê¥ ∑§ flª¸ ‚◊ÊŸ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò¥, ÃÊ
(4) If the squares of two numbers are not
equal, then the numbers are equal.
‚¥ÅÿÊ∞° ‚◊ÊŸ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò–

-o0o- (4) ÿÁŒ ŒÊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ•Ê¥ ∑§ flª¸ ‚◊ÊŸ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò¥, ÃÊ
‚¥ÅÿÊ∞° ‚◊ÊŸ „Ò–

-o0o-

13 IX - MATHEMATICS
JEE-Main-2017-Answer-Key-April-9
 JEE Main 2017 Official Question Paper 1 Physics, April 8
(English+Hindi)

PHYSICS ÷ÊÒÁÃ∑§ ÁflôÊÊŸ

1. Time (T), velocity (C) and angular 1. ÿÁŒ Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ, ‹ê’Ê߸ •ÊÒ⁄U ‚◊ÿ ∑§ SÕÊŸ ¬⁄U ‚◊ÿ
momentum (h) are chosen as fundamental
(T), flª (C) ÃÕÊ ∑§ÊáÊËÿ ‚¥flª (h) ∑§Ê ◊Í‹÷ÍÃ
quantities instead of mass, length and time.
In terms of these, the dimensions of mass ⁄UÊÁ‡ÊÿÊ° ◊ÊŸ ‹¥ ÃÊ Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ∑§Ë Áfl◊Ê ∑§Ê ߟ ⁄UÊÁ‡ÊÿÊ¥
would be : ∑§ M§¬ ◊¥ ÁŸêŸ Ã⁄UË∑§ ‚ Á‹π¥ª —
(1) [ M ]=[ T−1 C−2 h ]
(2) [ M ]=[ T−1 C2 h ] (1) [ M ]=[ T−1 C−2 h ]
(3) [ M ]=[ T−1 C−2 h−1 ] (2) [ M ]=[ T−1 C2 h ]
(4) [ M ]=[ T C−2 h ] (3) [ M ]=[ T−1 C−2 h−1 ]
(4) [ M ]=[ T C−2 h ]

1 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

2. Which graph corresponds to an object
moving with a constant negative
acceleration and a positive velocity ?
2. ÁSÕ⁄U ´§áÊÊà◊∑§ àfl⁄UáÊ fl œŸÊà◊∑§ flª ‚ ø‹Ÿ
flÊ‹Ë ∞∑§ flSÃÈ ∑§ Á‹ÿ ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ª˝Ê$»§ ‚„Ë
„Ò?

(1) (1)

(2) (2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

2 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

3. A 1 kg block attached to a spring vibrates
with a frequency of 1 Hz on a frictionless
horizontal table. Two springs identical to
the original spring are attached in parallel
to an 8 kg block placed on the same table.
So, the frequency of vibration of the 8 kg
block is :
3. ∞∑§ ÁS¬˝¥ª ‚ ¡È«∏Ê „È•Ê 1 kg ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ªÈ≈U∑§Ê 1 Hz
∑§Ë •ÊflÎÁûÊ ‚ ∞∑§ ÉÊ·¸áÊ„ËŸ ˇÊÒÁá ◊¡ ¬⁄U ŒÊ‹Ÿ
∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– ß‚Ë Ã⁄U„ ∑§Ë ŒÊ ‚◊ÊãÃ⁄U ÁS¬˝¥ªÊ¥ ‚ ∞∑§
8 kg ∑§Ê ªÈ≈U∑§Ê ¡Ê«∏∑§⁄U ©‚Ë ◊¡ ¬⁄U ŒÊ‹Ÿ ∑§⁄UÊÃ
„Ò¥– 8 kg ∑§ ªÈ≈U∑§ ∑§Ë ŒÊ‹Ÿ •ÊflÎÁûÊ „ÊªË —

1
(1) Hz
4
1
(1) Hz
1 4
(2) Hz
2 2
1
(2) Hz
1 2 2
(3) Hz
2
1
(4) 2 Hz (3) Hz
2

(4) 2 Hz
4. An object is dropped from a height h from
the ground. Every time it hits the ground
it looses 50% of its kinetic energy. The total 4. ∞∑§ flSÃÈ ∑§Ê œ⁄UÃË ‚ h ™°§øÊ߸ ‚ ¿UÊ«∏Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò–
distance covered as t→∞ is : ¡’ ÿ„ flSÃÈ ¬ÎâflË ‚ ≈U∑§⁄UÊÃË „Ò ÃÊ ¬˝àÿ∑§ ≈UÄ∑§⁄U ◊¥
(1) 2h ©‚∑§Ë 50% ªÁá ™§¡Ê¸ ˇÊÿ „ÊÃË „Ò– ÿÁŒ t →∞,
(2) ∞ flSÃÈ mÊ⁄UÊ Ãÿ ∑§Ë ªÿË ∑ȧ‹ ŒÍ⁄UË „ÊªË —
5 (1) 2h
(3) h
3 (2) ∞

8 5
(4) h (3) h
3 3

8
(4) h
3

3 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

5. A uniform disc of radius R and mass M is
free to rotate only about its axis. A string
is wrapped over its rim and a body of mass
m is tied to the free end of the string as
shown in the figure. The body is released
from rest. Then the acceleration of the
body is :
5. ∞∑§ ÁòÊíÿÊ R ÃÕÊ Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ M ∑§Ë ∞∑§‚◊ÊŸ Á«US∑§
∑§fl‹ •¬ŸË •ˇÊ ∑§ ¬Á⁄U× ÉÊÍáʸŸ ∑§ Á‹ÿ SflÃ¥òÊ „Ò–
ÁøòÊÊŸÈ‚Ê⁄U ß‚ Á«US∑§ ∑§Ë ¬Á⁄UÁœ ¬⁄U ∞∑§ «UÊ⁄UË ‹¬≈U∑§⁄U,
«UÊ⁄UË ∑§ SflÃ¥òÊ Á‚⁄U ‚ ∞∑§ Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ m ∑§Ê ’Ê°œÊ ªÿÊ
„Ò– ÿÁŒ Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ∑§Ê ÁSÕ⁄UÊflSÕÊ ‚ ¿UÊ«∏Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò ÃÊ
©‚∑§Ê àfl⁄UáÊ „ÊªÊ —

2 mg 2 mg
(1) (1)
2 m +M 2m+M

2 Mg 2 Mg
(2) (2)
2 m+M 2m+M

2 mg 2 mg
(3) (3)
2 M+m 2M+m

2 Mg 2 Mg
(4) (4)
2 M +m 2M+m

4 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

6. Moment of inertia of an equilateral
triangular lamina ABC, about the axis
passing through its centre O and
perpendicular to its plane is Io as shown
in the figure. A cavity DEF is cut out from
the lamina, where D, E, F are the mid
points of the sides. Moment of inertia of
the remaining part of lamina about the
same axis is :
6. ÁøòÊÊŸÈ‚Ê⁄U ‚◊’Ê„È ÁòÊ÷È¡ ∑§Ë •Ê∑ΧÁà flÊ‹ ∞∑§ ¬≈U‹
ABC ∑§Ê ∞∑§ •ˇÊ, ¡Ê Á’ãŒÈ O ‚ ¡ÊÃË „Ò ÃÕÊ
¬≈U‹ ∑§ •Á÷‹ê’flØ „Ò, ∑§ ‚ʬˇÊ ¡«∏àfl •ÊÉÊÍáʸ Io
„Ò– ß‚ ¬≈U‹ ◊¥ ‚ ∞∑§ ÁòÊ÷È¡ DEF ∑§ •Ê∑§Ê⁄U ∑§Ê
∞∑§ ¿UŒ Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ÿ„Ê° D, E fl F ÷È¡Ê•Ê¥ ∑§
◊äÿ Á’ãŒÈ „Ò¥– ß‚ ’ø „È∞ ¬≈U‹ ∑§Ê ©‚Ë •ˇÊ ∑§
‚ʬˇÊ ¡«∏àfl •ÊÉÊÍáʸ „ÊªÊ —

7
7 (1) Io
(1) Io 8
8
15
15 (2) Io
(2) Io 16
16
3 Io
3 Io (3)
(3) 4
4
31 I o
31 I o (4)
(4) 32
32

5 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

7. If the Earth has no rotational motion, the 7. ÿÁŒ ¬ÎâflË ∑§Ë ÉÊÍáʸŸ ªÁà ‡ÊÍãÿ „Ò ÃÊ ∞∑§ √ÿÁÄà ∑§Ê
weight of a person on the equator is W.
÷Í◊äÿ⁄UπÊ ¬⁄U ÷Ê⁄U W „Ò– ¬ÎâflË ∑§Ë •¬ŸË •ˇÊ ∑§
Determine the speed with which the earth
would have to rotate about its axis so that ¬Á⁄U× ÉÊÍáʸŸ ∑§Ë fl„ ªÁà ôÊÊà ∑§ËÁ¡ÿ Á¡‚ ¬⁄U ©‚
the person at the equator will weigh 3
√ÿÁÄà ∑§Ê ÷Í◊äÿ⁄UπÊ ¬⁄U ÷Ê⁄U 4
W „ÊªÊ– ¬ÎâflË
3
W. Radius of the Earth is 6400 km and ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ 6400 km •ÊÒ⁄U g=10 m/s2 „Ò–
4
g=10 m/s2.
(1) 1.1×10−3 rad/s
(2) 0.83×10−3 rad/s (1) 1.1×10−3 rad/s
(3) 0.63×10−3 rad/s (2) 0.83×10−3 rad/s

(4) 0.28×10−3 rad/s (3) 0.63×10−3 rad/s

(4) 0.28×10−3 rad/s
8. In an experiment a sphere of aluminium
of mass 0.20 kg is heated upto 1508C.
Immediately, it is put into water of volume
8. ∞∑§ ¬˝ÿÊª ◊¥ 0.20 kg Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ∑§ •ÀÿÈÁ◊ÁŸÿ◊ ∑§
150 cc at 278C kept in a calorimeter of ∞∑§ ªÊ‹ ∑§Ê 1508C Ã∑§ ª◊¸ Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ß‚∑§
water equivalent to 0.025 kg. Final ÃÈ⁄¥Uà ’ÊŒ ß‚ 278C fl 150 cc •Êÿß flÊ‹ ¬ÊŸË ‚
temperature of the system is 408C. The ÷⁄U ∞∑§ ∑Ò§‹Ê⁄UË◊Ë≈U⁄U, ¡ÊÁ∑§ 0.025 kg ¬ÊŸË ∑§ ÃÈÀÿ
specific heat of aluminium is :
(take 4.2 Joule=1 calorie) „Ò, ◊¥ «UÊ‹ ŒÃ „Ò¥– ß‚ ÁŸ∑§Êÿ ∑§Ê •ãà Ãʬ◊ÊŸ
408C „Ò– •ÀÿÈÁ◊ÁŸÿ◊ ∑§Ë ÁflÁ‡ÊC ™§c◊Ê „ÊªË —
(1) 378 J/kg – 8C
(4.2 ¡Í‹=1 ∑Ò§‹Ê⁄UË „Ò–)
(2) 315 J/kg – 8C
(1) 378 J/kg – 8C
(3) 476 J/kg – 8C
(2) 315 J/kg – 8C
(4) 434 J/kg – 8C
(3) 476 J/kg – 8C
(4) 434 J/kg – 8C

6 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

9. A compressive force, F is applied at the 9. S≈UË‹ ∑§Ë ∞∑§ ¬Ã‹Ë ∞fl¥ ‹ê’Ë ¿U«∏ ∑§ ŒÊŸÊ¥ Á‚⁄UÊ¥ ¬⁄U
two ends of a long thin steel rod. It is
∞∑§ ‚¥¬Ë«UŸ ’‹ F ‹ªÊÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò ÃÕÊ ‚ÊÕ „Ë ¿U«∏
heated, simultaneously, such that its
temperature increases by ∆T. The net ∑§Ê ª◊¸ ∑§⁄U∑§ ©‚∑§Ê Ãʬ◊ÊŸ ∆T ’…∏ÊÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò–
change in its length is zero. Let l be the ß‚‚ ¿U«∏ ∑§Ë ‹ê’Ê߸ ◊¥ ∑ȧ‹ ¬Á⁄UfløŸ ‡ÊÍãÿ „Ò– ◊ÊŸÊ
length of the rod, A its area of cross-section, Á∑§ ¿U«∏ ∑§Ë ‹ê’Ê߸ l, •ŸÈ¬˝SÕ ∑§Ê≈U ∑§Ê ˇÊòÊ»§‹ A,
Y its Young’s modulus, and α its coefficient
of linear expansion. Then, F is equal to :
ÿ¥ª ¬˝àÿÊSÕÃÊ ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§ Y fl ⁄UπËÿ ¬˝‚Ê⁄U ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§ α „Ò
ÃÊ F ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
(1) l2 Yα ∆T
(2) lA Yα ∆T
(1) l2 Yα ∆T
(3) A Yα ∆T
(2) lA Yα ∆T
AY
(4) (3) A Yα ∆T
α ∆T
AY
(4)
α ∆T
10. An engine operates by taking n moles of
an ideal gas through the cycle ABCDA
shown in figure. The thermal efficiency 10. ÁøòÊ ◊¥ ÁŒπÊÿ ªÿ ∞∑§ ø∑˝§Ëÿ ¬˝∑˝§◊ ABCDA ∑§
of the engine is :
•ŸÈ‚Ê⁄U n ◊Ê‹ •ÊŒ‡Ê¸ ªÒ‚ ‚ ∞∑§ ߥ¡Ÿ ø‹ÊÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ
(Take Cv=1.5 R, where R is gas constant)
„Ò– ߥ¡Ÿ ∑§Ë ÃʬËÿ ˇÊ◊ÃÊ „ÊªË —
(ÁŒÿÊ „Ò — Cv=1.5 R, ¡„Ê° R ªÒ‚ ÁŸÿÃÊ¥∑§ „Ò–)

(1) 0.24
(2) 0.15
(1) 0.24
(3) 0.32
(2) 0.15
(4) 0.08 (3) 0.32
(4) 0.08

7 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

11. An ideal gas has molecules with 5 degrees 11. ∞∑§ •ÊŒ‡Ê¸ ªÒ‚ ∑§ •áÊÈ•Ê¥ ∑§Ë SflÊÃ¥òÊÿ ∑§ÊÁ≈U
of freedom. The ratio of specific heats at
(degrees of freedom) 5 „Ò– ß‚ ªÒ‚ ∑§Ë ÁSÕ⁄U
constant pressure (C p) and at constant
volume (Cv) is : ŒÊ’ ¬⁄U ÁflÁ‡Êc≈U ™§c◊Ê (Cp) •ÊÒ⁄U ÁSÕ⁄U •Êÿß ¬⁄U
(1) 6
ÁflÁ‡ÊC ™§c◊Ê (Cv) ∑§Ê •ŸÈ¬Êà „ÊªÊ —
(1) 6
7
(2)
2 7
(2)
2
5
(3)
2 5
(3)
2
7
(4)
5 7
(4)
5

12. The ratio of maximum acceleration to

maximum velocity in a simple harmonic 12. ∞∑§ ‚⁄U‹ •Êflø ªÁà ◊¥ •Áœ∑§Ã◊ àfl⁄UáÊ ∞fl¥
motion is 10 s −1 . At, t=0 the
displacement is 5 m. What is the
•Áœ∑§Ã◊ flª ∑§Ê •ŸÈ¬Êà 10 s−1 „Ò– ÿÁŒ t=0
maximum acceleration ? The initial phase ¬⁄U ÁflSÕʬŸ 5 m „ÒÒ ÃÊ •Áœ∑§Ã◊ àfl⁄UáÊ ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ
π π
is . ÄÿÊ „ÊªÊ? •Ê⁄UÁê÷∑§ ∑§‹Ê ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ 4
„Ò–
4
(1) 500 m/s2

(2) 500 2 m/s2

(1) 500 m/s2
(3) 750 m/s2
(2) 500 2 m/s2
(4) 750 2 m/s2
(3) 750 m/s2

(4) 750 2 m/s2

8 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

13. Two wires W 1 and W 2 have the same
radius r and respective densities ρ1 and ρ2
such that ρ 2 =4ρ 1 . They are joined
together at the point O, as shown in the
figure. The combination is used as a
sonometer wire and kept under tension T.
The point O is midway between the two
bridges. When a stationary wave is set up
in the composite wire, the joint is found to
be a node. The ratio of the number of
antinodes formed in W1 to W2 is :
13. ŒÊ ÃÊ⁄UÊ¥ W1 ÃÕÊ W2 ∑§Ë ‚◊ÊŸ ÁòÊíÿÊ r „Ò ÃÕÊ
ÉÊŸàfl ∑˝§◊‡Ê— ρ1 •ÊÒ⁄U ρ2 ß‚ ¬˝∑§Ê⁄U „Ò¥ Á∑§ ρ2=4ρ1–
ÁøòÊÊŸÈ‚Ê⁄U ߟ ÃÊ⁄UÊ¥ ∑§Ê Á’ãŒÈ O ¬⁄U ¡Ê«∏Ê ªÿÊ „Ò– ß‚
‚¥ÿÊ¡Ÿ ∑§Ê ‚ÊŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§ ÃÊ⁄U ∑§ M§¬ ◊¥ ¬˝ÿÊª ∑§⁄UÃ
„Ò¥ •ÊÒ⁄U ß‚ ßÊfl T ¬⁄U ⁄UπÃ „Ò¥– Á’ãŒÈ O, ŒÊŸÊ¥
‚ÃÈ•Ê¥ ∑§ ◊äÿ ◊¥ „Ò¥– ß‚ ‚¥ÿÈÄà ÃÊ⁄U ◊¥ ∞∑§ •¬˝ªÊ◊Ë
Ã⁄¥Uª ©à¬ÛÊ ∑§Ë ¡ÊÃË „Ò¥ ÃÊ ¡Ê«∏ ¬⁄U ÁŸS¬¥Œ (node)
’ŸÃÊ „Ò– W1 fl W2 ÃÊ⁄UÊ¥ ◊¥ ’Ÿ ¬˝S¬¥ŒÊ¥ (antinode)
∑§Ë ‚¥ÅÿÊ ∑§Ê •ŸÈ¬Êà „ÊªÊ —

(1) 1:1
(1) 1:1
(2) 1:2
(2) 1:2
(3) 1:3
(3) 1:3
(4) 4:1
(4) 4:1

14. There is a uniform electrostatic field in a

region. The potential at various points on
a small sphere centred at P, in the region,
is found to vary between the limits
589.0 V to 589.8 V. What is the potential
at a point on the sphere whose radius
vector makes an angle of 608 with the
direction of the field ?
(1) 589.5 V
(2) 589.2 V
(3) 589.4 V
14. ∞∑§ ˇÊòÊ ◊¥ ∞∑§‚◊ÊŸ ÁSÕ⁄U flÒlÈà ˇÊòÊ ©¬ÁSÕà „Ò–
ÿ„Ê° ∞∑§ Á’ãŒÈ P ¬⁄U ∑§ÁãŒ˝Ã ∞∑§ ªÊ‹ ∑§ ÁflÁ÷ÛÊ
Á’ãŒÈ•Ê¥ ¬⁄U Áfl÷fl ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ 589.0 V fl 589.8 V
‚Ë◊Ê•Ê¥ ∑§ ’Ëø ¬ÊÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ß‚ ªÊ‹ ∑§ ¬Îc∆U ¬⁄U
fl„ Á’ãŒÈ, Á¡‚∑§Ê ÁòÊíÿÊ flÄ≈U⁄U ÁfllÈà ˇÊòÊ ‚ 608
∑§Ê ∑§ÊáÊ ’ŸÊÃÊ „Ò, ¬⁄U Áfl÷fl ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ ÄÿÊ „ÊªÊ?
(1) 589.5 V

(4) 589.6 V (2) 589.2 V

(3) 589.4 V
(4) 589.6 V

9 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

15. The energy stored in the electric field 15. œÊÃÈ ∑§ ∞∑§ ªÊ‹ ‚ ©à¬ÛÊ ÁfllÈà ˇÊòÊ ◊¥ ‚¥Áøà ™§¡Ê¸
produced by a metal sphere is 4.5 J. If the
∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ 4.5 J „Ò– ÿÁŒ ªÊ‹ ◊¥ ÁŸÁ„à •Êfl‡Ê 4 µC
sphere contains 4 µC charge, its radius will
„Ê ÃÊ ©‚∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
1
be : [Take : = 9 × 109 N − m 2 /C 2 ] 1
4 πo [ÁŒÿÊ „Ò — = 9 × 109 N − m 2 /C 2 ]
4 πo
(1) 20 mm
(1) 20 mm
(2) 32 mm
(2) 32 mm
(3) 28 mm
(3) 28 mm
(4) 16 mm
(4) 16 mm

16. What is the conductivity of a

semiconductor sample having electron
concentration of 5×10 18 m −3 , hole
concentration of 5×10 19 m −3, electron
mobility of 2.0 m 2 V −1 s −1 and hole
mobility of 0.01 m2 V−1 s−1 ?
(Take charge of electron as 1.6×10−19 C)
(1) 1.68 (Ω - m)−1
(2) 1.83 (Ω - m)−1
16. ∞∑§ •h¸øÊ‹∑§ ◊¥ ß‹ÒÄ≈˛UÊÚŸ ÃÕÊ „Ê‹ ∑§Ê ‚¥ÅÿÊ
ÉÊŸàfl ∑˝§◊‡Ê— 5×1018 m−3 fl 5×1019 m−3
ÃÕÊ ©Ÿ∑§Ë ªÁÇÊË‹ÃÊ∞¥ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— 2.0 m2 V−1 s−1
fl 0.01 m2 V−1 s−1 „Ò¥– ß‚ •h¸øÊ‹∑§ ∑§Ë
øÊ‹∑§ÃÊ ÄÿÊ „ÊªË?
(ÁŒÿÊ „Ò ß‹ÒÄ≈˛UÊÚŸ ¬⁄U •Êfl‡Ê=1.6×10−19 C)
(1) 1.68 (Ω - m)−1

(3) 0.59 (Ω - m)−1 (2) 1.83 (Ω - m)−1

(3) 0.59 (Ω - m)−1
(4) 1.20 (Ω - m)−1
(4) 1.20 (Ω - m)−1

10 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

17. 17.

A 9 V battery with internal resistance of
0.5 Ω is connected across an infinite
network as shown in the figure. All
ammeters A1, A2, A3 and voltmeter V are
ideal.
∞∑§ 9 V ∑§Ë ’Ò≈U⁄UË, Á¡‚∑§Ê •ÊãÃÁ⁄U∑§ ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ
0.5 Ω „Ò, ∑§Ê ÁøòÊÊŸÈ‚Ê⁄U •Ÿãà ¬Á⁄U¬Õ ◊¥ ‹ªÊÿÊ
ªÿÊ „Ò– ‚÷Ë •◊Ë≈U⁄U A1, A2, A3 ÃÕÊ flÊÀ≈U◊Ë≈U⁄U
V •ÊŒ‡Ê¸ „Ò¥–

Choose correct statement.

‚„Ë ∑§ÕŸ øÈÁŸÿ —
(1) Reading of A1 is 2 A (1) A1 ∑§Ê ¬Ê∆˜UÿÊ¥∑§ 2 A „Ò–
(2) Reading of A1 is 18 A (2) A1 ∑§Ê ¬Ê∆˜UÿÊ¥∑§ 18 A „Ò–
(3) Reading of V is 9 V (3) V ∑§Ê ¬Ê∆˜UÿÊ¥∑§ 9 V „Ò–
(4) Reading of V is 7 V
(4) V ∑§Ê ¬Ê∆˜UÿÊ¥∑§ 7 V „Ò–

18. In a certain region static electric and

magnetic fields exist. The magnetic field 18. ∞∑§ ˇÊòÊ ◊¥ ÁSÕ⁄U ÁfllÈà ∞fl¥ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ˇÊòÊ ©¬ÁSÕÃ
→
→
(
is given by B = B0 ∧i + 2 ∧j−4 ∧k . If a test ) (
„Ò¥– øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ˇÊòÊ B = B0 ∧i + 2 ∧j−4 ∧k „Ò– )
charge moving with a velocity ÿÁŒ ∞∑§ ¬⁄UˡÊáÊ •Êfl ‡ Ê, Á¡‚∑§Ê fl ª
→
→
( )
v =v0 3 ∧i −∧j+2 ∧k experiences no force (
v = v0 3 ∧i −∧j+2 ∧k ) , ¬⁄U ∑§Ê߸ ’‹ Ÿ„Ë¥ ‹ªÃÊ
in that region, then the electric field in the „Ò ÃÊ ß‚ ˇÊòÊ ◊¥ SI ◊ÊòÊ∑§Ê¥ ◊¥ ÁfllÈà ˇÊòÊ „ÊªÊ —
region, in SI units, is :
→
(1) (
E =−v0 B0 3 ∧i −2 ∧j−4 ∧k ) →

→
(1) (
E =−v0 B0 3 ∧i −2 ∧j−4 ∧k )
(2) (
E =−v0 B0 i + j+7 k ∧ ∧ ∧
) →

→
(2) E =−v0 B0 ∧i +∧j+7 ∧k ( )
(3) (
E = v0 B0 14 j+7 k ∧ ∧
) →

→
(3) (
E = v0 B0 14 ∧j+7 ∧k )
(4) (
E =− v0 B0 14 ∧j+7 ∧k ) →
(4) E =− v0 B0 14 ∧j+7 ∧k ( )
11 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

19. A magnetic dipole in a constant magnetic 19. ∞∑§ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ˇÊòÊ ◊¥ ⁄Uπ „È∞ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ Ámœ˝Èfl ∑§Ë —
field has :
(1) maximum potential energy when
the torque is maximum. (1) ÁSÕÁá ™§¡Ê¸ •Áœ∑§Ã◊ „ÊªË ÿÁŒ ’‹ •ÊÉÊÍáʸ
(2) zero potential energy when the
•Áœ∑§Ã◊ „Ò–
torque is minimum. (2) ÁSÕÁá ™§¡Ê¸ ‡ÊÍãÿ „ÊªË ÿÁŒ ’‹ •ÊÉÊÍáʸ
(3) zero potential energy when the ãÿÍŸÃ◊ „Ò–
torque is maximum.
(3) ÁSÕÁá ™§¡Ê¸ ‡ÊÍãÿ „ÊªË ÿÁŒ ’‹ •ÊÉÊÍáʸ
(4) minimum potential energy when the
torque is maximum.
•Áœ∑§Ã◊ „Ò–
(4) ÁSÕÁá ™§¡Ê¸ ãÿÍŸÃ◊ „ÊªË ÿÁŒ ’‹ •ÊÉÊÍáʸ
20. A small circular loop of wire of radius a is
•Áœ∑§Ã◊ „Ò–
located at the centre of a much larger
circular wire loop of radius b. The two
loops are in the same plane. The outer loop 20. ÃÊ⁄U ‚ ’Ÿ ÁòÊíÿÊ a ∑§ ¿UÊ≈U flÎûÊÊ∑§Ê⁄U fl‹ÿ ∑§Ê ÁòÊíÿÊ
of radius b carries an alternating current b ∑§ ∞∑§ ’΄Ø flÎûÊÊ∑§Ê⁄U fl‹ÿ ∑§ ∑§ãŒ˝ ¬⁄U ⁄UπÊ ªÿÊ
I=Io cos (ωt). The emf induced in the „Ò– ŒÊŸÊ¥ fl‹ÿ ∞∑§ „Ë ‚◊Ë ◊¥ „Ò¥– ÁòÊíÿÊ b ∑§
smaller inner loop is nearly :
’Ês fl‹ÿ ◊¥ ∞∑§ ¬˝àÿÊflÃ˸ œÊ⁄UÊ I=Io cos (ωt)
πµo Io a 2 ¬˝flÊÁ„à ∑§Ë ¡ÊÃË „Ò– ÁòÊíÿÊ a flÊ‹ •ÊãÃÁ⁄U∑§ fl‹ÿ
(1) . ω sin ( ωt) ◊¥ ¬˝Á⁄Uà ÁfllÈà flÊ„∑§ ’‹ „ÊªÊ —
2 b

πµo Io a 2
(2) . ω cos (ωt) πµo Io a 2
2 b (1) . ω sin ( ωt)
2 b
a2
(3) πµo I o ω sin (ωt) πµo Io a 2
b (2) . ω cos (ωt)
2 b
πµo Io b2
(4) ω cos (ωt) a2
a (3) πµo I o ω sin (ωt)
b

πµo Io b2
(4) ω cos (ωt)
a

12 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

21. Magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic 21. ∞∑§ ‚◊Ë flÒlÈÃøÈê’∑§Ëÿ Ã⁄¥Uª ◊¥ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ˇÊòÊ
wave is given by
→ ∧
→ ∧ B = B0 sin (k x+ω t) j T „Ò – ß‚∑ § ‚¥ ª Ã
B = B0 sin (k x+ω t) j T
ÁfllÈà ˇÊòÊ ∑§Ê ‚ÍòÊ „ÊªÊ —
Expression for corresponding electric field
will be : ÿ„Ê° c ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ∑§Ê flª „Ò–
Where c is speed of light.
→ ∧
(1) E = B0 c sin (k x+ω t) k V/m
→ ∧
(1) E = B0 c sin (k x+ω t) k V/m
→ B ∧
(2) E = 0 sin (k x+ωt) k V/m
→ B ∧ c
(2) E = 0 sin (k x+ωt) k V/m
c
→ ∧
(3) E =− B0 c sin (k x+ω t) k V/m
→ ∧
(3) E =− B0 c sin (k x+ω t) k V/m
→ ∧
(4) E = B0 c sin (k x−ω t) k V/m
→ ∧
(4) E = B0 c sin (k x−ω t) k V/m

22.
22. Let the refractive index of a denser medium
with respect to a rarer medium be n12 and
its critical angle be θC. At an angle of
incidence A when light is travelling from
denser medium to rarer medium, a part of
the light is reflected and the rest is refracted
and the angle between reflected and
refracted rays is 908. Angle A is given by :
◊ÊŸÊ Á∑§ ∞∑§ ‚ÉÊŸ ◊Êäÿ◊ ∑§Ê ∞∑§ Áfl⁄U‹ ◊Êäÿ◊ ∑§
‚ʬˇÊ •¬fløŸÊ¥∑§ n12 „Ò ÃÕÊ ©‚∑§Ê ∑˝§ÊÁãÃ∑§ ∑§ÊáÊ
θC „Ò– ¡’ ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ∞∑§ •Ê¬ÃŸ ∑§ÊáÊ A ‚ ‚ÉÊŸ ‚
Áfl⁄U‹ ◊Êäÿ◊ ◊¥ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò ÃÊ ©‚∑§Ê ∞∑§ ÷ʪ ¬⁄UÊflÁøÃ
„ÊÃÊ „Ò •ÊÒ⁄U ’øÊ „È•Ê ÷ʪ •¬flÁøà „ÊÃÊ „Ò– ¬⁄UÊflÁøÃ
•ÊÒ ⁄ U •¬flÁø à Á∑§⁄U á ÊÊ ¥ ∑ § ’Ëø ∑§Ê á Ê 908 „Ò–
∑§ÊáÊ A ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —

1
(1) −1 1
cos ( sin θC ) (1) −1
cos ( sin θC )
1
(2) −1 1
tan ( sin θC ) (2) −1
tan ( sin θC )
(3) cos−1 (sin θC)
(3) cos−1 (sin θC)
(4) tan−1 (sin θC)
(4) tan−1 (sin θC)

13 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

23. A single slit of width b is illuminated by a 23. λ Ã⁄¥UªŒÒäÿ¸ ∑§ ∑§‹Ê‚ê’h fl ∞∑§fláÊ˸ÿ ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ‚
coherent monochromatic light of
∞∑§ b øÊÒ«∏Ê߸ ∑§Ë Á¤Ê⁄UË ∑§Ê ¬˝ŒË# ∑§⁄UÃ „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ 1 m
wavelength λ. If the second and fourth
minima in the diffraction pattern at a ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U ⁄Uπ ¬Œ¸ ¬⁄U ’Ÿ ÁflfløŸ ¬˝ÊM§¬ ◊¥ ÁmÃËÿ ∞fl¥
distance 1 m from the slit are at 3 cm and øÃÈÕ¸ ÁŸÁêŸc∆U ∑§Ë ∑§ãŒ˝Ëÿ ©ÁìÊc∆U ‚ ŒÍ⁄UË ∑˝§◊‡Ê—
6 cm respectively from the central 3 cm •ÊÒ⁄U 6 cm „Ò ÃÊ ∑§ãŒ˝Ëÿ ©Áëøc∆U ∑§Ë øÊÒ«∏Ê߸
maximum, what is the width of the central
maximum ? (i.e. distance between first
ÄÿÊ „ÊªË? (∑§ãŒ˝Ëÿ ©ÁëøD ∑§Ë øÊÒ«∏Ê߸ ©‚∑§ ŒÊŸÊ¥
minimum on either side of the central Ã⁄U»§ ∑§ ¬˝Õ◊ ÁŸÁêŸc∆U ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË „Ò–)
maximum)
(1) 1.5 cm
(2) 3.0 cm
(3) 4.5 cm (1) 1.5 cm

(4) 6.0 cm (2) 3.0 cm

(3) 4.5 cm

24. The maximum velocity of the (4) 6.0 cm

photoelectrons emitted from the surface
is v when light of frequency n falls on a
metal surface. If the incident frequency is 24. ¡’ •ÊflÎÁûÊ n ∑§Ê ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ∞∑§ œÊÃÈ ∑§ ¬Îc∆U ¬⁄U ¬«∏ÃÊ
increased to 3n, the maximum velocity of „Ò ÃÊ ©‚‚ ©à‚Á¡¸Ã »§Ê≈UÊ-ß‹Ä≈˛UÊÚŸÊ¥ ∑§Ê •Áœ∑§Ã◊
the ejected photoelectrons will be :
flª v „Ò– ÿÁŒ •Ê¬ÁÃà ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ∑§Ë •ÊflÎÁûÊ ’…∏Ê∑§⁄U
(1) less than 3v 3n ∑§⁄U ŒË ¡ÊÃË „Ò ÃÊ ©à‚Á¡¸Ã ß‹Ä≈˛UÊÚŸÊ¥ ∑§Ê •Áœ∑§Ã◊

(2) v
flª „ÊªÊ —

(3) more than 3v

(1) 3v ‚ ∑§◊
(4) equal to 3v (2) v

(3) 3v ‚ •Áœ∑§
(4) 3v ∑§ ’⁄UÊ’⁄U

14 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

25. According to Bohr’s theory, the time 25. ’Ê⁄U (Bohr) ∑§ Á‚hÊãà ∑§ •ŸÈ‚Ê⁄U „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ
averaged magnetic field at the centre (i.e.
∑§ ∑§ãŒ˝ (ŸÊÁ÷∑§) ¬⁄U nfl¥ ∑§ˇÊ ◊¥ ß‹Ä≈˛UÊÚŸ ∑§Ë ªÁÃ
nucleus) of a hydrogen atom due to the
motion of electrons in the n th orbit is ∑§ ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ ©à¬ãŸ ‚◊ÿ-•ÊÒ‚Ã øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ˇÊòÊ ∑§Ê
proportional to : (n=principal quantum ◊ÊŸ ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ Á∑§‚∑§ ‚◊ʟȬÊÃË „ÊªÊ — (ÿ„Ê° n
number) ◊ÈÅÿ ÄflÊã≈U◊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ „Ò–)
(1) n−4
(2) n−5 (1) n−4
(3) n−3 (2) n−5

(4) n−2 (3) n−3

(4) n−2
26. Two deuterons undergo nuclear fusion to
form a Helium nucleus. Energy released
in this process is : (given binding energy
26. ŒÊ «˜UÿÍ≈˛UÊÚŸÊ¥ ∑§ ŸÊÁ÷∑§Ëÿ ‚¥‹ÿŸ ‚ ∞∑§ „ËÁ‹ÿ◊
per nucleon for deuteron=1.1 MeV and ŸÊÁ÷∑§ ’ŸÃÊ „Ò– ß‚ ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ◊¥ ©à‚Á¡¸Ã ™§¡Ê¸ ∑§Ê
for helium=7.0 MeV) ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ — (ÁŒÿÊ „Ò — «˜UÿÍ≈˛UÊÚŸ ∑§Ë ¬˝ÁÃ-ãÿÍÁÄ‹•ÊÚŸ
(1) 30.2 MeV ’㜟 ™§¡Ê¸=1.1 MeV ÃÕÊ „ËÁ‹ÿ◊ ∑§Ë ¬˝ÁÃ
(2) 32.4 MeV ãÿÍÁÄ‹•ÊÚŸ ’㜟 ™§¡Ê¸=7.0 MeV)
(3) 23.6 MeV (1) 30.2 MeV

(4) 25.8 MeV (2) 32.4 MeV

(3) 23.6 MeV
(4) 25.8 MeV

15 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

27. The V-I characteristic of a diode is shown
in the figure. The ratio of forward to
reverse bias resistance is :
27. ∞∑§ «UÊÿÊ«U ∑§Ê V-I •Á÷‹ˇÊÁáÊ∑§ fl∑˝§ ∑§Ê ÁøòÊ ◊¥
ÁŒπÊÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò– •ª˝ÁŒÁ‡Ê∑§ ÃÕÊ ¬‡øÁŒÁ‡Ê∑§ ’Êÿ‚
◊¥ ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ ∑§Ê •ŸÈ¬Êà „ÊªÊ —

(1) 10
(1) 10
(2) 10 −6
(2) 10 −6
(3) 10 6
(3) 10 6
(4) 100
(4) 100

16 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

28. A signal of frequency 20 kHz and peak 28. 1.2 MHz •ÊflÎÁûÊ ÃÕÊ 25 V Á‡Êπ⁄U flÊÀ≈UÃÊ flÊ‹Ë
voltage of 5 Volt is used to modulate a
∞∑§ flÊ„∑§ Ã⁄¥Uª ∑§Ê 20 kHz •ÊflÎÁûÊ ÃÕÊ Á‡Êπ⁄U
carrier wave of frequency 1.2 MHz and
peak voltage 25 Volts. Choose the correct flÊÀ≈UÃÊU 5 V ∑§ Á‚ÇŸ‹ ‚ ◊Ê«ÈUÁ‹Ã Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò–
statement. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ‚„Ë ∑§ÕŸ øÈÁŸÿ–
(1) Modulation index=5, side
frequency bands are at 1400 kHz (1) ◊Ê«ÈU‹Ÿ ‚Íø∑§Ê¥∑§=5, ¬Ê‡fl¸ •ÊflÎÁûÊ ’Òá«U
and 1000 kHz
1400 kHz ÃÕÊ 1000 kHz ¬⁄U „Ò–
(2) Modulation index=5, side
frequency bands are at 21.2 kHz and
18.8 kHz (2) ◊Ê«ÈU‹Ÿ ‚Íø∑§Ê¥∑§=5, ¬Ê‡fl¸ •ÊflÎÁûÊ ’Òá«U
(3) Modulation index=0.8, side 21.2 kHz ÃÕÊ 18.8 kHz ¬⁄U „Ò–
frequency bands are at 1180 kHz
and 1220 kHz
(4) Modulation index=0.2, side
(3) ◊Ê«ÈU‹Ÿ ‚Íø∑§Ê¥∑§=0.8, ¬Ê‡fl¸ •ÊflÎÁûÊ ’Òá«U
frequency bands are at 1220 kHz 1180 kHz ÃÕÊ 1220 kHz ¬⁄U „Ò–
and 1180 kHz
(4) ◊Ê«ÈU‹Ÿ ‚Íø∑§Ê¥∑§=0.2, ¬Ê‡fl¸ •ÊflÎÁûÊ ’Òá«U
29. In a physical balance working on the 1220 kHz ÃÕÊ 1180 kHz ¬⁄U „Ò–
principle of moments, when 5 mg weight
is placed on the left pan, the beam becomes
horizontal. Both the empty pans of the
balance are of equal mass. Which of the 29. ’‹ •ÊÉÊÍáʸ ∑§ Á‚hÊãà ¬⁄U ∑§Êÿ¸ ∑§⁄UŸ flÊ‹Ë ∞∑§
following statements is correct ?
÷ÊÒÁÃ∑§ ÃÈ‹Ê ∑§ ’Ê°ÿ ¬‹«∏ ◊¥ ¡’ 5 mg ÷Ê⁄U ⁄UπÊ
(1) Left arm is longer than the right arm ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò ÃÊ ∑§◊ÊŸË ˇÊÒÁá „Ê ¡ÊÃË „Ò– ÃÈ‹Ê ∑§ ŒÊŸÊ¥
(2) Both the arms are of same length ¬‹«∏Ê¥ ∑§Ê Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ‚◊ÊŸ „Ò– ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ
(3) Left arm is shorter than the right arm ‚Ê ∑§ÕŸ ‚àÿ „Ò?
(4) Every object that is weighed using
this balance appears lighter than its (1) ’Ê°ÿË ÷È¡Ê, ŒÊ°ÿË ÷È¡Ê ‚ ‹ê’Ë „Ò–
actual weight.
(2) ŒÊŸÊ¥ ÷È¡Êÿ¥ ‚◊ÊŸ ‹ê’Ê߸ ∑§Ë „Ò¥–
(3) ’Ê°ÿË ÷È¡Ê, ŒÊ°ÿË ÷È¡Ê ‚ ¿UÊ≈UË „Ò–
(4) ¬˝àÿ∑§ flSÃÈ Á¡‚∑§Ê ß‚ ÃÈ‹Ê ¬⁄U ÃÊÒ‹Ê ¡ÊÃÊ
„Ò, ©‚∑§Ê ÷Ê⁄U •¬Ÿ flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ÷Ê⁄U ‚ ∑§◊
¬˝ÃËà „ÊÃÊ „Ò–

17 VI - PHYSICS
(English+Hindi)

30. A potentiometer PQ is set up to compare
two resistances as shown in the figure. The
ammeter A in the circuit reads 1.0 A when
two way key K3 is open. The balance point
is at a length l1 cm from P when two way
key K3 is plugged in between 2 and 1, while
the balance point is at a length l2 cm from
P when key K3 is plugged in between 3
R1
and 1. The ratio of two resistances R , is
2 •ÊÃÊ „Ò– ŒÊŸÊ¥ ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœÊ¥ ∑§ •ŸÈ¬ÊÃ
found to be :
30. ∞∑§ Áfl÷fl◊Ê¬Ë PQ ∑§Ê ŒÊ ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœÊ¥ ∑§Ë ÃÈ‹ŸÊ ∑§⁄UŸ
∑§ Á‹ÿ, ÁøòÊÊŸÈ‚Ê⁄U, ‚◊ÊÿÊÁ¡Ã Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ÿÁŒ
∑È¥§¡Ë K3 ∑§Ê πÊ‹ ÁŒÿÊ ¡Êÿ ÃÊ •◊Ë≈U⁄U A ◊¥ œÊ⁄UÊ
1.0 A •ÊÃË „Ò– ¡’ ÁmªÊ◊Ë ∑È¥§¡Ë K3 ∑§Ê 2 ÃÕÊ 1
∑§ ’Ëø ‹ªÊÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò ÃÊ ‚¥ÃÈ‹Ÿ Á’ãŒÈ P ‚
l1 cm ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U •ÊÃÊ „Ò, ¡’Á∑§ K3 ∑§Ê 3 ÃÕÊ 1 ∑§
’Ëø ‹ªÊŸ ¬⁄U, ‚¥ÃÈ‹Ÿ Á’ãŒÈ P ‚ l2 cm ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U
R1
R2 ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ
„ÊªÊ —

l1
(1) l1
l1+l2 (1) l1+l2
l2
(2) l2
l2 −l1 (2) l2 −l1
l1
(3) l1
l1−l2 (3) l1−l2
l1
(4) l1
l2 −l1 (4) l2 −l1

18 VI - PHYSICS
 JEE Main 2017 Official Question Paper 1 - Chemistry, April 8
(English+Hindi)

CHEMISTRY ⁄U‚ÊÿŸ ‡ÊÊSòÊ

1. Among the following, correct statement

1. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ‚„Ë ∑§ÕŸ „Ò —
is :
(1) Brownian movement is more
pronounced for smaller particles (1) ’˝Ê©ŸË ªÁà ’«∏ ∑§áÊÊ¥ ∑§Ë ÃÈ‹ŸÊ ◊¥ ¿UÊ≈U ∑§áÊÊ¥
than for bigger–particles. ◊¥ •Áœ∑§ ÁŒπÊ߸ ŒÃË „Ò–
(2) Sols of metal sulphides are lyophilic.
(3) Hardy Schulze law states that bigger (2) œÊÃÈ ‚À»§Êß«∏Ê¥ ∑§ ‚ÊÚ‹ Œ˝fl⁄UÊªË „ÊÃ „Ò¥–
the size of the ions, the greater is its
coagulating power.
(3) „Ê«U˸-‡ÊÈÀ‚ ∑§ ÁŸÿ◊ ∑§ •ŸÈ‚Ê⁄U Á∑§‚Ë •ÊÿŸ
∑§Ê Á¡ÃŸÊ •Áœ∑§ •Ê◊ʬ „Ê ©‚∑§Ë S∑¥§ŒŸ
(4) One would expect charcoal to adsorb
chlorine more than hydrogen ‡ÊÁÄà ÷Ë ©ÃŸË „Ë •Áœ∑§ „ÊªË–
sulphide. (4) ∞‚Ë •Ê‡ÊÊ ∑§Ë ¡ÊÃË „Ò Á∑§ øÊ⁄U∑§Ê‹, „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ
‚À»§Êß«U ∑§Ë ÃÈ‹ŸÊ ◊¥ Ä‹Ê⁄UËŸ ∑§Ê •Áœ∑§
2. Excess of NaOH (aq) was added to •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ ∑§⁄UªÊ–
100 mL of FeCl 3 (aq) resulting into
2.14 g of Fe(OH) 3 . The molarity of
FeCl3 (aq) is : 2. 100 mL FeCl3 (¡‹Ëÿ) ◊¥ NaOH (¡‹Ëÿ)
(Given molar mass of Fe=56 g mol−1 and ∑§Ê •ÊÁœÄÿ ◊¥ «UÊ‹Ÿ ¬⁄U 2.14 g Fe(OH)3 ¬˝ÊåÃ
molar mass of Cl=35.5 g mol−1) „ÊÃÊ „Ò– FeCl3 (¡‹Ëÿ) ∑§Ë ◊Ê‹⁄UÃÊ „Ò,
(1) 0.2 M (ÁŒÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò — Fe ∑§Ê ◊Ê‹⁄U Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ=56 g mol−1
(2) 0.3 M ÃÕÊ Cl ∑§Ê ◊Ê‹⁄U Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ=35.5 g mol−1)
(3) 0.6 M (1) 0.2 M
(4) 1.8 M (2) 0.3 M
(3) 0.6 M
(4) 1.8 M

1 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

3. Among the following, the incorrect 3. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ •‚àÿ ∑§ÕŸ „Ò —

statement is :
(1) At low pressure, real gases show
ideal behaviour. (1) ∑§◊ ŒÊ’ ¬⁄U, flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ªÒ‚¥, •ÊŒ‡Ê¸ √ÿfl„Ê⁄U
(2) At very low temperature, real gases
Œ‡ÊʸÃË „Ò¥–
show ideal behaviour. (2) ’„Èà ÁŸêŸ Ãʬ ¬⁄U, flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ªÒ‚¥ •ÊŒ‡Ê¸
(3) At very large volume, real gases √ÿfl„Ê⁄U Œ‡ÊʸÃË „Ò¥–
show ideal behaviour.
(3) •Áœ∑§ ’«∏ •Êÿß ¬⁄U, flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ªÒ‚¥ •ÊŒ‡Ê¸
(4) At Boyle’s temperature, real gases
show ideal behaviour. √ÿfl„Ê⁄U Œ‡ÊʸÃË „Ò¥–
(4) ’ÊÚÿ‹ Ãʬ ¬⁄U, flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ªÒ‚¥ •ÊŒ‡Ê¸ √ÿfl„Ê⁄U
4. For a reaction, A(g) → A(l); ∆H=−3RT. Œ‡ÊʸÃË „Ò¥–
The correct statement for the reaction is :
(1) ∆H=∆U≠O
4. ∞∑§ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ A(g) → A(l) ∑§ Á‹∞ ∆H=−3RT.
(2) ∆H=∆U=O ß‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§ Á‹ÿ ‚„Ë ∑§ÕŸ „Ò —
(3) ?∆H? < ?∆U?
(1) ∆H=∆U≠O
(4) ?∆H? > ?∆U? (2) ∆H=∆U=O
(3) ?∆H? < ?∆U?
5. What is the standard reduction potential
(4) ?∆H? > ?∆U?
(E8) for Fe3+ → Fe ?
Given that :
5. Fe3+ → Fe ∑§ Á‹ÿ ◊ÊŸ∑§ •¬øÿŸ Áfl÷fl (E8)
2+
Fe +2e → Fe ; E
Fe 2+/Fe =−0.47 V
−
ÄÿÊ „ÊªÊ?
ÁŒÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò —
Fe 3++e− → Fe 2+ ; E
Fe 3+/Fe 2+=+0.77 V
Fe 2++2e− → Fe ; E
Fe 2+/Fe =−0.47 V
(1) −0.057 V
(2) +0.057 V
Fe 3++e− → Fe 2+ ; EFe

3+ 2+=+0.77 V
/Fe
(3) +0.30 V
(4) −0.30 V (1) −0.057 V
(2) +0.057 V
(3) +0.30 V
(4) −0.30 V

2 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

6. If the shortest wavelength in Lyman series 6. ÿÁŒ „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ ∑§Ë ‹Êß◊Ÿ üÊáÊË ∑§Ë ‹ÉÊÈûÊ◊
of hydrogen atom is A, then the longest
Ã⁄¥UªŒÒÉÿ¸ A „Ê ÃÊ He+ ∑§Ë ¬Ê‡ÊŸ üÊáÊË ∑§Ë ŒËÉʸÃ◊
wavelength in Paschen series of He+ is :
Ã⁄¥UªŒÒÉÿ¸ „ÊªË —
5A
(1) 5A
9 (1)
9
9A
(2) 9A
5 (2)
5
36A
(3) 36A
5 (3)
5
36A
(4) 36A
7 (4)
7

7. 5 g of Na2SO4 was dissolved in x g of H2O.

The change in freezing point was found 7. x ª˝Ê◊ ¬ÊŸË ◊¥ 5 ª˝Ê◊ ‚ÊÁ«Uÿ◊ ‚À»§≈U ÉÊÊ‹Ê ªÿÊ–
to be 3.828C. If Na2SO4 is 81.5% ionised, ª‹ŸÊ¥∑§ ◊¥ ¬Á⁄UfløŸ 3.828C ¬ÊÿÊ ªÿÊ– ÿÁŒ
the value of x
Na2SO4 81.5% •ÊÿÁŸÃ „ÊÃÊ „Ò ÃÊ x ∑§Ê ‹ª÷ª
(K f for water=1.868C kg mol −1 ) is ◊ÊŸ „Ò — (¡‹ ∑§ Á‹∞ Kf=1.868C kg mol−1)
approximately :
(◊Ê‹⁄U Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ — S=32 g mol−1 ÃÕÊ
(molar mass of S=32 g mol−1 and that of Na=23 g mol−1)
Na=23 g mol−1)
(1) 15 g
(1) 15 g
(2) 25 g
(2) 25 g
(3) 45 g
(3) 45 g
(4) 65 g
(4) 65 g

8. Addition of sodium hydroxide solution to

8. ∞∑§ ŒÈ’¸‹ •ê‹ (HA) ◊¥ ‚ÊÁ«Uÿ◊ „Êß«˛UÊÄ‚Êß«U
a weak acid (HA) results in a buffer of Áfl‹ÿŸ Á◊‹ÊŸ ‚ pH 6 ∑§Ê ’$»§⁄U ’ŸÃÊ „Ò– ÿÁŒ
pH 6. If ionisation constant of HA is 10−5, HA ∑§Ê •ÊÿŸŸ ÁSÕ⁄UÊ¥∑§ 10−5 „Ò ÃÊ, ’»§⁄U Áfl‹ÿŸ
the ratio of salt to acid concentration in ◊¥ ‹fláÊ •ÊÒ⁄U •ê‹ ∑§Ë ‚Ê¥Œ˝ÃÊ ∑§Ê •ŸÈ¬Êà „ÊªÊ —
the buffer solution will be :
(1) 4:5
(1) 4:5
(2) 1 : 10
(2) 1 : 10
(3) 10 : 1
(3) 10 : 1
(4) 5:4
(4) 5:4

3 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

9. The rate of a reaction A doubles on 9. ∞∑§ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ A ∑§Ë Œ⁄U, Ãʬ ∑§Ê 300 ‚ 310 K
increasing the temperature from 300 to
Ã∑§ ’…∏ÊŸ ¬⁄U ŒÈªŸË „Ê ¡ÊÃË „Ò– 300 K ‚ Ãʬ
310 K. By how much, the temperature of
reaction B should be increased from 300 K Á∑§ÃŸÊ ’…∏ÊÿÊ ¡Êÿ Á∑§ ∞∑§ ŒÍ‚⁄UË •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ B ∑§Ë
so that rate doubles if activation energy Œ⁄U ÷Ë ŒÈªŸË „Ê ¡Êÿ ÿÁŒ ß‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ B ∑§Ë
of the reaction B is twice to that of ‚Á∑˝§ÿáÊ ™§¡Ê¸ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ A ‚ ŒÈªŸË „Ê–
reaction A.
(1) 9.84 K
(2) 4.92 K (1) 9.84 K
(3) 2.45 K (2) 4.92 K
(4) 19.67 K (3) 2.45 K
(4) 19.67 K
10. The enthalpy change on freezing of 1 mol
of water at 58C to ice at −58C is :
10. 58C ¬⁄U 1 ◊Ê‹ ¡‹ ∑§ Á„◊Ÿ ‚ −58C ¬⁄U ’»¸§
(Given ∆ fus H=6 kJ mol −1 at 08C, ’ŸÊŸ ◊¥ ∞ãÕÒÀ¬Ë ∑§Ê ¬Á⁄UfløŸ „ÊªÊ —
Cp(H2O, l)=75.3 J mol−1 K−1,
Cp(H2O, s)=36.8 J mol−1 K−1) ( ÁŒÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò ∆ fus H=6 kJ mol−1 at 08C,
(1) 5.44 kJ mol−1 Cp(H2O, l)=75.3 J mol−1 K−1,
Cp(H2O, s)=36.8 J mol−1 K−1)
(2) 5.81 kJ mol−1
(1) 5.44 kJ mol−1
(3) 6.56 kJ mol−1
(2) 5.81 kJ mol−1
(4) 6.00 kJ mol−1
(3) 6.56 kJ mol−1
(4) 6.00 kJ mol−1
11. Which of the following is paramagnetic ?
(1) NO+
(2) CO
11. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê •ŸÈøÈê’∑§Ëÿ „Ò?
(1) NO+
2−
(3) O2 (2) CO
(4) B2 2−
(3) O2

(4) B2

4 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

12. The pair of compounds having metals in 12. Á¡‚ ÿÊÒ Á ª∑§ ÿÈ Ç ◊ ◊ ¥ , œÊÃÈ ∞  ¥ •¬ŸË ©ëøÃ◊
their highest oxidation state is :
•ÊÚÄ‚Ë∑§⁄UáÊ •flSÕÊ ◊¥ „Ò¥, fl„ „Ò —
(1) MnO2 and CrO2Cl2
(1) MnO2 ÃÕÊ CrO2Cl2
(2) [NiCl4]2− and [CoCl4]2−
(3) [Fe(CN)6]3− and [Cu(CN)4]2−
(2) [NiCl4]2− ÃÕÊ [CoCl4]2−
(4) [FeCl4]− and Co2O3 (3) [Fe(CN)6]3− ÃÕÊ [Cu(CN)4]2−

(4) [FeCl4]− ÃÕÊ Co2O3

13. sp3d2 hybridization is not displayed by :
(1) BrF5 13. Á¡‚∑§ mÊ⁄UÊ sp3d2 ‚¥∑§⁄UáÊ Ÿ„Ë¥ Œ‡ÊʸÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ, fl„ „Ò —
(2) SF6
(1) BrF5
(3) [CrF6]3−
(2) SF6
(4) PF5
(3) [CrF6]3−
(4) PF5
14. Identify the pollutant gases largely
responsible for the discoloured and
lustreless nature of marble of the Taj 14. fl„ ¬˝ŒÍ·∑§ ªÒ‚¥ ¬„øÊÁŸÿ ¡Ê ÃÊ¡◊„‹ ∑§ ‚¥ª◊⁄U◊⁄U
Mahal. ∑§ ◊Á‹Ÿ fl ŒËÁåÄ˟ „ÊŸ ∑§ Á‹∞ ◊ÈÅÿ× ©ûÊ⁄UŒÊÿË
(1) O3 and CO2 „Ò–¥
(2) CO2 and NO2
(3) SO2 and NO2 (1) O3 ÃÕÊ CO2
(4) SO2 and O3 (2) CO2 ÃÕÊ NO2
(3) SO2 ÃÕÊ NO2
15. In which of the following reactions,
hydrogen peroxide acts as an oxidizing (4) SO2 ÃÕÊ O3
agent ?
(1) HOCl+H2O2 → H3O++Cl−+O2
15. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ Á∑§‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ◊¥ „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ
(2) I2+H2O2+2OH−→ 2I−+2H2O+O2
¬⁄U•ÊÚÄ‚Êß«U •ÊÚÄ‚Ë∑§Ê⁄U∑§ ∑§ M§¬ ◊¥ ∑§Êÿ¸ ∑§⁄UÃË „Ò?
(3) 2MnO−
4 +3H2 O 2 → 2MnO 2 +3O 2 +
(1) HOCl+H2O2 → H3O++Cl−+O2
2H 2 O+2OH−
(2) I2+H2O2+2OH−→ 2I−+2H2O+O2
(4) PbS+4H2O2 → PbSO4+4H2O
(3) 2MnO−
4 +3H2 O 2 → 2MnO 2 +3O 2 +
2H 2 O+2OH−

(4) PbS+4H2O2 → PbSO4+4H2O

5 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

16. Consider the following ionization 16. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ŒÊ ÃàflÊ¥ ‘A’ ÃÕÊ ‘B’ ∑§Ë •ÊÿŸŸ
enthalpies of two elements ‘A’ and ‘B’.
∞ãÕÒÁÀ¬ÿÊ¥ ¬⁄U ÁfløÊ⁄U ∑§ËÁ¡∞–
Element Ionization enthalpy (kJ/mol)
Ãàfl •ÊÿŸŸ ∞ãÕÒÀ¬Ë (kJ/mol)
st nd rd
1 2 3
¬˝Õ◊ ÁmÃËÿ ÃÎÃËÿ
A 899 1757 14847
A 899 1757 14847
B 737 1450 7731
B 737 1450 7731
Which of the following statements is
correct ? ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ∑§ÕŸ ‚àÿ „Ò?
(1) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ belong to group-1
where ‘B’ comes below ‘A’. (1) ‘A’ •ÊÒ⁄U ŒÊŸÊ¥ flª¸ 1 ◊¥ ©¬ÁSÕà „Ò¥ ÃÕÊ
‘B’
(2) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ belong to group-1 ‘B’, ‘A’ ∑§ ŸËø •ÊÃÊ „Ò–
where ‘A’ comes below ‘B’.
(2) ‘A’ •ÊÒ⁄U ‘B’ ŒÊŸÊ¥ flª¸ 1 ◊¥ ©¬ÁSÕà „Ò¥ ÃÕÊ
(3) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ belong to group-2
where ‘B’ comes below ‘A’. ‘A’, ‘B’ ∑§ ŸËø •ÊÃÊ „Ò–

(4) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ belong to group-2 (3) ‘A’ •ÊÒ⁄U ‘B’ ŒÊŸÊ¥ flª¸ 2 ◊¥ ©¬ÁSÕà „Ò¥ ÃÕÊ
where ‘A’ comes below ‘B’. ‘B’, ‘A’ ∑§ ŸËø •ÊÃÊ „Ò–

(4) ‘A’ •ÊÒ⁄U ‘B’ ŒÊŸÊ¥ flª¸ 2 ◊¥ ©¬ÁSÕà „Ò¥ ÃÕÊ
17. Consider the following standard electrode ‘A’, ‘B’ ∑§ ŸËø •ÊÃÊ „Ò–
potentials (E8 in volts) in aqueous solution :

Element M 3+ / M M+ / M 17. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ¡‹Ëÿ Áfl‹ÿŸÊ¥ ◊¥ ◊ÊŸ∑§ ß‹Ä≈˛UÊ«U

Al −1.66 + 0.55 Áfl÷flÊ¥ (E8, flÊÀ≈U ◊¥) ¬⁄U ÁfløÊ⁄U ∑§⁄¥U —
Tl +1.26 − 0.34
Ãàfl M 3+ / M M+ / M
Based on these data, which of the following
statements is correct ? Al −1.66 + 0.55
Tl +1.26 − 0.34
(1) Tl+ is more stable than Al3+
(2) Al+ is more stable than Al3+ ߟ •Ê°∑§«∏Ê¥ ∑§ •ÊœÊ⁄U ¬⁄U, ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê
(3) Tl+ is more stable than Al+ ∑§ÕŸ ‚àÿ „Ò?
(4) Tl3+ is more stable than Al3+ (1) Al3+ ‚ Tl+ •Áœ∑§ ÁSÕ⁄U „Ò–
(2) Al3+ ‚ Al+ •Áœ∑§ ÁSÕ⁄U „Ò–
(3) Al+ ‚ Tl+ •Áœ∑§ ÁSÕ⁄U „Ò–
(4) Al3+ ‚ Tl3+ •Áœ∑§ ÁSÕ⁄U „Ò–

6 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

18. A metal ‘M’ reacts with nitrogen gas to 18. ∞∑§ œÊÃÈ ‘M’, ŸÊß≈˛UÊ¡Ÿ ªÒ‚ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ
afford ‘M3N’. ‘M3N’ on heating at high
∑§⁄U∑§ M3N ©à¬ãŸ ∑§⁄UÃË „Ò– ©ëø Ãʬ ¬⁄U ª◊¸
temperature gives back ‘M’ and on
reaction with water produces a gas ‘B’. Gas ∑§⁄UŸ ¬⁄U M3N, flÊÁ¬‚ œÊÃÈ M ’ŸÊÃÊ „Ò ÃÕÊ ÿ„
‘B’ reacts with aqueous solution of CuSO4 ¡‹ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§⁄U∑§ ∞∑§ ªÒ‚ B ©àåÊãŸ
to form a deep blue compound. ‘M’ and ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– ªÒ‚ B, ¡‹Ëÿ CuSO4 ∑§ ‚ÊÕ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ
‘B’ respectively are :
∑§⁄U∑§ ∞∑§ ª„⁄U ŸË‹ ⁄¥Uª ∑§Ê ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ©àåÊ㟠∑§⁄UÃË „Ò–
(1) Li and NH3 ‘M’ ÃÕÊ ‘B’ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— „Ò¥ —
(2) Ba and N2
(1) Li ÃÕÊ NH3
(3) Na and NH3
(2) Ba ÃÕÊ N2
(4) Al and N2
(3) Na ÃÕÊ NH3
19. The number of S=O and S−OH bonds (4) Al ÃÕÊ N2
present in peroxodisulphuric acid and
pyrosulphuric acid respectively are :
(1) (2 and 2) and (2 and 2) 19. ¬⁄U•ÊÚÄ‚Ê«UÊß‚ÀçÿÍÁ⁄U∑§ •ê‹ ÃÕÊ ¬Êÿ⁄UÊ‚ÀçÿÍÁ⁄U∑§
(2) (2 and 4) and (2 and 4) •ê‹ ◊¥ Áfll◊ÊŸ S=O ÃÕÊ S−OH •Ê’¥œÊ¥ ∑§Ë
‚¥ÅÿÊ∞¥ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— „Ò¥ —
(3) (4 and 2) and (2 and 4)
(4) (4 and 2) and (4 and 2) (1) (2 ÃÕÊ 2) ÃÕÊ (2 ÃÕÊ 2)
(2) (2 ÃÕÊ 4) ÃÕÊ (2 ÃÕÊ 4)
20. A solution containing a group-IV cation (3) (4 ÃÕÊ 2) ÃÕÊ (2 ÃÕÊ 4)
gives a precipitate on passing H 2S. A
solution of this precipitate in dil.HCl (4) (4 ÃÕÊ 2) ÃÕÊ (4 ÃÕÊ 2)
produces a white precipitate with NaOH
solution and bluish-white precipitate with
basic potassium ferrocyanide. The cation 20. ∞∑§ Áfl‹ÿŸ Á¡‚◊¥ ªÈ˝¬-IV ∑§Ê ∞∑§ œŸÊÿŸ Áfll◊ÊŸ
is : „Ò, H2S ¬˝flÊÁ„à ∑§⁄UŸ ¬⁄U ∞∑§ •flˇÊ¬ ©à¬ãŸ ∑§⁄UÃÊ
(1) Co2+ „Ò– ß‚ •flˇÊ¬ ∑§Ê ÃŸÈ HCl ◊¥ ’ŸÊ Áfl‹ÿŸ, NaOH
(2) Ni2+ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ ∞∑§ ‡flà •flˇÊ¬ ÃÕÊ ˇÊÊ⁄UËÿ ¬Ê≈UÁ‡Êÿ◊
(3) Mn2+ »§⁄UÊ‚ÊÿŸÊß«U ∑§ ‚ÊÕ ŸË‹Ê-SÊ$»§Œ •flˇÊ¬ ©à¬ãŸ
(4) Zn2+ ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– ÿ„ œŸÊÿŸ „Ò —

(1) Co2+
(2) Ni2+
(3) Mn2+
(4) Zn2+

7 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

21. A mixture containing the following four
compounds is extracted with 1M HCl.
The compound that goes to aqueous layer
is :
21. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà øÊ⁄U ÿÊÒ Á ª∑§Ê ¥ ∑ § ∞∑§ Á◊üÊáÊ ∑§Ê
1M HCl ‚ ÁŸc∑§Á·¸Ã Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– fl„ ÿÊÒÁª∑§
¡Ê ¡‹Ëÿ ¬⁄Uà ◊¥ ø‹Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò, „Ò —

(I) (II) (I) (II)

(III) (IV)
(1) (I) (III) (IV)

(2) (II) (1) (I)

(3) (III) (2) (II)

(4) (IV) (3) (III)

(4) (IV)

22. The reason for “drug induced poisoning”

is : 22. •ÊÒ·œ-¬˝Á⁄Uà Áfl·ÊÄÃË∑§⁄UáÊ ∑§Ê ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ „Ò —
(1) Binding reversibly at the active site
of the enzyme
(1) ∞ã¡Êß◊ ∑§Ë ‚Á∑˝§ÿ ‚Ä ¬⁄U ©à∑˝§◊áÊËÿ
(2) Bringing conformational change in
the binding site of enzyme ‚¥ÿÊ¡Ÿ
(3) Binding irreversibly to the active site (2) ∞ã¡Êß◊ ∑§Ë ’¥œŸË ‚Ä ◊¥ ‚¥M§¬Ëÿ ¬Á⁄UfløŸ
of the enzyme
(4) Binding at the allosteric sites of the (3) ∞ã¡Êß◊ ∑§Ë ‚Á∑˝§ÿ ‚Ä ¬⁄U •ŸÈà∑˝§◊áÊËÿ
enzyme
‚¥ÿÊ¡Ÿ
(4) ∞ã¡Êß◊ ∑§Ë ∞‹ÊS≈UËÁ⁄U∑§ ‚ÄÊ¥ ¬⁄U ‚¥ÿÊ¡Ÿ

8 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

23. Which of the following compounds will 23. ÁãÊêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚ ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ∑§Ë ’ã$¡ËŸ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ
not undergo Friedel Craft’s reaction with
»˝§Ë«U‹ ∑˝§Êç≈˜U‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ Ÿ„Ë¥ „ÊªË?
benzene ?

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

24. Among the following, the essential amino

acid is : 24. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ •Êfl‡ÿ∑§ ∞◊ËŸÊ •ê‹ „Ò —
(1) Alanine
(2) Valine
(1) ∞‹ÊÁŸŸ
(3) Aspartic acid (2) flÒ‹ËŸ
(4) Serine (3) ∞S¬ÊÁ≈¸U∑§ •ê‹
(4) ‚⁄UËŸ

9 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

25. The major product expected from the 25. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ê ‚¥÷ÊÁflà ◊ÈÅÿ ©à¬ÊŒ
following reaction is :
„Ò —

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

10 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

26. The major product of the following 26. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ê ◊ÈÅÿ ©à¬ÊŒ „Ò —
reaction is :

(1) CH2=CHCH2CH=CHCH3
(1) CH2=CHCH2CH=CHCH3
(2) CH2=CHCH=CHCH2CH 3
(2) CH2=CHCH=CHCH2CH3
(3) CH3CH=C=CHCH2CH3
(3) CH3CH=C=CHCH2CH3
(4) CH3CH=CH−CH=CHCH3
(4) CH3CH=CH−CH=CHCH3

27. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ∑§ÕŸ ÁflÃ⁄UáÊ fláʸ‹πŸ

27. Which of the following statements is not
true about partition chromatography ? ∑§ ’Ê⁄U ◊¥ ‚àÿ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò?
(1) Mobile phase can be a gas (1) ªÁÇÊË‹ ¬˝ÊflSÕÊ ∞∑§ ªÒ‚ „Ê ‚∑§ÃË „Ò–
(2) Stationary phase is a finely divided (2) ÁSÕ⁄U ¬˝ÊflSÕÊ ∞∑§ ’„Èà ◊„ËŸ Á¬‚Ê „È•Ê ∆UÊ‚
solid adsorbent
•Áœ‡ÊÊ·∑§ „ÊÃÊ „Ò–
(3) Separation depends upon
equilibration of solute between a (3) ¬˝ÕÄ∑§⁄UáÊ ∞∑§ ªÁÇÊË‹ ÃÕÊ ÁSÕ⁄U ¬˝ÊflSÕÊ
mobile and a stationary phase ∑§ ’Ëø Áfl‹ÿ ∑§ ‚ÊêÿŸ ¬⁄U ÁŸ÷¸⁄U ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò–
(4) Paper chromatography is an example
of partition chromatography
(4) ∑§Êª$¡ fláʸ‹πŸ, ÁflÃ⁄UáÊ fláʸ‹πŸ ∑§Ê ∞∑§
©ŒÊ„⁄UáÊ „Ò–
28. The IUPAC name of the following
compound is :
28. ŸËø ÁŒ∞ ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ∑§Ê IUPAC ŸÊ◊ „Ò —

(1) 1, 1-Dimethyl-2-ethylcyclohexane
(2) 2-Ethyl-1,1-dimethylcyclohexane (1) 1, 1-«UÊß◊ÁÕ‹-2-∞ÁÕ‹‚ÊßÄ‹Ê„Ä‚Ÿ
(3) 1-Ethyl-2,2-dimethylcyclohexane
(2) 2-∞ÁÕ‹-1,1-«UÊß◊ÁÕ‹‚ÊßÄ‹Ê„Ä‚Ÿ
(4) 2, 2-Dimethyl-1-ethylcyclohexane
(3) 1-∞ÁÕ‹-2,2-«UÊß◊ÁÕ‹‚ÊßÄ‹Ê„Ä‚Ÿ

(4) 2, 2-«UÊß◊ÁÕ‹-1-∞ÁÕ‹‚ÊßÄ‹Ê„Ä‚Ÿ

11 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

29. The major product of the following 29. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ê ◊ÈÅÿ ©à¬ÊŒ „Ò —
reaction is :

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

12 VI - CHEMISTRY
(English+Hindi)

30. The major product of the following 30. ÁŸêŸ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ê ◊ÈÅÿ ©à¬ÊŒ „Ò —
reaction is :

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

13 VI - CHEMISTRY
 JEE Main 2017 Official Question Paper 1 Mathematics, April 8
(English+Hindi)

MATHEMATICS ªÁáÊÃ

1. Let f (x)=210⋅x+1 and g(x)=310⋅x−1. If

1. ◊ÊŸÊ f (x)=210⋅x+1 ÃÕÊ g(x)=310⋅x−1– ÿÁŒ
(fog)(x)=x, then x is equal to :
(fog)(x)=x „Ò, ÃÊ x ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
310 − 1
(1) 310 − 1
310 − 2−10 (1)
310 − 2−10
2 10 − 1
(2) 2 10 − 1
2 10 − 3−10 (2)
2 10 − 3−10
1 − 3−10
(3) 1 − 3−10
2 10 − 3−10 (3)
2 10 − 3−10
1 − 2−10
(4) 1 − 2−10
310 − 2−10 (4)
310 − 2−10

2. Let p(x) be a quadratic polynomial such

that p(0)=1. If p(x) leaves remainder 4 2. ◊ÊŸÊ p(x) ∞‚Ê ∞∑§ ÁmÉÊÊÃË ’„ȬŒ „Ò Á¡‚∑§ Á‹ÿ
when divided by x−1 and it leaves p(0)=1 „Ò– ÿÁŒ p(x) ∑§Ê x−1 ‚ ÷ʪ ŒŸ ¬⁄U 4
remainder 6 when divided by x+1; then :
‡Ê· ⁄U„ÃÊ „Ò ÃÕÊ x+1 ‚ ÷ʪ ŒŸ ¬⁄U 6 ‡Ê· ’øÃÊ „Ò,
(1) p(2)=11 ÃÊ —
(2) p(2)=19
(1) p(2)=11
(3) p(−2)=19
(2) p(2)=19
(4) p(−2)=11
(3) p(−2)=19
(4) p(−2)=11

1 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

3. Let z e C, the set of complex numbers. Then 3. ◊ÊŸÊ z e C, ¡Ê ‚Áê◊üÊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ•Ê¥ ∑§Ê ‚◊ÈìÊÿ „Ò, ÃÊ
the equation, 2?z+3i?−?z−i?=0
‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ 2?z+3i?−?z−i?=0 ¬˝ŒÁ‡Ê¸Ã ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò —
represents :

8
(1) a circle with radius . 8
3 (1) ∞∑§ flÎûÊ Á¡‚∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ „Ò–
3
10
(2) a circle with diameter . 10
3 (2) ∞∑§ flÎûÊ Á¡‚∑§Ê √ÿÊ‚ „Ò–
3
(3) an ellipse with length of major axis
16 . (3) ∞∑§ ŒËÉʸflÎûÊ Á¡‚∑§ ŒËÉʸ •ˇÊ ∑§Ë ‹¥’Ê߸
3 16 „Ò
(4) an ellipse with length of minor axis 3

16 (4) ∞∑§ ŒËÉʸflÎûÊ Á¡‚∑§ ‹ÉÊÈ •ˇÊ ∑§Ë ‹¥’Ê߸

.
9 16
„Ò–
9
4. The number of real values of λ for which
the system of linear equations
4. λ ∑§ ©Ÿ flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ◊ÊŸÊ¥ ∑§Ë ‚¥ÅÿÊ Á¡Ÿ∑§ Á‹∞
2x+4y−λz=0 ⁄ÒUÁπ∑§ ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ ÁŸ∑§Êÿ
4x+λy+2z=0
2x+4y−λz=0
λx+2y+2z=0
4x+λy+2z=0
has infinitely many solutions, is :
λx+2y+2z=0
(1) 0
∑§ •Ÿ¥Ã „‹ „Ò¥, „Ò —
(2) 1
(1) 0
(3) 2
(2) 1
(4) 3
(3) 2
(4) 3
5. Let A be any 3×3 invertible matrix. Then
which one of the following is not always
true ? 5. ◊ÊŸÊ A ∑§Ê߸ 3×3 ∑§Ê √ÿÈà∑˝§◊áÊËÿ •Ê√ÿÍ„ „Ò ÃÊ
(1) adj (A)=?A?⋅ A−1 ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê ‚ŒÊ ‚àÿ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò?
(2) adj (adj(A))=?A?⋅A
(3) adj (adj(A))=?A?2⋅(adj(A))−1 (1) adj (A)=?A?⋅A−1
(4) adj (adj(A))=?A?⋅(adj(A))−1 (2) adj (adj(A))=?A?⋅A
(3) adj (adj(A))=?A?2⋅(adj(A))−1
(4) adj (adj(A))=?A?⋅(adj(A))−1

2 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

6. If all the words, with or without meaning, 6. ‡ÊéŒ QUEEN ∑§ ‚÷Ë •ˇÊ⁄UÊ¥ ∑§Ê ¬˝ÿÊª ∑§⁄U∑§ ’ŸŸ
are written using the letters of the word
flÊ‹ ‚÷Ë ‡ÊéŒ (Á¡Ÿ∑§Ê •Õ¸ „Ò •ÕflÊ fl •Õ¸„ËŸ
QUEEN and are arranged as in English
dictionary, then the position of the word „Ò¥) ∑§Ê •¥ª˝¡Ë ‡ÊéŒ∑§Ê· ∑§ •ŸÈ‚Ê⁄U ‹ªÊŸ ¬⁄U, ‡ÊéŒ
QUEEN is : QUEEN ∑§Ê SÕÊŸ „Ò —
(1) 44 th
(2) 45 th (1) 44 flʥ
(3) 46 th (2) 45 flʥ
(4) 47 th
(3) 46 flʥ

(4) 47 flʥ
7. If (27) 999 is divided by 7, then the
remainder is :
(1) 1 7. ÿÁŒ (27)999 ∑§Ê 7 ‚ ÷ʪ ÁŒÿÊ ¡Ê∞, ÃÊ ‡Ê·»§‹ „Ò —
(2) 2
(3) 3 (1) 1
(4) 6 (2) 2
(3) 3
8. If the arithmetic mean of two numbers a (4) 6
and b, a > b > 0, is five times their geometric
a+b
mean, then
a−b
is equal to : 8. ÿÁŒ ŒÊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ•Ê¥ a ÃÕÊ b, a > b > 0 ∑§Ê ‚◊Ê¥Ã⁄U
◊Êäÿ (A.M.) ©Ÿ∑§ ªÈáÊÊûÊ⁄U ◊Êäÿ (G.M.) ∑§Ê
6 a+b
(1) 5 ªÈŸÊ „Ò, ÃÊ ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
2 a−b

3 2 6
(2) (1)
4 2

7 3 3 2
(3) (2)
12 4

5 6 7 3
(4) (3)
12 12

5 6
(4)
12

3 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

9. If the sum of the first n terms of the series 9. ÿÁŒ üÊáÊË 3 + 75 + 243 + 507 + .....
3 + 75 + 243 + 507 + ..... is 435 3 ,
∑§ ¬˝Õ◊ n ¬ŒÊ¥ ∑§Ê ÿÊª 435 3 „Ò, ÃÊ n ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
then n equals :
(1) 18
(1) 18
(2) 15
(2) 15
(3) 13
(3) 13
(4) 29
(4) 29

lim 3x − 3
10. is equal to : lim 3x − 3
x →3 2x − 4 − 2 10. x →3
’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
2x − 4 − 2
(1) 3
(1) 3
1
(2) 1
2 (2)
2
3
(3) 3
2 (3)
2
1
(4) 1
2 2 (4)
2 2

11. The tangent at the point (2, −2) to the

curve, x 2y 2−2x=4(1−y) does not pass 11. fl∑˝§ x2y2−2x=4(1−y) ∑§ Á’¥ŒÈ (2, −2) ¬⁄U
through the point : πË¥øË ªß¸ S¬‡Ê¸ ⁄UπÊ ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ Á∑§‚ Á’¥ŒÈ ‚ Ÿ„Ë¥
 1 ªÈ¡⁄UÃË „Ò —
(1)  4, 
 3
 1
(1)  4, 
(2) (8, 5)  3
(3) (−4, −9) (2) (8, 5)
(4) (−2, −7) (3) (−4, −9)
(4) (−2, −7)

4 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

15 15 15 15
12. If y =  x+ x 2 −1  +  x − x 2 −1  , 12. ÿÁŒ y =  x+ x 2 −1  +  x − x 2 −1 
       

d2 y dy d2 y dy
then ( x 2 − 1) 2
+x is equal to : „Ò, ÃÊ 2
( x − 1) 2
+x ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
dx dx dx dx

(1) 125 y (1) 125 y

(2) 224 y2 (2) 224 y2
(3) 225 y2 (3) 225 y2
(4) 225 y (4) 225 y

13. If a point P has co-ordinates (0, −2) and
Q is any point on the circle,
x2+y2−5x−y+5=0, then the maximum
value of (PQ)2 is :
13. ÿÁŒ Á∑§‚Ë Á’ãŒÈ P ∑§ ÁŸŒ¸‡ÊÊ¥∑§ (0, −2) „Ò¥ ÃÕÊ ∑§Ê߸
Á’ãŒÈ Q flÎûÊ x2+y2−5x−y+5=0 ¬⁄U ÁSÕà „Ò,
ÃÊ (PQ)2 ∑§Ê •Áœ∑§Ã◊ ◊ÊŸ „Ò —

25 + 6
(1)
2 25 + 6
(1)
2
(2) 14 + 5 3
(2) 14 + 5 3
47 + 10 6
(3)
2 47 + 10 6
(3)
2
(4) 8 +5 3
(4) 8 +5 3

5 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

14. The integral 14. ‚◊Ê∑§‹

∫ 1 + 2cot x(cosec x + cot x ) dx
∫ 1 + 2cot x(cosec x + cot x ) dx ,

 π  π
 0 < x <  is equal to : 0 < x <  ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
 2  2
(where C is a constant of integration)
(¡„Ê° C ∞∑§ ‚◊Ê∑§‹Ÿ •ø⁄U „Ò)
4 log  sin  + C
x
(1) 4 log  sin  + C
x
 2 (1)
 2

2 log  sin  + C
x
(2) 2 log  sin  + C
x
 2 (2)
 2

2 log  cos  + C
x
(3) 2 log  cos  + C
x
 2 (3)
 2

4 log  cos  + C
x
(4) 4 log  cos  + C
x
 2 (4)
 2

π
8 cos 2x
∫
4
15. The integral dx π
8 cos 2x
π 3
(tan x + cot x ) 15. ‚◊Ê∑§‹ ∫ π4 dx ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
(tan x + cot x )3
12
12
equals :

15
(1) 15
128 (1)
128
15
(2) 15
64 (2)
64
13
(3) 13
32 (3)
32
13
(4) 13
256 (4)
256

6 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

16. The area (in sq. units) of the smaller portion 16. fl∑˝§Ê¥ x2+y2=4 ÃÕÊ y2=3x ∑§ ’Ëø ÁÉÊ⁄U ¿UÊ≈U
enclosed between the curves, x2+y2=4
÷ʪ ∑§Ê ˇÊòÊ»§‹ (flª¸ ß∑§ÊßÿÊ¥ ◊¥) „Ò —
and y2=3x, is :

1 π
(1) + 1 π
2 3 3 (1) +
2 3 3
1 2π
(2) + 1 2π
3 3 (2) +
3 3
1 2π
(3) + 1 2π
2 3 3 (3) +
2 3 3
1 4π
(4) + 1 4π
3 3 (4) +
3 3

17. The curve satisfying the differential

equation, ydx−(x+3y 2 )dy=0 and 17. •fl∑§‹ ‚◊Ë∑§⁄U á Ê ydx−(x+3y2)dy=0 ∑§Ê
passing through the point (1, 1), also passes ‚¥ÃÈc≈U ∑§⁄UŸ flÊ‹Ë flÊ fl∑˝§, ¡Ê Á’¥ŒÈ (1, 1) ‚ „Ê∑§⁄U
through the point :
¡ÊÃË „Ò, ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ Á∑§‚ Á’¥ŒÈ ‚ ÷Ë „Ê∑§⁄U ¡ÊÃË „Ò —
(1) 1 1
 ,− 
4 2
(1) 1 1
 ,− 
 1 1 4 2
(2) − , 
 3 3
 1 1
(2) − , 
1 1  3 3
(3)  ,− 
3 3
1 1
(3)  ,− 
1 1 3 3
(4)  , 
4 2
1 1
(4)  , 
4 2

7 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

18. The locus of the point of intersection of the 18. ⁄UπÊ•Ê¥

straight lines, tx−2y−3t=0
tx−2y−3t=0
x−2ty+3=0 (t e R) ∑§ ¬˝ÁÃë¿UŒŸ Á’¥ŒÈ ∑§Ê Á’¥ŒÈ
x−2ty+3=0 (t e R), is : ¬Õ „Ò —
2
2 (1) ∞∑§ ŒËÉʸflÎûÊ Á¡‚∑§Ë ©à∑§ãŒ˝ÃÊ „Ò
(1) an ellipse with eccentricity 5
5
(2) an ellipse with the length of major
(2) ∞∑§ ŒËÉʸflÎûÊ Á¡‚∑§ ŒËÉʸ •ˇÊ ∑§Ë ‹¥’Ê߸ 6 „Ò
axis 6

(3) a hyperbola with eccentricity 5 (3) ∞∑§ •Áì⁄Ufl‹ÿ Á¡‚∑§Ë ©à∑§ãŒ˝ÃÊ 5 „Ò

(4) a hyperbola with the length of (4) ∞∑§ •Áì⁄U fl ‹ÿ Á¡‚∑ § ‚¥ ÿ È Ç ◊Ë •ˇÊ
conjugate axis 3 (conjugate axis) ∑§Ë ‹¥’Ê߸ 3 „Ò

19. If two parallel chords of a circle, having

diameter 4 units, lie on the opposite sides 19. ÿÁŒ ∞∑§ flÎûÊ Á¡‚∑§Ê √ÿÊ‚ 4 ß∑§Ê߸ „Ò ∑§Ë ŒÊ ‚◊Ê¥Ã⁄U
of the centre and subtend angles ¡ËflÊ∞°, ¡Ê flÎûÊ ∑§ ∑¥§Œ˝ ∑§Ë Áfl¬⁄UËà ÁŒ‡ÊÊ•Ê¥ ◊¥ „Ò¥ ÃÕÊ
cos−1   and sec −1 (7) at the centre ∑§ãŒ˝ ¬⁄U ∑˝§◊‡Ê— cos−1  1  ÃÕÊ sec−1(7) ∑§ ∑§ÊáÊ
1
7 7
respectively, then the distance between •¥ÃÁ⁄Uà ∑§⁄UÃË „Ò¥, ÃÊ ߟ ¡ËflÊ•Ê¥ ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË
these chords, is :
„Ò —
4
(1)
7 4
(1)
8 7
(2)
7 8
(2)
8 7
(3)
7 8
(3)
16 7
(4)
7 16
(4)
7

8 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

20. If the common tangents to the parabola, 20. ÿÁŒ ¬⁄Ufl‹ÿ x2=4y ÃÕÊ flÎûÊ x2+y2=4 ∑§Ë
x2=4y and the circle, x2+y2=4 intersect
©÷ÿÁŸc∆U S¬‡Ê¸ ⁄UπÊ∞° ∞∑§ Á’¥ŒÈ P ¬⁄U ¬˝ÁÃë¿UŒ ∑§⁄UÃË
at the point P, then the distance of P from
the origin, is : „Ò¥, ÃÊ P ∑§Ë ◊Í‹ Á’¥ŒÈ ‚ ŒÍ⁄UË „Ò —
(1) 2 +1
(1) 2 +1
(2) 2(3 + 2 2 )
(2) 2(3 + 2 2 )
(3) 2 ( 2 + 1)
(3) 2 ( 2 + 1)
(4) 3+2 2
(4) 3+2 2

21. Consider an ellipse, whose centre is at the

origin and its major axis is along the 21. ∞∑§ ŒËÉʸflÎûÊ, Á¡‚∑§Ê ∑¥§Œ˝ ◊Í‹ Á’¥ŒÈ ¬⁄U „Ò ÃÕÊ ŒËÉʸ
x-axis. If its eccentricity is
3
and the •ˇÊ x-•ˇÊ ∑§Ë ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ „Ò, ¬⁄U ÁfløÊ⁄U ∑§ËÁ¡∞– ÿÁŒ
5
3
distance between its foci is 6, then the area ©‚∑§Ë ©à∑§ãŒ˝ÃÊ ÃÕÊ ŸÊÁ÷ÿÊ¥ ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË
5
(in sq. units) of the quadrilateral inscribed
in the ellipse, with the vertices as the 6 „Ò, ÃÊ ©‚ øÃÈ÷ȸ¡, ¡Ê ŒËÉʸflÎûÊ ∑§ •ãê¸Ã ’ŸÊ߸
vertices of the ellipse, is : ªß¸ „Ò ÃÕÊ Á¡‚∑§ ‡ÊË·¸, ŒËÉʸflÎûÊ ∑§ ‡ÊË·ÊZ ¬⁄U „Ò¥, ∑§Ê
(1) 8 ˇÊòÊ»§‹ (flª¸ ß∑§ÊßÿÊ¥ ◊¥) „Ò —
(2) 32
(3) 80 (1) 8
(4) 40 (2) 32
(3) 80
(4) 40

9 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

22. The coordinates of the foot of the 22. ‚◊Ë, Á¡‚◊¥ ŒÊŸÊ¥ ⁄UπÊ∞¥
perpendicular from the point (1, −2, 1)
x +1 y −1 z −3
on the plane containing the lines, = = ÃÕÊ
6 7 8
x +1 y −1 z −3
= = and
6 7 8 x −1 y −2 z −3
= = ÁSÕà „Ò¥, ¬⁄U Á’ãŒÈ
3 5 7
x −1 y −2 z −3
= = , is : (1, −2, 1) ‚ «UÊ‹ ª∞ ‹ê’ ∑§ ¬ÊŒ ∑§ ÁŸŒ¸‡ÊÊ¥∑§
3 5 7
„Ò¥ —
(1) (2, −4, 2)
(1) (2, −4, 2)
(2) (−1, 2, −1)
(2) (−1, 2, −1)
(3) (0, 0, 0)
(3) (0, 0, 0)
(4) (1, 1, 1)
(4) (1, 1, 1)

23. The line of intersection of the planes

→
( ∧ ∧
)
r . 3 i − j + k = 1 and
∧
23. ‚◊ËÊ¥
→
( ∧ ∧
r . 3 i − j + k =1
∧
) ÃÕÊ

r . ( i + 4 j − 2 k ) = 2, is :
→ ∧ ∧ ∧ →
( ∧
r . i +4 j −2 k =2
∧ ∧
) ∑§Ë ¬˝ÁÃë¿UŒË ⁄UπÊ „Ò —

x − 74 y z − 75
(1) = =
−2 7 13 x − 74 y z − 75
(1) = =
−2 7 13
x− 4 z+ 5
7 y 7
(2) = =
2 −7 13 x − 74 y z + 75
(2) = =
2 −7 13
6
x − 13 5
y − 13 z
(3) = = 6 5
2 −7 −13 x − 13 y − 13 z
(3) = =
2 −7 −13
6
x − 13 5
y − 13 z
(4) = = 6 5
2 7 −13 x − 13 y − 13 z
(4) = =
2 7 −13

10 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

24. The area (in sq. units) of the parallelogram ∧ ∧

whose diagonals are along the vectors 24. ‚◊Ê¥Ã⁄U øÃÈ÷ȸ¡, Á¡‚∑§ Áfl∑§áʸ, ‚ÁŒ‡ÊÊ¥ 8 i −6 j
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
8 i − 6 j and 3 i + 4 j − 12 k , is : ÃÕÊ 3 i + 4 j − 12 k ∑§Ë ÁŒ‡ÊÊ•Ê¥ ◊¥ „Ò,¥ ∑§Ê ˇÊòÊ»§‹
(1) 26 (flª¸ ß∑§ÊßÿÊ¥ ◊¥) „Ò —
(2) 65 (1) 26
(3) 20 (2) 65
(4) 52 (3) 20
(4) 52
25. The mean age of 25 teachers in a school is
40 years. A teacher retires at the age of
60 years and a new teacher is appointed 25. ∞∑§ ÁfllÊ‹ÿ ∑§ 25 •äÿʬ∑§Ê¥ ∑§Ë ◊Êäÿ-•ÊÿÈ
in his place. If now the mean age of the 40 fl·¸ „Ò– ∞∑§ •äÿʬ∑§ 60 fl·¸ ∑§Ë •ÊÿÈ ◊¥ ‚flÊ
teachers in this school is 39 years, then the ÁŸflÎûÊ „ÊÃÊ „Ò •ÊÒ⁄U ©‚∑§ SÕÊŸ ¬⁄U ∞∑§ Ÿÿ •äÿʬ∑§
age (in years) of the newly appointed
teacher is :
∑§Ë ÁŸÿÈÁÄà „ÊÃË „Ò– ÿÁŒ •’ ß‚ ÁfllÊ‹ÿ ∑§
•äÿʬ∑§Ê¥ ∑§Ë ◊Êäÿ-•ÊÿÈ 39 fl·¸ „Ò ÃÊ Ÿÿ •äÿʬ∑§
(1) 25
∑§Ë •ÊÿÈ (fl·ÊZ ◊¥) „Ò —
(2) 30
(3) 35 (1) 25
(4) 40 (2) 30
(3) 35
(4) 40

11 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

26. Three persons P, Q and R independently 26. ÃËŸ √ÿÁÄà P, Q ÃÕÊ R SflÃ¥òÊ M§¬ ‚ ∞∑§ ÁŸ‡ÊÊŸ
try to hit a target. If the probabilities of
∑§Ê ÷ŒŸ ∑§Ê ¬˝ÿÊ‚ ∑§⁄UÃ „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ ©Ÿ∑§ ÁŸ‡ÊÊŸ ∑§Ê
3 1 5
their hitting the target are , and 3 1 5
4 2 8 ÷Œ ¬ÊŸ ∑§Ë ¬˝ÊÁÿ∑§ÃÊ∞¥ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— , ÃÕÊ „Ò¥, ÃÊ
4 2 8
respectively, then the probability that the
target is hit by P or Q but not by R is : P •ÕflÊ Q ∑§ ÁŸ‡ÊÊŸÊ ÷Œ ¬ÊŸ ¬⁄UãÃÈ R ∑§ ÁŸ‡ÊÊŸÊ Ÿ
÷Œ ¬ÊŸ ∑§Ë ¬˝ÊÁÿ∑§ÃÊ „Ò —
21
(1)
64 21
(1)
64
9
(2)
64 9
(2)
64
15
(3)
64 15
(3)
64
39
(4)
64 39
(4)
64

27. An unbiased coin is tossed eight times. The

probability of obtaining at least one head 27. ∞∑§ •ŸÁ÷ŸÃ (unbiased) Á‚Ä∑§ ∑§Ê •Ê∆U ’Ê⁄U
and at least one tail is :
©¿UÊ‹Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò, ÃÊ ∑§◊ ‚ ∑§◊ ∞∑§ ÁøûÊ ÃÕÊ ∑§◊ ‚
(1)
255 ∑§◊ ∞∑§ ¬≈U ¬˝Êåà ∑§⁄UŸ ∑§Ë ¬˝ÊÁÿ∑§ÃÊ „Ò —
256
255
(1)
127 256
(2)
128
127
(2)
63 128
(3)
64
63
(3)
1 64
(4)
2
1
(4)
2

12 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

28. If 28. ÿÁŒ

 0 cos x − sin x   0 cos x − sin x 
   
S =  x  [ 0, 2π] : sin x 0 cos x = 0  , S =  x  [ 0, 2 π] : sin x 0 cos x = 0 
 cos x sin x 0   
   cos x sin x 0 

tan  + x  is equal to :
π
∑ tan  + x 
then π
3  „Ò, ÃÊ ∑ ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
xȏS xȏS 3 

(1) 4 +2 3 (1) 4 +2 3
(2) −2 + 3 (2) −2 + 3
(3) −2 − 3 (3) −2 − 3
(4) −4 − 2 3 (4) −4 − 2 3

 1 + x2 + 1 − x2   1 + x2 + 1 − x2 
−1
29. The value of tan  , 29. tan−1  
 1 + x 2 − 1 − x 2   1 + x 2 − 1 − x 2 
1 1

x
< , x ≠ 0 , is equal to :
x
< , x ≠ 0, ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „Ò —
2 2
π 1
(1) + cos−1 x 2 (1)
π
+
1
cos−1 x 2
4 2 4 2
π π
(2) + cos−1 x 2 (2) + cos−1 x 2
4 4
π 1
(3) − cos−1 x 2 (3)
π
−
1
cos−1 x 2
4 2 4 2
π π
(4) − cos−1 x 2 (4) − cos−1 x 2
4 4

13 VI - MATHEMATICS
(English+Hindi)

30. The proposition (~p) ∨ (p ∧ ~q) is equivalent 30. ∑§ÕŸ (~p) ∨ (p ∧ ~q) ‚◊ÃÈÀÿ „Ò —
to :
(1) p ∨ ~q
(1) p ∨ ~q
(2) p → ~q
(2) p → ~q
(3) p ∧ ~q
(3) p ∧ ~q
(4) q→p
(4) q→p

-o0o-
-o0o-

14 VI - MATHEMATICS
JEE-Main-Answer-Key-April-8
 JEE Main 2016 Question Paper 1 Online (April 9, 2016)
Set - 04 1
1. In the following ‘I’ refers to current and 1. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‘I’ ÁfllÈà œÊ⁄UÊ ∑§Ê ∞fl¥ •ãÿ Áøq 1. r_ç_rgrMsdp„ ‘I’ A¡ rhÛysâhpl v$ip®h¡ R>¡ s\p AÞe
other symbols have their usual meaning.
•¬Ÿ ‚Ê◊Êãÿ •Õ¸ ∑§Ê ߥÁªÃ ∑§⁄UÃ „Ò¥– ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ k„¿epAp¡ s¡_p¡ âQrgs A\®. _uQ¡ Ap`¡g rhL$ë`p¡dp„\u
Choose the option that corresponds to the
dimensions of electrical conductivity : ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê Áfl∑§À¬ flÒlÈà øÊ‹∑§ÃÊ ∑§Ë ‚„Ë Áfl◊Ê ∑§Ê rhÛyshplL$sp_y„ kpQy„ `qfdpZ v$ip®hsp¡ rhL$ë` `k„v$
(1) ML−3 T−3 I2 ’ÃÊÃÊ „Ò? L$fp¡.
(2) M−1 L3 T3 I (1) ML−3 T−3 I2 (1) ML−3 T−3 I2
(3) M−1 L−3 T3 I2 (2) M−1 L3 T3 I (2) M−1 L3 T3 I
(4) M−1 L−3 T3 I (3) M−1 L−3 T3 I2 (3) M−1 L−3 T3 I2
(4) M−1 L−3 T3 I (4) M−1 L−3 T3 I

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04
2. Which of the following option correctly
describes the variation of the speed v and
acceleration ‘a’ of a point mass falling
vertically in a viscous medium that applies
a force F =−kv, where ‘k’ is a constant, on
the body ? (Graphs are schematic and not
drawn to scale)
(1)
2. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê Áfl∑§À¬ ©‚ Á’ãŒÈ-Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ
∑§Ë ªÁà ‘v’ •ÊÒ⁄U àfl⁄UáÊ ‘a’ ∑§ ’Œ‹Êfl ∑§Ê ‚„Ë Ã⁄U„ ‚
Œ‡ÊʸÃÊ „Ò ¡Ê Á∑§ Á∑§‚Ë ‡ÿÊŸ ◊Êäÿ◊ ◊¥ ™§äflʸœ⁄U ÁŒ‡ÊÊ
◊¥ ŸËø ∑§Ë •Ê⁄U Áª⁄UÃ „È∞ ◊Êäÿ◊ ∑§ ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ ∞∑§ ’‹
F =−kv, ¡„Ê° ¬⁄U ‘k’ ∞∑§ ÁŸÿÃÊ¥∑§ „Ò, ∑§Ê •ŸÈ÷fl
∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– (ª˝Ê»§Ê¥ ∑§Ê √ÿflSÕÊà◊∑§ ÁŸM§¬áÊ ◊ʬ ∑§
•ŸÈ‚Ê⁄U Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò–)
(1)
2
2. r_ç_rgrMs rhL$ë`p¡dp„\u L$ep¡ rhL$ë` tbvy$ Öìedp__u
Nrs v A_¡ âh¡N a _p¡ kpQp¡ k„b„^ hZ®h¡ R>¡. Alu
tbvy$ Öìedp_ A¡ õ\p_ dpÝed L¡$ S>¡ F =−kv S>¡V$gp¡
`v$p\® `f bm gNpX¡$ R>¡ s¡hp dpÝeddp„ DÝh® _uQ¡ sfa
`X¡$ R>¡. ‘k’ A¡ AQmp„L$ R>¡. (N°pa_y„ ìehõ\pÐdL$ r_ê$`Z
R>¡ A_¡ dp` A_ykpf _\u.)
(1)

(2)
(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)
(4)

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 3
3. A rocket is fired vertically from the earth 3. ∞∑§ ⁄UÊÚ∑§≈U ∑§Ê ¬ÎâflË ‚ ™§äflʸœ⁄U ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ 2g ∑§ àfl⁄UáÊ 3. A¡L$ fp¡L¡$V$_¡ `©Õhu\u DÝh® qv$ipdp„ 2g âh¡N\u ân¡r`s
with an acceleration of 2g, where g is the
‚ ¬˝ˇÊÁ¬Ã Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò– ß‚ ⁄UÊÚ∑§≈U ∑§ •¥Œ⁄ U ˇÊÒÁá L$fhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡. Al] g NyfyÐhâh¡N R>¡. Ap fp¡L¡$V$dp„
gravitational acceleration. On an inclined
plane inside the rocket, making an angle θ ‚ θ ∑§ÊáÊ ’ŸÊÃ „È∞ ∞∑§ •ÊŸÃ-Ë ¬⁄U ∞∑§ kdrnrsS> kp\¡ θ S>¡V$gp¡ MyZp¡ b_phsp Y$msp `pqV$ep
with the horizontal, a point object of mass m Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ∑§Ê Á’¥ŒÈ ∑§áÊ ÁSÕà „Ò– ÿÁŒ ⁄UÊÚ∑§≈U ∑§ `f m - v$m_p¡ A¡L$ tbvy$hs `v$p\® dyL¡$g R>¡. Ap v$m
m is kept. The minimum coefficient of ¬˝ˇÊÁ¬Ã „ÊŸ ¬⁄U Á’¥ŒÈ-∑§áÊ ÁSÕ⁄U •flSÕÊ ◊¥ „Ë ⁄U„ÃÊ „Ò [õ\f fl¡ (Mk¡ _lu) s¡ dpV¡$_p¡ v$m A_¡ Y$msp `pqV$ep_u
Ã’ Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ∞fl¥ •ÊŸÃ Ë ∑§ ’Ëø ÉÊ·¸áÊ-ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§
friction µmin between the mass and the
inclined surface such that the mass does not
k`pV$u hÃQ¡_p¡ gOyÑd ^j®Zp¯L$ µmin R>¡.
move is : µmin ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ ÄÿÊ „ÊªÊ? (‘g’ ªÈL§àflËÿ àfl⁄UáÊ „Ò) — (1) tanθ
(1) tanθ (1) tanθ (2) 2 tanθ
(2) 2 tanθ (2) 2 tanθ (3) 3 tanθ
(3) 3 tanθ (3) 3 tanθ (4) tan2θ
(4) tan2θ (4) tan2θ
4. 1 km _p A„sf ky^udp„ 100 m S>¡V$gp¡ KQp¡ \C S>sp
4. A car of weight W is on an inclined road 4. ∞∑§ W ÷Ê⁄U ∑§Ë ∑§Ê⁄U ∞∑§ ∞‚Ë •ÊŸÃ-‚«∏∑§ ¬⁄U ø‹ Y$p¡mphhpmp fp¡X$ D`f W hS>__u A¡L$ L$pf R>¡.
that rises by 100 m over a distance of 1 km ⁄U„Ë „Ò ¡Ê Á∑§ 1 km ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U 100 m ™°§øË „Ê ¡ÊÃË „Ò, •
• Y$p¡mphhpmp¡ Ap fp¡X$ L$pf `f ••
S>¡V$gy„ AQm Oj®Z
•
and applies a constant frictional force
•• •ÊÒ⁄U ∑§Ê⁄U ¬⁄U ••
◊ÊŸ ∑§Ê ÁŸÿà ÉÊ·¸áÊ ’‹ ‹ªÊÃË „Ò– bm gNpX¡$ R>¡. 10 ms−1 _u Nrs\u fp¡X$ `f D`f
on the car. While moving uphill on the road
at a speed of 10 ms−1, the car needs power ÿÁŒ ∑§Ê⁄U ∑§Ê ‚«∏∑§ ¬⁄U ™§¬⁄U ∑§Ë •Ê⁄U 10 ms−1 ∑§Ë sfa S>sp„ L$pf_¡ `phf P _u S>ê$f `X¡$ R>¡. Å¡ L$pf Y$p¡mph
• ªÁà „ÃÈ P ‡ÊÁÄàÊ ∑§Ë •Êfl‡ÿ∑§ÃÊ „Ò ∞fl¥ ŸËø ∑§Ë •Ê⁄U •
`f\u v S>¡V$gu TX$`\u _uQ¡ Dsfsp `phf •
_u S>ê$f
P. If it needs power
•
while moving •
v ªÁà ‚ ø‹ÊŸ „ÃÈ ‡ÊÁÄàÊ ∑§Ë •Êfl‡ÿ∑§ÃÊ ¬«∏ÃË
downhill at speed v then value of v is : • `X¡$ sp¡ v R>¡ :
(1) 20 ms−1 „Ò, ÃÊ v ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ — (1) 20 ms−1
(2) 15 ms−1 (1) 20 ms−1 (2) 15 ms−1
(3) 10 ms−1 (2) 15 ms−1 (3) 10 ms−1
(4) 5 ms−1 (3) 10 ms−1 (4) 5 ms−1
(4) 5 ms−1

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04
5. A cubical block of side 30 cm is moving
with velocity 2 ms −1 on a smooth
horizontal surface. The surface has a bump
at a point O as shown in figure. The angular
velocity (in rad/s) of the block immediately
after it hits the bump, is :
5. ∞∑§ 30 cm ÷È¡Ê flÊ‹Ê ÉÊŸËÿ é‹ÊÚ∑§ ∞∑§ Áø∑§Ÿ ˇÊÒÁá
Ë ¬⁄U 2 ms−1 ∑§ flª ‚ ªÁÃ◊ÊŸ „Ò– ¡Ò‚Ê Á∑§ ÁøòÊ
◊¥ ÁŒπÊÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò, O ¬⁄U ∞∑§ •fl⁄UÊœ ÁSÕà „Ò– •fl⁄UÊœ
‚ ≈U∑§⁄UÊŸ ∑§ ÃÈ⁄U¥Ã ’ÊŒ é‹ÊÚ∑§ ∑§Ê ∑§ÊáÊËÿ flª (⁄UÁ«UÿŸ/
‚∑¥§«U ◊¥) „ÊªÊ —
4
5. 30 cm bpSy>hpmp¡ A¡L$ kdO_ 2 ms−1 _p h¡N\u
kdrnrsS> k`pV$u `f Nrs L$f¡ R>¡. ApL©$rÑdp„ v$ip®ìep
âdpZ¡ O tbvy$ `pk¡ A¡L$ bç` R>¡. Ap bç`_¡ A\X$pe
L¡$ sfs S> kdO__p¡ L$p¡Zueh¡N (rad/sdp„) R>¡ :

(1) 5.0
(1) 5.0 (1) 5.0 (2) 6.7
(2) 6.7 (2) 6.7 (3) 9.4
(3) 9.4 (3) 9.4 (4) 13.3
(4) 13.3 (4) 13.3
6. k|e® (S) t1 _u afs¡ Nrs L$fsp A¡L$ D`N°l_p¡ D`hgeu
∞∑§ ª˝„ ‚Íÿ¸ S ∑§ øÊ⁄UÊ¥ •Ê⁄U ∞∑§ ŒËÉʸflÎûÊËÿ ∑§ˇÊ
6. Figure shows elliptical path abcd of a planet
around the sun S such that the area of
6. dpN® abcd A¡ ApL©$rsdp„ v$ip®h¡g R>¡. Äep„ rÓcyS> csa
abcd ◊¥ ß‚ Ã⁄U„ ‚ øÄ∑§⁄U ‹ªÊÃÊ „Ò Á∑§ csa ÁòÊ÷È¡ •
• _y„ n¡Óam A¡ D`hge_p n¡Óam_y„ R>¡, db A¡ s¡_u
•
triangle csa is the area of the ellipse. (See ∑§Ê ˇÊòÊ»§‹ ŒËÉʸflÎûÊ ∑§ ˇÊòÊ»§‹ ∑§Ê ∞∑§-øÊÒÕÊ߸ „Ò •
figure) With db as the semimajor axis, and (ÿ„Ê° ¬⁄U ac ‹ÉÊÈ-•ˇÊ ∞fl¥ bd ŒËÉʸ-•ˇÊ „Ò)– ÿÁŒ v$uO®-An s\p ca s¡_u gOy-An R>¡. Å¡ D`N°l s¡_p
ca as the semiminor axis. If t1 is the time ª˝„ abc ÃÕÊ cda ∑§ˇÊËÿ ¬ÕÊ¥ ∑§ Á‹∞ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— L$nue `\ abc A_¡ cda dpV¡$ g¡hpsp¡ kde A_y¾$d¡ t1
taken for planet to go over path abc and t2 t1 ÃÕÊ t2 ∑§Ê ‚◊ÿ ‹ÃÊ „Ò, Ã’ — A_¡ t2 lp¡e sp¡ :
for path taken over cda then :

(1) t1=t2 (1) t1=t2

(1) t1=t2
(2) t1=2t2 (2) t1=2t2
(2) t1=2t2
(3) t1=3t2 (3) t1=3t2
(3) t1=3t2
(4) t1=4t2 (4) t1=4t2
(4) t1=4t2

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 5
7. 7. 7.

Consider a water jar of radius R that has
water filled up to height H and is kept on a
stand of height h (see figure). Through a
hole of radius r (r << R) at its bottom, the
water leaks out and the stream of water
coming down towards the ground has a
shape like a funnel as shown in the figure.
If the radius of the cross-section of water
stream when it hits the ground is x. Then :
∞∑§ R ÁòÊíÿÊ ∑§ ¬ÊŸË ∑§ ¡Ê⁄, Á¡‚ ¬ÊŸË ‚ H ™°§øÊ߸
Ã∑§ ÷⁄UÊ ªÿÊ „Ò, ∑§Ê h ™°§øÊ߸ ∑§ S≈Ò¥U«U ¬⁄U ⁄UπÊ ªÿÊ „Ò
(ÁøòÊ Œπ¥)– Ë ◊¥ ∞∑§ ¿UÊ≈U Á¿UŒ˝, Á¡‚∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ r
„Ò (r << R), ‚ ŸËø Áª⁄UÃ „È∞ ¬ÊŸË ∑§Ë œÊ⁄U ∞∑§
“∑§Ë¬” ∑§Ê •Ê∑§Ê⁄U œÊ⁄UáÊ ∑§⁄UÃË „Ò– ÿÁŒ ÷ÍÁ◊ ∑§ Ë
¬⁄U ¬ÊŸË ∑§Ë œÊ⁄U ∑§ •ŸÈ¬˝SÕ ∑§Ê≈U ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ x „Ò,
Ã’ —
R rÓÄep ^fphsp A¡L$ `pZu_p Åfdp„ H KQpC ky^u_y„
`pZu cf¡gy A_¡ s¡_¡ h KQpC_p õV¡$ÞX$ `f fpM¡g R>¡
s¡d ^pfp¡. (ApL©$rs Sy>Ap¡) Åf_p smue¡ r -rÓÄep_p
A¡L$ L$pZpdp„\u (r << R) `pZu r_L$m¡ R>¡ S>¡ N°pDÞX$
sfa _pmQp_p ApL$pfdp„ Å¡hp dm¡ R>¡. Ap `pZu_u
^pfp Äepf¡ S>du__¡ AX¡$ R>¡ Ðepf¡ s¡_p ApX$R>¡v$_u rÓÄep
x R>¡ sp¡ :

• • •
• •• •••  • •• ••• 
 • •• ••• 

 • •• •• 
(1)
 • •• •• 
 (1)
 • •• •• 
(1)

• •
• • •
• • • • • •• •••
• •• ••• • •• ••• (2) 
 • •• ••
(2) 
 • •• ••
(2) 
 • •• ••   

• •
• • •
• • • • • •• •••
• •• ••• • •• ••• (3) 
 • •• •• 
(3) 
 • •• •• 
(3) 
 • •• •• 
• •
• • •
• • •• •••  • •• ••• 
• •• •••  (4)  (4)
 • •• ••

(4)
 • •• ••

  • •• ••  

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 6
8. 200 g water is heated from 40C to 60C. 8. ¬ÊŸË ∑§ ÁflSÃÊ⁄U ∑§Ê Ÿªáÿ ◊ÊŸÃ „È∞, 200 g ¬ÊŸË ∑§Ê 8. 200 g `pZu_¡ 40C \u 60C ky^u Nfd L$fhpdp„
40C ‚ 60C Ã∑§ ª⁄U◊ ∑§⁄UŸ ¬⁄U ©‚∑§Ë •Ê¥ÃÁ⁄U∑§ Aph¡ R>¡. `pZu_y„ rhõsfZ AhNZsp, s¡_u Ap„sqfL$
Ignoring the slight expansion of water, the
change in its internal energy is close to
(Given specific heat of ™§¡Ê¸ ◊¥ •ŸÈ◊ÊÁŸÃ ¬Á⁄UfløŸ „ÊªÊ (¬ÊŸË ∑§Ê ÁflÁ‡Êc≈U EÅ®dp„ \sp¡ a¡fapf A¡ gNcN li¡ :
water=4184 J/kg/K) : Ãʬ = 4184 J/kg/K ‹¥) — (`pZu_u rhriô$ Dódp=4184 J/kg/K)
(1) 8.4 kJ (1) 8.4 kJ (1) 8.4 kJ
(2) 4.2 kJ (2) 4.2 kJ (2) 4.2 kJ
(3) 16.7 kJ (3) 16.7 kJ (3) 16.7 kJ
(4) 167.4 kJ (4) 167.4 kJ (4) 167.4 kJ

9. The ratio of work done by an ideal 9. Á∑§‚Ë ‚◊÷ÊÁ⁄U∑§ ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ◊¥ ∞∑§ •ÊŒ‡Ê¸ ∞∑§¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ∑§ 9. L$p¡C kdcpqfL$ âq¾$epdp„ A¡L$ Apv$i® A¡L$ `fdpÎhue
monoatomic gas to the heat supplied to it ªÒ‚ ∑§ mÊ⁄UÊ Á∑§ÿ ª∞ ∑§Êÿ¸ ÃÕÊ ©‚ ŒË ªß¸ ™§c◊Ê ∑§Ê hpey Üpfp \sp L$pe® s\p s¡_¡ Ap`hpdp„ Aphsu Dódp_p¡
in an isobaric process is :
•ŸÈ¬Êà „ÊªÊ — NyZp¡Ñf R>¡ :
•
• •
•
(1)
•
(1)
•
(1)
•
• •
•
(2)
•
(2)
•
(2)
•
• •
•
(3)
•
(3)
•
(3)
•
• •
•
(4)
•
(4)
•
(4)

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 7
10. Two particles are performing simple 10. ŒÊ ∑§áÊ ∞∑§ ‚⁄U‹ ⁄UπËÿ ¬Õ ¬⁄U ÁSÕà ∞∑§ „Ë ◊Êäÿ 10. A¡L$S> kdsygus tbvy$_u kp`¡n¡ b¡ L$Zp¡ ku^u f¡Mpdp„
harmonic motion in a straight line about
Á’¥ŒÈ ∑§ ‚ʬˇÊ ß‚ Ã⁄U„ ‚ ‚⁄U‹ •Êflø ªÁÃ◊ÊŸ •flSÕÊ kfm Aphs®Nrs L$f¡ R>¡. Ap b„_¡ L$Zp¡ dpV¡$ L„$`rhõspf
the same equilibrium point. The amplitude
and time period for both particles are same ◊¥ „Ò Á∑§ ©Ÿ∑§ •ÊÿÊ◊ (A) ÃÕÊ •Êflø-∑§Ê‹ (T) ∞∑§ s\p Aphs® L$pm kdp_ R>¡ A_¡ s¡ ¾$di: A s\p T R>¡.
and equal to A and T, respectively. At time ‚◊ÊŸ „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ t=0 ‚◊ÿ ¬⁄U ∞∑§-ŒÍ‚⁄U ∑§Ë Ã⁄U»§ t=0 kde¡, A¡L$buÅ sfa Aphsp A¡L$ L$Z_y„ õ\p_p„sf
t=0 one particle has displacement A while •ÊÃ „È∞, ∞∑§ ∑§áÊ ∑§Ê ÁflSÕʬŸ A „Ò ÃÕÊ ŒÍ‚⁄U ∑§áÊ • •
• • A s\p buÅ_y„ õ\p_p„sf •
R>¡. Å¡ t kde¡ s¡
• •
the other one has displacement
•
and ∑§Ê ÁflSÕʬŸ •
„Ê, ÃÊ t ‚◊ÿ ¬⁄U fl ∞∑§ ŒÍ‚⁄U ∑§Ê A¡L$buÅ_¡ `pf L$f¡ sp¡ t R>¡ :
¬Ê⁄U ∑§⁄UÃ „Ò¥– t ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
they are moving towards each other. If they
cross each other at time t, then t is : •
•
(1)
• •
•
(1)
• ••
(1)
•
(2)
•• ••
•
(2)
• •
(2)
•
(3)
• •
•
(3)
• •
(3)
•
(4)
• •
•
(4)
•
(4)
11. b¡ A¡ [ ÞS>_ A¡ L $buÅ_¡ `pf L$fsp rh`fus
11. Two engines pass each other moving in 11. ŒÊ ⁄U‹-ߥ¡Ÿ ∞∑§-ŒÍ‚⁄U ∑§Ê ¬Ê⁄U ∑§⁄UÃ „È∞ Áfl¬⁄UËà qv$ipdp„ 30 m/s _u kdp_ Nrs\u Qpg¡ R>¡ .
opposite directions with uniform speed of ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ 30 m/s ∑§Ë ∞∑§ ‚◊ÊŸ ªÁà ‚ ø‹ ⁄U„ „Ò¥– Apdp_y „ A¡ L $ A¡ [ ÞS>_ Å¡ 540 Hz Aph© r s\u
30 m/s. One of them is blowing a whistle ©Ÿ◊¥ ‚ ∞∑§ ߥ¡Ÿ ÿÁŒ 540 Hz •ÊflÎÁûÊ ‚ ‚Ë≈UË ’¡Ê kuV$u hNpX$u füy „ lp¡ e , sp¡ buÆ A¡ [ ÞS>__p
of frequency 540 Hz. Calculate the
frequency heard by driver of second engine ⁄U„Ê „Ò, ÃÊ ŒÍ‚⁄U ߥ¡Ÿ ∑§ «˛UÊ߸fl⁄U mÊ⁄UÊ ‚ÈŸË ªß¸ äflÁŸ ∑§Ë X² $ p ehf hX¡ $ k„ c mpsp AhpS>_u Aph© r s li¡ :
before they pass each other. Speed of sound •ÊflÎ Á ûÊ „Ê ª Ë (äflÁŸ ∑§Ë ªÁà ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ (AhpS>_u TX$` 330 m/sec gp¡)
is 330 m/sec : 330 m/sec ‹¥) — (1) 450 Hz
(1) 450 Hz (1) 450 Hz (2) 540 Hz
(2) 540 Hz (2) 540 Hz (3) 648 Hz
(3) 648 Hz (3) 648 Hz (4) 270 Hz
(4) 270 Hz (4) 270 Hz

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04
12. The potential (in volts) of a charge
distribution is given by
V(z)=30−5z2 for z  1 m
V(z)=35−10 z for z 1 m.
V(z) does not depend on x and y. If this
potential is generated by a constant charge
per unit volume ρ0 (in units of 0 ) which is
spread over a certain region, then choose
the correct statement.
(1) ρ 0 =10  0 for z1 m and ρ 0 =0
elsewhere
(2) ρ0=20 0 in the entire region
(3) ρ0=40 0 in the entire region
(4) ρ 0 =20  0 for z1 m and ρ 0 =0
elsewhere
13. Three capacitors each of 4 µF are to be
connected in such a way that the effective
capacitance is 6 µF. This can be done by
connecting them :
(1) all in series
(2) two in series and one in parallel
(3) all in parallel
(4) two in parallel and one in series
12. ∞∑§ •Êfl‡Ê-ÁflÃ⁄UáÊ ∑§ mÊ⁄UÊ ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà Áfl÷fl (flÊÀ≈U 12.
◊¥) ©à¬ÛÊ „ÊÃÊ „Ò —
V(z)=30−5z2, z  1 m ◊¥
V(z)=35−10 z , z 1 m ◊¥
V(z), x ∞fl¥ y ¬⁄U ÁŸ÷¸⁄U Ÿ„Ë¥ ∑§⁄UÃÊ– ÿÁŒ ÿ„ Áfl÷fl
∞∑§ ÁŸÿà •Êfl ‡ Ê ¡Ê ¬˝ Á à ß∑§Ê߸ •Êÿß
ρ0 (0 ß∑§ÊßÿÊ¥ ◊¥) „Ò ÃÕÊ ∞∑§ ÁŒÿ „È∞ ˇÊòÊ ◊¥ »Ò§‹Ê
„È•Ê „Ò, ‚ ©à¬ÊÁŒÃ „Ò, Ã’ ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ‚„Ë
Áfl∑§À¬ ∑§Ê øÿŸ ∑§⁄¥U —
(1) ρ0=10 0, z1 m ◊¥ ÃÕÊ ρ0=0 •ãÿòÊ
(2) ρ0=20 0, ‚fl¸òÊ
(3) ρ0=40 0, ‚fl¸òÊ
(4) ρ0=20 0, z1 m ◊¥ ÃÕÊ ρ0=0 •ãÿòÊ
13. 4 µF œÊÁ⁄UÃÊ ∑§ ÃËŸ ‚¥œÊÁ⁄UòÊÊ¥ ‚ ß‚ Ã⁄U„ ‚ ‚¥ÿÊ¡Ÿ 13.
’ŸÊŸÊ „Ò Á∑§ ¬˝÷ÊflË œÊÁ⁄UÃÊ 6 µF „Ê ¡Ê∞– ÿ„ ÁŸêŸ
‚¥ÿÊ¡Ÿ ‚ ¬˝ÊåàÊ Á∑§ÿÊ ¡Ê ‚∑§ÃÊ „Ò —
(1) ÃËŸÊ¥ üÊáÊË ∑˝§◊ ◊¥
(2) ŒÊ üÊáÊË ∑˝§◊ ◊¥ ÃÕÊ ÃË‚⁄UÊ ¬Ê‡fl¸∑˝§◊ ◊¥
(3) ÃËŸÊ¥ ¬Ê‡fl¸∑˝§◊ ◊¥
(4) ŒÊ ¬Ê‡fl¸∑˝§◊ ◊¥ ÃÕÊ ÃË‚⁄UÊ üÊáÊË ∑˝§◊ ◊¥
8
A¡L$ rhÛyscpf rhsfZdp„ rhch (volts dp„)
V(z)=30−5z2, z  1 m dpV¡$
V(z)=35−10 z, z 1 m dpV¡$ Ap`hpdp„ Aph¡
R>¡.
V(z) A¡ x A_¡ y `f Ap^pf fpMsp¡ _\u. Å¡ Ap
[õ\rsdp_ A¡ r_es rhS>cpf ârs L$v$ ρ0 (0 _p
A¡L$ddp„) hX¡$ DÐ`Þ_ L$fhpdp„ Aph¡ L¡$ S>¡ L$p¡C A¡L$
Qp¡½$k n¡Ódp„ rhõsf¡g lp¡e, sp¡ kpQy„ rh^p_ `k„v$
L$fp¡.
(1) ρ0=10 0, z1 m dpV¡$ s\p ρ0=0 AÞeÓ
(2) ρ0=20 0 kh®n¡Ódp„
(3) ρ0=40 0 kh®n¡Ódp„
(4) ρ0=20 0, z1 m dpV¡$ A_¡ ρ0=0 AÞeÓ
4 µF _p¡ A¡L$ A¡hp ÓZ L¸$`p rkV$fp¡ A¡ fus¡ Å¡X$hpdp„
Aph¡g R>¡ L¡$ s¡d_p¡ kdsyëe L¸$`prkV$Þk 6 µF R>¡.
Aphy„ s¡d_¡ :
(1) î¡Zudp„ Å¡X$hp\u \C iL¡$
(2) b¡_¡ î¡Zudp„ A_¡ A¡L$_¡ kdp„sf Å¡X$hp\u \C
iL¡$
(3) kdp„sf Å¡X$hp\u \C iL¡$
(4) b¡_¡ kdp„sf A_¡ A¡L$_¡ î¡Zudp„ Å¡X$hp\u \C
iL¡$

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 9
14. 14. 14.

In the circuit shown, the resistance r is a ÁŒÿ „È∞ ¬Á⁄U¬Õ ◊¥ r ∞∑§ ø⁄U-¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ „Ò– ÿÁŒ Ap`¡g `qf`\dp„ r A¡L$ Qg Ahfp¡^ R>¡. Å¡ r=f R
r=f R, Ã’ r ◊¥ ™§c◊Ê ©à¬ÊŒŸ •Áœ∑§Ã◊ „ÊŸ ∑§ dpV¡$ r dp„ dlÑd Dódp DÐ`Þ_ \pe sp¡ f _u qL„$ds
variable resistance. If for r=f R, the heat
generation in r is maximum then the value
of f is : Á‹ÿ f ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ — \i¡ :
• • •
• •
(1) (1)
•
(1)

• • •
• •
(2) (2)
•
(2)

• • •
• •
(3) (3)
•
(3)

(4) 1 (4) 1 (4) 1

15. A magnetic dipole is acted upon by two 15. ∞∑§ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ Ámœ˝Èfl ¬⁄U ŒÊ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ˇÊòÊ, ¡Ê •Ê¬‚ 15. A¡L$buÅ_u kpd¡ 75 _p MyZp¡ Y$msp b¡ Qy„bL$ue n¡Óp¡
magnetic fields which are inclined to each ◊¥ 75 ∑§ÊáÊ ’ŸÊÃ „Ò¥, ∞∑§ ‚ÊÕ Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§⁄UÃ „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ `f A¡L$ Qy„bL$ue qÜ-^y°h (Dipole) L$pe®fs R>¡. L$p¡C
ÿ„ Ámœ˝Èfl ‚¥ÃÈ‹Ÿ ∑§Ë •flSÕÊ ◊¥ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ¬˝⁄UáÊ
other at an angle of 75. One of the fields
has a magnitude of 15 mT. The dipole
A¡L$ n¡Ó_y„ dyëe 15 mT R>¡ A_¡ Ap n¡Ó kp\¡ 30 _p
attains stable equilibrium at an angle of 30 15 mT ∑§ ∞∑§ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ˇÊòÊ ‚ 30 ∑§Ê ∑§ÊáÊ ’ŸÊÃÊ MyZp\u X$pe`p¡g õ\peu k„sygus Ahõ\p âpá L$f¡ R>¡.
with this field. The magnitude of the other „Ò, ÃÊ ŒÍ‚⁄U øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ˇÊòÊ ∑§ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ ¬̋⁄UáÊ ∑§Ê ‹ª÷ª buÅ n¡Ó_y„ dyëe (mT dp„) Apif¡ li¡ :
field (in mT ) is close to : ◊ÊŸ ( mT ◊¥ ) „ÊªÊ — (1) 11
(1) 11 (2) 36
(1) 11
(2) 36 (3) 1
(2) 36
(3) 1 (4) 1060
(3) 1
(4) 1060
(4) 1060

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04
16. A 50 Ω resistance is connected to a battery
of 5 V. A galvanometer of resistance
100 Ω is to be used as an ammeter to
measure current through the resistance, for
this a resistance r s is connected to the
galvanometer. Which of the following
connections should be employed if the
measured current is within 1% of the
current without the ammeter in the
circuit ?
(1) r s =0.5 Ω in parallel with the
galvanometer
(2) r s =0.5 Ω in series with the
galvanometer
(3) rs = 1 Ω in series with galvanometer
(4) rs=1 Ω in parallel with galvanometer
SET - 04 ENGLISH
16. ∞∑§ 50 Ω ∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ ∞∑§ 5 V ∑§Ë ’Ò≈U⁄UË ‚ ¡È«∏Ê „È•Ê
„Ò– ∞∑§ ªÒÀflŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U Á¡‚∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ 100 Ω „Ò, ∑§Ê
∞ê¬Ëÿ⁄U◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§ M§¬ ◊¥ ¬˝ÿÊª Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊŸÊ „Ò–
ªÒÀflŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§ ‚ÊÕ ∞∑§ ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ rs ‚¥ÿÊÁ¡Ã „Ò– ÿÁŒ
ß‚ ‚¥ÿÊ¡Ÿ ◊¥ ◊ÊÁ¬Ã œÊ⁄UÊ ∞ê¬Ëÿ⁄U◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§Ê „≈UÊŸ ¬⁄U
◊ÊÁ¬Ã œÊ⁄UÊ ∑§ ◊ÊŸ ‚ 1% ∑§ ÷ËÃ⁄U „Ê ÃÊ ÁŸêŸÁ‹ÁπÃ
◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê ‚¥ÿÊ¡Ÿ ©Áøà „ÊªÊ?
(1) rs=0.5 Ω ªÒÀflŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§ ‚ÊÕ ¬Ê‡fl¸∑˝§◊ ◊¥
(2) rs=0.5 Ω ªÒÀflŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§ ‚ÊÕ üÊáÊË ∑˝§◊ ◊¥
(3) rs = 1 Ω ªÒÀflŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§ ‚ÊÕ üÊáÊË ∑˝§◊ ◊¥
(4) rs=1 Ω ªÒÀflŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§ ‚ÊÕ ¬Ê‡fl¸∑˝§◊ ◊¥
SET - 04 HINDI
10
16. 5V _u b¡V$fu kp\¡ 50 Ω _p¡ A¡L$ Ahfp¡^ gNpX¡$g R>¡.
Ap Ahfp¡ ^ dp„ \ u `kpf \sp âhpl dp`hp
100 Ω _p Ahfp¡^ ^fphsy„ N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$f_¡ A¡rdV$f sfuL¡$
hp`fhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡. Ap dpV¡$ A¡L$ Ahfp¡^ rs N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$f
kp\¡ Å¡X$hpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡.
_uQ¡ Ap`¡g L$ey Å¡X$pZ hp`fhy„ Å¡CA¡ L¡$ S>¡\u dp`¡g
âhpl A¡ A¡rdV$f hNf `qf`\_p dp„_p âhpl_u
1% _u Ahr^dp„ lp¡e.
(1) rs=0.5 Ω N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$f_¡ kdp„sf
(2) rs=0.5 Ω N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$f_u î¡Zudp„
(3) rs = 1 Ω N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$f_u î¡Zudp„
(4) rs=1 Ω N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$f_¡ kdp„sf
SET - 04 GUJARATI
Set - 04 11
17. A series LR circuit is connected to a voltage 17. ∞∑§ üÊ á ÊË ¬Á⁄U ¬ Õ ∑§Ê ∞∑§ flÊ À ≈U Ë ÿ dÊ Ã
LR 17. A¡L$ LR î¡Zu `qf`\ V(t)=V0 sinΩt hp¡ëV¡$S> öp¡s
V(t)=V0 sinΩt ‚ ¡Ê«∏Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò ∑§Ê»§Ë ‹¥’ ‚◊ÿ kp\¡ Å¡X¡$g R>¡. Ap gp„bp kde A„sfpg bpv$, rhÛys
source with V(t)=V0 sinΩt. After very
large time, current I(t) behaves as
’ÊŒ ÁfllÈà œÊ⁄UÊ I(t) ∑§Ê ‚„Ë ÁøòÊáÊ Á∑§‚ Ã⁄U„ ∑§Ê • 
•  âhpl I(t) hs®i¡  •• >>  :

 •• >>  :

•  • 
• 

 ¡„Ê° •• >> 

 „ÊªÊ? • 


(1) (1)
(1)

(2)
(2) (2)

(3)
(3) (3)

(4)
(4) (4)

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 12
18. Microwave oven acts on the principle of : 18. ◊Êß∑˝§Êflfl •ÊflŸ Á∑§‚ ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ¬⁄U •ÊœÊÁ⁄Uà „Ò? 18. dpC¾$p¡h¡h Ap¡h_ L$ep rkÝ^p„s `f L$pe® L$f¡ R>¡ ?
(1) ¡‹ •áÊÈ•Ê¥ ◊¥ ÁSÕà ߋÄ≈˛UÊÚŸÊ¥ ∑§ ∑§◊ ™§¡Ê¸ (1) `pZu_p AÏ„Ap¡dp„ Ap¡R>u \u h^y EÅ® õsf
(1) transferring electrons from lower to
higher energy levels in water
molecule ‚ •Áœ∑§ ™§¡Ê¸ flÊ‹ ‹fl‹ ◊¥ SÕÊŸÊ¥ÃÁ⁄Uà ∑§⁄UŸ sfa Cg¡¼V²$p¡__y„ õ\p_p„sfZ
(2) giving rotational energy to water ∑§Ë ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ¬⁄U– (2) `pZu_p AÏ„Ap¡_¡ O|Z®_ EÅ® Ap`hp_y„
molecules (2) ¡‹ •áÊÈ•Ê¥ ∑§Ê ÉÊÍáʸŸ ™§¡Ê¸ ¬˝ŒÊŸ ∑§⁄UŸ ∑§Ë (3) `pZu_p AÏ„Ap¡_¡ L„$`_ EÅ® Ap`hp_y„
(3) giving vibrational energy to water ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ¬⁄U– (4) `pZu_p AÏ„Ap¡_¡ õ\p_p„sqfs EÅ® Ap`hp_y„
molecules
(4) giving translational energy to water (3) ¡‹ •áÊÈ•Ê¥ ∑§Ê ∑¥§¬Ÿ ™§¡Ê¸ ¬˝ŒÊŸ ∑§⁄UŸ ∑§Ë
molecules ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ¬⁄U–
(4) ¡‹ •áÊÈ•Ê¥ ∑§Ê SÕÊŸÊ¥Ã⁄UË ™§¡Ê¸ ¬˝ŒÊŸ ∑§⁄UŸ
∑§Ë ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ¬⁄U–

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04
19. A convex lens, of focal length 30 cm, a
concave lens of focal length 120 cm, and a
plane mirror are arranged as shown. For
an object kept at a distance of 60 cm from
the convex lens, the final image, formed by
the combination, is a real image, at a
distance of :
19. ∞∑§ ©ûÊ‹ ‹Ò¥‚ fl •flË ‹Ò¥‚, Á¡Ÿ∑§Ë $»§Ê∑§‚ ŒÍ⁄UË 19.
∑˝§◊‡Ê— 30 cm ∞fl¥ 120 cm „Ò, ÃÕÊ ‚◊Ë Œ¬¸áÊ
ÁŸêŸ ÁøòÊ ∑§ •ŸÈ‚Ê⁄U ⁄Uπ ªÿ „Ò– ∞∑§ Á’ê’ ©ûÊ‹
‹Ò¥‚ ‚ 60 cm ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U ÁSÕà „Ò– ß‚ ‚¥ÿÊ¡Ÿ mÊ⁄UÊ
ÁŸÁ◊¸Ã •¥ÁÃ◊ ¬˝ÁÃÁ’ê’ ∞∑§ flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ¬˝ÁÃÁ’ê’ „Ò
Á¡‚∑§Ë ÁSÕÁà ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà „ÊªË —
13
30 cm L¡$ÞÖg„bpC ^fphsp¡ A¡L$ brlNp£m L$pQ,
120 cm L¡$ÞÖg„bpC ^fphsp¡ A¡L$ A„sNp£m L$pQ A_¡
A¡L$ kpv$p¡ Afukp¡ ApL©$rÑdp„ bspìep âdpZ¡ Np¡W$ h¡g
R>¡.
brlNp£m L$pQ\u 60 cm vy$f fpM¡g hõsy_y„ _uQ¡ v$ip®h¡g
L$C [õ\rsdp„ Ap Np¡W$hhp\u L¡$V$gp A„sf¡ hõsy_„y hpõsrhL$
ârstbb dmi¡.

(1) ©ûÊ‹ ‹Ò¥‚ ‚ 60 cm ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U–

(1) 60 cm from the convex lens
(2) 60 cm from the concave lens (2) •flË ‹Ò¥‚ ‚ 60 cm ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U–
(3) 70 cm from the convex lens (3) ©ûÊ‹ ‹Ò¥‚ ‚ 70 cm ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U– (1) brlNp£m L$pQ\u 60 cm
(4) 70 cm from the concave lens (4) •flË ‹Ò¥‚ ‚ 70 cm ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U– (2) A„sNp£m L$pQ\u 60 cm
(3) brlNp£m L$pQ\u 70 cm
(4) A„sNp£m L$pQ\u 70 cm

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 14
20. In Young’s double slit experiment, the 20. ÿ¥ª ∑§ Ám-Á! Ê⁄UË ¬˝ÿÊª ◊¥, Á¡‚◊¥ ¬Œ¸ ∞fl¥ Á! Ê⁄UË ∑§ 20. e„Ó_p X$bg [õgV$_p âep¡N, [õgV$$ A_¡ `X$v$p hÃQ¡_y„
distance between slits and the screen is
’Ëø ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË 1.0 m ÃÕÊ 600 nm Ã⁄¥UªŒÒäÿ¸ ∑§ A„sf 1.0 m R>¡ s\p 600 nm A¡L$ f„Nue âL$pi
1.0 m and monochromatic light of 600 nm
is being used. A person standing near the ∞∑§fláÊ˸ÿ ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ∑§Ê ©¬ÿÊª Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò– Á! ÊÁ⁄UÿÊ¥ D`ep¡Ndp„ g¡hpdp„ Aph¡g R>¡. [õgV$_u _ÆL$ Dc¡g A¡L$
slits is looking at the fringe pattern. When ∑§ ‚◊ˬ π«∏Ê „È•Ê ∞∑§ √ƒÊÁÄàÊ √ÿÁÃ∑§⁄UáÊ ¬Ò≈UŸ¸ ∑§Ê ìe[¼s igpL$pcps sfa Å¡h¡ R>¡. Äepf¡ [õgV$ hÃQ¡_y„
the separation between the slits is varied, Œπ ⁄U„Ê „Ò– ŒÊŸÊ¥ Á! ÊÁ⁄UÿÊ¥ ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ∑§Ê ¬Á⁄UflÁøà A„sf bv$ghpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡ Ðepf¡ b¡ [õgV$ hÃQ¡_p rhi¡j
∑§⁄Ÿ ¬⁄U ∞∑§ Áfl‡Ê· ŒÍ⁄UË d0 ¬⁄U √ÿÁàÊ∑§⁄UáÊ ¬Ò≈UŸ¸ ‹ÈåàÊ
the interference pattern disappears for a
particular distance d0 between the slits. If
A„sf d0 dpV¡$ ìersL$fZ cps gyá \pe R>¡. Å¡ Ap„M_y
„Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ÿÁŒ √ÿÁÄàÊ ∑§Ë •Ê°π ∑§Ê ∑§ÊáÊËÿ ÁflÿÊ¡Ÿ ••
•• L$p¡Zue rhc¡v$_ R>¡, sp¡ d0 _y„ dyëe _________
the angular resolution of the eye is
••
, •• ••
„Ê, ÃÊ d0 ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ ‹ª÷ª „ÊªÊ —
the value of d0 is close to : •• _u _ÆL$_y„ \i¡.
(1) 1 mm (1) 1 mm (1) 1 mm
(2) 2 mm (2) 2 mm (2) 2 mm
(3) 4 mm (3) 4 mm (3) 4 mm
(4) 3 mm (4) 3 mm (4) 3 mm

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 15
21. When photons of wavelength λ 1 are 21. ¡’ λ1 Ã⁄¥UªŒÒäÿ¸ ∑§ »§Ê≈ÊŸ ∞∑§ Áfl‹ÁªÃ ªÊ‹ ∑§Ê 21. Äepf¡ λ1 sf„Ng„bpC_p ap¡V$p¡Þk_¡ A¡L$ AgN L$f¡g Np¡mp
incident on an isolated sphere, the
¬˝ŒËåàÊ ∑§⁄UÃ „Ò¥, ÃÊ ‚¥ªÃ “ÁŸ⁄UÊœË-Áfl÷fl” ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ V `f Ap`ps L$fhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡ Ðepf¡ A_yê$` r_fp¡^u-
corresponding stopping potential is found
to be V. When photons of wavelength λ2 ¬ÊÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ¡’ λ2 Ã⁄¥UªŒÒäÿ¸ ∑§ »§Ê≈ÊŸ ©¬ÿÊª ◊¥ rhch (õV$p¡t`N `p¡V¡$[Þieg) V S>¡V$gp¡ \pe R>¡. Äepf¡
are used, the corresponding stopping ‹Êÿ ¡ÊÃ „Ò¥ ÃÊ ÁŸ⁄UÊœË-Áfl÷fl ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ ÁÃªÈŸÊ (3V) λ2 sf„Ng„bpC_p ap¡V$p¡Þk_p¡ D`ep¡N L$fhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡
potential was thrice that of the above value. „Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– •ª⁄U λ3 Ã⁄¥UªŒÒäÿ¸ ∑§ »§Ê≈UÊŸ ‚ ªÊ‹ ∑§Ê Ðepf¡ s¡_¡ A_yê$` r_fp¡^u-rhch `l¡gp L$fsp„ ÓZ NZp¡
¬˝ŒËåàÊ Á∑§ÿÊ ¡Ê∞ ÃÊ ÁŸ⁄ÊœË-Áfl÷fl ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
If light of wavelength λ3 is used then find
the stopping potential for this case :
\pe R>¡. Äepf¡ λ3 sf„Ng„bpC_p¡ âL$pi hp`fhpdp„ Aph¡
R>¡ Ðepf¡ r_fp¡^u-rhch_y„ dyëe \i¡ :
•• • • • • • •• • • • • •
• • •• •• •• •• • • • • •• •• •• •• •
•• • • • • •
(1)
(1)
• • • • •
• • • • •
•
(1)
• • • •• •• •• •• •
• • • • •
•• • • • • • •• • • • • •
•• • •• • •
• • •• •• •• •• • •
• •• • •• •• • •• • • • • •
(2)
•
(2)
• • • • •
• • •• •• •• •• •
•
(2)
• • • • •
•• • • • • • •• • • • • •
• •• • •• • • • • • •• • • • •• • • • •
•• • • • • •
(3)
(3) •
• • • • • • • • • •
• • • • •
•• • •• •
(3) • •
• • • • • • • •
• • •
•• • • • • • •• • • • • •
• • •• • • • •• •• • • • • •• • • • •• •• •
•• • • • • •
(4)
(4)
• • • • •
• • • • •
•
(4)
• • • •• • • • •• •• •
• • • • •

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 16
22. A hydrogen atom makes a transition from 22. ∞∑§ „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ n=2 Ä√ÊÊ¥≈U◊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ flÊ‹ ™§¡Ê¸ 22. A¡L$ lpCX²$p¡S>_ `fdpÏ„ n=2 \u n=1 EÅ® õsfdp„
n=2 to n=1 and emits a photon. This
‹fl‹ ‚ n=1 Ä√ÊÊ¥≈U◊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ flÊ‹ ™§¡Ê¸ ‹fl‹ ◊¥ k„¾$dZ L$f¡ R>¡ A_¡ A¡L$ ap¡V$p¡_ DÐkÆ®s L$f¡ R>¡. Ap
photon strikes a doubly ionized lithium
atom (z=3) in excited state and completely ‚¥∑˝§◊áÊ ∑§⁄UŸ ¬⁄U ∞∑§ »§Ê≈UÊŸ ©à‚Á¡¸Ã ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– ÿ„ ap¡V$p¡_ qÜ-Apep¡_pCÈX$ rg\ued `fdpÏ„ (z=3) _¡
removes the orbiting electron. The least »§Ê≈UÊŸ ∞∑§ Ám-•ÊÿÁŸÃ Á‹ÁÕÿ◊ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ (z=3) (¡Ê s¡_u DÑ¡Æs Ahõ\pdp„ A\X$pe R>¡ A_¡ L$nue
quantum number for the excited state of the Á∑§ ©ûÊÁ¡Ã •flSÕÊ ◊¥ „Ò) ‚ ≈U∑§⁄UÊÃÊ „Ò •ÊÒ⁄U ∑§ˇÊËÿ Cg¡¼V²$p¡__¡ k„`|Z® blpf r_L$pm¡ R>¡. Ap âq¾$ep dpV¡$
ß‹Ä≈˛UÊÚŸ (orbiting electron) ∑§Ê ¬Í⁄UË Ã⁄U„ ‚ ’Ê„⁄U
ion for the process is :
Ape__u DÑ¡Æs Ahõ\p_u Þe|_sd ¼hpÞV$d _„bf
(1) 2
ÁŸ∑§Ê‹ ŒÃÊ „Ò– ß‚ ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§ Á‹∞ •ÊÿŸ ∑§Ë ©ûÊÁ¡Ã \i¡ :
(2) 3
•flSÕÊ ∑§Ë ãÿÍŸÃ◊ Ä√ÊÊ¥≈U◊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ „ÊªË — (1) 2
(3) 4
(1) 2 (2) 3
(4) 5
(2) 3 (3) 4
(3) 4 (4) 5
23. The truth table given in fig. represents :
(4) 5
• • •
23. ApL©$rsdp„ Ap`¡g V³$\ V¡$bg _uQ¡ Ap`¡g L$ey N¡V$ bsph¡
• • •
23. ÁøòÊ ◊¥ ÁŒπÊ߸ ªß¸ ‚àÿ◊ÊŸ-‚Ê⁄UáÊË ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ R>¡ ?
• • •
Á∑§‚ ª≈U ∑§Ê Œ‡ÊʸÃË „Ò?
• • • • • •
• • •
• • • • • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
(1) AND - Gate
• • •
• • •
(2) OR - Gate
(3) NAND - Gate • • •
• • •
(4) NOR - Gate
(1) AND ª≈U (1) AND - Gate

OR ª≈U
(2) OR - Gate
(2)
(3) NAND - Gate
(3) NAND ª≈U
(4) NOR - Gate
(4) NOR ª≈U

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 17
24. An audio signal consists of two distinct 24. ∞∑§ äflÁŸ-Á‚ÇŸ‹ ŒÊ S¬c≈U äflÁŸÿÊ¥ ‚ ÁŸÁ◊¸Ã „Ò– 24. A¡L$ Ýhr_ rkÁ_g b¡ Sy>v$p Sy>v$p AhÅ¡ ^fph¡ R>¡. A¡L$
sounds : one a human speech signal in the
frequency band of 200 Hz to 2700 Hz, while
ߟ◊¥ ‚ ∞∑§ ◊ŸÈcÿ mÊ⁄UÊ ÷ÊÁ·Ã Á‚ÇãÊ‹ „Ò ¡Ê dp_h-cprjs rkÁ_g R>¡ S>¡ 200 Hz \u 2700 Hz
the other is a high frequency music signal 200 Hz ‚ 2700 Hz ∑§Ë •ÊflÎÁûÊ •¥Ã⁄UÊ‹ ∑§Ê „Ò, ÃÕÊ Aph©rÑ A„sfpgdp„ R>¡. Äepf¡ buSy> A¡ DÃQ Aph©rÑ
in the frequency band of 10200 Hz to ŒÍ‚⁄UÊ Á‚ÇŸ‹ 10200 Hz ‚ 15200 Hz ©ìÊ •ÊflÎÁûÊ k„Nus_y„ rkÁ_g R>¡ S>¡ 10200 Hz \u 15200 Hz
15200 Hz. The ratio of the AM signal
bandwidth required to send both the
flÊ‹ ‚¥ªËà ∑§Ê „Ò– ŒÊŸÊ¥ Á‚ÇŸ‹Ê¥ ∑§ ‚¥ø⁄UáÊ ∑§ Á‹∞ Aph©rÑ A„sfpgdp„ R>¡. bÞ_¡ rkÁ_gp¡_¡ kp\¡ k„Qfhp
signals together to the AM signal •Êfl‡ÿ∑§ AM Á‚ÇãÊ‹ ∑§Ë ’Ò¥«U-øÊÒ«∏Ê߸ •ÊÒ⁄U ∑§fl‹ dpV¡$ S>ê$fu AM rkÁ_g_u b¢X$ rhX¹$\ s\p a¼s dp_h-
bandwidth required to send just the human ◊ŸÈcÿ mÊ⁄UÊ ÷ÊÁ·Ã Á‚ÇŸ‹ ∑§ ‚¥ø⁄UáÊ ∑§ Á‹∞ •Êfl‡ÿ∑§ cprjs rkÁ_g k„QfZ dpV¡$ S>ê$fu AM rkÁ_g b¢X$
AM Á‚ÇãÊ‹ ∑§Ë ’Ò¥«U-øÊÒ«∏Ê߸ ∑§Ê •ŸÈ¬Êà ÄÿÊ „ÊªÊ? rhX¹$\_p¡ NyZp¡Ñf R>¡.
speech is :
(1) 3
(1) 3 (1) 3
(2) 5
(2) 5 (2) 5
(3) 6
(3) 6 (3) 6
(4) 2
(4) 2 (4) 2

25. A simple pendulum made of a bob of

mass m and a metallic wire of negligible
mass has time period 2 s at T=0C. If the
temperature of the wire is increased and the
corresponding change in its time period is
plotted against its temperature, the
resulting graph is a line of slope S. If the
coefficient of linear expansion of metal is α
then the value of S is :
(1) α
25. T=0C ¬⁄U ∞∑§ ‚⁄U‹-‹Ê‹∑§, ¡Ê Á∑§ m Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ
∑§ ªÊ‹∑§ •ÊÒ⁄U Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ⁄UÁ„à œÊÃÈ ∑§ ÃÊ⁄U ‚ ÁŸÁ◊¸Ã „Ò,
∑§Ê •Êflûʸ-∑§Ê‹ 2 s „Ò– •ª⁄U ÃÊ⁄U ∑§ Ãʬ◊ÊŸ ∑§Ê
’…∏ÊŸ ‚, •Êflûʸ-∑§Ê‹ ◊¥ „È߸ flÎÁh ∑§Ê ª˝Ê»§ mÊ⁄UÊ
Œ‡ÊʸÿÊ ¡Êÿ, ÃÊ ¬Á⁄UáÊÊ◊Ë ª˝Ê»§ ∑§Ë …Ê‹-◊ʬ ( slope)
S „Ò– ÿÁŒ ÃÊ⁄U ∑§Ê ⁄ÒUÁπ∑§-¬˝‚Ê⁄U ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§ α „Ò ÃÊ S ∑§Ê
◊ÊŸ „ÊªÊ —
25. m Öìedp_ hpmp Np¡mp ^fphsp s\p Öìedp_ frls
^psy_p spf\u b_¡g A¡L$ kpv$p gp¡gL$_p¡ T=0C A¡
Aphs®L$pm 2 s R>¡. Å¡ spf_p sp`dp_dp„ h^pfp¡ L$fsp,
Aphs®L$pmdp„ \sp a¡fapf_¡ Apg¡M Üpfp v$ip®hpe, sp¡
`qfZpdu Apg¡M A¡ A¡L$ f¡Mp R>¡ S>¡_p¡ Y$pm S R>¡. Å¡
^psy_p¡ f¡Mue-âkfZp„L$ α lp¡e, sp¡ S _y„ dyëe R>¡ :
(1) α

•
(1) α •
•
(2)
(2)
• •
•
(2) (3) 2α
(3) 2α
•
(3) 2α •
•
(4)
(4)
• •
•
(4)

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 18
26. A uniformly tapering conical wire is made 26. •ÁflSÃÊÁ⁄Uà L ‹ê’Ê߸ ∑§Ë ∞∑§‚◊ÊŸ ‡Ê¥∑ȧŸÈ◊Ê ÃÊ⁄U ∑§ 26. A¡L$ eyr_ap¡d® i„Ly$ ApL$pf_p¡ spf Y e„N dp¡X$éygk hpmp
from a material of Young’s modulus Y and
has a normal, unextended length L. The
Á‚⁄UÊ¥ ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— R ÃÕÊ 3R „Ò¥– ©‚∑§Ë œÊÃÈ ∑§Ê Öìedp„\u b_ph¡g R>¡ S>¡_u sZphdy¼s g„bpC L R>¡.
radii, at the upper and lower ends of this ÿ¥ª-◊Ê«ÈU ‹‚ Y „Ò– R ÁòÊíÿÊ flÊ‹ Á‚⁄U ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ŒÎ…∏ Ap i„Ly$ ApL$pf_p spf_p D`f_p R>¡X$p_u rÓÄep R A_¡
conical wire, have values R and 3R, •ÊœÊ⁄U ¬⁄U ¡Á«∏à Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò ÃÕÊ ŒÍ‚⁄U Á‚⁄U ¬⁄U M _uQ¡_p R>¡X$p_u rÓÄep 3R R>¡ D`f_p¡ R>¡X$p¡ ×Y$ Ap^pf
respectively. The upper end of the wire is
fixed to a rigid support and a mass M is
Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ‹≈U∑§ÊÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò– ‚¥ÃÈ‹Ÿ-•flSÕÊ ◊¥ ÃÊ⁄U kp\¡ Å¡X¡$g R>¡ A_¡ _uQ¡_p R>¡X¡$ M v$m Å¡X¡$g R>¡.
suspended from its lower end. The ∑§Ë ÀÊê’Ê߸ „ÊªË — k„ s y g us Ahõ\pdp„ Ap spf_u sZph g„ b pC
equilibrium extended length, of this wire,
 • • • 
\i¡ :
would equal : •  • •• • •
• π • • • 
(1)
  • • • 
• • •  •  • •• • •
• π • • • 

•  • •• • •
(1)
• π • • •  • • • 
(1) 

 • • • •• • •
• π • • • 
(2)
  • • • 
• • •  • • • •• • •
• π • • • 

• • • •• • • (2)
• π • • •  • • • 
(2) 

 • • • •• • •
• π • • • 
(3)
  • • • 
• • •  • • • •• • •
• π • • • 

• • • •• • • (3)
• π • • •  • • • 
(3) 

 • • • •• • •
• π • • • 
(4)
  • • • 
• • •  • • • •• • •
• π • • • 

• • • •• • • (4)
• π • • • 
(4) 

27. ∞∑§ ªÒÀflŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ G ◊ʬŸ ∑§ Á‹ÿ •h¸-
27. To know the resistance G of a galvanometer
ÁflˇÊ¬ Ã⁄UË∑§ ∑§Ê ßSÃ◊Ê‹ Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ Á¡‚◊¥ ’Ò≈U⁄UË ∑§Ë 27. A^®Aphs®__u fus¡ N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$f_p¡ Ahfp¡^ G ÅZhp,
by half deflection method, a battery of emf emf VE „Ò– ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ R ∑§ Á‹ÿ θ ÁflˇÊ¬ Á◊‹Ê– VE ^fphsu b¡V$fu A_¡ Ahfp¡^ R. A¡ N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$fdp„
VE and resistance R is used to deflect the ‡Ê¥≈U-¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ S ∑§ Á‹ÿ •ÊœÊ ÁflˇÊ¬ Á◊‹Ê– Ã’ θ M|Zp_y„ Aphs®_ d¡mhhp h`fpe R>¡. Å¡ S Ahfp¡^_p¡
galvanometer by angle θ. If a shunt of G, R ÃÕÊ S Á∑§‚ ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ ‚ ‚¥’¥ÁœÃ „Ò¥? i„V$ A¡ A^® Aphs®_ dpV¡$ S>ê$fu lp¡e, sp¡ G, R A_¡ S
resistance S is needed to get half deflection
then G, R and S are related by the (1) 2S (R+G)=RG A¡ hÃQ¡_p¡ k„b„^ R>¡ :
equation : (2) S (R+G)=RG (1) 2S (R+G)=RG
(1) 2S (R+G)=RG (3) 2S=G (2) S (R+G)=RG
(2) S (R+G)=RG (4) 2G=S (3) 2S=G
(3) 2S=G (4) 2G=S
(4) 2G=S

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 19
28. To find the focal length of a convex mirror, 28. ©ûÊ‹-Œ¬¸áÊ ∑§Ë »§Ê∑§‚ ŒÍ⁄UË ÁŸ∑§Ê‹Ÿ ∑§ ∞∑§ ¬˝ÿÊª 28. brlNp£m Afukp_u L¡$ÞÖg„bpC dp`hp, A¡L$ rhÛp\}
a student records the following data :
◊¥ ÁŸêŸ «UÊ≈UÊ ¬˝ÊåàÊ „È•Ê _uQ¡_p Ahgp¡L$_p¡ _p¢^¡ R>¡.
Object Pin Convex Lens Convex Mirror Image Pin
22.2 cm 32.2 cm 45.8 cm 71.2 cm Á’¥’ ©ûÊ‹ ‹Ò¥‚ ©ûÊ‹ Œ¬¸áÊ ¬˝ÁÃÁ’¥’ hõsy `u_ brlNp£m L$pQ brlNp£m Afukp¡ ârstbb `u_
The focal length of the convex lens is f1 and • • •• •• • • • •• •• • • • •• •• • • • •• •• • • • •• •• • • • •• •• • • • •• •• • • • •• •• •
that of mirror is f2. Then taking index
correction to be negligibly small, f1 and f2 ©ûÊ‹ ‹Ò¥‚ ∑§Ë »§Ê∑§‚ ŒÍ⁄UË f1 ÃÕÊ ©ûÊ‹-Œ¬¸áÊ ∑§Ë brlNp£m L$pQ_u L¡$ÞÖg„bpC f1 A_¡ Afukp_u L¡$ÞÖg„bpC
are close to : »§Ê∑§‚ ŒÍ⁄UË f2 „Ò– index correction Ÿªáÿ „Ò– f2 R>¡. index correction _NÎe g¡sp f1 A_¡ f2 _y„
(1) f1=12.7 cm f2=7.8 cm Ã’ — dyëe_u _ÆL$ li¡ :
(2) f1=7.8 cm f2=12.7 cm (1) f1=12.7 cm f2=7.8 cm (1) f1=12.7 cm f2=7.8 cm
(3) f1=7.8 cm f2=25.4 cm (2) f1=7.8 cm f2=12.7 cm (2) f1=7.8 cm f2=12.7 cm
(4) f1=15.6 cm f2=25.4 cm (3) f1=7.8 cm f2=25.4 cm (3) f1=7.8 cm f2=25.4 cm
(4) f1=15.6 cm f2=25.4 cm (4) f1=15.6 cm f2=25.4 cm
29. An experiment is performed to determine
the I - V characteristics of a Zener diode,
29. ∞∑§ ¡ËŸ⁄U «UÊÿÊ«U ∑§Ê •Á÷‹ˇÊÁáÊ∑§ I - V ª˝Ê»§ ’ŸÊŸ 29. T¡_fX$pep¡X$_u I - V gpnrZL$sp_p Aæepk dpV¡$ A¡L$
which has a protective resistance of
R=100 Ω, and a maximum power of ∑§ Á‹ÿ ∞∑§ ¬˝ÿÊª Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ Á¡‚◊¥ R=100 Ω ∑§Ê âep¡N L$fhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡. Äepf: `p¡V¡$[Þiep¡duV$f L¡$ S>¡_p¡
dissipation rating of 1 W. The minimum ¬˝Ê≈UÁÄ≈Ufl ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ •ÊÒ⁄U •Áœ∑§Ã◊ ¬Êfl⁄U 1 W ŒË ªß¸– Äep„ Ahfp¡^ R=100 Ω R>¡ A_¡ 1 W dlÑd `phf
voltage range of the DC source in the circuit Ã’ ¬Á⁄U¬Õ ◊¥ ‹ªÊÿ ªÿ DC dÊà ∑§Ë ãÿÍŸÃ◊ flÊÀ≈UÃÊ X¡$ku`¡i_ R>¡. Ap `qf`\dp„ gNphhpdp„ Aphsp DC
is :
„Ò — õÓp¡s_u Þe|_sd hp¡ëV¡$S>_u Ahr^ R>¡ :
(1) 0 – 5 V
(1) 0–5V (1) 0–5V
(2) 0 – 8 V
(2) 0–8V (2) 0–8V
(3) 0 – 12 V
(3) 0 – 12 V (3) 0 – 12 V
(4) 0 – 24 V
(4) 0 – 24 V (4) 0 – 24 V

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04
30. An unknown transistor needs to be
identified as a npn or pnp type. A
multimeter, with +ve and −ve terminals,
is used to measure resistance between
different terminals of transistor. If terminal
2 is the base of the transistor then which of
the following is correct for a pnp
transistor ?
(1) +ve terminal 1, −ve terminal
2, resistance high
(2) +ve terminal 2, −ve terminal
1, resistance high
(3) +ve terminal 3, −ve terminal
2, resistance high
(4) +ve terminal 2, −ve terminal
3, resistance low
20
30. ∞∑§ •ôÊÊà ≈˛UÊ¥Á¡S≈U⁄U ∑§Ê npn •ÕflÊ pnp ∑§ ¬˝∑§Ê⁄U 30. A¡L$ npn A\hp pnp V²$p[ÞTõV$f_¡ Ap¡mMhp_p¡ R>¡.
◊¥ ¬„øÊŸ ∑§⁄UŸÊ „Ò– ∞∑§ pnp ≈˛UÊ¥Á¡S≈U⁄U ∑§Ê ≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹ 2 Ap dpV¡$ V²$p[ÞTõV$f_p AgN AgN V$rd®_ëk hÃQ¡_p¡
©‚∑§Ê ’‚ „Ò– ∞∑§ êÊÀ≈UË◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§ +ve fl −ve Ahfp¡^ +ve A_¡ −ve dëV$uduV$f\u dp`hpdp„ Aph¡
≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹ ß‚ ≈˛UÊ¥Á¡S≈U⁄U ∑§ ÁflÁ÷ÛÊ ≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹Ê¥ 1, 2 ÿÊ 3 ∑§ R>¡. Å¡ V$rd®_g 2 A¡ V²$p[ÞTõV$f_p¡ b¡T lp¡e sp¡ pnp
’Ëø ‹ªÊ∑§⁄U ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ ◊ʬ ªÿ Ã’ ß‚ ≈˛UÊ¥Á¡S≈U⁄U ∑§ V²$p[ÞTõV$f dpV¡ L$ey„ rh^p_ kpQy„ R>¡ ?
Á‹∞ ∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê ÁŸêŸ ∑§ÕŸ ‚àÿ „Ò?
(1) +ve terminal 1, −ve terminal
(1) +ve ‚ ≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹ 1, −ve ‚ ≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹ 2, ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ  2, Ahfp¡^ h^pf¡
íÿʌʖ (2) +ve terminal 2, −ve terminal
1, Ahfp¡^ h^pf¡
(2) +ve ‚ ≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹ 2, −ve ‚ ≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹ 1, ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ 
íÿʌʖ (3) +ve terminal 3, −ve terminal
2, Ahfp¡^ h^pf¡
(3) +ve ‚ ≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹ 3, −ve ‚ ≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹ 2, ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ  (4) +ve terminal 2, −ve terminal
íÿʌʖ 3, Ahfp¡^ Ap¡R>p¡
(4) +ve ‚ ≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹ 2, −ve ‚ ≈UÁ◊¸Ÿ‹ 3, ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ 

∑§◊ 31. 35.5 g Apk£r_L$ A¡rkX$_¡, kp„Ö HCl _u lpS>fudp„

31. The amount of arsenic pentasulphide that
can be obtained when 35.5 g arsenic acid is h^pf¡ `X$ s p H2S kp\¡ âq¾$ e p L$ f sp„ Apk£ r _L$
treated with excess H2S in the presence of 31. 35.5 g •Ê⁄U‚ÁŸ∑§ •ê‹ ∑§Ê, ‚Ê¥Œ˝ HCl ∑§Ë ©¬ÁSÕÁà `¡ Þ V$ p këapCX$ L¡ $ V $ g u dpÓpdp„ âpá \C iL$ i ¡ ?
conc. HCl ( assuming 100% conversion) ◊¥ H2S ∑§Ë •Áœ∑§ ◊ÊòÊÊ ‚ ÁflfløŸ ∑§⁄UŸ ¬⁄U •Ê⁄U‚Á Ÿ∑§ (100% `qfhs®_ dp_u gp¡)
¬ã≈UÊ‚À$»§Êß«U ∑§Ë ¬˝Ê# „ÊŸ flÊ‹Ë ◊ÊòÊÊ „Ò (ÿÁŒ 100%
is :
(1) 0.50 mol (1) 0.50 dp¡g
¬Á⁄UfløŸ ◊ÊŸ¥ ÃÊ)—
(2) 0.25 mol (2) 0.25 dp¡g
(1) 0.50 ◊Ê‹
(3) 0.125 mol (3) 0.125 dp¡g
(4) 0.333 mol (2) 0.25 ◊Ê‹
(4) 0.333 dp¡g
(3) 0.125 ◊Ê‹
(4) 0.333 ◊Ê‹

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 21
32. At very high pressures, the compressibility 32. •àÿÁœ∑§ ŒÊ’ ¬⁄U ∞∑§ ◊Ê‹ ªÒ‚ ∑§Ê ‚¥¬Ë«˜ÿÃÊ ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§ 32. M|b S> KQp v$bpZ¡, A¡L$ dp¡g hpey_p¡ v$b_ue Aheh
factor of one mole of a gas is given by :
„ÊªÊ — (compressibility factor) _uQ¡ Ap`¡gdp„\u S>Zphp¡.
••
(1) •• ••
•• (1) (1)
•• ••
••
(2) • •• • •• ••
•• (2) • •• • (2) • •• •
•• ••
••
(3) • •• • •• ••
•• (3) • •• • (3) • •• •
•• ••
•
• •− • • •
• •− •
(4)
•• • • • (4) • •− • (4)
•• • • • •• • • •

33. The total number of orbitals associated with

the principal quantum number 5 is : 33. ◊ÈÅÿ ÄflÊ¥≈U◊ •¥∑§ 5 ‚ ¡È«∏ „È∞ ∑§ˇÊ∑§Ê¥ (•ÊÚÁ’¸≈U‹Ê¥) 33. dy¿e ¼hp¡ÞV$d Ap„L$ 5 kp\¡ k„L$mpe¡g L$nL$p¡_u Ly$g
(1) 5 ∑§Ë ∑ȧ‹ ‚¥ÅÿÊ „Ò — k„¿ep ip¡^p¡.
(2) 10 (1) 5 (1) 5
(3) 20 (2) 10 (2) 10
(4) 25 (3) 20 (3) 20
(4) 25 (4) 25
34. Which intermolecular force is most
responsible in allowing xenon gas to 34. ߟ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ‚Ë •¥Ã⁄UÊ-•ÊÁáfl∑§ ’‹ ¡ËŸÊÚŸ ∑§ 34. _uQ¡_pdp„\u L$ep Ap„sfApÎhue bmp¡ L¡$ S>¡ T¡_p¡_ hpey_p
Œ˝flË∑§⁄UáÊ ∑§ Á‹∞ ‚’‚ •Áœ∑§ ©ûÊ⁄UŒÊÿË „Ò ?
liquefy ?
âhpluL$fZ dpV¡$ kp¥\u h^pf¡ S>hpbv$pf R>¡ ?
(1) Dipole - dipole
(2) Ion - dipole (1) ÁmœÈ˝fl - Ámœ˝Èfl (1) qÜ^y°h - qÜ^°yh
(3) Instantaneous dipole - induced dipole (2) •ÊÿŸ - Ámœ˝Èfl (2) Ape_ - qÜ^°yh
(4) Ionic (3) ÃÊà∑§ÊÁ‹∑§ Ámœ˝Èfl - ¬˝Á⁄Uà Ámœ˝Èfl (3) Ðhqfs qÜ^y°h - â¡qfs qÜ^y°h (Instantaneous
(4) •ÊÿÁŸ∑§ dipole - induced dipole)
(4) Aper_L$

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 22
35. A reaction at 1 bar is non-spontaneous at 35. ∞∑§ ⁄UÊ‚ÊÿÁŸ∑§ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ÁŸêŸ Ãʬ ¬⁄U •Sfl× ¬˝flÁøà 35. 1 bar `f A¡L$ fpkperZL$ âq¾$ep _uQp sp`dp_¡ Ap`d¡m¡
low temperature but becomes spontaneous
„Ò Á∑§ãÃÈ ©ìÊ Ãʬ ¬⁄U Sfl× ¬˝flÁøà „Ê ¡ÊÃË „Ò– ß‚ (õhe„c|) \su _\u `f„sy KQp sp`dp_¡ Ap`d¡m¡
at high temperature. Identify the correct
statement about the reaction among the •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§ ’Ê⁄U ◊¥ ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ∑§ÕŸÊ¥ ◊¥ ‚ ‚„Ë (õhe„c)| \pe R>¡. âq¾$ep A„N¡ _uQ¡ Ap`¡gp rh^p_p¡dp„\u
following : ∑§ÕŸ ∑§Ê ¬„øÊÁŸÿ — kpQy„ rh^p_ ip¡^p¡.
(1) Both ∆H and ∆S are negative. (1) ∆H ÃÕÊ ∆S, ŒÊŸÊ¥ ´§áÊÊà◊∑§ „Ò¥– (1) ∆H s\p ∆S b„_¡ F>Z R>¡.
(2) Both ∆H and ∆S are positive.
(2) ∆H ÃÕÊ ∆S, ŒÊŸÊ¥ œŸÊà◊∑§ „Ò¥– (2) ∆H s\p ∆S b„_¡ ^_ R>¡.
(3) ∆H is positive while ∆S is negative.
(4) ∆H is negative while ∆S is positive. (3) ∆H œŸÊà◊∑§ ÃÕÊ ∆S ´§áÊÊà◊∑§ „Ò– (3) ∆H ^_ R>¡ Äepf¡ ∆S F>Z R>¡.
(4) ∆H ´§áÊÊà◊∑§ ÃÕÊ ∆S œŸÊà◊∑§ „Ò– (4) ∆H F>Z R>¡ Äepf¡ ∆S ^_ R>¡.
36. The solubility of N2 in water at 300 K and
500 torr partial pressure is 0.01 g L−1. The 36. N2 ∑§Ë ¡‹ ◊¥ Áfl‹ÿÃÊ 300 K ÃÕÊ 500 torr •Ê¥Á‡Ê∑§ 36. 300 K A_¡ (V$p¡f) Ap„riL$ v$bpZ¡ N2 _u
500 torr
solubility (in g L−1) at 750 torr partial
pressure is : ŒÊ’ ¬⁄U 0.01 g L−1 „Ò– ß‚∑§Ë Áfl‹ÿÃÊ (g L−1 Öpìesp 0.01 g L−1R>¡. 750 V$p¡f (torr) Ap„riL$
(1) 0.0075 ◊¥) 750 torr •Ê¥Á‡Ê∑§ ŒÊ’ ¬⁄U „ÊªË — v$bpZ `f Öpìesp (g L−1 dp„) iy„ li¡ ?
(2) 0.015 (1) 0.0075 (1) 0.0075
(3) 0.02 (2) 0.015 (2) 0.015
(4) 0.005 (3) 0.02 (3) 0.02
(4) 0.005 (4) 0.005
37. For the reaction,
A(g)+B(g) → C(g)+D(g), ∆H and ∆S are, 37. ⁄UÊ‚ÊÿÁŸ∑§ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ 37. âq¾$ep dpV¡$, A(g)+B(g) → C(g)+D(g) 298 K
respectively, −29.8 kJ mol −1 and
A(g)+B(g) → C(g)+D(g), ∑ Á‹∞ 298 K ¬⁄U `f, ∆H A_¡ ∆S A_y¾$d¡,−29.8 kJ mol−1 A_¡
−0.100 kJ K −1 mol −1 at 298 K. The
equilibrium constant for the reaction at ∆H ÃÕÊ ∆S ∑§ ◊ÊŸ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— −29.8 kJ mol−1 −0.100 kJ K−1 mol−1 R>¡. 298 K `f âq¾$ep
298 K is : ÃÕÊ−0.100 kJ K−1 mol−1 „Ò¥– ß‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ê dpV¡$_p¡ k„syg_ AQmp„L$ _uQ¡_pdp„\u ip¡^p¡.
(1) 1.0×10−10 298 K ¬⁄U ‚Êêÿ ÁSÕ⁄UÊ¥∑§ „Ò — (1) 1.0×10−10
(2) 1.0×1010 (1) 1.0×10−10 (2) 1.0×1010
(3) 10 (2) 1.0×1010 (3) 10
(4) 1 (3) 10 (4) 1
(4) 1

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 23
38. What will occur if a block of copper metal 38. ÿÁŒ ∑§ÊÚ¬⁄U ∑§ ∞∑§ é‹ÊÚ∑§ (block) ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ’Ë∑§⁄U ◊¥ 38. Å¡ L$p¡`f ^psy_p¡ A¡L$ ågp¡L$ (block) A¡L$ buL$fdp„ `X$u
is dropped into a beaker containing a
«UÊ‹Ê ¡Êÿ Á¡‚◊¥ 1M ZnSO4 ∑§Ê Áfl‹ÿŸ „Ê ÃÊ Åe L¡$ S>¡ 1M ZnSO4 _y„ ÖphZ ^fph¡ R>¡ sp¡ iy„
solution of 1M ZnSO4 ?
(1) The copper metal will dissolve and
ÄÿÊ „ÊªÊ ? b_i¡ ?
zinc metal will be deposited. (1) ∑§ÊÚ¬⁄U œÊÃÈ ÉÊÈ‹ ¡ÊÿªË ÃÕÊ Á$¡¥∑§ œÊÃÈ ÁŸˇÊÁ¬Ã (1) L$p¡`f ^psy Ap¡Nmu S>i¡ A_¡ T]L$ ^psy S>dp
(2) The copper metal will dissolve with „Ê ¡ÊÿªË– \i¡.
(2) „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ ªÒ‚ ∑§ ÁŸ∑§‹Ÿ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ-‚ÊÕ ∑§ÊÚ¬⁄U
evolution of hydrogen gas.
(2) lpCX²$p¡S>_ hpey _uL$mhp_u kp\¡ L$p¡`f ^psy
(3) The copper metal will dissolve with
evolution of oxygen gas. œÊÃÈ ÉÊÈ‹ ¡ÊÿªË– Ap¡Nmu S>i¡.
(4) No reaction will occur. (3) •ÊÚÄ‚Ë¡Ÿ ªÒ‚ ∑§ ÁŸ∑§‹Ÿ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ-‚ÊÕ ∑§ÊÚ¬⁄U (3) Ap¡[¼kS>_ hpey _uL$mhp_u kp\¡ L$p¡`f ^psy
œÊÃÈ ÉÊÈ‹ ¡ÊÿªË– Ap¡Nmu S>i¡.
39. The reaction of ozone with oxygen atoms (4) ∑§Ê߸ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ Ÿ„Ë¥ „ÊªË– (4) L$p¡C âq¾$ep \i¡ _l].
in the presence of chlorine atoms can occur
by a two step process shown below :
39. Ä‹Ê⁄ËUŸ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ•Ê¥ ∑§Ë ©¬ÁSÕÁà ◊¥, •Ê$¡ÊŸ ∑§Ë 39. ¼gp¡qf_ `fdpÏAp¡_u lpS>fudp„, Ap¡Tp¡_ kp\¡_u
O3(g)+Cl•(g) → O2(g)+ClO•(g) ____ (i)
•ÊÚÄ‚Ë¡Ÿ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ•Ê¥ ‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà Ap¡[¼kS>_ `fdpÏAp¡_u âq¾$ep, _uQ¡ âdpZ¡ b¡
ki= 5.2×109 L mol−1 s−1
Ám¬ŒËÿ ¬˝∑˝§◊ mÊ⁄UÊ „ÊÃË „Ò — sb½$pdp„ â¾$d v$ip®h¡g R>¡ :
ClO•(g)+O•(g) → O2(g)+Cl•(g) ____ (ii) O3(g)+Cl•(g) → O2(g)+ClO•(g) ____ (i) O3(g)+Cl•(g) → O2(g)+ClO•(g) ____ (i)
kii= 2.6×1010 L mol−1 s−1 ki= 5.2×109 L mol−1 s−1 ki= 5.2×109 L mol−1 s−1
The closest rate constant for the overall
reaction O3(g)+O•(g) → 2 O2(g) is : ClO•(g)+O•(g) → O2(g)+Cl•(g) ____ (ii) ClO•(g)+O•(g) → O2(g)+Cl•(g) ____ (ii)
(1) 5.2×109 L mol−1 s−1 kii= 2.6×1010 L mol−1 s−1 kii= 2.6×1010 L mol−1 s−1
(2) 2.6×1010 L mol−1 s−1 ∑ȧ‹ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ O3(g)+O•(g) → 2 O2(g) ∑§Ê Ly$g âq¾$ep O3(g)+O•(g) → 2 O2(g) _p¡ kp¥\u
(3) 3.1×1010 L mol−1 s−1 ÁŸ∑§≈UÃ◊ flª ÁŸÿÃÊ¥∑§ „Ò — _ÆL$_p¡ h¡N AQmp„L$ ip¡^p¡.
(4) 1.4×1020 L mol−1 s−1
(1) 5.2×109 L mol−1 s−1 (1) 5.2×109 L mol−1 s−1
(2) 2.6×1010 L mol−1 s−1 (2) 2.6×1010 L mol−1 s−1
(3) 3.1×1010 L mol−1 s−1 (3) 3.1×1010 L mol−1 s−1
(4) 1.4×1020 L mol−1 s−1 (4) 1.4×1020 L mol−1 s−1

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04
40. A particular adsorption process has the
following characteristics : (i) It arises due
to van der Waals forces and (ii) it is
reversible. Identify the correct statement
that describes the above adsorption
process :
(1) Enthalpy of adsorption is greater than
100 kJ mol−1.
(2) Energy of activation is low.
(3) Adsorption is monolayer.
(4) Adsorption increases with increase in
temperature.
40. ∞∑§ Áfl‡Ê· •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§ Áfl‡Ê· ªÈáÊœ◊¸ „Ò¥ —
(i) ÿ„ flÊ¥«U⁄U flÊÀ‚ ’‹ ∑§ ∑§Ê⁄áÊ „ÊÃË „Ò ÃÕÊ (ii) ÿ„
©à∑˝§◊áÊËÿ „Ò– ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ fl„ ‚„Ë ∑§ÕŸ
¬„øÊÁŸÿ ¡Ê ß‚ •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ê ‚„Ë fláʸŸ
∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò —
(1) •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ ∑§Ë ∞ãÕÒÀ¬Ë 100 kJ mol−1 ‚
•Áœ∑§ „Ò–
(2) ‚Á∑˝§ÿáÊ ™§¡Ê¸ ÁŸêŸ „Ò–
(3) •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ ∞∑§‹ •áÊÈ∑§ ¬⁄UÃËÿ „Ò–
(4) Ãʬ ’…∏Ÿ ¬⁄U •Áœ‡ÊÊ·áÊ ’…∏ÃÊ „Ò–
24
40. A¡L$ rhi¡j Ar^ip¡jZ â¾$d_¡ _uQ¡_u gpnrZL$spAp¡
R>¡ : (i) s¡ hpÞX$fhpg bmp¡_¡ L$pfZ¡ Dv¹$ch¡ R>¡. A_¡
(ii) s¡ ârshs}e R>¡.
D`f hZ®h¡g Ar^ip¡jZ â¾$d dpV¡$ kpQy„ rh^p_
ip¡^p¡.
(1) Ar^ip¡jZ_u A¡Þ\pë`u 100 kJ mol−1 \u
h^pf¡ lp¡e R>¡.
(2) kq¾$eL$fZ EÅ® (i[¼s) _uQu R>¡.
(3) Ar^ip¡jZ A¡ A¡L$ õsfue R>¡.
(4) sp`dp_ h^hp_u kp\¡ Ar^ip¡jZ h^¡ R>¡.

41. The non-metal that does not exhibit

positive oxidation state is : 41. fl„ •œÊÃÈ ¡Ê œŸÊà◊∑§ •ÊÚÄ‚Ë∑§⁄UáÊ •flSÕÊ Ÿ„Ë¥ 41. A¡L$ A^psy S>¡ ^_ (positive) Ap¡[¼kX¡$i_ Ahõ\p
(1) Oxygen Œ‡ÊʸÃË, „ÊªË — v$ip®hsu _\u s¡ ip¡^p¡.
(2) Iodine (1) •ÊÚÄ‚Ë¡Ÿ (1) Ap¡[¼kS>_
(2) •ÊÿÊ«UËŸ
(3) Chlorine
(2) Apep¡qX$_
(4) Fluorine
(3) Ä‹Ê⁄UËŸ (3) ¼gp¡qf_
(4) ç‹È•Ê⁄UËŸ (4) ãgp¡qf_

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 25
42. The plot shows the variation of −ln Kp 42. ‚ÊÕ ÁŒÿ „Èÿ •Ê‹π ◊¥ ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ŒÊ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ•Ê¥ 42. Apg¡Mdp„ _uQ¡ Ap`¡g b¡ âq¾$epAp¡ dpV¡$ −ln Kp
versus temperature for the two reactions.
∑§ Á‹ÿ −ln Kp ∑§Ê Ãʬ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ ¬Á⁄UfløŸ Œ‡ÊʸÿÊ rhfy Ý ^ sp`dp__u rcÞ_sp v$ip® h ¡ g R>¡ .
• ªÿÊ „Ò– •
• ••••• • •• • •• •• → •• • ••••• • • • • ••••• • •• • •• •• → •• • ••• A_¡
• •
•
• • ••••• •• • •• •• → •• • ••• ÃÕÊ
• ••••• • •• • •• •• → •• • ••• • •
• • ••••• • •• • •• •• → •• • •••
• •
• ••••• O2(g) → CO(s)
•

Identify the correct statement :

(1) At T>1200 K, carbon will reduce
MO(s) to M(s).
(2) At T<1200 K, the reaction
MO(s)+C(s) → M(s)+CO(g) is
spontaneous.
(3) At T<1200 K, oxidation of carbon is
unfavourable.
(4) Oxidation of carbon is favourable at
all temperatures.
ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ∑§ÕŸÊ¥ ◊¥ ‚ ‚„Ë ∑§ÕŸ ¬„øÊÁŸÿ — kpQy„ rh^p_ ip¡^p¡.
(1) T>1200 K, ¬⁄U ∑§Ê’¸Ÿ MO(s) ∑§Ê •¬øÁÿà (1) T>1200 K `f L$pb®_, MO(s) dp„\u M(s)
∑§⁄U∑§ M(s) ŒªÊ– dp„ qfX$¼n_ L$fi¡.
(2) T<1200 K, ¬⁄U •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ, MO(s)+C(s) (2) T<1200 K `f, âq¾$ep MO(s)+C(s) →
→ M(s)+CO(g) Sfl× ¬˝flÁøà „Ò – M(s)+CO(g) õhe„c| R>¡.
(3) T<1200 K ¬⁄U ∑§Ê’¸Ÿ ∑§Ê ©¬øÿŸ ¬˝ÁÃ∑ͧ‹ (3) T<1200 K `f, L$pb®__y„ Ap¡[¼kX¡$i_ ârsL|$m
„Ò– (unfavourable) R>¡.
(4) ∑§Ê’¸Ÿ ∑§Ê ©¬øÿŸ ‚÷Ë Ãʬ ¬⁄U •ŸÈ∑ͧ‹ „Ò– (4) b^p S> sp`dp_ `f L$pb®__y„ Ap¡[¼kX¡$i_
A_yLy$m (favourable) R>¡.

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 26
43. Identify the incorrect statement regarding 43. ÷Ê⁄UË ¬ÊŸË ∑§ ’Ê⁄U ◊¥ ÁŒÿ ªÿ ∑§ÕŸÊ¥ ◊¥ ‚ •‚àÿ 43. cpf¡ `pZu k„b„r^s AkÐe rh^p_ ip¡^p¡.
heavy water :
∑§ÕŸ ¬„øÊÁŸÿ — (1) s¡ Al 4C 3 kp\¡ âq¾$ e p L$ f u, CD 4 A_¡
(1) ÿ„ Al4C3 ‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§⁄U∑§ CD4 ÃÕÊ
(1) It reacts with Al4C3 to produce CD4
Al(OD)3 b_ph¡ R>¡.
and Al(OD)3.
Al(OD)3 ’ŸÊÃÊ „Ò – (2) L¡$ÞÖue fuA¡¼V$fp¡dp„ s¡_p¡ iusgL$ (coolant)
(2) It is used as a coolant in nuclear
reactors. (2) ß‚∑§Ê ©¬ÿÊª ŸÊÁ÷∑§Ëÿ Á⁄U∞Ä≈U⁄U ◊¥ ‡ÊËË∑§ sfuL¡$ D`ep¡N \pe R>¡.
(3) It reacts with CaC2 to produce C2D2 ∑§ M§¬ ◊¥ Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– (3) s¡ CaC 2 kp\¡ âq¾$ e p L$ f u, C 2D2 A_¡
and Ca(OD)2. (3) ÿ„ CaC2 ‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§⁄U∑§ C2D2 ÃÕÊ Ca(OD)2 b_ph¡ R>¡.
(4) It reacts with SO3 to form deuterated Ca(OD)2’ŸÊÃÊ „Ò– (4) s¡ SO 3 kp\¡ âq¾$ep L$fu_¡ , X$éy V ¡ $ qfs¹
(4) ÿ„ SO 3 ‚ •Á÷Á∑˝ § ÿÊ ∑§⁄U ∑  § «KÍ ≈ U Á ⁄U à (deuterated) këãeyqfL$ A¡rkX$ (D2SO4)
sulphuric acid (D2SO4).

‚ÀçÿÍÁ⁄U∑§ •ê‹ (D2SO4) ’ŸÊÃÊ „Ò– b_ph¡ R>¡.$

44. The correct order of the solubility of
alkaline-earth metal sulphates in water is :
44. ˇÊÊ⁄UËÿ ◊ÎŒÊ œÊÃÈ ‚À$»§≈UÊ¥ ∑§Ë ¡‹ ◊¥ Áfl‹ÿÃÊ ∑§Ê ‚„Ë 44. ApëL$pgpC_-A\® ^psy këa¡V$p¡_u `pZudp„_u Öpìesp_p¡
(1) Mg < Ca < Sr < Ba
∑˝§◊ „Ò — kpQp¡ ¾$d ip¡^p¡.
(2) Mg < Sr < Ca < Ba
(1) Mg < Ca < Sr < Ba (1) Mg < Ca < Sr < Ba
(3) Mg > Sr > Ca > Ba (2) Mg < Sr < Ca < Ba (2) Mg < Sr < Ca < Ba
(4) Mg > Ca > Sr > Ba (3) Mg > Sr > Ca > Ba (3) Mg > Sr > Ca > Ba
(4) Mg > Ca > Sr > Ba (4) Mg > Ca > Sr > Ba
45. Match the items in Column I with its main
use listed in Column II : 45. ∑§ÊÚ‹◊ I ◊¥ ÁŒÿ ªÿ ¬ŒÊÕÊZ (items) ∑§Ê ∑§ÊÚ‹◊ II 45. L$p¡gd - I dp„ Ap`¡gu ApCV$dp¡ (items) _¡ s¡_p
• • •• • • •• • • •• • • ••• ◊¥ ÁŒÿ ªÿ ©¬ÿÊªÊ¥ ‚ ‚È◊Á‹Ã ∑§ËÁ¡ÿ — L$p¡gd - II dp„ _p¢^¡g dy¿e D`ep¡Np¡ kp\¡ Å¡X$p¡.
∑§ÊÚ‹◊ • ∑§ÊÚ‹◊ •••
(A) Silica gel (i) Transistor L$p¡g d •••• L$p¡g d •••••
•• • Á‚Á‹∑§Ê ¡ÒÒ‹ ••• ≈U˛UÊ¥Á‚S≈U⁄U
(B) Silicon (ii) Ion-exchanger (A) rkrgL$p S>¡g (i) V²$p[ÞTõV$f
•• • Á‚Á‹∑§Ÿ •••• •ÊÿŸ ÁflÁŸ◊ÿ∑§
(C) Silicone (iii) Drying agent (B) rkrgL$_•(Silicon) (ii) Ape_-rhr_deL$
•• • Á‚Á‹∑§ÊŸ ••••• ‡ÊÈc∑§Ÿ ∑§◊¸∑§
(D) Silicate (iv) Sealant (C) rkrgL$p¡_•(Silicone) (iii) iyóL$ L$s p®
•• • Á‚Á‹∑§≈U ••• • ‚Ë‹∑§ ••• • •• • ••
(1) (A)-(iii), (B)-(i), (C)-(iv), (D)-(ii) (D) rkrgL¡$V$ (iv) kugÞV
(1) (A)-(iii), (B)-(i), (C)-(iv), (D)-(ii)
(2) (A)-(iv), (B)-(i), (C)-(ii), (D)-(iii)
(2) (A)-(iv), (B)-(i), (C)-(ii), (D)-(iii) (1) (A)-(iii), (B)-(i), (C)-(iv), (D)-(ii)
(3) (A)-(ii), (B)-(iv), (C)-(i), (D)-(iii) (3) (A)-(ii), (B)-(iv), (C)-(i), (D)-(iii) (2) (A)-(iv), (B)-(i), (C)-(ii), (D)-(iii)
(4) (A)-(ii), (B)-(i), (C)-(iv), (D)-(iii) (4) (A)-(ii), (B)-(i), (C)-(iv), (D)-(iii) (3) (A)-(ii), (B)-(iv), (C)-(i), (D)-(iii)
(4) (A)-(ii), (B)-(i), (C)-(iv), (D)-(iii)
SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI
Set - 04 27
46. The group of molecules having identical 46. ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ‚◊Í„ ‚◊M§¬ •áÊÈ•Ê¥ ∑§Ê ‚◊Í„ „Ò — 46. L$ep AÏAp¡_p¡ kd|l kh®kd A\hp ArcÞ_ ApL$pf
(Identical shape) ^fph¡ R>¡ ?
shape is :
(1) SF4 , XeF4 , CCl4
(1) SF4 , XeF4 , CCl4
•
ClF3 , XeOF2 , • • • •
(1) SF4 , XeF4 , CCl4
• (2)
ClF3 , XeOF2 , • ••• •
ClF3 , XeOF2 , • • • •
(2)
(3) BF3 , PCl3 , XeO3 (2)
(3) BF3 , PCl3 , XeO3
(4) PCl5 , IF5 , XeO2F2 (3) BF3 , PCl3 , XeO3
(4) PCl5 , IF5 , XeO2F2
(4) PCl5 , IF5 , XeO2F2
47. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ¡‹Ëÿ Áfl‹ÿŸ ◊¥ SÕÊÿË S¬Ë‡ÊË$¡
47. Which one of the following species is stable
in aqueous solution ? ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ë „Ò? 47. _uQ¡ Ap`¡gp [õ`rkTp¡ (ÅrsAp¡) dp„\u L$C A¡L$ S>gue
(1) Cr2+ (1) Cr2+ ÖphZdp„ õ\peu R>¡ ?
(2) Cu+ (2) Cu+ (1) Cr2+
•• •• (2) Cu+
(3) • •• • (3) • •• •
••
(3) • •• •
• ••
(4) • • • •• (4) • •• • •
(4) • • • ••

48. Which one of the following complexes will 48. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ‚¥∑ȧ‹Ê¥ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ‚¥∑ȧ‹ Ag(NO3) 48. _uQ¡ Ap`¡gp k„L$uZp£dp„\u L$e„y A¡L$ Ag(NO3) _p S>gue
consume more equivalents of aqueous ∑§ ¡‹Ëÿ Áfl‹ÿŸ ∑§ •Áœ∑§ ‚◊ÃÈÀÿ π¬ÊÿªÊ ? ÖphZ_u Ar^L$ syëesp_p¡ D`ep¡N L$fi¡ ?
solution of Ag(NO3) ? (1) Na3[CrCl6]
(1) Na3[CrCl6]
(1) Na3[CrCl6] (2) [Cr(H2O)5Cl]Cl2
(2) [Cr(H2O)5Cl]Cl2
(2) [Cr(H2O)5Cl]Cl2 (3) [Cr(H2O)6]Cl3
(3) [Cr(H2O)6]Cl3
(3) [Cr(H2O)6]Cl3 (4) Na2[CrCl5(H2O)]
(4) Na2[CrCl5(H2O)]
(4) Na2[CrCl5(H2O)]

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 28
49. Identify the correct trend given below : 49. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ‚„Ë ¬˝flÎÁûÊ ¬„øÊÁŸÿ — 49. _uQ¡ Ap`¡ g pdp„ \ u kpQu qv$ i p (trend) ip¡ ^ p¡ .
(Atomic No.=Ti : 22, Cr : 24 and Mo : 42) (¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ ∑˝§◊Ê¥∑§=Ti : 22, Cr : 24 ÃÕÊ Mo : 42) (`fdpÎhue ¾$dp„L$=Ti : 22, Cr=24 A_¡ Mo=42)
(1) ∆o of [Cr(H2O)6]2+ > (1) [Cr(H2O)6]2+ ∑§Ê (1) ∆o _p¡ [Cr(H2O)6]2+ >
[Mo(H2O)6]2+ and ∆o > [Mo(H2O)6]2+ ÃÕÊ [Mo(H2O)6]2+ A_¡
∆o of [Ti(H2O)6]3+ > [Ti(H2O)6]2+ [Ti(H2O)6]3+ ∑§Ê ∆o > [Ti(H2O)6]2+ ∆o _p¡ [Ti(H2O)6]3+ > [Ti(H2O)6]2+
(2) ∆o of [Cr(H2O)6]2+ (2) [Cr(H2O)6]2+ ∑§Ê ∆o > (2) ∆o _p¡ [Cr(H2O)6]2+
> [Mo(H2O)6]2+ and [Mo(H2O)6]2+ ÃÕÊ [Ti(H2O)6]3+∑§Ê > [Mo(H2O)6]2+ A_¡
∆o of [Ti(H2O)6]3+ < [Ti(H2O)6]2+ ∆o < [Ti(H2O)6]2+ ∆o _p¡ [Ti(H2O)6]3+ < [Ti(H2O)6]2+
(3) ∆o of [Cr(H2O)6]2+ (3) [Cr(H2O)6]2+ ∑§Ê (3) ∆o _p¡ [Cr(H2O)6]2+
< [Mo(H2O)6 ]2+ and ∆o < [Mo(H2O)6]2+ ÃÕÊ < [Mo(H2O)6]2+ A_¡
∆o of [Ti(H2O)6]3+ > [Ti(H2O)6]2+ [Ti(H2O)6]3+ ∑§Ê ∆o > [Ti(H2O)6]2+ ∆o _p¡ [Ti(H2O)6]3+ > [Ti(H2O)6]2+
(4) ∆o of [Cr(H2O)6]2+ (4) [Cr(H2O)6]2+ ∑§Ê (4) ∆o _p¡ [Cr(H2O)6]2+
< [Mo(H2O)6]2+ and ∆o < [Mo(H2O)6]2+ ÃÕÊ < [Mo(H2O)6]2+ A_¡
∆o of [Ti(H2O)6]3+ < [Ti(H2O)6]2+ [Ti(H2O)6]3+ ∑§Ê ∆o < [Ti(H2O)6]2+ ∆o _p¡ [Ti(H2O)6]3+ < [Ti(H2O)6]2+

50. BOD stands for :

50.
(1) Biological Oxygen Demand
(2) Bacterial Oxidation Demand
(3) Biochemical Oxygen Demand
(4) Biochemical Oxidation Demand
’Ë.•Ê.«UË. (BOD) Œ‡ÊʸÃÊ „Ò — 50. BOD v$ip®h¡ R>¡.
(1) ’ÊÿÊ‹Ê¡Ë∑§‹ •ÊÚÄ‚Ë¡Ÿ Á«U◊Ê¥«U (1) bpep¡gp¡ÆL$g Ap¡[¼kS>_ qX$dpÞX$
(2) ’ÒÄ≈UËÁ⁄Uÿ‹ •ÊÚÄ‚Ë«U‡ÊŸ Á«U◊Ê¥«U (2) b¡¼V$¡qfAg Ap¡[¼kX¡$i_ qX$dpÞX$
(3) ’ÊÿÊ∑Ò§Á◊∑§‹ •ÊÚÄ‚Ë¡Ÿ Á«U◊Ê¥«U (3) bpep¡L¡$rdL$g Ap¡[¼kS>_ qX$dpÞX$
(4) ’ÊÿÊ∑Ò§Á◊∑§‹ •ÊÚÄ‚Ë«U‡ÊŸ Á«U◊Ê¥«U (4) bpep¡L¡$rdL$g Ap¡[¼kX¡$i_ qX$dpÞX$

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 29
51. An organic compound contains C, H and 51. ∞∑§ ∑§Ê’¸ÁŸ∑§ ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ◊¥ C, H ÃÕÊ S Áfll◊ÊŸ „Ò¥– 51. A¡L$ L$pb®r_L$ k„ep¡S>_ C, H A_¡ S ^fph¡ R>¡. Å¡ s¡dp„
S. The minimum molecular weight of the
ÿÁŒ ß‚ ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ◊¥ 8% ‚À$»§⁄U „Ê ÃÊ ß‚∑§Ê ãÿÍŸÃ◊ 8% këaf lp¡e sp¡ k„ep¡S>__p¡ Þe|_sd (minimum)
compound containing 8% sulphur is :
(atomic weight of S=32 amu)
•áÊÈ ÷Ê⁄U „ÊªÊ — AÏcpfip¡^p¡. (`fdpÎhue hS>_ S _y„ =32 amu)
(1) 200 g mol−1 ( S ∑§Ê ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ ÷Ê⁄U =32 amu) (1) 200 g mol−1
(2) 400 g mol−1 (1) 200 g mol−1 (2) 400 g mol−1
(3) 600 g mol−1 (2) 400 g mol−1 (3) 600 g mol−1
(4) 300 g mol−1 (3) 600 g mol−1 (4) 300 g mol−1
(4) 300 g mol−1
52. The hydrocarbon with seven carbon atoms 52. kps L$pb®_ `fdpÏAp¡hpmp A¡L$ lpCX²$p¡L$pb®_ L$ep¡ li¡
containing a neopentyl and a vinyl group 52. ‚Êà ∑§Ê’¸Ÿ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ•Ê¥ flÊ‹Ê ∞∑§ „Êß«˛UÊ∑§Ê’¸Ÿ ∑§ÊÒŸ L¡$ S>¡dp„ A¡L$ r_ep¡`¡ÞV$pCg A_¡ A¡L$ rh_pCg kd|l
is :
„ÊªÊ Á¡‚◊¥ ∞∑§ ÁŸ•Ê¬Áã≈U‹ ‚◊Í„ ÃÕÊ ∞∑§ flÊßÁŸ‹ ^fph¡ R>¡ ?
(1) 2, 2-dimethyl-4-pentene
‚◊Í„ „Ê — (1) 2, 2-X$perd\pCg-4-`¡ÞV$u_
(2) Isopropyl-2-butene
(3) 4, 4-dimethylpentene (1) 2, 2-«UÊ߸◊ÁÕ‹-4-¬ã≈UËŸ (2) ApCkp¡âp¡`pCg-2-åe|V$u_
(4) 2, 2-dimethyl-3-pentene (2) •Êß‚Ê¬˝ÊÁ¬‹-2-éÿÍÁ≈UŸ (3) 4, 4-X$perd\pCg`¡ÞV$u_
(3) 4, 4-«UÊ߸◊ÁÕ‹¬ã≈UËŸ (4) 2, 2-X$perd\pCg-3-`¡ÞV$u_
(4) 2, 2-«UÊ߸◊ÁÕ‹-3-¬ã≈UËŸ
53. 5 L of an alkane requires 25 L of oxygen for
its complete combustion. If all volumes are
measured at constant temperature and 53. 5 L A¡L$ ApëL¡$__p k„`|Z® v$l_ dpV¡$ 25 L Ap¡[¼kS>__u
pressure, the alkane is : 53. ∞∑§ ∞À∑§Ÿ ∑§Ë 5 L ◊ÊòÊÊ ∑§ ¬Íáʸ Œ„Ÿ ∑§ Á‹ÿ 25 L AphíeL$sp R>¡. b^p S> L$v$p¡ (volumes) AQm
(1) Ethane •ÊÚÄ‚Ë¡Ÿ ∑§Ë •Êfl‡ÿ∑§ÃÊ „ÊÃË „Ò– ÿÁŒ ‚÷Ë •Êÿß sp`dp_ A_¡ v$bpZ dp`hpdp„ Aph¡g lp¡e sp¡ ApëL¡$_
(2) Propane ◊ÊŸ∑§ Ãʬ ÃÕÊ ŒÊ’ ¬⁄U ◊ʬ ªÿ „Ê¥, ÃÊ ∞À∑§Ÿ L$ep¡ R>¡ ?
(3) Butane „ÊªË — (1) C\¡_
(4) Isobutane
(1) ∞ÕŸ (2) âp¡`¡_
(2) ¬˝Ê¬Ÿ (3) åe|V¡$_
(3) éÿÍ≈UŸ (4) ApCkp¡åe|V¡_
(4) •Êß‚ÊéÿÍ≈UŸ

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 30
54. The gas evolved on heating CH3MgBr in 54. CH3MgBr ∑§Ê ◊ÕÒŸÊÚ‹ ◊¥ ª◊¸ ∑§⁄UŸ ¬⁄U ©à¬ÛÊ „ÊŸ 54. CH3MgBr _¡ rd\¡_p¡gdp„ Nfd L$fsp„ DÐ`Þ_ \sp¡
methanol is :
flÊ‹Ë ªÒ‚ „Ò — hpey ip¡^p¡.
(1) HBr
(1) HBr (1) HBr
(2) Methane
(3) Ethane
(2) ◊ÕÒŸ (2) rd\¡_
(4) Propane (3) ∞ÕŸ (3) C\¡_
(4) ¬˝Ê¬Ÿ (4) âp¡`¡_
55. Bouveault-Blanc reduction reaction
’ÍflÊ-é‹Ê¥∑§ Á⁄U«Ućʟ ¬˝Á∑˝§ÿÊ ◊¥ „ÊÃÊ „Ò —
involves :
55. 55. b|hp¡-åg¡ÞL$ (Bouveault-Blanc) fuX$n_ âq¾$epdp„
(1) Reduction of an acyl halide with
H2/Pd. (1) ∞Á‚‹ „Ò‹Êß«U ∑§Ê H2/Pd ‚ •¬øÿŸ– \pe R>¡ :
(2) Reduction of an ester with (2) ∞S≈U⁄U ∑§Ê Na/C2H5OH ‚ •¬øÿŸ– (1) A¡kpCg l¡gpCX$_y„ H2/Pd kp\¡ qfX$n_.
Na/C2H5OH.
(3) ∑§Ê’Ê¸ÁŸ‹ ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ∑§Ê Na/Hg ÃÕÊ HCl ‚ (2) A¡õV$f_y„ Na/C2H5OH kp\¡ qfX$n_.
(3) Reduction of a carbonyl compound
with Na/Hg and HCl. •¬øÿŸ– (3) L$pbp¡®r_g k„ep¡S>__y„ Na/Hg A_¡ HCl kp\¡
(4) Reduction of an anhydride with (4) ∞∑§ ∞Ÿ„Êß«˛UÊß«U ∑§Ê LiAlH4 ‚ •¬øÿŸ– qfX$n_.
LiAlH4. (4) A¡_lpCX²$pCX$_y„ LiAlH4 kp\¡ qfX$n_.
56. ¬˝ÊÕÁ◊∑§, ÁmÃËÿ∑§ ÃÕÊ ÃÎÃËÿ∑§ ∞◊ËŸÊ¥ ◊¥ •ãÃ⁄U ∑§⁄UŸ
56. The test to distinguish primary, secondary
∑§ Á‹ÿ ¬˝ÿÈÄà „ÊŸ flÊ‹Ê ¬⁄UˡÊáÊ „Ò — 56. âp\rdL$, qÜrseL$ A_¡ s©rseL$ A¡dpC__¡ âc¡qv$s L$fsu
and tertiary amines is :
(1) Carbylamine reaction (1) ∑§ÊÁ’¸‹∞◊ËŸ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ L$kp¡V$u _uQ¡_pdp„\u ip¡^p¡.
(2) C6H5SO2Cl (2) C6H5SO2Cl (1) L$pbp®gA¡dpC_ âq¾$ep
(3) Sandmeyer’s reaction (3) ‚Òã«U◊Êÿ⁄U •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ (2) C6H5SO2Cl
(4) Mustard oil test (4) ◊S≈U«¸U •ÊÚÿ‹ ¬⁄UˡÊáÊ (3) k¡ÞXd¡ef âq¾$ep
(4) dõV$X®$ Ap¡Cg L$kp¡V$u

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04
57. Assertion : Rayon is a semisynthetic
polymer whose properties
are better than natural cotton.
Reason : Mechanical and aesthetic
properties of cellulose can be
improved by acetylation.
(1) Both assertion and reason are correct,
and the reason is the correct
explanation for the assertion.
(2) Both assertion and reason are correct,
but the reason is not the correct
explanation for the assertion.
(3) Assertion is incorrect statement, but
the reason is correct.
(4) Both assertion and reason are
incorrect.
57. ∑§ÕŸ : ⁄UÿÊÚŸ ∞∑§ •h¸‚Á¥ ‡‹C ’„È‹∑§ „Ò Á¡‚∑§
ªÈáÊœ◊¸ ¬˝Ê∑ΧÁÃ∑§ ∑§¬Ê‚ ‚ •Áœ∑§ •ë¿U
„Ò¥–
∑§Ê⁄UáÊ : ∞‚ËÁ≈U‹Ë∑§⁄UáÊ ‚ ‚‹È‹Ê‚ ∑§ ÿÊ¥ÁòÊ∑§
fl ‚ÊÒ¥Œÿ¸¬⁄U∑§ ªÈáÊœ◊ÊZ ∑§Ê ‚ÈœÊ⁄UÊ ¡Ê
‚∑§ÃÊ „Ò–
(1) “∑§ÕŸ” fl “∑§Ê⁄UáÊ” ŒÊŸÊ¥ ‚„Ë „Ò¥ ÃÕÊ “∑§Ê⁄áÊ”,
“∑§ÕŸ” ∑§Ë ‚„Ë √ÿÊÅÿÊ „Ò–
(2) “∑§ÕŸ” fl “∑§Ê⁄UáÊ” ŒÊŸÊ¥ ‚„Ë „Ò¥ Á∑§ãÃÈ “∑§Ê⁄UáÊ”,
“∑§ÕŸ” ∑§Ë ‚„Ë √ÿÊÅÿÊ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò–
(3) “∑§ÕŸ” ª‹Ã „Ò Á∑§ãÃÈ “∑§Ê⁄UáÊ” ‚„Ë „Ò–
(4) “∑§ÕŸ” fl “∑§Ê⁄UáÊ” ŒÊŸÊ¥ ª‹Ã „Ò¥–
31
57. L$\_ : f¡ep¡_ A¡L$ A^®kp„ïg¡rjs blºgL$ R>¡. S>¡_p
NyZ^dp£ Ly$v$fsu L$`pk (cotton) L$fsp h^y kpfp
R>¡.
L$pfZ : A¡rkqV$g¡i_ hX¡$ k¡ëeygp¡T_p ep„rÓL$ A_¡ kp¦v$e®
^fphsp NyZ^dp£_¡ h^y kpfp iL$pe R>¡.
(1) L$\_ A_¡ L$pfZ b„_¡ kpQp R>¡. L$pfZ A¡ L$\_
dpV¡$_u kpQu kdS|>su R>¡.
(2) L$\_ A_¡ L$pfZ b„_¡ kpQp R>¡, `Z L$pfZ A¡
L$\_ dpV¡$_u kpQu kdS|>su _\u.
(3) L$\_ A¡ AkÐe rh^p_ R>¡ `Z L$pfZ A¡ kÐe
R>¡.
(4) L$\_ A_¡ L$pfZ b„_¡ AkÐe R>¡.

58. ∞S¬ÊÁ≈¸U∑§ •ê‹ ∑§ ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà •ŸÈ∑˝§◊ ¬⁄U ÁfløÊ⁄U 58. A¡õ`pqV®$L$ A¡rkX$ dpV¡$ _uQ¡_p¡ ¾$d Ýep_dp„ gp¡.
58. Consider the following sequence for
aspartic acid : ∑§ËÁ¡∞ —

A¡õ`pqV®$L$ A¡rkX$_y„ pI (kdrhch tbvy$) ip¡^p¡.

The pI (isoelectric point) of aspartic acid ∞S¬ÊÁ≈U¸∑§ •ê‹ ∑§Ê pI (‚◊Áfl÷fl Á’¥ŒÈ ) „Ò —
is : (1) 1.88
(1) 1.88
(2) 3.65
(1) 1.88 (2) 3.65
(2) 3.65 (3) 5.74
(3) 5.74
(4) 2.77
(3) 5.74 (4) 2.77
(4) 2.77
SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI
Set - 04
59. The artificial sweetener that has the highest
sweetness value in comparison to cane
sugar is :
(1) Aspartane
(2) Saccharin
(3) Sucralose
(4) Alitame
60. The most appropriate method of making
egg-albumin sol is :
(1) Break an egg carefully and transfer
the transparent part of the content to
100 mL of 5% w/V saline solution
and stir well.
(2) Break an egg carefully and transfer
only the yellow part of the content to
100 mL of 5% w/V saline solution
and stir well.
(3) Keep the egg in boiling water for 10
minutes. After removing the shell,
transfer the white part of the content
to 100 mL of 5% w/V saline solution
and homogenize with a mechanical
shaker.
(4) Keep the egg in boiling water for 10
minutes. After removing the shell,
transfer the yellow part of the content
to 100 mL of 5% w/V saline solution
and homogenize with a mechanical
shaker.
SET - 04 ENGLISH
59. fl„ ∑ΧÁòÊ◊ ◊œÈ⁄U∑§ Á¡‚∑§Ê ߡÊÈ ‡Ê∑¸§⁄UÊ ∑§Ë ÃÈ‹ŸÊ ◊¥
◊ÊœÈÿ¸◊ÊŸ ‚’‚ •Áœ∑§ „Ò —
(1) ∞‚¬Ê≈¸UŸ
(2) ‚Ò∑§⁄UËŸ
(3) ‚È∑˝§Ê‹Ê‚
(4) ∞‹Ë≈U◊
60. •¥«U ∞ÀéÿÍÁ◊Ÿ ∑§Ê ‚ÊÚ‹ ’ŸÊŸ ∑§Ë ‚’‚ ©Áøà ÁflÁœ
„Ò —
(1) •¥«U ∑§Ê äÿÊŸ¬Ífl¸∑§ ÃÊ«∏¥ •ÊÒ⁄U ©‚∑§ ¬Ê⁄UŒ‡Ê˸
÷ʪ ∑§Ê 100 mL 5% w/V ‹fláÊ ¡‹ ◊¥
Á◊‹Ê ∑§⁄U •ë¿UË Ã⁄U„ Á„‹Êÿ¥–
(2) •¥«U ∑§Ê äÿÊŸ¬Ífl¸∑§ ÃÊ«∏¥ •ÊÒ⁄U ©‚∑§ ¬Ë‹ ÷ʪ
∑§Ê 100 mL 5% w/V ‹fláÊ ¡‹ ◊¥ Á◊‹Ê
∑§⁄U •ë¿UË Ã⁄U„ Á„‹Êÿ¥–
(3) •¥«U ∑§Ê ©’‹Ã ¡‹ ◊¥ 10 Á◊Ÿ≈U Ã∑§ ⁄Uπ¥ –
©‚∑§Ê Á¿U‹∑§Ê ©ÃÊ⁄UŸ ∑§ ¬‡øÊØ ©‚∑§ ‚»§Œ
÷ʪ ∑§Ê 100 mL 5% w/V ‹fláÊ ¡‹ ◊¥
Á◊‹Êÿ¥ •ÊÒ⁄U ÿÊ¥ÁòÊ∑§ „ÁÀ‹òÊ ◊¥ ‚◊Ê¥ªË∑Χà ∑§⁄¥U–
(4) •¥«U ∑§Ê ©’‹Ã ¡‹ ◊¥ 10 Á◊Ÿ≈U Ã∑§ ⁄Uπ¥–
©‚∑§Ê Á¿U‹∑§Ê ©ÃÊ⁄UŸ ∑§ ¬‡øÊØ ©‚∑§ ¬Ë‹
÷ʪ ∑§Ê 100 mL 5% w/V ‹fláÊ ¡‹ ◊¥
Á◊‹Êÿ¥ •ÊÒ⁄U ÿÊ¥ÁòÊ∑§ „ÁÀ‹òÊ ◊¥ ‚◊Ê¥ªË∑Χà ∑§⁄¥U–
SET - 04 HINDI
32
59. _uQ¡_pdp„\u L$ep L©$rÓd Nþep `v$p\p£_p¡ Nm`Z Ap„L$
(sweetness value) L¡$_ kyNf (cane sugar) _u
syg_pdp„ kp¥\u h^pf¡ R>¡.
(1) A¡õ`pV£_
(2) k¡L¡$fu_
(3) ky¾$pgp¡T
(4) A¡rgV¡$d
60. A¡N-Apëbydu_ kp¡g (egg-albumin sol) b_phhp
dpV¡$_u kp¥\u kpfu b„^b¡ksu `Ý^rs _uQ¡_pdp„\u ip¡^p¡.
(1) IX$p_¡ kpQhu_¡ sp¡X$p¡ A_¡ s¡_p `pfv$i} cpN_¡
100 mL 5% w/V _p ghZue (saline)
ÖphZdp„ d¡mhu_¡ kpfu fus¡ lgphp¡.
(2) IX$p_¡ kpQhu_¡ sp¡X$p¡ A_¡ s¡_p a¼s `ump cpN_¡
100 mL 5% w/V _p ghZue (saline)
ÖphZdp„ d¡mhu_¡ kpfu fus¡ lgphp¡.
(3) IX$p_¡ DL$msp `pZudp„ 10 rdr_V$ dpV¡$ fpMp¡
s¡_u R>pg v|$f L$ep® bpv$ s¡_p¡ ka¡v$ cpN
100 mL 5% w/V _p ghZue (saline)
ÖphZdp„ ep„rÓL$ i¡L$f (shaker) hX¡$ kdp„NuL©$s
(homogenize) L$fp¡.
(4) IX$p_¡ DL$msp `pZudp„ 10 rdr_V$ dpV¡$ fpMp¡
s¡_u R>pg v|$f L$ep® bpv$ s¡_p `ump¡ cpN
100 mL 5% w/V _p ghZue (saline)
ÖphZdp„ ep„rÓL$ i¡L$f (shaker) hX¡$ kdp„NuL©$s
(homogenize) L$fp¡.
SET - 04 GUJARATI
Set - 04 33
• • •
For x  R, x ≠ 0, x ≠ 1, let ••• • • ••• • x  R, x ≠ 0, x ≠ 1 ∑§ Á‹∞ ◊ÊŸÊ ••• • • ••• • ^pfp¡ L¡$ x  R, x ≠ 0, x ≠ 1 dpV¡$ ••• • • ••• •
• •• •• • •• •• • •• ••
61. and 61. 61.
fn+1 (x)=f0 (fn(x)), n=0, 1, 2, . . . Then the ÃÕÊ fn+1 (x)=f0 (fn(x)), n=0, 1, 2, . . . „Ò, ÃÊ A_¡ fn+1 (x)=f0 (fn(x)), n=0, 1, 2, . . . sp¡ lh¡
•  •  • •  • • 
value of •• • • •• ••• • ••  •• • ••   is equal •• • • •• ••• • ••  •• • ••  

’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — •• • • •• ••• • ••  •• • ••   =

•  •  •  •  •  • 
to :
• •
•
• •
(1) (1)
•
(1)
• •
•
• •
(2) (2)
•
(2)
• •
•
• •
(3) (3)
•
(3)
• •
•
• •
(4) (4)
•
(4)

62. The point represented by 2+i in the 62. •Ê⁄Uªá«U ‚◊Ë ◊¥ 2+i mÊ⁄UÊ ÁŸÁŒ¸c≈U Á’¥ŒÈ, 1 ß∑§Ê߸ 62. ApN®ÞX$ kdsgdp„ 2+i \u v$ip®h¡g tbvy$ A¡L$ A¡L$d
Argand plane moves 1 unit eastwards, then ¬Ífl¸ ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ ø‹ÃÊ „Ò •ÊÒ⁄U Á»§⁄U 2 ß∑§Ê߸ ©ûÊ⁄U ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ `|h® sfa Mk¡ R>¡, Ðepfbpv$ 2 A¡L$d DÑf sfa Mk¡ R>¡
2 units northwards and finally from there
ø‹ÃÊ „Ò ÃÕÊ •ãà ◊¥ • • ß∑§Ê߸ ŒÁˇÊáÊ-¬Á‡ø◊ A_¡ Ðep„\u R>¡hV¡$ • • A¡L$d _¥F>Ðe sfa Mk¡ R>¡.
• • units in the south-westwards ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ÃÊ •Ê⁄Uªá«U ‚◊Ë ◊¥ ß‚∑§Ê ŸÿÊ ApN®ÞX$ kdsgdp„ Ap tbvy$_y„ _hy„ õ\p_ L$C k„¿ep\u
direction. Then its new position in the
Argand plane is at the point represented SÕÊŸ Á¡‚ Á’¥ŒÈ mÊ⁄UÊ ÁŸÁŒ¸c≈U „ÊÃÊ „Ò, fl„ „Ò — v$ip®hhpdp„ Aph¡ ?
by : (1) 2+2i (1) 2+2i
(1) 2+2i (2) 1+i (2) 1+i
(2) 1+i (3) −1−i (3) −1−i
(3) −1−i (4) −2−2i (4) −2−2i
(4) −2−2i

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 34
63. If the equations x 2 +bx−1=0 and 63. ÿÁŒ ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊÊ¥ x2+bx−1=0 ÃÕÊ x2+x+b=0 63. Å¡ kduL$fZp¡ x2+bx−1=0 A_¡ x2+x+b=0
x2+x+b=0 have a common root different
∑§Ê −1 ‚ Á÷㟠∞∑§ ‚Ê¥! ÊÊ ◊Í‹ „Ò, ÃÊ |b| ’⁄UÊ’⁄U _¡ −1 rkhpe_y„ A¡L$ kpdpÞe buS> lp¡e sp¡ |b|
from −1, then |b| is equal to :
„Ò — bfpbf :
(1) •
(2) 2
(1) • (1) •
(3) 3 (2) 2 (2) 2
(3) 3 (3) 3
(4) •
(4) • (4) •

• • • •
• • •• •• • • • • • • • •
• •
If • •• •• • , • •• •• • • •• •• • • •• ••
• •• • •• •• • • • •• •• • •
64. and
• • • • •• ÿÁŒ • , • •• •• ÃÕÊ Å¡ • , • •• •• A_¡
•• • • •• • ••
64. 64.
• • •
•
•
• • • • •• • • • • ••
•• • • •• • •
• • • • • • • •
Q=PAPT, then PT Q2015 P is :
Q=PAPT „Ò, ÃÊ PT Q2015 P „Ò — Q=PAPT lp¡e sp¡ PT Q2015 P bfpbf :
•• •••••
(1) •• • •• •• ••••• •• •••••
• ••
(1) •• • ••
(1)
• • ••
•
•• • • • • •
(2) • • • • • • •• •• • • • • • •• • • • • •
• • •
(2) • • • • • • ••
(2)
• • • • • ••
•
•• • • • • •
(3) • • • • • • •• •• • • • • • •• • • • • •
• • •
(3) • • • • • • ••
(3)
• • • • • ••
•
•• •••••
(4) •• • •• •• ••••• •• •••••
• ••
(4) •• • ••
(4)
• • ••
•

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 35
65. The number of distinct real roots of the
•• ••• ••• •• ••• •• •• ••• ••• •• ••• ••
•• ••• ••• •• ••• •• 65. ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ ••• •• •• ••• ••• •• •• •• , ∑§ •¥Ã⁄UÊ‹ 65. kduL$fZ ••• •• •• ••• ••• •• •• •• _p A„sfpg
equation, ••• •• •• ••• ••• •• •• •• in the ••• •• ••• •• •• ••• ••• •• ••• •• •• •••
••• •• ••• •• •• •••
• π π• • π π•
••• • •• • ••
• ◊¥ Á÷㟠flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ◊Í‹Ê¥ ∑§Ë ‚¥ÅÿÊ „Ò — ••• • •• • ••
• dp„ Aph¡g rcÞ_ buÅ¡_u k„¿ep L¡$V$gu
• π π•
interval •• ••
• • • ••
•
is :
(1) 4 li¡ ?
(1) 4 (2) 3 (1) 4
(2) 3 (3) 2 (2) 3
(3) 2 (4) 1 (3) 2
(4) 1 (4) 1
66. ‡ÊéŒ “MEDITERRANEAN” ∑§ •ˇÊ⁄UÊ¥ ‚ øÊ⁄U
66. If the four letter words (need not be
•ˇÊ⁄UÊ¥ ∑§ ∞‚ ‡ÊéŒ (øÊ„ •Õ¸„ËŸ „Ê¥) ’ŸÊŸ „Ò¥ Á¡Ÿ∑§Ê 66. iåv$ “MEDITERRANEAN” _p„ Anfp¡_p¡ D`ep¡N
meaningful ) are to be formed using the
letters from the word ¬„‹Ê •ˇÊ⁄U R ÃÕÊ øÊÒÕÊ •ˇÊ⁄U E „Ê, ÃÊ ∞‚ ‚÷Ë L$fu Qpf Anfp¡ hpmp (A\® lp¡hp¡ S>ê$fu _\u) L¡$ S>¡_p¡
“MEDITERRANEAN” such that the first ‡ÊéŒÊ¥ ∑§Ë ∑ȧ‹ ‚¥ÅÿÊ „Ò — â\d Anf R A_¡ Qp¡\p¡ Anf E lp¡e s¡hp sdpd
letter is R and the fourth letter is E, then
• •• iåv$p¡_u k„¿ep L¡$V$gu \pe ?
the total number of all such words is :
(1)
( • •)• • ••
• ••
•
(1)
( • •)•
(1)
( • •) (2) 110
(3) 56 (2) 110
(2) 110
(4) 59 (3) 56
(3) 56
(4) 59
(4) 59

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 36
67. For x  R, x ≠−1, if 67. x  R, x ≠−1 ∑§ Á‹∞, ÿÁŒ 67. Å¡ (1+x)2016+x(1+x)2015+x2(1+x)2014
(1+x) 2016 +x(1+x) 2015 +x 2 (1+x) 2014 (1+x) 2016 +x(1+x) 2015 +x 2 (1+x) 2014 ••••
•••• •••• +......+x2016= • • • •• • , x  R, x ≠−1 ; sp¡
+......+x2016= • •
• • •• , then a17 is equal +......+x2016= • • • •• • „Ò, ÃÊ a17 ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — a17 =
••• ••
••• •• ••• ••
•••••
to :
•••••
••••• (1)
• • •••• • • • •
• • •••• • • • •
(1)
• • •••• • • • •
(1)
••••• •••••
••••• (2)
• • •••• • • • •
• • •••• • • • •
(2)
• • •••• • • • •
(2)
••••• •••••
••••• (3)
•••••
•••••
(3)
•••••
(3)
••••• •••••
••••• (4)
•••
•••
(4)
•••
(4)

68. ◊ÊŸÊ x, y, z ∞‚Ë œŸÊà◊∑§ flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ‚¥ÅÿÊ∞° „Ò¥ Á∑§, 68. ^pfp¡ L¡$ ^_ hpõsrhL$ k„¿epAp¡ x, y, z A¡hu R>¡ L¡$ S>¡\u
x+y+z=12 A_¡ x3y4z5=(0.1) (600)3. sp¡
68. Let x, y, z be positive real numbers
such that x+y+z=12 and x+y+z=12 ÃÕÊ x3y4z5=(0.1) (600)3 „Ò, ÃÊ
x3+y3+z3=
x3y4z5=(0.1) (600)3. Then x3+y3+z3 is x3+y3+z3 ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
equal to : (1) 270
(1) 270
(1) 270 (2) 258
(2) 258
(2) 258 (3) 342
(3) 342
(3) 342 (4) 216
(4) 216
(4) 216

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 37
•• •• •• •• •• ••
•  •  •  •  •  • 
69. The value of •  •• • •
•   is equal 69. •  •• • •
•   ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „Ò — 69. •  •• • •
•   =
• •= •  •−•  • •= •  •−•  • •= •  •−• 
to : (1) 560 (1) 560
(1) 560 (2) 680 (2) 680
(2) 680 (3) 1240 (3) 1240
(3) 1240 (4) 1085 (4) 1085
(4) 1085

•• ••
• •  • • 
•••  • •+ − •  = • • •••  • •+ − •  = • • •
 
• • 
•• ÿÁŒ „Ò, ÃÊ ‘a’ ’⁄UÊ’⁄U 70. Å¡ sp¡ ‘a’ =
• •
70.
70.
 •
If •••  • •+ − •  = • • then ‘a’ is • →∞  •  • →∞  • 
• →∞  • •  „Ò — (1) 2
equal to :
(1) 2 •
(1) 2
•
(2)
•
•
•
(2)
•
•
(2)
•
(3)
•
•
•
(3)
•
•
(3)
•
(4)
•
•
•
(4)
•
(4)

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 38
71. If the function 71. ÿÁŒ »§‹Ÿ 71. Å¡ rh^¡e
••• • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• < • ••• • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• < • ••• • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• < •
f(x)= • • • f(x)= • f(x)= • • •
• • •• ••• • ( • •• •• ) ••• ≤ • ≤ • • •
• • •• ••• • ( • •• •• ) ••• ≤ • ≤ • • • •• ••• • ( • •• •• ) ••• ≤ • ≤ •
• • •
is differentiable at x=1, then
•
is equal x=1 ¬⁄U •fl∑§‹ŸËÿ „Ò, ÃÊ ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „Ò — x=1 ApNm rhL$g_ue lp¡e sp¡ •
=
•
to :
π •• •• π •• ••
π •• •• (1)
•
•
(1)
•
(1)
• •π • •• • •π • ••
• •π • •• (2)
•
•
(2)
•
(2)
π • •• π • ••
π • •• (3)
•
•
(3)
•
(3)
(4) −1−cos−1(2) (4) −1−cos−1(2)
(4) −1−cos−1(2)

72. ÿÁŒ fl∑˝§ x=4t2+3, y=8t3−1, t  R ∑§ Á’¥ŒÈ P, 72. Å¡ h¾$ x=4t2+3, y=8t3−1, t  R, _p¡ P tbvy$
72. If the tangent at a point P, with parameter
t, on the curve x=4t2+3, y=8t3−1, t  R, t ¬˝Êø‹ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ, ¬⁄U S¬‡Ê¸ ⁄UπÊ, fl∑˝§ ∑§Ê ŒÈ’Ê⁄UÊ Á’¥ŒÈ ApNm_p¡ õ`i®L$, âpQg t kp\¡, h¾$_¡ afuhpf Q tbvy$A¡
meets the curve again at a point Q, then the Q ¬⁄U Á◊‹ÃË „Ò, ÃÊ Q ∑§ ÁŸŒ¸‡ÊÊ¥∑§ „Ò¥ — dm¡ R>¡ sp¡ Q tbvy$_p„ epd R>¡:
coordinates of Q are : (1) (t2+3, −t3−1) (1) (t2+3, −t3−1)
(1) (t2+3, −t3−1) (2) (4t2+3, −8t3−1) (2) (4t2+3, −8t3−1)
(2) (4t2+3, −8t3−1) (3) (t2+3, t3−1) (3) (t2+3, t3−1)
(3) (t2+3, t3−1) (4) (16t2+3, −64t3−1) (4) (16t2+3, −64t3−1)
(4) (16t2+3, −64t3−1)

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 39
73. The minimum distance of a point on the 73. fl∑˝§ y=x2−4 ∑§ ∞∑§ Á’¥ŒÈ ‚ ◊Í‹ Á’¥ŒÈ ∑§Ë ãÿÍŸÃ◊ 73. h¾$ y=x2−4 D`f_p„ tbvy$Ap¡\u ENdtbvy$_y„ Þe|_Ñd
curve y=x2−4 from the origin is :
ŒÍ⁄UË „Ò — A„sf L¡$V$gy„ \pe ?
••
(1) •• ••
• (1) (1)
• •
••
(2) •• ••
• (2) (2)
• •
••
(3) •• ••
• (3) (3)
• •
••
(4) •• ••
• (4) (4)
• •

74. If
74. ÿÁŒ 74. Å¡
••
•
• ( •• • • )• • • ( •• • • )• • • • •• ••
•• • • • •••• • •
•
• ( •• • • )• • • ( •• • • )• • • •
• ( •• • • )• • • ( •• • • )• • • •
•• • • • •••• • • •• • • • •••• • •
where k is a constant of integration, then
A+B+C equals : „Ò, ¡„Ê° k ‚◊Ê∑§‹Ÿ •ø⁄U „Ò, ÃÊ A+B+C ’⁄UÊ’⁄U Äep„ k A¡ k„L$g__p¡ AQmp„L$ R>¡, sp¡ A+B+C=
•• „Ò — ••
•
(1)
•
(1)
••
•
(1)
•• ••
•
(2)
•
(2)
••
•
(2)
• •
••
(3)
••
(3)
•
••
(3)
•• ••
••
(4)
••
(4)
••
••
(4)

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 40
• • ÿÁŒ Å¡
If • •• •• • • • • • • •• •• •• •• • •• •• •• •• •• • • • • •
75. 75.
75. •
• • •
• •
• •• •• • • • • • • •=•• •• •• • •• •−•• •+•• • • • • „Ò, • •• •• • • • • • • •• •
• •
•• •• • •• •• •• •• •• • • • • •
• • • •
• • •
then •• •• • ••• •• • •• • • is equal to :
ÃÊ •
sp¡ •• •• • • •
••• •• • • •• • • =
(1) log4 • • •
•• •• • ••• •• • • •• • • ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — (1) log4
+ •• • •
π
•
(2)
+ •• • •
(1) log4 π
•
(2)
(3) log2
+ •• • •
π
•
(2) (3) log2
•• ••• • •
π
•
(4)
•• ••• • •
(3) log2 π
•
(4)
•• ••• • •
π
•
76. The area (in sq. units) of the region (4)
described by 76. âv$¡i
A={(x, y)|y ≥ x2−5x+4, x+y ≥ 1, y ≤ 0}
is : 76. A = {(x, y)|y ≥ x2−5x+4, x+y ≥ 1, y ≤ 0} A={(x, y)|y ≥ x2−5x+4, x+y ≥ 1, y ≤ 0} _y„
mÊ⁄UÊ ÁŸœÊ¸Á⁄Uà ˇÊòÊ ∑§Ê ˇÊòÊ»§‹ (flª¸ ß∑§ÊßÿÊ¥ ◊¥) „Ò — n¡Óam (Qp¡.A¡L$ddp„) L¡$V$gy„ \i¡ ?
•
(1)
• • •
•
(1)
•
(1)
••
(2)
• •• ••
•
(2)
•
(2)
••
(3)
• •• ••
•
(3)
•
(3)
••
(4)
• •• ••
•
(4)
•
(4)

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 41
77. If f (x) is a differentiable function in the 77. ÿÁŒ f (x), •¥Ã⁄UÊ‹ (0, ∞) ◊¥ ∞∑§ ∞‚Ê •fl∑§‹ŸËÿ 77. Å¡ rh^¡e f (x) A„sfpg (0, ∞) D`f rhL$g_ue lp¡e
interval (0, ∞) such that f (1) = 1 and
»§‹Ÿ „Ò Á∑§ f (1) = 1 ÃÕÊ ¬˝àÿ∑§ x>0 ∑§ Á‹∞, • • • •• ••• •• • • •• •
• • s\p A_¡ ••• •• ••
••• • • •• ••• •• • •• • • • f (1) = 1 • →•
•• •• , for each x>0, ••• • • •• ••• •• • •• • •• •• • •• ••
• →• • •• •• „Ò, ÃÊ • ••
( ) ’⁄UÊ’⁄U
• →• • •• ••
âÐe¡L$ x>0 dpV¡$ lp¡e sp¡ • •• =
( )
then • • • is equal to :
( ) „Ò —
••
•• ••
•
(1)
•
(1)
•
(1)
••
•• ••
••
(2)
••
(2)
••
(2)
••
•• ••
•
(3)
•
(3)
•
(3)
••
•• ••
••
(4)
••
(4)
••
(4)

• • • •
78. If a variable line drawn through the • • • • f¡ M pAp¡ •• • •• •• A_¡ •• • •• •• _p„
78. ÿÁŒ ⁄ U π Ê•Ê ¥ •• • •• •• ÃÕÊ •• • •• •• 78.
• • • •
• • • • • •
•• • •• •• and R>¡v$dp„\u `kpf \su A¡L$ Qrgs f¡Mp epdpnp¡_¡ tbvy$Ap¡
intersection of the lines
• • ∑§ ¬˝ÁÃë¿UŒŸ ‚ „Ê∑§⁄U ¡ÊŸ flÊ‹Ë ∞∑§ ø⁄U ⁄UπÊ ß‚
A A_¡ B, (A ≠ B) dp„ dm¡ R>¡. f¡MpM„X$ AB _p
• • ¬˝∑§Ê⁄U πË¥øË ªß¸ „Ò Á∑§ ÿ„ ÁŸŒ¸‡ÊÊ¥∑§ •ˇÊÊ¥ ∑§Ê
•• • •• •• , meets the coordinate axes at dÝetbvy$_p¡ tbvy$`\ L$ep kduL$fZ_y„ kdp^p_ L$fi¡ ?
• • A ÃÕÊ B, (A ≠ B) ¬⁄U Á◊‹ÃË „Ò, ÃÊ AB ∑§ ◊äÿÁ’¥ŒÈ
A and B, (A ≠ B), then the locus of the ∑§Ê Á’¥ŒÈ¬Õ „Ò — (1) 6xy=7(x+y)
midpoint of AB is : (2) 4(x+y)2−28(x+y)+49=0
(1) 6xy=7(x+y)
(1) 6xy=7(x+y) (3) 7xy=6(x+y)
(2) 4(x+y)2−28(x+y)+49=0
(2) 4(x+y)2−28(x+y)+49=0 (4) 14(x+y)2−97(x+y)+168=0
(3) 7xy=6(x+y)
(3) 7xy=6(x+y) (4) 14(x+y)2−97(x+y)+168=0
(4) 14(x+y)2−97(x+y)+168=0

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 42
79. The point (2, 1) is translated parallel to the 79. Á’¥ŒÈ ∑§Ê ⁄UπÊ L : x−y=4 ∑§ ‚◊Ê¥Ã⁄U,
(2, 1) 79. tbvy$ (2, 1) _y„ • • A¡L$d\u f¡Mp L : x−y=4 _¡
line L : x−y=4 by • • units. If the new • • ß∑§Ê߸ SÕÊŸÊãÃÁ⁄Uà Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ– ÿÁŒ ŸÿÊ Á’¥ŒÈ kdp„sf õ\p_p„sfZ L$fhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡. Å¡ Ap _hy„ tbvy$
Q ÃË‚⁄U øÃÈÕÊZ‡Ê ◊¥ ÁSÕà „Ò, ÃÊ Á’¥ŒÈ Q ‚ „Ê∑§⁄U ¡ÊŸ Q ÓuÅ QfZdp„ Aph¡g lp¡e sp¡ Q dp„\u `kpf \su
point Q lies in the third quadrant, then the
equation of the line passing through Q and
perpendicular to L is : flÊ‹Ë ÃÕÊ L ∑§ ‹¥’flà ⁄UπÊ ∑§Ê ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ „Ò — A_¡ L _¡ g„b lp¡e s¡hu f¡Mp_y„ kduL$fZ R>¡:
(1) x+y= • • • (1) x+y= • • • (1) x+y= • • •

(2) x+y= • • • • (2) x+y= • • • • (2) x+y= • • • •

(3) x+y= • • • • (3) x+y= • • • • (3) x+y= • • • •

(4) 2x+2y= • • • (4) 2x+2y= • • • (4) 2x+2y= • • •

80. A circle passes through (−2, 4) and touches 80. ∞∑§ flÎûÊ Á’¥ŒÈ (−2, 4) ‚ „Ê ∑§⁄U ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò ÃÕÊ y-•ˇÊ 80. A¡L$ hsy®m (−2, 4) dp„\u `kpf \pe R>¡ A_¡
the y-axis at (0, 2). Which one of the ∑§Ê (0, 2) ¬⁄U S¬‡Ê¸ ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ∞∑§ y-An_¡ tbvy$ (0, 2) ApNm õ`i£ R>¡. _uQ¡_pdp„\u
‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ ß‚ flÎûÊ ∑§ √ÿÊ‚ ∑§Ê ÁŸM§Á¬Ã ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò?
following equations can represent a
diameter of this circle ?
L$ey„ kduL$fZ Ap hsy®m_p„ ìepk_¡ kdphsu f¡Mp
(1) 4x+5y−6=0 (1) 4x+5y−6=0 v$ip®hi¡ ?
(2) 2x−3y+10=0 (2) 2x−3y+10=0 (1) 4x+5y−6=0
(3) 3x+4y−3=0 (3) 3x+4y−3=0 (2) 2x−3y+10=0
(4) 5x+2y+4=0 (4) 5x+2y+4=0 (3) 3x+4y−3=0
(4) 5x+2y+4=0
81. Let a and b respectively be the semi- 81. ◊ÊŸÊ a ÃÕÊ b ∑˝§◊‡Ê—, ∞∑§ •Áì⁄Ufl‹ÿ Á¡‚∑§Ë
transverse and semi-conjugate axes of a ©à∑¥§Œ˝ÃÊ ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ 9e2−18e+5=0 ∑§Ê ‚¥ÃÈc≈U ∑§⁄UÃË 81. ^pfp¡ L¡$ a A_¡ b A_y¾$d¡ A¡ Arshge_p„ A^® dy¿eAn
hyperbola whose eccentricity satisfies the „Ò, ∑§ •œ¸•ŸÈ¬˝SÕ •ˇÊ ÃÕÊ •œ¸‚¥ÿÈÇ◊Ë •ˇÊ „Ò¥– A_¡ A^® A_ybÝ^ An_p„ dp` R>¡ S>¡_u DÐL¡$ÞÖsp
equation 9e2−18e+5=0. If S(5, 0) is a focus
and 5x=9 is the corresponding directrix of ÿÁŒ S(5, 0) ß‚ •Áì⁄Ufl‹ÿ ∑§Ë ∞∑§ ŸÊÁ÷ ÃÕÊ kduL$fZ 9e2−18e+5=0 _y„ kdp^p_ L$f¡ R>¡. Å¡
this hyperbola, then a2−b2 is equal to : 5x=9 ‚¥ªÃ ÁŸÿãÃÊ (directrix) „Ò, ÃÊ a2−b2 ’⁄UÊ’⁄U S(5, 0) A¡ _prc A_¡ A_yê$` r_eprdL$p 5x=9 lp¡e
(1) 7 „Ò — sp¡ Ap Arshge dpV¡$ a2−b2 bfpbf :
(2) −7 (1) 7 (1) 7
(3) 5 (2) −7 (2) −7
(4) −5 (3) 5 (3) 5
(4) −5 (4) −5
SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI
Set - 04 43

•• •• •• ••
82. If the tangent at a point on the ellipse
• • ÿÁŒ ŒËÉʸflÎûÊ •• • •• •• ∑§ ∞∑§ Á’¥ŒÈ ¬⁄U πË¥øË Å¡ D`hge •• • •• •• _p¡ õ`i®L$, epdpnp¡_¡
• • 82.
•• •
82.
•• •
•• • •• •• meets the coordinate axes at
•• • ªß¸ S¬‡Ê¸ ⁄UπÊ, ÁŸŒ¸‡ÊÊ¥∑§ •ˇÊÊ¥ ∑§Ê A ÃÕÊ B ¬⁄U Á◊‹ÃË A A_¡ B tbvy$dp„ dmsp¡ lp¡s s\p Å¡ O ENdtbvy$
A and B, and O is the origin, then the
„Ò ÃÕÊ O ◊Í‹ Á’¥ŒÈ „Ò, ÃÊ ÁòÊ÷È¡ OAB ∑§Ê ãÿÍŸÃ◊ lp¡e sp¡ rÓL$p¡Z OAB _y„ gOyÑd n¡Óam (Qp¡.A¡L$ddp„)
minimum area (in sq. units) of the triangle
OAB is : ˇÊòÊ»§‹ (flª¸ ß∑§ÊßÿÊ¥ ◊¥) „Ò — L¡$V$gy„ \pe ?
• • •
• •
(1) (1)
•
(1)

(2) • • (2) • • (2) • •

(3) • • (3) • • (3) • •

(4) 9 (4) 9 (4) 9

83. The shortest distance between the lines • • • • • •

⁄UπÊ•Ê¥ •• • •• • ÃÕÊ f¡MpAp¡ •• • •• • A_¡
• • • • •+•• • •−•• • •−••
83. 83.
• • • • • •
•• • •• • a n d •=• •=•
• • • •−•• • • • •+•• • •−•• • •−••
• •+•• • •−•• • •−•• •=• •=•
•=• •=• ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§Ë ãÿÍŸÃ◊ hÃQ¡_y„ gOysd A„sf
lies in the interval :
•−•• • • •−•• • •
(1) [0, 1)
ŒÍ⁄UË, Á¡‚ •¥Ã⁄UÊ‹ ◊¥ „Ò, fl„ „Ò — L$ep A„sfpgdp„ Aph¡g R>¡ ?
(2) [1, 2)
(1) [0, 1) (1) [0, 1)
(3) (2, 3]
(2) [1, 2) (2) [1, 2)
(4) (3, 4]
(3) (2, 3] (3) (2, 3]
(4) (3, 4] (4) (3, 4]

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 44
84. The distance of the point (1, −2, 4) from 84. Á’¥ŒÈ ∑§Ë ©‚ ‚◊Ë ‚ ŒÍ⁄UË, ¡Ê Á’¥ŒÈ
(1, −2, 4) 84. tbvy$ dp„\u `kpf \sp„ A_¡ kdsgp¡
(1, 2, 2)
the plane passing through the point (1, 2, 2) ‚ „Ê ∑§⁄U ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò ÃÕÊ ‚◊ËÊ ¥ x−y+2z=3 A_¡ 2x−2y+z+12=0 _¡ g„b
(1, 2, 2) and perpendicular to the planes
x−y+2z=3 and 2x−2y+z+12=0, is : x−y+2z=3 ÃÕÊ 2x−2y+z+12=0 ∑§ ‹¥’flà lp¡e s¡hp kdsg_y„ tbv$y$ (1, −2, 4) \u A„sf L¡$V$gy„
„Ò, „Ò — \pe ?
(1) • •
(2) 2 (1) • • (1) • •
(2) 2 (2) 2
(3) •
(3) • (3) •
•
(4)
• • •
•
(4)
•
(4)

85. In a triangle ABC, right angled at the vertex

A, if the position vectors of A, B and C are 85. ∞∑§ ÁòÊ÷È¡ ABC, ¡Ê Á∑§ ‡ÊË·¸ A ¬⁄U ‚◊∑§ÊáÊ „Ò, ◊¥ 85. ^pfp¡ L¡$ rÓL$p¡Z ABC dp„ rifp¡tbvy$ A ApNm L$pV$M|Zp¡
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ A, B ÃÕÊ C ∑ § ÁSÕÁà ‚ÁŒ‡Ê ∑˝ § ◊‡Ê— fQpe R>¡. Å¡ tbvy$ A, B A_¡ C _p„ õ\p_ kqv$ip¡
respectively • i • j • k ••• i • • j • p k
• • • • • • • •

∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
∧ ∧ ∧ • i • j • k ••• i • • j • p k
• • • • • • • • ÃÕÊ A_y ¾ $d¡ • i • j • k ••• i • • j • p k
• • • • • • • • A_¡
and • i •• •q j •• •• k • then the point (p, q) lies
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
on a line : • i •• •q j •• •• k „Ò¥, ÃÊ Á’¥ŒÈ (p, q) Á¡‚ ⁄UπÊ ¬⁄U • i •• •q j •• •• k lp¡e sp¡, tbvy$ (p, q) S>¡ f¡Mp D`f
ÁSÕÃ „Ò, fl„ —
(1) parallel to x-axis.
Aph¡g R>¡ s¡
(2) parallel to y-axis.
(3) making an acute angle with the (1) x-•ˇÊ ∑§ ‚◊Ê¥Ã⁄U „Ò– (1) x-An_¡ kdp„sf R>¡.
positive direction of x-axis. (2) y-•ˇÊ ∑§ ‚◊Ê¥Ã⁄U „Ò– (2) y-An_¡ kdp„sf R>¡.
(4) making an obtuse angle with the (3) x-•ˇÊ ∑§Ë œŸÊà◊∑§ ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ‚ ãÿÍŸ ∑§ÊáÊ ’ŸÊÃË (3) ^_ x-An kp\¡ gOyL$p¡Z b_ph¡ R>¡.
positive direction of x-axis.
„Ò– (4) ^_ x-An kp\¡ NyfyL$p¡Z b_ph¡ R>¡.
(4) x-•ˇÊ ∑§Ë œŸÊà◊∑§ ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ‚ •Áœ∑§ ∑§ÊáÊ
’ŸÊÃË „Ò–

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

Set - 04 45
86. If the mean deviation of the numbers
86. ÿÁŒ ‚¥ÅÿÊ•Ê¥ 1, 1+d, ..., 1+100d ∑§ ◊Êäÿ ‚ 86. Å¡ k„¿epAp¡ 1, 1+d, ..., 1+100d _y„ dÝeL$ \u
1, 1+d, ..., 1+100d from their mean is 255,
◊Êäÿ-Áflø‹Ÿ 255 „Ò, ÃÊ d ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ◊ÊŸ „Ò — dÝeL$-rhQg_ (kf¡fpi rhQg_) 255 lp¡e sp¡ d _u
then a value of d is :
(1) 10.1 (1) 10.1 qL„$ds L¡$V$gu \pe ?
(2) 20.2 (2) 20.2 (1) 10.1
(3) 10 (3) 10 (2) 20.2
(4) 5.05 (4) 5.05 (3) 10
(4) 5.05
87. If A and B are any two events such that 87. ÿÁŒ A ÃÕÊ B ŒÊ ∞‚Ë ÉÊ≈UŸÊ∞° „Ò¥ Á∑§ P(A)= • •
P(A)= • • and • •• ∩ • ••• • • • • , then the 87. Å¡ OV$_pAp¡ A A_¡ B dpV¡$ P(A)= • • A_¡
ÃÕÊ • •• ∩ • ••• • • • • „Ò, ÃÊ ¬˝ÁÃ’¥ÁœÃ ¬˝ÊÁÿ∑§ÃÊ
conditional probability, P(A(A∪B)), • •• ∩ • ••• • • • • lp¡ e sp¡ ifsu k„ c ph_p
where A denotes the complement of A, is P(A(A∪B)), ¡„Ê° A, A ∑§ ¬Í⁄U∑§ ‚◊ÈìÊÿ ∑§Ê
equal to : ÁŸÁŒ¸c≈U ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò, ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — P(A(A∪B)) L¡$V$gu \pe ? Al] A A¡ A _p¡ `|fL$
• v$ip®h¡ R>¡ ?
(1) • •
(1) • •
•
(1) •
(2) •• •
(2) •• •
•
(2) ••
(3) •• •
(3) •• •
••
(3) ••
(4) •• ••
(4) •• ••
(4) ••
x  [0, 2π] ∑§Ë ‚¥ÅÿÊ, Á¡Ÿ∑§ Á‹∞
88. The number of x  [0, 2π] for which
88.
• ••• • • • • • •• • • • •• • • •• • • • • • • ••• • • 88. x  [0, 2π] A_¡
• ••• • • • • • •• • • • •• • • •• • • • • • • ••• • •
• • • •

• • • •

=1 is : • ••• • • • • • •• • • • •• • • •• • • • • • • ••• • •
• • • •

=1, „Ò —
(1) 2
(1) 2 =1 lp¡e s¡hp L¡$V$gp x dmi¡ ?
(2) 4
(2) 4 (1) 2
(3) 6
(3) 6 (2) 4
(4) 8
(4) 8 (3) 6
(4) 8
SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI
Set - 04 46
89. If m and M are the minimum and the ÿÁŒ m ÃÕÊ M, √ÿ¥¡∑§ •
• •• • ••• • • • •• •• •• • • • •
89.
maximum values of 89. Å¡ m A_¡ M A¡ •
•
• • •• • ••• • • • •• •• •• • • • • x  R ∑ § ∑˝ § ◊‡Ê— _p„ Þe|_sd A_¡ dlÑd d|ëep¡ lp¡e sp¡ M−m
• •• • ••• • • • •• •• •• • • • • x  R, then • xR
• _u qL„$ds L¡$V$gu \i¡ ?
ãÿÍŸÃ◊ ÃÕÊ •Áœ∑§Ã◊ ◊ÊŸ „Ò¥, ÃÊ M−m ’⁄UÊ’⁄U
M−m is equal to :
„Ò — ••
•• (1)
•
••
•
(1)
•
(1)
•
• (2)
•
•
•
(2)
•
(2)
•
• (3)
•
•
•
(3)
•
(3)
•
• (4)
•
•
•
(4)
•
(4)

90. Consider the following two statements : 90. ÁŸêŸ ŒÊ ∑§ÕŸÊ¥ ¬⁄U ÁfløÊ⁄U ∑§ËÁ¡∞ — 90. _uQ¡_p b¡ rh^p_p¡ Ap`¡g R>¡ :
P : If 7 is an odd number, then 7 is P : ÿÁŒ 7 ∞∑§ Áfl·◊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ „Ò, ÃÊ 7, 2 ‚ ÷Êíÿ P : Å¡ 7 A¡ AeyÁd k„¿ep lp¡e sp¡ 7 _¡ 2 hX¡$
divisible by 2. „Ò– r_:i¡j cpNu iL$pe R>¡.
Q : If 7 is a prime number, then 7 is an
Q : ÿÁŒ 7 ∞∑§ •÷Êíÿ ‚¥ÅÿÊ „Ò, ÃÊ 7 ∞∑§ Áfl·◊ Q : Å¡ 7 A¡ ArhcpÄe k„¿ep lp¡e sp¡ 7 AeyÁd
odd number.
‚¥ÅÿÊ „Ò– R>¡.
If V1 is the truth value of the contrapositive
of P and V 2 is the truth value of ÿÁŒ V1, P ∑§ ¬˝ÁÃœŸÊà◊∑§ ∑§Ê ‚àÿ◊ÊŸ „Ò ÃÕÊ Å¡ V1 A¡ P dp„ kdp_p\} â¡fZ (contrapositive)
contrapositive of Q, then the ordered pair V2, Q ∑§ ¬˝ÁÃœŸÊà◊∑§ ∑§Ê ‚àÿ◊ÊŸ „Ò, ÃÊ ∑˝§Á◊à ÿÈÇ◊ _y„ kÐep\®sp d|ëe A_¡ V2 A¡ Q _p kdp_p\} â¡fZ_p„
(V1, V2) equals :
(V1, V2) ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — kÐep\®sp d|ëe lp¡e sp¡ ¾$dey¼s Å¡X$ (V1, V2) bfpbf:
(1) (T, T)
(1) (T, T) (1) (T, T)
(2) (T, F)
(2) (T, F) (2) (T, F)
(3) (F, T)
(3) (F, T) (3) (F, T)
(4) (F, F)
(4) (F, F) (4) (F, F)

-oOo-
-oOo- -oOo-

SET - 04 ENGLISH SET - 04 HINDI SET - 04 GUJARATI

 JEE Main 2016 Answer Key Paper 1 Online (April 9,2016)

Question and Answer Key - April 9 Online

Question No. Answer Key Question No. Answer Key Question No. Answer Key
Q1 3 Q31 3 Q61 2
Q2 2 Q32 1 Q62 2
Q3 1 Q33 4 Q63 4
Q4 2 Q34 3 Q64 4
Q5 1 Q35 2 Q65 3
Q6 3 Q36 2 Q66 4
Q7 3 Q37 4 Q67 1
Q8 3 Q38 4 Q68 4
Q9 4 Q39 1 Q69 2
Q10 1 Q40 2 Q70 2
Q11 3 Q41 3 Q71 3
Q12 1 Q42 4 Q72 1
Q13 2 Q43 2 Q73 3
Q14 2 Q44 4 Q74 2
Q15 1 Q45 1 Q75 3
Q16 1 Q46 2 Q76 2
Q17 2 Q47 4 Q77 4
Q18 2 Q48 3 Q78 3
Q19 1 Q49 3 Q79 3
Q20 2 Q50 3 Q80 2
Q21 3 Q51 2 Q81 2
Q22 3 Q52 3 Q82 4
Q23 2 Q53 2 Q83 3
Q24 3 Q54 2 Q84 1
Q25 2 Q55 2 Q85 3
Q26 2 Q56 2 Q86 1
Q27 2 Q57 1 Q87 2
Q28 2 Q58 4 Q88 4
Q29 4 Q59 4 Q89 2
Q30 2 Q60 1 Q90 3
Note:-
 JEE Main 2016 Question Paper 1 Online (April 10, 2016)
Set - 03 1
1. A, B, C and D are four different physical 1. A, B, C ÃÕÊ D øÊ⁄U Á÷ÛÊ ◊ÊòÊÊ∞° „Ò¥ Á¡Ÿ∑§Ë Áfl◊Ê∞¥ 1. A, B, C A_¡ D A¡ Qpf Sy>v$p-Sy>v$p `qfdpZ ^fphsu
quantities having different dimensions.
Á÷㟠„Ò¥– ∑§Ê߸ ÷Ë ◊ÊòÊÊ Áfl◊Ê-⁄UÁ„à ◊ÊòÊÊ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò¥, Sy>v$u-Sy>v$u cp¥rsL$fpriAp¡ R>¡. s¡dp„_u L$p¡C`Z `qfdpZ
None of them is dimensionless. But we
know that the equation AD=C ln(BD) ‹Á∑§Ÿ AD=C ln(BD) ‚àÿ „Ò– Ã’ ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ frls _\u. Å¡ AD=C ln(BD) kduL$fZ kpQy„ lp¡e
holds true. Then which of the combination ∑§ÊÒŸ •Ê‡Êÿ-⁄UÁ„à ◊ÊòÊÊ „Ò? sp¡ _uQ¡ Ap`¡g `¥L$u L$ey„ k„ep¡S>_ A¡ A\®kcf (kpQu)
is not a meaningful quantity ? (1) A2 − B2C2 fpri v$ip®hsy„ _\u ?
(1) A2 − B2C2
•• •• •• • (1) A2 − B2C2
•• •• •• • (2)
• •• •• •• •
(2)
• (2)
•
•
• •• ••
•
(3)
•• •• •
(3)
• •• ••
•
(3)
• •• •
•• • •• •
• •• •
(4)
•• • •• • •
(4)
•• • (4) •• •
•• •
2. Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ M ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ∑§áÊ ÁŸÁ‡øà ÁòÊíÿÊ R ∑§ flÎûÊËÿ
¬Õ ¬⁄U-ß‚ ¬˝∑§Ê⁄U ø‹ ⁄U„Ê „Ò Á∑§ ‚◊ÿ ‘t’ ¬⁄U •Á÷∑§ãŒ˝Ë
2. A particle of mass M is moving in a circle
of fixed radius R in such a way that its
2. M v$m ^fphsp¡ L$Z R S>¡V$gu AQm rÓÄep ^fphsp
centripetal acceleration at time t is given àfl⁄UáÊ n2 R t2 mÊ⁄UÊ ÁŒÿÊ ¡Ê ‚∑§ÃÊ „Ò, ÿ„Ê° ‘n’ •ø⁄U hsy®mpL$pf dpN® `f A¡hu fus¡ Nrs L$f¡ R>¡ L¡$ t kde¡ s¡_p¡
by n2 R t2 where n is a constant. The power „Ò– Ã’ ∑§áÊ ¬⁄U ‹ª ⁄U„ ’‹ mÊ⁄UÊ ©‚∑§Ê ŒË ªß¸ ‡ÊÁÄà L¡$ÞÖNpdu âh¡N n2 R t2 hX¡$ Ap`u iL$pe; Äep„ n A¡
delivered to the particle by the force acting „Ò — AQmp„L$ R>¡. sp¡ L$Z `f gpNsp bm hX¡$ L$Z_¡ dmsp¡
on it, is :
(1) M n2 R2 t `phf (L$pe®v$nsp) __________ \i¡.
(1) M n2 R2 t
(2) M n R2 t (1) M n2 R2 t
(2) M n R2 t
(3) M n R2 t2 (2) M n R2 t
(3) M n R2 t2
• (3) M n R2 t2
• M n2 R2 t2
•
(4)
M n2 R2 t2 •
•
(4)
M n2 R2 t2
•
(4)

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 2
3. Concrete mixture is made by mixing 3. ∑¥§∑˝§Ë≈U Á◊Ä‚ø⁄U ’ŸÊŸ ∑§ Á‹ÿ ‚Ë◊¥≈U, ⁄Uà ÃÕÊ ⁄UÊ«∏Ë 3. A¡L$ QpL$Nrs L$fsp _mpL$pfue X²$ddp„ rkd¡ÞV$, `Õ\f
cement, stone and sand in a rotating
∑§Ê ∞∑§ ÉÊÍáÊ˸ÿ ’‹ŸÊ∑§Ê⁄U «˛U◊ ◊¥ «UÊ‹Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ÿÁŒ A_¡ f¡su_¡ c¡Np L$fu_¡ L$p¢q¾$V$ rdîZ s¥epf L$fhpdp„
cylindrical drum. If the drum rotates too
fast, the ingredients remain stuck to the «˛U◊ ∑§Ë ÉÊÍáʸŸ-ªÁà ’„Èà Ã¡ „Ê ÃÊ ‚¥ÉÊ≈U∑§ «˛U◊ ∑§Ë Aph¡ R>¡. lh¡ Å¡ X²$d M|b S> TX$`\u QpL$Nrs L$f¡ sp¡
wall of the drum and proper mixing of ŒËflÊ⁄U ‚ Áø¬∑§ ⁄U„Ã „Ò¥ •ÊÒ⁄U Á◊Ä‚ø⁄U ∆UË∑§ ‚ Ÿ„Ë¥ rdîZ L$f¡gp sÒhp¡ X²$d_u qv$hpg_¡ Qp¢V$u Åe R>¡ A_¡
ingredients does not take place. The ’ŸÃÊ– ÿÁŒ «˛U◊ ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ 1.25 m „Ò •ÊÒ⁄U ß‚∑§Ë s¡d_y„ ep¡Áe rdîZ b_phu iL$psy„ _\u. sp¡ `qfc°dZ
œÈ⁄UË ˇÊÒÁá „Ò, Ã’ •ë¿UË Ã⁄U„ Á◊Ä‚ „ÊŸ ∑§ Á‹ÿ
maximum rotational speed of the drum in
revolutions per minute(rpm) to ensure
ârs rd_uV$ (rpm) _p `v$dp„, ep¡Áe rdîZ b_hp
proper mixing is close to : ¡M§⁄UË •Áœ∑§Ã◊ ÉÊÍáÊ˸ÿ-ªÁà rpm ◊¥ „Ò — dpV¡$_u X²$d_u dlÑd L$p¡Zue TX$` __________ _u
(Take the radius of the drum to be 1.25 m (1) 0.4 _ÆL$_u li¡. (X²$d_u rÓÄep 1.25 m A_¡ s¡_u An
and its axle to be horizontal) : (2) 1.3 kdrnrsS> R>¡ s¡d ^pfp¡).
(1) 0.4 (3) 8.0 (1) 0.4
(2) 1.3 (4) 27.0 (2) 1.3
(3) 8.0 (3) 8.0
(4) 27.0 (4) 27.0

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 3
4. Velocity-time graph for a body of mass 4. 10 kg Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ∑§ Á¬¥«U ∑§ Á‹ÿ flª-‚◊ÿ ª˝Ê»§ ÁøòÊ 4. 10 kg v$m ^fphsp `v$p\® dpV¡$_p¡ h¡N-kde_p¡ Apg¡M
10 kg is shown in figure. Work-done on
◊¥ ÁŒÿÊ „Ò– Á¬¥«U ¬⁄U ¬„‹ 2 ‚. ◊¥ Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ ∑§Êÿ¸ ApL©$rÑdp„ v$ip®h¡g R>¡. `v$p\® `f â\d 2 k¡L$ÞX$dp„ \su
the body in first two seconds of the motion
is : „Ò — Nrs v$fçep_ \sy„ L$pe® __________\i¡.

(1) 12000 J (1) 12000 J (1) 12000 J

(2) −12000 J (2) −12000 J (2) −12000 J
(3) −4500 J (3) −4500 J (3) −4500 J
(4) −9300 J (4) −9300 J (4) −9300 J

5. In the figure shown ABC is a uniform wire. 5. ÁŒÿ ªÿ ÁøòÊ ◊¥ ÃÊ⁄U ABC ∞∑§ ‚◊ÊŸ „Ò– ÿÁŒ 5. ApL©$rÑdp„ v$ip®ìep dyS>b ABC A¡ kdp_ spf R>¡. Å¡
If centre of mass of wire lies vertically below ‚¥„ÁÃ-∑§ãŒ˝ Á’¥ŒÈ A ∑ ™§äflʸœ⁄U ŸËø ÁSÕà „Ò, Ã’ spf_y„ Öìedp_ L¡$ÞÖ tbvy$ A _u bfp¡bf _uQ¡ Aphsy„
•• •• ••
point A, then
• •
is close to : ‹ª÷ª „Ò — lp¡e sp¡ _y„ d|ëe _________ _u _ÆL$_y„ \i¡.
• • • •

(1) 1.85 (1) 1.85 (1) 1.85

(2) 1.37 (2) 1.37 (2) 1.37
(3) 1.5 (3) 1.5 (3) 1.5
(4) 3 (4) 3 (4) 3

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03
6. An astronaut of mass m is working on a
satellite orbiting the earth at a distance h
from the earth’s surface. The radius of the
earth is R, while its mass is M. The
gravitational pull FG on the astronaut is :
(1) Zero since astronaut feels weightless
6. ¬ÎâflË ∑§Ë ‚Ä ‚ ‘h’ ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U ÁSÕà ∞∑§ ©¬ª˝„ ¬⁄U
∞∑§ ‘m’ Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ∑§Ê •¥ÃÁ⁄UˇÊ-ÿÊòÊË ∑§Ê◊ ∑§⁄U ⁄U„Ê „Ò–
¬ÎâflË ∑§Ê Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ‘M’ ÃÕÊ ÁòÊíÿÊ ‘R’ „Ò– Ã’ ©‚
ÿÊòÊË ¬⁄U ‹ª ⁄U„Ê ªÈL§àflËÿ ’‹ FG „Ò —
(1) ‡ÊÍãÿ, ÄÿÊ¥Á∑§ fl„ ÿÊòÊË ÷Ê⁄U„ËŸÃÊ ◊„‚Í‚ ∑§⁄UÃÊ
4
6. `©Õhu_u k`pV$u\u h KQpC A¡ `qfc°dZ L$fsp
k¡V¡gpCV$dp„ m v$m ^fphsp¡ MNp¡mipõÓu L$pe® L$f¡ R>¡.
`©Õhu_u rÓÄep R R>¡ Äepf¡ s¡_„y v$m M R>¡. MNp¡mipõÓu
`f gpNsy„ NyfyÐhpL$j} M¢QpZ FG __________ li¡.
(1) i| Þ e, L$ p fZ L¡ $ MNp¡ m ipõÓu hS>_frls

• •• •• • •• •
•• • „Ò– [õ\rsdp„ R>¡.
••
(2)
•• • •• •
• •• •• • •• • • •• •• • •• •
•• ••
(2) (2)
•• • •• •
•• •• • •• •
•• •• •• •• ••
(3)
•• • •• • •• • •• •
•• •• • •• • •• •• • •• •
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
(3) (3)
•• •
• • •• •
•• •• •• ••
(4)
•• • •• •
• • •• • • • •• •
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
(4) (4)

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03
7. A bottle has an opening of radius a and
length b. A cork of length b and radius
(a+∆a) where (∆a<<a) is compressed to fit
into the opening completely (See figure).
If the bulk modulus of cork is B and
frictional coefficient between the bottle and
cork is µ then the force needed to push the
cork into the bottle is :
7. ∞∑§ ’ÊË ∑§ ◊È°„ ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ ‘a’ „ÒÒ ÃÕÊ ‹ê’Ê߸ ‘b’ „Ò–
∞∑§ ‘b’ ‹ê’Ê߸ •ÊÒ⁄U (a+∆a) ÁòÊíÿÊ (∆a<<a) flÊ‹
∑§Ê∑¸§ ∑§Ê ©‚∑§ ◊È°„ ◊¥ ¬Í⁄UË Ã⁄U„ ∆Í°U‚ ÁŒÿÊ ªÿÊ „Ò (ÁøòÊ
ŒÁπÿ)– ÿÁŒ ∑§Ê∑¸§ ∑§Ê •Êÿß ¬˝àÿÊSÕÃÊ ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§ B
„Ò ÃÕÊ ’ÊË •ÊÒ⁄U ∑§Ê∑¸§ ∑§ ’Ëø ÉÊ·¸áÊ-ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§ µ „Ò,
Ã’ ∑§Ê∑¸§ ∑§Ê ◊È°„ ◊¥ ÉÊÈ‚ÊŸ ∑§ Á‹ÿ •Êfl‡ÿ∑§ ’‹ „Ò —
5
7. A¡L$ bp¡V$g_p Nmp_u rÓÄep a A_¡ g„bpC b R>¡.
ApL©$rÑdp„ v$ip®ìep dyS>b, b g„bpC_p A_¡ (a+∆a)
Äep„ (∆a<<a) _u rÓÄep ^fphsp b|Q_¡ v$bpZ`|h®L$
hX¡$ bp¡V$g_p Nmphpmp cpN_¡ k„`|Z® b„^ L$fhpdp„ Aph¡
R>¡. Å¡ b|Q_p¡ L$v$ [õ\rsõ\p`L$spA„L$ B lp¡e A_¡
bp¡V$g A_¡ b|Q hÃQ¡_p¡ OjZp¯L$ µ lp¡e sp¡ b|Q_¡
bp¡V$gdp„ O|kpX$hp S>ê$fu bm ________ \i¡.

(1) (πµB b) ∆a (1) (πµB b) ∆a (1) (πµB b) ∆a

(2) (2πµB b) ∆a (2) (2πµB b) ∆a (2) (2πµB b) ∆a
(3) (πµB b) a (3) (πµB b) a (3) (πµB b) a
(4) (4πµB b) ∆a (4) (4πµB b) ∆a (4) (4πµB b) ∆a

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 6
8. A Carnot freezer takes heat from water at 8. ∞∑§ ∑§ÊŸÊ¸≈U »˝§Ë¡⁄U •¬Ÿ •¥Œ⁄U 0C ¬⁄U ⁄Uπ „È∞ ¡‹ ‚ 8. A¡L$ L$p_p£V$ f¡qäS>f¡V$f `pZudp„\u 0C sp`dp_¡ Dódp
0C inside it and rejects it to the room at a
™§c◊Ê ‹∑§⁄U ©‚ ∑§◊⁄U ∑§ Ãʬ◊ÊŸ 27C ¬⁄U ÁŸc∑§ÊÁ‚à ip¡ju 27C sp`dp_¡ fl¡gp hpsphfZdp„ a¢L¡$ R>¡. bfa_u
temperature of 27C. The latent heat of ice
is 336×103 J kg−1. If 5 kg of water at 0C is ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– ’»¸§ ∑§Ë ªÈåà ™§c◊Ê 336×103 J kg−1 „Ò– g¡V¡$ÞV$ (Nyá) Dódp 336×103 J kg−1 R>¡. Å¡
converted into ice at 0C by the freezer, then ÿÁŒ »˝§Ë¡⁄U ◊¥ ⁄UπÊ 0C ¬⁄U 5 kg ¡‹, 0C ¬⁄U ’»¸§ ◊¥ f¡qäS>f¡V$fdp„ 0C _y„ 5 kg `pZu 0C bfadp„ ê$`p„sfus
the energy consumed by the freezer is close ’Œ‹ÃÊ „Ò Ã’ »˝§Ë¡⁄U mÊ⁄UÊ π¬ÊßZ ªß¸ ™§¡Ê¸ ‹ª÷ª „Ò — L$fhy„ lp¡e sp¡ f¡qäS>f¡V$f¡ hp`f¡g EÅ® __________ _u
to :
(1) 1.67×105 J _ÆL$_y„ d|ëe ^fphi¡.
(1) 1.67×105 J
(2) 1.68×106 J (1) 1.67×105 J
(2) 1.68×106 J
(3) 1.51×105 J (2) 1.68×106 J
(3) 1.51×105 J
(4) 1.71×107 J (3) 1.51×105 J
(4) 1.71×107 J
(4) 1.71×107 J

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03
9. Which of the following shows the correct
relationship between the pressure ‘P’ and
density ρ of an ideal gas at constant
temperature ?
7
9. Á∑§‚Ë •ÊŒ‡Ê¸ ªÒ‚ ∑§ Á‹ÿ ÁSÕ⁄U Ãʬ◊ÊŸ ¬⁄U ©‚∑§ ŒÊ’ 9. _uQ¡ Ap`¡g ApL©$rsAp¡ `¥L$u L$C ApL©$rÑ AQm sp`dp_¡
‘P’ ÃÕÊ ÉÊŸàfl ‘ρ’ ∑§ ’Ëø ‚¥’¥œ ∑§ Á‹ÿ ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ fl¡g Apv$i® hpey dpV¡$ v$bpZ ‘P’ A_¡ O_sp ρ hÃQ¡_p¡
∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê ÁøòÊ ‚„Ë „Ò? kpQp¡ k„b„^ v$ip®h¡ R>¡.

(1) (1) (1)

(2) (2) (2)

(3) (3) (3)

(4) (4) (4)

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 8
10. In an engine the piston undergoes vertical 10. ∞∑§ ߥ¡Ÿ ∑§Ê Á¬S≈UŸ 7 cm •ÊÿÊ◊ ∑§Ë ‚⁄U‹-•Êflø- 10. A¡L$ A¡[ÞS>_dp„ r`õV$_ DÝh® qv$ipdp„ 7 cm _p
simple harmonic motion with amplitude
ªÁà ™§äflʸœ⁄U ◊¥ ∑§⁄U ⁄U„Ê „Ò– Á¬S≈UŸ ∑§ ™§¬⁄U ∞∑§ L„$`rhõspf kp\¡ SHM (k.Ap.N) L$f¡ R>¡. r`õV$__u
7 cm. A washer rests on top of the piston
and moves with it. The motor speed is flʇÊ⁄U ⁄UπÊ „Ò ¡Ê ©‚∑§ ‚ÊÕ ø‹ÃÊ „Ò– ◊Ê≈U⁄U ∑§Ë ªÁà D`f fl¡g hp¸if s¡_u kp\¡ S> Nrs L$f¡ R>¡. r`õV$__¡
slowly increased. The frequency of the œË⁄U-œË⁄U ’…∏Ê߸ ¡ÊÃË „Ò ÃÊ Á¬S≈UŸ ∑§Ë •ÊflÎÁûÊ Á¡‚ ¬⁄U Nrs L$fphsu dp¡V$f_u TX$` ^ud¡\u h^pfhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡.
piston at which the washer no longer stays flʇÊ⁄U Á¬S≈UŸ ∑§Ê ‚ÊÕ ¿UÊ«∏ ŒÃÊ „Ò, fl„ ‹ª÷ª „Ò — hp¸if r`õV$__u k`pV$u_¡ R>p¡X$u v$¡ s¡ r`õV$__u S>ê$fu
in contact with the piston, is close to :
(1) 0.1 Hz Aph©rÑ __________ _u _ÆL$_y„ d|ëe li¡.
(1) 0.1 Hz
(2) 1.2 Hz (1) 0.1 Hz
(2) 1.2 Hz
(3) 0.7 Hz (2) 1.2 Hz
(3) 0.7 Hz
(4) 1.9 Hz (3) 0.7 Hz
(4) 1.9 Hz
(4) 1.9 Hz

11. A toy-car, blowing its horn, is moving with

11. ∞∑§ Áπ‹ÊÒŸÊ ∑§Ê⁄U „ÊŸ¸ ’¡ÊÃË „È߸ 5 m/s ∑§Ë ÁSÕ⁄U
a steady speed of 5 m/s, away from a wall. ªÁà ‚ ∞∑§ ŒËflÊ⁄U ‚ ŒÍ⁄U ÃÕÊ ∞∑§ √ÿÁÄà ∑§Ë •Ê⁄U ¡Ê 11. A¡L$ lp¡_® hNpX$su fdL$X$p„_u L$pf qv$hpg \u v|$f sfa
An observer, towards whom the toy car is ⁄U„Ë „Ò– ©‚ √ÿÁÄà ∑§Ê 5 ’Ë≈U/‚¥. ‚ÈŸÊ߸ ŒÃË „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ 5 m/s _u AQm TX$`\u Nrs L$f¡ R>¡ . A¡ L $
moving, is able to hear 5 beats per second. „flÊ ◊¥ äflÁŸ ∑§Ë ªÁà 340 m/s „Ò, Ã’ „ÊŸ¸ ∑§Ë Ahgp¡L$_L$pf, L¡$ S>¡_u sfa fdL$X$p„_u L$pf Nrs L$f¡ R>¡,
If the velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s,
the frequency of the horn of the toy car is •ÊflÎÁûÊ ‹ª÷ª „Ò — A¡L$ k¡L$ÞX$dp„ 5 õ`„v$ (beats) kp„cm¡ R>¡. Å¡ lhpdp„
close to : (1) 680 Hz Ýhr__p¡ h¡N 340 m/s lp¡e sp¡ L$pf_p lp¡_®_u Aph©qÑ
(1) 680 Hz (2) 510 Hz _______ _u _ÆL$_u li¡.
(2) 510 Hz (3) 340 Hz (1) 680 Hz
(3) 340 Hz (4) 170 Hz (2) 510 Hz
(4) 170 Hz (3) 340 Hz
(4) 170 Hz

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 9
12. Within a spherical charge distribution of 12. •Êfl‡Ê-ÉÊŸàfl ρ (r) ∑§ Á∑§‚Ë ªÊ‹Ëÿ-•Êfl‡Ê-ÁflÃ⁄UáÊ, 12. ρ(r) S>¡V$gu Np¡gue rhÛyscpf rhsfZ dpV¡$, A_y¾$d¡
charge density ρ(r), N equipotential
∑§ •ãŒ⁄U N ‚◊Áfl÷fl-¬Îc∆U, Á¡Ÿ∑§Ë Áfl÷fl „Ò r0, r 1 , r 2 ,..........r N rÓÄep ^fphsu A_¡
surfaces of potential V0, V0+∆V, V0+2∆V,
V 0 , V 0 +∆V, V 0 +2∆V, ........ V 0 +N∆V V0, V0+∆V, V0+2∆V, .........., V0+N∆V
.......... V0+N∆V (∆V>0), are drawn and
have increasing radii (∆V>0), •Ê⁄UÁπà Á∑§ÿ ªÿ „Ò¥ •ÊÒ⁄U ©Ÿ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ∞¥ (∆V>0) S>¡V$gy„ [õ\rsdp_ ^fphsu N kd[õ\rsdp_
r 0 , r 1 , r 2 ,..........r N , respectively. If the ∑˝§◊‡Ê— r0, r1, r2,..........rN „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ ÁòÊíÿÊ•Ê¥ ∑§Ê k`pV$u (`©›$) v$p¡fhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡. V0 A_¡ ∆V _p
difference in the radii of the surfaces is •ãÃ⁄UÊ‹, ‚÷Ë V0 ÃÕÊ ∆V ∑§ ◊ÊŸÊ¥ ∑§ Á‹ÿ, ÁSÕ⁄U „Ò b^pS> d|ëe dpV¡$ Å¡ k`pV$uAp¡_u rÓÄep hÃQ¡_p¡ saphs
Ã’ —
constant for all values of V0 and ∆V then :
AQm fl¡sp¡ lp¡e sp¡ ________.
(1) ρ (r) α r
(1) ρ (r) α r (1) ρ (r) α r
(2) ρ (r) = constant
(2) ρ (r)=•ø⁄U (2) ρ (r) = AQm
•
• •( • ) •• • • •
•
(3)
• •( • ) •• • • •( • ) •• •
• •
(3) (3)
•
(4) • •( • ) •• • • • •
• (4) • •( • ) •• • • (4) • •( • ) •• • •
• •

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03
13. Figure shows a network of capacitors where
the numbers indicates capacitances in
micro Farad. The value of capacitance C if
the equivalent capacitance between point
A and B is to be 1 µF is :
13. ÁøòÊ ‚¥œÊÁ⁄UòÊÊ¥ ∑§Ê ÁŸ∑§Êÿ Œ‡ÊʸÃÊ „Ò, ¡„Ê° •¥∑§ µF ◊¥
œÊÁ⁄UÃÊ Œ‡ÊʸÃ „Ò¥– A fl B ∑§ ’Ëø ¬˝÷ÊflË œÊÁ⁄UÃÊ
1 µF „ÊŸ ∑§ Á‹ÿ C ∑§Ë œÊÁ⁄UÃÊ „ÊŸË øÊÁ„ÿ —
10
13. ApL©$rÑdp„ k„OpfL$p¡_p¡ b_¡gy„ _¡V$hL®$ v$ip®h¡ R>¡ Äep„
L¡ $ ` ¡ k uV$ f _u bpSy > dp„ gM¡ g _„ b f s¡ L¡ $ ` ¡ k uV$ f _y „
dpC¾$p¡a¡fpX$dp„ d|ëe v$ip®h¡ R>¡. Å¡ A A_¡ B hÃQ¡_y„
`qfZpdu L¡$`¡kuV$Þk (k„OpfL$sp) 1 µF Å¡Csy„ lp¡e sp¡
k„OpfL$ C _y„ d|ëe ________ Å¡Ci¡.

••
•• •
••
(1)
•• ••
•• • •• •
••
(1)
••
(1)
••
(2) •• •
•• •• ••
(2) •• • •• •
••
(2)
•• ••
(3) •• •
•• •• ••
(3) •• • •• •
•• ••
(3)
••
•• •
••
(4)
•• ••
•• • •• •
••
(4)
••
(4)

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 11
14. The resistance of an electrical toaster has a 14. Á’¡‹Ë ‚ ø‹Ÿ flÊ‹ ≈UÊS≈U⁄U ∑§ ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ ∑§Ê Ãʬ◊ÊŸ ‚ 14. A¡L$ Cg¡¼V²$uL$ V$p¡õV$f_p¡ s¡_p D`ep¡N v$fçep_, sp`dp_
temperature dependence given by
’Œ‹Êfl R(T)=R0 [1+α(T−T0)] mÊ⁄UÊ ÁŒÿÊ ªÿÊ kp\¡ _ p¡ k„ b „ ^ R(T)=R0 [1+α(T−T0)] hX¡ $
R(T)=R 0 [1+α(T−T 0 )] in its range of
operation. At T0=300 K, R=100 Ω and at „Ò – T 0 =300 K ¬⁄U R=100 Ω „Ò ÃÕÊ Ap`hpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡ . T 0 =300 K dpV¡ $
T=500 K, R=120 Ω. The toaster is T=500 K ¬⁄U R=120 Ω „Ò– ≈UÊS≈U⁄U 200 VU ∑§ R=100 Ω A_¡ T=500 K dpV¡$ R=120 Ω R>¡.
connected to a voltage source at 200 V and dÊà ‚ ¡È«∏Ê „Ò, ÃÕÊ ©‚∑§Ê Ãʬ◊ÊŸ 300 K ‚ ∞∑§ V$p¡õV$f_¡ A¡L$ 200 V _p hp¡ëV¡$S> Dv¹$Nd kp\¡ Å¡X$u s¡_y„
‚◊ÊŸ Œ⁄U ¬⁄U ’…∏∑§⁄U 30 s ◊¥ 500 K „Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– Ã’
its temperature is raised at a constant rate
from 300 to 500 K in 30 s. The total work
sp`dp_ AQm v$f¡ 300 \u 500 K ky^u gC S>hpdp„
done in raising the temperature is : ß‚ ¬˝∑˝§◊ ◊¥ Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ ∑ȧ‹ ∑§Êÿ¸ „Ò — Aph¡ R>¡. s¡ dpV¡$ gpNsp¡ kdeNpmp¡ 30 s R>¡. sp¡
• •• • •• sp`dp__p¡ h^pfp¡ L$fhp dpV¡ $ S>ê$fu Ly $ g L$pe®
• • • • •• • •• • • • • •• • ••
• ••
(1)
• ••
(1) __________.
• ••
• • • • • • •• • ••
• • • • •• • •• • • • • •• • •• (1)
• ••
•
(2)
•
(2)
•
• • • • • • •• • ••
• • • • •• • •• • • • • •• • •• (2)
•
•
(3)
•
(3)
•
(4) 300 J (4) 300 J • • • • •• • ••
•
(3)

(4) 300 J

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03
15. Consider a thin metallic sheet
perpendicular to the plane of the paper
moving with speed ‘v’ in a uniform
magnetic field B going into the plane of the
paper (See figure). If charge densities σ1 and
σ2 are induced on the left and right surfaces,
respectively, of the sheet then (ignore
fringe effects) :
15. ∞∑§ ¬Ã‹Ë œÊÃÈ ‡ÊË≈U ¬Îc∆U ∑§ ‹ê’flà ⁄UπË „Ò •ÊÒ⁄U
ÁøòÊ ◊¥ ÁŒπÊ߸ ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ flª ‘v’ ‚ ∞∑§ ‚◊ÊŸ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ-
ˇÊòÊ B ◊¥ ø‹ ⁄U„Ë „Ò– øÈê’∑§Ëÿ-ˇÊòÊ ß‚ ‚◊Ë ¬Îc∆U
◊¥ ¬˝fl‡Ê ∑§⁄U ⁄U„Ê „Ò– ÿÁŒ ß‚ ‡ÊË≈U ∑§Ë ’ÊßZ •ÊÒ⁄U ŒÊßZ
‚ÄÊ¥ ¬⁄U ∑˝§◊‡Ê— ¬Îc∆U-•Êfl‡Ê-ÉÊŸàfl σ1 ÃÕÊ σ2 ¬˝Á⁄UÃ
„ÊÃ „Ò¥, Ã’ ©¬Ê¥Ã-¬˝÷Êfl ∑§Ê Ÿªáÿ ◊ÊŸÃ „È∞
σ1 ÃÕÊ σ2 ∑§ ◊ÊŸ „Ê¥ª —
12
15. kdp„Nu Qy„bL$ue n¡Ó B dp„, `yõsL$_p `¡S>_¡ g„b A_¡
‘v’ S>¡V$gu AQm TX$`\u `¡S>_u A„v$f v$pMg \su
^psy _ u `psmu s[¼s (`© › $) _¡ Ýep_dp„ gp¡ .
(ApL©$rÑ Sy>Ap¡) Å¡ s¡_u X$pbu A_¡ S>dZu k`pV$u `f
A_y¾$d¡ σ1 A_¡ σ2 S>¡V$gu `©›$rhÛyscpf O_sp Dv¹$ch¡
sp¡ __________ \i¡. (qäÞS> Akf AhNZp¡.)

(1) σ1=0 v B, σ2=−0 v B

• • •• −•• • • •
(1) σ1=0 v B, σ2=−0 v B
• • •=• • • • • •=•
• • •• −•• • • •
(2)
• •
(1) σ1=0 v B, σ2=−0 v B
• • •=• • • • • •=•
• • •• −•• • • •
(2)
• •
(2) • • •=• • • • • •=• (3) σ1=σ2=0 vB
• •
−• • • • ••
(3) σ1=σ2=0 vB
• • •=• • ••• • •=• •
−• • • • ••
(4)
• •
(3) σ1=σ2=0 vB
• • •=• • ••• • •=• •
−• • • • ••
(4)
• •
(4) • • •=• • ••• • •=• •
• •

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03
16. A fighter plane of length 20 m, wing span
(distance from tip of one wing to the tip of
the other wing) of 15 m and height
5 m is flying towards east over Delhi. Its
speed is 240 ms−1. The earth’s magnetic
field over Delhi is 5×10 −5 T with the
declination angle ~0 and dip of θ such that
• sin θ =
•
sin θ = . If the voltage developed is VB
between the lower and upper side of the
plane and VW between the tips of the wings
then VB and VW are close to :
(1) VB=45 mV; VW=120 mV with right
side of pilot at higher voltage
(2) VB=45 mV; VW=120 mV with left
side of pilot at higher voltage
(3) VB=40 mV; VW=135 mV with right
side of pilot at high voltage
(4) VB=40 mV; VW=135 mV with left
side of pilot at higher voltage
SET - 03 ENGLISH
16. ∞∑§ ‹«∏Ê∑ͧ ¡„Ê¡ ∑§Ë ‹ê’Ê߸ 20 m, ¬¥πÊ¥ ∑§ Á‚⁄UÊ¥ ∑§
’Ëø ŒÍ⁄UË 15 m ÃÕÊ ™°§øÊ߸ 5 m „Ò, •ÊÒ⁄U ÿ„ ÁŒÀ‹Ë
∑§ ™§¬⁄U ¬Ífl¸-ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ 240 ms−1 ªÁà ‚ ©«∏ ⁄U„Ê „Ò–
ÁŒÀ‹Ë ∑§ ™§¬⁄U ¬ÎâflË ∑§Ê øÈê’∑§Ëÿ-ˇÊòÊ 5×10−5 T
„Ò, Á«UÁÄ‹Ÿ‡ÊŸ ∑§ÊáÊ ~0 „Ò, ÃÕÊ Á«U¬ ∑§ÊáÊ θ ∑§ Á‹ÿ
• d|ëe 5×10−5 T d¡Á_¡V$uL$ X¡$[¼g_¡i_ ~0 A_¡ X$u`
•
„Ò– ÿÁŒ ¬˝Á⁄UÃ-Áfl÷fl „Ò¥ — VB ¡„Ê¡ ∑§
™§¬⁄U fl ŸËø ∑§ ’Ëø ; VW ¬¥πÊ¥ ∑§ Á‚⁄UÊ¥ ∑§ ’Ëø–
Ã’ —
(1) VB=45 mV ; VW=120 mV ŒÊÿÊ¥ ¬¥π-
Á‚⁄UÊ+ve
(2) VB=45 mV ; VW=120 mV ’ÊÿÊ¥ ¬¥π-
Á‚⁄UÊ−ve
(3) VB=40 mV ; VW=135 mV ŒÊÿÊ¥ ¬¥π-
Á‚⁄UÊ+ve
(4) VB=40 mV ; VW=135 mV ’ÊÿÊ¥ ¬¥π-
Á‚⁄UÊ−ve
SET - 03 HINDI
13
16. 20 m g„bpC ^fphsy„, 15 m `p„Muep_u `lp¡mpC (A¡L$
bpSy>_u `p„Muep_p R>¡X$p\u buÆ bpSy>_p `p„rMep_p
R>¡X$p ky^u) A_¡ 5 m S>¡V$gu KQpC ^fphsy„ A¡L$ gX$peL$
rhdp_ qv$ëlu_p `|h® sfa EX$u füy„ R>¡. s¡_u TX$`
240 ms−1 R>¡. qv$ëlu D`f `©Õhu_y„ Qy„bL$ue n¡Ó_y„
•
A¡ÞNg θ A¡hp¡ R>¡ L¡$ S>¡\u sin θ = \pe. Å¡
•
àg¡__p _uQ¡_p A_¡ D`f_p R>¡X$p hÃQ¡ VB S>¡V$gp¡
hp¡ëV¡$S> A_¡ VW S>¡V$gp¡ hp¡ëV¡$S> b¡ `p„Mp¡_p R>¡X$p hÃQ¡
DÑ`Þ_ \sp¡ lp¡ e sp¡ V B A_¡ V W _y „ d| ë e
__________ _ÆL$_y„ li¡..
(1) VB=45 mV A_¡ VW= `pegp¡V$_u S>dZu
bpSy> KQp hp¡ëV¡$S>¡ lp¡e s¡ fus¡ 120 mV
(2) VB=45 mV; VW= `pegp¡V$_u X$pbu bpSy>
KQp hp¡ëV¡$S>¡ lp¡e s¡ fus¡ 120 mV
(3) VB=40 mV; VW= `pegp¡V$_u S>dZu bpSy>
KQp hp¡ëV¡$S>¡ lp¡e s¡ fus¡ 135 mV
(4) VB=40 mV; VW= `pegp¡V$_u X$pbu bpSy>
KQp hp¡ëV¡$S>¡ lp¡e s¡ fus¡ 135 mV
SET - 03 GUJARATI
Set - 03 14
17. A conducting metal circular-wire-loop of 17. ‘r’ ÁòÊíÿÊ ∑ § œÊÃÈ flÎ û ÊËÿ-ÃÊ⁄U - ‹Í ¬ ∑§Ê ¬Î c ∆U , 17. A¡L$ kyhplL$ ^psy_y„ hsy®mpL$pf N|„Qmy„ L¡$ S>¡_u rÓÄep r
radius r is placed perpendicular to a
• •• •• • •
• •
mÊ⁄UÊ ’Œ‹Ã „È∞ øÈê’∑§Ëÿ-ˇÊòÊ ∑§
• lp¡e s¡_¡ Qy„bL$ue n¡Ó_¡ g„bê$`¡ d|L$hpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡. Ap
magnetic field which varies with time as
• • ‹ê’flà ⁄UπÊ „Ò– ¡„Ê° ‚◊ÿ t=0 ¬⁄U B0 ÃÕÊ τ •ø⁄U Qy„bL$ue n¡Ó kde kp\¡ • •• •• • •• •• âdpZ¡ bv$gpe
• •• •• • • • , where B0 and τ are constants,
at time t=0. If the resistance of the loop is „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ ‹Í¬ ∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ R „Ò, Ã’ ∑§Ê»§Ë íÿÊŒÊ ‚◊ÿ R>¡, Äep„ B0 A_¡ τ t=0 kde¡ AQmp„L$ R>¡. Å¡ N|Q
„ mp_p¡
R then the heat generated in the loop after •• →• • ªÈ¡⁄UŸ ∑§ ’ÊŒ ©‚ ‹Í¬ ◊¥ ¬ÒŒÊ „È߸ ™§¡Ê¸ „Ò — Ahfp¡^ R lp¡e sp¡ M|b S> gp„bp kde •• →• • _¡
a long time •• →• • is : A„s¡ N|„Qmpdp„ DÐ`Þ_ Dódp _______ \i¡.
π • • • • ••
π • • • • •• π • • • • ••
(1)
•τ •
(1)
•τ •
(1)
•τ •
π • • • • ••
π • • • • •• π • • • • ••
(2)
•τ •
(2)
•τ •
(2)
•τ •
π • • • • •• ••
π • • • • •• π • • • • •• ••
(3)
•• τ
(3) (3)
π • • • • ••
τ τ

π • • • • •• π • • • • ••
(4)
τ•
(4)
τ•
(4)
τ•

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 15
18. Consider an electromagnetic wave 18. √ÿÊ◊ ◊¥ ø‹ ⁄U„Ë flÒlÈÃ-ëÊÈê’∑§Ëÿ Ã⁄¥Uª ∑§ Á‹∞ ‚„Ë 18. i|ÞephL$pidp„ âkfsp rhÛysQy„bL$ue sf„N_¡ Ýep_dp„
propagating in vacuum. Choose the correct
Áfl∑§À¬ øÈÁŸ∞– gp¡. _uQ¡dp„\u kpQy„ rh^p_ `k„v$ L$fp¡.
statement :
(1) For an electromagnetic wave (1) +x ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ øÊÁ‹Ã flÒlÈÃ-øÈê’∑§Ëÿ Ã⁄¥Uª ∑§ (1) +x -qv$ipdp„ Nrs L$fsp rhÛysQy„bL$ue sf„N

• dpV¡$ rhÛys n¡Ó

propagating in +x direction the
electric field is Á‹ÿ
→
• •= •

•
∧
( ∧
•• • • ••• ••• •• • •−• • , ) •
•
→
• •= ( ∧ ∧
•• • • ••• ••• •• • •−• • ) A_¡
→
• •=
•
•
(
•• • • ••• ••• •• • •−• •
∧ ∧
) and the →
B •• •
•
( ∧
•Byz ••x, •t •• y •• • z
∧
)
•

•
• Qy„bL$ue n¡Ó
magnetic field is
•
→
B •• •
• ∧
( ∧
•Byz ••x, •t •• y •• • z ) (2) +x ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ øÊÁ‹Ã flÒlÈÃ-øÈê’∑§Ëÿ Ã⁄¥Uª ∑§ →
B •• •
•
∧
( ∧
•Byz ••x, •t •• y •• • z ) \i¡.
• •
(2) For an electromagnetic wave
Á‹ÿ
→
• •• •
•
∧
(∧
•• • • • • •• •••• •• • •• • • , ) (2) +x -qv$ipdp„ Nrs L$fsp rhÛysQy„bL$ue sf„N
propagating in +x direction the dpV¡$ rhÛys n¡Ó
•
electric field is
→
• •• •
•
∧
( ∧
•• • • •• • •• •••• •• • •• • • ) → •
(
∧ ∧
) A_¡
• •• • •• • • • • •• •••• •• • •• • •
•
→
• •• •
•
∧
( ∧
•• • • • • •• •••• •• • •• • • ) and (3) +y ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ ø‹ ⁄U„Ë flÒlÈÃ-øÈê’∑§Ëÿ Ã⁄¥Uª ∑§
•
Qy„bL$ue n¡Ó
→ • ∧
the magnetic field is
Á‹ÿ • •• • •• • • •• • •• • •• • , •
→ •
( ∧ ∧
) •
→
• •• •
•
∧
( ∧
•• • • •• • •• •••• •• • •• • • ) \i¡.
• •• • •• • • •• • •• •••• •• • •• • •
• → • ∧
B •• • •Byz ••x, •t •• z - qv$ipdp„ Nrs L$fsp rhÛysQy„bL$ue sf„N
•
(3) +y
(3) For an electromagnetic wave
→ • ∧
propagating in +y direction the dpV¡$ rhÛys n¡Ó • •• • •• • • •• • •• • •• •
→ • ∧ •
electric field is • •• • •• • • •• • •• • •• •
• → • ∧
A_¡ Qy„bL$ue n¡Ó B •• • •Byz •• x, •t •• z
and the magnetic field is •
→ • ∧ \i¡.
B •• • •Byz •• x, •t •• z
•

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 16
(4) For an electromagnetic wave (4) +y ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ ø‹ ⁄U„Ë flÒlÈÃ-øÈê’∑§Ëÿ Ã⁄¥Uª ∑§ (4) +y -qv$ipdp„ Nrs L$fsp rhÛysQy„bL$ue sf„N
propagating in +y direction the
→ • ∧ → • ∧
→ • ∧ Á‹ÿ • •• • •• • • •• • •• • •• • , dpV¡ $ rhÛy s n¡ Ó • •• • •• • • •• • •• • •• •
electric field is • •• • •• • • •• • •• • •• • • •
•
→ • ∧ → • ∧
and the magnetic field is B •• • •Bz •• x, • t •• y A_¡ Qy„bL$ue n¡Ó B •• • •Bz •• x, • t •• y
• •
→ • ∧
B •• • •Bz •• x, • t •• y \i¡.
•
19. ∞∑§ ∑§Ê°ø ∑§ •h¸ªÊ‹Ëÿ ∆UÊ‚ ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ 10 cm ÃÕÊ
19. A hemispherical glass body of radius •¬fløŸÊ¥∑§ 1.5 „Ò– ©‚∑§Ë fl∑˝§Ëÿ ‚Ä ¬⁄U øÊ°ŒË ∑§Ë 19. 10 cm _u rÓÄep ^fphsu A_¡ 1.5 h¾$uch_p„L$ ^fphsp
10 cm and refractive index 1.5 is silvered ¬⁄Uà ø…∏Ê߸ ªß¸ „Ò– ‚◊Ë ¬Îc∆U ∑§ 6 cm ŸËø ÃÕÊ Ágpk_p A¡L$ A^®Np¡mpL$pf cpN_u h¾$ k`pV$u `f Qp„v$u_p¡
on its curved surface. A small air bubble is •ˇÊ ¬⁄U, ∞∑§ ‚͡◊ „flÊ ∑§Ê ’È‹’È‹Ê ÁSÕà „Ò– Ã’ Y$p¡m QY$phhpdp„ Aph¡g R>¡. s¡_u ku^u k`pV$u\u 6 cm
fl∑˝§Ëÿ-Œ¬¸áÊ ‚ ’Ÿ ⁄U„ ’È‹’È‹ ∑§Ë ¬˝ÁÃÁ’ê’ ŒÍ⁄UË „Ò —
6 cm below the flat surface inside it along
the axis. The position of the image of the
_uQ¡, A^®Np¡mpL$pf_u A„v$f_p cpNdp„, A¡L$ lhp_p¡ _p_p¡
air bubble made by the mirror is seen : `f`p¡V$p¡ s¡_u An `f fl¡g R>¡. Afukp Üpfp lhp_p
`f`p¡V$p_p„ ârstbb_y„ õ\p_ _________ v$¡Mpi¡.

(1) ‚◊Ë ‚Ä ‚ 14 cm ŸËø

(1) 14 cm below flat surface (2) ‚◊Ë ‚Ä ‚ 30 cm ŸËø
(2) 30 cm below flat surface
(3) ‚◊Ë ‚Ä ‚ 20 cm ŸËø (1) ku^u k`pV$u_u _uQ¡ 14 cm A„sf¡
(3) 20 cm below flat surface
(4) ‚◊Ë ‚Ä ‚ 16 cm ŸËø (2) ku^u k`pV$u_u _uQ¡ 30 cm A„sf¡
(4) 16 cm below flat surface
(3) ku^¡ k`pV$u_u _uQ¡ 20 cm A„sf¡
(4) ku^u k`pV$u_u _uQ¡ 16 cm A„sf¡

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03
20. Two stars are 10 light years away from the
earth. They are seen through a telescope
of objective diameter 30 cm. The
wavelength of light is 600 nm. To see the
stars just resolved by the telescope, the
minimum distance between them should
be (1 light year=9.46× 1015m) of the order
of :
20. ŒÊ ÃÊ⁄U ¬ÎâflË ‚ 10 ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê-fl·¸ ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ¬⁄U „Ò¥– ©Ÿ∑§Ê
∞∑§ ≈UÁ‹S∑§Ê¬ mÊ⁄UÊ ŒπÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò, Á¡‚∑§Ê •Á÷ŒÎ‡ÿ∑§
30 cm √ÿÊ‚ ∑§Ê „Ò– ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ∑§Ë Ã⁄¥UªŒÒÉÿ¸ 600 nm
„Ò– (1 ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê-fl·¸ =9.46× 1015m) „Ò– ≈UÁ‹S∑§Ê¬
•ª⁄U ©Ÿ ÃÊ⁄UÊ¥ ∑§Ê ‹ª÷ª Áfl÷ÁŒÃ Œπ ¬Ê ⁄U„Ê „Ò, Ã’
©Ÿ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË ∑§Ê order „Ò —
17
20. b¡ spfpAp¡ `©Õhu\u 10 âL$pihj® v|$f R>¡. s¡Ap¡_¡
30 cm ìepk ^fphsp Ap¡bS>¡¼$¹ V$uh (hõsy-g¡Þk) hpmp
V¡$guõL$p¡`\u Å¡hpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡. âL$pi_u sf„Ng„bpC
600 nm R>¡ . Ap b¡ spfp_¡ just R| > V$ p `X¡ $ g p
(rhc¡qv$s \e¡gp) Å¡hp dpV¡$ s¡d_u hÃQ¡_y„ A„sf
_________ _p ¾$d_y„ lp¡hy„ Å¡CA¡.

(1) 106 km (1) 106 km (1 âL$pi hj®=9.46× 1015m)

(2) 108 km (2) 108 km (1) 106 km
(3) 1011 km (3) 1011 km (2) 108 km
(4) 1010 km (4) 1010 km (3) 1011 km
(4) 1010 km
21. A photoelectric surface is illuminated 21. ∞∑§ ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê-flÒlÈà ‚Ä ¬⁄U ¬„‹Ë ’Ê⁄U λ ÃÕÊ ŒÍ‚⁄UË
successively by monochromatic light of • •
•
’Ê⁄U •
Ã⁄¥UªŒÒÉÿ¸ ∑§Ê ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê «UÊ‹Ê ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò– ÿÁŒ A¡L$ ap¡V$p¡Cg¡¼V²$uL$ k`pV$u_¡ hpfpasu A_y¾$d¡ λ A_¡ •
21.
•
wavelengths λ and . If the maximum
©à‚Á¡¸Ã ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê-ß‹Ä≈˛UÊÚŸ ∑§Ë •Áœ∑§Ã◊ ªÁá-™§¡Ê¸ sf„Ng„bpC ^fphsp A¡L$f„Nu âL$pi\u âL$pris L$fhpdp„
kinetic energy of the emitted ŒÍ‚⁄UË ’Ê⁄U ◊¥ ¬„‹Ë ’Ê⁄U ∑§Ë ÁÃªÈŸË „Ê, Ã’ ©‚ ‚Ä Aph¡ R>¡. buÅ qL$õkpdp„ Å¡ DÐkÅ®sp ap¡V$p¡Cg¡¼V²$p¡__u
photoelectrons in the second case is
3 times that in the first case, the work ∑§Ê ∑§Êÿ¸-»§‹Ÿ „Ò — dlÑd Nrs EÅ® â\d qL$õkp L$fsp„ ÓZ NZu dmsu
function of the surface is : •• lp¡e sp¡ k`pV$u_y„ hL®$a„¼i_ _________ \i¡.
••
(1)
•• ••
••
(1)
••
(1)
••
••
(2)
•• ••
••
(2)
••
(2)
••
•
(3)
•• ••
•
(3)
•
(3)
• •• •
• •• • •
(4)
• •• •
•
(4)
•
(4)

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 18
22. A neutron moving with a speed ‘v’ makes 22. ªÁà ‘v’ ‚ ø‹ÃÊ „È•Ê ∞∑§ ãÿÍ≈˛UÊÚŸ ∞∑§ ÁSÕ⁄U „Ê߸«˛UÊ¡Ÿ 22. ‘v’ S>¡V$gu TX$`\u Nrs L$fsp¡ ÞeyV²$p¡_ A¡L$ [õ\f A_¡
a head on collision with a stationary
¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ, ¡Ê •¬ŸË •Êl-•flSÕÊ ◊¥ „Ò, ‚ ‚ê◊Èπ ^fp[õ\rsdp„ fl¡gp lpCX²$p¡S>_ `fdpÏ kp\¡ ku^u
hydrogen atom in ground state. The
minimum kinetic energy of the neutron for ≈UÄ∑§⁄U ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– ãÿÈ≈˛UÊÚŸ ∑§Ë fl„ ãÿÍŸÃ◊ ªÁá ™§¡Ê¸ A\X$pdZ A_ych¡ R>¡. ÞeyV²$p¡__u A[õ\rsõ\p`L$
which inelastic collision will take place is : ’ÃÊÿ¥ Á¡‚ ∑§ „ÊŸ ¬⁄U ÿ„ ≈UÄ∑§⁄U •¬˝àÿÊSÕ „ÊªË — A\X$pdZ \pe s¡ dpV¡ $ _u dlÑd NrsEÅ®
(1) 10.2 eV (1) 10.2 eV __________ \i¡.
(2) 16.8 eV (2) 16.8 eV (1) 10.2 eV
(3) 12.1 eV (3) 12.1 eV (2) 16.8 eV
(4) 20.4 eV (4) 20.4 eV (3) 12.1 eV
(4) 20.4 eV
23. To get an output of 1 from the circuit shown 23. ÁŒÿ ªÿ ¬Á⁄U¬Õ ‚ 1 ÁŸª¸◊ ¬˝Êåà ∑§⁄UŸ ∑§ Á‹ÿ •Êfl‡ÿ∑§
in figure the input must be :
ÁŸfl‡Ê „ÊŸÊ øÊÁ„ÿ — 23. ApL©$rÑdp„ v$ip®h¡g `qf`\ dpV¡$ ApDV$`yV$ 1 dm¡ s¡ dpV¡$
S>ê$fu C_`yV$ __________ \i¡.

(1) a=0, b=1, c=0

(1) a=0, b=1, c=0
(2) a=1, b=0, c=0
(2) a=1, b=0, c=0 (1) a=0, b=1, c=0
(3) a=1, b=0, c=1
(3) a=1, b=0, c=1 (2) a=1, b=0, c=0
(4) a=0, b=0, c=1
(4) a=0, b=0, c=1 (3) a=1, b=0, c=1
(4) a=0, b=0, c=1

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 19
24. A modulated signal Cm(t) has the form 24. C m (t)=30 sin 300πt+10 (cos 200πt 24. dp¡X$éygf (Ar^rdrîs) \e¡gp rkÁ_g Cm(t) _uQ¡
C m (t)=30 sin 300πt+10 (cos 200πt −cos 400πt) ∞∑§ ◊Ê«ÈUÁ‹Ã Á‚ÇŸ‹ ∑§Ê Œ‡ÊʸÃÊ „Ò– dyS>b Ap`u iL$pe R>¡. Cm(t)=30 sin 300πt+10
−cos 400πt). The carrier frequency fc, the
Ã’ flÊ„∑§ •ÊflÎÁûÊ fc, ◊Ê«ÈU‹∑§ •ÊflÎÁûÊ fω ÃÕÊ ◊Ê«ÈU‹∑§ (cos 200πt−cos 400πt) L¡$fuef Aph©rÑ fc , k„v$¡ip
modulating frequency (message frequency)
f ω , and the modulation index µ are ߟ«UÄ‚ µ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— „Ò¥ — (dp¡X$éyg¡V$]N) Aph©rÑ fω, A_¡ dp¡X$éyg¡i_ A„L$
respectively given by : • (index) µ, A_y¾$d¡ ______ hX¡$ Ap`u iL$pe.
fc=200 Hz ; fω=50 Hz ; • •• •
•
(1)
•
fc=200 Hz ; fω=50 Hz ; • •• • •
• fc=200 Hz ; fω=50 Hz ; • •• •
(1)
• (1)
•
fc=150 Hz ; fω=50 Hz ; • •• •
• •
(2)
fc=150 Hz ; fω=50 Hz ; • •• • •
• fc=150 Hz ; fω=50 Hz ; • •• •
(2)
• (2)
•
fc=150 Hz ; fω=30 Hz ; • •• •
• •
(3)
fc=150 Hz ; fω=30 Hz ; • •• • •
• fc=150 Hz ; fω=30 Hz ; • •• •
(3)
• (3)
•
fc=200 Hz ; fω=30 Hz ; • •• •
•
(4)
•
fc=200 Hz ; fω=30 Hz ; • •• • •
• fc=200 Hz ; fω=30 Hz ; • •• •
(4)
•
(4)
25. m Œ˝√ÿ◊ÊŸ ∑§ ∑§áÊ ¬⁄U F ’‹ ‹ª ⁄U„Ê „Ò, •ÊÒ⁄U ©‚∑§
25. A particle of mass m is acted upon by a force
• •
• Á‹ÿ •ÊŸÈ÷Áfl∑§ ‚ê’¥œ „Ò • •• • • • • ••• ß‚ ‚ê’¥œ • •• • • • • •••
F given by the empirical law • •• • • • • ••• . • 25. m v$m ^fphsp¡ L$Z _¡ A_ykfsp
• •
If this law is to be tested experimentally by ∑§ ‚àÿʬŸ ∑§ Á‹∞ ÁSÕ⁄U •flSÕÊ ‚ ∑§áÊ ∑§Ë ªÁà ∑§Ê F bm_u Akf l¡W$m R>¡. Å¡ Ap bm-r_ed_¡ âpep¡rNL$
observing the motion starting from rest, the ¬˝ˇÊáÊ (Observation) ∑§⁄U ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ fus¡, L$Z_u Nrs [õ\f [õ\rsdp„\u iê$ \pe s¡ fus¡
best way is to plot : ‚Ê ª˝Ê»§ ‚flÊ¸ûÊ◊ „ÊªÊ? QL$pkhp¡ lp¡e sp¡ __________ _p¡ N°pa A¡ kp¥\u kpfp¡
(1) v(t) against t2
(1) t2 ∑§ ÁflL§h v(t) rhL$ë` \i¡.
•
log v(t) against • • (1) v(t) rhfyÝ^ t2
∑§ ÁflL§h log v(t)
(2)
•
••
(2)
•
(3) log v(t) against t rhfyÝ^
t ∑§ ÁflL§h log v(t) ••
(3) (2) log v(t)
•
(4) log v(t) against
• • (3) log v(t) rhfyÝ^ t
(4)
•
∑§ ÁflL§h log v(t)
•
(4) log v(t) rhfyÝ^ •

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 20
26. A thin 1 m long rod has a radius of 5 mm. 26. 1m ‹ê’Ë ¬Ã‹Ë ¿U«∏ ∑§Ë ÁòÊíÿÊ 5 mm „Ò– ÿ¥ª 26. 1m gp„bp A_¡ 5 mm rÓÄep ^fphsp¡ A¡L$ `psmp¡
A force of 50 πkN is applied at one end to
◊Ê«U‹‚ ÁŸ∑§Ê‹Ÿ ∑§ Á‹ÿ ß‚ ∑§ Á‚⁄U ¬⁄U 50 πkN krmep¡ R>¡ . s¡ _ p¡ ×Y$ [õ\rsõ\p`L$sp A„ L $
determine its Young’s modulus. Assume
that the force is exactly known. If the least ∑§Ê ’‹ ‹ªÊÿÊ ªÿÊ– ◊ÊŸ¥ Á∑§ ’‹ Á’‹∑ȧ‹ ∆UË∑§ ‚ (e„N dp¡X$éygk) ip¡^hp dpV¡$ s¡_p A¡L$ R>¡X$p D`f
count in the measurement of all lengths is ôÊÊà „Ò– ÿÁŒ ‹ê’ÊßÿÊ¥ ∑§ ◊ʬŸ ∑§ •À¬Ê¥‡Ê 50 πkN S>¡V$gy„ bm gNpX$hpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡. A¡hy„ ^pfp¡ L¡$
0.01 mm, which of the following statements 0.01 mm „Ò¥– Ã’ ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ ‚Ê ∑§ÕŸ ª‹Ã Ap bm_y„ d|ëe kQp¡V$ fus¡ dpg|d R>¡. Å¡ g„bpC_p
„Ò?
is false ?
b^p S> dp`_dp„ gOyÑd dp` i[¼s 0.01 mm lp¡e
•• sp¡ _uQ¡ `¥L$u_y„ L$ey„ rh^p_ Mp¡Vy„$ li¡ ?
(1) gets minimum contribution ••
• (1) ◊¥ ‹ê’Ê߸ ∑§Ë •ÁŸÁ‡øÃÃÊ ∑§Ê ÿÊªŒÊŸ
• ••
from the uncertainty in the length. g„bpC_u AQp¡½$kpC_¡ L$pfZ¡ dp„ gOyÑd
ãÿÍŸÃ◊ „Ò–
(1)
(2) The figure of merit is the largest for •
the length of the rod. (2) ¿U«∏ ∑§Ë ‹ê’Ê߸ ∑§ Á‹ÿ ŒˇÊÃÊ¥∑§ ‚’‚ ’«∏Ê „Ò– apmp¡ Aphsp¡ li¡.
(3) The maximum value of Y that can be (3) Y ∑§Ê •Áœ∑§Ã◊ ¬˝Ê# „Ê ‚∑§Ÿ flÊ‹Ê ◊ÊŸ (2) krmep_u g„bpC dpV¡$ v$nsp„L$ (figure of
determined is 1014 N/m2.
1014 N/m2. merit) kp¥\u h^pf¡ \i¡.
•• d¡ m hu iL$ p e s¡ h u Y _u dlÑd qL„ $ d s
•• (3)
(4)
•
gets its maximum contribution
(4) ◊¥ Áfl∑ΧÁà ∑§Ë •ÁŸÁ‡øÃÃÊ ∑§Ê ÿÊªŒÊŸ 1014 N/m2 \i¡.
•
from the uncertainty in strain.
•Áœ∑§Ã◊ „Ò– ••
(4) dp„ dlÑd apmp¡ rhL© $ rsdp„ fl¡ g
•
AQp¡½$kpC_¡ L$pfZ¡ li¡.

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03
27. A galvanometer has a 50 division scale.
Battery has no internal resistance. It is
found that there is deflection of 40 divisions
when R=2400 Ω. Deflection becomes
20 divisions when resistance taken from
resistance box is 4900 Ω. Then we can
conclude :
27. ∞∑§ ªÀflŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§Ë S∑§‹ 50 ÷ʪÊ¥ ◊¥ ’¥≈UË „Ò– ’Ò≈U⁄UË
∑§Ê •Ê¥ à Á⁄U∑§ ¬˝ Á Ã⁄UÊ œ ‡ÊÍ ã ÿ „Ò – ÿÁŒ
R=2400 Ω „Ò ÃÊ ÁflˇÊ¬ =40 ÷ʪ „Ò– ÿÁŒ
R=4900 Ω „Ò ÃÊ ÁflˇÊ¬ =20 ÷ʪ „Ò– Ã’ „◊
ÁŸœÊ¸Á⁄Uà ∑§⁄U ‚∑§Ã „Ò¥ Á∑§ —
21
27. N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$fdp„ 50 L$p`p R>¡. b¡V$fu_p¡ Ap„sqfL$ Ahfp¡^
i|Þe R>¡. Äepf¡ =2400 Ω lp¡e R>¡ Ðepf¡ N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$f
dp„ 40 L$p`p (divisions) ky^u_y„ Aphs®_ dm¡ R>¡.
Äepf¡ Ahfp¡^ `¡V$udp„\u 4900 Ω S>¡V$gp¡ L$pY$hpdp„ Aph¡
R>¡ Ðepf¡ 20 divisions S>¡V$gy„ Aphs®_ \pe R>¡. sp¡
Ap`Z¡ spfZ Ap`u iL$uA¡ L¡$ __________.

(1) ªÀflŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ 200 Ω „Ò–

(1) Resistance of galvanometer is 200 Ω. (1) N¡ëh¡_p¡duV$f_p¡ Ahfp¡^ 200 Ω li¡.
(2) »È§‹-S∑§‹ ÁflˇÊ¬ ∑§ Á‹ÿ œÊ⁄UÊ 2 mA „Ò–
(2) Full scale deflection current is 2 mA. (2) `|Z®-õL¡$g Aphs®_ dpV¡$ âhpl 2 mA li¡.
(3) Current sensitivity of galvanometer (3) ªÀflŸÊ◊Ë≈U⁄U ∑§Ë œÊ⁄UÊ-‚¥flŒŸ‡ÊË‹ÃÊ 20 µA
(3) N¡ ë h¡ _ p¡ d uV$f_u `° h pl k„ h ¡ q v$sp
is 20 µA/division. ¬˝Áà ÷ʪ „Ò–
(4) Resistance required on R.B. for a 20 µA/division \i¡.
(4) ÁflˇÊ¬ =10 ÷ʪ ∑§ Á‹ÿ R=9800 Ω.
deflection of 10 divisions is 9800 Ω. (4) 10 divisions S>¡V$gy„ Aphs®_ d¡mhhp dpV¡$
Ahfp¡^ `¡V$udp„ Ahfp¡^_y„ d|ëe 9800 Ω Å¡Ci¡.
28. To determine refractive index of glass slab 28. ∑§Ê°ø ∑§Ë S‹Ò’ ∑§Ê ø‹-◊Ê߸∑˝§ÊS∑§Ê¬ mÊ⁄UÊ •¬fløŸÊ¥∑§
using a travelling microscope, minimum ÁŸ∑§Ê‹Ÿ ∑§ Á‹ÿ ¡M§⁄UË ¬Ê∆˜ÿÊ¥∑§Ê¥ ∑§Ë ãÿÍŸÃ◊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ
28. V²$ph¡g]N dpC¾$p¡õL$p¡`_u dv$v$\u Ágpk_p Qp¡kgp_p¡
number of readings required are : „Ò —
(1) Two h¾$u ch_p„ L $ dp`hp dpV¡$ Ap¡ R >pdp„ Ap¡ R >p S>ê$ f u
(1) ŒÊ Ahgp¡L$_p¡_u k„¿ep __________ li¡.
(2) Three
(3) Four (2) ÃËŸ (1) b¡
(4) Five (3) øÊ⁄U (2) ÓZ
(4) ¬Ê°ø (3) Qpf
(4) `p„Q

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03
29. A realistic graph depicting the variation of
the reciprocal of input resistance in an input
characteristics measurement in a common-
emitter transistor configuration is :
29. ∞∑§ ≈˛ U Ê ¥ Á ¡S≈U ⁄ U ∑§Ê common-emitter (CE)
•Á÷ÁflãÿÊ‚ ◊¥ ÁŸfl‡Ê-•Á÷‹ÊˇÊÁáÊ∑§ ◊ʬŸ Á∑§ÿÊ ªÿÊ–
Ã’ ÁŸfl‡Ê-¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ ∑§ √ÿÈà∑˝§◊ ∑§Ê ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ-
‚Ê ª˝Ê»§ ©Áøà „Ò?
22
29. A¡L$ V²$p[ÞTõV$f_p common emitter (CE) k„fQ_pdp„
C_`yV$ gpnrZL$sp dpV¡$ C_`yV$ Ahfp¡^_p ìeõs_p¡ kp¥\u
h^y hpõsrhL$ N°pa __________ \i¡.

(1) (1)
(1)

(2)
(2) (2)

(3)
(3) (3)

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 23

(4) (4) (4)

30. The ratio (R) of output resistance r0, and 30. Á∑§‚Ë ≈˛UÊ¥Á¡S≈U⁄U ∑§Ë ÁŸfl‡Ê-ÁŸª¸◊ •Á÷‹ÊˇÊÁáÊ∑§ 30. V²$p[ÞTõV$f_u C_`yV$ A_¡ ApDV$`yV$ gpnrZL$sp_p
the input resistance ri in measurements of
◊ʬŸ ∑ § Á‹ÿ ¬˝ ÿ È Ä Ã ÁŸª¸ ◊ -¬˝ Á Ã⁄U Ê  œ (r 0) fl dp`_dp„ ApDV$`yV$ Ahfp¡^ r0 A_¡ C_`yV$ Ahfp¡^ ri
input and output characteristics of a
transistor is typically in the range : ÁŸfl‡Ê-¬˝ÁÃ⁄UÊœ (ri) ∑§ •ŸÈ¬Êà (R) ∑§Ê •ÊÿÊ◊ _p¡ NyZp¡Ñf (R) __________ S>¡V$gu f¡ÞS>dp„ lp¡e R>¡.
(1) R~102−103 (range) „ÊªÊ? (1) R~102−103
(2) R~1−10 (1) R~102−103 (2) R~1−10
(3) R~0.1−0.01 (2) R~1−10 (3) R~0.1−0.01
(4) R~0.1−1.0 (3) R~0.1−0.01 (4) R~0.1−1.0
(4) R~0.1−1.0
31. The volume of 0.1N dibasic acid sufficient 31. 0.1N X$peb¡rTL$ A¡rkX$_y„ L$v$ iy„ li¡ L¡$ S>¡ 1 g b¡CT_p
to neutralize 1 g of a base that furnishes 0.04 31. 0.1N ÁmˇÊÊ⁄UËÿ •ê‹ ∑§Ê •Êÿß ÄÿÊ „ÊªÊ ¡Ê 1 ª˝Ê◊ sV$õ\uL$fZ L$fhp dpV¡$ `ep®á lp¡e L¡$ S>¡_p S>gue ÖphZdp„
mole of OH− in aqueous solution is :
ˇÊÊ⁄U∑§ Á¡‚∑§ ¡‹Ëÿ Áfl‹ÿŸ ◊¥ 0.04 ◊Ê‹ OH− „Ò 0.04 dp¡g OH− Aph¡gp R>¡ ?
(1) 200 mL
∑§Ê ©ŒÊ‚ËŸ ∑§⁄UŸ ∑§ Á‹ÿ ¬ÿʸ# „Ò? (1) 200 mL
(2) 400 mL (2) 400 mL
(1) 200 mL
(3) 600 mL (3) 600 mL
(2) 400 mL
(4) 800 mL (4) 800 mL
(3) 600 mL
(4) 800 mL

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 24
32. Initially, the root mean square (rms) velocity 32. ∞∑§ Áfl‡Ê· Ãʬ ¬⁄U ¬˝Ê⁄Uê÷ ◊¥ ŸÊß≈˛UÊ¡Ÿ •áÊÈ•Ê¥ (N2) 32. r_ròs sp`dp_ `f, iê$Apsdp„, N2 AÏAp¡_p¡
of N2 molecules at certain temperature is u.
∑§Ê flª¸ ◊Êäÿ ◊Í‹ flª u „Ò– ÿÁŒ ß‚ Ãʬ ∑§Ê ŒÈªÈŸÊ kf¡fpi hN®d|m (root mean square) (rms) h¡N u
If this temperature is doubled and all the
nitrogen molecules dissociate into nitrogen ∑§⁄U ÁŒÿÊ ¡Êÿ •ÊÒ⁄U ‚÷Ë ŸÊß≈˛UÊ¡Ÿ •áÊÈ ÁflÿÊÁ¡Ã R>¡. Å¡ Ap sp`dp_ bdÏ„ (Doubled) L$fhpdp„ Aph¡
atoms, then the new rms velocity will be : „Ê∑§⁄U ŸÊß≈˛UÊ¡Ÿ ¬⁄U◊ÊáÊÈ ’Ÿ ¡Ê∞ ÃÊ ŸÿÊ flª¸ ◊Êäÿ sp¡ b^p S> _pCV²$p¡S>_ AÏAp¡_y„ rhep¡S>_ _pCV²$p¡S>_
(1) u/2 ◊Í‹ flª „ÊªÊ — `fdpÏAp¡dp„ \pe sp¡, `R>u _hy„ kf¡fpi hN®d|m (rms)
(2) 2u (1) u/2 h¡N iy„ \i¡ ?
(3) 4u (2) 2u (1) u/2
(4) 14u (3) 4u (2) 2u
(4) 14u (3) 4u
33. Aqueous solution of which salt will not (4) 14u

Á∑§‚ ‹fláÊ ∑§ ¡‹Ëÿ Áfl‹ÿŸ ◊¥ 1s22s22p63s23p6

contain ions with the electronic
33.
configuration 1s22s22p63s23p6 ? 33. Cg¡¼V²$p¡r_L$ rhÞepk 1s22s22p63s23p6 ^fphsp L$ep
ß‹Ä≈˛UÊÚÁŸ∑§ ÁflãÿÊ‚ ∑§ •ÊÿŸ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ê¥ª?
(1) NaF npf_y„ S>gue ÖphZ Ape_p¡ ^fphsp„ _\u ?
(2) NaCl (1) NaF
(1) NaF
(3) KBr (2) NaCl (2) NaCl
(4) CaI2 (3) KBr (3) KBr
(4) CaI2 (4) CaI2
34. The bond angle H-X-H is the greatest in the
compound : 34. Á∑§‚ ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ◊¥ H-X-H •Ê’㜠∑§ÊáÊ ‚flʸÁœ∑§ „Ò? 34. L$ep k„ep¡S>_dp„ H-X-H b„^M|Zp¡ khp®r^L$ R>¡ ?
(1) CH4 (1) CH4 (1) CH4
(2) NH3 (2) NH3 (2) NH3
(3) H2O (3) H2O (3) H2O
(4) PH3 (4) PH3
(4) PH3

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 25
35. If 100 mole of H2O2 decompose at 1 bar and 35. ÿÁŒ H2O2 ∑§ 100 ◊Ê‹ 1 bar ÃÕÊ 300 K ¬⁄U 35. Å¡ H2O2 _p 100 dp¡g 1 bpf (bar) A_¡ 300 K `f
300 K, the work done (kJ) by one mole of
ÁflÿÊÁ¡Ã „Ê ÃÊ 1 bar ŒÊ’ ∑§ ÁflL§h 1 ◊Ê‹ •ÊÚÄ‚Ë¡Ÿ rhOV$us \pe sp¡, 1 bpf (bar) v$bpZ_p rhfyÝ^ 1
O2(g) as it expands against 1 bar pressure
is : ∑§ ÁflSÃÊÁ⁄Uà „ÊŸ ¬⁄U Á∑§ÿÊ „È•Ê ∑§Êÿ¸ (kJ ◊¥) „ÊªÊ — dp¡g O2(g) _p rhõsfZ \hp_¡ gu^¡ \e¡g L$pe® (kJ)
• • • • • ••• • • • • • ••••• •• • •• • ip¡^p¡.
• • • • • ••• • • • • • ••••• •• • •• •
• • • • • ••• • • • • • ••••• •• • •• •
(R = 8.3 J K−1 mol−1) (R = 8.3 J K−1 mol−1)
(1) 62.25 (1) 62.25 (R = 8.3 J K−1 mol−1)
(2) 124.50 (2) 124.50 (1) 62.25
(3) 249.00 (3) 249.00 (2) 124.50
(4) 498.00 (4) 498.00 (3) 249.00
(4) 498.00
36. An aqueous solution of a salt MX2 at certain 36. Á∑§‚Ë Áfl‡Ê· Ãʬ ¬⁄U, ∞∑§ ‹fláÊ MX2 ∑§ ¡‹Ëÿ
A¡L$ r_ròs sp`dp_ `f, npf MX2 _p S>gue
Áfl‹ÿŸ ∑§Ê flÊã≈U •ÊÚ»§ »Ò§Ä≈U⁄U 2 „Ò– ‹fláÊ ∑§ ß‚
temperature has a van’t Hoff factor of 2. 36.
The degree of dissociation for this solution ÖphZ_p¡ hpÞV$-lp¡a Aheh 2 R>¡. sp¡ npf_p Ap
of the salt is : Áfl‹ÿŸ ∑§ Á‹∞ ÁflÿÊ¡Ÿ ◊ÊòÊÊ „ÊªË —
ÖphZ_p¡ rhep¡S>_A„i ip¡^p¡.
(1) 0.33 (1) 0.33
(1) 0.33
(2) 0.50 (2) 0.50
(2) 0.50
(3) 0.67 (3) 0.67
(3) 0.67
(4) 0.80 (4) 0.80
(4) 0.80

37. A solid XY kept in an evacuated sealed 37. ∞∑§ ’¥Œ (‚ËÀ«U) ÁŸflʸÁÃà ¬ÊòÊ ◊¥ ⁄UπÊ ªÿÊ ∆UÊ‚ XY 37. A¡L$ b„^ (sealed) r_hp®rss (evacuated) `pÓdp„
container undergoes decomposition to ÁflÉÊÁ≈Uà „Ê∑§⁄U Ãʬ T ¬⁄U ŒÊ ªÒ‚¥ X ÃÕÊ Y ∑§Ê Á◊üÊáÊ fpMhpdp„ Aph¡g O_ (solid) XY rhOV$us \C_¡ T
form a mixture of gases X and Y at
temperature T. The equilibrium pressure ’ŸÊÃÊ „Ò– ß‚ ¬ÊòÊ ◊¥ ‚Êêÿ ŒÊ’ 10 bar „Ò– ß‚ sp`dp_¡ hpeyAp¡_y„ rdîZ X A_¡ Y b_¡ R>¡. Ap `pÓdp„
is 10 bar in this vessel. Kp for this reaction •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§ Á‹ÿ Kp „ÊªÊ — k„syg_ v$bpZ 10 bar (bpf) R>¡. Ap âq¾$ep dpV¡$ Kp
is : (1) 5 iy„ R>¡ ?
(1) 5 (2) 10 (1) 5
(2) 10 (3) 25 (2) 10
(3) 25 (4) 100 (3) 25
(4) 100
(4) 100

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 26
38. Oxidation of succinate ion produces 38. ‚ÁÄ‚Ÿ≈U •ÊÿŸ ∑§ •ÊÚÄ‚Ë∑§⁄UáÊ ‚ ∞ÁÕ‹ËŸ ÃÕÊ ∑§Ê’¸Ÿ 38. k[¼k_¡V$ Ape__p Ap¡[¼kX¡$i_\u Cr\gu_ A_¡ L$pb®_
ethylene and carbon dioxide gases. On
«UÊß•ÊÚÄ‚Êß«U ªÒ‚¥ ’ŸÃË „Ò¥– ¬Ê≈Ò˜UÁ‡Êÿ◊ ‚ÁÄ‚Ÿ≈U ∑§ X$pep¡¼kpCX$ hpeyAp¡ DÐ`Þ_ \pe R>¡. `p¡V¡$ried
passing 0.2 Faraday electricity through an
aqueous solution of potassium succinate, ¡‹Ëÿ Áfl‹ÿŸ ‚ 0.2 »Ò§⁄UÊ«U ÁfllÈà ¬˝flÊÁ„à ∑§⁄UŸ ¬⁄U k[¼k_¡V$_p S>gue ÖphZdp„ 0.2 a¡fpX¡$ rhÛysâhpl `kpf
the total volume of gases (at both cathode ªÒ‚Ê¥ ∑§Ê ∑ȧ‹ •Êÿß (∑Ò§ÕÊ«U ÃÕÊ ∞ŸÊ«U ŒÊŸÊ¥ ¬⁄U) L$fsp, STP `f (1 atm A_¡ 273 K) A¡ hpey_p¡ _y„
and anode) at STP (1 atm and 273 K) is : STP (1 atm ÃÕÊ 273 K) ¬⁄U „ÊªÊ — Ly$g L$v$ (L¡$\p¡X$ A_¡ A¡_p¡X$ b„_¡ `f) ip¡^p¡.
(1) 2.24 L (1) 2.24 L (1) 2.24 L
(2) 4.48 L (2) 4.48 L (2) 4.48 L
(3) 6.72 L (3) 6.72 L (3) 6.72 L
(4) 8.96 L (4) 8.96 L (4) 8.96 L

39. The rate law for the reaction below is given 39. ŸËø ŒË ªß¸ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§ Á‹∞ Œ⁄U ÁŸÿ◊ k [A][B] 39. _uQ¡ Ap`¡g âq¾$ep dpV¡$_p¡ h¡N-r_ed k [A][B] ìe„S>L$
by the expression k [A][B] √ÿ¥¡∑§ ‚ √ÿÄà Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò \u ìe¼s (expression) L$f¡g R>¡.
A+B  Product A+B  ©à¬ÊŒ A+B  _u`S>
If the concentration of B is increased from A _u kp„Ösp 0.1 mole (dp¡g) fpMuA¡ A_¡ Å¡ B _u
A ∑§Ë ‚ÊãŒ˝ÃÊ ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ 0.1 ◊Ê‹ ¬⁄U ⁄UπÃ „È∞ ÿÁŒ B
0.1 to 0.3 mole, keeping the value of A at
∑§Ë ‚ÊãŒ˝ÃÊ 0.1 ‚ ’…∏Ê∑§⁄U 0.3 ◊Ê‹ ∑§⁄U ŒË ¡ÊÃË „Ò ÃÊ kp„Ösp 0.1 \u h^pfu_¡ 0.3 dp¡g L$fhpdp„ Aph¡ sp¡
0.1 mole, the rate constant will be :
(1) k Œ⁄U ÁSÕ⁄UÊ¥∑§ „ÊªÊ — h¡NAQmp„L$ iy„ li¡ ?
(1) k
(2) k/3 (1) k
(2) k/3
(3) 3k (2) k/3
(3) 3k
(4) 9k (3) 3k
(4) 9k
(4) 9k
40. Gold numbers of some colloids 40. L¡$V$gpL$ L$rggp¡_p õhZp¯L$ (Np¡ëX$ _„bf) Ap âdpZ¡ R>¡.
40. ∑È § ¿U ∑§Ê ‹ Êß«U Ê  ¥ ∑ § SfláÊÊZ ∑ § „Ò ¥ , Á¡‹ Á ≈U Ÿ —
are : Gelatin : 0.005 - 0.01, Gum Æg¡V$u_ (Gelatin) : 0.005 - 0.01, Nd Af¡rbL$
Arabic : 0.15 - 0.25; Oleate : 0.04 - 1.0; 0.005 - 0.01, ª◊ ∞⁄ U Á’∑§ — 0.15 - 0.25;
(Gum Arabic) : 0.15 - 0.25; Ap¡ r gA¡ V $$
Starch : 15 - 25. Which among these is a •ÊÁ‹∞≈U — 0.04 - 1.0; S≈UÊø¸ — 15 - 25, ߟ◊¥ ∑§ÊÒŸ-
(Oleate) : 0.04 - 1.0; õV$pQ® (Starch) : 15 - 25.
better protective colloid ?
‚Ê ’„Ã⁄U ⁄UˇÊË ∑§Ê‹Êÿ«U „ÊªÊ?
(1) Gelatin Apdp„\u L$ep¡ kp¥\u h^pfp¡ kpfp¡ frns L$rgg R>¡ ?
(1) Á¡‹Á≈UŸ
(2) Gum Arabic (1) Æg¡V$u_ (Gelatin)
(3) Oleate (2) ª◊ ∞⁄UÁ’∑§ (2) Nd Af¡rbL$ (Gum Arabic)
(4) Starch (3) •ÊÁ‹∞≈U (3) Ap¡rgA¡V$ (Oleate)
(4) S≈UÊø¸ (4) õV$pQ® (Starch)
SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI
Set - 03
41. The following statements concern elements
in the periodic table. Which of the
following is true ?
(1) All the elements in Group 17 are
gases.
(2) The Group 13 elements are all metals.
(3) Elements of Group 16 have lower
ionization enthalpy values compared
to those of Group 15 in the
corresponding periods.
(4) For Group 15 elements, the stability
of +5 oxidation state increases down
the group.
41. ÁŸêŸ ∑§ÕŸ •Êflø ÃÊÁ‹∑§Ê ◊¥ ©¬ÁSÕà ÃàflÊ¥ ‚ ‚ê’¥ÁœÃ
„Ò¥– ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê ‚àÿ „Ò?
(1) ª˝È¬ 17 ◊¥ ‚÷Ë Ãàfl ªÒ‚ „Ò¥–
(2) ª˝È¬ 13 ◊¥ ‚÷Ë Ãàfl œÊÃÈ „Ò¥–
(3) ª˝È¬ 15 ∑§ ÃàflÊ¥ ∑§Ë ÃÈ‹ŸÊ ◊¥ ‚¥ªÃ •Êflø ∑§
ª˝È¬ 16 ∑§ ÃàflÊ¥ ◊¥ •ÊÿŸŸ ∞ãÕÒÀ¬Ë ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ
∑§◊ ⁄U„ÃÊ „Ò–
(4) ª˝È¬ 15 ∑§ ÃàflÊ¥ ∑§ Á‹∞, ª˝È¬ ◊¥ ŸËø ¡ÊŸ ¬⁄U
+5 •ÊÚÄ‚Ë∑§⁄UáÊ •flSÕÊ ∑§Ê SÕÊÁÿàfl ’…∏ÃÊ
„Ò–
27
41. _uQ¡_p rh^p_p¡ Aphs®L$p¡ô$dp„_p sÒhp¡_¡ k„b„r^s R>¡.
_uQ¡_pdp„\u L$ey„ kpQy„ R>¡ ?
(1) kd|l 17 dp„ b^p S> sÒhp¡ hpeyAp¡ R>¡.
(2) kd|l 13 dp„ b^p S> sÒhp¡ ^psyAp¡ R>¡.
(3) Aphs®_¡ A_ygnu_¡ kd|l 15 _p sÒhp¡_u
syg_pdp„ kd|l 16 _p sÒhp¡_u â\d Ape_uL$fZ
A¡Þ\pë`u Ap¡R>u R>¡.
(4) kd|l 15 _p sÒhp¡ dpV¡$, kd|ldp„ _uQ¡ S>CA¡
s¡d +5 Ap¡[¼kX¡$i_ Ahõ\p_u [õ\fsp h^¡
R>¡.

42. âÖphZ (smelting) Üpfp L$p¡`f_y„ r_óL$j®Z L$fsu hMs¡

42. Extraction of copper by smelting uses silica 42. S◊ÁÀ≈¥Uª mÊ⁄UÊ ∑§ÊÚ¬⁄U ∑§ ÁŸc∑§·¸áÊ ◊¥ Á‚Á‹∑§Ê ÿÊíÿ ∑§
Dd¡f¡g rkrgL$p_p¡ D`ep¡N _uQ¡_pdp„\u iy„ v|$f L$fhp
as an additive to remove : M§¬ ◊¥ ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ Á∑§‚∑§Ê „≈UÊŸ ∑§ Á‹∞ ∑§Ë ¡ÊÃË „Ò ?
(1) Cu2S
\pe R>¡ ?
(1) Cu2S
(1) Cu2S
(2) FeO (2) FeO
(2) FeO
(3) FeS (3) FeS
(3) FeS
(4) Cu2O (4) Cu2O
(4) Cu2O
43. Identify the reaction which does not
43. ©‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ê ’ÃÊß∞ Á¡‚◊¥ „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ ©à‚Á¡¸Ã 43. âq¾$ep Ap¡mMu bsphp¡ L¡$ S>¡dp„ lpCX²$p¡S>_ DÐkS>®_
liberate hydrogen :
(1) Reaction of zinc with aqueous alkali.
Ÿ„Ë¥ „ÊÃË „Ò — \sp¡ _\u.
(2) Electrolysis of acidified water using (1) ¡‹Ëÿ ˇÊÊ⁄U ∑§ ‚ÊÕ Á¡¥∑§ ∑§Ë •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ (1) S>gue ApëL$gu_u T]L$ kp\¡_u âq¾$ep
Pt electrodes. (2) å‹Á≈UŸ◊ ß‹Ä≈˛UÊ«UÊ¥ ∑§Ê ¬˝ÿÊª ∑§⁄U∑§ •ê‹Ë∑Χà (2) Pt Cg¡¼V²$p¡X$p¡_p¡ D`ep¡N L$fu_¡ A¡rkqX$L$ `pZu_y„
(3) Allowing a solution of sodium in ¡‹ ∑§Ê ÁfllÈà •¬ÉÊ≈UŸ rhÛysrhcpS>_
liquid ammonia to stand.
(4) Reaction of lithium hydride with (3) Œ˝fl •◊ÊÁŸÿÊ ◊¥ ‚ÊÁ«Uÿ◊ ∑§ Áfl‹ÿŸ ∑§Ê ÁSÕ⁄U (3) âhplu A¡dp¡r_epdp„ kp¡qX$ed_p ÖphZ_¡ fpMu_¡
B2H6. „ÊŸ ∑§ Á‹∞ ¿UÊ«∏ ŒŸÊ R>p¡X$u v$¡hy„
(4) B 2H 6 ∑ § ‚ÊÕ ‹ËÁÕÿ◊ „Êß«˛ U Ê ß«U ∑§Ë (4) B2H6 kp\¡ rgr\ed lpCX²$pCX$_u âq¾$ep
•Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ
SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI
Set - 03 28
44. The commercial name for calcium oxide 44. ∑Ò§ÁÀ‡Êÿ◊ •ÊÚÄ‚Êß«U ∑§Ê √ÿÊfl‚ÊÁÿ∑§ ŸÊ◊ „Ò — 44. L¡$ëiued Ap¡¼kpCX$_y„ ìep`pfu ^p¡fZ¡ _pd Ap`p¡.
is :
(1) Á◊À∑§ •ÊÚ»§ ‹Êß◊ (1) v|$r^ep¡ Q|_p¡ (rdëL$ Ap¡a gpCd) (Milk of
(1) Milk of lime
(2) S‹ÒÄ«U ‹Êß◊
lime)
(2) Slaked lime
(2) ap¡X¡$gp¡ Q|_p¡ (Slaked lime)
(3) Limestone (3) ‹Êß◊S≈UÊŸ
(3) Q|_p_p¡ `Õ\f (Limestone)
(4) Quick lime (4) ÁÄfl∑§ ‹Êß◊
(4) L$mu Q|_p¡ (Quick lime)
45. Assertion : Among the carbon
allotropes, diamond is an 45. ∑§ÕŸ — ∑§Ê’¸Ÿ ∑§ •¬⁄UM§¬Ê¥ ◊,¥ «UÊÿ◊¥«U ∑ȧøÊ‹∑§ 45. L$\_ : L$pb®__p blºê$`p¡dp„, lufp¡ A¡ AhplL$ R>¡
insulator, whereas,
„Ò ¡’ Á∑§ ª˝»§Êß≈U ∞∑§ ÁfllÈà ‚ÈøÊ‹∑§ Äepf¡ N°¡apCV$ A¡ rhÛys_p kyhplL$ R>¡.
graphite is a good
conductor of electricity. „Ò– L$pfZ : lufpdp„ A_¡ N°¡apCV$dp„ L$pb®__y„ k„L$fZ
Reason : Hybridization of carbon ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ — «UÊÿ◊ã«U ÃÕÊ ª˝»§Êß≈U ◊¥ ∑§Ê’¸Ÿ ∑§Ê A_y¾d¡ sp3 A_¡ sp2 R>¡.
in diamond and graphite ‚¥∑§⁄UáÊ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— sp3 ÃÕÊ sp2 „Ò– (1) L$\_ A_¡ L$pfZ b„_¡ kpQp R>¡, s\p L$pfZ A¡
are sp 3 and sp 2 ,
respectively. (1) ∑§ÕŸ ÃÕÊ ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ ŒÊŸÊ¥ ‚„Ë „Ò¥ ÃÕÊ ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ ∑§ÕŸ L$\_ dpV¡$_u kpQu kdS|>su R>¡.
(1) Both assertion and reason are correct, ∑§Ë ‚„Ë √ÿÊÅÿÊ „Ò– (2) L$\_ A_¡ L$pfZ b„_¡ kpQp R>¡, `Z L$pfZ A¡
and the reason is the correct (2) ∑§ÕŸ ÃÕÊ ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ ŒÊŸÊ¥ ‚„Ë „Ò¥ ¬⁄UãÃÈ ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ, L$\_ dpV¡$_u kpQu kdS|>su _\u.
explanation for the assertion.
∑§ÕŸ ∑§Ë ‚„Ë √ÿÊÅÿÊ Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò– (3) L$\_ A¡ AkÐe rh^p_ R>¡. `Z L$pfZ kÐe
(2) Both assertion and reason are correct,
but the reason is not the correct (3) ∑§ÕŸ •‚àÿ „Ò ¬⁄UãÃÈ ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ ‚àÿ „Ò– R>¡.
explanation for the assertion. (4) ∑§ÕŸ ÃÕÊ ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ ŒÊŸÊ¥ „Ë •‚àÿ „Ò¥– (4) L$\_ A_¡ L$pfZ b„_¡ AkÐe R>¡.
(3) Assertion is incorrect statement, but
the reason is correct.
46. •‚àÿ ∑§ÕŸ ∑§Ê ¬„øÊÁŸ∞ — 46. Mp¡Vy„$ rh^p_ ip¡^u bsphp¡.
(4) Both assertion and reason are
(1) S2 A¡ Ap¡[¼kS>__u dpaL$ A_yQy„bL$ue R>¡.
incorrect. (1) •ÊÚÄ‚Ë¡Ÿ ∑§Ë Ã⁄U„ S2 •ŸÈøÈê’∑§Ëÿ „Ò–
(2) f¹ l p¡ [ çbL$ A_¡ dp¡ _ p¡ [ ¼gr_L$ këafdp„ S8
(2) ⁄UÊÁê’∑§ (Áfl·◊‹¥’ÊˇÊ) ÃÕÊ ◊ÊŸÊÄ‹ËÁŸ∑§
46. Identify the incorrect statement :
AÏAp¡ R>¡.
(1) S2 is paramagnetic like oxygen. ‚À»§⁄U ◊¥ S8 •áÊÈ „Ò¥–
(3) S8 hge_p¡ ApL$pf dyNV$ (¾$pD_) S>¡hp¡ R>¡.
(2) Rhombic and monoclinic sulphur (3) S8 fl‹ÿ ∑§Ê •Ê∑§Ê⁄U ◊È∑ȧ≈U ∑§Ë Ã⁄U„ „Ò–
have S8 molecules. (4) S8 A_¡ S6 hgep¡dp„ S-S-S b„^ M|ZpAp¡
(4) S8 ÃÕÊ S6 fl‹ÿÊ¥ ◊¥ S-S-S •Ê’㜠∑§ÊáÊ ∞∑§ A¡L$kfMp R>¡.
(3) S8 ring has a crown shape.
¡Ò‚ „Ò¥–
(4) The S-S-S bond angles in the S8 and
S6 rings are the same.
SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI
Set - 03 29
47. Identify the correct statement : 47. ‚„Ë ∑§ÕŸ ∑§Ê ¬„øÊÁŸÿ — 47. kpQy„ rh^p_ ip¡^p¡.
(1) Iron corrodes in oxygen-free water.
(1) •Êÿ⁄UŸ •ÊÚÄ‚Ë¡Ÿ-◊ÈÄà ¡‹ ◊¥ ‚¥ˇÊÊÁ⁄Uà „ÊÃÊ (1) Ape_® (gp¡M„X$) Ap¡[¼kS>_-dy¼s `pZudp„
(2) Iron corrodes more rapidly in salt
„Ò– npqfs \pe R>¡.
water because its electrochemical
potential is higher. (2) ‹fláÊËÿ ¡‹ ◊¥ •Êÿ⁄UŸ ¡ÀŒË ‚ ‚¥ˇÊÊÁ⁄Uà „ÊÃÊ (2) npfhpmp `pZudp„ Ape_® (gp¡M„X$) M|b S>
(3) Corrosion of iron can be minimized „Ò ÄÿÊ¥Á∑§ ß‚∑§Ê ÁfllÈà ⁄UÊ‚ÊÿÁŸ∑§ Áfl÷fl ©ìÊ TX$`\u npqfs \pe R>¡ L$pfZ L¡ $ s¡ _ p¡
by forming a contact with another „Ò– rhÛysfpkperZL$ `p¡V¡$[Þieg KQp¡ R>¡.
(3) Ape_® (gp¡M„X$) _y„ npfZ, Äepf¡ s¡_p¡ buÆ
metal with a higher reduction
potential. (3) •Êÿ⁄UŸ ∑§Ê ‚¥ˇÊÊ⁄UáÊ ß‚∑§Ê ©ìÊ •¬øÿŸ Áfl÷fl
(4) Corrosion of iron can be minimized flÊ‹ œÊÃÈ ∑§ ‚ê¬∑¸§ ◊¥ ‹ÊŸ ¬⁄U ∑§◊ Á∑§ÿÊ ¡Ê KQp fuX$n_ `p¡V¡$[Þieg ^fphsu ^psy kp\¡
by forming an impermeable barrier ‚∑§ÃÊ „Ò– k„`L®$ L$fsp Ap¡Ry>„ L$fu iL$pe R>¡.
at its surface. (4) Ape_® (gp¡M„X$) _y„ npfZ, s¡_u k`pV$u `f
(4) •Êÿ⁄UŸ ∑§Ê ‚¥ˇÊÊ⁄UáÊ ß‚∑§ ‚Ä ¬⁄U •¬Ê⁄Uªêÿ
•fl⁄UÊœ ’ŸÊ∑§⁄U ∑§◊ Á∑§ÿÊ ¡Ê ‚∑§ÃÊ „Ò– A`pfNçe Ahfp¡^ b_phu_¡ Ap¡Ry>„ L$fu iL$pe
48. Which of the following is an example of R>¡.
homoleptic complex ?
(1) [Co(NH3)6]Cl3 48. ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ „Ê◊Ê‹Áå≈U∑§ (homoleptic) ‚¥∑ȧ‹
48. _uQ¡ Ap`¡ g pAp¡ d p„ \ u L$ey „ A¡ L $ lp¡ d p¡ g ¡ à V$uL$
(2) [Pt(NH3)2Cl2] ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ©ŒÊ„⁄UáÊ „Ò?
(homoleptic) kdp_uL©$s k„L$uZ®_y„ Dv$plfZ R>¡ ?
(3) [Co(NH3)4Cl2] (1) [Co(NH3)6]Cl3
(1) [Co(NH3)6]Cl3
(4) [Co(NH3)5Cl]Cl2 (2) [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]
(2) [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]
(3) [Co(NH3)4Cl2]
(3) [Co(NH3)4Cl2]
49. The transition metal ions responsible (4) [Co(NH3)5Cl]Cl2
for color in ruby and emerald are, (4) [Co(NH3)5Cl]Cl2
respectively :
(1) Cr3+ and Co3+
49. M§’Ë ∞fl¥ ß◊⁄UÊÀ«U ◊¥ Á¡Ÿ ‚¥∑˝§◊áÊ œÊÃÈ•Ê¥ ∑§ •ÊÿŸÊ¥ 49. dpZ¡L$ (Ruby) A_¡ `Þ_p (emerald) dp„ f„Np¡ dpV¡$
(2) Co3+ and Cr3+
∑§Ë ©¬ÁSÕÁà ∑§ ∑§Ê⁄UáÊ ⁄¥Uª „ÊÃÊ „Ò, fl ∑˝§◊‡Ê— „Ò¥ — S>hpbv$pf k„¾$p„rs ^psy Ape_p¡ A_y¾$d¡ _uQ¡_pdp„\u
(3) Co3+ and Co3+ (1) Cr3+ ÃÕÊ Co3+ ip¡^p¡.
(4) Cr3+ and Cr3+ (2) Co3+ ÃÕÊ Cr3+ (1) Cr3+ A_¡ Co3+
(3) Co3+ ÃÕÊ Co3+ (2) Co3+ A_¡ Cr3+
(4) Cr3+ ÃÕÊ Cr3+ (3) Co3+ A_¡ Co3+
(4) Cr3+ A_¡ Cr3+

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 30
50. Which one of the following substances used 50. «˛UÊ߸ċËÁŸ¥ª ◊¥ ¬˝ÿÈÄà ÁŸêŸ ¬ŒÊÕÊZ ◊¥ ‚ Á∑§‚∑§Ê ¬˝ÿÊª 50. X²$pe¼gu_]Ndp„ _uQ¡ Ap`¡gp `v$p\p£dp„\u L$ep¡ A¡L$_p¡
in dry cleaning is a better strategy to control
flÊÃÊfl⁄UáÊ ¬˝ŒÍ·áÊ ∑§ ÁŸÿ¥òÊáÊ ∑§Ë ’„Ã⁄U ∑§Êÿ¸ ŸËÁà „Ò? D`ep¡N hpsphfZue âv|$jZ_¡ r_e„ÓZ L$fhpdp„ h^y
environmental pollution ?
(1) Tetrachloroethylene (1) ≈U≈˛UÊÄ‹Ê⁄UÊ∞ÁÕ‹ËŸ L$pe®nd R>¡ ?
(2) Carbon dioxide (2) ∑§Ê’¸Ÿ «UÊß•ÊÚÄ‚Êß«U (1) V¡$V²$p¼gp¡fp¡Cr\rg_
(2) L$pb®_ X$pep¡¼kpCX
(3) Sulphur dioxide (3) ‚À»§⁄U «UÊß•ÊÚÄ‚Êß«U
(3) këaf X$pep¡¼kpCX$
(4) ŸÊß≈˛UÊ¡Ÿ «UÊß•ÊÚÄ‚Êß«U
(4) Nitrogen dioxide
(4) _pCV²$p¡S>_ X$pep¡¼kpCX$
51. Sodium extract is heated with concentrated
51. „Ò‹Ê¡Ÿ˜‚ ∑§Ë ¡Ê°ø ∑§ ¬„‹ ‚ÊÁ«Uÿ◊ ∞ÄS≈˛ÒUÄ≈U ∑§Ê
HNO 3 before testing for halogens
51. l¡gp¡S>_p¡_u L$kp¡V$u L$fsp `l¡gp kp¡qX$ed AL®$ (extract)
because : ‚ÊãŒ˝ HNO3 ∑§ ‚ÊÕ ª◊¸ Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò ÄÿÊ¥Á∑§ —
_¡ kp„Ö HNO3 _u kp\¡ Nfd L$fhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡ L$pfZ
(1) Silver halides are totally insoluble in (1) Á‚Àfl⁄U „Ò‹Êß«U ŸÊßÁ≈˛U∑§ •ê‹ ◊¥ ¬ÍáʸM§¬áÊ L¡$...
nitric acid.
•ÉÊÈ‹Ÿ‡ÊË‹ „Ò¥– (1) rkëhf l¡gpCX$p¡ _pCV²$uL$ A¡rkXdp„ k„`|Z® fus¡
(2) Ag2S and AgCN are soluble in acidic
medium. (2) •ê‹Ëÿ ◊Êäÿ◊ ◊ ¥ Ag 2 S ÃÕÊ AgCN AÖpìe R>¡.
(3) S 2− and CN − , if present, are ÉÊÈ‹Ÿ‡ÊË‹ „Ò¥– (2) A¡rkqX$L$ dpÝeddp„ Ag2S A_¡ AgCN Öpìe
(3) ÿÁŒ S2− ÃÕÊ CN− ©¬ÁSÕà „Ò¥ ÃÊ ‚ÊãŒ˝
decomposed by conc. HNO 3 and
hence do not interfere in the test. \pe R>¡.
HNO3 ‚ ÁflÉÊÁ≈Uà „Ê ¡ÊÃ „Ò¥ ß‚Á‹ÿ ¬⁄UˡÊáÊ (3) Å¡ S2− A_¡ CN− lpS>f lp¡e sp¡ kp„Ö
(4) Ag reacts faster with halides in acidic
medium. ◊¥ „SÃˇÊ¬ Ÿ„Ë¥ ∑§⁄UÃ– HNO3 \u rhOV$_ \pe R>¡. s¡\u `funZdp„
(4) •ê‹Ëÿ ◊Êäÿ◊ ◊¥ Á‚Àfl⁄U, „Ò‹Êß«UÊ¥ ∑§ ‚ÊÕ (L$kp¡V$udp„) v$MgNufu L$fsp„ _\u.
Ã¡ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò– (4) A¡rkqX$L$ dpÝeddp„ Ag _u âq¾$ep l¡gpCX$p¡ kp\¡
TX$`u \pe R>¡.

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 31
52. Bromination of cyclohexene under 52. ŸËø ÁŒÿ ªÿ ¬˝ÁÃ’ãœÊ¥ ◊¥ ‚ÊßÄ‹Ê„Ä‚ËŸ ∑§Ê ’˝Ê◊ËŸ‡ÊŸ 52. kpe¼gp¡ l ¡ ¼ Tu__y „ b° p ¡ r d_¡ i _ Ap`¡ g _uQ¡ _ u
conditions given below yields :
ŒÃÊ „Ò — `qf[õ\rsAp¡dp„ L$C _u`S> Ap`i¡ ?
• •• • • •
• •• • • • • •• • • •

••
•• ••

(1)
(1) (1)

••
•• ••

••
•• ••

(2)
(2) (2)

•• ••
••
(3)
(3) (3)
•• ••
••
••
•• ••
(4)
(4)
••
(4)
•• ••

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 32
53. Consider the reaction sequence below : 53. ŸËø ŒË ªß¸ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑˝§◊ ¬⁄U ÁfløÊ⁄U ∑§ËÁ¡∞ — 53. _uQ¡ Ap`¡g âq¾$ep_p¡ ¾$d Ýep_dp„ gp¡.
••• • ••• ••• •
•

X X

is :
„Ò — X iy„ R>¡ ?
••
••
• •• • ••
• •• •
• •• •
(1)
(1)
(1)
••
••
••

• •• • ••
• •• • ••
• •• • ••

(2)
(2)
(2)
••
••
••
••• • ••• •
••• •

(3)
(3)
(3)

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 33
• •• • • •• • • •• •

(4) (4) (4)

54. Which one of the following reagents is not 54. Áfl‹Ê¬Ÿ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§ Á‹∞ ߟ •Á÷∑§Ê⁄U∑§Ê¥ ◊¥ ‚ 54. _uQ¡ Ap`¡gpdp„\u L$ep¡ âq¾$eL$ A¡ rhgp¡`_ âq¾$ep dpV¡$
suitable for the elimination reaction ?
∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê ©¬ÿÈÄà Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò? kyk„Ns _\u ?
•• ••
••
(1) NaOH/H2O (1) NaOH/H2O
(1) NaOH/H2O
(2) NaOEt/EtOH (2) NaOEt/EtOH
(2) NaOEt/EtOH
(3) NaOH/H2O-EtOH (3) NaOH/H2O-EtOH
(3) NaOH/H2O-EtOH
(4) NaI (4) NaI
(4) NaI

55. The correct statement about the synthesis
of erythritol (C(CH 2OH) 4 ) used in the
preparation of PETN is :
(1) The synthesis requires four aldol
condensations between methanol
and ethanol.
(2) The synthesis requires two aldol
condensations and two Cannizzaro
reactions.
(3) The synthesis requires three aldol
condensations and one Cannizzaro
reaction.
(4) Alpha hydrogens of ethanol and
methanol are involved in this
reaction.
55.
55. PETN ∑§ ’ŸÊŸ ◊¥ ¬˝ÿÈÄà ß⁄UËÁÕ˝≈UÊÚ‹ (C(CH2OH)4)
∑§ ‚¥‡‹·áÊ ∑§ ‚ê’㜠◊¥ ‚„Ë ∑§ÕŸ „Ò —
(1) ‚¥‡‹·áÊ ◊¥ ◊ÕŸÊÚ‹ ÃÕÊ ∞ÕŸÊÚ‹ ∑§ ’Ëø øÊ⁄U
∞À«UÊ‹ ‚¥ÉÊŸŸ ∑§Ë •Êfl‡ÿ∑§ÃÊ „ÊÃË „Ò–
(2) ‚¥‡‹·áÊ ◊¥ ŒÊ ∞À«UÊ‹ ‚¥ÉÊŸŸ ÃÕÊ ŒÊ ∑Ò§ÁŸ¡Ê⁄UÊ
•Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ë ¡M§⁄Uà „ÊÃË „Ò–
(3) ‚¥‡‹·áÊ ◊¥ ÃËŸ ∞À«UÊ‹ ‚¥ÉÊŸŸ ÃÕÊ ∞∑§
∑Ò§ÁŸ¡Ê⁄UÊ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ∑§Ë •Êfl‡ÿ∑§ÃÊ „ÊÃË „Ò–
(4) ß‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ ◊¥ ∞ÕŸÊÚ‹ ∑§ •À»§Ê „Êß«˛UÊ¡Ÿ
ÃÕÊ ◊ÕŸÊÚ‹ ÷ʪ ‹Ã „Ò¥–
PETN _u b_phV$dp„ h`fpsp¡ Cfu\° u V$p¡ g
(C(CH2OH)4) _p k„ïg¡jZ dpV¡$ L$ey„ rh^p_ kpQy„
R>¡ ?
(1) k„ïg¡jZ dpV¡$ rd\¡_p¡g A_¡ C\¡_p¡g_u hÃQ¡
Qpf ApëX$p¡g k„O___u AphíeL$sp lp¡e R>¡.
(2) k„ïg¡jZdp„ b¡ ApëX$p¡g k„O__ A_¡ b¡ L¡$r_Tpfp¡
âq¾$ep_u AphíeL$sp R>¡.
(3) k„ïg¡jZdp„ ÓZ ApëX$p¡g k„O__ A_¡ A¡L$
L¡$r_Tpfp¡ âq¾$ep_u AphíeL$sp R>¡.
(4) Ap âq¾$epdp„ C\¡_p¡g_p¡ Apëap lpCX²$p¡S>_ A_¡
rd\¡_p¡g cpN g¡ R>¡.

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 34
56. Fluorination of an aromatic ring is easily 56. Á∑§‚Ë ∞⁄UÊÒ◊ÒÁ≈U∑§ fl‹ÿ ∑§Ê ç‹È•Ê⁄UË∑§⁄UáÊ •Ê‚ÊŸË ‚ 56. L$p¡C A¡fp¡d¡qV$L$ hge_y„ ãgp¡qf_¡i_ M|b S> kl¡gpC\u
accomplished by treating a diazonium salt
‚¥÷fl „ÊÃÊ „Ò ÿÁŒ ©‚∑§ «UÊß∞¡ÊÁŸÿ◊ ‹fláÊ ∑§Ê k„ch lp¡e R>¡, Äepf¡ s¡_p X$peTp¡_ued npf_¡ HBF4
with HBF 4 . Which of the following
conditions is correct about this reaction ? HBF4 ∑§ ‚ÊÕ ©¬øÊÁ⁄Uà Á∑§ÿÊ ¡Êÿ– ß‚ •Á÷Á∑˝§ÿÊ kp\¡ âq¾$ep L$fhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡. D`f_u `°q¾$ep dpV¡$ _uQ¡_p
(1) Only heat ∑§ ‚ê’㜠◊¥ ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ‚Ë ¬Á⁄UÁSÕÁà Ap`¡gpdp„\u L$C `qf[õ\rs kpQu R>¡ ?
(2) NaNO2/Cu ©¬ÿÈÄà „Ò? (1) a¼s Dódp
(3) Cu2O/H2O (1) ∑§fl‹ ™§c◊Ê (2) NaNO2/Cu
(4) NaF/Cu (2) NaNO2/Cu (3) Cu2O/H2O
(3) Cu2O/H2O (4) NaF/Cu
57. Which of the following polymers is (4) NaF/Cu
synthesized using a free radical 57. _uQ¡ Ap`¡gpdp„\u L$ep blºgL$_y„ k„ïg¡jZ A¡ dy¼s dygL$
polymerization technique ? 57. ÁŸêŸÁ‹Áπà ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê ’„È‹∑§ ◊ÈÄà ◊Í‹∑§ blºguL$fZ sL$_uL$_p¡ D`ep¡N L$fu_¡ L$fhpdp„ Aph¡ R>¡
(1) Teflon
’„È‹∑§Ë∑§⁄UáÊ ÁflÁœ mÊ⁄UÊ ‚¥‡‹Á·Ã Á∑§ÿÊ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò? ?
(2) Terylene
(1) ≈Uç‹ÊÚŸ (1) V¡$agp¡_
(3) Melamine polymer
(2) ≈ÒU⁄UË‹ËŸ (2) V¡$qfrg_
(4) Nylon 6,6
(3) ◊Ò‹Ò◊Êߟ ’„È‹∑§ (3) d¡g¡dpC_ blºgL$
(4) _pegp¡_ 6,6
58. The “N” which does not contribute to the (4) ŸÊÿ‹ÊÚŸ 6,6
basicity for the compound is :
fl„ “N” ¡Ê ÁŸêŸ ÿÊÒÁª∑§ ∑§Ë ˇÊÊ⁄UËÿ ¬˝flÎÁûÊ ◊¥ ÿÊªŒÊŸ 58. “N” L¡$ S>¡ Ap`¡g k„ep¡S>__u b¡rTL$spdp„ cpN g¡sp¡
• •
58.
• • Ÿ„Ë¥ ŒÃÊ „Ò, fl„ „Ò — _\u s¡ bsphp¡.
••
•
• • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • ••
• ••
• •
• • • • •
(1) N7 • • • • • •
• • •
(2) N9
(3) N1 (1) N7
(1) N7
(4) N3 (2) N9
(2) N9
(3) N1 (3) N1
(4) N3 (4) N3

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 35
59. Which of the following is a bactericidal 59. ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ-‚Ê ’ÒÄ≈UËÁ⁄UÿʟʇÊË ¬˝ÁáÒÁfl∑§ „Ò? 59. _uQ¡_pdp„\u L$ey„ A¡L$ b¡¼V¡$qfep_piL$ ârsÆhuAp¡
(antibiotic) R>¡ ?
antibiotic ?
(1) ∞Á⁄UÕ˝Ê◊Êß‚ËŸ
(1) Erythromycin
(2) ≈U≈˛UÊ‚ÊÿÄ‹ËŸ (1) Cqf\°p¡dpeku_
(2) Tetracycline
(2) V¡$V²$pkpe¼gu_
(3) Chloramphenicol (3) Ä‹Ê⁄U∞ê»Ò§ÁŸ∑§Ê‹
(3) ¼gp¡fA¡ça¡r_L$p¡g
(4) Ofloxacin (4) •ÊÚ»˜§‹ÊÄ‚Ò‚ËŸ
(4) Ap¡ãgp¡¼k¡rk_

L§„◊ÒŸ ŸË‹ ‹ÊÁ„à (¬¬¸‹) ∑§Ê ¬˝∑§≈U „ÊŸÊ ÁŸêŸÁ‹ÁπÃ

60. Observation of “Rhumann’s purple” is a
60.
confirmatory test for the presence of : 60. ""fyldp_ Å„byX$uep¡''(``®g) (Rhumann’s purple)
◊¥ ‚ Á∑§‚∑§Ê ‚¥¬ÈÁc≈U ¬⁄UˡÊáÊ „Ò?
(1) Reducing sugar Ahgp¡L$_ A¡ r_Zp®eL$ L$kp¡V$u _uQ¡_pdp„\u L$p¡_u lpS>fu
(2) Cupric ion (1) •¬øÊÿ∑§ ‡Ê∑¸§⁄UÊ k|Qh¡ R>¡ ?
(3) Protein (2) ÄÿͬÁ⁄U∑§ •ÊÿŸ (1) fuX$éyk]N iL®$fp
(4) Starch (3) ¬˝Ê≈UËŸ (2) ¼eyâuL$ Ape_
(4) S≈UÊø¸ (◊¥«U) (3) âp¡V$u_
61. Let P = {• : sin• − cos• = 2 cos• } and (4) õV$pQ®

Q = {• : sin• •+ cos• = 2 sin• } be two

•
61. ◊ÊŸÊ P = {• : sin• − cos• = 2 cos• } ÃÕÊ
sets. Then :
Q = {• : sin• •+ cos• = 2 sin• }
•
ŒÊ 61. ^pfp¡ L¡ $ P = {• : sin• − cos• = 2 cos• }
(1) P ⊂ Q and Q−P ≠ φ
‚◊Èëøÿ „Ò¥, ÃÊ — A_¡ Q = {• : sin• •+ cos• = 2 sin• }
• b¡
(2) Q ⊄ P
(3) P ⊄ Q (1) P ⊂ Q ÃÕÊ Q−P ≠ φ NZp¡ R>¡. sp¡ :
(4) P = Q (2) Q⊄P (1) P ⊂ Q A_¡ Q−P ≠ φ
(3) P⊄Q (2) Q⊄P
(4) P=Q (3) P⊄Q
(4) P=Q

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 36
62. If x is a solution of the equation, 62. ÿÁŒ ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ 62. Å¡ kduL$fZ
•  •
2 • + 1 − 2• − 1 = 1,  •   , then
 1
• • •+ • •−• • • •− • •=•• •• • ••  •
 • • •+ • •−• • • •− • •=•• ••  • ••  _p¡ A¡L$
 2  •
∑§Ê x  •
4• • − 1 is equal to :
∞∑§ „‹ „Ò, ÃÊ • • • •• •• ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — DL¡$g x R>¡, sp¡ • • • •• •• =__________ \pe.
• • •
•
(1)
•
(1)
•
(1)

• • •
•
(2)
•
(2)
•
(2)
(3) 2 (3) 2 (3) 2
(4) • • (4) • • (4) • •

63. Let z=1+ai be a complex number, a > 0,

63. ◊ÊŸÊ ∞∑§ ∞‚Ë ‚Áê◊üÊ ‚¥ÅÿÊ „Ò,
z=1+ai, a > 0 63. ^pfp¡ L¡$ z=1+ai, a > 0, A¡L$ A¡hu k„L$f k„¿ep R>¡ L¡$
such that z3 is a real number. Then the sum
1+z+z2+.....+z11 is equal to : Á∑§z ∞∑§ flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ‚¥ Å ÿÊ „Ò , ÃÊ ÿÊ ª
3 S>¡ \ u z 3 hpõsrhL$ k„ ¿ ep \pe. sp¡ kfhpmp¡
1+z+z2+.....+z11 ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — 1+z+z2+.....+z11 =__________ \pe.
(1) • •••• • • •
(1) • •••• • • • (1) • •••• • • •
(2) •••• • • •
(2) •••• • • • (2) •••• • • •
(3) ••••• • •
(3) ••••• • • (3) ••••• • •
(4) • ••••• • •
(4) • ••••• • • (4) • ••••• • •

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 37
64. Let A be a 3×3 matrix such that 64. ◊ÊŸÊ ∑§Ê ∞∑§ ∞ ‚ Ê •Ê√ÿÍ „ „Ò Á∑§
A, 3×3 64. ^pfp¡ L¡ $ A A¡ L $ 3×3 î¡ r ZL$ R>¡ L¡ $ S>¡ \ u
A2−5A+7I=O.
A2−5A+7I=O „Ò– A2−5A+7I=O.
•
• • • = ••• ••− • •• • • • •
• ∑§ÕŸ - I :• = ••• ••− • •• • • • = ••• ••− • ••
Statement - I :
•
rh^p_ - I : •
Statement - II : The polynomial
A3−2A2−3A+I can be ∑§ÕŸ - II : ’„È ¬ Œ A 3 −2A 2 −3A+I ∑§Ê rh^p_ - II : blº ` v$u A 3 −2A 2 −3A+I _¡
reduced to 5(A−4I). 5(A−4I) ◊¥ ¬Á⁄UflÁøà Á∑§ÿÊ ¡Ê ‚∑§ÃÊ 5(A−4I) dp„ ê$`p„sqfs L$fu iL$pe R>¡.
Then : „Ò– sp¡ __________.
(1) Statement-I is true, but Statement-II ÃÊ, (1) rh^p_-I kÐe R>¡, `f„sy rh^p_-II AkÐe R>¡.
is false.
(2) Statement-I is false, but Statement-II (1) ∑§ÕŸ - I ‚àÿ „Ò ‹Á∑§Ÿ ∑§ÕŸ - II •‚àÿ „Ò– (2) rh^p_-I AkÐe R>¡, `f„sy rh^p_-II kÐe R>¡.
is true. (2) ∑§ÕŸ - I •‚àÿ „Ò ‹Á∑§Ÿ ∑§ÕŸ - II ‚àÿ „Ò– (3) b„_¡ rh^p_p¡ kÐe R>¡.
(3) Both the statements are true. (3) ŒÊŸÊ¥ ∑§ÕŸ ‚àÿ „Ò¥– (4) b„_¡ rh^p_p¡ AkÐe R>¡.
(4) Both the statements are false.
(4) ŒÊŸÊ¥ ∑§ÕŸ •‚àÿ „Ò¥–
•• • • • •
•−• −• • Å¡ • •• • , sp¡ î¡ r ZL$
• ••
65.
If • •=• •−• −• • • •
• ••
65. , then the determinant of
• • ÿÁŒ • •=• „Ò , ÃÊ •Ê√ÿÍ „
• ••
65.
• • (A 2016 −2A 2015 −A 2014 ) _p¡ r_òpeL$
the matrix (A2016−2A2015−A2014) is :
(1) 2014 (A2016−2A2015−A2014) ∑§Ê ‚Ê⁄UÁáÊ∑§ „Ò — __________ R>¡.
(1) 2014 (1) 2014
(2) −175
(2) −175 (2) −175
(3) 2016
(3) 2016 (3) 2016
(4) −25
(4) −25 (4) −25

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 38
•• • •• • •• •
•• •• ••
66. If
•• •
•• •• • • then n satisfies the 66. ÿÁŒ •• •
•• •• • • „Ò, ÃÊ n ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ Á∑§‚ 66. Å¡ •• •
•• •• • • sp¡ n _uQ¡_pdp„\u L$ey„ kduL$fZ
•• •• ••
equation : ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ ∑§Ê ‚¥ÃÈc≈U ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò? k„`p¡j¡?
(1) n2+3n−108=0 (1) n2+3n−108=0 (1) n2+3n−108=0
(2) n2+5n−84=0 (2) n2+5n−84=0 (2) n2+5n−84=0
(3) n2+2n−80=0 (3) n2+2n−80=0 (3) n2+2n−80=0
(4) n2+n−110=0 (4) n2+n−110=0 (4) n2+n−110=0

67. If the coefficients of x−2 and x−4 in the

•• ••
 •• •   •• • 
• • •• 67. ÿÁŒ  • •• • •  , (x > 0), ∑§ ¬˝‚Ê⁄U ◊¥ x−2 67. Å¡  • •• • •  , (x > 0) _p rhõsfZdp„ x−2
expansion of  • •• • •  , (x > 0), are
•
 •• •   •• • 
 
 •• • 
• A_¡ x−4 _p klNyZL$p¡ A_y¾$d¡ m A_¡ n lp¡e sp¡,
• ÃÕÊ x−4 ∑§ ªÈáÊÊ¥∑§ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— m ÃÕÊ n „Ò¥, ÃÊ • •
•
m and n respectively, then is equal to :
=__________ \pe.
’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — •
(1) 182
(1) 182 (1) 182
•
• •
•
(2)
• •
(2) (2)
•
• •
•
(3)
• •
(3) (3)
(4) 27
(4) 27 (4) 27

68. Let a1, a2, a3, ......, an, ..... be in A.P. If

a3+a7+a11+a15=72, then the sum of its 68. ◊ÊŸÊ a1, a2, a3, ......, an, ..... ∞∑§ ‚◊Ê¥Ã⁄U üÊ…∏Ë ◊¥ „Ò¥– 68. ^pfp¡ L¡$ a1, a2, a3, ......, an, ..... kdp„sf î¡Zudp„ R>¡.
first 17 terms is equal to : ÿÁŒ a3+a7+a11+a15=72 „Ò, ÃÊ ©‚∑§ ¬˝Õ◊ 17 Å¡ a3+a7+a11+a15=72, sp¡ s¡_p â\d 17 `v$p¡_p¡
(1) 306 ¬ŒÊ¥ ∑§Ê ÿÊª ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — kfhpmp¡ __________ \pe.
(2) 153 (1) 306 (1) 306
(3) 612 (2) 153 (2) 153
(4) 204 (3) 612 (3) 612
(4) 204 (4) 204
SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI
Set - 03 39
•• •• ••
69. The sum • (• • • •• ) • ••• •• is equal to : 69. ÿÊª»§‹ • ( • • • •• ) • ••• •• ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — 69. • (• • • •• ) • ••• •• =__________.
• •• • • •• • • •• •

(1) (11)! (1) (11)! (1) (11)!

(2) 10×(11!) (2) 10×(11!) (2) 10×(11!)
(3) 101×(10!) (3) 101×(10!) (3) 101×(10!)
(4) 11×(11!) (4) 11×(11!) (4) 11×(11!)

( • •• ••• • • • )• ( • •• ••• • • • )• ( • •• ••• • • • )•

70. ••• • is : 70. ••• • ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — 70. ••• • =__________.
• →• • • ••• • • •• •• ••• • • • • →• • • ••• • • •• •• ••• • • • • →• • • ••• • • •• •• ••• • • •
(1) −2 (1) −2 (1) −2
• • •
• • • • • •
• • •
(2) (2) (2)

• • •
• • •
(3) (3) (3)

(4) 2 (4) 2 (4) 2

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 40
71. Let a, b  R, (a ≠ 0). If the function f defined 71. ◊ÊŸÊ a, b  R, (a ≠ 0)– ÿÁŒ »§‹Ÿ f ¡Ê, ÁŸêŸ mÊ⁄UÊ 71. ^pfp¡ L¡$ a, b  R, (a ≠ 0).
as
¬Á⁄U÷ÊÁ·Ã „Ò —
••••
•••• • • ••• •• • •≤•• •• ••
• • ••• •• • •≤•• •• •• •••• • •
• • • • ••• •• • •≤•• •• •• •
• • • Å¡ rh^¡ e • • • ••= • • •••• •• • •≤•• •• • • •
• • • ••= • • •••• •• • •≤•• •• • • • • • •
• • • ••= • • •••• •• • •≤•• •• • • •
• • • • • −• • ••••• • •≤•• •• •∞
• • • −• • ••••• • •≤•• •• •∞ • • •• • •
•• • • • • • −• • ••••• • •≤•• •• •∞
•• • •
A„sfpg dp„ kss lp¡e, sp¡ ¾$dey¼s Å¡X$
[0, ∞)
is continuous in the interval [0, ∞), then an
•¥Ã⁄UÊ‹ [0, ∞) ◊¥ ‚Ãà „Ò, ÃÊ ∞∑§ ∑˝§Á◊à ÿÈÇ◊ (a, b) = __________ R>¡.
ordered pair (a, b) is :
(a, b) „Ò — ( • ••• •• • • )
( • ••• •• • • )
(1) (1)
(1) ( • ••• •• • • ) (•
(2) (• • • ••• •• • • )
(2) • • ••• •• • • )
(2) (• • • ••• •• • • ) ( • ••• • •• • • )
( • ••• • •• • • )
(3) (3)
(3) ( • ••• • •• • • ) (•
(4) (• • • ••• •• • • )
(4) • • ••• •• • • )
(4) (• • • ••• •• • • )
72. Let f(x)=sin 4 x+cos 4 x. Then f is an 72. ^pfp¡ L¡$ f(x)=sin4x+cos4x. sp¡ _uQ¡_pdp„\u L$ep
increasing function in the interval : 72. ◊ÊŸÊ f(x)=sin4x+cos4x „Ò, ÃÊ ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ Á∑§‚ A„sfpgdp„ f h^sy„ rh^¡e R>¡ ?
•¥Ã⁄UÊ‹ ◊¥ f ∞∑§ flœ¸◊ÊŸ »§‹Ÿ „Ò?
• π• • π•
(1) •• • •• • •• • π• (1) •• • •• • ••
(1) •• • •• • ••
•π π • •π π •
(2) •• • •• • •• •π π • (2) •• • •• • ••
(2) •• • •• • ••
•π •π • •π •π •
(3) •• • •• • •• •π •π • (3) •• • •• • ••
(3) •• • •• • ••
• •π •π • • •π •π •
(4) •• • •• • •• • •π •π • (4) •• • •• • ••
(4) •• • •• • ••

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 41
73. Let C be a curve given by
73. ◊ÊŸÊ C ∞∑§ fl∑˝§ „Ò ¡Ê • •• • ••• •• •• • • • •• •• , 73. ^pfp¡ L¡$ A¡L$ h¾$ C A¡ • ••• ••• •• •• • • • •• •• •
•
• ••• ••= • •+ • • •− • • • > . If P is a point • •
• •> mÊ⁄UÊ ¬˝ŒûÊ „Ò– ÿÁŒ C ¬⁄U P ∞∑§ ∞‚Ê Á’¥ŒÈ „Ò •> Üpfp v$ip®h¡g R>¡. Å¡ C `f A¡L$ A¡hy„ tbvy$ P R>¡
on C, such that the tangent at P has slope • •
• , then a point through which the normal Á∑§ P ¬⁄U πË¥øË ªß¸ S¬‡Ê¸ ⁄UπÊ ∑§Ë …Ê‹ • „Ò, ÃÊ fl„ L¡$ S>¡\u tbvy$ P ApNm_p õ`i®L$_p¡ Y$pm • \pe, sp¡ P
• • •
at P passes, is : Á’¥ŒÈ Á¡‚‚ P ¬⁄U πË¥øÊ ªÿÊ •Á÷‹¥’ ªÈ$¡⁄UÃÊ „Ò, „Ò — ApNm_p¡ Arcg„b __________ tbvy$dp„\u `kpf \pe
(1) (2, 3) (1) (2, 3) R>¡.
(2) (4, −3) (2) (4, −3) (1) (2, 3)
(3) (1, 7) (3) (1, 7) (2) (4, −3)
(4) (3, −4) (4) (3, −4) (3) (1, 7)
(4) (3, −4)

•• ••
74. The integral is equal 74. ‚◊Ê∑§‹ ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò —
( • •• • • ) • • •• •• • ( • •• • • ) • • •• •• • ••
74. =__________.
( • •• • • ) • • •• •• •
to : (¡„Ê° C ∞∑§ ‚◊Ê∑§‹Ÿ •ø⁄U „Ò–)
(where C is a constant of integration.)
(Äep„ C k„L$g__p¡ AQmp„L$ R>¡.)
• •• • •
• •• • • (1) • •• •• ••
• •• •• •• • •• • • • •• • •
• •• •• ••
(1)
• •• • • (1)
• •• • •
• •• • •
• •• • • (2) • •• •• ••
• •• •• •• • •• • • • •• • •
• •• •• ••
(2)
• •• • • (2)
• •• • •
• •• • •
• •• • • (3) • • •• ••
• •• •• • •• • • • •• • •
• • •• ••
(3)
• •• • • (3)
• •• • •
• •• • •
• •• • • (4) •• •• ••
•• •• •• • •• • • • •• • •
•• •• ••
(4)
• •• • • (4)
• •• • •

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 42
75. The value of the integral
• • • • •• • • • • • •• •
‚◊Ê∑§‹ • • , ¡„Ê° • •
• • • • •• • 75. 75. =_________.
• • • • • • •• • • •• •• • • • •• •• • • • • • • • •• • • •• •• • • • •• •• • • •
, where [x] • • • • • • • •
• • • • •• • • •• •• • • • •• •• • • •
• • • •
[x], x ‚ ∑§◊ ÿÊ x ∑§ ’⁄UÊ’⁄U ◊„ûÊ◊ ¬ÍáÊÊZ∑§ „Ò, ∑§Ê Äep„ [x] A¡ x \u _p_p A\hp x _¡ kdp_ sdpd
denotes the greatest integer less than or ◊ÊŸ „Ò — `|Zp¯L$p¡dp„ kp¥\u dp¡V$p¡ `|Zp¯L$ v$ip®h¡ R>¡.
equal to x, is :
(1) 6 (1) 6
(1) 6
(2) 3 (2) 3
(2) 3
(3) 7 (3) 7
(3) 7
• •
•
• •
(4) (4)
•
(4)

76. x  R, x ≠ 0, ∑§ Á‹∞, ÿÁŒ y(x) ∞∑§ ∞‚Ê •fl∑§‹ŸËÿ

76. For x  R, x ≠ 0, if y(x) is a differentiable Å¡ x  R, x ≠ 0 dpV¡$, y(x) A¡L$ rhL$g_ue rh^¡e R>¡ L¡$
function such that »§‹Ÿ „Ò Á∑§ 76.
• •
• • • • S>¡ \ u • • • ••• ••• • •• •• • •• •• •••• •• ••• ••• • , sp¡
• • • ••• ••• • •• •• • •• •• •••• •• ••• ••• • , then y(x) • • • ••• ••• • •• ••• •• •• •••• •• ••• ••• • „Ò, ÃÊ y (x) • •
• • • •
y(x)=__________.
equals : ’⁄UÊ’⁄U „Ò — (Äep„ C AQm R>¡.)
(where C is a constant.) (¡„Ê° C ∞∑§ •ø⁄U „Ò–)
•
• •
•
•
• • ••
• • • ••
•
•
(1)
(1) •• •• • •
• (1)
•
•
• • • •
• • • • • •
• • • •
•• ••
(2)
(2) • •• •
•
••
(2)
• •
• • • • • •
• • • •• •
•• • • •
••
(3)
(3)
•• (3) •
••
•
• •
•
• • •
• • •• •
(4)
• • •• ••
(4)
• • ••
(4)

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 43
77. The solution of the differential equation •• • •• • • •• • •• • •
•fl∑§‹ ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ •• • ••• • • •• • • ¡„Ê° rhL$g kduL$fZ •• • ••• • • •• • • Äep„
•• • •• • • 77.
•• • • ••
77.
•• • • ••
•• • ••• • • •• • • where • •• •• •• • π ,
•• • • •• •
• •• •• •• •
π
„Ò ÃÕÊ y(0)=1 „Ò, ∑§Ê „‹ „Ò — • •• •• •• •
π
, A_¡ y(0)=1, _p¡ DL¡$g _________
• •
and y(0)=1, is given by :
• R>¡.
• •• •• •• • •
(1)
•• • • •• ••• • • • •• •• •• •
•• • • •• ••• • •
(1)
•
• •• •• •• •
• • (1)
•• • • •• ••• • •
• •= • •+ •
(2)
•• • • •+ •• • • • • •• •• •• •
•• • • •• ••• • •
(2)
•
• • •• •• •• •
• • (2)
•• • • •• ••• • •
• •= • •− •
(3)
•• • • •+ •• • • • • •• •• •• •
•• • • •• ••• • •
(3)
•
• • •• •• •• •
• (3)
•• • • •• ••• • •
• •• •• •• • •
(4)
•• • • •• ••• • • • •• •• •• •
•• • • •• ••• • •
(4)
•
• •• •• •• •
•• • • •• ••• • •
(4)
78. A ray of light is incident along a line which
meets another line, 7x−y+1=0, at the 78. ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ∑§Ë ∞∑§ Á∑§⁄UáÊ ∞∑§ ⁄UπÊ ∑§Ë ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ •Ê¬ÁÃÃ
point (0, 1). The ray is then reflected from „Ò ¡Ê ∞∑§ •ãÿ ⁄UπÊ 7x−y+1=0 ∑§Ê Á’¥ŒÈ 78. âL$pi_y„ A¡L$ qL$fZ f¡Mp 7x−y+1=0 `f Ap`ps
this point along the line, y+2x=1. Then (0, 1) ¬⁄U Á◊‹ÃË „Ò– fl„ Á∑§⁄UáÊ Á»§⁄U ß‚ Á’¥ŒÈ ‚ ⁄UπÊ \pe R>¡ S>¡ tbv$y$ (0, 1) ApNm dm¡ R>¡. Ðepfbpv$ Ap
y+2x=1 ∑§Ë ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ ¬Á⁄UflÁøà „ÊÃË „Ò, ÃÊ •Ê¬ÁÃÃ
the equation of the line of incidence of the
ray of light is :
qL$fZ Ap tbvy$dp„\u `fphrs®s \C f¡Mp y+2x=1
(1) 41x−38y+38=0 ¬˝∑§Ê‡Ê ∑§Ë Á∑§⁄UáÊ ∑§Ê ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ „Ò — `f fl¡ R>¡. sp¡ Ap`ps qL$fZ_y„ kduL$fZ __________
(2) 41x+25y−25=0 (1) 41x−38y+38=0 R>¡.
(3) 41x+38y−38=0 (2) 41x+25y−25=0 (1) 41x−38y+38=0
(4) 41x−25y+25=0 (3) 41x+38y−38=0 (2) 41x+25y−25=0
(4) 41x−25y+25=0 (3) 41x+38y−38=0
(4) 41x−25y+25=0

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 44
79. A straight line through origin O meets the 79. ◊Í‹ Á’¥ŒÈ O ‚ „Ê∑§⁄U ¡ÊŸ flÊ‹Ë ∞∑§ ‚⁄U‹ ⁄UπÊ ⁄UπÊ•Ê¥ 79. ENdtbvy$ O dp„\u `kpf \su A¡L$ f¡Mp, f¡MpAp¡
3y=10−4x ÃÕÊ 8x+6y+5=0 ∑§Ê ∑˝ § ◊‡Ê— 3y=10−4x A_¡ 8x+6y+5=0 _¡ A_y ¾ $ d ¡
lines 3y=10−4x and 8x+6y+5=0 at
points A and B respectively. Then O
divides the segment AB in the ratio : Á’¥ŒÈ•Ê¥ A ÃÕÊ B ¬⁄U Á◊‹ÃË „Ò¥, ÃÊ Á’¥ŒÈ O ⁄UπÊπ¥«U tbvy$Ap¡ A A_¡ B dp„ dm¡ R>¡. sp¡ O A¡ f¡MpM„X$ AB _¡
(1) 2 : 3 AB ∑§Ê Á¡‚ •ŸÈ¬Êà ◊¥ Áfl÷ÊÁ¡Ã ∑§⁄UÃÊ „Ò, fl„ „Ò — __________ NyZp¡Ñfdp„ rhcpS>_ L$f¡ R>¡.
(2) 1 : 2 (1) 2:3 (1) 2:3
(3) 4 : 1 (2) 1:2 (2) 1:2
(4) 3 : 4 (3) 4:1 (3) 4:1
(4) 3:4 (4) 3:4
80. Equation of the tangent to the circle, at the
point (1, −1), whose centre is the point of 80. ©‚ flÎûÊ Á¡‚∑§Ê ∑§ãŒ˝ ‚⁄U‹ ⁄UπÊ•Ê¥ x−y=1 ÃÕÊ 80. S>¡_y„ L¡$ÞÖ f¡MpAp¡ x−y=1 A_¡ 2x+y=3 _y„ R>¡v$tbvy$
2x+y=3 ∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃë¿UŒ Á’¥ŒÈ „Ò, ∑§ Á’¥ŒÈ (1, −1) ¬⁄U
intersection of the straight lines x−y=1
and 2x+y=3 is :
lp¡e s¡hp hsy®m_¡ tbvy$ (1, −1) ApNm_p õ`i®L$_y„
(1) 4x+y−3=0 πË¥øË ªß¸ S¬‡Ê¸ ⁄πÊ ∑§Ê ‚◊Ë∑§⁄UáÊ „Ò — kduL$fZ __________ R>¡.
(2) x+4y+3=0 (1) 4x+y−3=0 (1) 4x+y−3=0
(3) 3x−y−4=0 (2) x+4y+3=0 (2) x+4y+3=0
(4) x−3y−4=0 (3) 3x−y−4=0 (3) 3x−y−4=0
(4) x−3y−4=0 (4) x−3y−4=0
81. P and Q are two distinct points on the
parabola, y2=4x, with parameters t and t1 81. P ÃÕÊ Q ¬⁄Ufl‹ÿ y2=4x ¬⁄U ÁSÕà ŒÊ Á÷㟠Á’¥ŒÈ „Ò 81. P A_¡ Q `fhge y2=4x `f Aph¡gp b¡ rcÞ_
respectively. If the normal at P passes Á¡Ÿ∑§ ¬˝Êø‹ ∑˝§◊‡Ê— t ÃÕÊ t1 „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ P ¬⁄U πË¥øÊ tbv$y$Ap¡ R>¡ S>¡_p âpQgp¡ A_y¾$d¡ t A_¡ t1 R>¡. Å¡ P
through Q, then the minimum value of •••
ªÿÊ •Á÷‹¥’ Q ‚ „Ê∑§⁄U ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò, ÃÊ ••• ∑§Ê ãÿÍŸÃ◊ ApNm_p¡ Arcg„b Q dp„\u `kpf \sp¡ lp¡e, sp¡ •••
is :
◊ÊŸ „Ò — _y„ Þe|_sd d|ëe __________ R>¡.
(1) 2
(1) 2 (1) 2
(2) 4
(2) 4 (2) 4
(3) 6
(3) 6 (3) 6
(4) 8
(4) 8 (4) 8

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 45
82. A hyperbola whose transverse axis is along 82. ∞∑§ •Áì⁄Ufl‹ÿ, Á¡‚∑§Ê •ŸÈ¬˝SÕ •ˇÊ ‡ÊÊ¥∑§fl 82. A¡ L $ Arshge S>¡ _ p¡ dy ¿ e An ip„ L $h
•• •• •• •• •• ••
the major axis of the conic, •• • •• •• •• • •• •• ∑§ ŒËÉʸ •ˇÊ ∑§Ë ÁŒ‡ÊÊ ◊¥ „Ò ÃÕÊ •• • •• •• _p â^p_ An `f R>¡ s\p s¡_p
• • • • • •
and has vertices at the foci of this conic. If
Á¡‚∑§ ‡ÊË·¸ ß‚ ‡ÊÊ¥∑§fl ∑§Ë ŸÊÁ÷ÿÊ¥ ¬⁄U „Ò– ÿÁŒ rifp¡ t bvy $ A p¡ Ap ip„ L $ h _u _prcAp¡ `f R>¡ . Å¡
•
• •
• •Áì⁄Ufl‹ÿ ∑§Ë ©à∑§ãŒ˝ÃÊ „Ò, ÃÊ ÁŸêŸ ◊¥ ‚ ∑§ÊÒŸ
the eccentricity of the hyperbola is , then
•
Arshge_u DÐL¡$ÞÖsp •
lp¡e, sp¡ _uQ¡_pdp„\u L$ey„
which of the following points does NOT
lie on it ? ‚Ê Á’¥ŒÈ ß‚ ¬⁄U ÁSÕà Ÿ„Ë¥ „Ò? tbvy$ s¡_p `f Aph¡gy„ _l] lp¡e ?
(1) (0, 2) (1) (0, 2) (1) (0, 2)

(2) ( • ••• • ) (2) ( • ••• • ) (2) ( • ••• • )

(3) ( • • ••• • ) (3) ( • • ••• • ) (3) ( • • ••• • )
(4) ( • ••• • ) (4) ( • ••• • ) (4) ( • ••• • )

83. ABC is a triangle in a plane with vertices 83. ∞∑§ ‚◊Ë ◊¥ ∞∑§ ÁòÊ÷È¡ ABC „Ò Á¡‚∑§ ‡ÊË·¸ 83. A¡L$ kdsgdp„ A¡L$ rÓL$p¡Z ABC R>¡. S>¡_p rifp¡tbvy$Ap¡
A(2, 3, 5), B(−1, 3, 2) and C(λ, 5, µ). If the A(2, 3, 5), B(−1, 3, 2) ÃÕÊ C(λ, 5, µ) „Ò¥– ÿÁŒ A(2, 3, 5), B(−1, 3, 2) A_¡ C(λ, 5, µ) R>¡. Å¡ A
A ‚ „Ê∑§⁄U ¡ÊÃË ◊ÊÁäÿ∑§Ê ÁŸŒ¸‡ÊÊ¥∑§ •ˇÊÊ¥ ¬⁄U ‚◊ÊŸ
median through A is equally inclined to the
coordinate axes, then the value of
dp„\u _uL$msu dÝeNp epdpnp kp\¡ kdp_ fus¡ Y$m¡g
(λ3+µ3+5) is : M§¬ ‚ ! ÊÈ∑§Ë „Ò, ÃÊ (λ3+µ3+5) ∑§Ê ◊ÊŸ „Ò — R>¡, sp¡ (λ3+µ3+5) _u qL„$ds __________ R>¡.
(1) 1130 (1) 1130 (1) 1130
(2) 1348 (2) 1348 (2) 1348
(3) 676 (3) 676 (3) 676
(4) 1077 (4) 1077 (4) 1077

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 46
84. The number of distinct real values of λ for 84. λ ∑§ fl„ Á÷㟠flÊSÃÁfl∑§ ◊ÊŸÊ¥ ∑§Ë ‚¥ÅÿÊ Á¡Ÿ∑§ • •− • • •− • • •+ •
• •− • • •− • • •+ •
84. S>¡_p dpV¡$ f¡MpAp¡
••
= =
•= • •− • • •− • • •+ • • •
which the lines
•
=
• ••
Á‹∞ ⁄ π Ê∞° •= ÃÕÊ
••
=
• • • •− • • •− • • •− •
A_¡ •= kdsgue \pe
• •− • • •− • • •− • • • •
=
•= • •− • • •− • • •− • •
and
•
= • •
are •= ‚◊ËËÿ „Ò¥, „Ò —
• • • •
=
• s¡ h u _u rcÞ_ hpõsrhL$ qL„ $ dsp¡ _ u k„ ¿ ep
λ
__________ R>¡.
coplanar is :
(1) 4
(1) 4
(2) 1 (1) 4
(2) 1
(3) 2 (2) 1
(3) 2
(4) 3 (3) 2
(4) 3
(4) 3
85. ◊ÊŸÊ ABC ∞∑§ ÁòÊ÷È¡ „Ò Á¡‚∑§Ê ¬Á⁄U∑§ãŒ˝ P ¬⁄U „Ò–
85. Let ABC be a triangle whose circumcentre
is at P. If the position vectors of A, B, C ÿÁŒ Á’¥ŒÈ•Ê¥ A, B, C ÃÕÊ P ∑§ ÁSÕÁà ‚ÁŒ‡Ê ∑˝§◊‡Ê— 85. ^pfp¡ L¡$ ABC A¡L$ rÓL$p¡Z R>¡ S>¡_y„ `qfL¡$ÞÖ P ApNm
→ → → → → → R>¡. Å¡ A, B, C A_¡ P _p õ\p_kqv$ip¡ A_y¾$d¡
→ → →
→ → → • •• • • •• • •
and P are • •• • •• • and • •• • • •• • • • •• • •• • ÃÕÊ „Ò¥, ÃÊ ß‚ ÁòÊ÷È¡ → → →
→ → →
• • • •• • •• • A_¡ • •• • • •• • • lp¡e, sp¡ Ap
respectively, then the position vector of the ∑§ ‹¥’ - ∑§ãŒ˝ ∑§Ê ÁSÕÁà ‚ÁŒ‡Ê „Ò — •
orthocentre of this triangle, is :
→ → → rÓL$p¡Z_p g„bL¡$ÞÖ_p¡ õ\p_kqv$i __________ R>¡.
→ → → (1) • •• • • •• • •
→ → →
(1) • •• • • •• • • (1) • •• • • •• • •
→ → →
→ → → • •
• • • •
• • • 
• •• • • •• • •
(2) • • → → →
• •   •  • •• • • •• • • 
• •
(2) (2) 
 •     • 
   
→
→ (3) •
→
(3) • (3) •
→ → →
→ → → (4)  • •• • • •• • • 
→ → →
(4)  • •• • • •• • •   
 • •• • • •• • • 
•
  (4)
 
• •

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 47
86. The mean of 5 observations is 5 and their 86. 5 ¬˝ˇÊáÊÊ¥ ∑§Ê ◊Êäÿ 5 „Ò ÃÕÊ ©Ÿ∑§Ê ¬˝‚⁄UáÊ 124 „Ò– 86. 5 Ahgp¡L$_p¡_p¡ dÝeL$ 5 A_¡ rhQfZ 124 R>¡. Å¡
variance is 124. If three of the observations
ÿÁŒ ©Ÿ◊¥ ‚ ÃËŸ ¬˝ˇÊáÊ 1, 2 ÃÕÊ 6 „Ò¥, ÃÊ ߟ •Ê°∑§«∏Ê¥ s¡dp„\u ÓZ Ahgp¡L$_p¡ 1, 2 A_¡ 6 lp¡e, sp¡ dprlsu_y„
are 1, 2 and 6 ; then the mean deviation
from the mean of the data is : ∑§Ê ◊Êäÿ ‚ ◊Êäÿ Áflø‹Ÿ „Ò — dÝeL$\u kf¡fpi rhQg_ __________ \pe.
(1) 2.4 (1) 2.4 (1) 2.4
(2) 2.8 (2) 2.8 (2) 2.8
(3) 2.5 (3) 2.5 (3) 2.5
(4) 2.6 (4) 2.6 (4) 2.6

87. An experiment succeeds twice as often as 87. ∞∑§ ¬˝ÿÊª ∑§ ‚»§‹ „ÊŸ ∑§Ê ‚¥ÿÊª ©‚∑§ Áfl»§‹ 87. A¡L$ âep¡N S>¡V$gp hMs Akam \pe R>¡ s¡_p\u b¡
it fails. The probability of at least 5 „ÊŸ ∑§ ‚¥ÿÊª ∑§Ê ŒÈªÈŸÊ „Ò– ß‚ ¬˝ÿÊª ∑§ 6 ¬⁄UˡÊáÊÊ¥ NZp¡ kam \pe R>¡. Ap âep¡N_p R> âeÐ_p¡dp„\u
successes in the six trials of this experiment ◊¥ ‚ ∑§◊ ‚ ∑§◊ ¬Ê°ø ∑§ ‚»§‹ „ÊŸ ∑§Ë ¬˝ÊÁÿ∑§ÃÊ Ap¡ R >pdp„ Ap¡ R >u 5 kamsp dmhp_u k„ c ph_p
is :
„Ò — __________ R>¡.
•••
••• •••
•••
(1)
•••
(1)
•••
(1)
•••
••• •••
•••
(2)
•••
(2)
•••
(2)
•••
••• •••
•••
(3)
•••
(3)
•••
(3)
•••
••• •••
•••
(4)
•••
(4)
•••
(4)

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03 48

If A>0, B>0 and • •• •• •• • ÿÁŒ ÃÕÊ • •• •• •• • „Ò , ÃÊ Å¡ A_¡ • •• •• •• • lp¡ e , sp¡

π π π
88. , then the 88. A>0, B>0 88. A>0, B>0
• • •
minimum value of tanA+tanB is : tanA+tanB ∑§Ê ãÿÍŸÃ◊ ◊ÊŸ „Ò — tanA+tanB _y„ Þe|_sd d|ëe __________ R>¡.
(1) • •• • • (1) • •• • • (1) • •• • •
(2) • •• • • (2) • •• • • (2) • •• • •
(3) • •• •• • (3) • •• •• • (3) • •• •• •
• • •
(4)
•
(4) (4)
• •

89. The angle of elevation of the top of a 89. Á’¥ŒÈ A ‚, ¡Ê ∞∑§ ™§äflʸœ⁄U ◊ËŸÊ⁄U ∑§ ¬Ífl¸ ∑§Ë •Ê⁄U
vertical tower from a point A, due east of it „Ò, ◊ËŸÊ⁄U ∑§ ‡ÊË·¸ ∑§Ê ©ãŸÿŸ ∑§ÊáÊ 45 „Ò– Á’¥ŒÈ B, 89. A¡L$ rifp¡g„b V$phf_u `|h® sfa_p tbvy$ A \u V$phf_u
is 45. The angle of elevation of the top of
¡Ê Á’¥ŒÈ A ∑§ ŒÁˇÊáÊ ◊¥ „Ò, ‚ ©‚Ë ◊ËŸÊ⁄U ∑§ ‡ÊË·¸ ∑§Ê V$p¡Q_p¡ DÐk¡^L$p¡Z 45 R>¡. tbvy$ A _u v$rnZ¡ Aph¡g
the same tower from a point B, due south
©ãŸÿŸ ∑§ÊáÊ 30 „Ò– ÿÁŒ A ÃÕÊ B ∑§ ’Ëø ∑§Ë ŒÍ⁄UË tbvy$ B \u V$phf_u V$p¡Q_p¡ DÐk¡^L$p¡Z 30 R>¡. Å¡ A
of A is 30. If the distance between A and
B is • • • •• , then the height of the tower • • • ◊Ë. „Ò, ÃÊ ◊ËŸÊ⁄U ∑§Ë ™§°øÊ߸ (◊Ë. ◊¥) „Ò — A_¡ B hÃQ¡_y„ A„sf • • • •• lp¡e, sp¡ V$phf_u
KQpC (duV$fdp„) __________ R>¡.
•• •
(in metres), is :
(1)
(1) •• • (2) 54 (1) •• •
(2) 54
•• •
(2) 54
(3)
(3) •• • (4) 108 (3) •• •
(4) 108 (4) 108

SET - 03 ENGLISH SET - 03 HINDI SET - 03 GUJARATI

Set - 03
90. The contrapositive of the following
statement,
“If the side of a square doubles, then its area
increases four times”, is :
(1) If the side of a square is not doubled,
then its area does not increase four
times.
(2) If the area of a square increases four
times, then its side is doubled.
(3) If the area of a square increases four
times, then its side is not doubled.
(4) If the area of a square does not
increase four times, then its side is not
doubled.
-oOo-
SET - 03 ENGLISH
90. ÁŸêŸ ∑§ÕŸ ∑§Ê ¬˝ÁÃœŸÊà◊∑§ (contrapositive)
„Ò —
““ÿÁŒ Á∑§‚Ë flª¸ ∑§Ë ÷È¡Ê ŒÈªÈŸË „Ê ¡Ê∞, ÃÊ ©‚∑§Ê
ˇÊòÊ»§‹ øÊ⁄U ªÈŸÊ ’…∏ ¡ÊÃÊ „Ò”” —
(1) ÿÁŒ ∞∑§ flª¸ ∑§Ë ÷È¡Ê ŒÈªÈŸË Ÿ ∑§Ë ¡Ê∞, ÃÊ
©‚∑§Ê ˇÊòÊ»§‹ øÊ⁄U ªÈŸÊ Ÿ„Ë¥ ’…∏ÃÊ–
(2) ÿÁŒ Á∑§‚Ë flª¸ ∑§Ê ˇÊòÊ»§‹ øÊ⁄U ªÈŸÊ ’…∏ ¡Ê∞,
ÃÊ ©‚∑§Ë ÷È¡Ê ŒÈªÈŸË „Ê ¡ÊÃË „Ò–
(3) ÿÁŒ Á∑§‚Ë flª¸ ∑§Ê ˇÊòÊ»§‹ øÊ⁄U ªÈŸÊ ’…∏ ¡ÊÃÊ
„Ò, ÃÊ ©‚∑§Ë ÷È¡Ê ŒÈªÈŸË Ÿ„Ë¥ „ÊÃË–
(4) ÿÁŒ Á∑§‚Ë flª¸ ∑§Ê ˇÊòÊ»§‹ øÊ⁄U ªÈŸÊ Ÿ„Ë¥ ’…∏ÃÊ,
ÃÊ ©‚∑§Ë ÷È¡Ê ŒÈªÈŸË Ÿ„Ë¥ „ÊÃË–
-oOo-
SET - 03 HINDI
49
90. _uQ¡_p rh^p__y„ kdp_p\} â¡fZ L$ey„ R>¡ ?
""Å¡ L$p¡C Qp¡fk_u bpSy> bdZu L$fhpdp„ Aph¡, sp¡ s¡_y„
n¡Óam QpfNÏ„ h^¡.''
(1) Å¡ L$p¡C Qp¡fk_u bpSy> bdZu L$fhpdp„ _ Aph¡,
sp¡ s¡_y„ n¡Óam QpfNÏ„ h^i¡ _rl.
(2) Å¡ L$pC ¡ Qp¡fk_y„ n¡Óam QpfNÏ„ h^pfhpdp„ Aph¡,
sp¡ s¡_u bpSy> bdZu \pe.
(3) Å¡ L$p¡C Qp¡fk_y„ n¡Óam QpfNÏ„ h^pfhpdp„
Aph¡, sp¡ s¡_u bpSy> bdZu _ \pe.
(4) Å¡ L$p¡C Qp¡fk_y„ n¡Óam QpfNÏ„ h^pfhpdp„ _
Aph¡, sp¡ s¡_u bpSy> bdZu _ \pe.
-oOo-
SET - 03 GUJARATI
 JEE Main 2016 Answer Key Paper 1 Online (April 10,2016)

Question and Answer Key - April 10 Online

Question No. Answer Key Question No. Answer Key Question No. Answer Key
Q1 2 Q31 2 Q61 4
Q2 1 Q32 2 Q62 1
Q3 4 Q33 1 Q63 4
Q4 3 Q34 1 Q64 3
Q5 2 Q35 2 Q65 4
Q6 4 Q36 2 Q66 1
Q7 4 Q37 3 Q67 1
Q8 1 Q38 4 Q68 1
Q9 4 Q39 2 Q69 2
Q10 4 Q40 1 Q70 1
Q11 4 Q41 3 Q71 1
Q12 3 Q42 2 Q72 2
Q13 2 Q43 4 Q73 3
Q14 1 Q44 4 Q74 2
Q15 2 Q45 2 Q75 2
Q16 2 Q46 4 Q76 3
Q17 2 Q47 4 Q77 3
Q18 1 Q48 1 Q78 1
Q19 3 Q49 4 Q79 3
Q20 2 Q50 2 Q80 2
Q21 2 Q51 2 Q81 4
Q22 4 Q52 2 Q82 4
Q23 3 Q53 4 Q83 2
Q24 2 Q54 4 Q84 4
Q25 4 Q55 3 Q85 4
Q26 3 Q56 1 Q86 2
Q27 3 Q57 1 Q87 3
Q28 2 Q58 2 Q88 3
Q29 2 Q59 4 Q89 2
Q30 1 Q60 3 Q90 4
Note:-
JEE Main 2015 Question Paper 1 Online (April 10, 2015)

Page 1 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 09

1. x and y displacements of a particle are
given as x(t)5a sinvt and y(t)5a sin2vt.
Its trajectory will look like :
1. ØçÎ ç·¤âè ·¤‡æ ·ð¤ x ÌÍæ y çßSÍæÂÙæð´ ·¤æð ·ý¤×àæÑ,
x(t)5a sinvt ÌÍæ y(t)5a sin2vt, âð çÙM¤çÂÌ
ç·¤Øæ ÁæÌæ ãñ Ìæð, §â·¤æ Âýÿæð - ÂÍ, çِÙæ´ç·¤Ì ×ð´ âð
ç·¤â·ð¤ Áñâæ çιæ§ü Îð»æ?

(1)

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(4)
 Page 2 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
2. If a body moving in a circular path 2.
maintains constant speed of 10 ms21, then
which of the following correctly describes
relation between acceleration and
radius ?
09
ØçÎ ßëžææ·¤æÚU ÂÍ ×ð´ »çÌ ·¤ÚUÌð ãé° ç·¤âè ç´ÇU (ßSÌé)
·¤è ¿æÜ 10 ms21 ãñ ¥æñÚU Øã ¥¿ÚU ÕÙè ÚUãÌè ãñ Ìæð,
çِÙæ´ç·¤Ì ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙâæ ¥æÜð¹, ˆßÚU‡æ ÌÍæ ç˜æ’Øæ ·ð¤
Õè¿ âÕ‹Ï ·¤æ ÆUè·¤ (âãè) 翘æ‡æ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ?

(1) (1)

(2) (2)

(3) (3)

(4) (4)
 Page 3 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 09
3. A block of mass m510 kg rests on a 3. ç·¤âè ŽÜæò·¤ (»éÅU·ð¤) ·¤æ ÎýÃØ×æÙ m510 kg ãñÐ
horizontal table. The coefficient of friction
Øã °·¤ ÿæñçÌÁ ×ðÁ ÂÚU ÚU¹æ ãñÐ §Ù ÎæðÙæð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿
between the block and the table is 0.05.
When hit by a bullet of mass 50 g moving ƒæáü‡æ »é‡ææ´·¤50.05 ãñÐ §â ŽÜæò·¤ ÂÚU 50 g ÎýÃØ×æÙ
with speed v, that gets embedded in it, the ·¤è °·¤ »æðÜè v ¿æÜ âð ÅU·¤ÚUæÌè ¥æñÚU §â×ð´ Ï´â
block moves and comes to stop after ÁæÌè ãñÐ §ââð Ø㠎Üæò·¤, ×ðÁ ÂÚU 2 m çßSÍæçÂÌ
moving a distance of 2 m on the table.
ãæð·¤ÚU L¤·¤ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ
If a freely falling object were to acquire
ØçÎ, H ª¡¤¿æ§ü âð ×é€Ì M¤Â âð ç»ÚUæÙð ·ð¤ Âà¿æÌ÷ ·¤æð§ü
speed after being dropped from height
v
10 ßSÌé v
¿æÜ ÂýæŒÌ ·¤ÚU ÜðÌè ãñ Ìæð, ª¤Áæü-ÿæØ ·¤æð
H, then neglecting energy losses and 10
taking g510 ms22, the value of H is close Ù»‡Ø ×æÙÌð ãé°, H ·¤æ âç‹Ù·¤ÅU ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
to : (g510 ms22)
(1) 0.2 km (1) 0.2 km
(2) 0.3 km (2) 0.3 km
(3) 0.4 km (3) 0.4 km
(4) 0.5 km (4) 0.5 km

4. A block of mass m50.1 kg is connected to 4. ç·¤âè ŽÜæò·¤ ·¤æ ÎýÃØ×æÙ m50.1 kg ãñÐ Øã °·¤
a spring of unknown spring constant k. It
is compressed to a distance x from its °ðâè ·¤×æÙè (çSÂý»´ ) âð ÁéÇæ¸ ãñ çÁâ·¤æ ·¤×æÙè çSÍÚUæ·´ ¤
equilibrium position and released from rest. k ãñÐ §â·¤æð §â·¤è âæØæßSÍæ âð x ÎêÚUè Ì·¤ ÎÕæ·¤ÚU
çßÚUæ×æßSÍæ âð ÀUæðǸ çÎØæ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ âæØæßSÍæ âð
After approaching half the distance  
x

ÎêÚUè ÂÚU ¥æÙð ÂÚU Øã °·¤ ¥‹Ø ŽÜæò·¤ âð ÅU·¤ÚUæÌæ

2 x
from equilibrium position, it hits another
 
2
block and comes to rest momentarily, while
ãñ ¥æñÚU ÿæç‡æ·¤ M¤Â âð L¤·¤ ÁæÌæ ãñ, ÁÕç·¤, ÎêâÚUæ
the other block moves with a velocity
3 ms 21. The total initial energy of the ŽÜæò·¤ 3 ms21 ·ð¤ ßð» âð »çÌ ·¤ÚUÙð Ü»Ìæ ãñÐ Ìæð,
spring is : ·¤×æÙè ·¤è ·é¤Ü ÂýæÚ´UçÖ·¤ ª¤Áæü ãñ Ñ
(1) 1.5 J (1) 1.5 J
(2) 0.6 J (2) 0.6 J
(3) 0.3 J (3) 0.3 J
(4) 0.8 J (4) 0.8 J

5. A uniform solid cylindrical roller of mass 5. ‘m’ ÎýÃØ×æÙ ·ð¤ ç·¤âè °·¤â×æÙ ÆUæðâ çâç܋ÇUÚU ·ð¤
‘m’ is being pulled on a horizontal surface
with force F parallel to the surface and
·ð¤‹Îý ÂÚU °·¤ ÕÜ F ܻ淤ÚU, ©âð ç·¤âè â×ÌÜ
applied at its centre. If the acceleration of âÌã ÂÚU, ©â·ð¤ â×æ‹ÌÚU ¹è´¿æ Áæ ÚUãæ ãñÐ ØçÎ Øã
the cylinder is ‘a’ and it is rolling without çâç܋ÇUÚU Õ»ñÚU (çÕÙæ) çȤâÜð ‘a’ ˆßÚU‡æ âð Üéɸ·¤
slipping then the value of ‘F’ is : ÚUãæ ãñ Ìæð, ‘F’ ·¤æ ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) ma
(1) ma
(2) 2 ma
(2) 2 ma

(3)
3
(3)
ma 3
2 ma
2

(4)
5
(4)
ma 5
3 ma
3
 Page 4 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 09
6. Consider a thin uniform square sheet made 6. °·¤ ÂÌÜè, °·¤â×æÙ, ß»æü·¤æÚU, ¿æÎÚU (àæèÅU) ç·¤âè
of a rigid material. If its side is ‘a’, mass m
Îëɸ ÂÎæÍü ·¤è ÕÙè ãñÐ ØçÎ §â·¤è °·¤ ÖéÁæ ‘a’,
and moment of inertia I about one of its
diagonals, then : ÎýÃØ×æÙ m ÌÍæ ç·¤âè °·¤ çß·¤‡æü ·ð¤ ÂçÚUÌÑ, §â·¤æ
ÁǸˆß ¥æƒæê‡æü I ãñ Ìæð Ñ
(1)
ma 2
I>
(1)
12 ma 2
I>
12
(2)
ma 2 ma 2
<I<
(2)
24 12 ma 2 ma 2
<I<
24 12
(3)
ma 2
I5
(3)
12 ma 2
I5
12
(4)
ma 2
I5
(4)
24 ma 2
I5
24
7. A very long (length L) cylindrical galaxy
is made of uniformly distributed mass and 7. °·¤ ÕãéÌ ÜÕè »ñÜð€âè (×´Îæç·¤Ùè) (ܐÕæ§ü L)
has radius R (R<<L). A star outside the
galaxy is orbiting the galaxy in a plane
°·¤â×æÙ çßÌçÚUÌ ÎýÃØ ·¤è ÕÙè ãñ, §â·¤è ç˜æ’Øæ
perpendicular to the galaxy and passing R (R<<L) ãñÐ §â »ñÜð€âè ·ð¤ ÕæãÚ °·¤ ÌæÚUæ,
through its centre. If the time period of star »ñÜð€âè ·¤è ÂçÚU·ý¤×æ ·¤ÚU ÚUãæ ãñÐ §â·¤è ÂçÚU·ý¤×æ ·¤æ
is T and its distance from the galaxy’s axis â×ÌÜ »ñÜð€âè ·ð¤ â×ÌÜ ·ð¤ ܐÕßÌ÷ ãñ ÌÍæ §â·ð¤
is r, then :
·ð¤‹Îý âð ãæð·¤ÚU »é$ÁÚUÌæ ãñÐ ØçÎ, ÌæÚðU ·¤è »ñÜð€âè ·¤è
(1) T2 ; r3
¥ÿæ âð ÎêÚUè r ãñ ¥æñÚU ÌæÚðU ·¤æ ¥æßÌü ·¤æÜ T ãñ Ìæð ÑU
(2) T ; r2
(1) T2 ; r3
(3) T;r
(2) T ; r2
(4) T; r (3) T;r
(4)
If it takes 5 minutes to fill a 15 litre bucket
T; r
8.

from a water tap of diameter cm then

2

ÂæÙè ·ð¤ ÙÜ ·¤è °·¤ ÅUæð´ÅUè ·¤æ ÃØæâ cm ãñÐ

p 2
8.
the Reynolds number for the flow is p
(density of water510 3 kg/m 3 and §ââð 15 çÜÅUÚU ·¤è °·¤ ÕæËÅUè ·¤æð ÖÚUÙð ×ð´ 5 ç×ÙÅU
viscosity of water51023 Pa.s) close to :
·¤æ â×Ø Ü»Ìæ ãñ Ð (ØçÎ, ÁÜ ·¤æ
(1) 5500 ƒæوß5103 kg/m3 ÌÍæ ÁÜ ·¤è àØæÙÌæ51023
(2) 11,000 Pa.s ãñ) Ìæð, §â Âýßæã ·ð¤ çÜØð ÚðUÙËÇ÷Uâ ⴁØæ
(3) 550 ãæð»è Ñ
(4) 1100 (1) 5500
(2) 11,000
(3) 550
(4) 1100
 Page 5 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 09
9. If two glass plates have water between 9. ØçÎ ·¤æ¡¿ ·¤è Îæð ŒÜðÅUæð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ×ð´ ÁÜ ·¤è °·¤
them and are separated by very small
ÂÌÜè ÂÚUÌ ãæð (¥æÚðU¹ Îðç¹Øð) Ìæð ©Ù ŒÜðÅUæð´ ·¤æð
distance (see figure), it is very difficult to
pull them apart. It is because the water in ¹è´¿·¤ÚU ¥Ü» ·¤ÚUÙæ ÕãéÌ ·¤çÆUÙ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ
between forms cylindrical surface on the
side that gives rise to lower pressure in the
water in comparison to atmosphere. If the
radius of the cylindrical surface is R and §â·¤æ ·¤æÚU‡æ Øã ãñ ç·¤, ÁÜ, ç·¤ÙæÚUæð´ ÂÚU çâçÜ´ÇUÚUè
surface tension of water is T then the
pressure in water between the plates is (ÕðÜÙæ·¤æÚU) âÌãð´ ÕÙæ ÎðÌæ ãñ çÁââð ßæØé×´ÇUÜ ·¤è
lower by : ÌéÜÙæ ×ð´ ßãæ¡ ÎæÕ ·¤× ãæð ÁæÌæ ãñÐ ØçÎ §â çâçÜ´ÇUÚUè
âÌã (ÂëcÆU) ·¤è ç˜æ’Øæ R ãñ ÌÍæ ÁÜ ·¤æ ÂëcÆU ÌÙæß
T ãñ Ìæð, Îæð ŒÜðÅUæð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ÁÜ ×ð´ ÎæÕ ç·¤ÌÙæ ·¤×
ãæð»æ?
(1)
T

(1)
4R T
4R
(2)
T

(2)
2R T
2R
(3)
4T

(3)
R 4T
R
(4)
2T

(4)
R 2T
R
 Page 6 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 09
10. An ideal gas goes through a reversible 10. °·¤ ¥æÎàæü »ñ⠷𤠩ˆ·ý¤×‡æèØ ¿·ý¤ a®b®c®d ,
cycle a®b®c®d has the V - T diagram ·ð¤ çÜØð V - T ¥æÚðU¹ Øãæ¡ ÎàææüØæ »Øæ ãñÐ Âý·ý¤×
shown below. Process d®a and b®c are d®a ÌÍæ b®c L¤Î÷Ïæðc× ãñ´Ð
adiabatic.

The corresponding P - V diagram for the

Ìæð, §â Âý·ý¤× ·ð¤ çÜØð, â´»Ì P - V ¥æÚðU¹ ãæð»æ
process is (all figures are schematic and (âÖè ¥æÚðU¹ ÃØßSÍæ ¥æÚðU¹ ãñ´ ¥æñÚU S·ð¤Ü ·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚU
not drawn to scale) : Ùãè´ ãñ´) Ñ

(1) (1)

(2) (2)

(3) (3)

(4) (4)
 Page 7 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 09
11. In an ideal gas at temperature T, the 11. ç·¤âè ¥æÎàæü »ñâ ×ð´, ç·¤âè ¥‡æé mæÚUæ »ñâ ·ð¤ ՋÎ
average force that a molecule applies on
Âæ˜æ ·¤è ÎèßæÚUæð´ ÂÚU Ü»æØæ »Øæ ¥æñâÌ ÕÜ, »ñâ ·ð¤
the walls of a closed container depends on
T as T . A good estimate for q is :
q Ìæ T ÂÚU, Tq ·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚU çÙÖüÚU ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñÐ Ìæð, q ·¤æ
(1) 2 âç‹Ù·¤ÅU ×æÙ ãñ Ñ
(2) 1 (1) 2
(2) 1
(3)
1

(3)
2 1
2
(4)
1

(4)
4 1
4
12. A simple harmonic oscillator of angular
frequency 2 rad s21 is acted upon by an 12. ç·¤âè âÚUÜ ¥æßÌü ÎæðçÜ˜æ ·¤è ·¤æð‡æèØ ¥æßëçžæ
external force F5sint N. If the oscillator
2 rad s21 ãñÐ §â ÂÚU °·¤ Õæs ÕÜ, F5sint
is at rest in its equilibrium position at t50,
its position at later times is proportional ‹ØêÅUÙ (N) Ü»Ìæ ãñÐ ØçÎ â×Ø t50 ÂÚU, Øã Îæðçܘæ,
to : ¥ÂÙè âæØæßSÍæ ×ð´ çßÚUæ× çSÍçÌ ×ð´ ãñ Ìæð, §â·ð¤
Âà¿æÌ÷ ·ð¤ ç·¤âè â×Ø ×ð´, §â·¤è çSÍçÌ çِÙæ´ç·¤Ì
(1) ×ð´ ç·¤â·ð¤ â×æÙéÂæÌè ãæð»è?
1
sint 1 sin 2t
2

(2) (1)
1
sint 1
1
cos 2t sint 1 sin 2t
2 2

(3) (2)
1
cost 2
1
sin 2t sint 1 cos 2t
2 2

(4) (3)
1
sint 2
1
sin 2t cost 2 sin 2t
2 2

(4)
1
A bat moving at 10 ms21
towards a wall
sint 2 sin 2t
13.
sends a sound signal of 8000 Hz towards
2

it. On reflection it hears a sound of

frequency f. The value of f in Hz is close to 13. 10 ms21 ·¤è ¿æÜ âð ç·¤âè ÎèßæÚU ·¤è ¥æðÚU ÁæÌæ
(speed of sound5320 ms21) ãé¥æ °·¤ ¿×»æÎǸ, ÎèßæÚU ·¤è ¥æðÚU 8000 Hz ·¤æ
(1) 8258 ŠßçÙ â´·ð¤Ì (çâ‚ÙÜ) ÂýðçáÌ ·¤ÚUÌæ (ÖðÁÌæ) ãñÐ
(2) 8516 ÎèßæÚU âð ÂÚUæßÌüÙ ·ð¤ Âà¿æÌ÷ ß㠑f ’ ¥æßëçžæ ·¤è
(3) 8000 ŠßçÙ, âéÙÌæ ãñÐ ØçÎ, ŠßçÙ ·¤è ¿æÜ 320 ms21 ãñ
(4) 8424 Ìæð, Hz ×ð´ f ·¤æ âç‹Ù·¤ÅU ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) 8258
(2) 8516
(3) 8000
(4) 8424
 Page 8 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
14. A thin disc of radius b52a has a concentric 14.
hole of radius ‘a’ in it (see figure). It carries
uniform surface charge ‘s’ on it. If the
electric field on its axis at height ‘h’ (h<<a)
from its centre is given as ‘Ch’ then value
of ‘C’ is :
09
°·¤ ÂÌÜè çÇUS·¤ (¿ç·ý¤·¤æ) ·¤è ç˜æ’Øæ ‘b’ ãñÐ §â×ð´
ÕÙð °·¤ â´·ð¤‹Îýè çÀUÎý (ÀðUÎ) ·¤è ç˜æ’Øæ ‘a’ ãñÐ
(b52a) Ð çÇS·¤ ÂÚU °·¤â×æÙ ÂëcÆU ¥æßðàæ s ãñÐ
ØçÎ §â·¤è ¥ÿæ ÂÚU ÌÍæ §â·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý âð ‘h’ ª¡¤¿æ§ü
ÂÚU, (h<<a), çßléÌ ÿæð˜æ ‘Ch’ ãæð Ìæð, ‘C’ ·¤æ ×æÙ
ãñ Ñ

(1)
s
ae 0
(1)
s
s
ae 0
(2) 2ae0
s
(2) 2ae0
(3)
s
4ae0
(3)
s
4ae0
(4)
s
8ae0
(4)
s
8ae0
 Page 9 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
15. Shown in the figure are two point charges 15.
1Q and 2Q inside the cavity of a
spherical shell. The charges are kept near
the surface of the cavity on opposite sides
of the centre of the shell. If s1 is the surface
charge on the inner surface and Q1 net
charge on it and s2 the surface charge on
the outer surface and Q2 net charge on it
then :
09
Øãæ¡ ¥æÚðU¹ ×ð´, ç·¤âè »æðÜæ·¤æÚU ·¤æðàæ (àæñÜ) ·ð¤ ·¤æðÅUÚU
·ð¤ ÖèÌÚU Îæð çՋÎé-¥æßðàæ 1Q ÌÍæ 2Q ÎàææüØð »Øð
ãñ´Ð Øð ¥æßðàæ ·¤æðÅUÚU ·¤è âÌã ·ð¤ çÙ·¤Å U§â Âý·¤æÚU
ÚU¹ð »Øð ãñ´ ç·¤, °·¤ ¥æßðàæ ·¤æðàæ ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý ·¤è °·¤
¥æðÚU ãñ ¥æñÚU ÎêâÚUæ ·ð¤‹Îý ·ð¤ çßÂÚUèÌ ÎêâÚUè ¥æðÚUÐ ØçÎ,
ÖèÌÚUè ÌÍæ ÕæãÚUè âÌãæð´ (ÂëcÆUæð´) ÂÚU, ÂëcÆU ¥æßðàæ
·ý¤×àæÑ s1 ÌÍæ s2 ¥æñÚU ÙðÅU ¥æßðàæ ·ý¤×àæÑ Q1 ÌÍæ
Q2 ãæð Ìæð Ñ

(1) s1 ¹ 0, Q1 ¹ 0
s2 ¹ 0, Q2 ¹ 0 (1) s1 ¹ 0, Q1 ¹ 0

(2) s1 ¹ 0, Q1 5 0 s2 ¹ 0, Q2 ¹ 0

s2 ¹ 0, Q2 5 0 (2) s1 ¹ 0, Q1 5 0

(3) s1 ¹ 0, Q1 5 0 s2 ¹ 0, Q2 5 0

s2 5 0, Q2 5 0 (3) s1 ¹ 0, Q1 5 0
(4) s1 5 0, Q1 5 0 s2 5 0, Q2 5 0
s2 5 0, Q2 5 0 (4) s1 5 0, Q1 5 0
s2 5 0, Q2 5 0
16. If the capacitance of a nanocapacitor is
measured in terms of a unit ‘u’ made by 16. ØçÎ ç·¤âè ÙñÙæð â´ÏæçÚU˜æ ·¤è ÏæçÚUÌæ, °·¤ °ðâð ×æ˜æ·¤
combining the electronic charge ‘e’, Bohr
radius ‘a0’, Planck’s constant ‘h’ and speed ‘u’ ×ð´ ×æÂè ÁæØ, Áæð §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ ¥æßðàæ ‘e’ , ÕæðÚU-ç˜æ’Øæ
of light ‘c’ then : ‘a0’, ŒÜæ´·¤ çSÍÚUæ´·¤ ‘h’ ÌÍæ Âý·¤æàæ ·¤è ¿æÜ ‘c’ ·ð¤
â´ØæðÁÙ âð ÕÙæ ãñ Ìæð Ñ
(1)
e2 c
u5
(1)
e2 c
u5
ha0
ha0

(2)
e2 h
u5
(2)
ca0 e2 h
u5
ca0

(3)
e 2 a0
u5
(3)
hc e 2 a0
u5
hc
(4)
hc
u5 2
(4)
e a0 hc
u5 2
e a0
 Page 10 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
17. Suppose the drift velocity vd in a material 17.
varied with the applied electric field E as
vd ; E . Then V - I graph for a wire
made of such a material is best given by :
09
ØçÎ, ç·¤âè ÂÎæÍü ×ð´ ¥Âßæã ßð», vd ·¤æ ×æÙ, Ü»æØð
»Øð çßléÌ ÿæð˜æ E ÂÚU §â Âý·¤æÚU çÙÖüÚU ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ, ç·¤
vd ; E Ð Ìæð çِÙæ´ç·¤Ì ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ-âæ »ýæȤ
(¥æÜð¹), §â ÂÎæÍü âð ÕÙð ÌæÚU ·ð¤ çÜØð, âç‹Ù·¤ÅU
V - I »ýæȤ ãæð»æ?

(1)

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(4)
 Page 11 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
18. A 10V battery with internal resistance 18.
1V and a 15V battery with internal
resistance 0.6V are connected in parallel
to a voltmeter (see figure). The reading in
the voltmeter will be close to :
09
°·¤ ßæðËÅU×èÅUÚU âð â×æ‹ÌÚU ·ý¤× ×ð´, Îæð ÕñÅUçÚUØæ¡, ÁæðǸè
»§ü ãñ´Ð ÂãÜè, 10V ÌÍæ 1V ¥æ‹ÌçÚU·¤ ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ ·¤è
¥æñÚU ÎêâÚUè, 15V ÌÍæ 0.6V ¥æ‹ÌçÚU·¤ ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ ·¤è
(¥æÚðU¹ Îðç¹Øð) Ìæð, ßæðËÅU×èÅUÚU ·ð¤ ÂÆUÙ (ÚUèçÇ´U»)
·¤æ âç‹Ù·¤ÅU ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ

(1) 11.9 V
(2) 12.5 V (1) 11.9 V
(3) 13.1 V (2) 12.5 V
(4) 24.5 V (3) 13.1 V
(4) 24.5 V

19. A proton (mass m) accelerated by a

potential difference V flies through a
uniform transverse magnetic field B. The
field occupies a region of space by width
‘d’. If ‘a’ be the angle of deviation of proton
from initial direction of motion (see
figure), the value of sin a will be :
19. çßÖßæ‹ÌÚ ‘V’ mæÚUæ ˆßçÚUÌ, °·¤ ÂýæðÅUæòÙ (ÎýÃØ×æÙ m),
ç·¤âè ¥ÙéÂýSÍ °·¤â×æÙ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ B âð ãæð·¤ÚU
Ìèßý ¿æÜ âð »é$ÁÚUÌæ ãñÐ Øã ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ ‘d’ ¿æñǸæ§ü
Ì·¤ çßSÌçÚUÌ ãñÐ ØçÎ, Øã ÂýæðÅUæòÙ, ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæðð˜æ ·ð¤
·¤æÚU‡æ ¥ÂÙè »çÌ ·¤è ÂýæÚ´UçÖ·¤ çÎàææ âð ‘a’ ·¤æð‡æ âð
çß¿çÜÌ ãæð ÁæÌæ ãñ (¥æÚð U ¹ Îð ç ¹Øð ) Ìæð ,
sin a ·¤æ ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ

(1)
B qd
2 mV

(1)
B qd
(2)
B q
2 mV
d 2mV

(2)
B q
(3)
q d 2mV
Bd
2mV

(3)
q
Bd
(4)
Bd 2mV
qV
2m
(4)
Bd
qV
2m
 Page 12 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
20. A 25 cm long solenoid has radius 2 cm 20.
and 500 total number of turns. It carries a
current of 15 A. If it is equivalent to a
magnet of the same size and magnetization
09
ç·¤âè ÂçÚUÙæçÜ·¤æ ·¤è ܐÕæ§ü 25 cm ÌÍæ ç˜æ’Øæ
2 cm ãñ ¥æñÚU §â×ð´ ÌæÚU ·ð¤ ·é¤Ü 500 Èð¤ÚðU ÜÂðÅðU »Øð
ãñ´Ð §ââð 15 A ·¤è ÏæÚUæ ÂýßæçãÌ ãæð ÚUãè ãñÐ Øã

M (magnetic moment/volume), then ?M?

ÂçÚUÙæçÜ·¤æ, §âè âæ§Á ÌÍæ ¿éÕ·¤Ù (¿éÕ·¤èØ
→ → →
M
is :
¥æƒæê‡æü/¥æØÌÙ), ·ð¤ ÌéËØ ãñ Ìæð , ãñ Ñ
→
?M?
(1) 3p Am21
(1) 3p Am21
(2) 30000 Am21
(2) 30000 Am21
(3) 300 Am21
(3) 300 Am21
(4) 30000p Am21
(4) 30000p Am21

21. When current in a coil changes from 5 A

to 2 A in 0.1 s, an average voltage of 50 V 21. ç·¤âè ·é´¤ÇUÜè âð ÂýßæçãÌ çßléÌ ÏæÚUæ ·¤æ ×æÙ, 0.1 s
is produced. The self - inductance of the ×ð´, 5 A âð 2 A ãæð ÁæÌæ ãñ çÁââð, 50 V ·¤è ¥æñâÌ
coil is :
ßæðËÅUÌæ ©ˆÂ‹Ù ãæðÌè ãñÐ Ìæð, §â ·é´¤ÇUÜè ·¤æ SßÂýðÚU·¤ˆß
(1) 0.67 H
ãñ Ñ
(2) 1.67 H
(1) 0.67 H
(3) 3H
(2) 1.67 H
(4) 6H
(3) 3H
(4) 6H
 Page 13 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
22. In the circuits (a) and (b) switches S1 and 22.
S2 are closed at t50 and are kept closed
for a long time. The variation of currents
in the two circuits for t ³ 0 are roughly
shown by (figures are schematic and not
drawn to scale) :
09
Îæð ÂçÚUÂÍæð´ (a) ÌÍæ (b) ×ð´ çSß¿ S1 ÌÍæ S2, t50
ÂÚU ՋΠ緤Øð ÁæÌð ãñ´ ¥æñÚU ÂØæüŒÌ ܐÕð â×Ø Ì·¤
ՋΠÚU¹ð ÁæÌð ãñ´, Ìæð t ³ 0 ·ð¤ çÜØð, Îæð ÂçÚUÂÍæð´ ×ð´
çßléÌ ÏæÚUæ¥æð´ ·ð¤ çß¿ÜÙ (ÂçÚUßÌüÙ) ·¤æð, ·¤æñÙâæ
»ý æ Ȥ çÙ·¤ÅU Ì × Îàææü Ì æ ãñ ? (¥æÚð U ¹ ·ð ¤ ßÜ
ÃØßSÍæˆ×·¤ ãñ´ ¥æñÚU S·ð¤Ü ·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚU Ùãè´ ãñ´)

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)
 Page 14 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 09
23. An electromagnetic wave travelling in the 23. x-çÎàææ ×ð´ ¿ÜÌè ãé§ü ç·¤âè çßléÌ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÌÚ´U» ·¤è
x-direction has frequency of 231014 Hz
¥æßëçžæ 231014 Hz ãñ ÌÍæ §â·¤æ çßléÌ ÿæð˜æ
and electric field amplitude of 27 Vm21.
From the options given below, which one 27 Vm21 ãñÐ Ìæð, çÎØð »Øð çِÙæ´ç·¤Ì çß·¤ËÂæð´ ×ð´
describes the magnetic field for this âð ·¤æñÙ âæ çß·¤ËÂ, §â ÌÚ´U» ·ð¤ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ ·¤æð
wave ? Âý·¤ÅU ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ?
(1) (1)
→ ∧
B ( x , t)5(331028 T) j → ∧
B ( x , t)5(331028 T) j

sin  2 p(1.531028 x2231014 t) sin  2 p(1.531028 x2231014 t)

   
(2) (2)
→ ∧
B ( x , t)5(931028 T) k → ∧
B ( x , t)5(931028 T) k
sin  2 p(1.531026 x2231014 t) sin  2 p(1.531026 x2231014 t)
   
(3) (3)
→ ∧
B ( x , t)5(931028 T) i → ∧
B ( x , t)5(931028 T) i
sin  2 p(1.531028 x2231014 t) sin  2 p(1.531028 x2231014 t)
   
(4) (4)
→ ∧
B ( x , t)5(931028 T) j → ∧
B ( x , t)5(931028 T) j

sin 1.531026 x2231014 t  sin 1.531026 x2231014 t 

   

You are asked to design a shaving mirror

¥æ·¤æð °·¤ àæðçß´» ÎÂü‡æ ÕÙæÙð ·¤æð ·¤ãæ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ
24.
assuming that a person keeps it 10 cm from
24.
his face and views the magnified image of ØçÎ ·¤æð§ü ÃØç€Ì §â ÎÂü‡æ ·¤æð ¥ÂÙð ¿ðãÚðU âð 10 cm
the face at the closest comfortable distance ÎêÚU ÚU¹Ìæ ãñ ¥æñÚU ¿ðãÚðU ·ð¤ ¥æßçÏüÌ ÂýçÌçÕÕ ·¤æð,
of 25 cm. The radius of curvature of the âéçßÏæÁÙ·¤-ÎàæüÙ ·¤è çÙ·¤ÅUÌ× ÎêÚUè, 25 cm ÂÚU
mirror would then be :
Îð¹Ìæ ãñ Ìæð, ÎÂü‡æ ·¤è ß·ý¤Ìæ ç˜æ’Øæ ãæð»è Ñ
(1) 30 cm
(1) 30 cm
(2) 24 cm
(2) 24 cm
(3) 60 cm
(3) 60 cm
(4) 224 cm
(4) 224 cm
 Page 15 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
25. A parallel beam of electrons travelling in 25.
x-direction falls on a slit of width d (see
figure). If after passing the slit, an electron
acquires momentum py in the y-direction
then for a majority of electrons passing
through the slit (h is Planck’s constant) :
09
x-çÎàææ ×ð´ »çÌ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãé¥æ °·¤ â×æ‹ÌÚU §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ Âé´Á
d ¿æñÇæ¸ §ü ·¤è çÛæÚUè ÂÚU ¥æÂçÌÌ ãæðÌæ ãñ (¥æÚðU¹ Îðç¹Øð)Ð
ØçÎ §â çÛæÚUè âð çÙ·¤ÜÙð ·ð¤ Âà¿æÌ÷ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ,
y-çÎàææ ×ð´, py â´ßð» ÂýæŒÌ ·¤ÚU ÜðÌð ãñ´ Ìæð, çSÜÅU âð
»éÁÚUÙð ßæÜð ¥çÏ·¤æ´àæ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙæð´ ·ð¤ çÜØð (ØçÎ h
ŒÜæ´·¤ çÙØÌæ´·¤ ãñ) Ñ

(1) ?py?d ; h
(2) ?py?d>h (1) ?py?d ; h
(3) ?py?d<h (2) ?py?d>h
(4) ?py?d>>h (3) ?py?d<h
(4) ?py?d>>h
26. A telescope has an objective lens of focal
length 150 cm and an eyepiece of focal
length 5 cm. If a 50 m tall tower at a 26. ç·¤âè ÎêÚUÎàæü·¤ ·ð¤ ¥çÖÎëàØ·¤ ÌÍæ Ùðç˜æ·¤æ ·¤è Ȥæð·¤â
distance of 1 km is observed through this ÎêçÚUØæ¡ ·ý¤×àæÑ 150 cm ÌÍæ 5 cm ãñ´Ð ØçÎ 1 km
telescope in normal setting, the angle ÎêÚU çSÍÌ ç·¤âè 50 m ª¡¤¿ð ÅUæßÚU (×èÙæÚU) ·¤æð, âæ×æ‹Ø
formed by the image of the tower is u, then
u is close to : çߋØæâ ×ð´, ÎêÚUÎàæü·¤ âð Îð¹Ùð ÂÚU, ÅUæßÚU ·ð¤ ÂýçÌçՐÕ
(1) 18 mæÚUæ ÕÙæØæ »Øæ ·¤æð‡æ, u ãæð Ìæð, u ·¤æ ×æÙ ãæð»æ
(2) 158
ֻܻ Ñ
(3) 308 (1) 18

(4) 608 (2) 158

(3) 308

27. de-Broglie wavelength of an electron (4) 608

accelerated by a voltage of 50 V is close to
(?e?51.6310 219 C, m e59.1310 231 kg,
27. 50 V ßæðËÅUÌæ mæÚUæ ˆßçÚUÌ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ ·¤è Îð-Õýæò‚Üè
h56.6310234 Js) :
ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü ·¤æ çÙ·¤ÅUÌ× ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) 0.5 Å
(?e?51.6310 219 C, m e59.1310 231 kg,
(2) 1.2 Å h56.6310234 Js)
(3) 1.7 Å (1) 0.5 Å
(4) 2.4 Å (2) 1.2 Å
(3) 1.7 Å
(4) 2.4 Å
 Page 16 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
28. If one were to apply Bohr model to a 28.
particle of mass ‘m’ and charge ‘q’ moving
in a plane under the influence of a
magnetic field ‘B’, the energy of the
charged particle in the nth level will be :
09
ØçÎ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ ‘B’ ·ð¤ ÂýÖæß ×ð´, â×ÌÜ ×ð´ »çÌ
·¤ÚUÌð ãé°, ‘m’ ÎýÃØ×æÙ ÌÍæ ‘q’ ¥æßðàæ ·ð¤ ·¤‡æ ÂÚU,
ÕæðÚU ×æòÇUÜ Üæ»ê ç·¤Øæ (ÂýØæð» ×ð´ ÜæØæ) ÁæØ Ìæð,
¥æßðçàæÌ ·¤‡æ ·¤è n ßè´ SÌÚU ×ð´ ª¤Áæü ãæð»è Ñ

(1) (1)
 hqB   hqB 
n  n 
 2 pm   2 pm 

(2) (2)
 hqB   hqB 
n  n 
 4 pm   4 pm 

(3) (3)
 hqB   hqB 
n  n 
 8 pm   8 pm 

(4) (4)
 hqB   hqB 
n  n 
 pm   pm 

29. In an unbiased n-p junction electrons 29. ç·¤âè ¥-ÕæØçâÌ n-p â´çÏ ×ð´ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ n - ÿæð˜æ âð
diffuse from n - region to p - region
p - ÿæð˜æ ·¤æð çßâçÚUÌ ãæðÌð ãñ´ €Øæð´ç·¤ Ñ
because :
(1) holes in p - region attract them (1) p- ÿæð˜æ ×ð´ çÀUÎý (ãæðÜ) ©‹ã𴠥淤çáüÌ ·¤ÚUÌð
(2) electrons travel across the junction ãñд
due to potential difference (2) §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ çßÖßæ‹ÌÚU ·ð¤ ·¤æÚU‡æ â´çÏ ·ð¤ ÂæÚU
(3) electron concentration in n - region ¿Üð ÁæÌð ãñ´Ð
is more as compared to that in
p - region (3) n- ÿæð˜æ ×ð´ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙæð´ ·¤è âæ´ÎýÌæ p- ÿæð˜æ âð
(4) only electrons move from n to p ¥çÏ·¤ ãæðÌè ãñÐ
region and not the vice - versa
(4) §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ ·ð¤ßÜ n âð p ÿæð˜æ ·¤æð ÁæÌð ã´ñ §â·ð¤
çßÂÚèUÌ (p âð n ·¤æð ) Ùãè´Ð
 Page 17 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
30. Diameter of a steel ball is measured using 30.
a Vernier callipers which has divisions of
0.1 cm on its main scale (MS) and 10
divisions of its vernier scale (VS) match 9
divisions on the main scale. Three such
measurements for a ball are given as :
S.No. MS (cm) VS divisions
09
SÅUèÜ ·¤è °·¤ »æðÜè ·¤æ ÃØæâ °·¤ °ðâð ßçÙüØÚU
·ñ¤ÜèÂâü âð ÙæÂæ ÁæÌæ ãñ çÁâ·ð¤ ×éØ Âñ×æÙð ·¤æ °·¤
Öæ» (MSD) 0.1 cm ãñ, ÌÍæ §â×ð´ ßçÙüØÚ Âñ×æÙðU
(VS) ·ð¤ 10 Öæ», ×éØ Âñ×æÙð ·ð¤ 9 Öæ»æð´ ·ð¤ ÕÚUæÕÚU
ãñ´Ð »æðÜè ·ð¤ ÃØæâ ·ð¤ çÜØð ÌèÙ ÂæÆ÷UØæ´·¤ (ÚUèçÇU´»)
Øãæ¡ çÎØð »Øð ãñ´ Ñ

¼Î€½ §Ö¼Ë¾Õ Ä̾὿U §Ö¼Ë¾Õ œÕ‰

1. 0.5 8
2. 0.5 4 œâ‰¼Ë™œ‰
3. 0.5 6 œ‰Í ¼Ë§ cm »Ë 
If the zero error is 20.03 cm, then mean
1. 0.5 8

corrected diameter is :
2. 0.5 4

(1) 0.56 cm
3. 0.5 6

(2) 0.59 cm ØçÎ ßçÙüØÚU ·ñ¤ÜèÂâü ·¤è àæê‹Ø ˜æéçÅU 20.03 cm, ãñ
(3) 0.53 cm Ìæð, ÃØæâ ·¤æ ×æŠØ â´àææðçÏÌ ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
(4) 0.52 cm
(1) 0.56 cm
(2) 0.59 cm
-o0o-
(3) 0.53 cm
(4) 0.52 cm

-o0o-
 Page 1 Chemistry : English & Hindi 09
1. A sample of a hydrate of barium chloride 1. 61 g ÕðçÚUØ× €ÜæðÚUæ§ÇU ·ð¤ ãæ§ÇþðUÅU ·ð¤ °·¤ Ù×êÙð ·¤æð
weighing 61 g was heated until all the
»ÚU× ·¤ÚU·ð¤ âé¹æØæ »ØæÐ âê¹ð Ù×êÙð ·¤æ ßÁÙ 52 g
water of hydration is removed. The dried
sample weighed 52 g. The formula of the ÍæÐ ãæ§ÇþðUÅU Üß‡æ ·¤æ âê˜æ ãñ Ñ (ÂÚU×æ‡æé ÎýÃØ×æÙ,
hydrated salt is : (atomic mass, Ba5137 amu, Cl535.5 amu)
Ba5137 amu, Cl535.5 amu) (1) BaCl2.H2O
(1) BaCl2.H2O (2) BaCl2.2H2O
(2) BaCl2.2H2O (3) BaCl2.3H2O
(3) BaCl2.3H2O (4) BaCl2.4H2O
(4) BaCl2.4H2O
2. çِ٠×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âè »ñâæ𴠷𤠥‡æé»çÌ·¤ çâhæ´Ì ·¤è
2. Which of the following is not an ¥ßÏæÚU‡ææ Ùãè´ ãñ?
assumption of the kinetic theory of gases ?
(1) A gas consists of many identical
(1) °·¤ »ñâ ÕãéÌ âæÚðU â×M¤Â ·¤‡ææð´ âð ÕÙÌè ãñ
particles which are in continual Áæð Ü»æÌæÚU »çÌ·¤ ¥ßSÍæ ×ð´ ÚUãÌð ãñ´Ð
motion. (2) »ñ⠷𤠷¤‡ææð´ ·¤æ ¥æØÌÙ Ù»‡Ø ãñÐ
(2) Gas particles have negligible volume.
(3) ©“æ ÎæÕ ÂÚU »ñâ ·¤‡ææð´ ·¤æ â´ÂèÇUÙ ·¤çÆUÙ ãñÐ
(3) At high pressure, gas particles are
difficult to compress. (4) »ñ⠷𤠷¤‡ææð´ ·ð¤ ×ŠØ â´ƒæ^ Âê‡æüÌÑ ÂýˆØæSÍ
(4) Collisions of gas particles are ãæðÌð ãñ´Ð
perfectly elastic.

3. ×éØ €ßæ´ÅU× â´Øæ n56 ·ð¤ çÜ° §Üð€ÅþUæòÙæð´ ·ð¤ ÖÚUÙð

If the principal quantum number n56, the
3.
·¤æ âãè ·ý¤× ãñ Ñ
correct sequence of filling of electrons will
be : (1) ns®np®(n21)d®(n22)f
(1) ns®np®(n21)d®(n22)f (2) ns®(n22)f®(n21)d®np
(2) ns®(n22)f®(n21)d®np (3) ns®(n21)d®(n22)f®np
(3) ns®(n21)d®(n22)f®np (4) ns®(n22)f®np®(n21)d
(4) ns®(n22)f®np®(n21)d
 Page 2 Chemistry : English & Hindi 09
4. After understanding the assertion and 4. ¥çÖ·¤ÍÙ ¥æñÚU Ì·ü¤ ·¤æð â×Ûæ·¤ÚU âãè çß·¤Ë ¿éçÙ°Ð
reason, choose the correct option.
¥çÖ·¤ÍÙ : ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ·ð¤ ¥æÕ´Ïè ¥æç‡ß·¤ ·¤ÿæ·¤
Assertion : In the bonding molecular
orbital (MO) of H2, electron ×ð´ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ ƒæÙˆß ÙæçÖ·¤æð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿
density is increased between Õɸæ ãé¥æ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ
the nuclei.
Ì·ü¤ : ¥æÕ´Ïè ¥æç‡ß·¤ ·¤ÿæ·¤ cA1cB ãñ
The bonding MO is cA1c B,
Áæð â´ØæðÁè §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ ÌÚ´U»æð´ ·¤æ çßÙæàæè
Reason :
which shows destructive
interference of the combining ÃØçÌ·¤ÚU‡æ ÎàææüÌæ ãñÐ
electron waves. (1) ¥çÖ·¤ÍÙ ß Ì·ü¤ ÎæðÙæð´ âãè ãñ´ ¥æñÚU Ì·ü¤
(1) Assertion and reason are correct and ¥çÖ·¤ÍÙ ·¤æ âãè SÂcÅUè·¤ÚU‡æ ãñÐ
reason is the correct explanation for
the assertion. (2) ¥çÖ·¤ÍÙ ß Ì·ü¤ ÎæðÙæð´ âãè ãñ´ ×»ÚU Ì·ü¤
(2) Assertion and reason are correct, but ¥çÖ·¤ÍÙ ·¤æ âãè SÂcÅUè·¤ÚU‡æ Ùãè´ ãñÐ
reason is not the correct explanation
for the assertion.
(3) ¥çÖ·¤ÍÙ âãè ãñ ×»ÚU Ì·ü¤ »ÜÌ ãñÐ
(3) Assertion is correct, reason is (4) ¥çÖ·¤ÍÙ »ÜÌ ãñ ¥æñÚU Ì·ü¤ âãè ãñÐ
incorrect.
(4) Assertion is incorrect, reason is 5. ç×Íð Ù ÌÍæ §Íð Ù ·ð ¤ ·¤‡æè·¤ÚU ‡ æ ª¤c×æ ·ý ¤ ×àæÑ
correct.
360 kJ/mol ÌÍæ 620 kJ/mol ãñ´Ð C - C ¥æÕ´Ï
·¤æð ÌæðǸÙð ·¤è ÿæ×Ìæ ÚU¹Ùð ßæÜè Âý·¤æàæ ·¤è ÎèƒæüÌ×
The heat of atomization of methane and
ÌÚ´U»ÎñŠØü ãæð»è (¥æßæð»æÎýæð ⴁØæ 56.0231023,
5.
ethane are 360 kJ/mol and 620 kJ/mol,
respectively. The longest wavelength of h56.62310234 J s) :
light capable of breaking the C - C bond is (1) 1.493103 nm
(Avogadro number56.0231023, (2) 2.483103 nm
h56.62310234 J s) :
(3) 2.483104 nm
(1) 1.493103 nm
(4) 1.493104 nm
(2) 2.483103 nm
(3) 2.483104 nm
6. 208C ÂÚU °·¤ çßÜØÙ ×ð´ 1.5 ×æðÜ Õð‹ÁèÙ ¥æñÚU
(4) 1.493104 nm
3.5 ×æðÜ ÅUæðÜé§Ù ãñ´Ð ¥»ÚU §â Ìæ ÂÚU àæéh Õð‹ÁèÙ
¥æñÚU àæéh ÅUæðÜé§Ù ·ð¤ ßæc ÎæÕ ·ý¤×àæÑ 74.7 torr
6. A solution at 208C is composed of 1.5 mol
of benzene and 3.5 mol of toluene. If the ¥æñÚU 22.3 torr ãñ´, ÌÕ çßÜØÙ ·¤æ ·é¤Ü ßæc ÎæÕ
vapour pressure of pure benzene and pure ¥æñÚU Õð‹ÁèÙ ·¤æ ×æðÜ ¥´àæ §â·ð¤ âæØ ×ð´ ·ý¤×àæÑ ãñ´ Ñ
toluene at this temperature are 74.7 torr
and 22.3 torr, respectively, then the total
(1) 35.0 torr ¥æñÚU 0.480
vapour pressure of the solution and the (2) 38.0 torr ¥æñÚU 0.589
benzene mole fraction in equilibrium with
it will be, respectively : (3) 30.5 torr ¥æñÚU 0.389
(1) 35.0 torr and 0.480 (4) 35.8 torr ¥æñÚU 0.280
(2) 38.0 torr and 0.589
(3) 30.5 torr and 0.389
(4) 35.8 torr and 0.280
 Page 3 Chemistry : English & Hindi 09
7. Gaseous N2O 4 dissociates into gaseous 7. »ñâèØ N2O4 »ñâèØ NO2 ×ð´ çِ٠¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·ð¤
NO2 according to the reaction
¥ÙéâæÚU çßØæðçÁÌ ãæðÌæ ãñ Ñ
N2O4(g) ì 2NO2(g)
N2O4(g) ì 2NO2(g)
At 300 K and 1 atm pressure, the degree
of dissociation of N2O4 is 0.2. If one mole 300 K ¥æñÚU 1 atm ÎæÕ ÂÚU N2O4 ·¤è çßØæðÁÙ
of N2O4 gas is contained in a vessel, then ×æ˜ææ 0.2 ãñÐ ¥»ÚU °·¤ ×æðÜ N2O4 »ñâ ·¤æð °·¤ Âæ˜æ
the density of the equilibrium mixture is : ×ð´ çÜØæ Áæ° ÌÕ âæØ çןæ‡æ ·¤æ ƒæÙˆß ãñ Ñ
(1) 1.56 g/L (1) 1.56 g/L
(2) 3.11 g/L (2) 3.11 g/L
(3) 4.56 g/L (3) 4.56 g/L
(4) 6.22 g/L (4) 6.22 g/L

A variable, opposite external potential

çßÖß ·ð¤ âðÜ
8.
1.1 V
(Eext) is applied to the cell
8.
Zn|Zn21 (1 M) ?? Cu21 (1 M) | Cu, of Zn|Zn21 (1 M) ?? Cu21 (1 M) | Cu, ×ð´ °·¤
potential 1.1 V. When Eext < 1.1 V and ÂçÚUßÌèü çßÂÚUèÌ Õæs çßÖß (Eext) Ü»æØæ »ØæÐ
Eext > 1.1 V, respectively electrons flow
from : ÁÕ Eext < 1.1 V ÌÍæ Eext > 1.1 V, ãæð ÌÕ
(1) anode to cathode and cathode to §Üð€ÅþUæòÙæð´ ·¤æ Âýßæã ãæð»æ Ñ
anode (1) °ÙæðÇU âð ·ñ¤ÍæðÇU ÌÍæ ·ñ¤ÍæðÇU âð °ÙæðÇU
(2) cathode to anode and anode to
cathode
(2) ·ñ¤ÍæðÇU âð °ÙæðÇU ÌÍæ °ÙæðÇU âð ·ñ¤ÍæðÇU
(3) cathode to anode in both cases (3) ÎæðÙæð´ çSÍçÌ ×ð´ ·ñ¤ÍæðÇU âð °ÙæðÇU
(4) anode to cathode in both cases (4) ÎæðÙæð´ çSÍçÌ ×ð´ °ÙæðÇU âð ·ñ¤ÍæðÇU

9. The reaction 9. çِ٠¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ °·¤ ÂýÍ× ·¤æðÅUè ÕÜ»çÌ·¤è ãñ Ñ

2N2O5(g) ® 4NO2(g)1O2(g) 2N2O5(g) ® 4NO2(g)1O2(g)
follows first order kinetics. The pressure
of a vessel containing only N 2 O 5 was 30 min ×ð´, °·¤ Âæ˜æ çÁâ×ð´ ·ð¤ßÜ N2O5 Íæ, ©â·¤æ
found to increase from 50 mm Hg to ÎæÕ 50 mm Hg âð 87.5 mm Hg Õɸ »ØæÐ
87.5 mm Hg in 30 min. The pressure 60 min ·ð¤ ÕæÎ Øã ÎæÕ ãæð»æ (×æÙ ÜèçÁ° ·¤è ÌæÂ
exerted by the gases after 60 min. will be çÙØÌ ãñ) :
(Assume temperature remains constant) :
(1) 106.25 mm Hg
(1) 106.25 mm Hg
(2) 116.25 mm Hg
(2) 116.25 mm Hg
(3) 125 mm Hg
(3) 125 mm Hg
(4) 150 mm Hg
(4) 150 mm Hg
 Page 4 Chemistry : English & Hindi 09
10. The following statements relate to the 10. çِ٠·¤ÍÙ ÆUæðâ ÂëcÆU ÂÚU »ñâèØ ¥çÏàææðá‡æ ·ð¤ â´ÎÖü
adsorption of gases on a solid surface.
×ð´ ãñ´Ð §Ù×ð´ âð »ÜÌ ·¤ÍÙ ãñ Ñ
Identify the incorrect statement among
them : (1) ¥çÏàææðá‡æ ·¤è °‹ÍñËÂè «¤‡ææˆ×·¤ ãñÐ
(1) Enthalpy of adsorption is negative (2) ¥çÏàææðá‡æ ·¤è °‹ÅþUæòÂè «¤‡ææˆ×·¤ ãñÐ
(2) Entropy of adsorption is negative
(3) ¥çÏàææðá‡æ ÂÚU, ÂëcÆU ÂÚU ¥ßçàæcÅU ÕÜ ÕɸÌð
(3) On adsorption, the residual forces on
the surface are increased
ãñд
(4) On adsorption decrease in surface (4) ¥çÏàææðá‡æ ÂÚU, ÂëcÆU ª¤Áæü ·¤æ Oæâ ª¤c×æ ·ð¤
energy appears as heat M¤Â ×ð´ Âý·¤ÅU ãæðÌæ ãñÐ

11. In the long form of the periodic table, the 11. ¥æßÌü âæÚU‡æè ·ð¤ Îèƒæü SßM¤Â ×ð´, ¥»ÚU â´ØæðÁè ·¤æðàæ
valence shell electronic configuration of
5s2 5p4 corresponds to the element present §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ çߋØæâ 5s2 5p4 ãñ ÌÕ ßã Ìˆß ©ÂçSÍÌ
in : ãñ Ñ
(1) Group 16 and period 6 (1) ß»ü 16 ¥æñÚU ¥æßÌü 6 ×ð´
(2) Group 17 and period 5
(2) ß»ü 17 ¥æñÚU ¥æßÌü 5 ×ð´
(3) Group 16 and period 5
(3) ß»ü 16 ¥æñÚU ¥æßÌü 5 ×ð´
(4) Group 17 and period 6
(4) ß»ü 17 ¥æñÚU ¥æßÌü 6 ×ð´
12. In the isolation of metals, calcination
process usually results in : 12. ÏæÌé¥æð´ ·ð¤ çÙc·¤áü‡æ ×ð´, çÙSÌæÂÙ âð ¥·¤âÚU ÕÙÌð
(1) metal carbonate ãñ´ Ñ
(2) metal oxide
(1) ÏæÌé ·¤æÕæðüÙðÅU
(3) metal sulphide
(2) ÏæÌé ¥æò€âæ§ÇU
(4) metal hydroxide
(3) ÏæÌé âËȤæ§ÇU
13. Permanent hardness in water cannot be (4) ÏæÌé ãæ§ÇþUæò€âæ§ÇU
cured by :
(1) Boiling
13. ÁÜ ·¤è SÍæØè ·¤ÆUæðÚUÌæ ·¤æð §â Âýç·ý¤Øæ âð ÆUè·¤ Ùãè´
(2) Ion exchange method
ç·¤Øæ Áæ â·¤Ìæ ãñ Ñ
(3) Calgon’s method
(4) Treatment with washing soda
(1) ©ÕæÜÙæ
(2) ¥æØÙ çßçÙ×Ø çßçÏ
(3) ·ð¤Ü»æòÙ çßçÏ
(4) ÏæßÙ âæðÇUæ ·ð¤ ©Â¿æÚU âð
 Page 5 Chemistry : English & Hindi 09
14. The correct order of thermal stability of 14. ãæ§ÇþUæò€âæ§ÇUæð´ ·¤æ ÌæÂèØ SÍæçØˆß ·¤æ âãè ·ý¤× ãñ Ñ
hydroxides is :
(1) Ba(OH)2 < Sr(OH) 2 < Ca(OH) 2 <
(1) Ba(OH)2 < Sr(OH) 2 < Ca(OH) 2 < Mg(OH)2
Mg(OH)2
(2) Ba(OH)2 < Ca(OH) 2 < Sr(OH) 2 <
(2) Ba(OH)2 < Ca(OH) 2 < Sr(OH) 2 < Mg(OH)2
Mg(OH)2
(3) Mg(OH)2 < Ca(OH) 2 < Sr(OH) 2 <
(3) Mg(OH)2 < Ca(OH) 2 < Sr(OH)2 < Ba(OH)2
Ba(OH)2
(4) Mg(OH)2 < Sr(OH)2 < Ca(OH) 2 <
(4) Mg(OH)2 < Sr(OH) 2 < Ca(OH) 2 < Ba(OH)2
Ba(OH)2

15. âÕâð ·¤× â´Øæ ·ð¤ ¥æ€âè¥Ü ÕÙæÌæ ãñ Ñ

15. The least number of oxyacids are formed
by : (1) Ùæ§ÅþUæðÁÙ
(1) Nitrogen (2) âËȤÚU
(2) Sulphur
(3) Üé¥æðÚUèÙ
(3) Fluorine
(4) Chlorine
(4) €ÜæðÚUèÙ

16. The geometry of XeOF4 by VSEPR theory 16. ßè.°â.§ü.Âè.¥æÚU. (VSEPR) çâhæ´Ì ·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚU,
is : XeOF4 ·¤è ’Øæç×çÌ ãñ Ñ
(1) trigonal bipyramidal (1) ç˜æ·¤æð‡æèØ çmçÂÚUæç×ÇUè
(2) square pyramidal
(2) ß»ü çÂÚUæç×ÇUè
(3) octahedral
(4) pentagonal planar (3) ¥cÅUȤܷ¤èØ
(4) ´¿·¤æð‡æèØ â×ÌÜèØ
17. An aqueous solution of a salt X turns blood
red on treatment with SCN2 and blue on
17. Ü߇æ X ·¤æ ÁÜèØ çßÜØÙ SCN2 ·ð¤ âæÍ ¹êÙè
treatment with K4[Fe(CN)6]. X also gives
a positive chromyl chloride test. The salt ÜæÜ Ú´U» ¥æñÚU K4[Fe(CN)6] ·ð¤ âæÍ ÙèÜæ Ú´U» ÎðÌæ
X is : ãñÐ X °·¤ â·¤æÚUæˆ×·¤ ·ý¤æðç×Ü €ÜæðÚUæ§ÇU ÂÚUèÿæ‡æ Öè
(1) CuCl2 ÎðÌæ ãñÐ Ü߇æ X ãñ Ñ
(2) FeCl3 (1) CuCl2
(3) Cu(NO3)2 (2) FeCl3
(4) Fe(NO3)3 (3) Cu(NO3)2
(4) Fe(NO3)3
18. Which molecule/ion among the following
cannot act as a ligand in complex
compounds ?
18. çِ٠×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âæ ¥‡æé/¥æØÙ â´·é¤Ü Øæñç»·¤æð´ ×ð´
(1) CO
çÜ»ñ‹ÇU Ùãè´ ãæð â·¤Ìæ ãñ?
(2) CN2 (1) CO

(3) CH4 (2) CN2

(4) Br2 (3) CH4

(4) Br2
 Page 6 Chemistry : English & Hindi 09
19. The correct statement on the isomerism 19. çِ٠ⴷé¤Ü ¥æØÙæð´ âð âÕç‹ÏÌ â×æßØßÌæ ÂÚU
associated with the following complex
âãè ·¤ÍÙ ãñ´
ions,
(a) [Ni(H2O)5NH3]21,
(a) [Ni(H2O)5NH3]21,
(b) [Ni(H2O)4(NH3)2]21 and (b) [Ni(H2O)4(NH3)2]21 ¥æñÚU
(c) [Ni(H2O)3(NH3)3]21 is : (c) [Ni(H2O)3(NH3)3]21 :
(1) (a) and (b) show only geometrical (1) (a) ¥æñÚU (b) ·ð¤ßÜ ’Øæç×ÌèØ â×æßØßÌæ
isomerism ÎàææüÌð ãñ´Ð
(2) (a) and (b) show geometrical and
(2) (a) ¥æñÚU (b) ’Øæç×ÌèØ ¥æñÚU Ïýé߇æ â×æßØßÌæ
optical isomerism
(3) (b) and (c) show geometrical and
ÎàææüÌð ãñ´Ð
optical isomerism (3) (b) ¥æñÚU (c) ’Øæç×ÌèØ ¥æñÚU Ïýé߇æ â×æßØßÌæ
(4) (b) and (c) show only geometrical ÎàææüÌð ãñ´Ð
isomerism
(4) (b) ¥æñÚU (c) ·ð¤ßÜ ’Øæç×ÌèØ â×æßØßÌæ
ÎàææüÌð ãñ´Ð
20. Photochemical smog consists of excessive
amount of X, in addition to aldehydes,
ketones, peroxy acetyl nitrile (PAN), and 20. Âý·¤æàæ ÚUæâæØçÙ·¤ Ïê× ·¤æðãÚðU ×ð´ °ðçËÇUãæ§ÇU, ·¤èÅUæðÙ,
so forth. X is :
ÂðÚUæ€ð âè °çâÅUæ§Ü Ùæ§ÅþUæ§Ü (PAN) §ˆØæçÎ ·ð¤ ¥Üæßæ
(1) CH4 ¥çÏ·¤ ×æ˜ææ ×ð´ X Öè ãæðÌæ ãñ, X ãñ Ñ
(2) CO
(1) CH4
(3) CO 2
(2) CO
(4) O3
(3) CO 2
(4) O3
21. 1.4 g of an organic compound was digested
according to Kjeldahl’s method and the
ammonia evolved was absorbed in 60 mL 21. 1.4 g ·¤æÕüçÙ·¤ Øæñç»·¤ ·¤æð ·ñ¤ËÇUæÜ çßçÏ ·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚU
of M/10 H 2 SO 4 solution. The excess Âæç¿Ì ç·¤Øæ »Øæ ÌÍæ çÙ·¤Üð ¥×æðçÙØæ ·¤æð 60 mL,
sulphuric acid required 20 mL of M/10
M/10, H2SO4 çßÜØÙ ×ð´ ¥ßàææðçáÌ ç·¤Øæ »ØæÐ
NaOH solution for neutralization. The
percentage of nitrogen in the compound ¥çÌçÚU€Ì âˍØêçÚU·¤ ¥Ü ·¤æð ©ÎæâèÙ ·¤ÚUÙð ·ð¤
is : çÜ°, 20 mL, M/10, NaOH Ü»æÐ §â Øæñç»·¤
(1) 3 ×ð´ Ùæ§ÅþUæðÁÙ ·¤è ÂýçÌàæÌÌæ ãñ Ñ
(2) 5 (1) 3
(3) 10 (2) 5
(4) 24 (3) 10
(4) 24
22. The optically inactive compound from the
following is :
22. çِ٠×ð´ âð Ïýéß‡æ ¥ƒæê‡æü·¤ Øæñç»·¤ ãñ Ñ
(1) 2 - chloropropanal
(2) 2 - chloropentane (1) 2 - €ÜæðÚUæðÂýæðÂðÙÜ

(3) 2 - chlorobutane (2) 2 - €ÜæðÚUæðÂð‹ÅðUÙ

(4) 2 - chloro - 2 - methylbutane (3) 2 - €ÜæðÚUæðŽØêÅðUÙ
(4) 2 - €ÜæðÚUæð - 2 - ×ðçÍ܎ØêÅðUÙ
 Page 7 Chemistry : English & Hindi 09

23.

23.

A is :
A ãñ Ñ
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

24. A compound A with molecular formula

C 10 H 13 Cl gives a white precipitate on
adding silver nitrate solution. A on
reacting with alcoholic KOH gives
compound B as the main product. B on
ozonolysis gives C and D. C gives
Cannizaro reaction but not aldol
condensation. D gives aldol condensation
but not Cannizaro reaction. A is :
(1)
24. Øæñç»·¤ A çÁâ·¤æ ¥‡æéâê˜æ C10H13Cl ãñ, çâËßÚU
Ùæ§ÅþðUÅU çßÜØÙ ç×ÜæÙð ÂÚU àßðÌ ¥ßÿæð ÎðÌæ ãñÐ
A °ðË·¤æðãæòçÜ·¤ KOH ·ð¤ âæÍ ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤ÚUÙð
ÂÚU ×é  Ø M¤Â âð Øæñ ç »·¤ B Îð Ì æ ãñ Ð B ·¤æ
¥æðÁæðÙ-¥ÂƒæÅUÙ ·¤ÚUÙð ÂÚU Øæñç»·¤ C ÌÍæ D ÂýæŒÌ
ãæðÌð ãñ´Ð C ·ñ¤çÙÁæÚUæð ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ÎðÌæ ãñ, ÂÚU‹Ìé °ðËÇUæÜ
ⴃæÙÙ Ùãè´ ÎðÌæÐ D °ðËÇUæÜ â´ƒæÙÙ ÎðÌæ ãñ, ÂÚU‹Ìé
·ñ¤çÙÁæÚUæð ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ Ùãè´ ÎðÌæÐ A ãñ Ñ

(1)
(2)

(3) C6H52CH22CH22CH22CH22Cl (2)

(3) C6H52CH22CH22CH22CH22Cl
(4)

(4)
 Page 8 Chemistry : English & Hindi 09
25. In the presence of a small amount of 25. ȤæòSȤæðÚUâ ·¤è ·¤× ×æ˜ææ ·¤è ©ÂçSÍçÌ ×ð´ °ÜèÈð¤çÅU·¤
phosphorous, aliphatic carboxylic acids
·¤æÕæðüç€âçÜ·¤ ¥Ü €ÜæðÚUèÙ ¥æñÚU Õýæð×èÙ ·ð¤ âæÍ
react with chlorine or bromine to yield a
compound in which a - hydrogen has been ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤ÚUÌð ãé° ¥ÂÙð a - ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ·¤æð ãñÜæðÁÙ
replaced by halogen. This reaction is ×ð´ ÂçÚUßçÌüÌ ·¤ÚUÌð ãñ´Ð §â ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤æ Ùæ× ãñ Ñ
known as :
(1) ßæðËȤ-ç·¤àÙÚU ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ
(1) Wolff - Kischner reaction
(2) Etard reaction
(2) §üÅUæÇüU ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ
(3) Hell - Volhard - Zelinsky reaction (3) ãðÜ-ȤæðÜæÇüU-ÁðçÜ´S·¤è ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ
(4) Rosenmund reaction (4) ÚUæðÁðÙ×é´ÇU ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ

26. Arrange the following amines in the order 26. çِ٠¥×èÙæð´ ·¤æð ÿææÚU·¤Ìæ ·ð¤ ÕɸÌð ·ý¤× ×ð´ ܻ槰Ð
of increasing basicity.

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)
 Page 9 Chemistry : English & Hindi 09
27. Match the polymers in column-A with 27. ·¤æòÜ×-A ×ð´ çΰ »° ÕãéÜ·¤æð´ ·¤æð ·¤æòÜ×-B ×ð´ ©Ù·ð¤
their main uses in column-B and choose
Âý×é¹ ©ÂØæð» ·ð¤ âæÍ âé×ðçÜÌ ·¤Úð´U ÌÍæ âãè çß·¤ËÂ
the correct answer :
¿éÙð´ Ñ
Column - A Column - B
(A) Polystyrene (i) Paints and œ‰Ë×Á¼ - A œ‰Ë×Á¼ - B
lacquers (A) §ËÁÍSªUˌ¿U; (i) §âÁ§Õ ŠËÖ¿U §âÁËäË
(B) Glyptal (ii) Rain coats
º¾Ë¾Õ ¼Õ™
ÌóÁåªUÁ º¿UÇË̱½Ë† º¾Ë¾Õ ¼Õ™
(C) Polyvinyl (iii) Manufacture of
(B) (ii)

§Ë×ÁÍÄˌ̾Á ̞ÁËÖ¾Õ º¾Ë¾Õ ¼Õ™

Chloride toys
(D) Bakelite (iv) Computer discs (C) (iii)

(1) (A) - (ii), (B) - (i), (C) - (iii), (D) - (iv) þÁËÕ¿Uˌ¬U
(2) (A) - (iii), (B) - (i), (C) - (ii), (D) - (iv) (D) ºÖœ‰Õ ÁˌªU (iv) œ™‰å½ÏªU¿U ̬USœ‰
(3) (A) - (ii), (B) - (iv), (C) - (iii), (D) - (i) º¾Ë¾Õ ¼Õ™
(4) (A) - (iii), (B) - (iv), (C) - (ii), (D) - (i)
(1) (A) - (ii), (B) - (i), (C) - (iii), (D) - (iv)
(2) (A) - (iii), (B) - (i), (C) - (ii), (D) - (iv)
28. Complete hydrolysis of starch gives : (3) (A) - (ii), (B) - (iv), (C) - (iii), (D) - (i)
(1) glucose and fructose in equimolar (4) (A) - (iii), (B) - (iv), (C) - (ii), (D) - (i)
amounts
(2) galactose and fructose in equimolar 28. SÅUæ¿ü ·ð¤ Âê‡æü ÁÜ ¥ÂƒæÅUÙ âð ç×ÜÌæ ãñ Ñ
amounts (1) ‚Üê·¤æðâ ¥æñÚU Èý餀ÅUæðâ ·¤è â××æðÜ ×æ˜ææ
(3) glucose only (2) »ñÜð€ÅUæðâ ¥æñÚU Èý餀ÅUæðâ ·¤è â××æðÜ ×æ˜ææ
(4) glucose and galactose in equimolar (3) ·ð¤ßÜ ‚Üê·¤æðâ
amounts
(4) ‚Üê·¤æðâ ¥æñÚU »ñÜð€ÅUæðâ ·¤è â××æðÜ ×æ˜ææ

is used as :
29.
29. ·¤æ ÂýØæð» ç·¤â M¤Â ×ð´ ãæðÌæ ãñ?

(1) Insecticide (1) ·¤èÅUÙæàæ·¤

(2) Antihistamine (2) ÂýçÌçãSÅñUç×Ù
(3) Analgesic (3) ÂèǸæãæÚUè
(4) Antacid (4) ÂýçÌ¥Ü

30. The cation that will not be precipitated by 30. ßã ÏÙæØÙ Áæð ÌÙé HCl ·ð¤ ©ÂçSÍçÌ ×ð´ H2S âð
H2S in the presence of dil HCl is :
¥ßÿæðçÂÌ Ùãè´ ãæðÌæ ãñ, ßã ãñ Ñ
(1) Cu 21 (1) Cu 21
(2) Pb21 (2) Pb21
(3) As31 (3) As31
(4) Co21
(4) Co21
-oOo- -oOo-
 Page 1 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 09
1. In a certain town, 25% of the families own 1. ç·¤âè àæãÚU ×ð´, 25% ÂçÚUßæÚUæð´ ·ð¤ Âæâ ȤæðÙ ãñ ÌÍæ
a phone and 15% own a car ; 65% families
15% ·ð¤ Âæâ ·¤æÚU ãñ ; 65% ÂçÚUßæÚUæð´ ·ð¤ Âæâ Ù Ìæð
own neither a phone nor a car and 2,000
families own both a car and a phone. ȤæðÙ ãñ ¥æñÚU Ù ãè ·¤æÚU ãñ, ÌÍæ 2,000 ÂçÚUßæÚUæð´ ·ð¤ Âæâ
Consider the following three statements : ȤæðÙ ÌÍæ ·¤æÚU ÎæðÙæð´ ãñ´Ð çِ٠ÌèÙ ·¤ÍÙæð´ ÂÚU çß¿æÚU
(a) 5% families own both a car and a ·¤èçÁ° Ñ
phone.
(a) 5% ÂçÚUßæÚUæð´ ·ð¤ Âæâ ·¤æÚU ÌÍæ ȤæðÙ ÎæðÙæð´ ãñ´Ð
(b) 35% families own either a car or a
phone. (b) 35% ÂçÚUßæÚUæð´ ·ð¤ Âæâ Øæ Ìæð ·¤æÚU ãñ Øæ ȤæðÙ
(c) 40,000 families live in the town. ãñÐ
Then, (c) àæãÚU ×ð´ 40,000 ÂçÚUßæÚU ÚUãÌð ãñ´Ð
(1) Only (a) and (b) are correct. Ìæð,
(2) Only (a) and (c) are correct.
(1) ·ð¤ßÜ (a) ÌÍæ (b) âãè ãñ´Ð
(3) Only (b) and (c) are correct.
(4) All (a), (b) and (c) are correct.
(2) ·ð¤ßÜ (a) ÌÍæ (c) âãè ãñ´Ð
(3) ·ð¤ßÜ (b) ÌÍæ (c) âãè ãñ´Ð
2. The largest value of r for which the region (4) (a), (b) ÌÍæ (c) âÖè âãè ãñ´Ð
represented by the set {v e C/?v242i?[r}
is contained in the region represented by
the set {z e C/?z21?[?z1i?}, is equal to : 2. r ·¤æ ßã ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ×æÙ çÁâ·ð¤ çÜ° â×é“æØ
{v e C/?v242i?[r} mæÚUæ çÙÏæüçÚUÌ ÿæð˜æ, â×é“æØ
(1)
{z e C/?z21?[?z1i?} mæÚU æ çÙÏæü ç ÚU Ì ÿæð ˜ æ ×ð ´
17

(2) 2 2 âç×çÜÌ ãñ, ãñ Ñ

(3) (1)
3
2 17
2
(2)
(4)
2 2
5
2
(3)
2 3
2
2
If 213i is one of the roots of the equation
(4)
3. 5
2x329x21kx21350, k e R, then the real
2
2
root of this equation :
(1) does not exist.
3. ØçÎ 213i, â×è·¤ÚU‡æ 2x329x21kx21350,
k e R ·¤æ °·¤ ×êÜ ãñ, Ìæð §â â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ·¤æ ßæSÌçß·¤
(2) exists and is equal to .
1
2 ×êÜ Ñ
(3) exists and is equal to 2
1
. (1) çßl×æÙ Ùãè´ ãñÐ
2
(4) exists and is equal to 1. (2) çßl×æÙ ãñ ÌÍæ ·ð¤ ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñÐ
1
2

(3) çßl×æÙ ãñ ÌÍæ 2 1

·ð¤ ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñÐ
2
(4) çßl×æÙ ãñ ÌÍæ 1 ·ð¤ ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñÐ
 Page 2 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 09
4. The least value of the product xyz for 4. »é‡æÙÈ¤Ü xyz ·¤æ ß㠋ØêÙÌ× ×êËØ çÁâ·ð¤ çÜ°
x 1 1 x 1 1
which the determinant 1 y 1 is âæÚUç‡æ·¤ 1 y 1 «¤‡æðÌÚU ãñ, ãñ Ñ
1 1 z 1 1 z
non-negative, is :
(1)
(1)
22 2

(2)
22 2

(2)
216 2
(3) 28
2 16 2
(3) 28
(4) 21
(4) 21

ØçÎ A 5  ãñ, Ìæð çِ٠×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ-âæ °·¤

 0 21 
 0 21  5.
If A 5   , then which one of the

5. 1 0 
·¤ÍÙ âãè Ùãè´ ãñ?
1 0 
following statements is not correct ?
(1) A42I5A21I
(1) A42I5A21I
(2) A32I5A(A2I)
(2) A32I5A(A2I)
(3) A21I5A(A22I)
(3) A21I5A(A22I)
(4) A31I5A(A32I)
(4) A31I5A(A32I)

6. The number of ways of selecting 15 teams 6. 15 ÂéL¤áæð´ ÌÍæ 15 ×çãÜæ¥æð´ ×ð´ âð °ðâè 15 ÅUè×ð´,
from 15 men and 15 women, such that çÁÙ×ð´ ÂýˆØð·¤ ×ð´ °·¤ ÂéL¤á ÌÍæ °·¤ ×çãÜæ ãæð, ¿éÙÙð
each team consists of a man and a woman, ·ð¤ ÌÚUè·¤æð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ ãñ Ñ
is :
(1) 1120
(1) 1120
(2) 1240
(2) 1240
(3) 1880
(3) 1880
(4) 1960
(4) 1960

7. Let the sum of the first three terms of an

7. ×æÙæ °·¤ â×æ´ÌÚU ŸæðÉ¸è ·ð¤ ÂýÍ× ÌèÙ ÂÎæð´ ·¤æ Øæð» 39
A.P. be 39 and the sum of its last four terms ãñ ÌÍæ §â·ð¤ ¥´çÌ× ¿æÚU ÂÎæð´ ·¤æ Øæð» 178 ãñÐ ØçÎ
be 178. If the first term of this A.P. is 10, §â â×æ´ÌÚU ŸæðÉ¸è ·¤æ ÂýÍ× ÂÎ 10 ãñ, Ìæð §â â×æ´ÌÚU
then the median of the A.P. is : ŸæðÉ¸è ·¤æ ×æŠØ·¤ ãñ Ñ
(1) 26.5
(1) 26.5
(2) 28
(2) 28
(3) 29.5
(3) 29.5
(4) 31
(4) 31
 Page 3 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 09
8. If the coefficients of the three successive 8. ØçÎ (11x)n ·ð¤ çmÂÎ çßSÌæÚU ×ð´ ÌèÙ ·ý¤ç×·¤ ÂÎæð´
terms in the binomial expansion of (11x)n
·ð¤ »é‡ææ´·¤æð´ ×ð´ 1 : 7 : 42 ·¤æ ¥ÙéÂæÌ ãñ, Ìæð §Ù ×ð´ âð
are in the ratio 1 : 7 : 42, then the first of
these terms in the expansion is : çßSÌæÚU ×ð´ ÂãÜæ ÂÎ ãñ Ñ
(1) 6 th (1) ÀUÆUæ
(2) 7 th (2) âæÌßæ´
(3) 8 th
(3) ¥æÆUßæ´
(4) 9 th
(4) Ùæñßæ´

The value of (r 1 2)(r 2 3) is equal to :

30
9. ∑
·¤æ ×æÙ ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
30
r516 9. ∑ (r 1 2)(r 2 3)
(1) 7785
r516

(2) 7780 (1) 7785

(3) 7775 (2) 7780

(4) 7770 (3) 7775

(4) 7770

is equal to :
2
e x 2 cosx
10.
e x 2 cosx
ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
2
lim
10.
x →0 2
sin x lim
(1) 3
x →0 sin 2 x
(1) 3
(2)
3
(2)
2 3
2
(3)
5
(3)
4 5
(4) 2
4
(4) 2

11. The distance, from the origin, of the

normal to the curve, x52 cost 1 2t sint, 11. ß·ý¤ x52 cost12t sint, y52 sint22t cost

y 5 2 sint22t cost at t 5 , is : ÂÚU ÂÚU ¹è´¿ð »° ¥çÖÜ´Õ ·¤è ×êÜ çÕ´Îé âð

p p
t5
4 4
(1) 4 ÎêÚUè ãñ Ñ
(2) 2 2 (1) 4
(3) 2 (2) 2 2

(4) 2 (3) 2

(4) 2
 Page 4 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 09
12. If Rolle’s theorem holds for the function 12. ØçΠȤÜÙ f (x)52x31bx21cx, x e [21, 1]
f (x)52x 3 1bx 2 1cx, x e [21, 1], at the
·ð¤ çÜ° çÕ´Îé 1
ÂÚU ÚUæðÜð ·¤æ Âý×ðØ Üæ»ê ãæðÌæ ãñ,
point x 5 , then 2b1c equals :
1 x5
2
2
Ìæð 2b1c ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) 1
(1) 1
(2) 21
(2) 21
(3) 2
(3) 2
(4) 23
(4) 23

13. Let the tangents drawn to the circle,

x21y2516 from the point P(0, h) meet the 13. ×æÙæ çÕ´Îé P(0, h) âð ßëžæ x21y2516 ÂÚU ¹è´¿è
x-axis at points A and B. If the area of »§ü SÂàæü ÚðU¹æ°¡ x-¥ÿæ ·¤æð çÕ´Îé¥æð´ A ÌÍæ B ÂÚU
DAPB is minimum, then h is equal to : ç×ÜÌè ãñ´Ð ØçÎ DAPB ·¤æ ÿæð˜æÈ¤Ü ‹ØêÙÌ× ãñ, Ìæð
(1) 4 3 h ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ

(2) 3 3 (1) 4 3

(3) 3 2 (2) 3 3

(4) 4 2 (3) 3 2

(4) 4 2

The integral is equal

dx
14. ∫ 3 5
(x 1 1) 4 (x 2 2) 4
â×æ·¤Ü ∫ ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
dx
14.
to :
3 5
(x 1 1) 4 (x 2 2) 4

 x 11 4
1

(1)  1C  x 11 4
1

 x 22  (1)  1C
4
 x 22 
4

 x 22 4
1

(2)  1C  x 22 4
1

 x 11  (2)  1C
4
 x 11 
4

4  x 11 4
1

(3) 2   1C 4  x 11 4
1

3  x 22  (3) 2   1C
3  x 22 

4  x 22 4
1

(4) 2   1C 4  x 22 4
1

3  x 11  (4) 2   1C
3  x 11 
 Page 5 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 09

For x > 0, let f ( x ) 5 ∫ dt . Then x>0 ·ð¤ çÜ° ×æÙæ ãñ, Ìæð
x x
log t log t
15. 15. f (x) 5 ∫ dt
11t 11t
1 1

f ( x ) 1 f   is equal to :
1 1
f (x) 1 f   ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
x x

(1) (1)
1 1
(log x )2 (log x )2
4 4

(2) (2)
1 1
(log x )2 (log x )2
2 2
(3) log x (3) log x

(4) (4)
1 1
log x 2 log x 2
4 4

16. The area (in square units) of the region 16. ß·ý¤æð´ y12x250 ÌÍæ y13x251 mæÚUæ ÂçÚUÕh ÿæð˜æ
bounded by the curves y12x 2 50 and
·¤æ ÿæð˜æÈ¤Ü (ß»ü §·¤æ§Øæð´ ×ð´) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
y13x251, is equal to :

(1)
3
(1)
3
5
5

(2)
3
(2)
3
4
4

(3)
1
(3)
1
3
3

(4)
4
(4)
4
3
3

17. If y(x) is the solution of the differential 17. ØçÎ y(x), ¥ß·¤Ü â×è·¤ÚU‡æ
equation ( x12) 5 x 2 14x29 , x ¹ 22 5 x 2 14x29 , x ¹ 22 ¥æñÚU
dy
dy ( x12)
dx
y(0)50, ·¤æ ãÜ ãñ, Ìæð y(24) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
dx
and y(0)50, then y(24) is equal to :
(1) 0 (1) 0
(2) 1 (2) 1
(3) 21 (3) 21
(4) 2 (4) 2
 Page 6 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 09

18. The points  0, 8  , (1, 3) and (82, 30) : 18. çÕ´Îé  0,  , (1, 3)
 8 ÌÍæ (82, 30) Ñ
 3  3
(1) form an obtuse angled triangle. (1) °·¤ ¥çÏ·¤·¤æð‡æ ç˜æÖéÁ ÕÙæÌð ãñ´Ð
(2) form an acute angled triangle.
(2) °·¤ ‹ØêÙ·¤æð‡æ ç˜æÖéÁ ÕÙæÌð ãñ´Ð
(3) form a right angled triangle.
(3) °·¤ â×·¤æð‡æ ç˜æÖéÁ ÕÙæÌð ãñ´Ð
(4) lie on a straight line.
(4) °·¤ âÚUÜ ÚðU¹æ ÂÚU çSÍÌ ãñ´Ð
19. Let L be the line passing through the point
P(1, 2) such that its intercepted segment 19. ×æÙæ L, çÕ´Îé P(1, 2) âð ãæð·¤ÚU ÁæÙð ßæÜè ßã ÚðU¹æ ãñ
between the co-ordinate axes is bisected
at P. If L1 is the line perpendicular to L
çÁâ·¤æ çÙÎðüàææ´·¤ ¥ÿææð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤ÅUæ ÚðU¹æ¹‡ÇU P ÂÚU
and passing through the point (22, 1), â×çmÖæçÁÌ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ ×æÙæ L1 ßã ÚðU¹æ ãñ Áæð L ÂÚU
then the point of intersection of L and L1 Ü´ÕßÌ ãñ ÌÍæ çÕ´Îé (22, 1) âð ãæð·¤ÚU ÁæÌè ãñ, Ìæð
is : L ÌÍæ L1 ·¤æ Âýç̑ÀðUÎÙ çÕ´Îé ãñ Ñ

(1)
 4 12 
(1)
 ,   4 12 
5 5   , 
5 5 

(2)
 11 29 
(2)
 ,   11 29 
 20 10   , 
 20 10 

(3)
 3 17 
(3)
 ,   3 17 
 10 5   , 
 10 5 

(4)
 3 23 
(4)
 ,   3 23 
 5 10   , 
 5 10 

20. If y13x50 is the equation of a chord of

the circle, x 2 1y 2 230x50, then the 20. ØçÎ y13x50, ßëžæ x21y2230x50 ·¤è °·¤
equation of the circle with this chord as Áèßæ ·¤æ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ãñ, Ìæð ©â ßëžæ, çÁâ·¤æ ÃØæâ,
diameter is : Øã Áèßæ ãñ, ·¤æ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ãñ Ñ
(1) x 21y 2 13x19y50 (1) x 21y 2 13x19y50
(2) x 21y 2 23x19y50 (2) x 21y 2 23x19y50
(3) x 21y 2 23x29y50 (3) x 21y 2 23x29y50
(4) x 21y 2 13x29y50 (4) x 21y 2 13x29y50
 Page 7 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 09
21. If the tangent to the conic, y265x 2 at 21. ØçÎ àææ´·¤ß y265x2 ·ð¤ çÕ´Îé (2, 10) ÂÚU ¹è´¿è
(2, 10) touches the circle,
»§ü SÂàæü Úð U ¹ æ ßë ž æ x21y218x22y5k ·¤æð
x21y218x22y5k (for some fixed k) at a
point (a, b) ; then (a, b) is : (ç·¤âè çÙçà¿Ì k ·ð¤ çÜ°) çÕ´Îé (a, b) ÂÚU SÂàæü
·¤ÚUÌè ãñ, Ìæð (a, b) ãñ Ñ
(1)
 6 10 
2 , 
(1)
 17 17   6 10 
2 , 
 17 17 
(2)  8 2 
2 , 
(2) 
 17 17  8 2 
2 , 
 17 17 
(3)
 4 1 
2 , 
(3)
 17 17   4 1 
2 , 
 17 17 
(4)
 7 6 
2 , 
(4)
 17 17   7 6 
2 , 
 17 17 

22. An ellipse passes through the foci of the

hyperbola, 9x 224y 2 536 and its major 22. °·¤ Îèƒæü ß ë ž æ, ¥çÌÂÚU ß ÜØ 9x224y2536 ·ð ¤
and minor axes lie along the transverse and
conjugate axes of the hyperbola
ÙæçÖ·ð´¤Îýæð´ âð ãæð·¤ÚU ÁæÌæ ãñ ÌÍæ §â·ð¤ Îèƒæü ÌÍæ ܃æé
respectively. If the product of eccentricities ¥ÿæ ·ý¤×àæÑ ¥çÌÂÚUßÜØ ·ð¤ ¥ÙéÂýSÍ ÌÍæ â´Øé‚×è
¥ÿææð́ ·ð¤ ¥ÙéçÎàæ ãñ́Ð ØçÎ §Ù Îæð àææ´·¤ßæð́ ·¤è ©ˆ·ð́¤ÎýÌæ¥æð́
of the two conics is, then which of the
1

·¤æ »é‡æÙÈ¤Ü ãñ, Ìæð çِ٠×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ-âæ çÕ´Îé

2 1
following points does not lie on the
ellipse ?
2
Îèƒæüßëžæ ÂÚU çSÍÌ Ùãè´ ãñ?
(1) ( ) (1) ( )
13 , 0
13 , 0

(2)
 39 
(2)
 , 3  39 
 2   , 3
 2 

(3)
1 3
(3)
 13 ,  1 3
2 2   13 , 
2 2 

(4)
 13 
(4)
 , 6  13 
 2   , 6
 2 

23. If the points (1, 1, l) and (23, 0, 1) are

equidistant from the plane, 23. ØçÎ çÕ´ Î é (1, 1, l) ÌÍæ (23, 0, 1) â×ÌÜ
3x14y212z11350, then l satisfies the 3x14y212z11350 âð â×ÎêÚUSÍ ãñ´, Ìæð l, çِÙ
equation : â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ·¤æð â´ÌécÅU ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ Ñ
(1) 3x 2 210x1750 (1) 3x 2 210x1750
(2) 3x 2 110x1750 (2) 3x 2 110x1750
(3) 3x 2 110x21350 (3) 3x 2 110x21350
(4) 3x 2 210x12150 (4) 3x 2 210x12150
 Page 8 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 09
24. If the shortest distance between the lines
ØçÎ ÚðU¹æ¥æð´
x 21 y 11
5 , (a ¹21)
z
x 21 y 11 24. 5
5 , (a ¹21) and a 21
z
5 1
a 21 1 ÌÍæ x1y1z115052x2y1z13 ·ð ¤ Õè¿
x1y1z115052x2y1z13 is , then ·¤è ‹ØêÙÌ× ÎêÚUè ãñ, Ìæð a ·¤æ °·¤ ×æÙ ãñ Ñ
1 1
3
a value of a is :
3

(1)
16
2
(1)
16
2 19
19
(2)
19
2
(2)
19
2 16
16
(3)
32
(3)
32
19
19
(4)
19
(4)
19
32
32

×æÙæ ÌÍæ °ð â ð ×æ˜æ·¤ âçÎàæ ãñ ´ ç·¤

→ →
25.
Let a and b be two unit vectors such
→ →
25.
a b
5 3 ãñÐ ØçÎ
that 5 3 . If
→ → →
(→ →
) ãñ, Ìæð ÕÚUæÕÚU
c 5 a 1 2 b 1 3 a 3 b , then is
c 5 a 12 b 13 a 3 b
→ → →
( → →
)
equal to :
ãñ Ñ
(1) 55 (1) 55

(2) 51 (2) 51

(3) 43 (3) 43

(4) 37 (4) 37

26. Let X be a set containing 10 elements and
P(X) be its power set. If A and B are picked
up at random from P(X), with
replacement, then the probability that A
and B have equal number of elements, is :
26. ×æÙæ °·¤ â×é“æØ ãñ çÁâ×ð´ 10 ¥ßØß ãñ´ ÌÍæ
X
P(X) §â·¤æ ƒææÌ â×é“æØ ãñÐ ØçÎ P(X) âð A ÌÍæ
B ØæÎë‘ÀUØæ, ÂýçÌSÍæÂÙæ âçãÌ, çÜ° »° ãñ´, Ìæð
A ÌÍæ B ×ð´ ÕÚUæÕÚU ¥ßØßæð´ ·ð¤ ãæðÙð ·¤è ÂýæçØ·¤Ìæ ãñ Ñ

(1)
20
(1)
20 C10
C10
2 10 2 10

( 2 10 2 1 ) ( 210 2 1 )
(2) (2)
2 20 2 20

( 2 10 2 1 ) ( 210 2 1 )
(3) (3)
2 10 2 10

(4)
20
(4)
20 C10
C10
2 20 2 20
 Page 9 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 09
27. A factory is operating in two shifts, day 27. °·¤ Èñ¤€ÅþUè Îæð ÂæçÚUØæð´, çÎÙ ÌÍæ ÚUæÌ, ×ð´ ¿ÜÌè ãñ
and night, with 70 and 30 workers
çÁÙ×ð´ ·ý¤×àæÑ 70 ÌÍæ 30 ·¤æ×»æÚU ·¤æØü ·¤ÚUÌð ãñ´Ð
respectively. If per day mean wage of the
day shift workers is ` 54 and per day mean ØçÎ çÎÙ ·¤è ÂæÚUè ·ð¤ ·¤æ×»æÚUæð´ ·¤æ ×æŠØ ÂýçÌçÎÙ
wage of all the workers is ` 60, then per ßðÌÙ ` 54 ãñ ÌÍæ âÖè ·¤æ×»æÚUæð´ ·¤æ ×æŠØ ÂýçÌçÎÙ
day mean wage of the night shift workers ßðÌÙ ` 60 ãñ, Ìæð ÚUæÌ ×ð´ ·¤æØü ·¤ÚUÙð ßæÜð ·¤æ×»æÚUæð´ ·¤æ
(in `) is :
×æŠØ ÂýçÌçÎÙ ßðÌÙ (` ×ð´) ãñ Ñ
(1) 66
(1) 66
(2) 69
(2) 69
(3) 74
(3) 74
(4) 75
(4) 75

28. In a DABC, 5 2 1 3 and ÐC5608.

°·¤ ç˜æÖéÁ ABC ×ð´, ÌÍæ ÐC5608
a
28.
a
b 521 3
Then the ordered pair (ÐA, ÐB) is equal
b
to : ãñ, Ìæð ·ý¤ç×Ì Øé‚× (ÐA, ÐB) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) (158, 1058) (1) (158, 1058)
(2) (1058, 158) (2) (1058, 158)
(3) (458, 758) (3) (458, 758)
(4) (758, 458) (4) (758, 458)

29. If f ( x ) 5 2tan21 x 1 sin21 

 2x
 , x > 1,
 29. ØçÎ f ( x ) 5 2tan21 x 1 sin21  , x > 1

2x
 1 1 x2   11x  2

then f (5) is equal to : ãñ, Ìæð f (5) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ

p
(1) (1)
p
2 2
(2) p (2) p
(3) 4 tan21(5) (3) 4 tan21(5)

(4) tan21  (4)

 65   65 
 tan21  
 156   156 

30. The contrapositive of the statement 30. ·¤ÍÙ Ñ

“If it is raining, then I will not come”, is :
ÒÒØçÎ ßáæü ãæð ÚUãè ãñ, Ìæð ×ñ´ Ùãè´ ¥æª´¤»æÓÓ
(1) If I will come, then it is not raining.
(2) If I will not come, then it is raining. ·¤æ ÂýçÌÏÙæˆ×·¤ ·¤ÍÙ ãñ Ñ
(3) If I will not come, then it is not (1) ØçÎ ×ñ´ ¥æª´¤»æ, Ìæð ßáæü Ùãè´ ãæð ÚUãè ãñÐ
raining.
(2) ØçÎ ×ñ´ Ùãè´ ¥æª´¤»æ, Ìæð ßáæü ãæð ÚUãè ãñÐ
(4) If I will come, then it is raining.
(3) ØçÎ ×ñ´ Ùãè´ ¥æª´¤»æ, Ìæð ßáæü Ùãè´ ãæð ÚUãè ãñÐ
-o0o- (4) ØçÎ ×ñ´ ¥æª´¤»æ, Ìæð ßáæü ãæð ÚUãè ãñÐ

-o0o-
JEE Main 2015 Answer key Paper 1 Online (April 10, 2015) Code-10
 JEE Main 2015 Question Paper 1 Online (April 11, 2015)

Page 1 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 01

1. If electronic charge e, electron mass m,
speed of light in vacuum c and Planck’s
constant h are taken as fundamental
quantities, the permeability of vacuum m0
can be expressed in units of :
1. ØçÎ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ-¥æßðàæ e, §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ-ÎýÃØ×æÙ m, çÙßæüÌ÷
×ð´ Âý·¤æàæ ·ð¤ ßð» c ÌÍæ ŒÜæ¡·¤ çSÍÚUæ´·¤ h, ·¤æð ×êÜ
ÚUæçàæØæ¡ ×æÙ çÜØæ ÁæØ Ìæð, çÙßæüÌ÷ ·¤è ¿éÕ·¤àæèÜÌæ
m0 ·¤æ ×æ˜æ·¤ ãæð»æ Ñ

 hc   hc 
(1)   (1)  
 me 2   me 2 

 h   h 
(2)   (2)  
 me 2   me 2 

 h   h 
(3)  2 (3)  2
 ce   ce 

 mc2   mc2 
(4)  2  (4)  2 
 he   he 

→ →
2. A vector A is rotated by a small angle Du 2. ç·¤âè âçÎàæ A ·¤æð Du ÚðUçÇUØÙ (Du<<1) ƒæé×æ ÎðÙð
→ →
radians (Du<<1) to get a new vector B . ÂÚU °·¤ ÙØæ âçÎàæ B ÂýæŒÌ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ §â ¥ßSÍæ ×ð´
→ → → →
In that case B 2 A is : ãæð»æ Ñ
B2A
(1) 0
(1) àæê‹Ø
→  Du2 
A  12  →  Du 2 
(2)  2  A  12 
 (2)  2
 
→
A Du →
(3) A Du
(3)
→ →
B Du 2 A → →
(4) B Du 2 A
(4)
 Page 2 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
3. A large number (n) of identical beads, each 3.
of mass m and radius r are strung on a
thin smooth rigid horizontal rod of length
L (L>>r) and are at rest at random
positions. The rod is mounted between
two rigid supports (see figure). If one of
the beads is now given a speed v, the
average force experienced by each support
after a long time is (assume all collisions
are elastic) :
01
°·¤ ÂÌÜè ç¿·¤Ùè ÿæñçÌÁ ÀUǸ ÂÚU ·¤§ü (n) âßüâ×
×ç‡æ·¤æØð´ (ÕèÇU) çÂÚUæð§ü »§ü ãñ´ Áæð ÀUǸ ÂÚU ¥çÙØç×Ì
ÌÍæ çßÚUæ× ¥ßSÍæ ×ð´ ãñ´Ð ÂýˆØð·¤ ÕèÇU ·¤æ ÎýÃØ×æÙ
m ÌÍæ ç˜æ’Øæ r ãñ ¥æñÚU ÀUǸ ·¤è Ü´Õæ§ü L ãñ (L>>r)Ð
Øã ÀUǸ Îæð ÅðU·¤æð´ (¥æÏæÚUæð´) ÂÚU, ¥æÚðU¹ ×ð´ ÎàææüØð »Øð
¥ÙéâæÚU çÅU·¤è ãñÐ ØçÎ °·¤ ÕèÇU ·¤æð v ßð» ÂýÎæÙ
ç·¤Øæ ÁæØ Ìæð, °·¤ ܐÕð â×Ø ·ð¤ Âà¿æÌ÷ ÂýˆØð·¤
ÅðU·¤ (¥æÏæÚU) ÂÚU Ü»Ùð ßæÜð ¥æñâÌ ÕÜ ·¤æ ×æÙ
ãæð»æ (ØçÎ âÖè ÅU€·¤Úð´U ÂýˆØæSÍ ãñ´) Ñ

mv2
(1)
L 2 nr mv2
(1)
2 L 2 nr
mv
(2)
L 2 2nr mv 2
(2)
L 2 2nr
mv 2
(3)
2(L 2 nr) mv 2
(3)
(4) zero 2(L 2 nr)

(4) àæê‹Ø
4. A particle is moving in a circle of radius r
under the action of a force F5ar2 which
is directed towards centre of the circle. 4. ç·¤âè ÕÜ F5ar2 ·ð¤ ·¤æÚU‡æ, °·¤ ·¤‡æ r ç˜æ’Øæ ·ð¤
Total mechanical energy (kinetic ßëžæ ×ð´ »çÌ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñÐ ÕÜ ·¤è çÎàææ ßëžæ ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý ·¤è
energy1potential energy) of the particle
¥æðÚU ãñÐ ØçÎ, r50 ·ð¤ çÜØð çSÍçÌÁ ª¤Áæü ·¤æð àæê‹Ø
is (take potential energy50 for r50) :
×æÙæ ÁæØ Ìæð, §â ·¤‡æ ·¤è ·é¤Ü Øæ´ç˜æ·¤ ª¤Áæü (»çÌÁ
(1) ar3
ª¤Áæü1çSÍçÌÁ ª¤Áæü) ãæð»è Ñ
1
(2) ar3 (1) ar3
2
1
4 (2) ar3
(3) ar 3 2
3
4
5 (3) ar 3
(4) ar3 3
6
5
(4) ar3
6
 Page 3 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 01
5. A uniform thin rod AB of length L has 5. L ܐÕæ§ü ÌÍæ °·¤â×æÙ ÂÌÜè ÀUǸ AB, ·¤æ ÚñUç¹·¤
bx bx
linear mass density m(x)5 a 1 , where ÎýÃØ×æÙ ƒæÙˆß m(x)5 a 1 ãñ, Áãæ¡ x ·¤æð ÀUǸ
L L
x is measured from A. If the CM of the
·ð¤ çâÚðU A âð ×æÂæ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ ØçÎ §â ÀUǸ ·¤æ ÎýÃØ×æÙ-
 7 
rod lies at a distance of  L  from A,  7 
 12  ·ð¤‹Îý ÀUǸ ·ð¤ çâÚðU A âð  L
 12 
ÎêÚUè ÂÚU ãñ Ìæð,
then a and b are related as :
a ÌÍæ b ·ð¤ Õè¿ â´Õ´Ï ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) a5b
(1) a5b
(2) a52b
(2) a52b
(3) 2a5b
(3) 2a5b
(4) 3a52b
(4) 3a52b

6. A particle of mass 2 kg is on a smooth

horizontal table and moves in a circular 6. 2 kg ÎýÃØ×æÙ ·¤æ °·¤ ·¤‡æ, ç·¤âè ç¿·¤Ùð ÿæñçÌÁ
path of radius 0.6 m. The height of the ×ðÁ ÂÚU çSÍÌ ãñ ÌÍæ 0.6 m ç˜æ’Øæ ·ð¤ ßëžææ·¤æÚU ÂÍ
table from the ground is 0.8 m. If the
angular speed of the particle is 12 rad s21,
ÂÚU »çÌ ·¤ÚU ÚUãæ ãñÐ Öê-ÌÜ âð ×ðÁ ·¤è ª¡¤¿æ§ü 0.8 m
the magnitude of its angular momentum ãñÐ ØçÎ ·¤‡æ ·¤è ·¤æð‡æèØ ¿æÜ 12 rad s21 ãæð Ìæð,
about a point on the ground right under ßëžæ ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý ·ð¤ ÆUè·¤ Ùè¿ð Öê-ÌÜ ÂÚU ç·¤âè çՋÎé ·ð¤
the centre of the circle is : ÂçÚUÌÑ, §â ·¤‡æ ·¤æ ·¤æð‡æèØ â´ßð» ·¤æ ÂçÚU×æ‡æ ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) 8.64 kg m2s21
(1) 8.64 kg m2s21
(2) 11.52 kg m2s21
(2) 11.52 kg m2s21
(3) 14.4 kg m2s21
(3) 14.4 kg m2s21
(4) 20.16 kg m2s21
(4) 20.16 kg m2s21
 Page 4 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
7. Which of the following most closely 7.
depicts the correct variation of the
gravitation potential V(r) due to a large
planet of radius R and uniform mass
density ? (figures are not drawn to scale)
01
çِÙæ´ç·¤Ì ¥æÜð¹æð´ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âæ ¥æÜð¹ (»ýæȤ), R
ç˜æ’Øæ ÌÍæ °·¤â×æÙ ÎýÃØ×æÙ ƒæÙˆß ßæÜð ç·¤âè ÕǸð
»ý ã ·ð ¤ »é L ¤ˆßèØ çßÖß V(r) ·ð ¤ âãè çß¿ÚU ‡ æ
(ÂçÚUßÌüÙ) ·¤æ âßæüçÏ·¤ çÙ·¤ÅU 翘æ‡æ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ?
(¥æÚðU¹ ÆUè·¤ Âñ×æÙð ·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚU Ùãè´ ãñ´)

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

8. A cylindrical block of wood

(density5650 kg m 23 ), of base area
30 cm2 and height 54 cm, floats in a liquid
8. Ü·¤Ç¸è ·ð¤ ç·¤âè ÕðÜÙæ·¤æÚU »éÅU·ð¤ (ŽÜæò·¤) ·¤è ܐÕæ§ü
of density 900 kg m 23 . The block is 54 cm, ÌÍæ ƒæÙˆß 650 kg m23 ãñÐ §â·ð¤ ¥æÏæÚU
depressed slightly and then released. The ·¤æ ÿæð˜æÈ¤Ü 30 cm2 ãñ, ¥æñÚU Øã 900 kg m23
time period of the resulting oscillations of ƒæÙˆß ßæÜð Îýß ×ð´ ÌñÚU ÚUãæ ãñ (ŒÜß×æÙ ãñ)Ð §â
the block would be equal to that of a simple
pendulum of length (nearly) : ŽÜæò·¤ ·¤æð ÍæðǸæ âæ Ùè¿ð ·¤è ¥æðÚU ÎÕæ·¤ÚU ÀUæðǸ çÎØæ
(1) 65 cm ÁæÌæ ãñÐ ÂçÚU‡ææ× SßM¤Â ©ˆÂóæ §â·ð¤ ÎæðÜÙæð´ ·¤æ
(2) 52 cm
¥æßÌü·¤æÜ, ç·¤â ܐÕæ§ü (ֻܻ) ·ð¤ âÚUÜ ÜæðÜ·¤
(3) 39 cm
·ð¤ ¥æßÌü·¤æÜ ·ð¤ ÕÚUæÕÚU ãæð»æ?
(1) 65 cm
(4) 26 cm
(2) 52 cm
(3) 39 cm
(4) 26 cm
 Page 5 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 01
9. A beaker contains a fluid of density 9. ç·¤âè Õè·¤ÚU ×ð´ ÚU¹ð °·¤ Îýß ·¤æ ƒæÙˆß r kg/m3,
r kg/m 3 , specific heat S J/kg8C and
çßçàæcÅUU ª¤c×æ S J/kg8C ÌÍæ àØæÙÌæ h ãñÐ Øã
viscosity h. The beaker is filled up to height
h. To estimate the rate of heat transfer Õè·¤ÚU h ª¤¡¿æ§ü Ì·¤ Îýß âð ÖÚUæ ãñÐ Õè·¤ÚU ·¤æð °·¤
• ÒãæòÅU ŒÜðÅUÓ ÂÚU ÚU¹Ùð ÂÚU, ©â×ð´ ÚU¹ð Îýß ·¤è âÕâð
per unit area (Q /A) by convection when
beaker is put on a hot plate, a student
ª¤ÂÚU ÌÍæ âÕâð Ùè¿ð ·¤è ÂÚUÌ ·ð¤ Õè¿ Ìæ ·¤æ ¥‹ÌÚU
proposes that it should depend on h, Du (8C ×ð´) ãæðÌæ ãñÐ °·¤ çßlæÍèü ·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚ, §â
¥ßSÍæ ×ð´ â´ßãÙ mæÚUæ ÂýçÌ §·¤æ§ü ÿæð˜æÈ¤Ü ª¤c×æ ·¤æ
 S Du   1 
  and   when Du (in 8C) is the SÍæÙæ‹ÌÚU‡æ, ¥Íæü Ì ÷
•
(Q /A) ·¤æ ×æÙ h,
 h  r g 
difference in the temperature between the  S Du   1 
bottom and top of the fluid. In that   ±²Ë   ÂÚU çÙÖüÚU ·¤ÚUÙæ ¿æçãØð, Ìæð,
•
 h  r g 
situation the correct option for (Q /A) •
is : (Q /A) ·ð¤ ×æÙ ·ð¤ çÜØð âãè çß·¤Ë ãæð»æ Ñ
S Du S Du
(1) h (1) h
h h

 S Du   1   S Du   1 
(2) h    (2) h   
 h  r g   h  r g 

S Du S Du
(3) (3)
hh hh

 S Du   1   S Du   1 
(4)     (4)    
 hh   r g   hh   r g 

10. An experiment takes 10 minutes to raise 10. ç·¤âè ÂýØæð» ×ð´ ç·¤âè ª¤c×·¤ (ãèÅUÚU) mæÚUæ °·¤â×æÙ
the temperature of water in a container ÎÚU ÂÚU ª¤c×æ ÎðÙð ÂÚU, °·¤ Âæ˜æ ×ð´ ÚU¹ð ÁÜ ·¤æ ÌæÂ
from 08C to 1008C and another 55 minutes
to convert it totally into steam by a heater 08C âð 1008C Ì·¤ ÕɸæÙð ·ð¤ çÜØð 10 ç×ÙÅU ·¤æ
supplying heat at a uniform rate. â×Ø Ü»Ìæ ãñÐ §âè Îýß ·¤æð Âê‡æüÌÑ ßæc ×ð´ M¤Âæ‹ÌçÚUÌ
Neglecting the specific heat of the container ·¤ÚUÙð ×ð´ 55 ç×ÙÅU ¥æñÚU Ü»Ìð ãñ´Ð Âæ˜æ ·¤è çßçàæcÅU
and taking specific heat of water to be
ª¤c×æ ·¤æð Ù»‡Ø ÌÍæ ÁÜ ·¤è çßçàæcÅUU ª¤c×æ ·¤æð
1 cal/g 8C , the heat of vapourization
according to this experiment will come out 1 cal/g 8C ÜðÌð ãé°, §â ÂýØæ𻠷𤠥ÙéâæÚU ßæcÂÙ
to be : ·¤è ª¤c×æ ·¤æ ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) 530 cal/g (1) 530 cal/g
(2) 540 cal/g (2) 540 cal/g
(3) 550 cal/g (3) 550 cal/g
(4) 560 cal/g (4) 560 cal/g
 Page 6 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 01
11. Using equipartition of energy, the specific 11. ª¤Áæü ·ð¤ â×çßÖæÁÙ ·ð¤ ©ÂØæð» âð, ·¤ÿæ-Ìæ ÂÚU,
heat (in J kg21 K21) of aluminium at room
°ðÜéç×çÙØ× ·¤è çßçàæcÅU ª¤c×æ (J kg21 K21) ·¤æ
temperature can be estimated to be (atomic
weight of aluminium527) ¥Ùé×æçÙÌ ×æÙ ãæð»æ, (°ðÜéç×çÙØ× ·¤æ ÂÚU×æ‡æé
(1) 25 ÖæÚU527)
(2) 410 (1) 25
(3) 925 (2) 410
(4) 1850 (3) 925
(4) 1850
12. A pendulum with time period of 1s is
losing energy due to damping. At certain 12. 1s ¥æßÌü·¤æÜ ·ð¤ ç·¤âè ÜæðÜ·¤ ·¤è ª¤Áæü ¥ß×´ÎÙ
time its energy is 45 J. If after completing
15 oscillations, its energy has become 15 J,
·ð¤ ·¤æÚU‡æ ÿæØ ãæð ÚUãè ãñÐ ç·¤âè ÿæ‡æ §â·¤è ª¤Áæü
its damping constant (in s21) is : 45 J ãñÐ ØçÎ 15 ÎæðÜÙ ÂêÚðU ·¤ÚUÙð ·ð¤ Âà¿æÌ÷ §â·¤è
ª¤Áæü 15 J ãæð ÁæÌè ãñ Ìæð, §â·ð¤ çÜØð ¥ß×´ÎÙ çSÍÚUæ´·¤
1
(1)
30
ln 3 ãñ (s21 ×ð´) Ñ
1 1
ln 3 (1) ln 3
(2) 30
15
(3) 2 1
(2) ln 3
15
1
(4) (3) 2
2
1
(4)
2
 Page 7 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
13. A source of sound emits sound waves at 13.
frequency f 0. It is moving towards an
observer with fixed speed vs(vs<v, where
v is the speed of sound in air). If the
observer were to move towards the source
with speed v0, one of the following two
graphs (A and B) will give the correct
variation of the frequency f heard by the
observer as v0 is changed.
01
ŠßçÙ ·ð¤ °·¤ dæðÌ âð f0 ¥æßëçžæ ·¤è ÌÚ´U»ð´ ©ˆâçÁüÌ
(©ˆÂóæ) ãæðÌè ãñ´Ð Øã dæðÌ ç·¤âè ŸææðÌæ ·¤è ¥æðÚU °·¤
çÙØÌ ¿æÜ vs âð ¿Ü ÚUãæ ãñ (vs< v, Áãæ¡ v ßæØé ×ð´
ŠßçÙ ·¤è ¿æÜ ãñ)Ð ØçÎ ŸææðÌæ v0 ¿æÜ âð dæðÌ ·¤è
¥æðÚU ¿ÜÙð Ü»ð, Ìæð v0 ×ð´ ÂçÚUßÌüÙ âð, ŸææðÌæ mæÚUæ âéÙè
»§ü ¥æßëçžæ ·ð¤ âãè çß¿ÚU‡æ (ÂçÚUßÌüÙ) ·¤æð çِÙæ´ç·¤Ì
»ýæȤ A Øæ B ×ð´ âð °·¤ »ýæȤ ÎàææüØð»æÐ

The variation of f with v0 is given correctly Ìæð, v0 ·ð¤ âæÍ f ·ð¤ çß¿ÚU‡æ (ÂçÚUßÌüÙ) ·¤æð âãè
by : ÎàææüÌæ ãñ Ñ
f0
(1) graph A with slope 5 f0
(v 2 vs ) (1) »ýæȤ A Âý߇æÌæ 5 ·ð¤ âæÍ
(v 2 vs )
f0
(2) graph A with slope 5 f0
(v 1 vs ) (2) »ýæȤ A Âý߇æÌæ 5 ·ð¤ âæÍ
(v 1 vs )
f0
(3) graph B with slope 5 f0
(v 2 vs ) (3) »ýæȤ B Âý߇æÌæ 5 ·ð¤ âæÍ
(v 2 vs )
f0
(4) graph B with slope 5 f0
(v 1 vs ) (4) »ýæȤ B Âý߇æÌæ 5 ·ð¤ âæÍ
(v 1 vs )
 Page 8 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
14. A wire, of length L(520 cm), is bent into 14.
a semi-circular arc. If the two equal halves,
of the arc, were each to be uniformly
charged with charges 6Q, [|Q|5103 e0
Coulomb where e0 is the permittivity (in
SI units) of free space] the net electric field
at the centre O of the semi-circular arc
would be :
01
L(520 cm) ܐÕæ§ü ·ð¤ °·¤ ÌæÚU ·¤æð °·¤ ¥Ïü ßëžææ·¤æÚU
¿æ ·ð¤ M¤Â ×ð´ ×æðǸ çÎØæ »Øæ ãñÐ ØçÎ §â ¿æ ·ð¤ Îæð
â×æÙ Öæ»æð´ ·¤æð 6Q ¥æßðàæ âð °·¤â×æÙ ¥æßðçàæÌ
·¤ÚU çÎØæ ÁæØ [|Q|5103 e0 ·ê¤Üæò× Áãæ¡ e0 (SI
×æ˜æ·¤ ×ð ´ ) ×é € Ì ¥æ·¤æàæ ·¤è çßlé Ì àæèÜÌæ
(ÂÚUæßñléÌæ´·¤) ãñ ], Ìæð, ¥Ïüßëžææ·¤æÚU ¿æ ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý O
ÂÚU ÙðÅU çßléÌ ÿæð˜æ ãæð»æ Ñ

∧
(1) (503103 N/C) j ∧
(1) (503103 N/C) j
∧
(2) (253103 N/C) i ∧
(2) (253103 N/C) i
∧
(3) (253103 N/C) j ∧
(3) (253103 N/C) j
∧
(4) (503103 N/C) i ∧
(4) (503103 N/C) i

15. An electric field

ç·¤âè SÍæÙ ÂÚU °·¤ çßléÌ ÿæð˜æ,
E 5 ( 25 i 1 30 j ) NC2
→ ∧ ∧ 15.
1 exists in a
region of space. If the potential at the
→
(
∧ ∧
)
E 5 25 i 1 30 j NC 1 , çßl×æÙ 2 ãñÐ ØçÎ
origin is taken to be zero then the potential ×êÜçՋÎé ÂÚU çßÖß ·¤æ ×æÙ àæê‹Ø ×æÙæ ÁæØ Ìæð,
at x52 m, y52 m is :
x52 m, y52 m ÂÚU çßÖß ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) 2130 J
(1) 2130 J
(2) 2120 J
(2) 2120 J
(3) 2140 J
(3) 2140 J
(4) 2110 J
(4) 2110 J
 Page 9 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 01
16. In figure is shown a system of four 16. Øãæ¡ ¥æÚðU¹ ×ð´ ¿æÚU â´ÏæçÚU˜ææ𴠷𤠰·¤ çÙ·¤æØ (Ì´˜æ)
capacitors connected across a 10 V battery.
·¤æð °·¤ 10 V ·¤è ÕñÅUÚUè âð ÁéǸæ ãé¥æ ÎàææüØæ »Øæ ãñÐ
Charge that will flow from switch S when
it is closed is : çSß¿ S ·¤æð Õ´Î ·¤ÚUÙð ÂÚU ©ââð ÂýßæçãÌ ¥æßðàæ ãæð»æ Ñ

(1) 5 mC from b to a (1) 5 mC, b âð a ·¤æð

(2) 20 mC from a to b (2) 20 mC, a âð b ·¤æð
(3) 5 mC from a to b
(3) 5 mC, a âð b ·¤æð
(4) zero
(4) àæê‹Ø
17. In the electric network shown, when no
current flows through the 4 V resistor in 17. ÎàææüØð »Øð ÂçÚUÂÍ ÁæÜ ×ð´, ÖéÁæ EB ·ð¤ ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ 4 V
the arm EB, the potential difference âð ØçÎ ·¤æð§ü ÏæÚUæ ÂýßæçãÌ Ùãè´ ãæð ÚUãè ãñ Ìæð, A ÌÍæ D
between the points A and D will be :
çՋÎé¥æð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿ çßÖßæ‹ÌÚU ãæð»æ Ñ

(1) 3V
(1) 3V
(2) 4V
(2) 4V
(3) 5V
(3) 5V
(4) 6V
(4) 6V
 Page 10 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 01
18. The value of the resistor, RS, needed in the 18. Øãæ¡ ÎàææüØð »Øð ÇUè.âè. (dc) ßæðËÅUÌæ çÙØ´˜æ·¤ ÂçÚUÂÍ
dc voltage regulator circuit shown here,
×ð´, ¥æßàØ·¤ ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ RS ·¤æ ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
equals :

(1) (Vi2VL)/n IL
(1) (Vi2VL)/n IL
(2) (Vi1VL)/n IL
(2) (Vi1VL)/n IL
(3) (Vi2VL)/(n11) IL
(3) (Vi2VL)/(n11) IL
(4) (Vi1VL)/(n11) IL
(4) (Vi1VL)/(n11) IL
 Page 11 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
19. Two long straight parallel wires, carrying 19.
(adjustable) currents I1 and I2, are kept at
a distance d apart. If the force ‘F’ between
the two wires is taken as ‘positive’ when
the wires repel each other and ‘negative’
when the wires attract each other, the
graph showing the dependence of ‘F’, on
the product I1I2, would be :
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
01
Îæð ܐÕð, âèÏð, â×æ‹ÌÚU ÌæÚUæð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤è ÎêÚUè d ãñÐ
§Ùâð I1 ÌÍæ I2 ÏæÚUæØð´ ÂýßæçãÌ ãæð ÚUãè ãñ´ (çÁÙ·ð¤ ×æÙ
â×æØæðçÁÌ ç·¤Øð Áæ â·¤Ìð ãñ´) ØçÎ §Ù ÌæÚUæð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿
ÂýçÌ·¤áü‡æ ãæðÙð ÂÚU §Ù·ð¤ Õè¿ ÕÜ ‘F’ ·¤æð ÒÏÙæˆ×·¤Ó
ÌÍæ §Ù ·ð¤ Õè¿ ¥æ·¤áü‡æ ãæðÙð ÂÚU ÕÜ F ·¤æ𠫤‡ææˆ×·¤
×æÙæ ÁæØ Ìæð, I1 ÌÍæ I2 ·ð¤ »é‡æÙÈ¤Ü (I1I2) ÂÚU ‘F’
·ð¤ çÙÖüÚU ãæðÙð ·¤æð ·¤æñÙ âæ »ýæȤ ÆUè·¤ (âãè) ÎàææüÌæ
ãñ?
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
 Page 12 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 01
20. A wire carrying current I is tied between 20. IÏæÚUæßæãè °·¤ ÌæÚU, P ÌÍæ Q çՋÎé¥æð´ ÂÚU Õ´Ïæ ãñ
points P and Q and is in the shape of a
¥æñÚU ¥ÂÙð ¥æâ-Âæâ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ B ·ð¤ ·¤æÚU‡æ (Áæð
circular arch of radius R due to a uniform
magnetic field B (perpendicular to the xxx mæÚUæ ÎàææüØæ »Øæ ãñ ¥æñÚU §â ÂëcÆ ·ð¤ ܐÕßÌ÷ ãñ)
plane of the paper, shown by xxx) in the R ç˜æ’Øæ ·ð¤ ßëžææ·¤æÚU ¿æ ·ð¤ M¤Â ×ð´ ¥æ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ
vicinity of the wire. If the wire subtends ØçÎ Øã ÌæÚU, ©â ßëžæ ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý ÂÚU çÁâ·¤æ Øã ¿æÂ
an angle 2u0 at the centre of the circle (of
which it forms an arch) then the tension
Öæ» ãñ, 2u0 ·¤æð‡æ ÕÙæÌæ ãñ Ìæð, ÌæÚU ×ð´ ÌÙæß ãæð»æ Ñ
in the wire is :

(1) IBR
(1) IBR IBR
(2) sinu0
IBR
(2) sinu0
IBR
(3) 2sinu0
IBR
(3) 2sinu0
IBRu0
(4) sinu0
IBRu0
(4) sinu0

21.
21. A short bar magnet is placed in the
magnetic meridian of the earth with north
pole pointing north. Neutral points are
found at a distance of 30 cm from the
magnet on the East - West line, drawn
through the middle point of the magnet.
The magnetic moment of the magnet in
Am2 is close to :
ç·¤âè ÀUæðÅðU âð δÇU ¿éÕ·¤ ·¤æð Âë‰ßè ·ð¤ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ
·ð¤ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ØæØæðžæÚU ×ð´ §â Âý·¤æÚU ÚU¹æ »Øæ ãñ ç·¤
©â·¤æ ©žæÚU Ïýéß, ©žæÚU ·¤è ¥æðÚU ãñÐ §â·ð¤ ·¤æÚU‡æ
¿éÕ·¤ ·ð¤ ׊ØçՋÎé âð Âêßü-Âçà¿× çÎàææ ×𴠹贿è
»§ü âÚUÜ ÚðU¹æ ÂÚU, ©ÎæâèÙ çՋÎé ÂýæŒÌ ãæðÌð ãñ´, çÁÙ·¤è
¿éÕ·¤ âð ÎêÚUè 30 cm ãñÐ Ìæð, ¿éÕ·¤ ·¤æ ¿éÕ·¤èØ
¥æƒæê‡æü (Am2 ×ð´) ãæð»æ ֻܻ Ñ

m0 2 (çÎØæ ãñ,
m0 2
5 10 7 SI ×æ˜æ·¤ ×ð́ ÌÍæ BH5Âë‰ßè
(Given 5 10 7 in SI units and 4p
4p
B H 5Horizontal component of earth’s ·ð¤ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ ·¤æ ÿæñçÌÁ ƒæÅU·¤ 53.631025
magnetic field53.631025 Tesla.) Tesla.)
(1) 9.7 (1) 9.7
(2) 4.9 (2) 4.9
(3) 19.4 (3) 19.4
(4) 14.6 (4) 14.6
 Page 13 PHYSICS : English & Hindi
22. For the LCR circuit, shown here, the 22.
current is observed to lead the applied
voltage. An additional capacitor C9, when
joined with the capacitor C present in the
circuit, makes the power factor of the
circuit unity. The capacitor C9, must have
been connected in :
01
Øãæ¡ ÎàææüØð »Øð LCR ÂçÚUÂÍ ×ð´, çßléÌÏæÚUæ, ¥æÚUæðçÂÌ
ßæðËÅUÌæ âð ¥»ý»æ×è (¥æ»ð) ÚUãÌè ãñÐ ÂçÚUÂÍ ×ð´ ÁéǸð
â´ÏæçÚU˜æ C ·ð¤ âæÍ °·¤ ¥çÌçÚU€Ì â´ÏæçÚU˜æ C9 ÁæðǸÙð
âð, §â ÂçÚUÂÍ ·¤æ àæç€Ì-»é‡æ·¤ §·¤æ§ü (°·¤·¤) ãæð
ÁæÌæ ãñÐ Ìæð, â´ÏæçÚU˜æ C9 ·¤æð ¥ßàØ ãè ÁæðÇ¸æ »Øæ
ãæð»æ Ñ

(1) series with C and has a magnitude

(1) C âð Ÿæð‡æè ·ý¤× ×ð´ ¥æñÚU ©â·¤æ ×æÙ ãæð»æ
1 2 v2 LC
. 1 2 v2 LC
v2 L .
v2 L
(2) series with C and has a magnitude
C (2) C âð Ÿæð‡æè ·ý¤× ×ð´ ¥æñÚU ©â·¤æ ×æÙ ãæð»æ
(v2 LC 2 1) . C
(v LC 2 1) .
2
(3) parallel with C and has a magnitude
C (3) C âð â×æ´ÌÚU (Âæàßü) ·ý¤× ×ð´ ¥æñÚU ©â·¤æ ×æÙ
(v LC 2 1) .
2
C
ãæð»æ (v LC 2 1) .
2
(4) parallel with C and has a magnitude
1 2 v 2 LC (4) C âð â×æ´ÌÚU ·ý¤× ×ð´ ¥æñÚU ©â·¤æ ×æÙ ãæð»æ
.
v2 L
1 2 v 2 LC
23. For plane electromagnetic waves .
v2 L
propagating in the z direction, which one
of the following combination gives the 23. z çÎàææ ×ð´ »×Ù ·¤ÚUÌè ãé§ü â×ÌÜ çßléÌ-¿éÕ·¤èØ
→ → ÌÚ´U»æð´ ·ð¤ çÜØð, çِÙæ´ç·¤Ì â´ØæðÁÙæð´ ×ð´ ·¤æñÙ-âæ â´ØæðÁÙ
correct possible direction for E and B
→ →
field respectively ? ·ý¤×àæÑ E ÌÍæ B ÿæð˜ææð´ ·¤è âãè çÎàææ ÎàææüÌæ ãñ?
(1) ( i 1 2 j ) and ( 2 i 2 j )
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
(1) ( i 1 2 j ) ÌÍæ ( 2 i 2 j )
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧

(2) (2 2 i 2 3 j ) and ( 3 i 2 2 j )
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
(2) (2 2 i 2 3 j ) ÌÍæ ( 3 i 2 2 j )
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧

(3) ( 2 i 1 3 j ) and ( i 1 2 j )
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
(3) ( 2 i 1 3 j ) ÌÍæ ( i 1 2 j )
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧

(4) ( 3 i 1 4 j ) and ( 4 i 2 3 j )
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
(4) ( 3 i 1 4 j ) ÌÍæ ( 4 i 2 3 j )
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
 Page 14 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 01
24. A thin convex lens of focal length ‘f’ is put 24. °·¤ ©žæÜ Üð´â ·¤æð, ¥æÚðU¹ ×ð´ ÎàææüØð »Øð ¥ÙéâæÚU
on a plane mirror as shown in the figure.
ç·¤âè â×ÌÜ ÎÂü‡æ ·ð¤ ª¤ÂÚU ÚU¹æ »Øæ ãñÐ Üð´â ·¤è
When an object is kept at a distance ‘a’
from the lens - mirror combination, its Ȥæð·¤â ÎêÚUè ‘f’ ãñÐ §â â´ØæðÁÙ âð ç·¤âè ßSÌé ·¤æð ‘a’
a ÎêÚUè ÂÚU ÚU¹Ùð âð, ©â·¤æ ÂýçÌçÕÕ â´ØæðÁÙ ·ð¤ âæ×Ùð
image is formed at a distance in front
3 a
of the combination. The value of ‘a’ is : 3
ÎêÚUè ÂÚU ÕÙÌæ ãñÐ Ìæð, ‘a’ ·¤æ ×æÙ ãñ Ñ

(1) f (1) f
(2) 2f (2) 2f
(3) 3f (3) 3f
3 3
(4) f (4) f
2 2

25. In a Young’s double slit experiment with 25. Ø´» ·ð¤ ç·¤âè çm-çÛæÚUè ÂýØæð» ×ð´, ÂýØé€Ì Âý·¤æàæ ·¤è
light of wavelength l the separation of slits
is d and distance of screen is D such that
ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü l, çÛæçÚUØæð´ (çSÜÅUæð´) ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤è ÎêÚUè d,
D > > d > > l. If the Fringe width is b, the ÌÍæ ÂÎð ü ·¤è çÛæçÚUØæð ´ âð Îê Ú Uè D ãñ Ð
distance from point of maximum intensity Áãæ¡, D > > d > > lÐ ØçÎ, çÈý´¤Á ¿æñǸæ§ü b ãñ Ìæð,
to the point where intensity falls to half of ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ÌèßýÌæ ·ð¤ çՋÎé âð, ÎæðÙæð´ ¥æðÚU ·ð¤ ©Ù çՋÎé¥æð´
maximum intensity on either side is :
·¤è ÎêÚUè, Áãæ¡ ÌèßýÌæ, ¥çÏ·¤Ì× âð ¥æÏè ãæð ÁæÌè ãñ,
b ãæð»è Ñ
(1)
2
b
b (1)
(2) 2
4
b
b (2)
(3) 4
3
b
b (3)
(4) 3
6
b
(4)
6
 Page 15 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 01
26. Unpolarized light of intensity I0 is incident 26. I0 ÌèßýÌæ ·¤æ ¥ÏýéçßÌ Âý·¤æàæ, ·¤æ¡¿ ·ð¤ ŽÜæò·¤ (»éÅU·ð¤)
on surface of a block of glass at Brewster’s
angle. In that case, which one of the ·¤è âÌã (ÂëcÆU) ÂÚU, ÕýêSÅUÚU ·¤æð‡æ ÂÚU, ¥æÂçÌÌ ãæðÌæ
following statements is true ? ãñÐ §â çSÍçÌ ·ð¤ çÜØð çِÙçÜç¹Ì ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙâæ
(1) transmitted light is partially ·¤ÍÙ âãè (âˆØ) ãñ?
polarized with intensity I0/2.
(1) ÂæÚU»Ì Âý·¤æàæ, ¥æ´çàæ·¤ ÏýéçßÌ ãæð»æ ¥æñÚU ©â·¤è
(2) transmitted light is completely
ÌèßýÌæ I0/2 ãæð»èÐ
polarized with intensity less than
I0/2. (2) ÂæÚU»Ì Âý·¤æàæ Âê‡æüM¤Â âð Ïýçé ßÌ ãæð»æ ¥æñÚU ©â·¤è
(3) reflected light is completely polarized ÌèßýÌæ I0/2 âð ·¤× ãæð»èÐ
with intensity less than I0/2.
(3) ÂÚUæßçÌüÌ Âý·¤æàæ Âê‡æüÌÑ ÏýéçßÌ ãæð»æ ¥æñÚU ©â·¤è
(4) reflected light is partially polarized
with intensity I0/2.
ÌèßýÌæ I0/2 âð ·¤× ãæð»èÐ
(4) ÂÚUæßçÌüÌ Âý·¤æàæ Âê‡æüÌÑ ÏýéçßÌ ãæð»æ ¥æñÚU ©â·¤è
27. The de - Broglie wavelength associated ÌèßýÌæ I0/2 ãæð»èÐ
with the electron in the n54 level is :
(1) two times the de-Broglie wavelength 27. n54 SÌÚU ÂÚU, ç·¤âè §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ âð â´Õh Îð-Õýæò‚Üè
of the electron in the ground state
ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü ãæð»è Ñ
(2) four times the de-Broglie wavelength
of the electron in the ground state (1) ‹ØêÙÌ× ª¤Áæü SÌÚU ÂÚU §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ ·¤è Îð-Õýæò‚Üè
(3) half of the de-Broglie wavelength of ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü âð Îæð »éÙæÐ
the electron in the ground state
(2) ‹ØêÙÌ× ª¤Áæü SÌÚU ÂÚU §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ ·¤è Îð-Õýæò‚Üè
(4) 1/4th of the de-Broglie wavelength ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü ·¤è ¿æÚU »éÙæÐ
of the electron in the ground state
(3) ‹ØêÙÌ× ª¤Áæü SÌÚU ÂÚU §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ ·¤è Îð-Õýæò‚Üè
28. Let Nb be the number of b particles emitted ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü ·¤è ¥æÏèÐ
24 (4) ‹ØêÙÌ× ª¤Áæü SÌÚU ÂÚU §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ ·¤è Îð-Õýæò‚Üè
by 1 gram of Na radioactive nuclei
(half life515 hrs) in 7.5 hours, Nb is close
ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü ·¤è 1/4.
to (Avogadro number 56.023310 23/g.
mole) :
24
(1) 6.2310 21 28. ØçÎ 1 »ýæ× Na ÚðUçÇUØæð°ç€ÅUß ÙæçÖ·¤ (¥Ïü ¥æØé
(2) 7.5310 21 15 ƒæ´ÅðU) mæÚUæ 7.5 ƒæ´ÅðU ×ð´ ©ˆâçÁüÌ b ·¤‡ææð´ ·¤è
(3) 1.25310 22 ⴁØæ Nb ãæð Ìæð, Nb ·¤æ ×æÙ çÙ·¤ÅU ãæð»æ
(4) 1.75310 22 (¥æßæð»æÎýUæð ⴁØæ 6.02331023/g. mol) :
(1) 6.2310 21
(2) 7.5310 21
(3) 1.25310 22
(4) 1.75310 22
 Page 16 PHYSICS : English & Hindi 01
29. A 2V battery is connected across AB as 29. ¥æÚðU¹ ×ð´ 2V ·¤è °·¤ ÕñÅUÚUè A ß B ·ð¤ Õè¿ ÁéǸè ãñÐ
shown in the figure. The value of the
ØçÎ ÂãÜè Îàææ ×ð´ ÕñÅUÚUè ·¤æ ÏÙæˆ×·¤ ÅUç×üÙÜ A âð
current supplied by the battery when in
one case battery’s positive terminal is ÌÍæ ÎêâÚUè Îàææ ×ð´ ÏÙæˆ×·¤ ÅUç×üÙÜ B âð ÁéǸæ ãæð Ìæð,
connected to A and in other case when §Ù ÎæðÙæð´ Îàææ¥æð´ ×ð´ ÕñÅUÚUè mæÚUæ ÂýΞæ çßléÌ ÏæÚUæ ·¤æ
positive terminal of battery is connected ×æÙ ·ý¤×àæÑ ãæð»æ Ñ
to B will respectively be :

(1) 0.2 A and 0.1 A

(1) 0.2 A ÌÍæ 0.1 A

(2) 0.4 A and 0.2 A (2) 0.4 A ÌÍæ 0.2 A

(3) 0.1 A and 0.2 A (3) 0.1 A ÌÍæ 0.2 A
(4) 0.2 A and 0.4 A (4) 0.2 A ÌÍæ 0.4 A

30. The AC voltage across a resistance can be

measured using a : 30. ç·¤âè ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ ·ð¤ çâÚUæð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿ AC (°.âè.) ßæðËÅUÌæ
(1) potentiometer ·¤æð ×æÂæ Áæ â·¤Ìæ ãñ Ñ
(2) moving coil galvanometer (1) ÂæðÅðUç‹àæØæð×èÅUÚU (çßÖß×æÂè) mæÚUæ
(3) moving magnet galvanometer (2) ¿Ü ·é´¤ÇUÜè ÏæÚUæ×æÂè (»ñËßðÙæð×èÅUÚU) mæÚUæ
(4) hot wire voltmeter (3) ¿Ü-¿éÕ·¤ »ñËßðÙæð×èÅUÚU mæÚUæ
(4) ÌŒÌ ÌæÚU ßæðËÅU×èÅUÚU mæÚUæ
 Page 1 CHEMISTRY : English & Hindi 01
1. A12B13C ì AB2C3 1. A12B13C ì AB2C3
Reaction of 6.0 g of A, 6.031023 atoms of 6.0 g A, 6.031023 ÂÚU×æ‡æé B ÌÍæ 0.036 ×æðÜ C
B, and 0.036 mol of C yields 4.8 g of
·ð¤ ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤ÚUÙð ÂÚU 4.8 g AB2C3 ÂýæŒÌ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ
compound AB2C3. If the atomic mass of
A and C are 60 and 80 amu, respectively, ØçÎ A ÌÍæ C ·ð¤ ÂÚU×æ‡æé ÎýÃØ×æÙ ·ý¤×àæÑ 60 ¥æñÚU
the atomic mass of B is (Avogadro 80 amu ãæð´, Ìæð B ·¤æ ÂÚU×æ‡æé ÎýÃØ×æÙ ãñ (¥æßæð»æÎýæð
no.5631023) : ⴁØæ5631023) Ñ
(1) 70 amu (1) 70 amu
(2) 60 amu (2) 60 amu
(3) 50 amu (3) 50 amu
(4) 40 amu (4) 40 amu

2. When does a gas deviate the most from its

ideal behaviour ?
2. °·¤ »ñâ ¥ÂÙð ¥æÎàæü ÃØßãæÚU âð âßæüçÏ·¤ çß¿ÜÙ
(1) At low pressure and low
·¤Õ ÎàææüÌè ãñ?
temperature (1) çِ٠ÎæÕ ¥æñÚU çِ٠Ìæ ÂÚU
(2) At low pressure and high (2) çِ٠ÎæÕ ¥æñÚU ©“æ Ìæ ÂÚU
temperature
(3) At high pressure and low (3) ©“æ ÎæÕ ¥æñÚU çِ٠Ìæ ÂÚU
temperature (4) ©“æ ÎæÕ ¥æñÚU ©“æ Ìæ ÂÚU
(4) At high pressure and high
temperature
3. Ìæ T ÂÚU, ç·¤âè Öè ·¤‡æ ·¤è ¥æñâÌ »çÌÁ ª¤Áæü
3
3. At temperature T, the average kinetic kT ãñÐ Îð Õýæò‚Üè ÌÚ´U»-ÎñƒØü ·¤æ âãè ·ý¤× ãñ Ñ
2
3
energy of any particle is kT. The (1) ÌæÂèØ ÂýæðÅUæòÙ > ÎëàØ È¤æðÅUæòÙ > ÌæÂèØ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ
2
de Broglie wavelength follows the order : (2) ÌæÂèØ ÂýæðÅUæòÙ > ÌæÂèØ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ > ÎëàØ È¤æðÅUæòÙ
(1) Thermal proton > Visible photon >
Thermal electron (3) ÎëàØ È¤æðÅUæòÙ > ÌæÂèØ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ > ÌæÂèØ ‹ØêÅþUæòÙ
(2) Thermal proton > Thermal electron (4) ÎëàØ È¤æðÅUæòÙ > ÌæÂèØ ‹ØêÅþUæòÙ > ÌæÂèØ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ
> Visible photon
(3) Visible photon > Thermal electron >
Thermal neutron
4. ¥‡æé AB ·¤è ¥æÕ´Ï Ü´Õæ§ü 1.617Å ãñ ¥æñÚU ©â·¤æ
çmÏýéß ¥æƒæê‡æü 0.38 D ãñÐ ÂýˆØð·¤ ÂÚU×æ‡æé ÂÚU ¥æ´çàæ·¤
(4) Visible photon > Thermal neutron >
Thermal electron ¥æßðàæ (çÙÚUÂðÿæ ÂçÚU×æ‡æ) ãñ Ñ
(e054.802310210 esu)
4. Molecule AB has a bond length of 1.617Å (1) 0
and a dipole moment of 0.38 D. The (2) 0.05
fractional charge on each atom (absolute
(3) 0.5
magnitude) is : (e054.802310210 esu)
(4) 1.0
(1) 0
(2) 0.05
(3) 0.5
(4) 1.0
 Page 2 CHEMISTRY : English & Hindi 01
5. For the equilibrium, A(g) ì B(g), DH is 5. §â âæØæßSÍæ ·ð ¤ çÜ°, A(g) ì B(g), DH
240 kJ/mol. If the ratio of the activation
240 kJ/mol ãñÐ ¥»ÚU ¥»ý (Ef ) ¥æñÚU Âà¿»æ×è
energies of the forward (Ef ) and reverse
(Eb) ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ¥æð´ ·ð¤ âç·ý¤Ø‡æ ª¤Áæü¥æð´ ·¤æ ¥ÙéÂæÌ
2
(Eb) reactions is then : 2
3 ãñ, ÌÕ Ñ
3
(1) Ef560 kJ/mol ; Eb5100 kJ/mol
(1) Ef560 kJ/mol ; Eb5100 kJ/mol
(2) Ef530 kJ/mol ; Eb570 kJ/mol
(2) Ef530 kJ/mol ; Eb570 kJ/mol
(3) Ef580 kJ/mol ; Eb5120 kJ/mol
(3) Ef580 kJ/mol ; Eb5120 kJ/mol
(4) Ef570 kJ/mol ; Eb530 kJ/mol
(4) Ef570 kJ/mol ; Eb530 kJ/mol

6. Determination of the molar mass of acetic

acid in benzene using freezing point 6. °ðçâçÅU·¤ ¥Ü ·¤æ ×æðÜÚU ÎýÃØ×æÙ Õð´$ÁèÙ ×ð´ çã×æ´·¤
depression is affected by : ¥ßÙ×Ù âð çÙ·¤æÜð ÁæÙð ÂÚU çÁââð ÂýÖæçßÌ ãæðÌæ ãñ
(1) dissociation ßã ãñ Ñ
(2) association
(1) çßØæðÁÙ
(3) partial ionization
(2) â´»é‡æÙ
(4) complex formation
(3) ¥æ´çàæ·¤ ¥æØÙè·¤ÚU‡æ
7. The increase of pressure on ice ì water (4) â´·é¤Ü çßÚU¿Ù
system at constant temperature will lead
to :
(1) no effect on the equilibrium
7. çSÍÚU Ìæ ÂÚU, ¥çÏ·¤ ÎæÕ ÇæÜÙð ÂÚU ÕÈü¤ ì ÁÜ
(2) a decrease in the entropy of the
â×éÎæØ ×ð´ Ñ
system (1) âæØæßSÍæ ÂÚU ·¤æð§ü ÂýÖæß Ùãè´ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ
(3) a shift of the equilibrium in the (2) çÙ·¤æØ ·¤è °ð‹ÅþUæòÂè ƒæÅUÌè ãñÐ
forward direction
(4) an increase in the Gibbs energy of the (3) âæØæßSÍæ ¥»ý çÎàææ ×ð´ ¥»ýâÚU ãæðÌè ãñÐ
system (4) çÙ·¤æØ ·¤è 绎Á ª¤Áæü ÕɸÌè ãñÐ

8. At 298 K, the standard reduction

8. 298 K ÂÚU ×æÙ·¤ ¥Â¿ØÙ çßÖß, MnO2
4 Mn
21
potentials are 1.51 V for MnO2
4 Mn
21 ,

1.36 V for Cl2?Cl2, 1.07 V for Br2?Br2, and

·¤æ 1.51 V, Cl2?Cl2 ·¤æ ·¤æ
1.36 V, Br2?Br2
0.54 V for I2?I2. At pH53, permanganate 1.07 V ¥æñÚU I2 ?I2 ·¤æ 0.54 V ãñÐ pH53 ÂÚU
RT MnO2 ç·¤Ù·¤æ ©Â¿ØÙ ·¤ÚðU»æ?
is expected to oxidize :  
5 0.059 V  4
 F 
 RT 
(1) Cl2, Br2 and I2  5 0.059 V 
 F 
(2) Cl2 and Br2
(1) Cl2, Br2 ¥æñÚU I2
(3) Br2 and I2
(4) I2 only (2) Cl2 ¥æñÚU Br2
(3) Br2 ¥æñÚU I2
(4) I2 ×æ˜æ
 Page 3 CHEMISTRY : English & Hindi 01
9. A12B ® C, the rate equation for this 9. ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ A12B ® C ·¤æ ÎÚU â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ãñ
reaction is given as
ÎÚU5k[A][B].
Rate5k[A][B].
If the concentration of A is kept the same A ·¤è âæ´ÎýÌæ çSÍÚU ÚU¹Ìð ãé° B ·¤è âæ´ÎýÌæ Îé»éÙè ·¤ÚUÙð
but that of B is doubled what will happen ÂÚU ßð» ·¤æ ×æÙ €Øæ ãæð»æ?
to the rate itself ?
(1) ¥æÏæ ÚUã Áæ°»æ
(1) halved
(2) the same
(2) â×æÙ ÚUãð»æ
(3) doubled (3) Îé»éÙæ ãæð Áæ°»æ
(4) quadrupled (4) ¿æÚU »éÙæ ãæð Áæ°»æ

10. Under ambient conditions, which among 10. ÂçÚUßðàæ çSÍçÌ ÂÚU, ·¤æñÙ-ÂëcÆU â´ç·ý¤Ø·¤ ÁÜèØ çßÜØÙ
the following surfactants will form micelles
in aqueous solution at lowest molar ×ð´ âÕâð ·¤× ×æðÜèØ âæ´Îý‡æ ×ð´ ç×âðÜ ÕÙæ°»æ?
concentration ?
(1)
(1)
(2) CH32(CH2)132 OSO2
3 Na
1

(2) CH32(CH2)132 OSO2

3 Na
1

(3)
(3)
(4)
(4)

11. Ìˆß X ·ð¤ ¿æÚU Øæñç»·¤æð´ ·ð¤ âê˜ææð´ ×ð´ âð »ÜÌ âê˜æ
11. Choose the incorrect formula out of the ¿éçÙ° Ñ
four compounds for an element X below :
(1) X2Cl3
(1) X2Cl3
(2) X2O3
(2) X 2O3
(3) X2(SO4)3
(3) X2(SO4)3
(4) XPO4
(4) XPO4

12. ·ñ¤Üæç×Ù çÁâ·¤æ ¥ØS·¤ ãñ, ßã ãñ Ñ

12. Calamine is an ore of :
(1) Aluminium (1) °ðÜéç×çÙØ×
(2) Copper (2) ·¤æòÂÚU
(3) Iron (3) ¥æØÚUÙ
(4) Zinc
(4) çÁ´·¤
 Page 4 CHEMISTRY : English & Hindi 01
13. Which physical property of dihydrogen is 13. ÇUæ§ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ·ð¤ â´ÎÖü ×ð´ ·¤æñÙ-âæ ÖæñçÌ·¤ »é‡æ »ÜÌ
wrong ?
ãñ?
(1) Colourless gas
(1) ߇æüãèÙ »ñâ
(2) Odourless gas
(3) Tasteless gas (2) »´ÏãèÙ »ñâ
(4) Non-inflammable gas (3) SßæÎãèÙ »ñâ
(4) ¥’ßÜÙàæèÜ »ñâ
14. Which of the alkaline earth metal halides
given below is essentially covalent in
nature ? 14. çِÙçÜç¹Ì ÿææÚUèØ ×ëÎæ ÏæÌé ·ð¤ ãñÜæ§ÇUæð´ ×ð´ âð 緤ⷤæ
(1) MgCl2 SßÖæß ßæSÌß ×ð´ âãâ´ØæðÁ·¤ ãñ?
(2) BeCl2 (1) MgCl2
(3) SrCl2 (2) BeCl2
(4) CaCl 2 (3) SrCl2
(4) CaCl 2
15. Which of the following compounds has a
P2P bond ? 15. çΰ »° Øæñç»·¤æð´ ×ð´ âð P2P Õ´Ï·¤ ç·¤â ×ð´ ãñ?
(1) H 4 P 2O 5
(1) H 4 P 2O 5
(2) H 4 P 2O 6
(2) H 4 P 2O 6
(3) H 4 P 2O 7
(3) H 4 P 2O 7
(4) (HPO3)3
(4) (HPO3)3

16. Chlorine water on standing loses its colour

and forms : 16. €ÜæðÚUèÙ ÁÜ ·é¤ÀU â×Ø ·ð¤ Âà¿æÌ÷ ¥ÂÙæ Ú´U» ¹æð ÎðÌæ
(1) HCl only ãñ ¥æñÚU ÕÙæÌæ ãñ Ñ
(2) HOCl and HOCl2 (1) ·ð¤ßÜ HCl
(3) HCl and HOCl (2) HOCl ¥æñÚU HOCl2
(4) HCl and HClO2 (3) HCl ¥æñÚU HOCl
(4) HCl ¥æñÚU HClO2
17. Which of the following statements is
false ?
22 17. çِ٠·¤ÍÙæð´ ×ð´ âð »ÜÌ ·¤ÍÙ ¿éçÙØð?
(1) CrO 4 is tetrahedral in shape
22
22 (1) CrO 4 ¿ÌécȤܷ¤èØ ¥æ·¤æÚU ·¤æ ãñÐ
(2) Cr2 O7 has a Cr2O2Cr bond
22
(3) Na2Cr2O7 is a primary standard in (2) Cr2 O7 ×ð´ °·¤ Cr2O2Cr ¥æÕ´Ï ãñÐ
volumetry
(3) ¥æØÌÙè çßàÜð á ‡æ ×ð ´ Na 2 Cr 2 O 7 °·¤
(4) Na 2 Cr 2 O 7 is less soluble than
K2Cr2O7
ÂýæÍç×·¤ ×æÙ·¤ ãñÐ
(4) Na2Cr2O7 ·¤è çßÜØÌæ K2Cr2O7 âð ·¤×
ãñÐ
 Page 5 CHEMISTRY : English & Hindi 01
18. When concentrated HCl is added to an 18. ÁÕ âæ´çÎýÌ HCl ·¤æð CoCl2 ·ð¤ ÁÜèØ ƒææðÜ ×ð́ ç×ÜæØæ
aqueous solution of CoCl 2 , its colour
»Øæ, ÌÕ ©â·¤æ Ú´U» ÚU€ÌæÖ »éÜæÕè âð »æɸæ ÙèÜæ ãæð
changes from reddish pink to deep blue.
Which complex ion gives blue colour in this »ØæÐ §â ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ×ð´ ·¤æñÙ âæ â´·é¤Ü ¥æØÙ ÙèÜð
reaction ? Ú´U» ·¤æ ·¤æÚU‡æ ãñ?
(1) [CoCl6]42 (1) [CoCl6]42
(2) [CoCl6]32 (2) [CoCl6]32
(3) [CoCl4]22 (3) [CoCl4]22
(4) [Co(H2O)6]21 (4) [Co(H2O)6]21

19. Which of the following complex ions has 19. çِÙçÜç¹Ì â´·é¤Ü ¥æØÙæð´ ×ð´ âð 緤⠥æØÙ ·¤è t2g
electrons that are symmetrically filled in
both t2g and eg orbitals ?
¥æñÚU eg ·¤ÿæ·¤æð´ ×ð´ §Üð€ÅþUæòÙ â×ç×Ì M¤Â âð ÖÚðU ãñ´?
(1) [CoF6]32 (1) [CoF6]32

(2) [Co(NH3)6]21 (2) [Co(NH3)6]21

(3) [Mn(CN)6]42 (3) [Mn(CN)6]42

(4) [FeF6]32 (4) [FeF6]32

20. Addition of phosphate fertilisers to water 20. ȤæòSÈð¤ÅU Øé€Ì ©ßüÚU·¤æð´ ·ð¤ ç×ÜæÙð âð ÁÜæàæØæð´ ×ð´ Ñ
bodies causes : (1) àæñßæÜæð´ ·¤è ¥ˆØæçÏ·¤ ßëçh ãæðÌè ãñÐ
(1) enhanced growth of algae
(2) ÁÜ ×ð´ çßÜèÙ ¥æò€âèÁÙ ·¤è ×æ˜ææ ÕɸÌè ãñÐ
(2) increase in amount of dissolved
oxygen in water (3) ·ñ¤çËâØ× È¤æòSÈð¤ÅU ·¤æ çÙÿæð‡æ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ
(3) deposition of calcium phosphate (4) ×ÀUçÜØæð´ ·¤è Áèß â´Øæ ×ð´ ßëçh ãæðÌè ãñÐ
(4) increase in fish population

21. ·¤æòÜ× - I ×ð´ çΰ »° ·¤æÕüçÙ·¤ Øæñç»·¤æð´ ·¤æð

21. Match the organic compounds in
·¤æòÜ× - II ×ð´ Üñâð´ ÅðUSÅU ·ð¤ ÂçÚU‡ææ×æð´ ·ð¤ âæÍ âé×ðçÜÌ
column - I with the Lassaigne’s test results
in column - II appropriately : ·¤èçÁ° Ñ
Column - I Column - II œ‰Ë×Á¼ - I œ‰Ë×Á¼ - II
(A) Aniline (i) Red color with (A) •Õ¾ÍÁ; (i) FeCl3 œÕ‰ Ç˲ ÁËÁ ¿™U 
FeCl3 (B) ºÕü¦Í¾ (ii) ÇËÕ̬U½¼ ¾ËŒªãUËÕ§âÏSÇˌ¬U œÕ‰
(B) Benzene (ii) Violet color with Ç˲ ¦Ë¼Ï¾Í ¿™U 
Ç°­‰ËÕ̾œ‰ ŠƒÁ
sulfonic acid sodium (C) (iii)  ¿U¼ ŠƒÁͽ FeSO4
²Ö½ËÕ½ÏÌ¿U½Ë
nitroprusside
(C) Thiourea (iii) Blue color with hot
ÌÄÁ½¾ œÕ‰ Ç˲ ¾ÍÁË ¿™U 
and acidic solution (1) (A) - (ii) ; (B) - (i) ; (C) - (iii)
of FeSO4 (2) (A) - (iii) ; (B) - (ii) ; (C) - (i)
(3) (A) - (ii) ; (B) - (iii) ; (C) - (i)
(1) (A) - (ii) ; (B) - (i) ; (C) - (iii)
(4) (A) - (iii) ; (B) - (i) ; (C) - (ii)
(2) (A) - (iii) ; (B) - (ii) ; (C) - (i)
(3) (A) - (ii) ; (B) - (iii) ; (C) - (i)
(4) (A) - (iii) ; (B) - (i) ; (C) - (ii)
 Page 6 CHEMISTRY : English & Hindi 01
22. Which of the following pairs of 22. çِÙçÜç¹Ì ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ-âð Øæñç»·¤ Øé‚× â×êã
compounds are positional isomers ?
â×æßØßè ãñ´?
(1) CH 32C H 22 C H 22 C H 22 C H O
(1) CH32CH22CH22CH22CHO ¥æñÚU
and

(2) and
(2) ¥æñÚU

(3) and
(3) ¥æñÚU

(4) and
(4) ¥æñÚU

23. The number of structural isomers for C6H14

is : 23. C6H14 ·¤è â´ÚU¿Ùæˆ×·¤ â×æßØçßØæð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ ãñ Ñ
(1) 3 (1) 3
(2) 4 (2) 4
(3) 5 (3) 5
(4) 6 (4) 6
 Page 7 CHEMISTRY : English & Hindi 01
24. What is the major product expected from 24. çِÙçÜç¹Ì ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤æ Âý×é¹ ©ˆÂæÎ €Øæ ãñ?
the following reaction ?

Áãæ¡ D - ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ·¤æ â×SÍæçÙ·¤ ãñÐ

Where D is an isotope of Hydrogen.

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

25. In the reaction sequence 25. çِÙçÜç¹Ì ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·ý¤× ×ð´ ©ˆÂæÎ B ãñ Ñ
OH2
D OH2 D
2 CH 3 CHO → A → B ; the 2 CH 3 CHO → A → B
product B is : (1) CH32CH22CH22CH22OH
(1) CH32CH22CH22CH22OH (2) CH32CH5CH2CHO
(2) CH32CH5CH2CHO

(3)
(3)
(4) CH32CH22CH22CH3
(4) CH32CH22CH22CH3
 Page 8 CHEMISTRY : English & Hindi 01
26. Which compound exhibits maximum 26. çِÙçÜç¹Ì ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ-âæ Øæñç»·¤ âßæüçÏ·¤ çmÏýéß
dipole moment among the following ?
¥æƒæê‡æü ÎàææüÌæ ãñ?

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

27. Which one of the following structures

represents the neoprene polymer ? 27. ÕãéÜ·¤ çÙØæðÂýèÙ ·¤è â´ÚU¿Ùæ çِÙçÜç¹Ì â´ÚU¿Ùæ¥æð´
×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ-âè ãñ?
(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)
 Page 9 CHEMISTRY : English & Hindi 01
28. Accumulation of which of the following 28. ¥æðÁSßè ÃØæØæ× ·ð¤ ȤÜSßM¤Â, ×æ´âÂðçàæØæð´ ×ð´ ç·¤â
molecules in the muscles occurs as a result
Øæñç»·¤ ·¤æ â´¿ØÙ ãæðÌæ ãñ?
of vigorous exercise ?
(1) Glucose (1) ‚Üê·¤æð$Á
(2) Glycogen (2) ‚Üñ·¤æð$ÁÙ
(3) L-lactic acid (3) L-Üñç€ÅU·¤ ¥Ü
(4) Pyruvic acid
(4) ÂñM¤çß·¤ ¥Ü
29. Which artificial sweetener contains
chlorine ? 29. 緤⠷ë¤ç˜æ× ×ÏéÚU·¤ ×𴠀ÜæðÚUèÙ ãñ?
(1) Aspartame (1) °ðSÂæÅðüU×
(2) Saccharin (2) âñ·¤ÚUèÙ
(3) Sucralose
(3) âê·ý¤æÜæðâ
(4) Alitame
(4) °ðçÜÅðU×
30. A pink coloured salt turns blue on heating.
The presence of which cation is most 30. °·¤ »éÜæÕè Ü߇æ, »ÚU× ·¤ÚUÙð ÂÚU ÙèÜæ ãæð ÁæÌæ ãñÐ
likely ?
Ü߇æ ×ð´ ç·¤â ÏÙæØÙ ·ð¤ ãæðÙð ·¤è âßæüçÏ·¤ â´ÖæßÙæ
(1) Cu 21 ãñ?
(2) Fe21
(1) Cu 21
(3) Zn21
(2) Fe21
(4) Co21
(3) Zn 21
(4) Co21
-o0o-

-o0o-
 Page 1 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 01
1. Let A5{x1, x2, ..., x7} and B5{y1, y2, y3} 1. ×æÙæ A5{x1, x2, ..., x7} ÌÍæ B5{y1, y2, y3}
be two sets containing seven and three
°ðâð Îæð â×é“æØ ãñ´ çÁÙ×ð´ ·ý¤×àæÑ âæÌ ÌÍæ ÌèÙ çßçÖóæ
distinct elements respectively. Then the
total number of functions f : A ® B that ¥ßØß ãñ´ ; Ìæð °ðâð ȤÜÙæð´ f : A ® B ·¤è ·é¤Ü
are onto, if there exist exactly three ⴁØæ, Áæð ç·¤ ¥æ‘ÀUæη¤ ãñ´, ØçÎ A ×ð´ °ðâð ÆUè·¤ ÌèÙ
elements x in A such that f (x)5y2, is equal x ¥ßØß ãñ´ çÁÙ·ð¤ çÜ° f (x)5y2 ãñ, ãñ Ñ
to :
(1) 14 . 7C2
(1) 14 . 7C2
(2) 16 . 7C3
(2) 16 . 7C3
(3) 12 . 7C2
(3) 12 . 7C2
(4) 14 . 7C3
(4) 14 . 7C3

2. If z is a non-real complex number, then

2. ØçÎ z °·¤ ¥ßæSÌçß·¤ âç×Ÿæ ⴁØæ ãñ, Ìæð

Im z 5 Im z 5
the minimum value of is : ·¤æ ‹ØêÙÌ× ×æÙ ãñ Ñ
(Im z ) 5 (Im z )5

(1) 21 (1) 21

(2) 22 (2) 22

(3) 24 (3) 24

(4) 25 (4) 25

3. If the two roots of the equation, 3. ØçÎ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ

(a21)(x 41x 211)1(a11)(x21x11) 250 (a21)(x41x 211)1(a11)(x 21x11) 250
are real and distinct, then the set of all ·ð¤ Îæð ×êÜ ßæSÌçß·¤ ÌÍæ çßçÖóæ ãñ´, Ìæð ‘a’ ·ð¤ âÖè
values of ‘a’ is : ×æÙæð´ ·¤æ â×êã ãñ Ñ
 1 
(1) 2 , 0   1 
 2  (1) 2 , 0 
 2 
(2) (2:, 22) È (2, :)
(2) (2:, 22) È (2, :)
 1   1
(3) 2 , 0  ∪  0,   1   1
 2   2 (3) 2 , 0  ∪  0, 
 2   2
 1
(4)  0,   1
 2 (4)  0, 
 2

4. If A is a 333 matrix such that ?5. adjA?55,

then ?A? is equal to : 4. ØçÎ A °·¤ °ðâæ 333 ¥æÃØêã ãñ ç·¤ ?5. adjA?55
ãñ, Ìæð ?A? ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
1
(1) 6
5 1
(1) 6
(2) 65 5

(3) 61 (2) 65
(3) 61
1
(4) 6
25 1
(4) 6
25
 Page 2 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 01

x 21x x11 x22 x 21x x11 x22

5. If 2 x 213x21 3x 3x23 5 ax212 , 5. ØçÎ 2 x 213x21 3x 3x23 5 ax212
x 212x13 2 x21 2 x21 x 212x13 2 x21 2 x21
then ‘a’ is equal to : ãñ, Ìæð ‘a’ ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) 12 (1) 12
(2) 24 (2) 24
(3) 212 (3) 212
(4) 224 (4) 224

6. If in a regular polygon the number of

6. ØçÎ °·¤ çÙØç×Ì ÕãéÖéÁ ·ð¤ çß·¤‡ææðZ ·¤è ⴁØæ 54
diagonals is 54, then the number of sides
of this polygon is : ãñ, Ìæð ÕãéÖéÁ ·ð¤ ÖéÁæ¥æð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ ãñ Ñ
(1) 10 (1) 10
(2) 12 (2) 12
(3) 9 (3) 9
(4) 6 (4) 6

7. The term independent of x in the binomial

 1 5  2 1 8
expansion of 7.  1 2
x
1 3 x   2 x 2
x
 ·ð¤ çmÂÎ ÂýâæÚU
  
 1 5  2 1 8 ×ð´ x âð SßÌ´˜æ ÂÎ ãñ Ñ
 1 2 1 3x   2 x 2  is :
 x   x (1) 400
(1) 400 (2) 496
(2) 496 (3) 2400
(3) 2400 (4) 2496
(4) 2496
8. °·¤ »é‡ææðžæÚU Ÿæðɸè (G.P.) ·ð¤ ÌèâÚðU ÌÍæ ¿æñÍð ÂÎæð´ ·¤æ
8. The sum of the 3rd
and the 4th
terms of a Øæð» 60 ãñ ÌÍæ §â·ð¤ ÂýÍ× ÌèÙ ÂÎæð´ ·¤æ »é‡æÙȤÜ
G.P. is 60 and the product of its first three
1000 ãñÐ ØçÎ §â »é‡ææðžæÚU ŸæðÉ¸è ·¤æ ÂýÍ× ÂÎ ÏÙæˆ×·¤
terms is 1000. If the first term of this G.P.
is positive, then its 7th term is : ãñ, Ìæð §â·¤æ âæÌßæ´ ÂÎ ãñ Ñ
(1) 7290 (1) 7290
(2) 320 (2) 320
(3) 640 (3) 640
(4) 2430 (4) 2430
 Page 3 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 01
5 1 k 5 1 k
9. If S 5 , then k is 9. ØçÎ S 5 ãñ, Ìæð k
n51 n(n11)(n12)(n13) 3 n51 n(n11)(n12)(n13) 3
equal to : ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
55 55
(1) (1)
336 336
17 17
(2) (2)
105 105
1 1
(3) (3)
6 6
19 19
(4) (4)
112 112

10. Let k be a non-zero real number. If

10. ×æÙæ k °·¤ àæê‹ØðÌÚU ßæSÌçß·¤ ⴁØæ ãñÐ ØçÎ
 (e x 2 1)2
 , x ≠ 0  (e x 2 1)2
 x x  , x ≠ 0
f ( x ) 5  sin   log  1 1   x x
 k  4 f ( x ) 5  sin   log  1 1 
 k  4
 12 , x 50
 12 , x 50
is a continuous function, then the value of
k is : °·¤ â´ÌÌ È¤ÜÙ ãñ, Ìæð k ·¤æ ×æÙ ãñ Ñ
(1) 1 (1) 1
(2) 2 (2) 2
(3) 3 (3) 3
(4) 4 (4) 4

11. The equation of a normal to the curve, p 

11. x50 ÂÚU ß·ý ¤ sin y 5 x sin  1 y  ·ð ¤
p  3 
sin y 5 x sin  1 y  at x50, is :
3  ¥çÖÜ´Õ ·¤æ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ãñ Ñ
(1) 2x 1 3 y 5 0 (1) 2x 1 3 y 5 0

(2) 2y 2 3 x 5 0 (2) 2y 2 3 x 5 0

(3) 2y 1 3 x 5 0 (3) 2y 1 3 x 5 0

(4) 2x 2 3 y 5 0 (4) 2x 2 3 y 5 0
 Page 4 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 01
12. Let k and K be the minimum and the
(1 1 x )0.6
maximum values of the function 12. ×æÙæ k ÌÍæ K, ȤÜÙ f (x) 5 ·ð ¤
0.6 1 1 x 0.6
(1 1 x )
f (x) 5 in [0, 1] respectively, [0, 1] ×ð´·ý¤×àæÑ ‹ØêÙÌ× ÌÍæ ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ×æÙ ãñ´, Ìæð
1 1 x 0.6
·ý¤ç×Ì Øé‚× (k, K) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
then the ordered pair (k, K) is equal to :
(1) (1, 20.6)
(1) (1, 20.6)
(2) (220.4, 20.6)
(2) (220.4, 20.6)
(3) (220.6, 1)
(3) (220.6, 1)
(4) (220.4, 1)
(4) (220.4, 1)

13. From the top of a 64 metres high tower, a 13. 64 ×èÅUÚU ª¡¤¿è °·¤ ×èÙæÚU ·ð¤ çàæ¹ÚU âð 48 ×è./âð.
stone is thrown upwards vertically with ·¤è »çÌ â𠩊ßæüÏÚU ª¤ÂÚU ·¤è çÎàææ ×ð´ °·¤ ˆÍÚU
the velocity of 48 m/s. The greatest height Èð´¤·¤æ »ØæÐ Øã ×æÙÌð ãé° ç·¤ »éL¤ˆßæ·¤áü‡æ ˆßÚU‡æ
(in metres) attained by the stone, assuming
g532 ×è. / âð . 2 ãñ , ßã ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ª¡ ¤ ¿æ§ü
the value of the gravitational acceleration
g532 m/s2, is : (×èÅUÚUæð´ ×ð´) Áãæ¡ Ì·¤ ˆÍÚU Âã¡é¿Ìæ ãñ, ãñ Ñ
(1) 100 (1) 100
(2) 88 (2) 88
(3) 128 (3) 128
(4) 112 (4) 112

(
log t 1 1 1 t 2 ) dt 5 1 ( g (t))21 C , ØçÎ ∫
(
log t 1 1 1 t 2 ) dt 5 1 ( g (t))21 C
14. If ∫ 2
14.
1 1 t2 2
1 1 t2
where C is a constant, then g(2) is equal ãñ, Áãæ¡ C °·¤ ¥¿ÚU ãñ, Ìæð g(2) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
to :
(1) 2 log ( 2 1 5 )
(1) 2 log ( 2 1 5 )
(2) log ( 2 1 5 )
(2) log ( 2 1 5 )
1
1 (3) log ( 2 1 5 )
(3) log ( 2 1 5 ) 5
5
1
1 (4) log ( 2 1 5 )
(4) log ( 2 1 5 ) 2
2
 Page 5 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 01
15. Let f : R ® R be a function such that 15. ×æÙæ f : R ® R °·¤ °ðâæ ȤÜÙ ãñ, ç·¤ âÖè x e R
f (22x)5f (21x) and f (42x)5f (41x),
·ð¤ çÜ°, f (22x)5f (21x) ÌÍæ f (42x)5
2
2 50
for all x e R and ∫ f (x ) dx 5 5 . Then the
f (41x) ãñ ¥æñÚU ∫ f (x ) dx 5 5 ãñ, Ìæð ∫ f ( x ) dx
0
0 10
50
·¤æ ×æÙ ãñ Ñ
value of ∫ f ( x ) dx is :
(1) 80
10

(1) 80 (2) 100

(2) 100 (3) 125

(3) 125 (4) 200

(4) 200
16. ×æÙæ f : (21, 1) ® R °·¤ â´ÌÌ È¤ÜÙ ãñÐ ØçÎ
16. Let f : (21, 1) ® R be a continuous sin x
3  3
sin x ∫ f (t) dt 5 x ãñ, Ìæð f  ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
3 0
2  2 
function. If ∫ f (t) dt 5
2
x, then
0
3
(1)
 3 2
f  is equal to :
 2  (2) 3
3 3
(1) (3)
2 2
(2) 3 1
(4)
2
3
(3)
2
17. x5f (y) ¥ß·¤Ü â×è·¤ÚU‡æ
1
(4) ydx2(x12y2)dy50 ·¤æ ãÜ ãñÐ
2
ØçÎ f (21)51 ãñ, Ìæð f (1) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) 4
17. The solution of the differential equation
ydx2(x12y2)dy50 is x5f (y). (2) 3
If f (21)51, then f (1) is equal to : (3) 2
(1) 4 (4) 1
(2) 3
(3) 2
(4) 1
 Page 6 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 01
18. A straight line L through the point (3, 22) 18. çÕ´Îé (3, 22) âð ãæð·¤ÚU ÁæÙð ßæÜè °·¤ âÚUÜ ÚðU¹æ L,
is inclined at an angle of 608 to the line
ÚUð¹æ 3 x 1 y 5 1 ·ð¤ âæÍ 608 ·¤æ ·¤æð‡æ ÕÙæÌè
3 x 1 y 5 1 . If L also intersects the
ãñÐ ØçÎ L, x-¥ÿæ ·¤æð Öè ·¤æÅUÌè ãñ, Ìæð L ·¤æ
x-axis, then the equation of L is :
â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ãñ Ñ
(1) y 1 3 x 1 2 23 3 50
(1) y 1 3 x 1 2 23 3 50
(2) y 2 3 x 1 2 13 3 50
(2) y 2 3 x 1 2 13 3 50
(3) 3 y 2x 1 312 3 50
(3) 3 y 2x 1 312 3 50
(4) 3 y 1x 2 312 3 50
(4) 3 y 1x 2 312 3 50

19. If the incentre of an equilateral triangle is

(1, 1) and the equation of its one side is 19. ØçÎ °·¤ â×Õæãé ç˜æÖéÁ ·¤æ ¥´ÌÑ·ð´¤Îý (1, 1) ãñ ÌÍæ
3x14y1350, then the equation of the §â·¤è °·¤ ÖéÁæ ·¤æ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ 3x14y1350 ãñ,
circumcircle of this triangle is :
Ìæð §â ç˜æÖéÁ ·ð¤ ÂçÚUßëžæ ·¤æ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ãñ Ñ
(1) x 21y 222x22y2250
(1) x 21y 222x22y2250
(2) x 21y 2 22x22y21450
(2) x 21y 2 22x22y21450
(3) x 21y 222x22y1250
(3) x 21y 222x22y1250
(4) x 21y 222x22y2750
(4) x 21y 222x22y2750

20. If a circle passing through the point

(21, 0) touches y-axis at (0, 2), then the 20. ØçÎ çÕ´Îé (21, 0) âð ãæð·¤ÚU ÁæÙð ßæÜæ °·¤ ßëžæ
length of the chord of the circle along the y-¥ÿæ ·¤æð (0, 2) ÂÚU SÂàæü ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ, Ìæð x-¥ÿæ ·¤è
x-axis is : çÎàææ ×ð´ ßëžæ ·¤è Áèßæ ·¤è Ü´Õæ§ü ãñ Ñ
3
(1) 3
2 (1)
2
5
(2) 5
2 (2)
2
(3) 3
(3) 3
(4) 5
(4) 5
 Page 7 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 01
21. If the distance between the foci of an ellipse 21. °·¤ Îèƒæüßëžæ ·¤è ÙæçÖØæð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤è ÎêÚUè, §â·ð¤
is half the length of its latus rectum, then
ÙæçÖÜ´Õ ·¤è Ü´Õæ§ü ·¤è ¥æÏè ãñ, Ìæð Îèƒæüßëžæ ·¤è
the eccentricity of the ellipse is :
©ˆ·ð´¤ÎýÌæ ãñ Ñ
1
(1) 1
2 (1)
2
2 2 21
(2) 2 2 21
2 (2)
2
(3) 2 21
(3) 2 21
2 21
(4) 2 21
2 (4)
2

22. Let PQ be a double ordinate of the

parabola, y 2524x, where P lies in the 22. ×æÙæ PQ ÂÚUßÜØ y 2524x ·¤è °·¤ çm·¤æð ç ÅU
second quadrant. If R divides PQ in the (double ordinate) ãñ, ÁÕç·¤ P çmÌèØ ¿ÌéÍæZàæ ×ð´
ratio 2 : 1, then the locus of R is :
ãñÐ ØçÎ R, PQ ·¤æð 2 : 1 ·ð¤ ¥ÙéÂæÌ ×ð´ Õæ´ÅUÌæ ãñ, Ìæð
(1) 9y 2 54x
R ·¤æ çÕ´ÎéÂÍ ãñ Ñ
(2) 9y 2 524x
(1) 9y 2 54x
(3) 3y 2 52x
(2) 9y 2 524x
(4) 3y 2 522x
(3) 3y 2 52x
(4) 3y 2 522x
23. The shortest distance between the z-axis
and the line
x1y12z235052x13y14z24, is : 23. ÚðU¹æ x1y12z235052x13y14z24 ÌÍæ
(1) 1 z-¥ÿæ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤è ‹ØêÙÌ× ÎêÚUè ãñ Ñ
(2) 2 (1) 1
(3) 3 (2) 2
(4) 4 (3) 3
(4) 4
24. A plane containing the point (3, 2, 0) and
x 21 y 22 z 23 24. °·¤ â×ÌÜ çÁâ ÂÚU çÕ´Îé (3, 2, 0) ÌÍæ ÚðU¹æ
the line 5 5 also
1 5 4 x 21 y 22 z 23
contains the point : 5 5 çSÍÌ ãñ´, ÂÚU çِ٠çÕ´Îé
1 5 4
(1) (0, 23, 1) Öè çSÍÌ ãñ Ñ
(2) (0, 7, 10) (1) (0, 23, 1)
(3) (0, 7, 210) (2) (0, 7, 10)
(4) (0, 3, 1) (3) (0, 7, 210)
(4) (0, 3, 1)
 Page 8 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 01

25. In a parallelogram ABCD, 5a, 25. °·¤ â×æ´ÌÚU ¿ÌéÖéüÁ ABCD ×ð´, 5a, 5b
5b and 5c, then has the ÌÍæ 5c ãñ, Ìæð ·¤æ ×æÙ ãñ Ñ
value :

(1)
1
( 2
a 2b 1c2 2
) (1)
1
2
( a2 2 b2 1 c2 )
2

(2)
1
(a 2 2
1b 2c 2
) (2)
1
4
( a2 1 b2 2 c2 )
4

(3)
1
( 2
b 1c 2a2 2
) (3)
1
3
( b2 1 c2 2 a2 )
3

(4)
1
(a 2 2
1b 1c 2
) (4)
1
2
( a2 1 b2 1 c2 )
2

26. If the lengths of the sides of a triangle are

26. °·¤ ¥ÙçÖÙÌ Âæâð ·¤æð ÌèÙ ÕæÚU Èð´¤·¤ ·¤ÚU °·¤ ç˜æÖéÁ
decided by the three throws of a single fair ·¤è ÖéÁæ¥æð´ ·¤è Ü´Õæ§Øæ¡ çÙÏæüçÚUÌ ·¤è ÁæÌè ãñ, Ìæð
die, then the probability that the triangle ç˜æÖéÁ ·ð¤ ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ÿæð˜æÈ¤Ü ·ð¤ ãæðÙð ·¤è ÂýæçØ·¤Ìæ,
is of maximum area given that it is an ÁÕ ç·¤ çÎØæ ãñ ç·¤ ç˜æÖéÁ â×çmÕæãé ãñ, ãñ Ñ
isosceles triangle, is :
1
1 (1)
(1) 26
26
1
1 (2)
(2) 27
27
1
1 (3)
(3) 21
21
1
1 (4)
(4) 15
15

27. If the mean and the variance of a binomial

27. ØçÎ °·¤ çmÂÎ ¿ÚU X ·ð¤ ×æŠØ ÌÍæ ÂýâÚU‡æ ·ý¤×àæÑ 2
variate X are 2 and 1 respectively, then the ÌÍæ 1 ãñ´, Ìæð X ·¤æ ×æÙ 1 Øæ §ââð ¥çÏ·¤ ãæðÙð ·¤è
probability that X takes a value greater ÂýæçØ·¤Ìæ ãñ Ñ
than or equal to one is :
1
1 (1)
(1) 16
16
9
9 (2)
(2) 16
16
3
3 (3)
(3) 4
4
15
15 (4)
(4) 16
16
 Page 9 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 01

3 1 3
28. If cosa 1 cosb 5 and sin a 1 sinb 5 28. ØçÎ cosa 1 cosb 5 ÌÍæ
2 2 2
and u is the arithmetic mean of a and b, 1
then sin2u1cos2u is equal to : sin a 1 sinb 5 ãñ´, ÌÍæ a ÌÍæ b ·¤æ â×æ´ÌÚU
2
3 ×æŠØ u ãñ, Ìæð sin2u1cos2u ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1)
5
3
4 (1)
5
(2)
5
4
7 (2)
5
(3)
5
7
8 (3)
5
(4)
5
8
(4)
5
29. Let 10 vertical poles standing at equal
distances on a straight line, subtend the
same angle of elevation a at a point O on 29. ×æÙæ °·¤ âÚUÜ ÚðU¹æ ÂÚU â×æÙ ÎêçÚUØæð´ ÂÚU ¹Ç¸ð 10
this line and all the poles are on the same ©ŠßæüÏÚU ¹´Öð §â âÚUÜ ÚðU¹æ ·ð¤ °·¤ çÕ´Îé O ÂÚU
side of O. If the height of the longest pole
is ‘h’ and the distance of the foot of the
â×æÙ ©óæØÙ ·¤æð‡æ a ÕÙæÌð ãñ´, ÁÕç·¤ âÖè ¹´Öð O
smallest pole from O is ‘a’ ; then the ·ð¤ °·¤ ãè ¥æðÚU çSÍÌ ãñ´Ð ØçÎ âÕâð ÕǸ𠹴Öð ·¤è
distance between two consecutive poles, ª¡¤¿æ§ü ‘h’ ãñ ÌÍæ âÕâð ÀUæðÅðU ¹´Öð ·ð¤ ÂæÎ ·¤è O âð
is : ÎêÚUè ‘a’ ãñ ; Ìæð Îæð ·ý¤×æ»Ì ¹´Öæð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤è ÎêÚUè ãñ Ñ
h sin a 1 a cosa
(1) h sin a 1 a cosa
9 sin a (1)
9 sin a
h cosa 2 a sin a
(2) h cosa 2 a sin a
9 cosa (2)
9 cosa

(3) h cosa 2 a sin a

(3) h cosa 2 a sin a
9 sin a
9 sin a
h sin a 1 a cosa
(4) h sin a 1 a cosa
9 cosa (4)
9 cosa
 Page 10 MATHEMATICS : English & Hindi 01
30. Consider the following statements : 30. çِ٠·¤ÍÙæð´ ÂÚU çß¿æÚU ·¤èçÁ° Ñ
P : Suman is brilliant.
P : âé×Ù ÂýçÌÖæàææÜè ãñÐ
Q : Suman is rich.
Q : âé×Ù ¥×èÚU ãñÐ
R : Suman is honest.
The negation of the statement, R: âé×Ù §ü×æÙÎæÚU ãñÐ
“Suman is brilliant and dishonest if and ·¤ÍÙ ÒÒâé×Ù ÂýçÌÖæàææÜè ÌÍæ Õð§ü×æÙ ãñ ØçÎ ¥æñÚU
only if Suman is rich” can be equivalently ·ð¤ßÜ ØçÎ âé×Ù ¥×èÚU ãñÓÓ ·¤æ çÙáðÏ çِ٠Âý·¤æÚU âð
expressed as :
ÃØ€Ì ç·¤Øæ Áæ â·¤Ìæ ãñ Ñ
(1) ~Q«~PÙR
(1) ~Q«~PÙR
(2) ~Q«~PÚR
(2) ~Q«~PÚR
(3) ~Q«PÚ~R
(3) ~Q«PÚ~R
(4) ~Q«PÙ~R
(4) ~Q«PÙ~R

-o0o-
-o0o-
JEE Main 2015 Answer Key Paper 1 Online (April 11, 2015) - Code-11
 JEE Main 2014 Question Paper 1 Online April 9, 2014
PART A — PHYSICS Öæ» A — ÖæñçÌ·¤ çߙææÙ
1. An experiment is performed to obtain the 1. ܐÕæ§ü L ·ð¤ °·¤ âÚUÜ ÜæðÜ·¤ ·¤æ ÂýØæð» ·¤ÚU »éL¤ˆßèØ
value of acceleration due to gravity g by ˆßÚU‡æ g ·¤æ ×æÙ çÙ·¤æÜÙð ·¤æ °·¤ ÂýØæð» ç·¤Øæ ÁæÌæ
using a simple pendulum of length L. In ãñÐ §â ÂýØæð» ×ð´ 100 ÎæðÜÙæð´ ·¤æ â×Ø 1 âð·´¤ÇUU
this experiment time for 100 oscillations is ¥ËÂÌ×æ¡·¤ ßæÜè ƒæǸUè âð ×æÂæ ÁæÌæ ãñ ¥æñÚ ×æÙ
measured by using a watch of 1 second 90.0 âð·´¤ÇU ãñРܐÕæ§ü L 1 mm ¥ËÂÌ×æ¡·¤ ßæÜð
least count and the value is 90.0 seconds. ×èÅUÚU Âñ×æÙð âð ×æÂè ÁæÌè ãñ ¥æñÚU §â·¤æ ×æÙ
The length L is measured by using a meter 20.0 cm ãñÐ g ·ð¤ ×æÙ ·ð¤ çÙÏüæÚU‡æ ×𴠘æéçÅU ãæð»è Ñ
scale of least count 1 mm and the value is
20.0 cm. The error in the determination
(1) 1.7%
of g would be :
(2) 2.7%
(1) 1.7%
(3) 4.4%
(2) 2.7%
(4) 2.27%
(3) 4.4%
(4) 2.27%
2. ×êÜ çՋÎé âð t50 ÂÚU ÂýÿæðçÂÌ °·¤ Âýÿæð ·¤è çSÍçÌ
→ ∧ ∧
2. The position of a projectile launched from t52s ÂÚU r 5(40 i 1 50 j ) m âð Îè ÁæÌè ãñÐ
the origin at t50 is given by ØçÎ Âýÿæð ÿæñçÌÁ âð u ·¤æð‡æ ÂÚU ÂýÿæðçÂÌ ç·¤Øæ »Øæ
→ ∧ ∧ Íæ, ÌÕ u ãñ (g510 ms22 Üð´).
r 5(40 i 1 50 j ) m at t52s. If the
projectile was launched at an angle u from
the horizontal, then u is (take g510 ms22). (1) tan21 2 3

(1) tan21 2 3 (2) tan21 3 2

(2) tan21 3 2 (3) tan21 7 4

(3) tan21 7 4 (4) tan21 4 5

(4) tan21 4 5

English : 1 Set : 01 Hindi : 1 Set : 01

3. Water is flowing at a speed of 1.5 ms21 3. 1022 m2 ·ð¤ ¥ÙéÂýSÍ ·¤æÅU ßæÜè ÿæñçÌÁ ÙÜè âð
through a horizontal tube of 1.5 ms21 ·¤è »çÌ âð ÂæÙè ÂýßæçãÌ ãæð ÚUãæ ãñ ¥æñÚU
cross-sectional area 1022 m2 and you are ¥æ ¥ÂÙè ãÍðÜè âð Õãæß ·¤æð ÚUæð·¤Ùð ·¤æ ÂýØæâ ·¤ÚU
trying to stop the flow by your palm. ÚUãð ãñ´Ð Øã ×æÙÌð ãéØð ç·¤ ÂæÙè ãÍðÜè âð ÅU·¤ÚUæÌð ãè
Assuming that the water stops L¤·¤ ÁæÌæ ãñ, ¥æ·¤æð ¥ÂÙè ãÍðÜè âð ·¤× âð ·¤×
immediately after hitting the palm, the §ÌÙæ ÕÜ Ü»æÙæ ÂǸ ð » æÐ ( ÂæÙè ·¤æ
minimum force that you must exert should ƒæوß5103 kgm23).
be (density of water5103 kgm23).
(1) 15 N (1) 15 N
(2) 22.5 N (2) 22.5 N
(3) 33.7 N (3) 33.7 N
(4) 45 N (4) 45 N

4. A block A of mass 4 kg is placed on 4. ÎýÃØ×æÙ 4 kg ·ð¤ °·¤ ŽÜæ·¤ A ·¤æð °·¤ ÎêâÚðU ÎýÃØ×æÙ
another block B of mass 5 kg, and the block 5 kg ·ð¤ °·¤ ŽÜæ·¤ B ·ð¤ ª¤ÂÚU ÚU¹æ ãñ ¥æñÚU ŽÜæ·¤ B
B rests on a smooth horizontal table. If °·¤ ç¿·¤Ùè ÿæñçÌÁ ×ðÁ ÂÚU çߟææ× ¥ßSÍæ ×ð´ ÚU¹æ
the minimum force that can be applied on ãñÐ ØçÎ ŽÜæ·¤ A ÂÚU ß㠋ØêÙÌ× ÕÜ, çÁââð ç·¤
A so that both the blocks move together is ÎæðÙæ´ð ŽÜæ·¤ °·¤ âæÍ »çÌàæèÜ ãæð´, 12 N ãñ ÌÕ
12 N, the maximum force that can be ŽÜæ·¤ B ÂÚU Ü»æØæ »Øæ ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ÕÜ, çÁââð ç·¤
applied on B for the blocks to move ÎæðÙæ´ð ŽÜæ·¤ »çÌàæèÜ ãæð´, ãæð»æ Ñ
together will be :
(1) 30 N (1) 30 N
(2) 25 N (2) 25 N
(3) 27 N (3) 27 N
(4) 48 N (4) 48 N

English : 2 Set : 01 Hindi : 2 Set : 01

5. Two bodies of masses 1 kg and 4 kg are 5. ÎýÃØ×æÙ 1 kg °ß´ 4 kg ·¤è Îæð ßSÌé°ð´ °·¤ ª¤ŠßæüÏÚU
connected to a vertical spring, as shown ·¤×æÙè mæÚUæ ç¿˜æ ·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚU ÁæðǸUè »Øè ãñ´Ð ¥ËÂÌÚU
in the figure. The smaller mass executes ÎýÃØ×æÙ ·¤æð‡æèØ ¥æßëçžæ 25 rad/s °ß´ ¥æØæ×
simple harmonic motion of angular 1.6 cm ·¤è âÚUÜ ¥æßÌü »çÌ ·¤ÚU ÚUãæ ãñ ÁÕç·¤
frequency 25 rad/s, and amplitude 1.6 cm ÕëãžæÚU ÎýÃØ×æÙ çSÍÚU ÚUãÌæ ãñÐ çÙ·¤æØ mæÚUæ Ȥàæü ÂÚU
while the bigger mass remains stationary Ü»æØæ »Øæ ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ÕÜ ãñ
on the ground. The maximum force (g510 ms22 Üð´).
exerted by the system on the floor is
(take g510 ms22).

(1) 20 N
(2) 10 N
(1) 20 N
(3) 60 N
(2) 10 N
(4) 40 N
(3) 60 N
(4) 40 N

English : 3 Set : 01 Hindi : 3 Set : 01

6. A cylinder of mass Mc and sphere of mass 6. ÎýÃØ×æÙ Mc ·ð¤ °·¤ ÕðÜÙ °ß´ ÎýÃØ×æÙ Ms ·ð¤ °·¤
Ms are placed at points A and B of two »æðÜð ·¤æð ·ý¤×àæÑ Îæð ¥æÙÌ ÌÜæð´ ·ð¤ çՋÎé¥æð´ A °ß´ B
inclines, respectively. (See Figure). If they ÂÚU ÚU¹æ »Øæ ãñÐ (翘æ Îð¹ð´) Ð ØçÎ ßð çÕÙæ çȤâÜð
roll on the incline without slipping such ¥æÙÌ ÌÜ ÂÚU §â Âý·¤æÚU Üéɸ·¤Ìð ãñ´ ç·¤ ©Ù·ð¤ ˆßÚU‡æ
that their accelerations are the same, then sin uc
°·¤ â×æÙ ãñ, ÌÕ ¥ÙéÂæÌ ãñ :
sin uc sin us
the ratio is :
sin us

8
(1)
8 7
(1)
7
15
(2)
15 14
(2)
14
8
(3)
8 7
(3)
7 15
(4)
15 14
(4)
14

English : 4 Set : 01 Hindi : 4 Set : 01

7. India’s Mangalyan was sent to the Mars 7.
by launching it into a transfer orbit EOM
around the sun. It leaves the earth at E
and meets Mars at M. If the semi-major
axis of Earth’s orbit is ae51.531011 m,
that of Mar’s orbit a m 52.28310 11 m,
taken Kepler’s laws give the estimate of
time for Mangalyan to reach Mars from
Earth to be close to :
ÖæÚUÌ ·¤æ ×´»ÜØæÙ ×´»Ü »ýã ·ð¤ çÜØð âêØü ·ð¤ ¿æÚUæð´
¥æðÚU SÍæÙæ‹ÌÚU‡æ ·¤ÿæ EOM ×ð´ ÂýÿæðçÂÌ ç·¤Øæ »ØæÐ
§âÙð Âë‰ßè ·¤æð E ÂÚU ÀUæðÇ¸æ ¥æñÚU ×´»Ü »ýã âð Øã M
ÂÚU ç×ÜÌæ ãñÐ ØçÎ Âë‰ßè ·¤è ¥hü-Îèƒæü ¥ÿæ
ae51.531011 m ãñ ¥æñÚU ×´»Ü »ýã ·¤è ¥hü-Îèƒæü
¥ÿæ am52.2831011 m ãñ, ÌÕ ·ð¤ÂÜÚU ·ð¤ çÙØ×
·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚU Âë‰ßè âð ×´»Ü»ýã Ì·¤ ×´»ÜØæÙ ·ð¤ Âãé¡¿Ùð
·¤æ â×Ø Ü»Ö» ãæð»æ Ñ

(1) 500 days (1) 500 çÎÙ

(2) 320 days (2) 320 çÎÙ
(3) 260 days (3) 260 çÎÙ
(4) 220 days (4) 220 çÎÙ

English : 5 Set : 01 Hindi : 5 Set : 01

8. In materials like aluminium and copper, 8. °ËØéç×çÙØ× °ß´ Ìæ¡Õð Áñâð ÂÎæÍæðü´ ·ð¤ çÜØð çßç֋Ù
the correct order of magnitude of various ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ »é‡ææ¡·¤æð´ ·ð¤ ÂçÚU×æ‡æ ·¤æ âãè ·ý¤× ãñ Ñ
elastic modulii is :
(1) Young’s modulii < shear modulii (1) Ø´» ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ »é‡ææ¡·¤ < ¥ÂM¤Â‡æ ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ
< bulk modulii. »é‡ææ¡·¤ < ¥æØÌÙ ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ »é‡ææ¡·¤.
(2) Bulk modulii < shear modulii (2) ¥æØÌÙ Âý ˆ ØæSÍÌæ »é ‡ ææ¡ · ¤ < ¥ÂM¤Â‡æ
< Young’s modulii. ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ »é‡ææ¡·¤ < Ø´» ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ »é‡ææ¡·¤.
(3) Shear modulii < Young’s modulii (3) ¥ÂM¤Â‡æ ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ »é‡ææ¡·¤ < Ø´» ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ
< bulk modulii. »é‡ææ¡·¤ < ¥æØÌÙ ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ »é‡ææ¡·¤.
(4) Bulk modulii < Young’s modulii (4) ¥æØÌÙ ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ »é‡ææ¡·¤ < Ø´» ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ
< shear modulii. »é‡ææ¡·¤ < ¥ÂM¤Â‡æ ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ »é‡ææ¡·¤.

9. The amplitude of a simple pendulum, 9. ßæØé ×ð´ ÎæðÜÙ ·¤ÚU ÚUãð °·¤ ÌÙé »æðÜèØ ÕæÕ ßæÜð âÚUÜ
oscillating in air with a small spherical bob, ÜæðÜ·¤ ·¤æ ¥æØæ× 40 âð·´¤ÇU ×ð´ 10 cm âð 8 cm
decreases from 10 cm to 8 cm in 40 seconds. Ì·¤ ƒæÅU ÁæÌæ ãñ Ð Øã ×æÙ Üð´ ç·¤ SÅUæð·¤ ·¤æ çÙØ×
Assuming that Stokes law is valid, and âãè ãñ ¥æñÚU ßæØé ·¤æ ·¤æÕüÙ ÇUæ§ü¥æò€âæ§Ç âð àØæÙÌæ
ratio of the coefficient of viscosity of air to »é‡ææ´·¤ ·¤æ ¥ÙéÂæÌ 1.3 ãñ, ÌÕ ·¤æÕüÙ ÇUæ§ü ¥æò€âæ§ÇU
that of carbon dioxide is 1.3, the time in ×ð´ §â ÜæðÜ·¤ ·ð¤ ¥æØæ× ·¤æð 10 cm âð 5 cm Ì·¤
which amplitude of this pendulum will ƒæÅUÙð ×ð ´ Ü»æ â×Ø Ü»Ö» ãæð » æ
reduce from 10 cm to 5 cm in (ln 551.601, ln 250.693).
carbondioxide will be close to (ln 551.601,
ln 250.693).
(1) 231 s (1) 231 s
(2) 208 s (2) 208 s
(3) 161 s (3) 161 s
(4) 142 s (4) 142 s

English : 6 Set : 01 Hindi : 6 Set : 01

10. A capillary tube is immersed vertically in 10. °·¤ ·ð¤àæÙçÜ·¤æ ·¤æ𠪤ŠßæüÏÚU ÂæÙè ×ð´ ÇéUÕæðØæ ÁæÌæ ãñ
water and the height of the water column ¥æñÚU ÌÕ ÂæÙè ·ð¤ SÌÖ ·¤è ª¡¤¿æ§ü x ãæð ÁæÌè ãñÐ ÁÕ
is x. When this arrangement is taken into §â çߋØæâ ·¤æð °·¤ »ãÚUæ§ü d ßæÜè °·¤ ¹æÙ ×ð´ Üð
a mine of depth d, the height of the water ÁæØæ ÁæÌæ ãñ, ÌÕ ÂæÙè ·ð¤ SÌÖ ·¤è ª¡¤¿æ§ü y ãñÐ
column is y. If R is the radius of earth, the ØçÎ Âë‰ßè ·¤è ç˜æ’Øæ R ãñ, ÌÕ ¥ÙéÂæÌ x ãñ Ñ
x y
ratio is :
y
 d  d
(1)  12  (1)  12 
 R R

 2d   2d 
(2)  12  (2)  12 
R R

 R 2d   R 2d 
(3)  R 1d  (3)  R 1d 

 R 1d   R 1d 
(4)  R 2d  (4)  R 2d 

11. Water of volume 2 L in a closed container 11. °·¤ ՋΠÂæ˜æ ×ð´ 2 L ¥æØÌÙ ÂæÙè ·¤æð 1 kW ·¤è
is heated with a coil of 1 kW. While water ·é¤‡ÇUÜè âð »×ü ç·¤Øæ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ ÁÕ ÂæÙè »×ü ãæð ÚUãæ
is heated, the container loses energy at a ãñ, ÌÕ Âæ˜æ 160 J/s ·¤è ÎÚU â𠪤Áæü ·¤æ ÿæØ ·¤ÚU ÚUãæ
rate of 160 J/s. In how much time will the ãñÐ ç·¤ÌÙð â×Ø ×ð´ ÂæÙè ·¤æ ÌæÂ×æÙ 278C âð
temperature of water rise from 278C to 778C Âãé ¡ ¿ ð » æ? ( ÂæÙè ·¤è çßçàæcÅU ª¤c×æ
778C ? (Specific heat of water is 4.2 kJ/kg ãñ ¥æñÚU Âæ˜æ ·¤è çßçàæcÅU ª¤c×æ Ù»‡Ø ãñ)
4.2 kJ/kg and that of the container is
negligible).
(1) 8 min 20 s (1) 8 ç×ÙÅU 20 âð·´¤ÇU
(2) 6 min 2 s (2) 6 ç×ÙÅU 2 âð·´¤ÇUU
(3) 7 min (3) 7 ç×ÙÅU
(4) 14 min (4) 14 ç×ÙÅU

English : 7 Set : 01 Hindi : 7 Set : 01

12. The equation of state for a gas is given by 12.
PV5nRT1aV, where n is the number of
moles and a is a positive constant. The
initial temperature and pressure of one
mole of the gas contained in a cylinder are
To and Po respectively. The work done by
the gas when its temperature doubles
isobarically will be :
°·¤ »ñâ ·¤è ¥ßSÍæ ·¤æ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ PV5nRT1aV
âð çÎØæ ÁæÌæ ãñ, Áãæ¡ n ×æðÜ ·¤è ⴁØæ ãñ ¥æñÚU a °·¤
ÏÙæˆ×·¤ çSÍÚUæ¡·¤ ãñÐ °·¤ ÕðÜÙ ×ð´ ÚU¹ð »ñ⠷𤠰·¤
×æðÜ ·¤æ ÂýæÚUçÖ·¤ ÌæÂ×æÙ °ß´ ÎæÕ ·ý¤×àæÑ To °ß´
Po ãñÐ ÁÕ §â·¤æ ÌæÂ×æÙ â×ÎæÕ ÂÚU Îæð»éÙæ ãæð
Áæ°ð»æ, ÌÕ »ñâ mæÚUæ ç·¤Øæ »Øæ ·¤æØü ãæð»æ Ñ

Po To R Po To R
(1) (1)
Po 2a Po 2a

Po To R Po To R
(2) (2)
Po 1a Po 1a

(3) Po To R ln 2 (3) Po To R ln 2
(4) P o To R (4) Po To R

13. Modern vacuum pumps can evacuate a 13. ¥æÏéçÙ·¤ çÙßæüÌ ÂÂ ·¤×ÚðU ·ð¤ ÌæÂ×æÙ (300 K) ÂÚU
vessel down to a pressure of 4.0310215 atm. 4.0310215 °ÅUU×æSȤèØÚU ÎæÕ Ì·¤ °·¤ ÕÌüÙ ·¤æð
at room temperature (300 K). Taking çÙßæüçÌÌ ·¤ÚU â·¤Ìæ ãñÐ R58.3 JK21 ×æðÜ21,
R58.3 JK21 mole21, 1 atm5105 Pa and 1 °ÅU×æSȤèØÚU5105 ÂæS·¤Ü ¥æñÚU °ßæð»ðÇþUæð ⴁØæ
N Avogadro 56310 23 mole 21 , the mean 5631023 ×æðÜ21 ÜðÌð ãéØð °·¤ çÙßæüçÌÌ ÕÌüÙ ×ð´
distance between molecules of gas in an »ñ⠷𤠥‡æé¥æ´ð ·ð¤ Õè¿ ×æŠØ ÎêÚUè ·¤æ ×æ٠ֻܻ
evacuated vessel will be of the order of : §ÌÙæ ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) 0.2 mm (1) 0.2 mm
(2) 0.2 mm (2) 0.2 mm
(3) 0.2 cm (3) 0.2 cm
(4) 0.2 nm (4) 0.2 nm

English : 8 Set : 01 Hindi : 8 Set : 01

14. A particle which is simultaneously 14. °·¤ ·¤‡æ, çÁâ ÂÚU °·¤ âæÍ Îæð ܐÕßÌ÷ âÚUÜ ¥æßÌü
subjected to two perpendicular simple
»çÌØæ¡ x5a1 cos vt ¥æñÚU y5a2 cos 2vt Ü» ÚUãè
harmonic motions represented by ;
x5a1 cos vt and y5a2 cos 2vt traces a ãñ´, §â ß·ý¤ ·¤æð ÎàææüØð»æ Ñ
curve given by :

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

English : 9 Set : 01 Hindi : 9 Set : 01

15. A transverse wave is represented by : 15. °·¤ ¥ÙéÂýSÍ ÌÚ´U» §ââð ÎàææüØè ÁæÌè ãñ Ñ
10 2p 2p  10 2p 2p 
y5 sin  t2 x y5 sin  t2 x
p  T l  p  T l 
For what value of the wavelength the ÌÚ´U»ÎñŠØü ·ð¤ ç·¤â ×æÙ ·ð¤ çÜ°ð ÌÚ´U» ßð» ·¤æ ×æÙ
wave velocity is twice the maximum ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ·¤‡æ ßð» ·¤æ Îæð»éÙæ ãæð»æ?
particle velocity ?
(1) 40 cm (1) 40 cm
(2) 20 cm (2) 20 cm
(3) 10 cm (3) 10 cm
(4) 60 cm (4) 60 cm

16. The magnitude of the average electric field 16. Âë‰ßè ·ð¤ ÂëcÆU âð ÁÚUæ ª¤ÂÚU ßæÌæßÚU‡æ ×ð´ âæÏæÚU‡æÌØæ
normally present in the atmosphere just ©ÂçSÍÌ ¥æñ â Ì çßlé Ì ÿæð ˜ æ ·¤æ ÂçÚU×æ‡æ
above the surface of the Earth is about 150 N/C ·ð¤ ֻܻ ãñ çÁâ·¤è çÎàææ Âë‰ßè ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý
150 N/C, directed inward towards the ·¤è ¥æðÚU ¥‹ÌÚU×é¹è ãñÐ Øã Âë‰ßè mæÚUæ ßæã·¤ ÂçÚU‡ææ×è
center of the Earth. This gives the total ÂëcÆU ¥æßðàæ Îð»æ Ñ
net surface charge carried by the Earth to [ çÎØæ ãñ e o 58.85310 212 C 2 /N-m 2 ,
be : RE56.373106 m]
[Given e o 58.85310 212 C 2 /N-m 2 ,
RE56.373106 m]
(1) 1670 kC (1) 1670 kC
(2) 2670 kC (2) 2670 kC
(3) 2680 kC (3) 2680 kC
(4) 1680 kC (4) 1680 kC

English : 10 Set : 01 Hindi : 10 Set : 01

17. Three capacitances, each of 3 mF, are 17. ÂýˆØð·¤ 3 mF ·ð¤ ÌèÙ â´ÏæçÚU˜æ çÎØð »Øð ãñ´Ð §Ù·¤æ
provided. These cannot be combined to ç·¤âè Öè Âý·¤æÚU ·¤æ â´ØæðÁÙ çِ٠×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âæ
provide the resultant capacitance of : ÂçÚU‡ææ×è ÏæçÚUÌæ Ùãè´ Îð»æ?
(1) 1 mF (1) 1 mF
(2) 2 mF (2) 2 mF
(3) 4.5 mF (3) 4.5 mF
(4) 6 mF (4) 6 mF

18. A d.c. main supply of e.m.f. 220 V is 18. çßléÌ ßæã·¤ ÕÜ 220 V ·¤è °·¤ çÎcÅU ÏæÚUæ ×éØ
connected across a storage battery of âŒÜæ§ü ·¤æð °·¤ 1 V ·¤ð¤ ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ mæÚUæ çßléÌ ßæã·¤
e.m.f. 200 V through a resistance of 1 V. ÕÜ 200 V ·¤è °·¤ â´ÖæçÚUÌ ÕñÅUÚè âð ÁæðǸæ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ
The battery terminals are connected to an ÕñÅUÚUè ·ð¤ ÅUç×üÙÜ ·¤æð °·¤ Õæ±Ø ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ ‘R’ âð ÁæðǸæ
external resistance ‘R’. The minimum ÁæÌæ ãñÐ ‘R’ ·¤æ ‹ØêÙÌ× ×æÙ, çÁââð ç·¤ ÕñÅUÚUè ×ð´
value of ‘R’, so that a current passes ÏæÚUæ ÂýßæçãÌ ãæð·¤ÚU ©âð ¥æßðçàæÌ ·¤ÚðU, ãñ Ñ
through the battery to charge it is :
(1) 7V (1) 7V
(2) 9V (2) 9V
(3) 11 V (3) 11 V
(4) Zero (4) àæê‹Ø

English : 11 Set : 01 Hindi : 11 Set : 01

19. The mid points of two small magnetic 19.
dipoles of length d in end-on positions, are
separated by a distance x, (x >> d). The
force between them is proportional to
x2n where n is :
¥ÿæèØ çSÍçÌ ×ð´ ܐÕæ§ü d ·ð¤ Îæð ÌÙé ¿éÕ·¤èØ çmÏéýßæ´ð
·ð¤ ×ŠØ çՋÎé¥æð´ ·¤æð x ÎêÚUè ÂÚU ÚU¹æ »Øæ ãñ (x >>d)Ð
ÎæðÙæð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ÕÜ x2n ·¤ð¤ â×æÙéÂæÌè ãñ, Áãæ¡ n ãñ :

(1) 1
(2) 2
(1) 1
(3) 3
(2) 2
(4) 4
(3) 3
(4) 4
20. Öê × ŠØ Úð U ¹ æ ÂÚU Âë ‰ ßè ·ð ¤ ¿é  Õ·¤èØ ÿæð ˜ æ ·¤æ
×æ٠ֻܻ 431025 T ãñÐ Âë‰ßè ·¤è ç˜æ’Øæ
20. The magnetic field of earth at the equator 6.43106 m ãñÐ ÌÕ Âë‰ßè ·¤æ çmÏýéß ¥æƒæê‡æü ֻܻ
is approximately 431025 T. The radius §â ·¤æðçÅU ·¤æ ãæð»æ Ñ
of earth is 6.43106 m. Then the dipole
moment of the earth will be nearly of the (1) 1023 A m2
order of :
(2) 1020 A m2
(1) 1023 A m2
(3) 1016 A m2
(2) 1020 A m2
(4) 1010 A m2
(3) 1016 A m2
(4) 1010 A m2

English : 12 Set : 01 Hindi : 12 Set : 01

21. When the rms voltages VL, VC and VR are 21. °·¤ Âý ˆ ØæßÌèü ÏæÚU æ Ÿææð Ì âð Áé Ç ¸ ð Ÿæð ‡ æè LCR
measured respectively across the inductor ÂçÚUÂÍ ×ð´ ÂýðÚU·¤ˆß L â´ÏæçÚUÌ C ¥æñÚU ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ·¤ R ÂÚU
L, the capacitor C and the resistor R in a ×æÂð »Øð ß»ü - ×æŠØ-×ê Ü ßæð Ë ÅUÌæ°ð ´ ·ý ¤ ×àæÑ
series LCR circuit connected to an VL, VC °ß´ VR ãñ´, ÌÕ Øã ÂæØæ ÁæÌæ ãñ ç·¤
AC source, it is found that the ratio VL : VC : VR51 : 2 : 3 Ð ØçÎ ÂýˆØæßÌèü ÏæÚUæ oýæðÌ
VL : VC : VR51 : 2 : 3. If the rms voltage ·¤è ß»ü-×æŠØ-×êÜ ßæðËÅUÌæ 100 V ãñ´, ÌÕ VR ·¤æ
of the AC source is 100 V, then VR is close ×æ٠ֻܻ ãñ Ñ
to :
(1) 50 V (1) 50 V
(2) 70 V (2) 70 V
(3) 90 V (3) 90 V
(4) 100 V (4) 100 V

English : 13 Set : 01 Hindi : 13 Set : 01

22. Match List I (Wavelength range of 22. âê¿è I (çßléÌ ¿éÕ·¤èØ SÂð€ÅþU× ·¤è ÌÚ´U»ÎñŠØü ÚðU‹Á)
electromagnetic spectrum) with List II. ·¤æð âê¿è II (§Ù ÌÚ´U»æð´ ·ð¤ çÙ×æü‡æ ·¤è çßçÏ) âð âé×ðçÜÌ
(Method of production of these waves) ·¤èçÁ°ð ¥æñÚU âê¿è ·ð¤ Ùè¿ð çÎØð »Øð çß·¤ËÂæ´ð ×ð´ âð
and select the correct option from the âãè çß·¤Ë ¿éçÙ°Ð
options given below the lists.
ÇÏ¤Í I ÇÏ¤Í II
List I List II 700 nm ÇÕ ŠøËΊËՙ •Ä™ §¿U¼ËøËΊËՙ œÕ‰
(a) (i)
(a)
700 nm to
(i)
Vibration of atoms 1 mm œ‰ƒ§¾ ÇÕ
1 mm and molecules.
§¿U¼ËøËΊËՙ œÕ‰ ŠËü±Ì¿Uœ‰ ÅËÖÁ
Inner shell electrons 1 nm ÇÕ
(b) (ii) ŒÁÕþªãU˾Ëՙ œ‰Í •œ‰ ‰¦Ëá S±¿U
1 nm to in atoms moving from 400 nm
(b) (ii) ÇÕ Ì¾¤ÁÕ S±¿U œ‰Í  Ì± ÇÕ
400 nm one energy level to a
lower level.
¾ËÌ»œ‰ œÕ‰ ¿ÕU̬U½ËÕ Ç̜≽
(c) < 1023 nm (iii)
(c) < 10 23 nm (iii)
Radioactive decay of ä˽ ÇÕ
the nucleus.
1 mm ÇÕ
(d) (iv) ¼Öó¾ÕªUã ˾
† ÄË°Ä ÇÕ
1 mm to 0.1 m
(d) (iv) Magnetron valve.
0.1 m
(1) (a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i)
(1) (a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i) (2) (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii)
(2) (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii) (3) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(i)
(3) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(i) (4) (a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv)
(4) (a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv)

English : 14 Set : 01 Hindi : 14 Set : 01

23. A diver looking up through the water sees 23. °·¤ »æðÌæ¹æðÚU ÂæÙè ·ð¤ ¥‹ÎÚU âð ÕæãÚU ·¤è ÎéçÙØæ ·¤æð
the outside world contained in a circular °·¤ ßëžæèØ ÿæñçÌÁ ×ð´ çÙçãÌ Îð¹Ìæ ãñÐ ÂæÙè ·¤æ
horizon. The refractive index of water is
¥ÂßÌüÙæ¡·¤ 4 ãñ ¥æñÚU »æðÌæ¹æðÚU ·¤è ¥æ¡¹ ÂæÙè ·ð¤
4 3
3
, and the diver’s eyes are 15 cm below ÂëcÆU âð 15 cm Ùè¿ð ãñ´Ð ÌÕ ßëžæ ·¤è ç˜æ’Øæ ãñ Ñ
the surface of water. Then the radius of
the circle is :

(1) 15333 5 cm (1) 15333 5 cm

(2) 1533 7 cm (2) 1533 7 cm

153 7 153 7
(3) cm (3) cm
3 3

153 3 153 3
(4) cm (4) cm
7 7

English : 15 Set : 01 Hindi : 15 Set : 01

24. Using monochromatic light of wavelength 24.
l, an experimentalist sets up the Young’s
double slit experiment in three ways as
shown.
If she observes that y5b9, the wavelength
of light used is :
ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü l ·ð¤ °·¤ß‡æèü Âý·¤æàæ ·ð¤ ÂýØæð» âð °·¤ ßñ™ææçÙ·¤
Ø´» ·ð¤ çmçÀUÎý ÂýØæð» ·¤æð ÎàææüØð »Øð ÌèÙ Âý·¤æÚU âð
ÃØßçSÍÌ ·¤ÚUÌè ãñÐ
ØçÎ ßã ÂæÌè ãñ ç·¤ y5b9, ÌÕ ÂýØæð» ç·¤Øð »Øð
Âý·¤æàæ ·¤è ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü ãñ Ñ

English : 16 Set : 01 Hindi : 16 Set : 01

 (1) 520 nm (1) 520 nm
(2) 540 nm (2) 540 nm
(3) 560 nm (3) 560 nm
(4) 580 nm (4) 580 nm

25. The focal lengths of objective lens and eye

lens of a Gallelian Telescope are 25. °·¤ »ñçÜçÜØÙ ÎêÚUÎàæèü ·ð¤ ¥çÖÎëàØ·¤ °ß´ Ùðç˜æ·¤æ
respectively 30 cm and 3.0 cm. Telescope Üð‹â ·¤è $Ȥæð·¤â ܐÕæ§Øæ¡ ·ý¤×àæÑ 30 cm °ß´
produces virtual, erect image of an object 3.0 cm ãñÐ ÎêÚUÎàæèü Ùðç˜æ·¤æ Üð‹â âð âéSÂcÅU ÎàæüÙ
situated far away from it at least distance ·¤è ‹ØêÙÌ× ÎêÚUè ÂÚU °·¤ ¥ˆØ‹Ì ÎêÚU ·¤è ßSÌé ·¤æ
of distinct vision from the eye lens. In this ¥æÖæâè, âèÏæ ÂýçÌçÕÕ ÕÙæÌæ ãñÐ §â çSÍçÌ ×ð´,
condition, the Magnifying Power of the »ñçÜçÜØÙ ÎêÚUÎàæèü ·¤è ¥æßÏüÙ ÿæ×Ìæ ãæð»è Ñ
Gallelian Telescope should be :
(1) 111.2
(2) 211.2 (1) 111.2
(3) 28.8 (2) 211.2
(4) 18.8 (3) 28.8
(4) 18.8
26. For which of the following particles will it
be most difficult to experimentally verify 26. çِÙçÜç¹Ì ·¤‡ææð ´ ×ð ´ âð 緤⠷¤‡æ ·ð ¤ çÜØð
the de-Broglie relationship ? ÇUè-Õýæ‚Üè âÕ‹Ï ·¤æ ÂýæØæðç»·¤ âˆØæÂÙ ¥ˆØçÏ·¤
(1) an electron ×éçà·¤Ü ãæð»æ?
(2) a proton (1) °·¤ §Üð€ÅþUæÙ$
(3) an a-particle (2) °·¤ ÂýæðÅUæòÙ
(4) a dust particle (3) °·¤ a-·¤‡æ
(4) °·¤ ÏêÜ ·¤æ ·¤‡æ

English : 17 Set : 01 Hindi : 17 Set : 01

27. If the binding energy of the electron in a 27. ØçÎ ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ÂÚU×æ‡æé ×ð´ §Üð€ÅþUæÙ ·¤è ՋÏÙ ª¤Áæü
hydrogen atom is 13.6 eV, the energy 13.6 eV ãñ, ÌÕ Li11 ·¤è ÂýÍ× ©žæðçÁÌ ¥ßSÍæ
required to remove the electron from the âð §Üð€ÅþUæÙ ÕæãÚU çÙ·¤æÜÙð ×ð´ ¥æßàØ·¤ ª¤Áæü ãñ Ñ
first excited state of Li11 is :
(1) 122.4 eV (1) 122.4 eV
(2) 30.6 eV (2) 30.6 eV
(3) 13.6 eV (3) 13.6 eV
(4) 3.4 eV (4) 3.4 eV

28. Identify the gate and match A, B, Y in

bracket to check. 28. »ðÅU ·¤æð Âã¿æçÙ°ð ¥æñÚU ·¤æðcÅU·¤ ×ð´ A, B, Y ·ð¤ ×æÙ âð
âé×ðçÜÌ ·¤ÚU Áæ¡¿ ·¤èçÁ°ðÐ

(1) AND (A51, B51, Y51)

(2) OR (A51, B51, Y50) (1) AND (A51, B51, Y51)
(3) NOT (A51, B51, Y51) (2) OR (A51, B51, Y50)
(4) XOR (A50, B50, Y50) (3) NOT (A51, B51, Y51)
(4) XOR (A50, B50, Y50)
29. A transmitting antenna at the top of a
tower has a height 32 m and the height of
the receiving antenna is 50 m. What is the
29. °·¤ ×èÙæÚU ·ð¤ àæèáü ÂÚU Âýðá‡æ °ç‹ÅUÙæ ·¤è ª¡¤¿æ§ü 32 m
maximum distance between them for ãñ ¥æñÚU ¥çÖ»ýæãè °ç‹ÅUÙæ ·¤è ª¡¤¿æ§ü 50 m ãñÐ
satisfactory communication in line of sight ÎëçcÅUÚðU¹èØ (LOS) ×æðÇU ×ð´ â´ÌæðáÂýÎ â´¿ÚU‡æ ·ð¤ çÜ°
(LOS) mode ? ÎæðÙæ´ð °ç‹ÅUÙæ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ÎêÚUè €Øæ ãñ?
(1) 55.4 km (1) 55.4 km
(2) 45.5 km (2) 45.5 km
(3) 54.5 km (3) 54.5 km
(4) 455 km (4) 455 km

English : 18 Set : 01 Hindi : 18 Set : 01

30. An n-p-n transistor has three leads 30.
A, B and C. Connecting B and C by moist
fingers, A to the positive lead of an
ammeter, and C to the negative lead of the
ammeter, one finds large deflection. Then,
A, B and C refer respectively to :
(1) Emitter, base and collector
(2) Base, emitter and collector
(3) Base, collector and emitter
(4) Collector, emitter and base.
English : 19 Set : 01
°·¤ n-p-n Åþ U æç‹ÁSÅUÚU ×ð ´ ÌèÙ ¿æÜ·¤ ÌæÚU
A, B °ß´ C ãñ´Ð »èÜè ¥´»éçÜØæð´ âð B °ß´ C ·¤æð
ÁæðǸÙð ÂÚU, °·¤ ÏæÚUæ×æÂè ·¤æð ÏÙæˆ×·¤ ¿æÜ·¤ ÌæÚU
·¤æð A âð ÁæðǸÙð ÂÚU ¥æñÚU ÏæÚUæ×æÂè ·¤è «¤‡ææˆ×·¤
¿æÜ·¤ ÌæÚU ·¤æð C âð ÁæðǸÙð ÂÚU °·¤ Âýðÿæ·¤ ¥ˆØçÏ·¤
çßÿæð ÂæÌæ ãñÐ ÌÕ A, B °ß´ C ·¤æ â´ÎÖü ·ý¤×àæÑ
§Ùâð ãñ Ñ
(1) ©ˆâÁü·¤, ¥æÏæÚU °ß´ â´»ýæãè
(2) ¥æÏæÚU, ©ˆâÁü·¤ °ß´ â´»ýæãè
(3) ¥æÏæÚU, â´»ýæãè °ß´ ©ˆâÁü·¤
(4) â´»ýæãè, ©ˆâÁü·¤ °ß´ ¥æÏæÚU
Hindi : 19 Set : 01
 PART B — CHEMISTRY Öæ» B — ÚUâæØÙ çߙææÙ
31. In a face centered cubic lattice atoms A 31. °·¤ Ȥܷ¤ ·ð¤ç‹ÎýÌ ƒæÙæ·¤æÚU ÁæÜ·¤ ×ð´ A ·ð¤¤ ÂÚU×æ‡æé
are at the corner points and atoms B at ·¤æðÙæð´ ·ð¤ çՋÎé¥æð´ ÂÚU ãñ´ ¥æñÚU B ·ð¤ ÂÚU×æ‡æé Ȥܷ¤
the face centered points. If atom B is ·ð¤‹Îýæð´ ÂÚU ãñ´Ð ØçÎ B ÂÚU×æ‡æé °·¤ Ȥܷ¤ ·ð¤‹Îý ÂÚU Ù
missing from one of the face centered ãæð Ìæð ¥æØçÙ·¤ Øæñç»·¤ ·¤æ âê˜æ ãæð»æ Ñ
points, the formula of the ionic compound
is : (1) AB2
(1) AB 2 (2) A 5B 2
(2) A 5B2 (3) A2B 3
(3) A 2B3 (4) A2B 5
(4) A 2B5

32. °·¤ »ñâ ·ð¤ çÜØð ßæ‹ÇUÚU ßæÜ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ

32. Van der Waal’s equation for a gas is stated 2
nRT  n
as, p5 2a   .
V 2 nb  V
2
nRT  n ãæðÌæ ãñÐ Øã â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ¥æÎàæü »ñâ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ·¤æ
p5 2a   .
V 2 nb  V
nRT
This equation reduces to the perfect gas
M¤Â, p5
V
ÏæÚU‡æ ·¤ÚU Üð»æ ÁÕ Ñ
nRT
equation, p 5 when ,
V
(1) Ìæ ÂØæüŒÌ ©‘¿ ãæð»æ ¥æñÚU ÎæÕ ‹ØêÙ ãæð»æÐ
(1) temperature is sufficiently high and
pressure is low.
(2) Ìæ ÂØæüŒÌ ‹ØêÙ ãæð»æ ¥æñÚU ÎæÕ ©‘¿ ãæð»æÐ
(2) temperature is sufficiently low and
pressure is high.
(3) Ìæ ¥æñÚU ÎæÕ ÎæðÙæð´ ÕãéÌ ©‘¿ ãæð´»ðÐ
(3) both temperature and pressure are
very high.
(4) Ìæ ¥æñÚU ÎæÕ ÎæðÙæð´ ÕãéÌ ‹ØêÙ ãæð´»ðÐ
(4) both temperature and pressure are
very low.

English : 20 Set : 01 Hindi : 20 Set : 01

33. The standard electrode potentials 33. ¿æÚU ÏæÌé¥æð´ A, B, C ¥æñÚU D ·ð¤ SÅñU‹ÇUÇüU (×æÙ·¤)

(E ) of four metals A, B, C and D are

o
M /M
1 §Üñ € Åþ U æð Ç U çßÖß (E )o
M /M
1 ·ý × æÙé â æÚU
21.2 V , 0.6 V, 0.85 V and 20.76 V, 21.2 V, 0.6 V, 0.85 V ¥æñÚU 20.76 V ãñ´Ð çßÖß
respectively. The sequence of deposition Üæ»ê ·¤ÚUÙð ÂÚU ÏæÌé Á×Ùð ·¤æ ·ý¤× ãæð»æ Ñ
of metals on applying potential is :
(1) A, C, B, D (1) A, C, B, D
(2) B, D, C, A (2) B, D, C, A
(3) C, B, D, A (3) C, B, D, A
(4) D, A, B, C (4) D, A, B, C

34. At a certain temperature, only 50% HI is 34. °·¤ Ìæ çßàæðá âæØÂÚU ·ð¤ßÜ 50% HI, H2 ¥æñÚU
dissociated into H2 and I2 at equilibrium. I2 ×ð´ çßÖæçÁÌ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ âæØ çSÍÚUæ´·¤ ·¤æ ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
The equilibrium constant is :
(1) 1.0 (1) 1.0
(2) 3.0 (2) 3.0
(3) 0.5 (3) 0.5
(4) 0.25 (4) 0.25

35. Dissolving 120 g of a compound of 35. °·¤ Øæñç»·¤ (¥‡æéÖæÚU 60) ·¤è 120 »ýæ× ×æ˜ææ ·¤æð
(mol. wt. 60) in 1000 g of water gave a 1000 »ýæ× ÁÜ ×𴠃ææðÜÙð ÂÚU ÂýæŒÌ ãé° çßÜØÙ ·¤æ
solution of density 1.12 g/mL. The ƒæÙˆß 1.12 »ýæ× ÂýçÌ ç×çÜ çÜÅUÚU ãñÐ çßÜØÙ ·¤è
molarity of the solution is : ×æðÜñçÚUÅUè ãæð»è Ñ
(1) 1.00 M (1) 1.00 M
(2) 2.00 M (2) 2.00 M
(3) 2.50 M (3) 2.50 M
(4) 4.00 M (4) 4.00 M

English : 21 Set : 01 Hindi : 21 Set : 01

36. The half-life period of a first order reaction 36. °·¤ ÂýÍ× ·¤æðçÅU ·¤è ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤æ ¥Ïü-¥æØé ·¤æÜ
is 15 minutes. The amount of substance 15 ç×ÙÅU ãñÐ °·¤ ƒæ‡ÅUæ Âà¿æÌ÷ ÂÎæÍü ·¤è àæðá ÚUãè
left after one hour will be : ×æ˜ææ ãæð»è Ñ
(1) 1 ÂýæÚUçÖ·¤ ×æ˜ææ ·¤æ 1 Öæ»
4 of the original amount (1) 4

(2) 1 ÂýæÚUçÖ·¤ ×æ˜ææ ·¤æ 1 Öæ»

8 of the original amount (2) 8

(3) 1 ÂýæÚUçÖ·¤ ×æ˜ææ ·¤æ 1 Öæ»

16 of the original amount (3) 16

(4) 1 ÂýæÚUçÖ·¤ ×æ˜ææ ·¤æ 1 Öæ»

32 of the original amount (4) 32

37. A current of 10.0 A flows for 2.00 h 37. ÏæÌé X ·ð¤ çƒæÜð ãé° Ü߇æ ÏæÚU·¤ §Üñ€ÅþUæðçÜçÅU·¤
through an electrolytic cell containing a âñÜ ×ð´ âð 2.00 ƒæ‡ÅðU ·ð¤ çÜØð 10.0 A ·¤è çßléÌ
molten salt of metal X. This results in the ÏæÚUæ ¿ÜæÙð ÂÚU 0.250 ×æðÜ X ÏæÌé ·¤æ Á×æß ãé¥æÐ
decomposition of 0.250 mol of metal X at çƒæÜð ãé° Ü߇æ ×ð´ ÏæÌé X ·¤è ¥æ€âè·ë¤Ì ¥ßSÍæ
the cathode. The oxidation state of X in ãæð»è Ñ (ÁÕç·¤ F596,500 C)
the molten salt is : (F596,500 C)
(1) 11 (1) 11
(2) 21 (2) 21
(3) 31 (3) 31
(4) 41 (4) 41

English : 22 Set : 01 Hindi : 22 Set : 01

38. The energy of an electron in first Bohr orbit 38. H-ÂÚU×æ‡æé ·ð¤ ÂýÍ× ÕæðãÚU ¥æçÕüÅU ×ð´ §Üñ€ÅþUæÙ ·¤è
of H - atom is 213.6 eV. The energy value ª¤Áæü 213.6 eV ãñÐ Li 21 ·¤è ©žæðçÁÌ ¥ßSÍæ ×ð´
of electron in the excited state of Li21 is : §Üñ€ÅþUæÙ ·¤æ ª¤Áæü ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) 227.2 eV (1) 227.2 eV
(2) 30.6 eV (2) 30.6 eV
(3) 230.6 eV (3) 230.6 eV
(4) 27.2 eV (4) 27.2 eV

39. The temperature at which oxygen 39. ÌæÂ, çÁâ ÂÚU ¥æò€âèÁÙ ¥‡æé¥æð´ ·¤è ß»ü ×æŠØ×êÜ
molecules have the same root mean square SÂèÇU ·¤æ ×æÙ ßãè ãæðÌæ ãñ Áæð ãèçÜØ× ÂÚU×æ‡æé¥æð´ ·¤æ
speed as helium atoms have at 300 K is : 300 K ÂÚU ãæðÌæ ãñ,
(Atomic masses : He54 u, O516 u) (ÂÚU×æ‡æé ÎýÃØ×æÙ Ñ He54 ×æ˜æ·¤, O516 ×æ˜æ·¤)
ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) 300 K (1) 300 K
(2) 600 K (2) 600 K
(3) 1200 K (3) 1200 K
(4) 2400 K (4) 2400 K

40. The standard enthalpy of formation of 40. NH3 ÕÙÙð ·¤è ×æÙ·¤ ª¤Áæü 246.0 kJ/×æðÜ ãñÐ
NH3 is 246.0 kJ/mol. If the enthalpy of ØçÎ ¥ÂÙð ÂÚU × æ‡æé ¥ æð ´ âð H 2 ÕÙÙð ·¤è ª¤Áæü
formation of H 2 from its atoms is 2436 kJ/×æðÜ ¥æñÚU N2 ·¤è 2712 kJ/×æðÜ ãæð Ìæð
2436 kJ/mol and that of N 2 is N2H ·¤è NH3 ×ð´ ¥æñâÌ Õæ¡ÇU ª¤Áæü ãæð»è Ñ
2712 kJ/mol, the average bond enthalpy
of N2H bond in NH3 is :
(1) 21102 kJ/mol (1) 21102 kJ/×æðÜ
(2) 2964 kJ/mol (2) 2964 kJ/×æðÜ
(3) 1352 kJ/mol (3) 1352 kJ/×æðÜ
(4) 11056 kJ/mol (4) 11056 kJ/×æðÜ

English : 23 Set : 01 Hindi : 23 Set : 01

41. The amount of oxygen in 3.6 moles of water 41. 3.6 ×æðÜ ÁÜ ×ð´ ¥æò€âèÁÙ ·¤è ×æ˜ææ ãæðÌè ãñ Ñ
is :
(1) 115.2 g (1) 115.2 »ýæ×
(2) 57.6 g (2) 57.6 »ýæ×
(3) 28.8 g (3) 28.8 »ýæ×
(4) 18.4 g (4) 18.4 »ýæ×

42. The gas evolved on heating CaF2 and SiO2 42. CaF2 ¥æñÚU SiO2 ·¤æð âæ‹Îý H2SO4 ·ð¤ âæÍ »ÚU×
with concentrated H2SO4, on hydrolysis ·¤ÚUÙð âð ÂýæŒÌ ãé§ü »ñâ ãæ§ÇþUæÜðçââ ÂÚU °·¤ â$Èð¤Î
gives a white gelatinous precipitate. The ÁñÜ Áñâæ ¥ßÿæð ÎðÌè ãñÐ Øã ¥ßÿæð ãæð»æ Ñ
precipitate is :
(1) hydrofluosilicic acid (1) ãæ§ÇþUæðÜæðçâçÜçâ·¤ °ðçâÇU
(2) silica gel (2) çâçÜ·¤æ ÁñÜ
(3) silicic acid (3) çâçÜçâ·¤ °ðçâÇ
(4) calciumfluorosilicate (4) ·ñ¤çËàæØ׍ÜæðÚUæðçâçÜ·ð¤ÅU

43. Chloro compound of Vanadium has only 43. ßñÙðçÇUØ× ·¤æ °·¤ €ÜæðÚUæð Øæñç»·¤ 1.73 BM ·¤æ ·ð¤ßÜ
spin magnetic moment of 1.73 BM. This çSÂÙ ×ñ ‚ Ùð ç ÅU·¤ ×æð × ñ ‹ ÅU ÚU¹Ìæ ãñ
Vanadium chloride has the formula : (V ·¤æ ÂÚU×æ‡æê ·ý¤×æ´·¤523) §â ßñÙðçÇUØ× €ÜæðÚUæ§ÇU
(at. no. of V523) ·¤æ âê˜æ ãæðÌæ ãñ Ñ
(1) VCl2 (1) VCl2
(2) VCl4 (2) VCl4
(3) VCl3 (3) VCl3
(4) VCl5 (4) VCl5

English : 24 Set : 01 Hindi : 24 Set : 01

44. An octahedral complex of Co 31 is 44. Co31 ·¤æ °·¤ ¥cÅȤËæ·¤èØ â´·¤ÚU ÂýçÌ¿éÕ·¤èØ
diamagnetic. The hybridisation involved ãæðÌæ ãñÐ §â â´·¤ÚU ·ð¤ ÕÙÙð âð âÕç‹ÏÌ â´·¤ÚU‡æ
in the formation of the complex is : ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) sp3d2 (1) sp3d2
(2) dsp2 (2) dsp2
(3) d2sp3 (3) d2sp3
(4) dsp3d (4) dsp3d

45. Which of the following is not formed when 45. ¥ÜèØ K2Cr2O7 ƒææðÜ ·¤è H2S ·ð¤ âæÍ ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ
H 2S reacts with acidic K 2 Cr 2 O 7 ãæðÙð ÂÚU çِÙæð´ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ Ùãè´ ÕÙÌæ?
solution ? (1) CrSO 4
(1) CrSO 4 (2) Cr2(SO4)
3
(2) Cr2(SO4) (3) K2SO 4
3
(3) K2SO 4 (4) S
(4) S

46. §Ù ×ð´ âð ç·¤â ×ð´ ¥Øéç‚×Ì §Üñ€ÅþUæÙ ãæðÌæ ãñ Øæ ãæðÌð

46. Which of the following has unpaired ãñ´ ?
electron(s) ? (1) N2
(1) N2
(2) O2
2
(2) O2
2
(3) N 221
(3) N 221
(4) O 222
(4) O 222

English : 25 Set : 01 Hindi : 25 Set : 01

47. In the following sets of reactants which 47. ç·ý¤Øæ ·¤æÚU·¤æð´ ·ð¤ çِ٠âðÅUæð´ ×ð´ âð ç·¤â Îæð ×ð´
two sets best exhibit the amphoteric Al2O3 . xH2O ·¤æ ©ÖØ Ï×èü ÃØßãæÚU Îð¹æ ÁæÌæ
character of Al2O3 . xH2O ? ãñ?
2 2
Set 1 : Al2O3 . xH2O (s) and OH (aq) Set 1 : Al2O3 . xH2O (s) ¥æñÚU OH (ÁÜèØ)
Set 2 : Al2O3 . xH2O (s) and H2O (l) Set 2 : Al2O3 . xH2O (s) ¥æñÚU H2O (Îýß)
1 1
Set 3 : Al2O3 . xH2O (s) and H (aq) Set 3 : Al2O3 . xH2O (s) ¥æñÚU H (ÁÜèØ)
Set 4 : Al2O3 . xH2O (s) and NH3 (aq) Set 4 : Al2O3 . xH2O (s) ¥æñÚU NH3 (ÁÜèØ)
(1) 1 and 2 (1) 1 ¥æñÚU 2
(2) 1 and 3 (2) 1 ¥æñÚU 3
(3) 2 and 4 (3) 2 ¥æñÚU 4
(4) 3 and 4 (4) 3 ¥æñÚU 4

48. The number and type of bonds in C 222 ion 48. CaC2 ·ð C 222 ¥æØÙ ×ð´ ¥æՋÏæð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ °ß´
in CaC2 are : Âý·¤æÚU çِ٠·¤æñÙâè ãñ?
(1) One s bond and one p2bond (1) °·¤ s ¥æÕ‹Ï ¥æñÚU °·¤ p2¥æՋÏ
(2) One s bond and two p2bonds (2) °·¤ s ¥æÕ‹Ï ¥æñÚU Îæð p2¥æՋÏ
(3) Two s bonds and two p2bonds (3) Îæð s ¥æÕ‹Ï ¥æñÚU Îæð p2¥æՋÏ
(4) Two s bonds and one p2bond (4) Îæð s ¥æÕ‹Ï ¥æñÚU °·¤ p2¥æՋÏ

49. The form of iron obtained from blast 49. Ûææð´·¤æ Ö^è âð ÂýæŒÌ ãé° Üæðãð ·¤æ M¤Â ·¤ãÜæÌæ ãñ Ñ
furnace is :
(1) Steel (1) §SÂæÌ (Steel)
(2) Cast Iron (2) ÉUÜßæ¡ Üæðãæ (Cast Iron)
(3) Pig Iron (3) ·¤‘¿æ Üæðãæ (Pig Iron)
(4) Wrought Iron (4) çÂÅUßæ´ Üæðãæ (Wrought Iron)

English : 26 Set : 01 Hindi : 26 Set : 01

50. The correct statement about the magnetic 50. [Fe(CN)6]32 ¥æñÚU [FeF6]32 ·ð¤ ¿éÕ·¤èØ »é‡ææð´
properties of [Fe(CN)6]32 and [FeF6]32 ·¤æ ØÍæÍü çßßÚU‡æ ãñ Ñ (Z526).
is : (Z526).
(1) both are paramagnetic. (1) ÎæðÙæ´ð ¥Ùé¿éÕ·¤èØ ãñ´Ð
(2) both are diamagnetic. (2) ÎæðÙæð´ ÂýçÌ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ãñ´Ð
(3) [Fe(CN) 6 ] 32 is diamagnetic, (3) [Fe(CN)6]32 ÂýçÌ¿éÕ·¤èØ ¥æñÚU
[FeF6]32 is paramagnetic. [FeF6]32¥Ùé¿éÕ·¤èØ ãñÐ
(4) [Fe(CN) 6 ] 32 is paramagnetic, (4) [Fe (CN)6]32¥Ùé¿éÕ·¤èØ ¥æñÚU [FeF6]32
[FeF6]32 is diamagnetic. ÂýçÌ¿éÕ·¤èØ ãñÐ

51. Which one of the following reactions will 51. §Ù ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ¥æð´ ×ð´ âð ç·¤â ×ð´ ·¤æÕüÙ - ·¤æÕüÙ
not result in the formation of carbon- ¥æÕ‹Ï Ùãè´ ÂýæŒÌ ãæð»æ?
carbon bond ?
(1) Reimer-Tieman reaction (1) ÚUæð×ÚU - ÅUè×Ù ¥çÖç·ý¤ØæÐ
(2) Friedel Craft’s acylation (2) Èý¤èÇUÜ ·ý¤æȤÅU °ðâèÜðàæÙÐ
(3) Wurtz reaction (3) ßéÅüU$Á ¥çÖç·ý¤ØæÐ
(4) Cannizzaro reaction (4) ·ñ¤Ùè$ÁñÚUæð ¥çÖç·ý¤ØæÐ

52. In the hydroboration - oxidation reaction 52. ÂýæðÂèÙ ·ð¤ ÇUæ§ÕæðÚðUÙ, H2O2 ¥æñÚU NaOH ·ð¤ âæÍ
of propene with diborane, H 2 O 2 and ãæ§ÇþUæðÕæðÚðUàæÙ-¥æò€âè·¤ÚU‡æ ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ×ð́ ÕÙæ ·¤æÕüçÙ·¤
NaOH, the organic compound formed is : Øæñç»·¤ ãñ Ñ
(1) CH3CH2OH (1) CH3CH2OH
(2) CH3CHOHCH3 (2) CH3CHOHCH3
(3) CH3CH2CH2OH (3) CH3CH2CH2OH
(4) (CH3) COH (4) (CH3) COH
3 3

English : 27 Set : 01 Hindi : 27 Set : 01

53. The major product of the reaction 53. ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ

NaNO /H SO NaNO /H SO

2 2 4
→ 
2 2 4
→ ·¤æ ×éØ

is : ç·ý¤Øæ È¤Ü ãñ Ñ

(1)
(1)

(2)
(2)

(3)
(3)

(4)
(4)

54. For the compounds

CH3Cl, CH3Br, CH3I and CH3F,
54. Øæñç»·¤æð´
the correct order of increasing C-halogen
CH3Cl,CH3Br,CH3I ¥æñÚU CH3F
bond length is :
×ð´ ·¤æÕüÙ-ãñÜæðÁÙ Õæ¡ÇU ·¤è ÕɸÌè ܐÕæ§ü ·¤æ ÆUè·¤
(1) CH3F < CH3Cl < CH3Br < CH3I
·ý¤× ãñ Ñ
(2) CH3F < CH3Br < CH3Cl < CH3I
(1) CH3F < CH3Cl < CH3Br < CH3I
(3) CH3F < CH3I < CH3Br < CH3Cl
(2) CH3F < CH3Br < CH3Cl < CH3I
(4) CH3Cl < CH3Br < CH3F < CH3I
(3) CH3F < CH3I < CH3Br < CH3Cl
(4) CH3Cl < CH3Br < CH3F < CH3I

English : 28 Set : 01 Hindi : 28 Set : 01

55. Allyl phenyl ether can be prepared by 55. °Üæ§Ü çȤÙæ§Ü §üÍÚU §‹ãð´ »ÚU× ·¤ÚU ÕÙæØæ Áæ â·¤Ìæ
heating : ãñ Ñ
(1) C6H5Br1CH25CH2CH22ONa (1) C6H5Br1CH25CH2CH22ONa
(2) CH25CH2CH22Br1C6H5ONa (2) CH25CH2CH22Br1C6H5ONa
(3) C6H52CH5CH2Br1CH32ONa (3) C6H52CH5CH2Br1CH32ONa
(4) CH25CH2Br1C6H52CH22ONa (4) CH25CH2Br1C6H52CH22ONa

56. In a nucleophilic substitution reaction : 56. ‹Øêç€ÜØâ SÙðãè ¥ÎÜ ÕÎÜ ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ Ñ
DMF DMF
R2Br1Cl2 → R_Cl1Br2, R2Br1Cl2 → R_Cl1Br2,
which one of the following undergoes ×ð´ çِ٠ÂÎæÍæðZ âð ·¤æñÙ ÃØßSÍæ ·¤æ â´ÂêU‡æü ÕÎÜ ·¤ÚU
complete inversion of configuration ? ÜðÌæ ãñ ?
(1) C6H5CHC6H5Br (1) C6H5CHC6H5Br
(2) C6H5CH2Br (2) C6H5CH2Br
(3) C6H5CH CH3Br (3) C6H5CH CH3Br
(4) C6H5CCH3C6H5Br (4) C6H5CCH3C6H5Br

57. In which of the following pairs A is more 57. çِ٠Øé‚×æð´ ×ð´ âð ç·¤â×ð´ A, ¥çÏ·¤ SÍæ§ü ãñ B âð ?
stable than B ?
A B A B

(1) (1)

(2) (2)

(3) (3)

• • • •
(4) Ph3C , (CH3) C (4) Ph3C , (CH3) C
3 3

English : 29 Set : 01 Hindi : 29 Set : 01

58. Structure of some important polymers are 58. ·é¤ÀU Âýçâh ÕãéÜ·¤æð´ ·¤è â´ÚU¿Ùæ°´ Ùè¿ð Îè »§ü ãñ §Ù×ð´
given. Which one represents Buna-S ? âð ·¤æñÙ ÕêÙæ-S ·¤è âê¿·¤ ãñ?

(1) (1)

(2) (2)

(3) (3)

(4) (4)

59. Which is the major product formed when 59. ·¤æñÙ âè ÕǸè ×æ˜ææ ×ð´ ç·ý Øæ È¤Ü ÂýæŒÌ ãæðÌæ ãñ ÁÕ
acetone is heated with iodine and °ðâèÅUæðÙ ·¤æð ¥æØæðÇUèÙ ¥æñÚU ÂæðÅñUçàæØ× ãæ§ÇþUæ€âæ§ÇU
potassium hydroxide ? ·ð¤ âæÍ »ÚU× ç·¤Øæ ÁæÌæ ãñ?
(1) Iodoacetone (1) ¥æØæðÇUæð°ðâèÅUæðÙ
(2) Acetic acid (2) °âèçÅU·¤ °ðçâÇU
(3) Iodoform (3) ¥æØæðÇUæð$Ȥæ×ü
(4) Acetophenone (4) °ðâèÅUæð çȤÙæðÙ

60. Which one of the following class of 60. °çâçÅUÜèÙ ·ð¤ ÕãéÜ·¤è·¤ÚU‡æ âð ·¤æñÙâæ çِ٠Âý·¤æÚU
compounds is obtained by polymerization ·¤æ Øæñç»·¤ ÂýæŒÌ ãæðÌæ ãñ?
of acetylene ?
(1) Poly-yne (1) ÂæòÜè-¥æ§Ù
(2) Poly-ene (2) ÂæòÜè-§üÙ
(3) Poly-ester (3) ÂæòÜè-°ðSÅUÚU
(4) Poly-amide (4) ÂæòÜè-°×æ§ÇU

English : 30 Set : 01 Hindi : 30 Set : 01

 PART C — MATHEMATICS Öæ» C — »ç‡æÌ
61. Let P be the relation defined on the set of 61. ×æÙ P âÖè ßæSÌçß·¤ ⴁØæ¥æð´ ÂÚU ÂçÚUÖæçáÌ °·¤
all real numbers such that °ðâæ â´Õ´Ï ãñ ç·¤
P5{(a, b) : sec2 a2tan2 b51}. Then P is : P5{(a, b) : sec2 a2tan2 b51} ãñ, Ìæð P Ñ
(1) reflexive and symmetric but not (1) SßÌéËØ ÌÍæ â×ç×Ì ãñ ÂÚU‹Ìé â´·ý¤æ×·¤ Ùãè´
transitive. ãñÐ
(2) reflexive and transitive but not (2) SßÌéËØ ÌÍæ â´·ý¤æ×·¤ ãñ ÂÚU‹Ìé â×ç×Ì Ùãè´
symmetric. ãñÐ
(3) symmetric and transitive but not (3) â×ç×Ì ÌÍæ â´·ý¤æ×·¤ ãñ ÂÚU‹Ìé SßÌéËØ Ùãè´
reflexive. ãñÐ
(4) an equivalence relation. (4) °·¤ ÌéËØÌæ â´Õ´Ï ãñÐ

62. Let w(Im w ¹ 0) be a complex number. 62. ×æÙæ w(Im w ¹ 0) °·¤ âç×Ÿæ ⴁØæ ãñ, Ìæð âÖè
Then the set of all complex numbers z âç×Ÿæ ⴁØæ¥æð´ z ·¤æ â×é“æØ, Áæð ç·¤âè ßæSÌçß·¤
satisfying the equation w2 w z5k (12z), ⴁØæ k ·ð¤ çÜ°, â×è·¤ÚU‡æ w2 w z5k (12z)
for some real number k, is : ·¤æð â´ÌécÅU ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ, ãñ Ñ
(1) {z : ?z?51} (1) {z : ?z?51}
(2) {z : z5 z } (2) {z : z5 z }
(3) {z : z ¹ 1} (3) {z : z ¹ 1}
(4) {z : ?z?51, z ¹ 1} (4) {z : ?z?51, z ¹ 1}

63. If equations ax 2 1bx1c50, 63. ØçÎ â×è·¤ÚU‡ææð ´ ax 2 1bx1c50,

(a, b, c Î R, a ¹ 0) and 2x213x1450 have (a, b, c Î R, a ¹ 0) ÌÍæ 2x213x1450 ·¤æ
a common root, then a : b : c equals : °·¤ ×êÜ ©ÖØçÙcÅU ãñ, Ìæð a : b : c ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) 1:2:3 (1) 1:2:3
(2) 2:3:4 (2) 2:3:4
(3) 4:3:2 (3) 4:3:2
(4) 3:2:1 (4) 3:2:1

English : 31 Set : 01 Hindi : 31 Set : 01

 1 1 1 1
64. If and are the roots of the 64. ØçÎ ÌÍæ b â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ax21bx1150
a b a
equation, ax21bx1150 (a ¹ 0, a, b Î R), (a ¹ 0, a, b Î R) ·ð ¤ ×ê Ü ãñ , Ìæð â×è·¤ÚU ‡ æ
then the equation, x(x1b3)1(a323abx)50 ·ð¤ ×êÜ ã´ñ Ñ
x(x1b3)1(a323abx)50 has roots :
3 3 3 3
(1) a 2 and b 2 (1) a 2 ÌÍæ b 2

1 1 1 1
(2) a b 2 and a 2 b (2) ab 2 ÌÍæ a 2 b

(3) a b and a b (3) ab ÌÍæ a b

223 223 223 223
(4) a and b (4) a ÌÍæ b

65. If a, b, c are non - zero real numbers and if 65. ØçÎ a, b, c àæê‹ØðÌÚU ßæSÌçß·¤ ⴁØæ°¡ ãñ´ ÌÍæ ØçÎ
the system of equations â×è·¤ÚU‡æ çÙ·¤æØ
(a21)x5y1z, (a21)x5y1z,
(b21)y5z1x, (b21)y5z1x,
(c21)z5x1y, (c21)z5x1y,
has a non-trivial solution, then ·¤æ °·¤ ¥Ìé‘ÀU ãÜ ãñ, Ìæð ab1bc1ca ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
ab1bc1ca equals :
(1) a1b1c (1) a1b1c
(2) abc (2) abc
(3) 1 (3) 1
(4) 21 (4) 21

English : 32 Set : 01 Hindi : 32 Set : 01

66. If B is a 333 matrix such that B250, then 66. ØçÎ B °·¤ °ðâæ¥æÃØêã ãñ ç·¤
333 B250 ãñ, Ìæð
det. [(I1B)50250B] is equal to : det. [(I1B)50250B] ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) 1 (1) 1
(2) 2 (2) 2
(3) 3 (3) 3
(4) 50 (4) 50

67. The number of terms in the expansion of 67. (11x)101 (11x22x)100 ·ð¤ x ·¤è ƒææÌæð´ ×ð´ ÂýâæÚU
(11x)101 (11x22x)100 in powers of x is : ×ð´ ÂÎæð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ ãñ Ñ
(1) 302 (1) 302
(2) 301 (2) 301
(3) 202 (3) 202
(4) 101 (4) 101

68. The sum of the digits in the unit’s place of 68. ⴁØæ¥æð´ 3, 4, 5 ÌÍæ 6 ·ð¤ ÂýØæð» âð, çÕÙæ ·¤æð§ü ⴁØæ
all the 4-digit numbers formed by using the ÎæðãÚUæ°, ÕÙÙð ßæÜè âÖè ¿æÚU ¥´·¤æð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ¥æð´ ·ð¤
numbers 3, 4, 5 and 6, without repetition, §·¤æ§ü ·ð¤ SÍæÙ ÂÚU ¥æÙð ßæÜð ¥´·¤æð´ ·¤æ Øæð» ãñ Ñ
is :
(1) 432 (1) 432
(2) 108 (2) 108
(3) 36 (3) 36
(4) 18 (4) 18

English : 33 Set : 01 Hindi : 33 Set : 01

69. Given an A.P. whose terms are all positive 69. Îè »§ü °·¤ â×æ´ÌÚU ŸæðÉ¸è ·ð¤ âÖè ÂÎ ÏÙÂê‡ææZ·¤ ãñ´Ð
integers. The sum of its first nine terms is §â·ð¤ ÂýÍ× Ùæñ ÂÎæð´ ·¤æ Øæð» 200 âð ¥çÏ·¤ ÌÍæ
greater than 200 and less than 220. If the 220 âð ·¤× ãñÐ ØçÎ §â·¤æ ÎêâÚUæ ÂÎ 12 ãñ, Ìæð
second term in it is 12, then its 4th term §â·¤æ ¿æñÍæ ÂÎ ãñ Ñ
is :
(1) 8 (1) 8
(2) 16 (2) 16
(3) 20 (3) 20
(4) 24 (4) 24

70. If the sum 70. ØçÎ

3 5 7 3 5 7
1 2
2 2
1 2 1.......1 u p t o 1 2 1 2 1.......1 ·ð ¤ 20
1 1 12 1 1 2 2 1 32 1 2
1 12 2
1 1 2 2 1 32

k k
20 terms is equal to , then k is equal to : ÂÎæð´ Ì·¤ ·¤æ Øæð» ·ð¤ ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ, Ìæð k ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
21 21
(1) 120 (1) 120
(2) 180 (2) 180
(3) 240 (3) 240
(4) 60 (4) 60

71. ( )
If f(x) is continuous and f 9 2 5 2 9 , then 71. ØçÎ f(x) âÌÌ ãñ ÌÍæ ( )
f 9 2 52 9 ãñ, Ìæð
 12 cos 3x   12 cos 3x 
lim f   is equal to : lim f   ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
x→0  x2 x→0  x2
(1) 9/2 (1) 9/2
(2) 2/9 (2) 2/9
(3) 0 (3) 0
(4) 8/9 (4) 8/9

English : 34 Set : 01 Hindi : 34 Set : 01

  d2 y   d2 x   d2 y   d2 x 
72. If y5enx, then  2   2  is equal to : 72. ØçÎ y5enx ãñ, Ìæð  2   2 ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
 dx   dy   dx   dy 
(1) n enx (1) n enx
(2) n e2nx (2) n e2nx
(3) 1 (3) 1
(4) 2n e2nx (4) 2n e2nx

73. If the Rolle’s theorem holds for the 73. ØçΠȤÜÙ f(x)52x31ax21bx ·ð¤¤ çÜ° ¥´ÌÚUæÜ
function f(x)52x31ax21bx in the interval 1
[21, 1] ×ð´çÕ´Îé c5 ÂÚU ÚUæðÜð ·¤æ Âý×ðØ Üæ»ê ãñ,
1 2
[21, 1] for the point c5 , then the value
2 Ìæð 2a1b ·¤æ ×æÙ ãñ Ñ
of 2a1b is :
(1) 1 (1) 1
(2) 21 (2) 21
(3) 2 (3) 2
(4) 22 (4) 22

3 x 4 x x x
74. If f (x )5  1  2 1 , x Î R, then the 74.
 5  5
ØçÎ f (x )5 3   4
1  2 1 , x Î R ãñ,
 5
Ìæð
5
equation f(x)50 has : â×è·¤ÚU‡æ f(x)50 ·¤æ/·ð¤ Ñ
(1) no solution (1) ·¤æð§ü ãÜ Ùãè´ ãñÐ
(2) one solution (2) °·¤ ãÜ ãñÐ
(3) two solutions (3) Îæð ãÜ ãñ´Ð
(4) more than two solutions (4) Îæð âð ¥çÏ·¤ ãÜ ãñ´Ð

English : 35 Set : 01 Hindi : 35 Set : 01

 sin 8 x 2 cos8 x sin 8 x 2 cos8 x
75. ∫ dx is equal to : 75. ∫ dx ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(12 2 sin 2 x cos 2 x ) (12 2 sin 2 x cos 2 x )

1 1
(1) sin 2x1c (1) sin 2x1c
2 2
1 1
(2) 2 sin 2x1c (2) 2 sin 2x1c
2 2
1 1
(3) 2 sin x1c (3) 2 sin x1c
2 2
(4) 2sin2 x1c (4) 2sin2 x1c

1 1
2 l n (11 2 x ) 2 l n (11 2 x )
76. The integral ∫0 2
d x , equals : 76. â×æ·¤Ü ∫ d x , ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
11 4 x 0 11 4 x 2

p p
(1) ln 2 (1) ln 2
4 4
p p
(2) ln 2 (2) ln 2
8 8
p p
(3) ln 2 (3) ln 2
16 16
p p
(4) ln 2 (4) ln 2
32 32

77. Let A5{(x, y) : y2 [ 4x, y22x/24}. The 77. ×æÙæ A5{(x, y) : y2 [ 4x, y22x/24} ãñÐ
area (in square units) of the region A is : ÿæð˜æ A ·¤æ ÿæð˜æÈ¤Ü (ß»ü §·¤æ§üØæð´ ×ð´) ãñ Ñ
(1) 8 (1) 8
(2) 9 (2) 9
(3) 10 (3) 10
(4) 11 (4) 11

English : 36 Set : 01 Hindi : 36 Set : 01

78. If the differential equation representing the 78. ØçÎ ©Ù âÖè ßëžææ𴠷𤠷é¤Ü, Áæð x-¥ÿæ ·¤æð ×êÜ çÕ´Îé
family of all circles touching x-axis at the ÂÚU SÂàæü ·¤ÚUÌð ãñ ´ , ·¤æ ¥ß·¤Ü â×è·¤ÚU‡æ
dy dy
origin is (x 22y 2) 5g(x) y, then g(x) (x22y2) 5g(x) y, ãñ, Ìæð g(x) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
dx dx
equals :
1 1
(1) x (1) x
2 2
(2) 2x 2 (2) 2x 2
(3) 2x (3) 2x
1 2 1 2
(4) x (4) x
2 2

79. Let a and b be any two numbers satisfying 1 1 1

79. ×æÙ a ¥æñÚU b, 2
1 2 5 ·¤æð â´ÌécÅU ·¤ÚUÙð ßæÜè
4
1 1 1 a b
1 2 5 . Then, the foot of x y
a2
b 4 Îæð ⴁØæ°¡ ãñ´, Ìæð ¿ÚUÚðU¹æ, 1 51 ×êÜ çÕ´Îé âð
a b
perpendicular from the origin on the
x y ÇUæÜð »° Ü´Õ ·¤æ ÂæÎ, çSÍÌ ãñ Ñ
variable line, 1 51 , lies on :
a b
(1) °·¤ ¥çÌÂÚU ß ÜØ ÂÚU , çÁâ·¤æ Âý ˆ Øð · ¤
(1) a hyperbola with each
¥Ïü ¥ÿæ5 2 ãñÐ
semi-axis5 2 .
(2) °·¤ ¥çÌÚU  ÚU ß ÜØ ÂÚU , çÁâ·¤æ Âý ˆ Øð · ¤
(2) a hyperbola with each semi-axis52.
¥Ïü ¥ÿæ52 ãñÐ
(3) °·¤ ßëžæ ÂÚU, çÁâ·¤è ç˜æ’Øæ52 ãñÐ
(3) a circle of radius52
(4) °·¤ ßëžæ ÂÚU, çÁâ·¤è ç˜æ’Øæ5 2 ãñÐ
(4) a circle of radius5 2

English : 37 Set : 01 Hindi : 37 Set : 01

80. Given three points P, Q, R with P(5, 3) and 80. ÌèÙ çΰ »° çÕ´Îé¥æð´ P, Q, R ×ð´ P(5, 3) ãñ ÌÍæ R,
R lies on the x-axis. If equation of RQ is
x-¥ÿæ ÂÚU çSÍÌ ãñ Ð ØçÎ RQ ·¤æ â×è·¤ÚU ‡ æ
x22y52 and PQ is parallel to the x-axis,
then the centroid of DPQR lies on the x22y52 ãñ ÌÍæ PQ, x-¥ÿæ ·ð¤ â×æ´ÌÚU ãñ, Ìæð
line : DPQR ·¤æ ·ð´¤Îý·¤ çÁâ ÚðU¹æ ÂÚU çSÍÌ ãñ, ßã
(1) 2x1y2950 ãñ Ñ
(2) x22y1150 (1) 2x1y2950
(3) 5x22y50 (2) x22y1150
(4) 2x25y50 (3) 5x22y50
(4) 2x25y50
81. If the point (1, 4) lies inside the circle
x 2 1y 2 26x210y1p50 and the circle 81. ØçÎ çÕ´Îé (1, 4) ßëžæ x21y226x210y1p50
does not touch or intersect the coordinate ·ð¤ ¥‹ÌÑ Öæ» ×ð´ çSÍÌ ãñ ÌÍæ ßëžæ, çÙÎðüàææ´·¤ ¥ÿææð´ ·¤æð
axes, then the set of all possible values of p
is the interval : Ù Ìæð SÂàæü ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ, ¥æñÚU Ù ãè ·¤æÅUÌæ ãññ, Ìæð p ·ð¤
(1) (0, 25) âÖè â´Öß ×æÙæð´ ·¤æ â×é‘¿Ø çِ٠¥Ì´ÚUæÜ ãñ Ñ
(2) (25, 39) (1) (0, 25)
(3) (9, 25) (2) (25, 39)
(4) (25, 29) (3) (9, 25)
(4) (25, 29)
82. If OB is the semi-minor axis of an ellipse,
F1 and F2 are its foci and the angle between
82. ØçÎ OB, °·¤ Îèƒæüßëžæ ·¤æ ¥Ïü ܃æé¥ÿæ ãñ, F1 ÌÍæ
F 1 B and F 2B is a right angle, then the F2 ©â·¤è ÙæçÖØæ¡ ãñ´ ÌÍæ F1B ÌÍæ F2B ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤æ
square of the eccentricity of the ellipse is : ·¤æð‡æ °·¤ â×·¤æð‡æ ãñ, Ìæð Îèƒæüßëžæ ·¤è ©ˆ·ð´¤ÎýÌæ ·¤æ
1 ß»ü ãñ Ñ
(1)
2 1
(1)
1 2
(2)
2 1
(2)
1 2
(3)
2 2 1
(3)
1 2 2
(4)
4 1
(4)
4

English : 38 Set : 01 Hindi : 38 Set : 01

83. Equation of the plane which passes 83. ©â â×ÌÜ ·¤æ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ, Áæð ÚðU¹æ¥æð´
through the point of intersection of lines x 21 y 2 2 z2 3
5 5 ÌÍæ
x 21 y 2 2 z2 3 3 1 2
5 5 and
3 1 2 x 2 3 y 21 z2 2
5 5
x 2 3 y 21 z2 2 1 2 3
5 5
1 2 3 ·ð¤ Âýç̑ÀðUÎÙ çÕ´Îé âð ãæð ·¤ÚU ÁæÌæ ãñ, ÌÍæ ×êÜçÕ´Îé âð
and has the largest distance from the origin ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ÎêÚUè ÂÚU ãñ, ãñ Ñ
is :
(1) 7x12y14z554 (1) 7x12y14z554
(2) 3x14y15z549 (2) 3x14y15z549
(3) 4x13y15z550 (3) 4x13y15z550
(4) 5x14y13z557 (4) 5x14y13z557

84. A line in the 3-dimensional space makes 84. ç˜æçß×èØ ¥æ·¤æàæ (space) ×ð´ °·¤ ÚðU¹æ x ÌÍæ y,
p
an angle u  0 < u [  with both the ÎæðÙæ´ð ¥ÿææð´ ·ð¤ âæÍ ·¤æð‡æ u  0 < u [ p
ÕÙæÌè ãñ,
 2  
2
x and y axes. Then the set of all values of Ìæð u ·ð¤ âÖè ×æÙæð´ ·¤æ â×é‘¿Ø çِ٠¥´ÌÚUæÜ ãñ Ñ
u is the interval :

 p  p
(1)  0 ,  (1)  0 , 
4 4
p p p p
(2)  6 , 3  (2)  6 , 3 

p p p p
(3)  4 , 2  (3)  4 , 2 

 p p  p p
(4)  ,  (4)  , 
3 2 3 2

English : 39 Set : 01 Hindi : 39 Set : 01

 → → → → → → → →
85. If ? a ?5 2, ? b ?5 3 and ?2 a 2 b ?5 5 , then 85. ØçÎ ? a ?5 2, ? b ?5 3 ÌÍæ ?2 a 2 b ?5 5 ãñ, Ìæð
→ → → →
?2 a 1 b ? equals : ?2 a 1 b ? ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) 17 (1) 17
(2) 7 (2) 7
(3) 5 (3) 5
(4) 1 (4) 1

86. In a set of 2n distinct observations, each of 86. 2n çßçÖóæ Âýðÿæ‡ææð´ ·ð¤ â×é‘¿Ø ×ð´, ©Ù âÖè Âýðÿæ‡ææð´,
the observation below the median of all the Áæð âÖè Âýðÿæ‡ææð´ ·ð¤ ×æŠØ·¤ âð ·¤× ãñ´, ÂýˆØð·¤ ·¤æð 5 âð
observations is increased by 5 and each of Õɸæ çÎØæ »Øæ ÌÍæ àæðá âÖè Âðýÿæ‡ææð´ ×´ð ÂýˆØð·¤ ·¤æð 3
the remaining observations is decreased by âð ·¤× ·¤ÚU çÎØæ »Øæ, Ìæð Âýðÿæ‡ææð´ ·ð¤ Ù° â×é‘¿Ø ·¤æ
3. Then the mean of the new set of ×æŠØ Ñ
observations :
(1) increases by 1. (1) 1 âð Õɸ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ
(2) decreases by 1. (2) 1 âð ƒæÅU ÁæÌæ ãñÐ
(3) decreases by 2. (3) 2 âð ƒæÅU ÁæÌæ ãñÐ
(4) increases by 2. (4) 2 âð Õɸ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ

87. If A and B are two events such that 87. A ÌÍæ B Îæð °ðâè ƒæÅUÙæ°¡ ãñ´ ç·¤ P(AÈB)5P(AÇB)
P(AÈB)5P(AÇB), then the incorrect ãñ, Ìæð çِ٠·¤ÍÙæð´ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âæ ·¤ÍÙ »ÜÌ ãñ ?
statement amongst the following
statements is : (1) A ÌÍæ B â×â´ÖæçßÌ ã´ñ
(1) A and B are equally likely (2) P(AÇB9)50
(2) P(AÇB9)50 (3) P(A9ÇB)50
(3) P(A9ÇB)50 (4) P(A)1P(B)51
(4) P(A)1P(B)51

English : 40 Set : 01 Hindi : 40 Set : 01

88. The number of values of a in [0, 2p] for 88. [0, 2p] ×ð´ a ·ð¤
©Ù ×æÙæð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ, çÁÙ·ð¤ çÜ°
which 2 sin3 a27 sin2 a17 sin a52, is : 2 sin3 a27 sin2 a17 sin a52 ãñ, ãñ Ñ
(1) 6 (1) 6
(2) 4 (2) 4
(3) 3 (3) 3
(4) 1 (4) 1

p1q p1q
89. If cosec u5
p2q
(p¹q¹0), then 89. ØçÎ cosec u5 (p¹q¹0) ãñ , Ìæð
p2q

 p u  p u
cot  1  is equal to :
 4 2 cot  1 
 4 2
ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ

p p
(1) (1)
q q

q q
(2) (2)
p p

(3) pq (3) pq
(4) pq (4) pq

90. The contrapositive of the statement “I go 90.
to school if it does not rain” is :
(1) If it rains, I do not go to school.
(2) If I do not go to school, it rains.
(3) If it rains, I go to school.
(4) If I go to school, it rains.
·¤ÍÙ ÒÒ×ñ´ S·ê¤Ü ÁæÌæ ã¡ê ØçÎ ßáæü Ùãè´ ãæðÌèÓÓ ·¤æ
ÂýçÌÏÙæˆ×·¤ (Contrapositive) ·¤ÍÙ ãñ Ñ
(1) ØçÎ ßáæü ãæðÌè ãñ, ×ñ´ S·ê¤Ü Ùãè´ ÁæÌæÐ
(2) ØçÎ ×ñ´ S·ê¤Ü Ùãè´ ÁæÌæ, ßáæü ãæðÌè ãñÐ
(3) ØçÎ ßáæü ãæðÌè ãñ, ×ñ´ S·ê¤Ü ÁæÌæ ã¡êÐ
(4) ØçÎ ×ñ´ S·ê¤Ü ÁæÌæ ã¡ê, ßáæü ãæðÌè ãñÐ

-o0o- -o0o-

English : 41 Set : 01 Hindi : 41 Set : 01

 JEE Main 2014 Question Paper 1 Online April 11, 2014
PART A — PHYSICS Öæ» A — ÖæñçÌ·¤ çߙææÙ
1. In terms of resistance R and time T, the 1. ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ R ¥æñÚU â×Ø T ·ð¤ ÂÎæð´ ×ð´, ¿éÕ·¤àæèÜÌæ m
m m
dimensions of ratio of the permeability °ß´ çßléÌàæèÜÌæ e ·ð¤ ¥ÙéÂæÌ ·¤è çß×æ ãñ Ñ
e e
m and permittivity e is :
(1) [RT22] (1) [RT22]
(2) [R2 T21] (2) [R2 T21]
(3) [R2] (3) [R2]
(4) [R2 T2] (4) [R2 T2]

2. The initial speed of a bullet fired from a 2. °·¤ ÚUæ§È¤Ü âð Îæ»è »§ü ÕéÜðÅU ·¤è ÂýæÚUçÖ·¤ ¿æÜ
rifle is 630 m/s. The rifle is fired at the 630 m/s ãñÐ ÜÿØ ·ð¤ SÌÚU ÂÚU ÜÿØ âð 700 m ÎêÚU
centre of a target 700 m away at the same ÜÿØ ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý ÂÚU ÚUæ§È¤Ü Îæ»è ÁæÌè ãñÐ ÜÿØ ·¤æð
level as the target. How far above the Îæ»Ùð ·ð¤ çÜØð ÚUæ§È¤Ü ·¤æ çÙàææÙæ ÜÿØ ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý âð
centre of the target the rifle must be aimed ç·¤ÌÙæ ª¤ÂÚU Ü»æÙæ ¿æçã°?
in order to hit the target ?
(1) 1.0 m (1) 1.0 m
(2) 4.2 m (2) 4.2 m
(3) 6.1 m (3) 6.1 m
(4) 9.8 m (4) 9.8 m

English : 1 Set : 11 Hindi : 1 Set : 11

3. A body of mass 5 kg under the action of 3. r ∧ ∧
çSÍÚU ÕÜ F5Fx i 1 Fy j ·ð¤ ·¤æÚU‡æ ÎýÃØ×æÙ
r ∧ ∧
constant force F5Fx i 1 Fy j has velocity
5 kg ·¤è °·¤ ßSÌé t50s ÂÚU ßð »
at t50s as
r
( ∧
)
∧
v 5 6 i 22 j m/s and at r
(
∧ ∧
v 5 6 i 22 j m/s âð ) »çÌàæèÜ ãñ ¥æñÚU t510 s
r ∧ r r ∧ r
t510 s as v516 j m/s. The force F is : ÂÚU ßð» v516 j m/s âð »çÌàæèÜ ãñÐ ÕÜ F ãñ :

(1) (23 i 14 j ) N
∧ ∧
(1) (23 i 14 j ) N
∧ ∧

 3 ∧ 4 ∧  3 ∧
(2) 2 i1 j N 4 ∧
 5 5  (2) 2 i1 j N
 5 5 

(3) (3 i 2 4 j ) N
∧ ∧
(3) (3 i 2 4 j ) N
∧ ∧

3∧ 4 ∧ 3∧
(4)  i 2 j N 4 ∧
5 5  (4)  i 2 j N
5 5 

English : 2 Set : 11 Hindi : 2 Set : 11

4. A small ball of mass m starts at a point A 4.
with speed v o and moves along a
frictionless track AB as shown. The
track BC has coefficient of friction m. The
ball comes to stop at C after travelling a
distance L which is :
ÎýÃØ×æÙ m ·¤è °·¤ ÀUæðÅUè »ð´Î çՋÎé A âð ¿æÜ vo âð
ÂýæÚUÖ ·¤ÚUÌè ãñ ¥æñÚU °·¤ ƒæáü‡æãèÙ ÂÍ AB ÂÚU
»çÌàæèÜ ãñ Áñâæ ç·¤ 翘æ ×ð´ ÎàææüØæ »Øæ ãñÐ ÂÍ BC
·¤æ ƒæáü‡æ »é‡ææ¡·¤ m ãñÐ »ð´Î C ÂÚU ÎêÚUè L ¿ÜÙð ·ð¤
Âà¿æÌ÷ L¤·¤ ÁæÌè ãñ Áãæ¡ L ãñ :

2h v2
(1) 1 o
2h v2 m 2m g
(1) 1 o
m 2m g
h v2
(2) 1 o
h v2 m 2m g
(2) 1 o
m 2m g
h v2
(3) 1 o
h v2 2m mg
(3) 1 o
2m mg
h v2
(4) 1 o
h v2 2m 2m g
(4) 1 o
2m 2m g

English : 3 Set : 11 Hindi : 3 Set : 11

5. The average mass of rain drops is 5. ßáæü ·¤è Õê´Îæð´ ·¤æ ¥æñâÌ ÎýÃØ×æÙ 3.031025 kg ãñ
3.031025 kg and their average terminal ¥æñÚU ©Ù·¤æ ¥æñâÌ âè×æ‹Ì ßð» 9 m/s ãñÐ çÁâ
velocity is 9 m/s. Calculate the energy SÍæÙ ÂÚU °·¤ ßáü ×ð´ 100 cm ßáæü ãæðÌè ãñ ©â SÍæÙ
transferred by rain to each square metre ·ð¤ ÂýçÌ ß»ü ×èÅUÚU ÂëcÆU ÂÚU ßáæü mæÚUæ SÍæÙæ‹ÌçÚUÌ ª¤Áæü
of the surface at a place which receives 100 ·¤è »‡æÙæ ·¤èçÁ°Ð
cm of rain in a year. (1) 3.53105 J
(1) 3.53105 J (2) 4.053104 J
(2) 4.053104 J (3) 3.03105 J
(3) 3.03105 J (4) 9.03104 J
(4) 9.03104 J 6. ܐÕæ§ü L ·¤è °·¤ ÂÌÜè ÀUǸ ·¤æ ÂýçÌ §·¤æ§ü ܐÕæ§ü
6. A thin bar of length L has a mass per unit ÎýÃØ×æÙ l ãñ Áæð ç·¤ °·¤ çâÚðU âð ÎêÚUè ·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚU
length l, that increases linearly with ÚñUç¹·¤ÌÑ ÕɸÌæ ãñÐ ØçÎ §â·¤æ ·é¤Ü ÎýÃØ×æÙ M ãñ
distance from one end. If its total mass ¥æñÚU ãË·ð¤ çâÚðU ÂÚU ÂýçÌ §·¤æ§ü ܐÕæ§ü ÎýÃØ×æÙ lo ãñ,
is M and its mass per unit length at the ÌÕ ãË·ð¤ çâÚðU âð ÎýÃØ×æÙ ·ð¤‹Îý ·¤è ÎêÚUè ãñ Ñ
lighter end is lo, then the distance of the
L l L2
centre of mass from the lighter end is : (1) 2 o
2 4M
L l L2 l L2
(1) 2 o L
1 o
2 4M (2)
3 8M
L l L2 l L2
(2) 1 o L
1 o
3 8M (3)
3 4M
L l L2 l L2
(3) 1 o 2L
2 o
3 4M (4)
3 6M
2L l L2
(4) 2 o
3 6M

English : 4 Set : 11 Hindi : 4 Set : 11

7. From a sphere of mass M and radius R, a 7.
smaller sphere of radius R 2 is carved out
such that the cavity made in the original
sphere is between its centre and the
periphery. (See figure). For the
configuration in the figure where the
distance between the centre of the original
sphere and the removed sphere is 3R, the
gravitational force between the two
spheres is :
ç˜æ’Øæ R °ß´ Îý à Ø×æÙ M ·ð ¤ °·¤ »æð Ü ð âð ,
ç˜æ’Øæ R 2 ·¤æ °·¤ ÀUæðÅUæ »æðÜæ §â Âý·¤æÚU çÙ·¤æÜ
çÜØæ ÁæÌæ ãñ ç·¤ ×êÜ »æðÜð ×ð´ ÕÙè »éãæ §â·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý
°ß´ ÂçÚUçÏ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ãñ (翘æ Îð¹ð´)Ð ç¿˜æ ·ð¤ çߋØæâ
·ð¤ ¥ÙéâæÚU ÁÕ ×êÜ »æðÜð ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý ¥æñÚU ãÅUæØð »Øð
»æðÜð ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý ·ð¤ Õè¿ ÎêÚUè 3R ãñ, ÌÕ ÎæðÙæð »æðÜæð´ ·ð¤
Õè¿ »éL¤ˆßæ·¤áü‡æ ÕÜ ãñ Ñ

41 GM 2
(1)
3600 R 2

41 GM 2
41 GM 2 (2)
(1) 450 R 2
3600 R 2
59 GM 2
41 GM 2 (3)
(2) 450 R 2
450 R 2
GM 2
59 GM 2 (4)
(3) 2 225 R 2
450 R

GM 2
(4)
225 R 2

English : 5 Set : 11 Hindi : 5 Set : 11

8. The Bulk moduli of Ethanol, Mercury and 8. °ÍÙæòÜ, ÂæÚUæ °ß´ ÂæÙè ·ð¤ ¥æØÌÙ ÂýˆØæSÍÌæ »é‡ææ¡·¤
water are given as 0.9, 25 and 2.2 109 Nm22 ·¤è §·¤æ§ü ×ð´ ·ý¤×àæÑ 0.9, 25 °ß´ 2.2
respectively in units of 109 Nm22. For a çÎØð ãéØð ãñ´Ð ÎæÕ ·ð¤ çÎØð ×æÙ ·ð¤ çÜ°, ¥æØÌÙ ×ð´
given value of pressure, the fractional 9
ç֋Ùæˆ×·¤ â´ÂèǸ٠ãñÐ §Ù ÌèÙ Îýßæð´ ·ð¤ çÜ°
9 V
compression in volume is . Which of
V 9
·ð¤ ÕæÚðU ×ð´ çِÙçÜç¹Ì ·¤ÍÙæð´ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âæ
9 V
the following statements about for
V âãè ãñ?
these three liquids is correct ?
(1) Ethanol > Water > Mercury (1) °ÍÙæòÜ > ÂæÙè > ÂæÚUæ
(2) Water > Ethanol > Mercury (2) ÂæÙè > °ÍÙæòÜ > ÂæÚUæ
(3) Mercury > Ethanol > Water (3) ÂæÚUæ > °ÍÙæòÜ > ÂæÙè
(4) Ethanol > Mercury > Water (4) °ÍÙæòÜ > ÂæÚUæ > ÂæÙè

9. A tank with a small hole at the bottom has 9. ÌÜè ×ð´ °·¤ ÀUæðÅðU çÀUÎý ßæÜð Åñ´U·¤ ·¤æð ÂæÙè °ß´ ç×^è ·ð¤
been filled with water and kerosene ÌðÜ (¥æÂðçÿæÌ ƒæÙˆß 0.8) âð ÖÚUæ »Øæ ãñÐ ÂæÙè ·¤è
(specific gravity 0.8). The height of water ª¡¤¿æ§ü 3 m ãñ ¥æñÚU ç×^è ·ð¤ ÌðÜ ·¤è 2 mÐ ÁÕ çÀUÎý
is 3 m and that of kerosene 2 m. When the ·¤æð ¹æðÜ çÎØæ ÁæÌæ ãñ, ÌÕ çÙ·¤ÜÙð ßæÜð Îýß ·¤è
hole is opened the velocity of fluid coming ¿æÜ Ü»Ö» ãæð » è : (g510 ms 22 Üð ¥æñ Ú U
out from it is nearly : (take g510 ms22 ÂæÙè ·¤æ ƒæÙˆß 5103 kg m23)
and density of water 5103 kg m23)
(1) 10.7 ms21 (1) 10.7 ms21
(2) 9.6 ms21 (2) 9.6 ms21
(3) 8.5 ms21 (3) 8.5 ms21
(4) 7.6 ms21 (4) 7.6 ms21

English : 6 Set : 11 Hindi : 6 Set : 11

10. An air bubble of radius 0.1 cm is in a liquid 10. ÂëcÆU ÌÙæß 0.06 N/m ¥æñÚU ƒæÙˆß 103 kg/m3
having surface tension 0.06 N/m and ßæÜð °·¤ Îýß ×ð´ ç˜æ’Øæ 0.1 cm ·¤æ °·¤ ßæØé ·¤æ
density 103 kg/m3. The pressure inside ÕéÜÕéÜæ ãñÐ ÕéÜÕéÜð ·ð¤ ¥‹ÎÚU ÎæÕ ßæØé×´ÇUÜèØ ÎæÕ
the bubble is 1100 Nm22 greater than the âð 1100 Nm22 ¥çÏ·¤ ãñÐ Îýß ·ð¤ ÂëcÆU âð ç·¤â
atmospheric pressure. At what depth is »ãÚUæ§ü ÂÚU ÕéÜÕéÜæ ãñ? (g59.8 ms22)
the bubble below the surface of the
liquid ? (g59.8 ms22)
(1) 0.1 m (1) 0.1 m
(2) 0.15 m (2) 0.15 m
(3) 0.20 m (3) 0.20 m
(4) 0.25 m (4) 0.25 m
11. A hot body, obeying Newton’s law of 11. ‹ØêÅUÙ ·ð¤ àæèÌÜÙ çÙØ× ·¤æ ÂæÜÙ ·¤ÚUÌè ãé§ü °·¤ »×ü
cooling is cooling down from its peak value ßSÌé ¥ÂÙð àæèáü ÌæÂ×æÙ 808C âð ÂçÚUßðàæ ÌæÂ×æÙ
808C to an ambient temperature of 308C. 308C Ì·¤ Æ´UÇUè ãæðÌè ãñÐ Øã 808C âð 408C Ì·¤
It takes 5 minutes in cooling down from Æ´UÇUæ ãæðÙð ×ð´ 5 ç×ÙÅU ÜðÌè ãñÐ Øã 628C âð 328C
808C to 408C. How much time will it take Ì·¤ Æ´UÇæ ãæðÙð ×ð´ ç·¤ÌÙæ â×Ø Üð»è?
to cool down from 628C to 328C ? (çÎØæ ãñ ln 250.693, ln 551.609)
(Given ln 250.693, ln 551.609) (1) 3.75 ç×ÙÅU
(1) 3.75 minutes (2) 8.6 ç×ÙÅU
(2) 8.6 minutes (3) 9.6 ç×ÙÅU
(3) 9.6 minutes (4) 6.5 ç×ÙÅU
(4) 6.5 minutes

English : 7 Set : 11 Hindi : 7 Set : 11

12. During an adiabatic compression, 830 J of 12. °·¤ L¤hæððc× â´ÂèǸ٠·ð¤ ÎæñÚUæÙ, °·¤ çmÂÚU×æ‡æé·¤ ¥æÎàæü
work is done on 2 moles of a diatomic ideal »ñâ ·ð¤ 2 ×æðÜ ·¤æ ¥æØÌÙ 50% ·¤× ç·¤Øð ÁæÙð ×ð´
gas to reduce its volume by 50%. The 830 J ·¤æ ·¤æØü ·¤ÚUÙæ ÂǸÌæ ãñÐ §â·ð¤ ÌæÂ×æÙ ×ð´
change in its temperature is nearly : ÂçÚUßÌüÙ ãñ ֻܻ Ñ (R58.3 JK21 mol21)
(R58.3 JK21 mol21)
(1) 40 K (1) 40 K
(2) 33 K (2) 33 K
(3) 20 K (3) 20 K
(4) 14 K (4) 14 K

English : 8 Set : 11 Hindi : 8 Set : 11

13. An ideal monoatomic gas is confined in a 13.
cylinder by a spring loaded piston of cross
section 8.031023 m2. Initially the gas is at
300K and occupies a volume of
2.4310 23 m3 and the spring is in its
relaxed state as shown in figure. The gas is
heated by a small heater until the piston
moves out slowly by 0.1 m. The force
constant of the spring is 8000 N/m and the
atmospheric pressure is 1.03105 N/m2.
The cylinder and the piston are thermally
insulated. The piston and the spring are
massless and there is no friction between
the piston and the cylinder. The final
temperature of the gas will be :
(Neglect the heat loss through the lead
wires of the heater. The heat capacity of
the heater coil is also negligible)
°·¤ ÕðÜÙ ×ð´ ¥ÙéÂýSÍ ·¤æÅU 8.031023 m2 ·ð¤ °·¤
·¤×æÙèÎæÚU ÖæçÚUÌ çÂSÅUÙ mæÚUæ °·¤ ¥æÎàæü °·¤ÂÚU×æ‡æé·¤
»ñâ ·¤æð ÚU¹æ »Øæ ãñÐ ÂýæÚUÖ ×ð´ »ñâ 300 K ÂÚU ãñ ¥æñÚU
2.431023 m3 ¥æØÌÙ ÚU¹Ìè ãñ´ ¥æñÚU ·¤×æÙè ¥ÂÙè
çßoýæ´çÌ ¥ßSÍæ ×ð´ ãñ Áñâæ ç·¤ 翘æ ×ð´ ÎàææüØæ »Øæ ãñÐ
»ñâ ·¤æð °·¤ ÀUæðÅðU ãèÅUÚU mæÚUæ ÌÕ Ì·¤ »ÚU×U ç·¤Øæ ÁæÌæ
ãñ ÁÕ Ì·¤ ç·¤ çÂSÅUÙ ÏèÚðU âð 0.1 m ·¤è »çÌ Ù ·¤ÚU
ÜðÐ ·¤×æÙè ·¤æ ÕÜ çÙØÌæ¡·¤ 8000 N/m ãñ ¥æñÚU
ßæØé×´ÇUÜèØ ÎæÕ 1.03105 N/m2 ãñÐ ÕðÜÙ °ß´
çÂSÅUÙ ª¤c×æÚUæÏð è ãñ́Ð çÂSÅUÙ °ß´ ·¤×æÙè ÎýÃØ×æÙçßãèÙ
ãñ ¥æñÚU çÂSÅUÙ °ß´ ÕðÜÙ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤æð§ü ƒæáü‡æ Ùãè´ ãñÐ
»ñâ ·¤æ ¥ç‹Ì× ÌæÂ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
(ãèÅUÚU ·ð¤ ÜèÇU ÌæÚUæð´ â𠪤Áæü ·¤è ãæçÙ Ù»‡Ø ×æÙð
¥æñÚU ãèÅUÚU ·é¤‡ÇUÜè ·¤è ª¤c×æÏæçÚUÌæ Öè Ù»‡Ø ãñ) :

(1) 300 K
(2) 800 K
(3) 500 K
(4) 1000 K
(1) 300 K
(2) 800 K
(3) 500 K
(4) 1000 K

English : 9 Set : 11 Hindi : 9 Set : 11

14. The angular frequency of the damped 14. °·¤ ¥ß×ç‹ÎÌ ÎæðÜ·¤ ·¤è ·¤æð‡æèØ ¥æßëçžæ §ââð Îè
oscillator is given by, ÁæÌè ãñ ,
k r2  k r2 
v5  2  where k is the spring v5  2  Áãæ¡ k ·¤×æÙè çSÍÚUæ¡·¤ ãñ,
m 4m 2  m 4m 2 
constant, m is the mass of the oscillator and m ÎæðÜ·¤ ·¤æ ÎýÃØ×æÙ ãñ ¥æñÚU r ¥ß׋ÎÙ çSÍÚUæ¡·¤ ãñÐ

r2
r is the damping constant. If the ratio ØçÎ ¥ÙéÂæÌ 5 8% ãñ, ÌÕ ¥Ùß×ç‹ÎÌ ÎæðÜ·¤
mk
r2
·ð¤ ×é·¤æÕÜð ¥æßÌü ·¤æÜ ×ð´ ÂçÚUßÌü٠ֻܻ ãæð»æ Ñ
is 8%, the change in time period
mk
compared to the undamped oscillator is
approximately as follows :
(1) increases by 1% (1) 1%âð ßëçh ãæð»è
(2) increases by 8% (2) 8%âð ßëçh ãæð»è
(3) decreases by 1% (3) 1%âð ƒæÅðU»æ
(4) decreases by 8% (4) 8%âð ƒæÅðU»æ

15. Two factories are sounding their sirens 15. Îæð Èñ¤€ÅUçÚUØæ¡ ¥ÂÙð âæØÚUÙ 800 Hz ÂÚU ŠßçÙÌ ·¤ÚUÌè
at 800 Hz. A man goes from one factory ãñ´Ð °·¤ ÃØç€Ì 2 m/s ·¤è ¿æÜ âð °·¤ Èñ¤€ÅUÚUè âð
to other at a speed of 2 m/s. The velocity Îê â ÚU è Èñ ¤ €ÅÚè Ì·¤ ÁæÌæ ãñ Ð ŠßçÙ ·¤æ ßð »
of sound is 320 m/s. The number of beats 320 m/s ãñÐ °·¤ âð·´¤ÇU ×ð´ ÃØç€Ì mæÚUæ âéÙè »§ü
heard by the person in one second will çßS‹Îæð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ ãñ Ñ
be :
(1) 2 (1) 2
(2) 4 (2) 4
(3) 8 (3) 8
(4) 10 (4) 10

English : 10 Set : 11 Hindi : 10 Set : 11

16. A cone of base radius R and height h is 16. ¥æÏæÚU ç˜æ•Øæ R °ß´ ª¡¤¿æ§ü h ßæÜæ °·¤ àæ´·é¤ ¥æÏæÚU
→ →
located in a uniform electric field E ·ð¤ â×æ‹ÌÚU °·¤â×æÙ çßléÌ ÿæð˜æ E ×ð´ çSÍÌ ãñÐ
parallel to its base. The electric flux àæ´·é¤ ×ð´ Âýßðàæ ·¤ÚUÙð ßæÜæ çßléÌ Ü€â ãñ :
entering the cone is :

1 1
(1) EhR (1) EhR
2 2

(2) EhR (2) EhR

(3) 2EhR (3) 2EhR

(4) 4EhR (4) 4EhR

English : 11 Set : 11 Hindi : 11 Set : 11

17. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two 17.
plates of length l, width w and separated
by distance d. A dielectric slab (dielectric
constant K) that fits exactly between the
plates is held near the edge of the plates.
It is pulled into the capacitor by a force
∂U
F5 2 where U is the energy of the
∂x
capacitor when dielectric is inside the
capacitor up to distance x (See figure). If
the charge on the capacitor is Q then the
force on the dielectric when it is near the
edge is :
°·¤ â×æ‹ÌÚU ŒÜðÅU â´ÏæçÚU˜æ Îæð ŒÜðÅUæð´ âð ÕÙæ ãñ çÁÙ·¤è
ܐÕæ§ü l, ¿æñÇUæ§ü w ãñ´ ¥æñÚU °·¤ ÎéâÚðU âð d ÎêÚUè ÂÚU
ãñÐ °·¤ ÂÚUæßñléÌ Â^è (ÂÚUæßñléÌæ´·¤ K) Áæð ç·¤ ŒÜðÅUæð´
·ð¤ Õè¿ ÆUè·¤ âð â×æ ÁæÌè ãñ, ·¤æð ŒÜðÅUæð´ ·¤è çâÚðU ·ð¤
Âæâ ·¤Ç¸ ·¤ÚU ÚU¹æ ãé¥æ ãñÐ §âð â´ÏæçÚU˜æ ·ð¤ ¥‹ÎÚU
∂U
ÕÜ F5 2 mæÚUæ ¹è´¿æ ÁæÌæ ãñ Áãæ¡ U â´ÏæçÚU˜æ
∂x
·¤è ÌÕ ª¤Áæü ãñ ÁÕ ÂÚUæßñléÌ â´ÏæçÚU˜æ ·ð¤ ¥‹ÎÚU x ÎêÚUè
ÂÚU ãñÐ (翘æ Îð¹ð´)Ð ØçÎ â´ÏæçÚU˜æ ÂÚU ¥æßðàæ Q ãñ,
ÌÕ ÂÚUæßñléÌ ÂÚU ÕÜ, ÁÕ ßã çâÚðU ·ð¤ Âæâ ãñ, ãæð»æ Ñ

Q2 d
(1) K
2 wl 2 eo
Q2 d
(1) K Q2 w
2 wl 2 eo (2) ( K21)
2 dl 2 eo
Q2 w
(2) ( K21) Q2 d
2 dl 2 eo (3) ( K21)
2 wl 2 eo
Q2 d
(3) ( K21) Q2 w
2 wl 2 eo (4) K
2 dl 2 eo
Q2 w
(4) K
2 dl 2 eo

English : 12 Set : 11 Hindi : 12 Set : 11

18. In the circuit shown, current (in A) 18. ÎàææüØð »Øð ÂçÚUÂÍ ×ð´, 50 V °ß´ 30 V ÕñÅUçÚUØæð´ ×ð´
through the 50 V and 30 V batteries are, ÏæÚUæ (A ×ð´) ·ý¤×àæÑ ãñ´ Ñ
respectively :

(1) 2.5 and 3 (1) 2.5°ß´ 3

(2) 3.5 and 2 (2) 3.5 °ß´ 2
(3) 4.5 and 1 (3) 4.5 °ß´ 1
(4) 3 and 2.5 (4) 3 °ß´ 2.5
19. Three straight parallel current carrying 19. ÌèÙ âèÏð â×æ‹ÌÚU ÏæÚUæ ÂýßæçãÌ ¿æÜ·¤ 翘æ ×ð´ ÎàææüØð
conductors are shown in the figure. The »Øð ãñ´Ð ܐÕæ§ü 25 cm ·ð¤ Õè¿ ßæÜð ¿æÜ·¤ mæÚUæ
force experienced by the middle conductor ¥ÙéÖß ç·¤Øæ »Øæ ÕÜ ãñ :
of length 25 cm is :

(1) 331024 N toward right (1) 331024 N Îæ¡Øè ¥æðÚU

(2) 631024 N toward left (2) 631024 N Õæ¡Øè ¥æðÚU
(3) 931024 N toward left (3) 931024 N Õæ¡Øè ¥æðÚU
(4) Zero (4) àæê‹ØU

English : 13 Set : 11 Hindi : 13 Set : 11

20. Three identical bars A, B and C are made 20. ÌèÙ âßüâ×M¤Âè ÀUǸð A, B °ß´ C ÌèÙ çßç֋Ù
of different magnetic materials. When ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÂÎæÍæðZ âð ÕÙè ãñ´Ð ÁÕ §‹ãð´ °·¤ °·¤â×æÙ
kept in a uniform magnetic field, the field ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ ×ð´ ÚU¹æ ÁæÌæ ãñ, ÌÕ §Ù ÂÚU ÿæð˜æ ÚðU¹æ°¡
lines around them look as follows : çِ٠Âý·¤æÚU âð çιÌè ãñ´ Ñ

Make the correspondence of these bars §Ù ÀUÇæ¸ ´ð ·ð¤ ÂÎæÍæðZ ·¤æð ÂýçÌ¿éÕ·¤èØ (D), Üæðã ¿éÕ·¤èØ
with their material being diamagnetic (D), (F) °ß´ ¥Ùé¿éÕ·¤èØ (P) ¥æÏæÚU ÂÚU â´»Ì ·¤ÚðU´ :
ferromagnetic (F) and paramagnetic (P) :
(1) A ↔ D, B ↔ P, C ↔ F (1) A ↔ D, B ↔ P, C ↔ F
(2) A ↔ F, B ↔ D, C ↔ P (2) A ↔ F, B ↔ D, C ↔ P
(3) A ↔ P, B ↔ F, C ↔ D (3) A ↔ P, B ↔ F, C ↔ D
(4) A ↔ F, B ↔ P, C ↔ D (4) A ↔ F, B ↔ P, C ↔ D

21. A coil of circular cross-section having 21. 1000 Èð¤ÚðU °ß´ 4 cm2 Ȥܷ¤ ÿæð˜æÈ¤Ü ßæÜè °·¤
1000 turns and 4 cm2 face area is placed ßëžæèØ ¥ÙéÂýSÍ ·¤æÅU ·¤è ·é´¤ÇUÜè ·¤æð §â·ð¤ ¥ÿæ ·ð¤
with its axis parallel to a magnetic field â×æ‹ÌÚU °·¤ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ ×ð´ ÚU¹æ »Øæ ãñ Áæð ç·¤
which decreases by 10 22 Wb m 22 in 1022 Wb m22 0.01 s ×𴠃æÅU ÁæÌæ ãñÐ ·é´¤‡ÇUÜè
0.01 s. The e.m.f. induced in the coil is : ×ð´ ÂýðçÚUÌ çßléÌ ßæã·¤ ÕÜ ãñ Ñ
(1) 400 mV (1) 400 mV
(2) 200 mV (2) 200 mV
(3) 4 mV (3) 4 mV
(4) 0.4 mV (4) 0.4 mV

English : 14 Set : 11 Hindi : 14 Set : 11

22. An electromagnetic wave of frequency 22. ¥æßëçžæ 131014 ãÅüUÁ ·¤è °·¤ çßléÌ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÌÚ´U»
131014 hertz is propagating along z - axis. z - ¥ÿæ ÂÚU â´¿ÚU‡æ ·¤ÚU ÚUãè ãñÐ çßléÌ ÿæð˜æ ·¤æ
The amplitude of electric field is 4 V/m. If ¥æØæ× 4 V/m ãñÐ ØçÎ
e o58.8310 212 C 2/N-m 2, then average eo58.8310212 C2/N-m2, ÌÕ çßléÌ ÿæð˜æ ·¤æ
energy density of electric field will ¥æñâÌ ª¤Áæü ƒæÙˆß ãæð»æ :
be :
(1) 35.2310210 J/m3 (1) 35.2310210 J/m3
(2) 35.2310211 J/m3 (2) 35.2310211 J/m3
(3) 35.2310212 J/m3 (3) 35.2310212 J/m3
(4) 35.2310213 J/m3 (4) 35.2310213 J/m3
23. An object is located in a fixed position 23. °·¤ ÂÎðü ·ð¤ âæ×Ùð °·¤ çSÍÚU çSÍçÌ ×ð´ °·¤ ßSÌé çSÍÌ
in front of a screen. Sharp image is ãñÐ °·¤ ÂÌÜð Üð‹â ·¤è 10 cm ÎêÚUè ÂÚU Îæð çSÍçÌØæð´
obtained on the screen for two positions âð ÂÎðü ÂÚU SÂcÅU ÂýçÌçÕÕ ÕÙÌð ãñ´Ð ÎæðÙæð´ çSÍçÌØæð´ ×ð´
of a thin lens separated by 10 cm. The size ÂýçÌçՐÕæ𴠷𤠥淤æÚU ·¤æ ¥ÙéÂæÌ 3 : 2 ãñÐ ßSÌé °ß´
of the images in two situations are in the ÂÎðü ·ð¤ Õè¿ ÎêÚUè €Øæ ãñ?
ratio 3 : 2. What is the distance between
the screen and the object ?
(1) 124.5 cm (1) 124.5 cm
(2) 144.5 cm (2) 144.5 cm
(3) 65.0 cm (3) 65.0 cm
(4) 99.0 cm (4) 99.0 cm

English : 15 Set : 11 Hindi : 15 Set : 11

24. Two monochromatic light beams of 24. ÌèßýÌæ 16 °ß´ 9 §·¤æ§ü ßæÜè Îæð °·¤ß‡æèü Âý·¤æàæ Âé´Áæð´
intensity 16 and 9 units are interfering. ·ð¤ Õè¿ ÃØçÌ·¤ÚU‡æ ãæð ÚUãæ ãñÐ ÂçÚU‡ææ×è ç¿˜æ ·ð¤
The ratio of intensities of bright and dark ©ÁÜð ¥æñÚU ·¤æÜð çãSâæð´ ·¤è ÌèßýÌæ¥æð´ ·¤æ ¥ÙéÂæÌ
parts of the resultant pattern is : ãæð»æ Ñ
16 16
(1) (1)
9 9

4 4
(2) (2)
3 3

7 7
(3) (3)
1 1

49 49
(4) (4)
1 1

25. In a compound microscope the focal length 25. °·¤ â´Øé€Ì âêÿ×Îàæèü ×ð´ ¥çÖÎëàØ·¤ Üð‹â ·¤è Ȥæð·¤â
of objective lens is 1.2 cm and focal length ܐÕæ§ü 1.2 cm ¥æñÚU Ùðç˜æ·¤æ ·¤è Ȥæð·¤â ܐÕæ§ü
of eye piece is 3.0 cm. When object is kept 3.0 cm ãñ´Ð ÁÕ ßSÌé ·¤æð ¥çÖÎëàØ·¤ ·ð¤ âæ×Ùð
at 1.25 cm in front of objective, final image 1.25 cm ·¤è ÎêÚUè ÂÚU ÚU¹æ ÁæÌæ ãñ, ÌÕ ¥ç‹Ì×
is formed at infinity. Magnifying power ÂýçÌçÕÕ ¥Ù‹Ì ÂÚU ÕÙÌæ ãñÐ â´Øé€Ì âêÿ×Îàæèü ·¤è
of the compound microscope should be : ¥æßÏüÙ àæç€Ì ãæðÙè ¿æçã° Ñ
(1) 200 (1) 200
(2) 100 (2) 100
(3) 400 (3) 400
(4) 150 (4) 150

English : 16 Set : 11 Hindi : 16 Set : 11

26. A photon of wavelength l is scattered 26. çßoýæ× ¥ßSÍæ ·ð¤ °·¤ §Üð€ÅþUæÙ âð ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü l ·¤æ
from an electron, which was at rest. The °·¤ ȤæðÅUæÙ Âý·¤èç‡æüÌ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü SÍæÙæ‹ÌÚU
wavelength shift Dl is three times of l and Dl ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü l ·¤æ ÌèÙ »éÙæ ãñ ¥æñÚU Âý·¤è‡æüÙ ·¤æð‡æ
the angle of scattering u is 608. The angle u5608 ãñÐ §Üð€ÅþUæÙ f ·¤æð‡æ ÂÚU ÂýçÌçÿæŒÌ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ
at which the electron recoiled is f. The tan f ·¤æ ×æÙ ãñ Ñ (§Üð€ÅþUæÙ ·¤è ¿æÜ Âý·¤æàæ ·¤è
value of tan f is : (electron speed is much ¿æÜ âð ·¤æÈ¤è ·¤× ãñ)
smaller than the speed of light)
(1) 0.16 (1) 0.16
(2) 0.22 (2) 0.22
(3) 0.25 (3) 0.25
(4) 0.28 (4) 0.28

27. A radioactive nuclei with decay constant 27. 100 ÙæçÖ·¤ ÂýçÌ âñç·¤‡ÇU ·¤è çSÍÚU ÎÚU âð ÿæØçSÍÚUæ¡·¤
0.5/s is being produced at a constant rate 0.5/s ßæÜð ÚðUçÇUØæðâç·ý¤Ø ÙæçÖ·¤ ©ˆÂ‹Ù ãæð ÚUãð ãñ´Ð
of 100 nuclei/s. If at t50 there were no ØçÎ t50 ÂÚU °·¤ Öè Ùæç×·¤ ©ÂçSÍÌ Ùãè´ Íæ, ÌÕ
nuclei, the time when there are 50 nuclei 50 ÙæçÖ·¤ ©ˆÂ‹Ù ãæðÙð ×ð´ Ü»æ â×Ø ãñ Ñ
is :
(1) 1s (1) 1s

4 4
(2) 2 ln   s (2) 2 ln   s
3 3
(3) ln 2 s (3) ln 2 s

4 4
(4) ln   s (4) ln   s
3 3

English : 17 Set : 11 Hindi : 17 Set : 11

28. A Zener diode is connected to a battery 28. °·¤ ÁðÙÚU ÇUæØæðÇU ·¤æð °·¤ ÕñÅUÚUè °ß´ °·¤ ÜæðÇU âð
and a load as shown below : ÁæðÇ¸æ »Øæ ãñ Áñâæ ç·¤ ÂçÚUÂÍ ×ð´ ÎàææüØæ »Øæ ãñÐ ÏæÚUæØð´
The currents I, IZ and IL are respectively I, IZ °ß´ IL ·ý¤×àæÑ ãñ´ Ñ

(1) 15 mA, 5 mA, 10 mA (1) 15 mA, 5 mA, 10 mA

(2) 15 mA, 7.5 mA, 7.5 mA (2) 15 mA, 7.5 mA, 7.5 mA

(3) 12.5 mA, 5 mA, 7.5 mA (3) 12.5 mA, 5 mA, 7.5 mA

(4) 12.5 mA, 7.5 mA, 5 mA (4) 12.5 mA, 7.5 mA, 5 mA

English : 18 Set : 11 Hindi : 18 Set : 11

29. Match the List - I (Phenomenon associated 29.
with electromagnetic radiation) with
List - II (Part of electromagnetic spectrum)
and select the correct code from the
choices given below the lists :
âê¿è-I (çßléÌ ¿éÕ·¤èØ çßç·¤ÚU‡æ âð âÕh ƒæÅUÙæ°¡)
·¤æð âê¿è-II (çßléÌ ¿éÕ·¤èØ SÂð€ÅþU× ·¤æ Öæ») âð
âé×ðçÜÌ ·¤èçÁ° ¥æñÚU âêç¿Øæð́ ·ð¤ Ùè¿ð çÎØð »Øð çß·¤ËÂæð́
×´ð âð âãè çß·¤Ë ¿éçÙ° Ñ

List - I List - II ÇÏ¤Í - I ÇÏ¤Í - II

Visible
I Doublet of sodium A
radiation
I ÇËÕ̬U½¼ œ‰Ë Ìmœ‰ A ³ÐŽ ÌÄ̜‰¿UøË

Wavelength
corresponding to ǃ§ÏøËá ǼÌcªU ¼Õ™ Ǽ³ÖÌ؉
II temperature associated B Microwave II ÌÄ̜‰¿UøË œ‰Õ‰»¿UÕU ÈËÕ¾Õ ÇÕ ÇƒºÌh± B ÇÏÏä¼ ±¿U™U 
with the isotropic
±Ë§¼Ë¾ œ‰Õ‰ Ǚ™ ± ±¿U™U ³Öç½á
radiation filling all space

Wavelength emitted by Šü±¿U±Ë¿Uœ‰Í½ ŠËœ‰ËÅË ¼Õ™ §¿U¼ËøËÎ

Short
III atomic hydrogen in C
radiowave
III Èˌ¬UUã ˦
Õ ¾ mË¿UË ŽíÇ̦ᱠC ÁìËÎ ¿UÕU̬U½ËÕ ±¿U™U Õ
interstellar space
±¿U™U ³Öç½á
Wavelength of radiation
Èˌ¬UUã ËÕ¦¾ ¼Õ™ ³ËÕ Ç¼Í§ ‰¦Ëá S±¿U˙Õ
IV arising from two close D X - rays IV D X - ̜‰¿UøËՙ
energy levels in hydrogen ÇÕ Ì¾œ‰ÁÕ ÌÄ̜‰¿UøË œ‰Í ±¿U™U ³Öç½á

(1) (I)-(A), (II)-(B), (III)-(B), (IV)-(C) (1) (I)-(A), (II)-(B), (III)-(B), (IV)-(C)
(2) (I)-(A), (II)-(B), (III)-(C), (IV)-(C) (2) (I)-(A), (II)-(B), (III)-(C), (IV)-(C)
(3) (I)-(D), (II)-(C), (III)-(A), (IV)-(B) (3) (I)-(D), (II)-(C), (III)-(A), (IV)-(B)
(4) (I)-(B), (II)-(A), (III)-(D), (IV)-(A) (4) (I)-(B), (II)-(A), (III)-(D), (IV)-(A)

English : 19 Set : 11 Hindi : 19 Set : 11

30. In the circuit diagrams (A, B, C and D) 30.
shown below, R is a high resistance and S
is a resistance of the order of galvanometer
resistance G. The correct circuit,
corresponding to the half deflection
method for finding the resistance and
figure of merit of the galvanometer, is the
circuit labelled as :
ÎàææüØð ÂçÚUÂÍ ç¿˜ææð´ (A, B, C °ß´ D) ×ð´, R °·¤ ¥‹Ø
©‘¿ ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ ãñ ¥æñÚU S »ñËßñÙæð×æÂè ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ G ·¤è
·¤æðçÅU ·¤æ ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ ãñÐ »ñËßñÙæð×æÂè ·¤æ ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ °ß´
ÎÿæÌæ´·¤ çÙ·¤æÜÙð ·ð¤ ¥hü-çßÿæð‡æ çßçÏ ·ð¤ â´»Ì
âãè ÂçÚUÂÍ ç¿ç‹ãÌ ãñ §ââð Ñ

(A)

(A)

(B)

(B)

(C)
(C)

English : 20 Set : 11 Hindi : 20 Set : 11

 (D)
(D)

RS
(1) Circuit A with G5 ( RS
R 2 S)
(1) G5 (
R 2 S)
·ð¤ âæÍ ÂçÚUÂÍ A
(2) Circuit B with G5S
(2) G5S ·ð¤ âæÍ ÂçÚUÂÍ B
(3) Circuit C with G5S
(3) G5S ·ð¤ âæÍ ÂçÚUÂÍ C
RS
(4) Circuit D with G5 RS
R2 S (4) G5 ·ð¤ âæÍ ÂçÚUÂÍ D
R2 S

English : 21 Set : 11 Hindi : 21 Set : 11

 PART B — CHEMISTRY
31. If lo and l be the threshold wavelength 31.
and wavelength of incident light, the
velocity of photoelectron ejected from the
metal surface is :
Öæ» B — ÚUâæØÙ çߙææÙ
ØçÎ lo ¥æñÚU l ÎãÜè$Áè ÌÚ´U»ÎñƒØü ¥æñÚU ¥æÂçÌÌ Âý·¤æàæ
·¤æ ÌÚ´U» ÎñƒØü ãæð´ Ìæð ÏæÌé SÍÜ âð çÙ·¤Üð Âý·¤æàæèØ
§Üð€ÅþUæÙæ´ð ·¤æ ßð» ãæð»æ Ñ

2h 2h
(1) ( lo 2 l ) (1) ( lo 2 l )
m m

2hc 2hc
(2) ( lo 2 l ) (2) ( lo 2 l )
m m

2 h c  lo 2 l  2 h c  lo 2 l 
(3) m  l lo  (3) m  l lo 

2h  1 1 2h  1 1
(4)  2  (4)  2 
m  lo l m  lo l

32. The appearance of colour in solid alkali 32. ÆUæðâ ÿææÚU ÏæÌé ãðÜæ§ÇUæð´ ×ð´ Ú´U» ·ð¤ Îð¹ð ÁæÙð ·¤æ ·¤æÚU‡æ
metal halides is generally due to : ÂýæØÑ ãæðÌæ ãñ Ñ
(1) Schottky defect (1) àææòÅU·¤è Îæðá
(2) Frenkel defect (2) $Èýñ´¤·¤Ü Îæðá
(3) Interstitial position (3) ¥‹ÌÚUæÜè SÍæÙ
(4) F-centres (4) F-·ð¤‹Îý

English : 22 Set : 11 Hindi : 22 Set : 11

33. In the reaction of formation of sulphur 33. âÂ·ü¤ çßçÏ mæÚUæ âË$ȤÚU ÅþUæ§ü¥æ€âæ§ÇU ÕÙæÙð ·¤è
trioxide by contact process ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ 2SO21O2 ì 2SO3 ×ð´ ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤è
d [O2 ]
2SO21O2 ì 2SO3 the rate of reaction was ÎÚU ·¤æð 522.531024 ×æðÜ L21 s21
dt
measured as ·ð¤ M¤Â ×ð´ ×æÂæ »ØæÐ ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ÎÚU [SO2]·ð¤ M¤Â ×ð´
d [O 2 ]
dt
522.531024mol L21 s21. The ×æðÜ L21 s21 ×ð´ ãæð»è Ñ
rate of reaction in terms of [SO2] in mol
L21s21 will be :
(1) 21.25310 24 (1) 21.25310 24
(2) 22.50310 24 (2) 22.50310 24
(3) 23.75310 24 (3) 23.75310 24
(4) 25.00310 24 (4) 25.00310 24
34. Assuming that the degree of hydrolysis is 34. Øã ×æÙÌð ãé° ç·¤ ãæ§ÇþUæðÜðçââ ·¤æ ·ý¤×æ´·¤ (çÇU»ýè)
small, the pH of 0.1 M solution of sodium ‹Øê Ù ãñ , âæð ç ÇU Ø × °ð â èÅð U Å U ·ð ¤ 0.1M çßÜØÙ
acetate (Ka=1.031025) will be : (Ka=1.031025) ·¤æ pH ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) 5.0 (1) 5.0
(2) 6.0 (2) 6.0
(3) 8.0 (3) 8.0
(4) 9.0 (4) 9.0

English : 23 Set : 11 Hindi : 23 Set : 11

35. For the reaction, 2N2O5 → 4NO21O2, the 35. ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ 2N2O5 → 4NO21O2, ·ð¤ çÜ° ÎÚU
rate equation can be expressed in two â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ·¤æð Îæð ÌÚUè·ð¤ âð çܹæ Áæ â·¤Ìæ ãñ
d[N2O5 ] d[N2O5 ]
ways 2 5 k [ N 2 O 5 ] and 2 5 k [N2O5 ] ¥æñÚU
dt dt
d [ NO 2 ] d [ NO 2 ]
1 5 k9 [ N 2 O 5 ] 1 5 k9 [ N 2 O 5 ]
dt dt
k and k’ are related as : k ¥æñÚU k’ ·¤æð çِ٠緤â M¤Â ×ð´ çܹæ ÁæØð»æ?
(1) k5k’ (1) k5k’
(2) 2k5k’ (2) 2k5k’
(3) k52k’ (3) k52k’
(4) k54k’ (4) k54k’
36. In some solutions, the concentration of
H3O1 remains constant even when small 36. ·é¤ÀU çßÜØÙæð´ ×ð´ ÂýÕÜ °ðçâÇU ¥Íßæ ÂýÕÜ ÿææÚU ·¤è
amounts of strong acid or strong base are ÍæðǸè ×æ˜ææ ç×ÜæÙð ÂÚU Öè H3O1 ·¤æ âæ‹Îý‡æ çSÍÚU ãè
added to them. These solutions are known ÚUãÌæ ãñÐ §Ù çßÜØÙæð´ ·¤æð Ùæ× çÎØæ ÁæÌæ ãñ Ñ
as :
(1) Ideal solutions
(2) Colloidal solutions (1) ¥æÎàæü çßÜØÙ
(3) True solutions (2) ·¤æðÜæØÇUè çßÜØÙ
(4) Buffer solutions (3) ßæSÌçß·¤ çßÜØÙ
(4) ÕȤÚU (Buffer) çßÜØÙ

English : 24 Set : 11 Hindi : 24 Set : 11

37. Given 37. çÎØæ »Øæ ãñ -
Fe31(aq)1 e2®Fe21(aq); E8=10.77 V Fe31(ÁÜèØ)1 e2®Fe21(ÁÜèØ); E8 =10.77 V
A l 3 1 ( a q ) 1 3 e2 ® A l ( s ) ; E 8 = 2 1 . 6 6 V Al31(ÁÜèØ)13 e2®Al(s); E8 = 21.66 V
2
Br2(aq)12 e2®2B r2 ; E8=11.09 V Br2(ÁÜèØ)12 e ®2B r2 ; E8 = 11.09 V
Considering the electrode potentials, §Üñ€ÅþUæðÇU çßÖßæ𴠷𤠥æÏæÚU ÂÚU çِÙæð´ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ ·ý¤×
which of the following represents the ¥Â¿ØÙ àæç€ÌØæð´ ·¤æð âãè ÂýSÌéÌ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ?
correct order of reducing power ?
(1) Fe21< Al < B r2
(1) Fe21< Al < B r2
(2) B r2 < Fe21< Al
(2) B r2 < Fe21< Al
(3) Al < B r2 < Fe21
(3) Al < B r2 < Fe21
(4) Al < Fe21< B r2
(4) Al < Fe21< B r2 38. °·¤ »ñ â ·ð ¤ çâç܋ÇU Ú U ·¤æ Âý æ ÚU ç Ö·¤ ¥æØÌÙ
750.0 mL ãñÐ ØçÎ çâç܋ÇUÚU ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤è »ñâ ·¤æ
38. The initial volume of a gas cylinder is ÎæÕ 840.0 mm Hg âð ÕÎÜ ·¤ÚU 360.0 mm Hg
750.0 mL. If the pressure of gas inside the ãæð ÁæÌæ ãñ Ìæð »ñâ ·¤æ ¥ç‹Ì× ¥æØÌÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
cylinder changes from 840.0 mm Hg to
360.0 mm Hg, the final volume the gas will (1) 1.750 L
be : (2) 3.60 L
(1) 1.750 L (3) 4.032 L
(2) 3.60 L (4) 7.50 L
(3) 4.032 L
(4) 7.50 L

English : 25 Set : 11 Hindi : 25 Set : 11

39. The molar heat capacity (Cp) of CD2O is 39. CD2O ·¤è ×æðÜÚU ª¤c×æ ÏæçÚUÌæ (Cp) 1000 K ÂÚU
10 cals at 1000 K. The change in entropy 10 cals ãñÐ 32 g CD2O ßæc ·¤æð 1000 K âð
associated with cooling of 32 g of CD2O 100 K Ì·¤ çSÍÚU ÎæÕ ÂÚU ÆU‡ÇUæ ·¤ÚUÙð ÂÚU âÕh
vapour from 1000 K to 100 K at constant °ð‹ÅþUæÂè ÂçÚUßÌüÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
pressure will be : (D = çÇUØéÅUèçÚUØ×, ¥æñÚU §â·¤æ ÂÚU×æ‡æé ÎýÃØ×æÙ
(D = deuterium, at. mass = 2 u) = 2 ×æ˜æ·¤)
(1) 23.03 cal deg21 (1) 23.03 cal deg21
(2) 223.03 cal deg21 (2) 223.03 cal deg21
(3) 2.303 cal deg21 (3) 2.303 cal deg21
(4) 22.303 cal deg21 (4) 22.303 cal deg21
40. Based on the equation : 40. â×è·¤ÚU‡æ Ñ
 1 1   1 1 
(523 218 - 2 2 (523 218 - 2 2
 n 2
n 1   n 2
n 1 
2 2
the wavelength of the light that must be ·ð¤ ¥æÏæÚU ÂÚU ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ·ð¤ §Üñ€ÅþUæÙ ·¤æð SÌÚU n=1 âð
absorbed to excite hydrogen electron from SÌÚU n=2 Ì·¤ ©žæðçÁÌ ·¤ÚUÙð ·ð¤ çÜØð Âý·¤æàæ, çÁâ
level n=1 to level n=2 will be : ·¤æ àææðá‡æ ¥æßàØ·¤ ãæð»æ, ·¤æ ÌÚ´U» ÎñƒØü §Ù×ð´ âð €Øæ
(h = 6.625310234 Js, C= 33108 ms21) ãæð»æ Ñ
(h = 6.625310234 Js, C = 33108 ms21)
(1) 1.32531027 m (1) 1.32531027 m
(2) 1.325310210 m (2) 1.325310210 m
(3) 2.650310 27 m (3) 2.65031027 m
(4) 5.300310210 m (4) 5.300310210 m

English : 26 Set : 11 Hindi : 26 Set : 11

41. Which of the following series correctly 41. çِ٠âð ·¤æñÙ âæ âèÚUè$Á Îæð ̈ßæð´ X ¥æñÚU Y ·ð¤ Õè¿
represents relations between the elements ·ð¤ âÕ‹Ï ·¤æ âãè çÙM¤ÂÙ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ?
from X to Y ?
X ® Y X ® Y
(1) 3Li ® 19K Ionization enthalpy (1) 3Li ¥æØÙè·¤ÚU‡æ ·¤è °ð‹ÍñËÂè ÕɸÌè
® 19K
increases ãñ
(2) 9F ® 35Br Electron gain enthalpy (2) 9F ® 35Br §Üñ € Åþ U æ Ù ÜæÖ ·¤è °ð ‹ Íñ Ë Âè
with negative sign «¤‡ææˆ×·¤ 翋㠷ð¤ âæÍ ÕɸÌè
increases ãñ
(3) 6C ® 32Ge Atomic radii increases (3) 6C ® 32Ge ÂÚU×æ‡æé¥æð´ ·¤è ç˜æ’Øæ°¡ ÕɸÌè ãñ´ñ

(4) 18Ar ® 54Xe Noble character increases (4) 18Ar® 54Xe ©ˆ·ý¤C SßÖæß ÕɸÌæ ãñ

2
42. The correct order of bond dissociation 42. çِ٠ÃØßSÍæ¥æð´ ×ð´ âð ç·¤â ×ð´ N2, O2, O2 ·¤è
energy among N2, O2, O2 2
is shown in ¥æÕ‹Ï çßØæðÁÙ ª¤Áæü ·ð¤ âãè ·ý¤× ·¤æð çιæØæ »Øæ
which of the following arrangements ? ãñ ?
(1) N2 > O2
2
> O2 (1) N2 > O2
2
> O2
2 2
(2) O 2 > O 2 > N2 (2) O 2 > O2 > N2

(3) N2 > O2 > O2

2
(3) N2 > O2 > O2
2

(4) O2 > O2
2
> N2 (4) O2 > O2
2
> N2

English : 27 Set : 11 Hindi : 27 Set : 11

43. Which of the following statements about 43.
Na2O2 is not correct ?
(1) It is diamagnetic in nature.
(2) It is a derivative of H2O2.
(3) Na2O2 oxidises Cr31 to CrO422 in
acid medium.
(4) It is the super oxide of sodium.
44. Which of the following statements about 44.
the depletion of ozone layer is correct ?
(1) The problem of ozone depletion is less
serious at poles because NO 2
solidifies and is not available for
consuming ClO• radicals.
(2) The problem of ozone depletion is
more serious at poles because ice
crystals in the clouds over poles act
as catalyst for photochemical
reactions involving the
decomposition of ozone by Cl• and
ClO• radicals.
(3) Freons, chlorofluorocarbons, are
inert chemically, they do not react
with ozone in stratosphere.
(4) Oxides of nitrogen also do not react
with ozone in stratosphere.
English : 28 Set : 11
Na2O2 ·ð¤ âÕ‹Ï ×ð´ çِ٠·¤ÍÙæð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âæ ·¤ÍÙ
âãè Ùãè´ ãñ?
(1) §â ·¤è Âýßëçžæ ÂýçÌ¿éÕ·¤èØ ãñÐ
(2) Øã H2O2·¤æ °·¤ ÃØéˆÂ‹Ù ãñ
(3) ¥æÜ ×æŠØ× ×ð ´ Na 2O 2 âð Cr 31 ·¤æ
CrO422 ×𴠩¿ØÙ ãæð ÁæÌæ ãñÐ
(4) Øã âæðçÇUØ× ·¤æ ÂÚUæ-¥æ€âæ§Ç ãñÐU
¥æðÁæðÙ SÌÚU ·ð¤ ƒæÅUÙð âÕ‹Ïè çِ٠·¤ÍÙæð´ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ
âæ âãè ãñ?
(1) Ïýéßè ÿæð˜ææð´ ×ð´ ¥æð$ÁæðÙ ƒæÅUÙð ·¤è â×SØæ ·¤×
×ãˆß ÚU¹Ìè ãñ €Øæð´ç·¤ NO2 Á×·¤ÚU ÆUæðâ ÕÙ
ÁæÌè ãñ ¥æñÚU ClO• ×êÜ·¤æð´ ·¤æð ãÅUæÙð ·ð¤ çÜØð
©ÂÜŽÏ Ùãè´ ãæðÌèÐ
(2) Ïýß é è ÿæð˜ææð́ ×ð́ ¥æðÁ
$ æðÙ ·ð¤ ƒæÅUÙð ·¤è â×SØæ ¥çÏ·¤
×ãˆß ÚU¹Ìè ãñ €Øæð´ç·¤ Ïýéßæð´ ÂÚU ÕæÎÜæð´ ×ð´ ÕÈü¤
·ð¤ ç·ý¤SÅUÜæð´ ·ð¤ ãæðÙð âð Cl• ¥æñÚU ClO•
ÚðUçÇU·¤Üæð´ mæÚUæ ©ˆÂýðçÚUÌ ¥æð$ÁæðÙ çßØæðÁÙ ·¤è
Âý·¤æàæ-ÚUæâæØçÙ·¤ ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ°¡ ãæð â·¤Ìè ãñÐ
(3) çÈý¤¥æÙð´ (€ÜæðÚUæðÜæðÚUæð ·¤æÕüÙ) ÚUæâæØçÙ·¤ M¤Â
×ð´ ¥ç·ý¤Ø ãæðÌè ãñ´Ð ß𠪤ÂÚUè ßæØéׇÇUÜ ×ð´
©ÂçSÍÌ ¥æð$ÁæðÙ âð ç·ý¤Øæ Ùãè´ ·¤ÚUÌè´Ð
(4) ª¤ÂÚUè ßæØéׇÇUÜ ·¤è ¥æð$ÁæðÙ âð Ùæ§ÅUþUæðÁÙ ·ð¤
¥æ€âæ§ÇU Öè ç·ý¤Øæ Ùãè´ ·¤ÚUÌðÐ
Hindi : 28 Set : 11
45. A gaseous compound of nitrogen and 45. Ùæ§ÅþUæðÁÙ ¥æñÚU ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ·¤æ °·¤ »ñâèØ Øæñç»·¤
hydrogen contains 12.5%(by mass) of ÎýÃØ×æÙ âð 12.5% ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ÚU¹Ìæ ãñÐ ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ
hydrogen. The density of the compound ·¤è ÌéÜÙæ ×ð´ §â Øæñç»·¤ ·¤æ ƒæÙˆß 16 ãñÐ Øæñç»·¤
relative to hydrogen is 16. The molecular ·¤æ ¥‡æéâê˜æ ãæð»æ Ñ
formula of the compound is :
(1) NH2 (1) NH2
(2) N3H (2) N3H
(3) NH3 (3) NH3
(4) N2H4 (4) N2H4
46. Shapes of certain interhalogen compounds 46. ·é¤ÀU ¥´ÌÑãñÜæðÁÙ Øæñç»·¤æ𴠷𤠥淤æÚU Ùè¿ð çܹ𠻰
are stated below. Which one of them is ãñ´Ð §Ù×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âæ ·¤ÍÙ âãè Ùãè´ ãñ?
not correctly stated ?
(1) IF7 : pentagonal bipyramid (1) IF7 : ´¿ÖéÁèØ çmçÂÚUæç×ÇU
(2) BrF5 : trigonal bipyramid (2) BrF5 : ç˜æ·¤æð‡æèØ çmçÂÚUæç×ÇU
(3) BrF3 : planar T-shaped (3) BrF3 : â×ÌÜèØ T-¥æ·¤æÚU ·¤æ
(4) ICl3 : planar dimeric (4) ICl3 : â×ÌÜèØ ÇUæ§×ðçÚU·¤ (Îæð ÃØßçSÍÌ)

47. Consider the following equilibrium 47. §â âæØ

1 1
AgCl ¯12NH3 ì Ag ( NH 3 )2  1 Cl2 AgCl ¯12NH3 ì Ag ( NH 3 )2  1 Cl2

White precipitate of AgCl appears on ·¤æð ŠØæÙ ÎèçÁ°Ð çِÙæð´ ×ð´ âð ç·¤âð ÇUæÜÙð ÂÚU AgCl
adding which of the following ? ·¤æ àßðÌ ¥ßÿæð ÕÙð»æ?
(1) NH3 (1) NH3
(2) aqueous NaCl (2) ÁÜèØ NaCl
(3) aqueous HNO3 (3) ÁÜèØ HNO3
(4) aqueous NH4Cl (4) ÁÜèØ NH4Cl

English : 29 Set : 11 Hindi : 29 Set : 11

48. Which of the following name formula 48. çِ٠Ùæ×-âê˜æ ÁæðǸæð ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âãè Ùãè´ ãñ?
combinations is not correct ?

Formula Name ÇÏîË ¾Ë¼

Potassium
(1) K2[Pt(CN)4] (1) K2[Pt(CN)4] §ËÕªUËÌÅ˽¼ ªÖUªãUËÇ˽¾ËÕ åÁÖªU;ժU (II)
tetracyanoplatinate (II)

(2) [Mn(CN)5]22 Pentacyanomagnate (II) ion
Potassium diammine
(3) K[Cr(NH3)2Cl4]
tetrachlorochromate (III)
Tetraammine aquaiodo
(4) [Co(NH3)4(H2O)I]SO4
cobalt (III) sulphate
(2) [Mn(CN)5]22 §ÖüªUËÇ˽¾ËÕ ¼Ö™ Ë¾ÕªU(II) ŠË½¾
§ËÕªÖUÌÅ˽¼
(3) K[Cr(NH3)2Cl4]
¬Uˌᕼ;ªÖUªãUËþÁËÕ¿UË՜â‰ËÕ¼ÕªU‰(III)
ªÖUªãUË •Õ¼Í¾ËՕþÄˊ˽ËÕ¬UË՜‰Ëպ˰ªU
(4) [Co(NH3)4(H2O)I]SO4
(III) Ç°$$­Õ‰ªU

49. Consider the coordination compound, 49. â׋ßØè Øæñç»·¤ [Co(NH3)6]Cl3 ·¤æð ŠØæÙ ÎèçÁ°Ð
[Co(NH3)6]Cl3. In the formation of this §â â´·¤ÚUU ·ð¤ ÕÙæÙð ×ð´ ÂýØé€Ì ÂÎæÍü Áæð ËØé§â °ðçâÇU
complex, the species which acts as the (Lewis acid) ãñ, ãæð»æ Ñ
Lewis acid is :
(1) [Co(NH3)6]31 (1) [Co(NH3)6]31
(2) Cl2 (2) Cl2
(3) Co31 (3) Co31
(4) NH3 (4) NH3

50. Which one of the following does not have 50. çِÙæð´ ×ð´ âð 緤⠷¤æ M¤Â çÂÚUæç×ÇUèØ Ùãè´ ãñ?
a pyramidal shape ?
(1) (CH3)3 N (1) (CH3)3 N
(2) (SiH3)3 N (2) (SiH3)3 N
(3) P(CH3)3 (3) P(CH3)3
(4) P(SiH3)3 (4) P(SiH3)3

English : 30 Set : 11 Hindi : 30 Set : 11

51. The following reaction 51. ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ

is known as : ·¤æð §Ù×ð´ âð ç·¤â Ùæ× âð ÁæÙæ ÁæÌæ ãñ?

(1) Perkin reaction (1) ÂÚUç·¤Ù ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ
(2) Gattermann-Koch Formylation (2) »ñÅUÚU×Ù - ·¤æò¿ $ȤÚU×èÜðàæÙ
(3) Kolbe’s reaction (3) ·¤æðÜÕð ·¤è ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ
(4) Gattermann reaction (4) »ñÅUÚU×Ù ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ

52. The reagent needed for converting 52. ÂçÚUßÌüÙ

is : ·ð¤ çÜØð ¥æßàØ·¤ ¥çÖ·¤æÚU·¤ ãñ Ñ

(1) Cat. Hydrogenation (1) ·ñ¤ÅU. ãæ§ÇþUæðçÁÙðàæÙ
(2) H2/Lindlar Cat. (2) H2/çÜ´ÇUÜÚU ·ñ¤ÅU.
(3) Li/NH3 (3) Li/NH3
(4) LiAlH4 (4) LiAlH4
53. Complete reduction of benzene-diazonium 53. Zn/HCl ·ð¤ mæÚUæ Õñ‹$ÁèÙ ÇUæØæ$ÁæðçÙØ× €ÜæðÚUæ§ÇU
chloride with Zn/HCl gives : ·¤æ ÂêÚUæ ¥Â¿ØÙ ÎðÌæ ãñ Ñ
(1) Aniline (1) °ðÙèÜèÙ
(2) Phenylhydrazine (2) ç$ȤÙæ§Üãæ§ÇþUæ$ÁèÙ
(3) Azobenzene (3) °ð$ÁæðÕñ‹$ÁèÙ
(4) Hydrazobenzene (4) ãæ§ÇþU°ð$ÁæðÕñ‹$ÁèÙ

English : 31 Set : 11 Hindi : 31 Set : 11

54. An organic compound A, C5H8O; reacts 54. °·¤ ¥æÚU»ñçÙ·¤ Øæñç»·¤ A, C5H8O; çِ٠Âý·¤æÚU
with H 2 O, NH 3 and CH 3 COOH as H2O, NH3 ¥æñÚU CH3COOH ·ð¤ âæÍ ç·ý¤Øæ ·¤ÚUÌæ
described below : ãñ

A is : A ãñ Ñ
(1) (1)

(2) (2)

(3) (3)

(4) (4)

55. In allene (C 3 H 4 ), the type(s) of 55. C3H4 (°ÜèÙ) ×ð´ ·¤æÕüÙ ÂÚU×æ‡æé (ÂÚU×æ‡æé¥æð´) ·ð¤
hybridization of the carbon atoms is (are): â´·¤ÚU‡æ ·¤è çßçÏ ãæðÌè ãñ Ñ
(1) sp and sp3 (1) sp ¥æñÚU sp3

(2) sp2 and sp (2) sp2 ¥æñÚU sp

(3) only sp2 (3) ·ð¤ßÜ sp2

(4) sp2 and sp3 (4) sp2 ¥æñÚU sp3

English : 32 Set : 11 Hindi : 32 Set : 11

56. Chlorobenzne reacts with trichloro 56. H 2 SO 4 ·¤è ©ÂçSÍçÌ ×ð ´ €Üæð Ú Uæð Õ ñ ‹ $ Á èÙ ·¤è
acetaldehyde in the presence of H2SO4 ÅþU槀ÜæðÚUæð°ðçâÅU °ðçËÇUãæ§ÇU âð ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ

The major product formed is : ×ð´ ÕÙÙð ßæÜè Âý×é¹ Øæñç»·¤ ãñ Ñ

(1) (1)

(2) (2)

(3) (3)

(4) (4)

57. Tischenko reaction is a modification of : 57. çÅUâ¿ñ‹·¤æð ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ °·¤ ÕÎÜæ ãé¥æ M¤Â ãñ Ñ
(1) Aldol condensation (1) °ðËÇUæðÜ â´ƒæÙÙ ·¤æ
(2) Claisen condensation (2) €Üð$Á٠ⴃæÙÙ ·¤æ
(3) Cannizzaro reaction (3) ·ñ¤Ùè$ÁæÚUæð ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤æ
(4) Pinacol-pinacolon reaction (4) çÂÙæ·¤æðÜ - çÂÙæ·¤æðÜæðÙ ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤æ

English : 33 Set : 11 Hindi : 33 Set : 11

58. Which one of the following is used as 58. çِÙæð´ ×ð´ âð 緤⠰·¤ ·¤æð °ð‹ÅUè çãSÅUæ×èÙ ·ð¤ M¤Â ×ð´
Antihistamine ? ÂýØæð» ·¤ÚUÌð ãñ´?
(1) Omeprazole (1) ¥æð×èÂýæ$ÁæðÜ
(2) Chloranphenicol (2) €ÜæðÚðUÙ $Èñ¤çÙ·¤æðÜ
(3) Diphenhydramine (3) ÇUæ§Èñ¤Ùãæ§ÇþU°×èÙ
(4) Norethindrone (4) ÙæÚU°çÍÙÇþUæðÙ

59. Which one of the following statements is 59. çِ٠·¤ÍÙæð´ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âæ âãè Ùãè´ ãñ?
not correct ?
(1) Alcohols are weaker acids than (1) °ðË·¤æðãæÜð´ ÂæÙè ·¤è ÌéÜÙæ ×ð´ ÎéÕüÜ ¥Ü ãñ´
water
(2) Acid strength of alcohols decreases (2) °ðË·¤æðãæÜæð´ ·¤è ¥Ü àæç€Ì §â ·ý¤× ×𴠃æÅUÌè
in the following order ÁæÌè ãñ -
RCH2OH > R2CHOH > R3COH RCH2OH > R2CHOH > R3COH
(3) Carbon-oxygen bond length in (3) ×ñÍðÙæÜ, CH3OH ×ð´ ·¤æÕüÙ - ¥æ€âèÁÙ
methanol, CH3OH is shorter than ¥æÕ‹Ï ·¤è ܐÕæ§ü ç$ȤÙæÜ ×ð´ C2O ¥æՋÏ
that of C2O bond length in phenol. ·¤è ܐÕæ§ü âð ÀUæðÅUè ãæðÌè ãñÐ
(4) The bond angle in methanol (4) ×ðÍðÙæÜ ×ð´ ¥æÕ‹Ï ·¤æð‡æ 108.98
is 108.98 ãæðÌæ ãñÐ

60. The gas liberated by the electrolysis of 60. ÇUæ§ÂæðÅñUçàæØ× â€âèÙðÅU ·ð¤ çßÜØÙ ·ð¤ ßñléÌ çßÖæÁÙ
Dipotassium succinate solution is : ×ð´ ÂýæŒÌ »ñâ ãæðÌè ãñ Ñ
(1) Ethane (1) §üÍðÙ
(2) Ethyne (2) §üÍæ§Ù
(3) Ethene (3) §üÍèÙ
(4) Propene (4) ÂýæðÂèÙ

English : 34 Set : 11 Hindi : 34 Set : 11

 PART C — MATHEMATICS Öæ» C — »ç‡æÌ
61. Let f be an odd function defined on the set 61. ×æÙæ f °·¤ çßá× È¤ÜÙ ãñ Áæð ç·¤ ßæSÌçß·¤ ⴁØæ¥æð´
of real numbers such that for x/0, ·ð¤ â×é‘¿Ø ÂÚU f(x)53 sin x14 cos x mæÚUæ
f(x)53 sin x14 cos x. 11p
ÂçÚUÖæçáÌ ãñ Áãæ¡ x/0 ãñ, Ìæð x5 2 ÂÚU
6
11p
Then f(x) at x 5 2 is equal to : f(x) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
6
3
(1) 12 3 3
2 (1) 12 3
2
3
(2) 2 12 3 3
2 (2) 2 12 3
2
3
(3) 22 3 3
2 (3) 22 3
2
3
(4) 2 22 3 3
2 (4) 2 22 3
2

62. If z1, z2 and z3, z4 are 2 pairs of complex

conjugate numbers, then 62. ØçÎ z1, z2 ÌÍæ z3, z4 âç×oý â´Øé‚×è ⴁØæ¥æð´ ·ð¤
Îæð Øé‚× ãñ´, Ìæð-
z  z 
arg  1  1 arg  2  equals : z  z 
 z4   z3  arg  1  1 arg  2  ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
 z4   z3 
(1) 0
(1) 0
p
(2) p
2 (2)
2
3p
(3) 3p
2 (3)
2
(4) p
(4) p

English : 35 Set : 11 Hindi : 35 Set : 11

63. If a and b are roots of the equation, 63. ØçÎ a ÌÍæ b ç·¤âè
·ð ¤ çÜ°, â×è·¤ÚU‡æ
k
2 4 ln k
x 2 2 4 2 kx 1 2e 4 ln k2 1 5 0 for some k, x 2 4 2 kx 1 2e 2 1 5 0 ·ð¤ ×êÜ ãñ´ ÌÍæ
and a21b2 5 66, then a31b3 is equal to : a 1b 5 66, ãñ, Ìæð a 1b3 ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
2 2 3

(1) (1) 248 2

248 2
(2) (2) 280 2
280 2
(3) (3) 232 2
232 2
(4) (4) 2280 2
2280 2
64. Let A be a 333 matrix such that 64. ×æÙæ A °·¤ °ðâæ 333 ¥æÃØêã ãñ ç·¤

 1 2 3 0 0 1   1 2 3 0 0 1 
A 0 2 3  5 1 0 0 A 0 2 3  5 1 0 0
  ãñ, Ìæð
 
0 1 1  0 1 0  0 1 1  0 1 0 

Then A21 is : A21 ãñ Ñ

3 1 2  3 1 2 
3 0 2  3 0 2 
(1) (1)  
 
 1 0 1   1 0 1 

 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 0 3 2 0
(2) (2)  
 
 1 1 0   1 1 0 

0 1 3 0 1 3
0 2 3 0 2 3
(3) (3)  
 
 1 1 1   1 1 1 

 1 2 3 1 2 3
0 1 1 0 1 1
(4) (4)  
 
0 2 3  0 2 3 

English : 36 Set : 11 Hindi : 36 Set : 11

65. Let for i51, 2, 3, pi(x) be a polynomial of 65.
degree 2 in x, pi’(x) and pi’’(x) be the first
and second order derivatives of p i (x)
respectively. Let,
 p1 ( x ) p19 ( x ) p10 ( x ) 
A( x ) 5  p2 ( x ) p29 ( x ) p20 ( x )
 p3 ( x ) p39 ( x ) p30 ( x ) 
×æÙæ i51, 2, 3,·ð¤ çÜ° pi(x), x ×𴠃ææÌ 2 ·ð¤
ÕãéÂÎ ãñ´, pi’(x) ÌÍæ pi’’(x) ·ý¤×àæÑ ÂýÍ× ·¤æðçÅU ÌÍæ
çmÌèØ ·¤æðçÅU ·ð¤ ¥ß·¤ÜÁ ãñ´Ð
×æÙæ
 p1 ( x ) p19 ( x ) p10 ( x ) 
A( x ) 5  p2 ( x ) p29 ( x ) p20 ( x )
 p3 ( x ) p39 ( x ) p30 ( x ) 

and B(x) = [A(x)]T A(x). Then determinant ÌÍæ B(x) = [A(x)] T A(x) ãñ , Ìæð B(x) ·¤æ
of B(x) : âæÚUç‡æ·¤ Ñ
(1) is a polynomial of degree 6 in x. (1) x ×𴠃ææÌ 6 ·¤æ °·¤ ÕãéÂÎ ãñÐ
(2) is a polynomial of degree 3 in x. (2) x ×𴠃ææÌ 3 ·¤æ °·¤ ÕãéÂÎ ãñÐ
(3) is a polynomial of degree 2 in x. (3) x ×𴠃ææÌ 2 ·¤æ °·¤ ÕãéÂÎ ãñÐ
(4) does not depend on x. (4) x ÂÚU çÙÖüÚU Ùãè´ ·¤ÚUÌæÐ
66. An eight digit number divisible by 9 is to 66. 0 âð 9 Ì·¤ ·ð¤ ¥´·¤æð´ ·ð¤ ÂýØæð» âð, ¥´·¤æð´ ·¤æð ÎæðãÚUæ°
be formed using digits from 0 to 9 without çÕÙæ, °·¤ 9 âð Öæ’Ø, ¥æÆU ¥´·¤æð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ ÕÙæÙè
repeating the digits. The number of ways ãñÐ Øã çÁÌÙð ÌÚUè·¤æð´ âð ç·¤Øæ Áæ â·¤Ìæ ãñ, ßð ãñ´ Ñ
in which this can be done is :
(1) 72 (7!) (1) 72 (7!)
(2) 18 (7!) (2) 18 (7!)
(3) 40 (7!) (3) 40 (7!)
(4) 36 (7!) (4) 36 (7!)

English : 37 Set : 11 Hindi : 37 Set : 11

67. The coefficient of x 50 in the binomial 67. (11x) 1000 1 x(11x) 999 1x 2 (11x) 998 1
expansion of ......1x1000 ·ð¤ çmÂÎ ÂýâæÚU ×ð´ x50 ·¤æ »é‡ææ¡·¤ ãñ Ñ
(11x) 1000 1 x(11x) 999 1x 2 (11x) 998 1
......1x1000 is :

(1000) ! (1000) !
(1) (1)
(50) ! (950) ! (50) ! (950) !

(1000) ! (1000) !
(2) (2)
(49) ! (951) ! (49) ! (951) !

(1001) ! (1001) !
(3) (3)
(51) ! (950) ! (51) ! (950) !

(1001) ! (1001) !
(4) (4)
(50) ! (951) ! (50) ! (951) !

68. In a geometric progression, if the ratio of 68. °·¤ »é‡ææðžæÚU oýðɸè ×ð´ ØçÎ ÂãÜð 5 ÂÎæð´ ·ð¤ Øæð» ·¤æ
the sum of first 5 terms to the sum of their ©Ù·ð¤ ÃØ鈷ý¤×æð´ ·ð¤ Øæð» âð ¥ÙéÂæ̤ 49 ãñ ÌÍæ §â·ð¤
reciprocals is 49, and the sum of the first ÂãÜð ÌÍæ ÌèâÚðU ÂÎæð´ ·¤æ Øæð»U 35 ãñ, Ìæð §â »é‡ææðžæÚU
and the third term is 35. Then the first term oýðÉ¸è ·¤æ ÂýÍ× ÂÎ ãñ Ñ
of this geometric progression is :
(1) 7 (1) 7
(2) 21 (2) 21
(3) 28 (3) 28
(4) 42 (4) 42

English : 38 Set : 11 Hindi : 38 Set : 11

69. The sum of the first 20 terms common 69. oýðç‡æØæð´U 3171111151..... ÌÍæU
between the series 3171111151..... and 1161111161..... , ·ð¤ Õè¿ ©ÖØçÙcÆU ÂýÍ×
1161111161..... , is : 20 ÂÎæð´ ·¤æ Øæð» ãñ Ñ
(1) 4000 (1) 4000
(2) 4020 (2) 4020
(3) 4200 (3) 4200
(4) 4220 (4) 4220

70. If 70. ØçÎ

tan ( x 2 2 ){x 2 1 (k22)x 2 2k} tan ( x 2 2 ){x 2 1 (k22)x 2 2k}
lim 55 , lim 55
x →2 x 2 2 4x 1 4 x →2 x 2 2 4x 1 4
then k is equal to : ãñ, Ìæð k ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) 0 (1) 0
(2) 1 (2) 1
(3) 2 (3) 2
(4) 3 (4) 3

71. Let f(x)5x?x?, g(x) = sin x and 71. ×æÙæ f(x)5x?x?, g(x) = sin x ÌÍæ
h(x) 5(gof )(x). Then h(x) 5(gof ) (x) ãñ, Ìæð
(1) h(x) is not differentiable at x50. (1) h(x), x50 ÂÚU ¥ß·¤ÜÙèØ Ùãè´ ãñÐ
(2) h(x) is differentiable at x50, but (2) h(x), x50 ÂÚU ¥ß·¤ÜÙèØ ãñ ÂÚU‹Ìé h’(x),
h’(x) is not continuous at x50. x50 ÂÚU âÌÌ Ùãè´ ãñÐ
(3) h’(x) is continuous at x50 but it is (3) h’(x), x50 ÂÚU âÌÌ ãñ, ÂÚU‹Ìé Øã x50 ÂÚU
not differentiable at x50. ¥ß·¤ÜÙèØ Ùãè´ ãñÐ
(4) h’(x) is differentiable at x50. (4) h’(x), x50 ÂÚU ¥ß·¤ÜÙèØ ãñÐ

English : 39 Set : 11 Hindi : 39 Set : 11

72. For the curve y = 3 sin u cos u, x5eu sin u, 72. ß·ý ¤ y = 3 sin u cos u, x5e u sin u,
0 [ u [ p, the tangent is parallel to x-axis 0 [ u [ p, ·ð¤ çÜ° SÂàæüÚðU¹æ x- ¥ÿæ ·ð¤ â×æ´ÌÚU ãñ,
when u is : ÁÕ u ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) 3p (1) 3p
4 4

(2) p (2) p
2 2

(3) p (3) p
4 4

(4) p (4) p
6 6
73. Two ships A and B are sailing straight 73. Îæð Áãæ$Á A ÌÍæ B, °·¤ çÙçà¿Ì çÕ´Îé O âð ÎêÚU âèÏð
away from a fixed point O along routes ×æ»æðZ ÂÚU §â Âý·¤æÚU Áæ ÚUãð ãñ´ ç·¤ ÐAOB âÎæ 1208
such that ÐAOB is always 1208. At a ÚU ã Ìæ ãñ Ð ç·¤âè ÿæ‡æ, OA = 8 ç·¤×è ÌÍæ
certain instance, OA = 8 km, OB = 6 km OB = 6 ç·¤×è ãñ ÌÍæ Áãæ$Á A, 20 ç·¤×è/ƒæ´ÅUæ ·¤è
and the ship A is sailing at the rate of ¿æÜ âð ¿Ü ÚUãæ ãñ ÁÕç·¤ Áãæ$Á B, 30 ç·¤×è/ƒæ´ÅUæ
20 km/hr while the ship B sailing at the ·¤è ¿æÜ âð ¿Ü ÚUãæ ãñ, Ìæð A ÌÍæ B ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤è ÎêÚUè
rate of 30 km/hr. Then the distance çÁâ ÎÚU (ç·¤×è/ƒæ´ÅUæ ×ð´) âð ÕÎÜ ÚUãè ãñ, ßã ãñ Ñ
between A and B is changing at the rate
(in km/hr) :
(1) 260 37
(1) 260 37
(2) 260 37
(2) 260 37
(3) 80 37
(3) 80 37
(4) 80 37
(4) 80 37

English : 40 Set : 11 Hindi : 40 Set : 11

74. The volume of the largest possible right 74. ç˜æ’Øæ 3 ßæÜð »æðÜð ·ð¤ ¥´Ì»üÌ, ÕǸð âð ÕǸð Ü´Õ
circular cylinder that can be inscribed in a ßëžæèØ ÕðÜÙ ·¤æ ¥æØÌÙ ãñ Ñ
sphere of radius5 3 is :
4 4
(1) 3 p (1) 3 p
3 3
8 8
(2) 3 p (2) 3 p
3 3
(3) 4p (3) 4p
(4) 2p (4) 2p

2 2
21  1 2 x  
75. The integral ∫ x cos   dx (x > 0) 75. â×æ·¤Ü ∫ x cos21  1 2 x 2  dx , (x > 0) ÕÚUæÕÚU
 1 1 x2   11x 
is equal to : ãñ Ñ
(1) 2 x1(11x2) tan21 x1c (1) 2 x1(11x2) tan21 x1c
(2) x2 (11x2) cot21 x1c (2) x2 (11x2) cot21 x1c
(3) 2 x1(11x2) cot21 x1c (3) 2 x1(11x2) cot21 x1c
(4) x2 (11x2) tan21 x1c (4) x2 (11x2) tan21 x1c
e e
n
76. If for n/1, Pn 5 ∫ (log x ) d x , then 76. ØçÎ n/1 ·ð¤ çÜ°, Pn 5 ∫ (log x )n d x ãñ, Ìæð
1 1
P10290P8 is equal to : P10290P8 ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) 29 (1) 29
(2) 10e (2) 10e
(3) 29e (3) 29e
(4) 10 (4) 10

English : 41 Set : 11 Hindi : 41 Set : 11

77. If the general solution of the differential 77. ØçÎ ç·¤âè ȤÜÙ F ·ð¤ çÜ° ¥ß·¤Ü â×è·¤ÚU‡æ
y x y x
equation y9 5 1 F  , for some y9 5 1 F  , ·¤æ ÃØæ·¤ ãÜ y ln ?cx?5x,
x y x y
function F, is given by mæÚUæ ÂýΞæ ãñ, Áãæ¡ c °·¤ Sßð‘ÀU ¥¿ÚU ãñ, Ìæð F(2)
y ln ?cx?5x, where c is an arbitrary ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
constant, then F (2) is equal to :
(1) 4 (1) 4
1 1
(2) (2)
4 4
(3) 24 (3) 24
1 1
(4) 2 (4) 2
4 4

78. A stair-case of length l rests against a 78. Ü´Õæ§ü l ·¤è °·¤ âèÉ¸è °·¤ ©ŠßæüÏÚU ÎèßæÚU ÌÍæ ·¤×ÚðU
vertical wall and a floor of a room,. Let P ·ð¤ Ȥàæü ·ð¤ âæÍ ¹Ç¸è ãñÐ ×æÙæ §â âèɸè ÂÚU °·¤
be a point on the stair-case, nearer to its çÕ´Îé P, Áæð §â·ð¤ ÎèßæÚU ·ð¤ âæÍ Ü»Ùð ßæÜð çâÚðU ·ð¤
end on the wall, that divides its length in çÙ·¤ÅU ãñ, §â Âý·¤æÚU ãñ ç·¤ Øã âèÉ¸è ·¤è Ü´Õæ§ü ·¤æð
the ratio 1 : 2. If the stair-case begins to 1 : 2 ·ð¤ ¥ÙéÂæÌ ×ð´ Õæ´ÅUÌæ ãñÐ ØçÎ âèɸè Ȥàæü ÂÚU
slide on the floor, then the locus of P is : âÚU·¤Ùð Ü»Ìè ãñ, Ìæð P ·¤æ çÕ´Îé ÂÍ ãñ Ñ
1 1
(1) an ellipse of eccentricity (1) ©ˆ·ð´¤ÎýÌæ ßæÜæ °·¤ ÎèƒæüßëÌÐ
2 2

3 3
(2) an ellipse of eccentricity (2) ©ˆ·ð´¤ÎýÌæ ßæÜæ °·¤ ÎèƒæüßëÌ
2 2
l l
(3) a circle of radius
2
(3) ç˜æ’Øæ 2
ßæÜæ °·¤ ßëÌÐ

3 3
(4) a circle of radius
2
l (4) ç˜æ’Øæ l ßæÜæ °·¤ ßëÌÐ
2

English : 42 Set : 11 Hindi : 42 Set : 11

79. The base of an equilateral triangle is along 79. °·¤ â×Õæãé ç˜æÖéÁ ·¤æ ¥æÏæÚU ÚðU¹æ 3x14y = 9 ·ð¤
the line given by 3x14y = 9. If a vertex of ¥ÙéçÎàæ ãñÐ ØçÎ ç˜æÖéÁ ·¤æ °·¤ àæèáü (1, 2) ãñ Ìæð
the triangle is (1, 2), then the length of a ç˜æÖéÁ ·¤è °·¤ ÖéÁæ ·¤è Ü´Õæ§ü ãñ Ñ
side of the triangle is :

2 3 2 3
(1) (1)
15 15

4 3 4 3
(2) (2)
15 15

4 3 4 3
(3) (3)
5 5

2 3 2 3
(4) (4)
5 5

80. The set of all real values of l for which 80. l ·ð¤ âÖè ßæSÌçß·¤ ×æÙæð´ ·¤æ â×鑿Ø, çÁÙ·ð¤ çÜ°
exactly two common tangents can be ßëžææð´ x21y224x24y1650 ÌÍæ
drawn to the circles x 2 1y 2 210x210y1l50 ÂÚU ÆUè·¤ Îæð
x21y224x24y1650 and ©ÖØçÙcÆU SÂàæüÚðU¹æ°¡ ¹è´¿è Áæ â·¤Ìè ãæð´, ·¤æ Áæð
x21y2210x210y1l50 is the interval : ¥´ÌÚUæÜ ãñ, ßã ãñ Ñ
(1) (12, 32)
(1) (12, 32)
(2) (18, 42)
(2) (18, 42)
(3) (12, 24)
(3) (12, 24)
(4) (18, 48)
(4) (18, 48)

English : 43 Set : 11 Hindi : 43 Set : 11

81. Let L1 be the length of the common chord 81. ×æÙæ L1, ß·ý ¤ æð ´ x21y259 ÌÍæ y258x, ·¤è
of the curves x21y259 and y258x, and ©ÖØçÙcÆU Áèßæ ·¤è Ü´Õæ§ü ãñ, ÌÍæ L2, y258x ·ð¤
L2 be the length of the latus rectum of ÙæçÖÜ´Õ ·¤è Ü´Õæ§ü ãñ, Ìæð Ñ
y258x, then :
(1) L1 > L 2 (1) L1 > L2
(2) L15L2 (2) L15L2
(3) L1 < L 2 (3) L1 < L2
L1 L1
(4) 5 2 (4) 5 2
L2 L2

82. Let P (3 sec u, 2 tan u) and

x2 y2
82. ×æÙæ ¥çÌÂÚUßÜØ 2 5 1 ÂÚU Îæð çÖóæ çÕ´Îé
p 9 4
Q (3 sec f, 2 tan f) where u 1 f 5
, be
2 P (3 sec u, 2 tan u) ÌÍæ Q (3 sec f, 2 tan f)
two distinct points on the hyperbola p
2 2 ãñ´, Áãæ¡ u1f 5
2
ãñ, Ìæð P ÌÍæ Q ÂÚU ¹è´¿ð »°
x y
2 5 1 . Then the ordinate of the
9 4 ¥çÖÜ´Õæð´ ·ð¤ Âýç̑ÀðUÎÙ çÕ´Îé ·¤è ·¤æðçÅU (ordinate)
point of intersection of the normals at P ãñ Ñ
and Q is :
11 11
(1) (1)
3 3

11 11
(2) 2 (2) 2
3 3

13 13
(3) (3)
2 2

13 13
(4) 2 (4) 2
2 2

English : 44 Set : 11 Hindi : 44 Set : 11

83. Let A (2, 3, 5), B (21, 3, 2) and 83. ×æÙæ A (2, 3, 5), B (21, 3, 2) ÌÍæ
C (l, 5, m) be the vertices of a DABC. If the C (l, 5, m) °·¤ ç˜æÖéÁ ABC ·ð¤ àæèáü ãñ´Ð ØçÎ A
median through A is equally inclined to âð ãæð·¤ÚU ÁæÙð ßæÜè ×æçŠØ·¤æ, çÙÎðüàææ´·¤ ¥ÿææð´ ÂÚU
the coordinate axes, then : â×æÙ ·¤æð‡æ ÕÙæÌè ãñ, Ìæð Ñ
(1) 5l28m50 (1) 5l28m50
(2) 8l25m50 (2) 8l25m50
(3) 10l27m50 (3) 10l27m50
(4) 7l210m50 (4) 7l210m50

84. The plane containing the line x 21 y 22 z 23

84. Úð U ¹ æ 5 5 ·¤æ𠥋Ìçßü c ÅU
x 21 y 22 z 23 1 2 3
5 5 and parallel to
1 2 3 x y z
·¤ÚUÙð ßæÜæ ÌÍæ ÚðU¹æ 5 5 ·ð¤ â×æ´ÌÚU â×ÌÜ,
x y z 1 1 4
the line 5 5 passes through the
1 1 4 çÁâ çÕ´Îé âð ãæð·¤ÚU ÁæÌæ ãñ, ßã ãñ Ñ
point :
(1) (1,22, 5) (1) (1,22, 5)
(2) (1, 0, 5) (2) (1, 0, 5)
(3) (0, 3,25) (3) (0, 3,25)
(4) (21,23, 0) (4) (21,23, 0)
→ → ∧ ∧ ∧ → → → ∧ ∧ ∧ →
2
85. If ? c ? 5 60 and c 3( i12 j15 k )50 , 85. ØçÎ ? c ?2 5 60 ÌÍæ c 3( i12 j15 k )50 , ãñ,
→ ∧ ∧ ∧ → ∧ ∧ ∧
then a value of c . (2 7 i 1 2 j 1 3 k ) is : Ìæð c . (2 7 i 1 2 j 1 3 k ) ·¤æ °·¤ ×æÙ ãñ Ñ
(1) 4 2 (1) 4 2
(2) 12 (2) 12
(3) 24 (3) 24
(4) 12 2 (4) 12 2

English : 45 Set : 11 Hindi : 45 Set : 11

86. A set S contains 7 elements. A non-empty 86. °·¤ â×é“æØ S ×ð´ 7 ¥ßØß ãñ´Ð S ·¤æ °·¤ ¥çÚU€ˆæ
subset A of S and an element x of S are ©Ââ×é“æØ A ÌÍæ S ·¤æ °·¤ ¥ßØß x , ØæÎë‘ÀUØæ
chosen at random. Then the probability ¿éÙð »° , Ìæð xÎA ·¤è ÂýæçØ·¤Ìæ ãñ Ñ
that xÎA is :
1 1
(1) (1)
2 2
64 64
(2) (2)
127 127
63 63
(3) (3)
128 128
31 31
(4) (4)
128 128

87. If X has a binomial distribution, B(n, p) 87. ØçÎ X ·¤æ °ð â æ çmÂÎ Õ´ Å UÙ, B(n, p) ãñ ,
with parameters n and p such that Áãæ¡ n, p §â·ð¤ Âýæ¿Ü ãñ´, ¥æñÚU P(X52)5P(X53)
P(X52)5P(X53), then E(X), the mean of ãñ, Ìæð ¿ÚU X ·¤æ ×æŠØ E(X) ãñ Ñ
variable X, is :
(1) 22p (1) 22p
(2) 32p (2) 32p
p p
(3) 2 (3) 2
p p
(4) 3 (4) 3

English : 46 Set : 11 Hindi : 46 Set : 11

  p  p
88. If 2 cos u1sin u51 u ≠ 2  ,
 
88. ØçÎ 2 cos u1sin u51 u ≠ 2 
 
ãñ , Ìæð
then 7 cos u16 sin u is equal to : 7 cos u16 sin u ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
1 1
(1) (1)
2 2

(2) 2 (2) 2

11 11
(3) (3)
2 2

46 46
(4) (4)
5 5

89. The angle of elevation of the top of a 89. â×ÌÜ Öêç× ÂÚU °·¤ çÕ´Îé P âð °·¤ ª¤ŠßæüÏÚU ×èÙæÚU
vertical tower from a point P on the ·ð¤ çàæ¹ÚU ·¤æ ©‹ÙØÙ ·¤æð‡æ a ÂæØæ »ØæÐ P âð ×èÙæÚU
horizontal ground was observed to be a. ·ð¤ ÂæÎ ·¤è ¥æðÚU 2 ×è. ÁæÙð ÂÚU, ©‹ÙØÙ ·¤æð‡æ ÕÎÜ
After moving a distance 2 metres from P ·¤ÚU b ãæð ÁæÌæ ãñ, Ìæð (×è.×ð´) ×èÙæÚU ·¤è ª¡¤¿æ§ü ãñ Ñ
towards the foot of the tower, the angle of
elevation changes to b. Then the height (in
metres) of the tower is :

2 sin a sin b 2 sin a sin b

(1) sin (b2a ) (1) sin (b2a )

sin a sin b sin a sin b

(2) cos (b2a ) (2) cos (b2a )

2 sin (b2a ) 2 sin (b2a )

(3) (3)
sin a sin b sin a sin b

cos (b2a ) cos (b2a )

(4) (4)
sin a sin b sin a sin b

English : 47 Set : 11 Hindi : 47 Set : 11

90. The proposition ~ (pÚ ~ q)Ú ~ (pÚq) 90. âæŠØ ~(pÚ~q)Ú~(pÚq) Ìæç·ü¤·¤ M¤Â ×ð´ çÁâ·ð¤
is logically equivalent to : ÌéËØ ãñ, ßã ãñ Ñ
(1) p (1) p
(2) q (2) q
(3) ~p (3) ~p
(4) ~q (4) ~q

-o0o- -o0o-

English : 48 Set : 11 Hindi : 48 Set : 11

JEE Main 2014 Question Paper 1 Online April 12, 2014
PART A — PHYSICS Öæ» A — ÖæñçÌ·¤ çߙææÙ
1. From the following combinations of 1. ÖæñçÌ·¤ çSÍÚUæ´·¤æð´ ·ð¤ çِÙçÜç¹Ì â´ØæðÁÙ âð (¥ÂÙð
physical constants (expressed through âæÏæÚU‡æ ÂýØæð» ×ð´ çÜØð »Øð 翋ãæð´ mæÚUæ ÂýÎçàæüÌ),
their usual symbols) the only combination, ·ð¤ßÜ ßã â´ØæðÁÙ, Áæð ç·¤ §·¤æ§Øæð´ ·ð¤ çßçÖóæ çÙ·¤æØæð´
that would have the same value in different ×ð´ °·¤ ãè ×æÙ ÚU¹Ìæ ãñ, ãñ Ñ
systems of units, is :
ch ch
(1) 2 peo2 (1) 2 peo2

e2 e2
(2) (me5 mass of electron) (2) (me5§Üð€ÅþUæòÙ ·¤æ ÎýÃØ×æÙ)
2peo Gm e 2 2peo Gm e 2

mo e o G mo eo G
(3) (3)
c2 h e2 c2 h e2

2 p mo eo h 2 p mo eo h
(4) (4)
ce 2 G ce 2 G

2. A person climbs up a stalled escalator 2. °·¤ ÃØç€ˆæ °·¤ SÍæçÂÌ °S·¤ÜðÅUÚU ·¤è ÎêÚUè 60 s ×ð´
in 60 s . If standing on the same but ¿É¸Ìæ ãñÐ ØçÎ ©â ÂÚU ¹Ç¸ð ãæð·¤ÚU ÂÚU‹Ìé çSÍÚU ßð» âð
escalator running with constant velocity °S·¤ÜðÅUÚU ·ð¤ ¿ÜÙð ÂÚU ßã 40 s ÜðÌæ ãñÐ ÃØ瀈æ
he takes 40 s. How much time is taken by »çÌàæèÜ °S·¤ÜðÅUÚU ÂÚU ¿Ü·¤ÚU §âè ÎêÚUè ·¤æð ÌØ
the person to walk up the moving ·¤ÚUÙð ×ð´ ç·¤ÌÙæ â×Ø Üð»æ?
escalator ?
(1) 37 s (1) 37 s
(2) 27 s (2) 27 s
(3) 24 s (3) 24 s
(4) 45 s (4) 45 s

English : 1 Set : 06 Hindi : 1 Set : 06

3. Three masses m, 2m and 3m are moving 3. m, 2m °ß´ 3m ·ð¤ ÌèÙ ÎýÃØ×æÙ x-y ÌÜ ×ð´ ¿æÜ
in x-y plane with speed 3u, 2u, and u ·ý¤×àæÑ 3u, 2u, °ß´ u âð »çÌàæèÜ ãñ, Áñâæ ç·¤ 翘æ
respectively as shown in figure. The three ×ð´ ÎàææüØæ »Øæ ãñÐ ÌèÙæð´ ÎýÃØ×æÙ °·¤ ãè çՋÎé ÂÚU
masses collide at the same point at P and ⴃæ^ ·¤ÚUÌð ãñ´ ¥æñÚU °·¤ âæÍ ç¿Â·¤ ÁæÌð ãñ´Ð ÂçÚU‡ææ×è
stick together. The velocity of resulting ÎýÃØ×æÙ ·¤æ ßð» ãæð»æ Ñ
mass will be :

(1) (
u ∧ ∧
i 1 3j )
(1)
u ∧
i1( ∧
3j ) 12
12
(2) (
u ∧
i 2 3j
∧
)
(2)
u ∧
i2( ∧
3j ) 12
12
(3) (
u ∧
2i 1 3j
∧
)
(3)
u ∧
(
2i 1 3j
∧
) 12
12
(4) (
u ∧
2i 2 3j
∧
)
(4)
u ∧
12
(
2i 2 3j
∧
) 12

4. °·¤ ×ð$Á ÂÚU çߟææ× ¥ßSÍæ ×ð´ çSÍÌ 0.8 kg Ü·¤Ç¸è

4. A 4 g bullet is fired horizontally with a ·ð¤ ŽÜæ·¤ ·¤æð 300 m/s ·¤è ¿æÜ âð °·¤ 4 g ·¤è
speed of 300 m/s into 0.8 kg block of wood »æðÜè ÿæñçÌÁ Îæ»Ìè ãñÐ ØçÎ ×ð$Á °ß´ ŽÜæ·¤ ·ð¤ Õè¿
at rest on a table. If the coefficient of ƒæáü‡æ »é‡ææ´·¤ 0.3 ãñ, ÌÕ ŽÜæ·¤ ֻܻ ç·¤ÌÙè ÎêÚU
friction between the block and the table is çȤâÜð»æ?
0.3, how far will the block slide
approximately ? (1) 0.19 m
(1) 0.19 m (2) 0.379 m
(2) 0.379 m (3) 0.569 m
(3) 0.569 m (4) 0.758 m
(4) 0.758 m

English : 2 Set : 06 Hindi : 2 Set : 06

5. A spring of unstretched length l has a 5. çÕÙæ ÌæçÙÌ ÜÕæ§ü l ·¤è °·¤ ·¤×æÙè âð °·¤
mass m with one end fixed to a rigid ÎýÃØ×æÙ m §â Âý·¤æÚU ãñ ç·¤ §â·¤æ °·¤ çâÚUæ °·¤ Îëɸ
support. Assuming spring to be made of a ¥æÏæÚU ÂÚU Õ¡Ïæ ãñÐ Øã ×æÙÌð ãéØð ç·¤ ·¤×æÙè °·¤
uniform wire, the kinetic energy possessed °·¤â×æÙ ÌæÚU âð ÕÙè ãñ, §â×ð´ »çÌÁ ª¤Áæü ãæð»è ØçÎ
by it if its free end is pulled with uniform §â·¤æ Sß̋˜æ çâÚUæ °·¤â×æÙ ßð» v âð ¹è´¿æ Áæ° Ñ
velocity v is :
1 1
(1) m v2 (1) m v2
2 2
(2) mv 2 (2) mv 2
1 1
(3) m v2 (3) m v2
3 3
1 1
(4) m v2 (4) m v2
6 6

6. A particle is moving in a circular path of 6.
radius a, with a constant velocity v as
shown in the figure. The center of circle is
marked by ‘C’. The angular momentum
from the origin O can be written as :
°·¤ ·¤‡æ ç˜æ’Øæ a ·ð¤ °·¤ ßëžæèØ ÂÍ ÂÚU °·¤ çSÍÚU
ßð» v âð »çÌàæèÜ ãñ Áñâæ ç·¤ 翘æ ×ð´ ÎàææüØæ »Øæ ãñÐ
ßëžæ ·¤æ ·ð¤‹Îý ‘C’ âð ç¿ç‹ãÌ ç·¤Øæ »Øæ ãñÐ ×êÜ çՋÎé
O âð ·¤æð‡æèØ â´ßð» §â Âý·¤æÚU çܹæ Áæ â·¤Ìæ ãñ Ñ

(1) va(11cos 2u)

(1) va(11cos 2u) (2) va(11cos u)
(2) va(11cos u) (3) va cos 2u
(3) va cos 2u (4) va
(4) va

English : 3 Set : 06 Hindi : 3 Set : 06

7. 7.

Two hypothetical planets of masses m1 and
m 2 are at rest when they are infinite
distance apart. Because of the gravitational
force they move towards each other along
the line joining their centres. What is their
speed when their separation is ‘d’ ?
(Speed of m1 is v1 and that of m2 is v2)
(1) v 15v 2
ÎýÃØ×æÙ m1 °ß´ m2 ·ð¤ Îæð ÂçÚU·¤çËÂÌ ©Â»ýã çߟææ×
¥ßSÍæ ×ð´ ãñ´ ÁÕ ßð °·¤ ÎêâÚðU â𠥋æ‹Ì ÎêÚUè ÂÚU ãñ´Ð
»éL¤ˆßæ·¤áü‡æ ÕÜ ·ð¤ ·¤æÚU‡æ ©Ù·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îýæð´ ·¤æð ç×ÜæÙð
ßæÜè ÚðU¹æ ÂÚU °·¤ ÎêâÚðU ·¤è ¥æðÚU »çÌ ·¤ÚUÙæ ÂýæÚUÖ
·¤ÚUÌð ãñ´Ð ÁÕ ©‹æ·ð¤ Õè¿ ÎêÚUè ‘d’ ãñ, ÌÕ ©Ù·¤è ¿æÜ
€Øæ ãñ?
( m1 ·¤è ¿æÜ v1 °ß´ m2 ·¤è ¿æÜ v2 ãñ )
(1) v 15v 2

2G 2G
(2) v1 5 m 2 (2) v1 5 m 2
d(m 11m 2 ) d(m 11m 2 )

2G 2G
v2 5 m 1 v2 5 m 1
d(m 11m 2 ) d(m 11m 2 )

2G 2G
(3) v1 5 m 1 (3) v1 5 m 1
d(m 11m 2 ) d(m 11m 2 )

2G 2G
v2 5 m 2 v2 5 m 2
d(m 11m 2 ) d(m 11m 2 )

2G 2G
(4) v1 5 m 2 (4) v1 5 m 2
m1 m1

2G 2G
v2 5 m 1 v2 5 m 1
m2 m2

English : 4 Set : 06 Hindi : 4 Set : 06

8. Steel ruptures when a shear of 8. SÅUèÜ È¤ÅU ÁæÌæ ãñ ÁÕ ©â ÂÚU 3.53108 Nm22
3.5310 8 N m 22 is applied. The force ·¤æ ¥ÂM¤Â‡æ Ü»æØæ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ 0.3 cm ×æðÅUè SÅUèÜ
needed to punch a 1 cm diameter hole in àæèÅU ×ð´ 1 cm ÃØæâ ·¤æ çÀUÎý ·¤ÚUÙð ×ð´ Ü»æØð ÁæÙð
a steel sheet 0.3 cm thick is nearly : ßæÜæ ÕÜ Ü»Ö» ãñ Ñ
(1) 1.43104 N (1) 1.43104 N
(2) 2.73104 N (2) 2.73104 N
(3) 3.33104 N (3) 3.33104 N
(4) 1.13104 N (4) 1.13104 N
9. A cylindrical vessel of cross-section A 9. ¥ÙéÂýSÍ ·¤æÅU A ßæÜð °·¤ ÕðÜÙæ·¤æÚU ÕÌüÙ ×ð´ ÂæÙè
contains water to a height h. There is a ª¡¤¿æ§ü h Ì·¤ ÖÚUæ ãñÐ §â·¤è ÌÜè ×ð´ ç˜æ’Øæ ‘a’ ·¤æ
hole in the bottom of radius ‘a’. The time °·¤ çÀUÎý ãñÐ ßã â×Ø, çÁâ×ð´ Øã ÕÌüÙ çÚU€ˆæ ãæð
in which it will be emptied is : Áæ°»æ, ãñ Ñ
2A h 2A h
(1) 2 g (1) 2 g
pa pa

2A h 2A h
(2) (2)
pa 2 g pa 2 g

2 2A h 2 2A h
(3) 2 g (3) 2 g
pa pa

A h A h
(4) 2 g (4) 2 g
2 pa 2 pa

English : 5 Set : 06 Hindi : 5 Set : 06

10. Two soap bubbles coalesce to form a single 10. Îæð âæÕéÙ ·ð¤ ÕéÜÕéÜð ç×Ü·¤ÚU °·¤ ÕéÜÕéÜæ ÕÙæÌð ãñ´Ð
bubble. If V is the subsequent change in ØçÎ §Ù×ð´ çSÍÌ ßæØé ·ð¤ ¥æØÌÙ ×ð´ ÂÚUßÌèü ÂçÚUßÌüÙ
volume of contained air and S the change V ãñ ¥æñÚU âÂê‡æü ÂëcÆ ÿæð˜æÈ¤Ü ×ð´ ÂçÚUßÌüÙ S ãñ,
in total surface area, T is the surface T ÂëcÆU ÌÙæß ãñ ¥æñÚU P ßæØé×´ÇUÜ ÎæÕ ãñ, ÌÕ
tension and P atmospheric pressure, which çِÙçÜç¹Ì ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ-âæ âÕ‹Ï âãè ãñ?
of the following relation is correct ?
(1) 4PV13ST50 (1) 4PV13ST50
(2) 3PV14ST50 (2) 3PV14ST50
(3) 2PV13ST50 (3) 2PV13ST50
(4) 3PV12ST50 (4) 3PV12ST50

11. Hot water cools from 608C to 508C in the 11. »×ü ÂæÙè 608C âð 508C ÂãÜð 10 ç×ÙÅU ×ð´ Æ´UÇUæ ãæðÌæ
first 10 minutes and to 428C in the next ãñ ¥æñÚU 428C Ì·¤ ÎêâÚðU 10 ç×ÙÅU ×ð´ Æ´UÇUæ ãæðÌæ ãñÐ
10 minutes. The temperature of the ßæÌæßÚU‡æ ·¤æ ÌæÂ×æÙ ãñ Ñ
surroundings is :
(1) 258C (1) 258C
(2) 108C (2) 108C
(3) 158C (3) 158C
(4) 208C (4) 208C
12. A Carnot engine absorbs 1000 J of heat 12. °·¤ ·¤æÙæðü §´ÁÙ °·¤ ·é´¤ÇU âð 1278C ÂÚU 1000 J
energy from a reservoir at 1278C and rejects ª¤c×èØ ª¤Áæü ¥ßàææðçáÌ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ ¥æñÚU ÂýˆØð·¤ ¿·ý¤
600 J of heat energy during each cycle. The ×ð´ 600 J ª¤c×èØ ª¤Áæü ¥Sßè·¤æÚU ·¤ÚU ÎðÌæ ãñÐ §´ÁÙ
efficiency of engine and temperature of ·¤è ÎÿæÌæ ¥æñÚU çâ´·¤ ·¤æ ÌæÂ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
sink will be :
(1) 20% and 2438C (1) 20% °ß´ 2438C
(2) 40% and 2338C (2) 40% °ß´ 2338C
(3) 50% and 2208C (3) 50% °ß´ 2208C
(4) 70% and 2108C (4) 70% °ß´ 2108C

English : 6 Set : 06 Hindi : 6 Set : 06

13. At room temperature a diatomic gas is 13. ·¤×ÚðU ·ð¤ ÌæÂ×æÙ ÂÚU °·¤ çmÂÚU×æ‡æé·¤ »ñâ ·¤è
found to have an r.m.s. speed of ß»ü-×æŠØ-×êÜ ¿æÜ 1930 ms21 ÂæØè ÁæÌè ãñÐ
1930 ms21. The gas is : »ñâ ãñ Ñ
(1) H2 (1) H2
(2) Cl2 (2) Cl2
(3) O2 (3) O2
(4) F2 (4) F2

14. Which of the following expressions 14. çِÙçÜç¹Ì ÃØ´Á·¤æð´ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ âæ °·¤ âÚUÜ ÚðU¹æ
corresponds to simple harmonic motion ÂÚU âÚUÜ ¥æßÌü »çÌ ·ð¤ â´»Ì ãñ, Áãæ¡ x çßSÍæÂÙ ãñ
along a straight line, where x is the ¥æñÚU a, b, c ÏÙæˆ×·¤ çSÍÚUæ´·¤ ãñ ?
displacement and a, b, c are positive
constants ?
(1) a1bx2cx 2 (1) a1bx2cx 2
(2) bx2 (2) bx2
(3) a2bx1cx 2 (3) a2bx1cx 2
(4) 2bx (4) 2bx

15. A source of sound A emitting waves of 15. ¥æßëçžæ 1800 Hz ·¤è Ì´ÚU»ð´ ©ˆâçÁüÌ ·¤ÚU ÚUãæ ŠßçÙ
frequency 1800 Hz is falling towards dæðÌ A °·¤ âè×æ‹Ì ßð» v âð ÏÚUÌè ·¤è ¥æðÚU ç»ÚU ÚUãæ
ground with a terminal speed v. The ãñÐ dæðÌ ·ð¤ ÆUè·¤ Ùè¿ð ÏÚUÌè ÂÚU °·¤ Âýðÿæ·¤ B
observer B on the ground directly beneath ¥æßëçžæ 2150 Hz ·¤è ÌÚ´U»ð´ ÂýæŒˆæ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñÐ dæðÌ A,
the source receives waves of frequency ÏÚUÌè âð ÂÚUæßçÌüÌ Ü»Ö» §â ¥æßëçžæ ·¤è ÌÚ´U»ð´ Âý挈æ
2150 Hz. The source A receives waves, ·¤ÚðU»æ Ñ ( ŠßçÙ ·¤è ¿æÜ 5343 m/s)
reflected from ground, of frequency
nearly : (Speed of sound 5343 m/s)
(1) 2150 Hz (1) 2150 Hz
(2) 2500 Hz (2) 2500 Hz
(3) 1800 Hz (3) 1800 Hz
(4) 2400 Hz (4) 2400 Hz

English : 7 Set : 06 Hindi : 7 Set : 06

16. A spherically symmetric charge 16. °·¤ »æðÜèØ â×ç×Ìè ¥æßðàæ çßÌÚU‡æ ¥æßðàæ ƒæوß
distribution is characterised by a charge ·¤æ çِÙçÜç¹Ì çß¿ÚU‡æ ÚU¹Ìæ ãñ Ñ
density having the following variation :  r
r(r)5ro  1 2  r < R ·ð¤ çÜ°
 r  R
r(r)5ro  1 2  for r < R
 R r(r)50 r / R ·ð¤ çÜ°
r(r)50 for r / R Áãæ¡ r ¥æßðàæ çßÌÚU‡æ ·ð¤ ·ð¤‹Îý âð ÎêÚUè ãñ´ ¥æñÚU ro °·¤
Where r is the distance from the centre of çSÍÚUæ´·¤ ãñÐ °·¤ ¥‹ÌÑ çՋÎé (r < R) ÂÚU çßléÌ ÿæð˜æ
the charge distribution and ro is a constant. ãñ Ñ
The electric field at an internal point
(r < R) is :
ro  r r2 
ro  r r2  (1)  2 
(1)  2  4e o  3 4R 
4eo  3 4R 
ro  r r2 
ro  r r2  (2)  2 
(2)  2  eo  3 4R 
eo  3 4R 
ro  r r2 
ro  r r2  (3)  2 
(3)  2  3eo  3 4R 
3e o  3 4R 
ro  r r2 
ro  r r2  (4)  2 
(4)  2  12 eo  3 4R 
12 eo  3 4R 

English : 8 Set : 06 Hindi : 8 Set : 06

17. The space between the plates of a parallel 17. °·¤ â×æ‹ÌÚU Âç^·¤æ â´ÏæçÚU˜æ ·¤è Âç^·¤æ¥æð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿
plate capacitor is filled with a ‘dielectric’ ·¤æ SÍæÙ °·¤ ÂÚæßñléÌ âð ÖÚUæ ÁæÌæ ãñ çÁâ·¤æ ÂÚUæßñléÌ
whose ‘dielectric constant’ varies with çSÍÚUæ´·¤ ÎêÚUè ·ð¤ âæÍ çِ٠âÕ‹Ï ¥ÙéâæÚU ÂçÚUßçÌüÌ
distance as per the relation : ãæðÌæ ãñ Ñ
K(x)5Ko1lx (l5 a constant) K(x)5Ko1lx (l5°·¤ çSÍÚUæ´·¤)
The capacitance C, of this capacitor, would â´ÏæçÚU˜æ ·¤è ÏæçÚUÌæ C, §â·¤è çÙßæüÌ ÏæçÚUÌæ, Co ·ð¤
be related to its ‘vacuum’ capacitance Co âæÍ çِ٠âÕ‹Ï ¥ÙéâæÚU âÕç‹ÏÌ ãæð»è Ñ
as per the relation :
ld ld
(1) C5 Co (1) C5 Co
l n (1 1 K o ld) l n (1 1 K o ld)
l l
(2) C5 Co (2) C5 Co
d. l n (1 1 K o ld) d. l n (1 1 K o ld)

ld ld
(3) C5 Co (3) C5 Co
l n (1 1 ld/K o ) l n (1 1 ld/K o )
l l
(4) C5 Co (4) C5 Co
d. l n (1 1 K o /ld) d. l n (1 1 K o /ld)

English : 9 Set : 06 Hindi : 9 Set : 06

18. The circuit shown here has two batteries 18. ÎàææüØð »Øð ÂçÚUÂÍ ×ð´ 8.0 V °ß´ 16.0 V ·¤è Îæð
of 8.0 V and 16.0 V and three resistors ÕñÅUçÚUØæ¡ ¥æñÚU 3 V, 9 V °ß´ 9 V ·ð¤ ÌèÙ ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ ÌÍæ
3 V, 9 V and 9 V and a capacitor 5.0 mF. 5.0 mF ·¤æ °·¤ â´ÏæçÚU˜æ ãñÐ

How much is the current I in the circuit in SÍæØè ¥ßSÍæ ×ð´ ÂçÚUÂÍ ×ð´ ÏæÚUæ I ·¤æ ×æÙ €Øæ ãñ?
steady state ?
(1) 1.6 A (1) 1.6 A
(2) 0.67 A (2) 0.67 A
(3) 2.5 A (3) 2.5 A
(4) 0.25 A (4) 0.25 A
19. A positive charge ‘q’ of mass ‘m’ is moving 19. ÎýÃØ×æÙ ‘m’ ·¤æ °·¤ ÏÙæˆ×·¤ ¥æßðàæ ‘q’, 1x ¥ÿæ
along the 1x axis. We wish to apply a ÂÚU »çÌàæèÜ ãñÐ ã× °·¤ °·¤â×æÙ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ B
uniform magnetic field B for time Dt so that â×Ø Dt ·ð¤ çÜ° Ü»æÙæ ¿æãÌð ãñ´ çÁââð ç·¤ ¥æßðàæ
the charge reverses its direction crossing ·¤è çÎàææ d ÎêÚUè ÂÚU y - ¥ÿæ ·¤æð ·¤æÅUÌð ãé° ÂýçÌÜæðç×Ì
the y axis at a distance d. Then : ãæð Áæ°, ÌÕ Ñ
mv pd mv pd
(1) 5 DQGDW5 (1) 5  •Ä™  D W5
qd v qd v

mv pd mv pd
(2) 5 DQG D W5 (2) 5  •Ä™  D W5
2 qd 2v 2 qd 2v

2 mv pd 2 mv pd
(3) 5 DQG D W5 (3) 5  •Ä™  D W5
qd 2v qd 2v

2 mv pd 2 mv pd
(4) 5 DQG D W5 (4) 5  •Ä™  D W5
qd v qd v

English : 10 Set : 06 Hindi : 10 Set : 06

20. Consider two thin identical conducting 20. Îæð ÂÌÜð âßü â×M¤Âè ¿æÜ·¤èØ ÌæÚU ÕãéÌ ÂÌÜð ÚUæðÏè
wires covered with very thin insulating ÂÎæÍü âð ɸ·ð¤ ãé° ãñ´Ð °·¤ ÌæÚU ·¤æð ×æðǸ·¤ÚU °·¤ ÜêÂ
material. One of the wires is bent into a ÕÙæØæ ÁæÌæ ãñ Áæð ç·¤ ¥ÂÙð ·ð¤‹Îý ÂÚU ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ
loop and produces magnetic field B1, at its B1 ©ˆÂóæ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ ÁÕ §â×ð´ ÏæÚUæ I ÂýßæçãÌ ãæðÌè ãñÐ
centre when a current I passes through it. ÎêâÚðU ÌæÚU ·¤æð ÌèÙ âßüâ×M¤Âè ÜêÂæð´ ×ð´ ×æðǸ·¤ÚU ¥æñÚU
The second wire is bent into a coil with °·¤ âæÍ ÚU¹·¤ÚU ·é¤‡ÇUÜè ÕÙæÌð ãñ´ Áæð ç·¤ ÜêÂæð´ ·ð¤
three identical loops adjacent to each other ·ð¤‹Îý ÂÚU ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÿæð˜æ B2 ©ˆÂóæ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ ÁÕ §â×ð´
and produces magnetic field B 2 at the ÏæÚUæ I/3 ÂýßæçãÌ ãæðÌè ãñÐ ¥ÙéÂæÌ B1 : B2 ãñ Ñ
centre of the loops when current I/3 passes (1) 1:1
through it. The ratio B1 : B2 is : (2) 1:3
(1) 1 : 1 (3) 1:9
(2) 1:3 (4) 9:1
(3) 1:9
(4) 9:1 21. °·¤ ’ØæÃæ·ý¤èØ ßæðËÅUÌæ V(t)5100 sin (500t) °·¤
çßàæéh ÂýðÚU·¤ˆß L50.02 H ÂÚU Ü»æ§ü ÁæÌè ãñÐ
21. A sinusoidal voltage V(t)5100 sin (500t) ·é¤‡ÇUÜè âð ÂýßæçãÌ ÏæÚUæ ãñ Ñ
is applied across a pure inductance of
L50.02 H. The current through the coil (1) 10 cos (500t)
is : (2) 210 cos (500t)
(1) 10 cos (500t) (3) 10 sin (500t)
(2) 210 cos (500t) (4) 210 sin (500t)
(3) 10 sin (500t)
(4) 210 sin (500t)

English : 11 Set : 06 Hindi : 11 Set : 06

22. A lamp emits monochromatic green light 22. °·¤ ÜðÂ âÖè çÎàææ¥æð´ ×ð´ °·¤â×æÙ M¤Â âð °·¤ß‡æèü
uniformly in all directions. The lamp is 3% ãÚUæ Âý·¤æàæ ©ˆâçÁüÌ ·¤ÚU ÚUãæ ãñÐ ÜðÂ ·¤è çßléÌ
efficient in converting electrical power to àæç€ˆæ ·¤æð çßléÌ ¿éÕ·¤èØ ÌÚ´U»æð´ ×ð´ ÂçÚUßÌüÙ ·¤ÚUÙð
electromagnetic waves and consumes ·¤è ÎÿæÌæ 3% ãñ ¥æñÚU 100 W àæç€ˆæ ·¤è ¹ÂÌ ·¤ÚUÌæ
100 W of power. The amplitude of the ãñÐ ÜðÂ âð 5 m ÎêÚUè ÂÚU çßléÌ ¿éÕ·¤èØ çßç·¤ÚU‡æ
electric field associated with the âð âÕçhÌ çßléÌ ÿæð˜æ ·¤æ ¥æØæ× Ü»Ö» ãæð»æ Ñ
electromagnetic radiation at a distance of (1) 1.34 V/m
5 m from the lamp will be nearly : (2) 2.68 V/m
(1) 1.34 V/m (3) 4.02 V/m
(2) 2.68 V/m (4) 5.36 V/m
(3) 4.02 V/m
(4) 5.36 V/m

English : 12 Set : 06 Hindi : 12 Set : 06

23. The refractive index of the material of a 23.
concave lens is m. It is immersed in a
medium of refractive index m1. A parallel
beam of light is incident on the lens. The
path of the emergent rays when m1 > m is :
°·¤ ¥ßÌÜ Üð‹â ·ð¤ ÂÎæÍü ·¤æ ¥ÂßÌüÙæ´·¤ m ãñÐ
§âð ¥ÂßÌüÙæ´·¤ m1 ·ð¤ ×æŠØ× ×ð´ ÇéUÕæðØæ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ
Âý·¤æàæ ·¤è °·¤ â×æ‹ÌÚU Âé´Á Üð‹â ÂÚU ¥æÂçÌÌ ãñÐ
ÁÕ m1 > m ãñ´, ÌÕ çÙ»üÌ ç·¤ÚU‡ææð´ ·¤æ ÂÍ ãñ Ñ

(1) (1)

(2) (2)

(3) (3)

(4) (4)

English : 13 Set : 06 Hindi : 13 Set : 06

24. Interference pattern is observed at ‘P’ due 24.
to superimposition of two rays coming out
from a source ‘S’ as shown in the figure.
The value of ‘l’ for which maxima is
obtained at ‘P’ is :
(R is perfect reflecting surface) :
°·¤ dæðÌ ’S’ âð çÙ·¤Ü ÚUãè Îæð ç·¤ÚU‡ææ𴠷𤠥ŠØæÚUæð‡æ
âð ‘P’ ÂÚU °·¤ ÃØçÌ·¤ÚU‡æ 翘æ ÂæØæ ÁæÌæ ãñ, Áñâæ ç·¤
翘æ ×ð´ ÎàææüØæ »Øæ ãñÐ ‘l’ ·¤æ ßã ×æÙ, çÁâ·ð¤ çÜ°
‘P’ ÂÚU Âý挈æ 翘æ ×ð´ ×ãžæ× ÌèßýÌæ ãñ, ãñ Ñ
(R °·¤ Âê‡æüÌØæ ÂÚUæßÌèü ÂëcÆU ãñ )

2 nl
(1) l5
2 nl 321
(1) l5
321 (2n21)l
(2) l5
(2n21)l 2 ( 3 2 1)
(2) l5
2 ( 3 2 1)
(2n21)l 3
(3) l5
(2n21)l 3 4 ( 22 3 )
(3) l5
4 ( 22 3 )
(2n21)l
(4) l5
(2n21)l 3 21
(4) l5
3 21
25. °·¤Ü çSÜÅU çßßÌüÙ ç¿˜æ ·ð¤ ÂýØæð» ×ð´, ÜæÜ Âý·¤æàæ
25. In an experiment of single slit diffraction ·¤æ ÂýÍ× ‹ØêÙÌ× °·¤ ÎêâÚUè ÌÚ´U»ÎñŠØü ·ð¤ ÂýÍ× ×ãžæ×
pattern, first minimum for red light â´ÂæÌè ãñÐ ØçÎ ÜæÜ Âý·¤æàæ ·¤è ÌÚ´U»ÎñŠØü 6600 Å
coincides with first maximum of some ãñ, ÌÕ ÂýÍ× ×ãžæ× ·ð¤ â´»Ì ÌÚ´U»ÎñŠØü ãæð»è Ñ
other wavelength. If wavelength of red
light is 6600 Å , then wavelength of first
maximum will be : (1) 3300 Å
(1) 3300 Å (2) 4400 Å
(2) 4400 Å (3) 5500 Å
(3) 5500 Å (4) 6600 Å
(4) 6600 Å

English : 14 Set : 06 Hindi : 14 Set : 06

26. A beam of light has two wavelengths 26. Îæð ÌÚ´U»ÎñŠØæðZ 4972Å °ß´ 6216 Å ßæÜð Âý·¤æàæ ·¤è
4972 Å and 6216 Å with a total intensity °·¤ Âé´Á ·¤è ·é¤Ü ÌèßýÌæ 3.631023 Wm22 ãñ Áæð
of 3.631023 Wm22 equally distributed ç·¤ ÎæðÙæð´ ÌÚ´U»ÎñŠØæðZ ×ð´ °·¤ â×æÙ çßÌçÚUÌ ãñÐ 2.3 eV
among the two wavelengths. The beam ·¤æØü È ¤ÜÙ ßæÜð °·¤ âæȤ ÏæÌé ·ð ¤ Âë c ÆU ·ð ¤
falls normally on an area of 1 cm2 of a clean 1 cm2 ÿæð˜æÈ¤Ü ÂÚU Øã Âé´Á ¥çÖܐÕßÌ÷ ¥æÂçÌÌ
metallic surface of work function 2.3 eV. ãñ´Ð Øã ×æÙ Üð´ ç·¤ ÂÚUæßÌüÙ mæÚUæ ç·¤âè Öè Âý·¤æàæ ·¤æ
Assume that there is no loss of light by Oæâ Ùãè´ ãæðÌæ ãñ ¥æñÚU ÂýˆØð·¤ ÿæç×Ì È¤æðÅUæÙ °·¤ §Üð€ÅþUæÙò
reflection and that each capable photon ©ˆâçÁüÌ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñÐ 2s ×ð´ ©ˆâçÁüÌ È¤æðÅUæð §Üð€ÅþUæòÙæð´
ejects one electron. The number of photo ·¤è ⴁØæ ãñ ֻܻ Ñ
electrons liberated in 2s is
approximately :
(1) 6310 11 (1) 6310 11
(2) 9310 11 (2) 9310 11
(3) 11310 11 (3) 11310 11
(4) 15310 11 (4) 15310 11

27. A piece of bone of an animal from a ruin 27. °·¤ ¹‡ÇUãÚU âð ÂýæŒˆæ °·¤ Âàæé ·¤è ãaè ·ð¤ ÅéU·¤Ç¸ð ·¤è
is found to have 14 C activity of 14C âç·ý¤ØÌæ §â·ð¤ ·¤æÕüÙ ¥´àæ ·¤è ÂýçÌ »ýæ× ÂýçÌ

12 disintegrations per minute per gm of ç×ÙÅU 12 ç߃æÅUÙ ãñÐ °·¤ ç’æ‹Îæ Âàæé ·¤è 14C âç·ý¤ØÌæ
its carbon content. The 14C activity of a 16 ç߃æÅUÙ ÂýçÌ ç×ÙÅU ÂýçÌ »ýæ× ãñ Рֻܻ ç·¤ÌÙð
living animal is 16 disintegrations per ßáü ÂãÜð Âàæé ·¤è ×ëˆØé ãé§ü? (çÎØæ ãñ 14C ·¤è ¥hü
minute per gm. How long ago nearly did ¥æØé t1/255760 ßáü)
the animal die ? (Given half life of
14Cis t1/255760 years)
(1) 1672 years (1) 1672 ßáü
(2) 2391 years (2) 2391 ßáü
(3) 3291 years (3) 3291 ßáü
(4) 4453 years (4) 4453 ßáü

English : 15 Set : 06 Hindi : 15 Set : 06

28. For LED’s to emit light in visible region of 28. LED’s çßléÌ ¿éÕ·¤èØ Âý·¤æàæ ·ð¤ ÎëàØ ÿæð˜æ ×ð´
electromagnetic light, it should have Âý·¤æàæ ©ˆâçÁüÌ ·¤ÚðU, §â·ð¤ çÜØð §Ù·¤è Õñ‹Ç ¥‹ÌÚUæÜ
energy band gap in the range of : §â ÚðU‹Á ×ð´ ãæðÙè ¿æçãØð Ñ
(1) 0.1 eV to 0.4 eV (1) 0.1 eV âð 0.4 eV
(2) 0.5 eV to 0.8 eV (2) 0.5 eV âð 0.8 eV
(3) 0.9 eV to 1.6 eV (3) 0.9 eV âð 1.6 eV
(4) 1.7 eV to 3.0 eV (4) 1.7 eV âð 3.0 eV
29. For sky wave propagation, the radio 29. ¥æ·¤æàæ ÌÚ´U» â´¿ÚU‡æ ·ð¤ çÜ°, ÚðUçÇUØæð ÌÚ´U»ð´ §â ¥æßëçžæ
waves must have a frequency range in ÚðU‹Á ·ð¤ Õè¿ ãæðÙè ¿æçã° Ñ
between :
(1) 1 MHz to 2 MHz (1) 1 MHz âð 2 MHz
(2) 5 MHz to 25 MHz (2) 5 MHz âð 25 MHz
(3) 35 MHz to 40 MHz (3) 35 MHz âð 40 MHz
(4) 45 MHz to 50 MHz (4) 45 MHz âð 50 MHz

30. In the experiment of calibration of 30. °·¤ ßæðËÅU×æÂè ·ð¤ ¥´àæàææðÏÙ ·ð¤ ÂýØæð» ×ð´, 1.1 ßæðËÅU
voltmeter, a standard cell of e.m.f. 1.1 volt çßléÌßæã·¤ ÕÜ ·ð¤ °·¤ ×æÙ·¤ âñÜ ·ð¤ â´ÌéçÜÌ
is balanced against 440 cm of 440 cm ·¤æ çßÖß×æÂè ÌæÚU ÂæØæ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ °·¤
potentiometer wire. The potential ÂýçÌÚUæðÏ ·ð¤ çâÚUæð´ ÂÚU çßÖßæ‹ÌÚU ÌæÚU ·ð¤ 220 cm ·ð¤
difference across the ends of resistance is â´ÌéçÜÌ ÂæØæ ÁæÌæ ãñÐ ßæðËÅU×æÂè ·¤æ â´»Ì ÂÆUÙ
found to balance against 220 cm of the 0.5 ßæðËÅU ãñÐ ßæðËÅU×æÂè ·ð¤ ÂÆUÙ ×𴠘æéçÅU ãæð»è Ñ
wire. The corresponding reading of
voltmeter is 0.5 volt. The error in the
reading of voltmeter will be :
(1) 20.15 volt (1) 20.15 ßæðËÅU
(2) 0.15 volt (2) 0.15 ßæðËÅU
(3) 0.5 volt (3) 0.5 ßæðËÅU
(4) 20.05 volt (4) 20.05 ßæðËÅU

English : 16 Set : 06 Hindi : 16 Set : 06

 PART B — CHEMISTRY
31. If m and e are the mass and charge of the 31.
revolving electron in the orbit of radius r
for hydrogen atom, the total energy of the
revolving electron will be :
Öæ» B — ÚUâæØÙ çߙææÙ
ØçÎ ãæ§ÇþæðÁÙ ÂÚU×æ‡æé ·ð¤ ç˜æ’Øæ r ·¤è ¥æÚUçÕÅU ×ð´
ƒæê×Ùð ßæÜð §Üñ€ÅþUæòÙ ·¤æ ÎýÃØ×æÙ m ¥æñÚU ¥æßðàæ e ãæð´
Ìæð, ƒæê×Ùð ßæÜð §Üñ€ÅþUæòÙ ·¤è â·¤Ü ª¤Áæü ãæð»è Ñ

1 e2 1 e2
(1) (1)
2 r 2 r

e2 e2
(2) 2 (2) 2
r r

me 2 me 2
(3) (3)
r r

1 e2 1 e2
(4) 2 (4) 2
2 r 2 r

32. The de-Broglie wavelength of a particle of 32. ÎýÃØ×æÙ 6.63 g ·ð¤ ·¤‡æ ·¤æ ¥æßð» 100 ms21 âð
mass 6.63 g moving with a velocity of »çÌ×æÙ ãæðÙð ÂÚU Îè-Õýæ‚Üè ÌÚ´U»ÎñŠØü ãæð»è Ñ
100 ms21 is :
(1) 10233 m (1) 10233 m
(2) 10235 m (2) 10235 m
(3) 10231 m (3) 10231 m
(4) 10225 m (4) 10225 m

33. What happens when an inert gas is added 33. âæØ ÚU¹Ùð ßæÜð ¥æØÌÙ ·¤æð ¥ÂçÚUßçÌüÌ ÚU¹Ùð ßæÜè
to an equilibrium keeping volume çSÍçÌ ×ð´ °·¤ ¥ç·ý¤Ø »ñâ ÇæÜÙð ÂÚU €Øæ ãæð»æ?
unchanged ? (1) ¥çÏ·¤ ç·ý¤Øæ È¤Ü Âý挈æ ãæð»æÐ
(1) More product will form (2) ·¤× ç·ý¤Øæ È¤Ü Âý挈æ ãæð»æÐ
(2) Less product will form (3) ¥çÏ·¤ ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ãæð»èÐ
(3) More reactant will form (4) âæØ ¥ÂçÚUßçÌüÌ ÚUãð»æÐ
(4) Equilibrium will remain unchanged

English : 17 Set : 06 Hindi : 17 Set : 06

34. The amount of BaSO4 formed upon mixing 34. ÁÕ Ba5137, Cl535.5, S532, H51 ¥æñÚU
100 mL of 20.8% BaCl 2 solution with O516 ×æÙæ ÁæØð Ìæð 20.8% BaCl2 çßÜØÙ ·ð¤
50 mL of 9.8% H2SO4 solution will be : 100 mL ·¤æð 9.8%, H 2 SO 4 ·ð ¤ çßÜØÙ ·ð ¤
(Ba5137, Cl535.5, S532, H51 and 50 mL ×ð´ ç×ÜæÙð ÂÚU ç·¤ÌÙæ BaSO4 ÕÙð»æ?
O516)
(1) 23.3 g (1) 23.3 g
(2) 11.65 g (2) 11.65 g
(3) 30.6 g (3) 30.6 g
(4) 33.2 g (4) 33.2 g
35. The rate coefficient (k) for a particular 35. 1008C ÂÚU °·¤ çßàæðá ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤æ ÎÚU çÙØÌæ´·¤ (k)
reactions is 1.331024 M21 s21 at 1008C, 1.331024 M21 s21 ãñ ¥æñÚU 1508C ÂÚU §â·¤æ
and 1.331023 M21 s21 at 1508C. What ×æÙ 1.331023 M21 s21 ãñÐ §â ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·ð¤
is the energy of activation (EA) (in kJ) for çÜØð °ð€ÅUèßðàæÙ ª¤Áæü (EA) kJ ×ð´ ç·¤ÌÙè ãæð»è?
this reaction ? (R5molar gas (R5×æðÜÚU »ñâ çÙØÌæ´·¤ 58.314 JK21 ×æðÜ 21)
constant58.314 JK21 mol21)
(1) 16 (1) 16
(2) 60 (2) 60
(3) 99 (3) 99
(4) 132 (4) 132

English : 18 Set : 06 Hindi : 18 Set : 06

36. How many electrons would be required to 36. ·¤æÂÚU âË$Èð¤ÅUU ·ð¤ ÁÜèØ çßÜØÙ ·ð¤ §Üñ€ÅþUæòÜðçââ ×ð´
deposit 6.35 g of copper at the cathode ·ñ¤ÍæðÇ ÂÚU 6.35 »ýæ× ·¤æÂÚU ·ð¤ Á×æ¥æð´ ·ð¤ çÜØð
during the electrolysis of an aqueous ç·¤ÌÙð §Üñ€ÅþUæòÙæð´ ·¤è ¥æßàØ·¤Ìæ ãæð»è? (·¤æÂÚU ·¤æ
solution of copper sulphate ? (Atomic mass ÂÚU×æ‡æé ÎýÃØ×æÙ 5 63.5 ×æ˜æ·¤, NA5 °ðßæð»æÎýæð
of copper 5 63.5 u, N A 5Avogadro’s çÙØÌæ´·¤)
constant) :
NA NA
(1) (1)
20 20
NA NA
(2) (2)
10 10
NA NA
(3) (3)
5 5
NA NA
(4) (4)
2 2

37. The entropy (S o ) of the following 37. çِ٠ÂÎæÍæðZ ·ð¤ °ð‹ÅþUæÂè ×æÙ ãñ (So) ãñ´ Ñ
substances are : CH4 (g) 186.2 J K21 ×æðÜ21
CH4 (g) 186.2 J K21 mol21 O 2 (g) 205.0 J K21 ×æðÜ21
O2 (g) 205.0 J K21 mol21 CO 2 (g) 213.6 J K21 ×æðÜ21
CO 2 (g) 213.6 J K21 mol21 H2O (l) 69.9 J K21 ×æðÜ21
H2O (l) 69.9 J K21 mol21 ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ
The entropy change (DSo) for the reaction CH 4 (g)12O 2 (g) ® CO 2 (g)12H 2 O(l)
CH4(g)12O2(g) ® CO2(g)12H2O(l) is : ·ð¤ çÜØð °ð‹ÅþUæÂè ÂçÚUßÌüÙ (DSo) ·¤æ ×æÙ ãæð»æ Ñ
(1) 2312.5 J K21 mol21 (1) 2312.5 J K21 ×æðÜ21
(2) 2242.8 J K21 mol21 (2) 2242.8 J K21 ×æðÜ21
(3) 2108.1 J K21 mol21 (3) 2108.1 J K21 ×æðÜ21
(4) 237.6 J K21 mol21 (4) 237.6 J K21 ×æðÜ21

English : 19 Set : 06 Hindi : 19 Set : 06

38. The conjugate base of hydrazoic acid is : 38. ãæ§ÇþUæð$Áæ𧷤 °ðçâÇU ·¤æ â´Øé‚×è ÿææÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) N23 (1) N23
(2) N2
3 (2) N2
3

(3) N2
2 (3) N2
2

(4) HN2
3 (4) HN2
3

39. In a monoclinic unit cell, the relation of 39. °·¤ ×æðÙæðç€ÜçÙ·¤ °·¤·¤ âñÜ ×ð´ Âÿææ𴠷𤠷¤æðÙæ çՋÎé¥æð´
sides and angles are respectively : âð âÕ‹Ï ·ý¤×æÙéâæÚU ãæðÌð ã´ñ Ñ
(1) a5b ¹ c and a5b5g5908 (1) a5b ¹ c ¥æñÚU a5b5g5908
(2) a ¹ b ¹ c and a5b5g5908 (2) a ¹ b ¹ c ¥æñÚU a5b5g5908
(3) a ¹ b ¹ c and b5g5908 ¹ a (3) a ¹ b ¹ c ¥æñÚU b5g5908 ¹ a
(4) a ¹ b ¹ c and a ¹ b ¹ g ¹ 908 (4) a ¹ b ¹ c ¥æñÚU a ¹ b ¹ g ¹ 908

40. The standard enthalpy of formation 40. ×èÍðÙ, CH4,ÕÙÙð ·¤è ×æÙ·¤ °ð‹ÍñËÂè (DfHo298)
(D f H o 298 ) for methane, CH 4 is 274.9 kJ ×æðÜ21 ãæðÌè ãñÐ §ââð C2H ¥æՋÏ
274.9 kJ mol21. In order to calculate the ·¤è ׊Ø×æÙ ª¤Áæü ·¤æ ¥æ·¤ÜÙ ·¤ÚUÙð ·ð¤ çÜØð çِÙæð´
average energy given out in the formation âð 緤⠰·¤ ·¤æð ÁæÙÙæ ¥æßàØ·¤ ãæð»æ?
of a C2H bond from this it is necessary to
know which one of the following ?
(1) the dissociation energy of the (1) H2 ¥‡æé ·¤è çßØæðÁÙ ª¤ÁæüÐ
hydrogen molecule, H2.
(2) the first four ionisation energies of (2) ·¤æÕüÙ ·¤è ÂãÜè ¿æÚU ¥æØÙÙ ª¤Áæü°¡Ð
carbon.
(3) the dissociation energy of H2 and (3) H2 ·¤è çßØæðÁÙ ª¤Áæü ¥æñÚU ·¤æÕüÙ (»ýð$Ȥæ§Å)U
enthalpy of sublimation of carbon ·¤è ª¤ŠßüÂæÌÙ ª¤ÁæüÐ
(graphite).
(4) the first four ionisation energies of (4) ·¤æÕüÙ ·¤è ÂýÍ× ¿æÚU ¥æØÙÙ ª¤Áæü°¡ ¥æñÚ
carbon and electron affinity of ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ·¤è §Üñ€ÅþUæò٠ՋÏéÌæÐ
hydrogen.

English : 20 Set : 06 Hindi : 20 Set : 06

41. Which of the following xenon-OXO 41. $ÁèÙæÙ ÜæðÚUæ§ÇUæð´ ·ð¤ ÁÜèØ ¥ÂƒæÅUÙ âð çِ٠$ÁèÙæÙ-
compounds may not be obtained by ¥æ€âæð-Øæñç»·¤æð´ ×ð´ âð 緤ⷤæð Âý挈æ Ùãè´ ç·¤Øæ Áæ
hydrolysis of xenon fluorides ? â·¤Ìæ ãñ?
(1) Xe O2F2 (1) Xe O2F2
(2) Xe O F4 (2) Xe O F4
(3) Xe O3 (3) Xe O3
(4) Xe O4 (4) Xe O4
42. Excited hydrogen atom emits light in the 42. 2.47310 15 Hz ÂÚU ÂÚUæÕñ´»Ùè ÿæð˜æ ×ð´ ©žæðçÁÌ
ultraviolet region at 2.4731015 Hz. With ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ÂÚU×æ‡æé Âý·¤æàæ ©ˆâçÁüÌ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñÐ §â
this frequency, the energy of a single ¥æßëçžæ ·ð¤ âæÍ °·¤ ¥·ð¤Üð ȤæðÅUæòÙ ·¤è ª¤Áæü ãæð»è Ñ
photon is : (h56.63310234 Js)
(h56.63310234 Js)
(1) 8.041310 240 J (1) 8.041310240 J
(2) 2.680310 219 J (2) 2.680310219 J
(3) 1.640310 218 J (3) 1.640310218 J
(4) 6.111310 217 J (4) 6.111310217 J

43. Which one of the following exhibits the 43. çِÙæð´ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ °·¤ ¥çÏ·¤Ì× â´Øæ ×ð´ ¥æò€âè·¤ÚU‡æ
largest number of oxidation states ? ¥ßSÍæ°¡ çιæÌæ ãñ?
(1) Ti (22) (1) Ti (22)
(2) V(23) (2) V(23)
(3) Cr (24) (3) Cr (24)
(4) Mn (25) (4) Mn (25)

English : 21 Set : 06 Hindi : 21 Set : 06

44. Copper becomes green when exposed to 44.
moist air for a long period. This is due to :
(1) the formation of a layer of cupric
oxide on the surface of copper.
(2) the formation of a layer of basic
carbonate of copper on the surface
of copper.
(3) the formation of a layer of cupric
hydroxide on the surface of copper.
(4) the formation of basic copper
sulphate layer on the surface of the
metal.
ܐÕð â×Ø Ì·¤ »èÜè ßæØé ·ð¤ âÂ·ü¤ ×ð´ ÚUãÙð ÂÚU
·¤æÂÚU ãÚUæ ãæð ÁæÌæ ãñÐ §â·¤æ ·¤æÚU‡æ ãæðÌæ ãñ Ñ
(1) ·¤æÂÚU ÌÜ ÂÚU €ØêçÂý·¤ ¥æò€âæ§ÇU ·¤æ ÂÚUÌ
ÕÙÙæÐ
(2) ·¤æÂÚU ÌÜ ÂÚU ·¤æÂÚU ·ð¤ ÿææÚUèØ ·¤æÕæðüÙðÅU ·¤æ
ÂÚUÌ ÕÙÙæÐ
(3) ·¤æÂÚU ÌÜ ÂÚU €ØêçÂý·¤ ãæ§ÇþU¥æò€âæ§ÇU ·¤æ ÂÚUÌ
ÕÙÙæÐ
(4) ÏæÌé ÌÜ ÂÚU ÿææÚUèØ ·¤æÂÚU âË$Èð¤ÅU ·¤æ ÂÚUÌ
ÕÙÙæÐ

45. Among the following species the one 45. çِ٠ÂÎæÍæðZ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ °·¤ çÜ»ñ‹ÇU M¤Â ×ð´ ¥çÏ·¤Ì×
which causes the highest CFSE, Do as a CFSE, Do ·¤æ ·¤æÚU‡æ ÕÙÌæ ãñ?
ligand is :
(1) CN2 (1) CN2
(2) NH3 (2) NH3
(3) F2 (3) F2
(4) CO (4) CO
46. Similarity in chemical properties of the 46. ¥æßÌü âæÚU‡æè ·ð¤ ç·¤âè »ýé ×ð´ Ìˆß ·ð¤ ÂÚU×æ‡æé¥æð´ ·ð¤
atoms of elements in a group of the ÚUæâæØçÙ·¤ »é‡ææð´ ×ð´ ¥çÏ·¤Ì× â×æÙÌæ ·ð¤ ·¤æÚU‡æ ãæðÌð
Periodic table is most closely related to : ãñ´ Ñ
(1) atomic numbers (1) ÂÚU×æ‡æé·¤ ِÕÚU
(2) atomic masses (2) ÂÚU×æ‡æé·¤ ÎýÃØ×æÙ
(3) number of principal energy levels (3) ÕǸð (Principal) ª¤Áæü SÌÚUæð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ
(4) number of valence electrons (4) ßñÜð‹âè §Üñ€ÅþUæòÙæð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ

English : 22 Set : 06 Hindi : 22 Set : 06

47. Which of the following arrangements 47. çِ٠ÃØßSÍæ¥æð ´ ×ð ´ âð ·¤æñ Ù çÎØð »Øð ÂÎæÍæð Z
represents the increasing order (smallest O22, S22, N32, P32 ·¤è ¥æØçÙ·¤ ç˜æ’Øæ¥æð´ ·ð¤
to largest) of ionic radii of the given species ÕɸÌð ·ý¤× (‹ØêÙÌ× âð ßëãžæ×) ·¤æð ÂýSÌéÌ ·¤ÚUÌè ãñ?
O22, S22, N32, P32 ?
(1) O22< N32< S22 < P32 (1) O22< N32< S22 < P32
(2) O22< P32< N32 < S22 (2) O22< P32< N32 < S22
(3) N32 < O22< P32 < S22 (3) N32 < O22< P32 < S22
(4) N32< S22< O22 < P32 (4) N32< S22< O22 < P32

48. Global warming is due to increase of : 48. â´âæçÚU·¤ ©žææÂÙ ·¤æ ·¤æÚU‡æ ãæðÌæ ãñ ßæØéׇÇUÜ ×ð´
ÕɸÙæ Ñ
(1) methane and nitrous oxide in (1) ×èÍðÙ ¥æñÚU Ùæ§ÅþUâ ¥æò€âæ§ÇU ·¤æÐ
atmosphere
(2) methane and CO2 in atmosphere (2) ×èÍðÙ ¥æñÚU CO2 ·¤æÐ
(3) methane and O3 in atmosphere (3) ×èÍðÙ ¥æñÚU O3 ·¤æÐ
(4) methane and CO in atmosphere (4) ×èÍðÙ ¥æñÚU CO ·¤æÐ

49. Hydrogen peroxide acts both as an 49. ãæ§ÇþUæðÁÙ ÂÚU¥æò€âæ§ÇU ¥Â¿æØ·¤ ÌÍæ ©Â¿æØ·¤ ÎæðÙæð´
oxidising and as a reducing agent Âý·¤æÚU âð ÃØßãæÚU ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ ¥æñÚU Øã çÙÖüÚU ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ
depending upon the nature of the reacting ¥çæç·ý¤Øæ ·¤ÚUÙð ßæÜð SÂèàæè$Á ·ð¤ SßæÖæß ÂÚUÐ çِÙ
species. In which of the following cases ×ð́ âð ç·¤â·ð¤ âæÍ H2O2 ¥ÜèØ ×æŠØ× ×ð́ ¥Â¿æØ·¤
H 2 O 2 acts as a reducing agent in acid ·ð¤ M¤Â ×ð´ ç·ý¤Øæ ·¤ÚUÌæ ãñ?
medium ?
(1) MnO42 (1) MnO42
22 22
(2) Cr2 O 7 (2) Cr2 O 7
22 22
(3) SO 3 (3) SO 3
(4) KI (4) KI

English : 23 Set : 06 Hindi : 23 Set : 06

50. Which one of the following complexes will 50. çِ٠·¤æòŒÜð€âæð´ (â´·¤ÚUæð´) ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ ÎëàØ Âý·¤æàæ ·¤æð
most likely absorb visible light ? ¥ßàææðçáÌ ·¤ÚUÙð ·¤è âßæüçÏ·¤ â´ÖæßÙæ ÚU¹Ìæ ãñ?
(At nos. Sc521, Ti522, V523, Zn530) ( ÂÚU × æ‡æé ·ý ¤ ×æ´ · ¤ Sc521, Ti522, V523,
(1) [Sc(H2O)6]31 Zn530)
(2) [Ti (NH3)6 ]41 (1) [Sc(H2O)6]31
(3) [V(NH3)6]31 (2) [Ti (NH3)6]41
(4) [Zn(NH3)6]21 (3) [V(NH3)6]31
(4) [Zn(NH3)6]21

51. on mercuration-
51. ×ÚU€ØêÚðUàæÙ-¥×ÚU€ØêÚðUàæÙ ÂÚ
demercuration produces the major
U âð Âý挈æ ×éØ ç·ý¤ØæȤÜ
product :
ãæðÌæ ãñ Ñ
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(4)
(4)

52. In the Victor-Meyer’s test, the colour given

by 18, 28 and 38 alcohols are respectively : 52. ç߀ÅUÚU ×ðØÚU ·ð¤ ÂÚUèÿæ‡æ ç·ý¤Øæ ×ð´ 18, 28 ¥æñÚU 38 ·ð¤
(1) Red, colourless, blue °ðË·¤æðãæÜæð´ mæÚUæ çÎØæ Ú´U» ·ý¤×æÙéâæÚU ãæðÌæ ãñ Ñ
(2) Red, blue, colourless (1) ÜæÜ, Ú´U»ãèÙ, ÙèÜæ
(3) Colourless, red, blue (2) ÜæÜ, ÙèÜæ, Ú´U»ãèÙ
(4) Red, blue, violet (3) Ú´U»ãèÙ, ÜæÜ, ÙèÜæ
(4) ÜæÜ, ÙèÜæ, Áæ×Ùè

English : 24 Set : 06 Hindi : 24 Set : 06

53. Conversion of benzene diazonium chloride 53. Õñ‹$ÁèÙ ÇUæØæ$ÁæðçÙØ× €ÜæðÚUæ§ÇU ·¤æ €ÜæðÚUæð Õñ‹$ÁèÙ ×ð´
to chloro benzene is an example of which ÕÎÜÙæ §Ù×ð´ âð 緤⠥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤æ ©ÎæãÚU‡æ ãæðÌæ
of the following reactions ? ãñ?
(1) Claisen (1) €Üð$ÁÙ
(2) Friedel-craft (2) Èý¤èÇUÜ-·ý¤æ$$ÅU
(3) Sandmeyer (3) âñ´ÇU×æØÚU
(4) Wurtz (4) ßéÅ÷üU $Á
54. In the presence of peroxide, HCl and HI 54. ÂÚU¥æò€âæ§ÇU ·¤è ©ÂçSÍçÌ ×ð´ °ðË·¤èÙæð´ ·¤æð HCl ¥æñÚU
do not give anti-Markownikoff’s addition HI °ð‹ÅUè×æÚU·¤æðÙè·¤æȤ Øæð» Ùãè´ ÎðÌð €Øæð´ ç·¤ Ñ
to alkenes because :
(1) One of the steps is endothermic in (1) HCl ¥æñ Ú U HI ·ð ¤ âÕ‹Ï ×ð ´ °·¤ ¿ÚU ‡ æ
HCl and HI ª¤c×æàææðáè ãñÐ
(2) Both HCl and HI are strong acids (2) HCl ¥æñÚU HI ÎæðÙæð´, ÂýÕÜ ¥Ü ãñ´Ð
(3) HCl is oxidizing and the HI is (3) HCl ©Â¿æØ·¤ ¥æñÚU HI ¥Â¿æØ·¤ ãñÐ
reducing
(4) All the steps are exothermic in HCl (4) HCl ¥æñÚU HI ·ð¤ âÕ‹Ïæð´ ×ð´ âÖè ¿ÚU‡æ
and HI ª¤c×æÂýÎ ãñ´Ð

55. The major product obtained in the photo 55. 2- ×ðçÍ܎ØéÅðUÙ ·ð¤ Âý·¤æàæ mæÚUæ ©ˆÂýðçÚUÌ Õýæð×èÙðàæÙ ×ð´
catalysed bromination of 2-methylbutane ÕǸæ ç·ý¤ØæÈ¤Ü ãæðÌæ ãñ Ñ
is :
(1) 1-bromo-2-methylbutane (1) 1-Õýæð×æð-2-×ðçÍ܎ØéÅðUÙ
(2) 1-bromo-3-methylbutane (2) 1-Õýæð×æð-3-×ðçÍ܎ØéÅðUÙ
(3) 2-bromo-3-methylbutane (3) 2-Õýæð×æð-3-×ðçÍËæŽØéÅðUÙ
(4) 2-bromo-2-methylbutane (4) 2-Õýæð×æð-2-×ðçÍ܎ØéÅðUÙ

English : 25 Set : 06 Hindi : 25 Set : 06

56. Which of the following molecules has two 56. çِ٠¥‡æé¥æð´ ×ð´ âð 緤⠥‡æé ×ð´ Îæð çâ‚×æ (s) ¥æñÚU Îæð
sigma(s) and two pi(p) bonds ? Âæ§ü (p) ¥æÕ‹Ï ãæðÌð ãñ´?
(1) C 2H 4 (1) C2H 4
(2) N2F2 (2) N2F2
(3) C2H2Cl2 (3) C2H2Cl2
(4) HCN (4) HCN

57. Which one of the following acids does not 57. çِ٠¥Üæð´ ×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ Âý·¤æàæèØ â×æßØßÌæ Ùãè´
exhibit optical isomerism ? çιæÌæ?
(1) Lactic acid (1) Üñç€ÅU·¤ °ðçâÇU
(2) Tartaric acid (2) ÅUæÚUÅñUçÚU·¤ °çâÇU
(3) Maleic acid (3) ×ñÜè·¤ °çâÇU
(4) a-amino acids (4) a- °×æØÙæð´ °ðçâÇU
58. Aminoglycosides are usually used as : 58. ¥×æØÙæð‚Ü槷¤æðâæ§ÇUæð´ ·¤æð ÂýæØÑ çِ٠緤â Âý·¤æÚU
ÂýØæð» ç·¤Øæ ÁæÌæ ãñ?
(1) antibiotic (1) °ð‹ÅUè ÕæØæðçÅU·¤ M¤Â ×ð´ (ÂýçÌ Áñçß·¤)
(2) analgesic (2) °ðÙÜÁñçâ·¤ M¤Â ×ð´ (ÂèǸæ Ùæàæ·¤)
(3) hypnotic (3) çãÂÙæçÅU·¤ M¤Â ×ð´ (çÙÎýæ ÂýÎ)
(4) antifertility (4) °ð‹ÅUè ȤÚUçÅUçÜÅUè M¤Â ×ð´ (°ð‹ÅUè çÙáð¿·¤)

59. Which of the following will not show 59. §Ù×ð´ âð ·¤æñÙ ØêÅUæÚUæðÅðUàæÙ Ùãè´ çιæØð»æ?
mutarotation ?
(1) Maltose (1) ×æËÅUæð$Á
(2) Lactose (2) Üñ€ÅUæð$Á
(3) Glucose (3) ‚Üê·¤æð$Á
(4) Sucrose (4) âê·ý¤æð$Á

English : 26 Set : 06 Hindi : 26 Set : 06

60. Phthalic acid reacts with resorcinol in the 60. âæ‹Îý H 2SO4 ·¤è ©ÂçSÍçÌ ×ð ´ Íñ ç Ü·¤ °ð ç âÇU
presence of concentrated H2SO4 to give : çÚU$ÁæÚUâèÙæÜ âð ¥çÖç·ý¤Øæ ·¤ÚU ÎðÌæ ãñ Ñ
(1) Phenolphthalein (1) çȤÙæËȤÍðÜèÙ
(2) Alizarin (2) °ðçÜ$ÁðÚUèÙ
(3) Coumarin (3) ·é¤×ýèÙ
(4) Fluorescein (4) $ÜæðÚðUâèÙ

English : 27 Set : 06 Hindi : 27 Set : 06

 PART C — MATHEMATICS Öæ» C — »ç‡æÌ
61. A relation on the set A5{x : ?x? < 3, xeZ}, 61. â×é“æØ A5{x : ?x? < 3, xeZ}, Áãæ¡ Z Âê‡ææZ·¤æð´ ·¤æ
where Z is the set of integers is defined by â×é “ æØ ãñ , ÂÚU °·¤ â´ Õ ´ Ï R,
R5{(x, y) : y 5? x ? , x ≠2 1 }. Then the R5{(x, y) : y5?x?, x ≠2 1 } mæÚUæ ÂçÚUÖæçáÌ ãñÐ
number of elements in the power set of R Ìæð R ·ð¤ ƒææÌ â×é“æØ ×ð´ ¥ßØßæð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ ãñ Ñ
is :
(1) 32 (1) 32
(2) 16 (2) 16
(3) 8 (3) 8
(4) 64 (4) 64

62. Let z ¹ 2i be any complex number such 62. ×æÙæ z ¹ 2i ·¤æð§ü °ðâè âç×Ÿæ ⴁØæ ãñ ç·¤
z2 i z2 i
that
z1 i
is a purely imaginary number.
z1 i
°·¤ àæé h ·¤æËÂçÙ·¤ â´  Øæ ãñ , Ìæð
1 1
Then z1
z
is : z1
z
ãñ Ñ
(1) 0 (1) 0
(2) any non-zero real number other (2) 1 ·ð¤ ¥çÌçÚU€ˆæ ·¤æð§ü àæê‹ØðžæÚU ßæSÌçß·¤ ⴁØæÐ
than 1.
(3) any non-zero real number. (3) ·¤æð§ü àæê‹ØðžæÚU ßæSÌçß·¤ ⴁØæÐ
(4) a purely imaginary number. (4) °·¤ àæéh ·¤æËÂçÙ·¤ ⴁØæÐ

63. The sum of the roots of the equation, 63. â×è·¤ÚU ‡ æ x21?2x23?2450, ·ð ¤ ×ê Ü æð ´ ·¤æ
x21?2x23?2450, is : Øæð»È¤Ü ãñ Ñ
(1) 2 (1) 2
(2) 22 (2) 22
(3) 2 (3) 2
(4) 2 2 (4) 2 2

English : 28 Set : 06 Hindi : 28 Set : 06

64. If 64. ØçÎ
a2 b2 c2 a2 b2 c2 a2 b2 c2 a2 b2 c2
( a1l )2 ( b1l )2 )2
( c1l 5k l a b c , l ≠ 0, ( a1l )2 ( b1l )2 )2
( c1l 5k l a b c , l ≠ 0,
( a2l )2 ( b2l )2 ( c2l )2 1 1 1 ( a2l )2 ( b2l )2 ( c2l )2 1 1 1

then k is equal to : ãñ, Ìæð k ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ

(1) 4labc (1) 4labc
(2) 24labc (2) 24labc
(3) 4l2 (3) 4l2
(4) 24l2 (4) 24l2

y  y 
1 2 x 1 2 x
65. If A 5   and B 5  x  be such 65. ØçÎ A5   ÌÍæ B 5  x  °ðâð ãñ´ ç·¤
 3 21 2     
 1   3 21 2   1 

6  6 
that AB 5   , then : AB 5   , ãñ, Ìæð Ñ
8  8 
(1) y52x (1) y52x
(2) y522x (2) y522x
(3) y5x (3) y5x
(4) y52x (4) y52x

66. 8 - digit numbers are formed using the 66. ¥´·¤æð´ 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 4, 4 ·ð¤ ÂýØæð» âð, ¥æÆU ¥´·¤èØ
digits 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 4, 4. The number of ⴁØæ°¡ ÕÙæ§ü »§ü ãñд °ðâè ⴁØæ¥æð´ ·¤è ⴁØæ çÁÙ×ð´
such numbers in which the odd digits do çßá× ¥´·¤ çßá× SÍæÙæð´ ÂÚU Ù ¥æØð,´ ãñ Ñ
not occupy odd places, is :
(1) 160 (1) 160
(2) 120 (2) 120
(3) 60 (3) 60
(4) 48 (4) 48

English : 29 Set : 06 Hindi : 29 Set : 06

  x 55  x  55
67. If  2 1  is expanded in the ascending 67. ØçÎ 21  ·¤æ x ·¤è ¥æÚUæðãè ƒææÌæð´ ×ð´ ÂýâæÚU
 3  3
powers of x and the coefficients of powers ·¤ÚUÙð ÂÚU, ÂýâæÚU ×ð´ Îæð ·ý¤ç×·¤ ÂÎæð´ ×ð´ x ·¤è ƒææÌð´ â×æÙ
of x in two consecutive terms of the ãñ´, Ìæð Øã ÂÎ ã´ñ Ñ
expansion are equal, then these terms
are :
(1) 7th and 8th (1) 7 ßæ¡ ÌÍæ 8 ßæ¡
(2) 8th and 9th (2) 8 ßæ¡ ÌÍæ 9 ßæ¡
(3) 28th and 29th (3) 28 ßæ¡ ÌÍæ 29 ßæ¡
(4) 27th and 28th (4) 27 ßæ¡ ÌÍæ 28 ßæ¡

68. Let G be the geometric mean of two 68. ×æÙæ Îæð Ï٠ⴁØæ¥æð´ a ÌÍæ b ·¤æ »é‡ææðžæÚU ×æŠØ G ãñ
positive numbers a and b, and M be the 1 ÌÍæ 1
ÌÍæ ·¤æ â×æ‹ÌÚU ×æŠØ M ãñÐ ØçÎ
1 1 a b
arithmetic mean of 1 and . If : G is
a b M 1
: G 5 4 : 5 ãñ, Ìæð a : b ãæð â·¤Ìð ãñ´ Ñ
4 : 5, then a : b can be : M
(1) 1:4 (1) 1 : 4
(2) 1:2 (2) 1:2
(3) 2:3 (3) 2:3
(4) 3:4 (4) 3:4
69. The least positive integer n such that 69. ÏÙ Âê‡ææZ·¤ n ·¤æ ß㠋ØêÙÌ× ×æÙ çÁâ·ð¤ çÜØð
2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1
12 2 22........ 2 n21 < , is : 12 2 2 2........ 2 n21 < , ãñ, ãñ Ñ
3 3 3 100 3 3 3 100
(1) 4 (1) 4
(2) 5 (2) 5
(3) 6 (3) 6
(4) 7 (4) 7

English : 30 Set : 06 Hindi : 30 Set : 06

70. Let f, g : R®R be two functions defined by 70. ×æÙæ f, g : R®R Îæð ȤÜÙ ãñ´ Áæð
  1   1
x sin   , x ≠ 0 x sin   , x ≠ 0
f (x)5  x , and g ( x ) 5 x f ( x ) f (x)5  x , ±²Ë g ( x ) 5 x f ( x )
0 , x50 0 , x50
 
mæÚUæ ÂçÚUÖæçáÌ ãñ´ Ñ
Statement I : f is a continuous function at ·¤ÍÙ I : x50 ÂÚU f °·¤ âÌÌ È¤ÜÙ ãñÐ
x50. ·¤ÍÙ II : x50 ÂÚU g °·¤ ¥ß·¤ÜèØ È¤ÜÙ ãñÐ
Statement II : g is a differentiable function
at x50. (1) ·¤ÍÙ I ÌÍæ II ÎæðÙæð´ ¥âˆØ ãñ´Ð
(1) Both statements I and II are false. (2) ·¤ÍÙ I ÌÍæ II ÎæðÙæð´ âˆØ ãñ´Ð
(2) Both statements I and II are true. (3) ·¤ÍÙ I âˆØ ãñ, ·¤ÍÙ II ¥âˆØ ãñÐ
(3) Statement I is true, statement II is
false. (4) ·¤ÍÙ I ¥âˆØ ãñ, ·¤ÍÙ II âˆØ ãñÐ
(4) Statement I is false, statement II is
true. 1
1 71. ØçÎ f(x)5x22x15, x >
2
, ÌÍæ g(x) §â·¤æ
71. If f(x)5x22x15, x > , and g(x) is its
2 ÃØ鈷ý¤× ȤÜÙ ãñ, Ìæð g9(7) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
inverse function, then g9(7) equals : 1
(1) 2
1 3
(1) 2
3 1
1 (2)
13
(2)
13 1
1 (3)
3
(3)
3 1
(4) 2
1 13
(4) 2
13

English : 31 Set : 06 Hindi : 31 Set : 06

72. Let f and g be two differentiable functions 72. ×æÙæ R ÂÚU f ÌÍæ g Îæð °ðâð ¥ß·¤ÜÙèØ È¤ÜÙ ãñ ç·¤
on R such that f 9(x) > 0 and g9(x) < 0, for âÖè x e R ·ð¤ çÜ° f 9(x) > 0 ÌÍæ g9(x) < 0 ãñ, Ìæð
all x e R. Then for all x : âÖè x ·ð¤ çÜ° Ñ
(1) f(g(x)) > f (g(x21)) (1) f(g(x)) > f(g(x21))
(2) f(g(x)) > f (g(x11)) (2) f(g(x)) > f(g(x11))
(3) g(f(x)) > g (f(x21)) (3) g(f(x)) > g(f(x21))
(4) g(f(x)) < g (f(x11)) (4) g(f(x)) < g(f(x11))

5 73. ØçÎ âÖè x e R ·ð¤ çÜ°

If 11x41x55 ∑ ai ( 1 1 x ) , for all x in R,
i
73. 5
i50 11x41x55 ∑ ai ( 1 1 x )i ãñ, Ìæð a2 ãñ Ñ
then a2 is : i50
(1) 24 (1) 24
(2) 6 (2) 6
(3) 28 (3) 28
(4) 10 (4) 10

sin 2 x cos2 x sin 2 x cos 2 x

74. The integral ∫( 2
d x is 74. â×æ·¤Ü ∫ dx ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
3
sin x 1 cos 3
x) ( sin 3 x 1 cos3 x )2
equal to :
1 1
(1) 1c (1) 1c
( 1 1 cot x )
3 ( 1 1 cot 3 x )
1 1
(2) 2 1c (2) 2 1c
3 ( 1 1 tan 3 x ) 3 ( 1 1 tan 3 x )

sin 3 x sin 3 x
(3) 1c (3) 1c
( 1 1 cos3 x ) ( 1 1 cos3 x )
cos 3 x cos 3 x
(4) 2 1c (4) 2 1c
3 ( 1 1 sin 3 x ) 3 ( 1 1 sin 3 x )

English : 32 Set : 06 Hindi : 32 Set : 06

75. If [ ] denotes the greatest integer function, 75. ØçÎ [ ] °·¤ ×ãžæ× Âê ‡ ææZ · ¤èØ È¤ÜÙ ãñ , Ìæð
p p
then the integral ∫ 0 [ cos x ] d x is equal to : â×æ·¤Ü ∫ 0 [ cos x ] d x ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
p p
(1) (1)
2 2
(2) 0 (2) 0
(3) 21 (3) 21
p p
(4) 2 (4) 2
2 2

76. If for a continuous function f(x), 76. ØçÎ °·¤ âÌÌ È¤ÜÙ f(x) ·ð¤ çÜ°, âÖè
t t /2p ·ð¤ çÜ°
2 2
∫ ( f ( x ) 1 x)d x 5 p 2 t , for all t
2 2
2p
∫ ( f ( x ) 1 x)d x 5 p 2 t ãñ , Ìæð
2p
 p
t/2p, then f 2  is equal to :
 3  p
f 2 
 3
ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(1) p
(1) p p
(2)
p 2
(2)
2 p
(3)
p 3
(3)
3 p
(4)
p 6
(4)
6

English : 33 Set : 06 Hindi : 33 Set : 06

77. The general solution of the differential 77. ¥ß·¤Ü â×è·¤ÚU‡æ
dy dy
equation, sin 2x  2

tan x 2 y 5 0 , sin 2x  2

tan x 2 y 5 0 ·¤æ ÃØæ·¤
 dx   dx 
is : ãÜ ãñ Ñ
(1) y tan x 5x1c (1) y tan x 5x1c
(2) y cot x 5tan x1c (2) y cot x 5tan x1c
(3) y tan x 5cot x1c (3) y tan x 5cot x1c
(4) y cot x 5x1c (4) y cot x 5x1c
78. If a line intercepted between the coordinate 78. çÙÎðüàææ´·¤ ¥ÿææð´ ·ð¤ Õè¿ ¥´Ìѹ´çÇUÌ °·¤ ÚðU¹æ, °·¤
axes is trisected at a point A(4, 3), which çÕ´Îé A(4, 3) Áæð x- ¥ÿæ ·ð¤ Âæâ ãñ, ÂÚU Sæ×ç˜æÖæçÁÌ
is nearer to x-axis, then its equation is : ãæðÌè ãñ, Ìæð ©â·¤æ â×è·¤ÚU‡æ ãñ Ñ
(1) 4x23y57 (1) 4x23y57
(2) 3x12y518 (2) 3x12y518
(3) 3x18y536 (3) 3x18y536
(4) x13y513 (4) x13y513

79. If the three distinct lines x12ay1a50, 79. ØçÎ ÌèÙ çßçÖóæ Úð U ¹æ°¡ x12ay1a50,
x13by1b50 and x14ay1a50 are x13by1b50 ÌÍæ x14ay1a50 â´»æ×è ã´ñ,
concurrent, then the point (a, b) lies on a : Ìæð çÕ´Îé (a, b) °·¤ Ñ
(1) circle (1) ßëžæ ÂÚU çSÍÌ ãñ
(2) hyperbola (2) ¥çÌ ÂÚUßÜØ ÂÚU çSÍÌ ãñ
(3) straight line (3) âÚUÜ ÚðU¹æ ÂÚU çSÍÌ ãñ
(4) parabola (4) ÂÚUßÜØ ÂÚU çSÍÌ ãñ

English : 34 Set : 06 Hindi : 34 Set : 06

80. For the two circles x 2 1y 2 516 and 80. Îæð ßëžææð´ x21y2516 ÌÍæ x21y222y50, ·ð¤
x21y222y50, there is/are : çÜ° ãñ/ã´ñ Ñ
(1) one pair of common tangents (1) ©ÖØçÙcÆU SÂàæü ÚðU¹æ¥æð´ ·¤æ °·¤ Øé‚×Ð
(2) two pairs of common tangents (2) ©ÖØçÙcÆU SÂàæü ÚðU¹æ¥æð´ ·ð¤ Îæð Øé‚×Ð
(3) three common tangents (3) ÌèÙ ©ÖØçÙcÆU SÂàæü ÚðU¹æ°´Ð
(4) no common tangent (4) ·¤æð§ü ©ÖØçÙcÆU SÂàæü ÚðU¹æ Ùãè´Ð

81. Two tangents are drawn from a point 81. °·¤ çÕ´Îé (22, 21) âð °·¤ ß·ý¤ y254x ÂÚU Îæð
(22, 21) to the curve, y254x. If a is the SÂàæü ÚðU¹æ°¡ ¹è´¿è »§ü ãñ, ØçÎ ©Ù·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤æ ·¤æð‡æ a
angle between them, then ?tan a? is equal ãñ, Ìæð ?tan a? ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
to :
1 1
(1) (1)
3 3
1 1
(2) (2)
3 3
(3) 3 (3) 3
(4) 3 (4) 3
82. The minimum area of a triangle formed
x2 y2
by any tangent to the ellipse 82. Îèƒæüßëžæ 1 51 ÂÚU ¹è´¿è »§ü ç·¤âè SÂàæü
16 81
x2 y2 ÚðU¹æ ÌÍæ çÙÎðüàææ´·¤ ¥ÿææð´ mæÚUæ ÕÙè ç˜æÖéÁ ·¤æ ‹ØêÙÌ×
1 5 1 and the co-ordinate axes
16 81 ÿæð˜æÈ¤Ü ãñ Ñ
is :
(1) 12 (1) 12
(2) 18 (2) 18
(3) 26 (3) 26
(4) 36 (4) 36

English : 35 Set : 06 Hindi : 35 Set : 06

83. A symmetrical form of the line of 83. â×ÌÜæð´ x5ay1b ÌÍæ z5cy1d ·¤è Âýç̑ÀðUÎè
intersection of the planes x5ay1b and ÚðU¹æ ·¤æ â×ç×Ì M¤Â ãñ Ñ
z5cy1d is :
x2b y 21 z2d x2b y 21 z2d
(1) 5 5 (1) 5 5
a 1 c a 1 c
x 2 b2 a y 21 z 2 d2 c x 2 b2 a y 21 z 2 d2 c
(2) 5 5 (2) 5 5
a 1 c a 1 c
x2a y 20 z2c x2a y 20 z2c
(3) 5 5 (3) 5 5
b 1 d b 1 d
x 2 b2 a y 21 z 2 d2 c x 2 b2 a y 21 z 2 d2 c
(4) 5 5 (4) 5 5
b 0 d b 0 d

84. If the distance between planes, 84. ØçÎ â×ÌÜæð ´ 4x22y24z1150 ÌÍæ
4x22y24z1150 and 4x22y24z1d50 ·ð¤ Õè¿ ·¤è ÎêÚUè 7, Ìæð d ãñ Ñ
4x22y24z1d50 is 7, then d is :
(1) 41 or 242 (1) 41 ¥Íßæ 242
(2) 42 or 243 (2) 42 ¥Íßæ 243
(3) 241 or 43 (3) 241 ¥Íßæ 43
(4) 242 or 44 (4) 242 ¥Íßæ 44
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
85. If x , y and z are three unit vectors in 85. ØçÎ ç˜æ-çß×èØ ¥æ·¤æàæ ×ð´ x, y ÌÍæ z ÌèÙ ×æ˜æ·¤
three-dimensional space, then the ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
âçÎàæ ãñ´, Ìæð ?x 1 y?2 1 ?y 1 z?2 1 ?z 1 x?2
minimum value of
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ·¤æ ‹ØêÙÌ× ×æÙ ãñ Ñ
?x 1 y?2 1 ?y 1 z?2 1 ?z 1 x?2 is :
3 3
(1) (1)
2 2
(2) 3 (2) 3
(3) 3 3 (3) 3 3
(4) 6 (4) 6

English : 36 Set : 06 Hindi : 36 Set : 06

86. Let X and M.D. be the mean and the mean 86. ×æÙæ n Âýðÿæ‡ææð´ xi, i51, 2, ....., n ·¤æ ×æŠØ X ÌÍæ
deviation about X of n observations X ·ð¤ âæÂðÿæ ©Ù·¤æ ×æŠØ çß¿ÜÙ M.D. ãñÐ ØçÎ
xi, i51, 2, ....., n. If each of the observations ÂýˆØð·¤ Âýðÿæ‡æ ×ð´ 5 Õɸæ çÎØæ Áæ° Ìæð ÙØæ ×æŠØ ÌÍæ
is increased by 5, then the new mean and ‹æØð ×æŠØ ·ð¤ âæÂðÿæ ©Ù·¤æ ×æŠØ çß¿ÜÙ ·ý¤×àæÑ ãñ Ñ
the mean deviation about the new mean,
respectively, are :
(1) X , M.D. (1) X , M.D.
(2) X 15, M.D. (2) X 15, M.D.
(3) X , M.D.15 (3) X , M.D.15
(4) X 15, M.D.15 (4) X 15, M.D.15

87. A number x is chosen at random from the 87. â×é“æØ {1, 2, 3, 4, ....., 100} ×ð´ âð °·¤ ⴁØæ x
set {1, 2, 3, 4, ....., 100}. Define the ØæÎë‘ÀUØæ ¿éÙè »§üÐ ƒæÅUÙæ A ·¤æð ÂçÚUÖæçáÌ ·¤èçÁ° Ñ
event : A5 the chosen number x satisfies A5 ¿éÙè »§ü ⴁØæ x

( x 2 10) ( x 2 50) ( x 2 10) ( x 2 50)

/0 /0 ·¤æð â´ÌécÅ ·¤ÚUÌè ãñÐ
( x 2 30) ( x 2 30)

Then P(A) is : Ìæð P(A) ãñ Ñ

(1) 0.71 (1) 0.71
(2) 0.70 (2) 0.70
(3) 0.51 (3) 0.51
(4) 0.20 (4) 0.20

English : 37 Set : 06 Hindi : 37 Set : 06

88. Statement I : The equation 88. ·¤ÍÙ I: â×è·¤ÚU‡æ
(sin 21 x) 3 1(cos 21 x) 3 2ap 3 50 has a (sin21x)31(cos21x)32ap350 ·¤æ âÖè
solution for all a/ 1 . a/
1
·ð¤ çÜ° °·¤ ãÜ ãñÐ
32 32
Statement II : For any x e R, ·¤ÍÙ II : ç·¤âè xeR ·ð¤ çÜ°
p p
sin21x1cos21x5
2
and sin21x1cos21x5
2
ÌÍæ

 21 p 2 9p2  21 p 2 9p2
0 [  sin x2  [ . 0 [  sin x2  [ .
 4 16  4 16
(1) Both statements I and II are true. (1) ·¤ÍÙ I ÌÍæ II ÎæðÙæð´ âˆØ ãñ´Ð
(2) Both statements I and II are false. (2) ·¤ÍÙ I ÌÍæ II ÎæðÙæð´ ¥âˆØ ãñ´Ð
(3) Statement I is true and (3) ·¤ÍÙ I âˆØ ãñ ÌÍæ ·¤ÍÙ II ¥âˆØ ãñÐ
statement II is false.
(4) Statement I is false and (4) ·¤ÍÙ I ¥SæˆØ ãñ, ÌÍæ ·¤ÍÙ II âˆØ ãñÐ
statement II is true.

1 cos u 1 1 cos u 1
89. If f (u) 5 2sin u 1 2cos u and 89. ØçÎ f (u) 5 2sin u 1 2cos u ãñ,
21 sin u 1 21 sin u 1

A and B are respectively the maximum and ÌÍæ A ÌÍæ B ·ý¤×àæÑ f (u) ·ð¤ ¥çÏ·¤Ì× ÌÍæ
the minimum values of f (u), then ‹ØêÙÌ× ×æÙ ãñ´, Ìæð (A, B) ÕÚUæÕÚU ãñ Ñ
(A, B) is equal to :
(1) (3, 21)
(2) (4, 22 2 ) (1) (3, 21)

(3) ( 21 2, 22 2) (2) (4, 22 2 )

(4) ( 21 2 , 21 )
(3) ( 21 2, 22 2)
(4) ( 21 2 , 21 )

English : 38 Set : 06 Hindi : 38 Set : 06

90. Let p, q, r denote arbitrary statements. Then 90. ×æÙæ Sßð ‘ ÀU ·¤ÍÙ Îàææü Ì ð ãñ ´ Ð ·¤ÍÙ
p, q, r
the logically equivalent of the p Þ (q Ú r) ·¤æ Ìæç·ü¤·¤ â×ÌéËØ ãñ Ñ
statement p Þ (q Ú r) is :
(1) (p Ú q) Þ r (1) (p Ú q) Þ r
(2) (p Þ q) Ú (p Þ r) (2) (p Þ q) Ú (p Þ r)
(3) (p Þ ~q) Ù (p Þ r) (3) (p Þ ~q) Ù (p Þ r)
(4) (p Þ q) Ù (p Þ ~r) (4) (p Þ q) Ù (p Þ ~r)

-o0o- -o0o-

English : 39 Set : 06 Hindi : 39 Set : 06

 JEE Main 2014 Answer key Paper 1 Offline and Online (All Answer keys)
ANSWER KEY PAPER - 1 JEE (MAIN) - 2014

QUESTION 06/04/2014 06/04/2014 06/04/2014 06/04/2014 09/04/2014 11/04/2014 12/04/2014 19/04/2014

NO. SET E SET F SET G Book H

1. 1 4 2 3 2 3 2 1
2. 3 4 2 4 3 3 3 1
3. 2 4 3 1 2 1 4 4
4. 1 1 3 3 3 2 2 4
5. 3 3 1 3 3 2 4 3
6. 3 1 1 2 4 4 1 2
7. 4 4 4 3 3 1 2 *
8. 1 1 4 4 3 1 3 3
9. 3 2 1 2 3 2 2 1
10. 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 4
11. 3 1 3 2 1 2 2 3
12. 4 4 3 1 1 3 2 1
13. 1 3 2 3 2 2 1 4
14. 4 3 3 1 1 1 4 3
15. 3 2 2 1 1 4 2 2
16. 3 4 1 4 3 2 2 1
17. 1 1 3 2 4 3 3 4
18. 3 4 3 1 3 3 2 3
19. 2 1 3 4 4 1 3 2
20. 3 3 4 1 1 2 2 2
21. 3 3 3 1 3 1 2 1
22. 3 1 3 1 4 3 2 3
23. 2 2 3 4 4 4 1 3
24. 2 2 2 1 2 4 3 3
25. 4 4 2 4 4 1 2 3
26. 2 4 4 3 4 3 2 2
27. 3 1 4 1 2 2 2 3
28. 1 4 4 3 1 3 4 1
29. 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
30. 2 1 4 1 1 4 4 2
31. 1 1 4 1 4 3 4 4
32. 2 2 4 4 1 4 1 2
33. 3 2 4 1 3 4 4 2
34. 2 1 2 4 4 4 2 3
35. 1 3 4 2 2 2 2 2
36. 1 2 2 4 3 4 3 4
37. 3 3 4 4 3 2 2 2
38. 1 2 3 1 3 1 2 1
 ANSWER KEY PAPER - 1 JEE (MAIN) - 2014

QUESTION 06/04/2014 06/04/2014 06/04/2014 06/04/2014 09/04/2014 11/04/2014 12/04/2014 19/04/2014

NO. SET E SET F SET G Book H

39. 2 4 2 2 4 2 3 3
40. 4 2 4 2 3 1 3 4
41. 3 1 1 2 2 3 4 3
42. 2 1 4 4 3 3 3 2
43. 2 3 2 3 2 4 4 2
44. 1 3 2 4 3 2 2 3
45. 4 2 4 4 1 4 4 2
46. 2 1 3 3 2 2 4 2
47. 2 1 1 4 2 3 1 1
48. 1 1 3 1 2 2 2 4
49. 4 4 4 4 3 3 1 4
50. 2 4 3 1 1 2 3 4
51. 2 1 1 3 4 4 1 4
52. 4 1 1 2 3 3 2 4
53. 4 1 3 4 2 1 3 2
54. 3 4 2 4 1 3 1 3
55. 1 4 4 3 2 2 4 2
56. 1 1 2 4 2 3 4 3
57. 4 4 4 3 4 3 3 4
58. 1 2 4 1 2 3 1 4
59. 1 3 3 1 3 3 4 3
60. 3 1 1 3 2 3 4 2
61. 2 4 2 3 4 3 2 4
62. 4 2 2 4 4 1 3 2
63. 3 1 2 4 2 2 3 1
64. 2 2 2 3 1 1 3 2
65. 1 2 2 1 2 4 1 4
66. 4 1 3 3 1 4 2 2
67. 2 1 4 2 3 4 2 2
68. 1 4 3 4 2 3 1 2
69. 2 2 3 4 3 2 3 4
70. 2 1 4 4 1 4 2 4
71. 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
72. 2 4 2 4 4 3 2 4
73. 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 3
74. 4 3 4 3 2 3 2 2
75. 2 4 1 2 2 1 4 4
76. 3 3 1 4 3 3 1 1
 ANSWER KEY PAPER - 1 JEE (MAIN) - 2014

QUESTION 06/04/2014 06/04/2014 06/04/2014 06/04/2014 09/04/2014 11/04/2014 12/04/2014 19/04/2014

NO. SET E SET F SET G Book H

77. 3 2 1 4 2 4 4 3
78. 4 2 3 2 3 2 2 4
79. 1 3 3 2 3 2 3 2
80. 1 2 3 2 4 2 4 1
81. 2 1 4 3 4 3 4 1
82. 3 4 3 3 1 4 4 1
83. 3 4 3 3 3 3 2 2
84. 3 3 1 1 3 2 3 3
85. 2 4 2 3 3 4 2 3
86. 1 1 4 4 1 2 2 1
87. 4 2 2 3 4 2 1 2
88. 2 2 2 1 3 2 4 3
89. 2 2 3 3 2 1 3 3
90. 3 2 1 2 2 3 2 3

Note :- * denotes that the question is dropped.